FE the STACK type User's manual

User's Manual
User's Manual
For the STACK type
3
Stack Type Edition
24A7-E-0018d
High Performance Vector Control Inverter
User's Manual
(Stack Type Edition)
Revision
History
Revision
Symbol
Year and Month
of Change
Description
First
Edition

2013-03

Second
Edition
a
2016-03
1. Inverters
• 400V series → 630kW to 800kW units added (external views, etc.)
• 690V series added → 90kW to 450kW
2. Converters (diode rectifiers)
• 690V series added.
3. Converters (PMW converters)
• 400V series → 630kW to 800kW units added (external views, etc.)
4. Filter stacks
• 400V series added.
5. Other
• Content renewed (addition of sections added at later date, etc.)
Third
Edition
b
2017-03
1. Converters (PMW converters)
• 690V series added.
2. Converters (filter stacks)
• 690V series added.
3. Other
• Content renewed (addition of sections added at later date, etc.)
4th
Edition
c
2019-02
Content renewed.
5th
Edition
d
2019-07
Content renewed.
Copyright © 2019 Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
All rights reserved.
The copyright of this manual belongs to Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or copied without prior written permission from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, U.S.A. Other products and
company names mentioned in this manual are trademarks or registered trademarks of the respective holders.
The information contained herein is subject to change for improvement without prior notice.
The information in this manual is correct at the time of publication. However, if concerns arise or if mistakes are found,
please contact the retailing store of purchase or a sales office of Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. listed at the end of this document.
Preface
This manual describes information on the installation of FRENIC-VG series stack type inverters and converters and the
selection of peripheral devices, with specialization in hardware. Please refer to the separate volume user's manual for
operation methods such as function setup.
Please read this manual thoroughly for correct operation. Improper handling may result in prevention of normal operation,
decrease of service life, or cause of failure.
The table below lists other materials related to the use of the FRENIC-VG series. Read them in conjunction with this
manual as necessary.
Name
Unit Type Function Code Edition
User's Manual
Description
24A1--0002*
(Formerly MH659)
Catalog
Instruction Manual
Material Number
Product overview, features, specifications, external
dimensions, options, etc.
24A7--0019*
(Formerly MHT286)
1) Description of function codes, keypad operating
instructions, etc. for the FRENIC-VG series (unit
type/stack type)
2) Overview of the FRENIC-VG unit type, features,
specifications, replacement documentation, etc.
Functional description of various option cards for the
FRENIC-VG series, the RS-485, etc.
24A7--0045*
* For information on the functional safety option
(Formerly MHT286)
(OPC-VG1-SAFE), refer to the manual of the option
card. The functions and other aspects of other options
are described in this manual.
Option Edition
Stack Type Edition (this manual) 24A7--0018*
Features, specifications, cabinet design materials, etc.
for the FRENIC-VG stack type inverters and converters
UPAC Option Edition
24A7--0044*
UPAC option card specifications, description of the
interface between the inverter and UPAC, description of
application package software (orientation, dancer type
winder), etc.
FRENIC-VG stack type (400V)
INR-SI47-1721*-
FRENIC-VG stack type (690V)
INR-SI47-1841*-
RHD-D stack type (400V)
INR-SI47-1786*-
RHD-D stack type (690V)
INR-SI47-1852*-
RHC-D stack type (400V)
INR-SI47-1722*-
RHC-D stack type (690V)
INR-SI47-1944*-
RHF-D stack type (400V)
INR-SI47-1770*-
RHF-D stack type (690V)
INR-SI47-1945*-
FRENIC-VG
Loader Instruction
Manual
Inspection upon delivery, installation and wiring of the
product, keypad operating instructions, troubleshooting,
maintenance and inspection, specifications, etc.
WPS-VG1-STR
INR-SI47-1588*-
Instructions for use of the inverter support loader
software, FRENIC-VG Loader (free-of-charge version)
WPS-VG1-PCL
INR-SI47-1616*-
Instructions for use of FRENIC-VG Loader (paid version)
Includes tracing functions in addition to all the functions
of the free-of-charge version (WPS-VG1-STR).
Note 1) Placeholders "" appearing in material numbers in the table above will be replaced with symbols such as J
(Japanese), E (English), C (Chinese).
Asterisks (*) appearing in material numbers will be replaced with a revision number (a, b, c...).
Note 2) The materials are subject to change without notice. Be sure to obtain the latest editions before use.
Correspondence Method to "Guideline on Measures to Suppress Harmonics for Users Serviced by High Voltage or
Special High Voltage" (General Purpose Inverters)
For more information, refer to Appendix 7 of this manual.
1
Structure of this manual
This manual is structured as follows.
Chapter 1
Overview
This chapter describes the overview, features and the control system of the FRENIC-VG stack type inverter and the
recommended configuration for the inverter and peripheral devices.
Chapter 2
Specifications
Rated output, control method, product overview, specifications for the specialized motor, protective function details,
basic connection diagrams, and terminal functions of the FRENIC-VG are described. Additionally, descriptions for the
operating environment, storage environment, product quality assurance, precautions for use, external dimensions,
examples of basic connections, and protective function details are provided.
Chapter 3
Transportation and Storage
Descriptions of the transportation method for the FRENIC-VG, converter stack and the cabinet, the FRENIC-VG name
plate, storage environment, and storage method are provided.
Chapter 4
Installation and Wiring
Cabinet construction design documents and wiring specifications, conditions and precautions for the selection of
electrical lines and crimped terminals are described for installation the FRENIC-VG and converter on the cabinet.
Chapter 5
Peripherals
The purpose of peripheral devices and options, connection configuration, and precautions for the FRENIC-VG are
described.
Chapter 6
Converter System
The specifications, protective function details, and basic connection diagrams are described for the PWM converter
(RHC-D series), which is the converter providing input to FRENIC-VG, and for the diode rectifier (RHD-D series).
Additionally, the selection method for the peripheral devices and electrical wiring sizes for the converters are described.
Lastly, the resistance regenerative braking unit and the braking resistance are described.
Chapter 7
EMC Compatible Peripherals
Introduction and operation of devices with noise countermeasures as well as noise countermeasures are described.
Chapter 8
Operation
Provides references to the operating method for the FRENIC-VG described in the separate volume, "FRENIC-VG unit
Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
Chapter 9
Selecting Model
The selection method for the motor and inverter capacities is described. The inverter output torque characteristics
required when selecting the capacity, the procedure for capacity selection, and the equation for capacity selection are
described. In addition, the braking resistor selection needed in choosing the capacity, MD/LD specification selection, and
the control method selection methods are shown.
Lastly, function setup, connection configuration, and reduced unit operation are explained for the case of direct parallel
connection control method.
Chapter 10
Maintenance and Inspection
The daily inspection, periodic inspection, and periodic part replacement for using the inverter in the long term are
described. In addition, the maintenance for the air filter used in the cabinet is explained.
Chapter 11
Troubleshooting
The troubleshooting procedures for inverter malfunctions, alarms, and minor failures are described.
The content guides the user to the individual troubleshooting steps after determining the event as an alarm or a failure
based on the displayed content.
Chapter 12
Cabinet Construction
Introduction of the protection level and the cooling method selection matching the installation environment of the cabinet
housing the inverter are provided.
Appendix
The guidelines concerning safety in Japan, overview of JEM standards, harmonics guideline, and case studies of
inverter noise countermeasures are shown.
2
CONTENTS
Chapter 1
1.1
Overview
Product introduction ......................................................................................................................1-1
1.2
Features .......................................................................................................................................1-3
1.2.1
1.2.1.1
Control method ··························································································· 1-3
1.2.1.2
Product arrangement and easier change ·························································· 1-3
1.2.1.3
Ratings for intended use ··············································································· 1-3
1.2.1.4
Style designed specifically for installation in a panel ············································ 1-4
1.2.1.5
How to expand the capacity range of the inverters ·············································· 1-5
1.2.1.6
How to expand the total capacity of the converter ··············································· 1-6
1.2.1.7
A wide range of options ················································································· 1-7
1.2.2
Upgraded PC loader functions ········································································ 1-8
1.2.2.2
Multifunctional Keypad ·················································································· 1-8
1.2.2.3
More reliable functions ·················································································· 1-9
1.2.2.4
Easy change of the cooling fan ······································································· 1-9
1.2.2.5
Components with a longer service life ······························································ 1-9
1.2.2.6
Enhanced lifetime alarm ················································································ 1-9
1.2.2.7
Useful functions for test run and adjustment ···················································· 1-10
1.2.2.8
Easy wiring (removable control terminal block)················································· 1-10
Conforms to safety standards ······································································· 1-10
1.2.3.2
Enhanced environmental resistance ······························································ 1-10
1.2.3.3
RoHS directive compliance ·········································································· 1-11
Functional compatibility with previous models .................................................................... 1-11
Control method ...........................................................................................................................1-12
1.3.1
Chapter 2
Features and applications of control methods ....................................................................1-12
1.3.1.1
Open-loop speed control ············································································· 1-12
1.3.1.2
Closed-loop speed control ··········································································· 1-13
Specifications
Standard specifications.................................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1
Single-drive system...............................................................................................................2-1
2.1.1.1
MD spec (for medium overloads) ···································································· 2-1
2.1.1.2
LD spec (for light overloads) ·········································································· 2-2
2.1.2
2.2
Adaptation to environment and safety ................................................................................1-10
1.2.3.1
1.2.4
2.1
Easier maintenance and greater reliability ............................................................................1-8
1.2.2.1
1.2.3
1.3
A wide range of applications .................................................................................................1-3
Multi-drive system .................................................................................................................2-4
2.1.2.1
MD spec (for medium overloads) ···································································· 2-4
2.1.2.2
LD spec (for light overloads) ·········································································· 2-6
Common specifications.................................................................................................................2-8
2.2.1
Installation environment and conformity with standards .......................................................2-8
2.2.2
Control methods ...................................................................................................................2-9
2.2.3
Control performance ...........................................................................................................2-10
2.2.4
Control functions ................................................................................................................. 2-11
3
2.2.5
Configuration/display functions .......................................................................................... 2-13
2.2.6
Protective functions ............................................................................................................ 2-15
2.3
Motor specifications ................................................................................................................... 2-19
2.3.1
2.3.1.1
Standard specifications for three-phase 400V series·········································· 2-19
2.3.1.2
Common specifications ··············································································· 2-19
2.3.1.3
External dimensions of dedicated motors ························································ 2-20
2.3.2
2.4
Dedicated motor specifications (synchronous motor with a sensor)................................... 2-21
2.3.2.1
Standard specifications for three-phase 400V series·········································· 2-21
2.3.2.2
Common specifications ··············································································· 2-21
2.3.2.3
External dimensions of dedicated motors ························································ 2-22
2.3.2.4
Exclusive cables for inverter connection ·························································· 2-23
Connection diagrams and terminal functions ............................................................................. 2-25
2.4.1
Standard stack ·························································································· 2-25
2.4.1.2
Phase-specific stack ··················································································· 2-27
Terminal functions .............................................................................................................. 2-28
2.4.2.1
Terminal functions ······················································································ 2-28
2.4.2.2
Setting up the slide switches········································································· 2-33
2.4.3
2.5
Connection diagrams ......................................................................................................... 2-25
2.4.1.1
2.4.2
Multi-drive system connection diagrams ............................................................................ 2-35
2.4.3.1
Direct parallel connection ············································································· 2-35
2.4.3.2
Multiwinding motor drive ·············································································· 2-37
External dimensions................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.5.1
2.6
List of the FRENIC-VG's external dimensions.................................................................... 2-39
2.5.1.1
Figure A (1-frame size: FRN30SVG1S-4 to 45SVG1S-4) ······························· 2-40
2.5.1.2
Figure B (2-frame size: FRN55SVG1S-4 to 110SVG1S-4) ····························· 2-41
2.5.1.3
Figure C (3-frame size: FRN132SVG1S-4 to 200SVG1S-4,
FRN132SVG1S-69 to FRN200SVG1S-69) ················································· 2-42
2.5.1.4
Figure D (4-frame size: FRN220SVG1S-4 to 315SVG1S-4,
FRN250SVG1S-69 to FRN450SVG1S-69) ················································· 2-43
2.5.1.5
Figure E (4-frame size: FRN630BVG1S-4 to 800BVG1S-4) ··························· 2-44
2.5.1.6
Figure F (2-frame size: FRN90SVG1S-69 to 110SVG1S-69) ·························· 2-45
Generated loss........................................................................................................................... 2-46
Chapter 3
3.1
Dedicated motor specifications (induction motor with a sensor) ........................................ 2-19
Transportation and Storage
Transportation .............................................................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.1
Transportation in packed state ............................................................................................. 3-1
3.1.2
Transportation in unpacked state ......................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2.1
Transportation ·····························································································3-1
3.1.2.2
General caution ···························································································3-2
3.1.2.3
Work procedure for lifting by crane···································································3-3
3.1.3
Transportation after assembling the product into a cabinet .................................................. 3-5
3.1.3.1
Crane operation ···························································································3-5
3.1.3.2
Transportation on rollers ················································································3-6
3.2
Check before use ......................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3
External views .............................................................................................................................. 3-8
3.3.1
Overall external views .......................................................................................................... 3-8
4
3.3.2
3.4
3.4.1
Transportation / temporary storage .....................................................................................3-13
3.4.2
Long-term storage ..............................................................................................................3-13
Chapter 4
4.1
4.2
Installation and Wiring
Precautions for installation............................................................................................................4-1
4.1.1
Installation environment ........................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2
Required ventilation ..............................................................................................................4-2
4.1.3
Installation direction and spacing to surroundings ................................................................ 4-3
4.1.4
Stack derating by ambient temperature ................................................................................4-4
Installation ....................................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.1
Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW)····················· 4-6
4.2.1.2
Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V: 132 to 200 kW) ································ 4-11
4.2.1.3
Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW) ································ 4-14
Installing stacks in cabinets ................................................................................................ 4-23
4.2.2.1
Precautions ······························································································ 4-23
4.2.2.2
Procedure for removing and attaching the front cover ········································ 4-25
4.2.2.3
Installing Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW) ······ 4-26
4.2.2.4
Installing Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) ·· 4-28
4.2.2.5
Connecting output terminals of Frame 3 and 4 size stacks
(400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) ··················································· 4-31
4.2.3
4.4
Fixation points and terminal positions ...................................................................................4-6
4.2.1.1
4.2.2
4.3
Warning plate and warning label .........................................................................................3-12
Environment for transportation / temporary storage....................................................................3-13
Connecting DC bus bars .....................................................................................................4-33
4.2.3.1
Connecting bus bars for Frame 1 to 3 size stacks
(400V: 30 to 200 kW, 690V: 90 to 200 kW) ······················································ 4-33
4.2.3.2
Connecting bus bars for Frame 4 size
(400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW) ··················································· 4-33
Basic configuration of cabinets ...................................................................................................4-34
4.3.1
Appearance of cabinets ......................................................................................................4-34
4.3.2
Internal layouts of cabinets .................................................................................................4-35
4.3.2.1
Internal layout for Frame 1 size (400V: 30 to 45 kW) ········································· 4-35
4.3.2.2
Internal layout for Frame 2 size (400V: 55 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW) ············ 4-36
4.3.2.3
Internal layout for Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V:
132 to 200 kW) ······ 4-37
4.3.2.4
Internal layout for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V:
250 to 450 kW) ······ 4-38
Bus bars .....................................................................................................................................4-40
4.4.1
Materials and surface treatment of bus bars .......................................................................4-40
4.4.2
Connection of bus bars (sizes of holes in bus bars, drilling pitches) ...................................4-40
4.4.3
Connection methods and tightening torques.......................................................................4-41
4.4.3.1
4.5
Rated current of Cu bus bars ······································································· 4-42
Main circuit wires ........................................................................................................................4-44
4.5.1
Wire selection criteria..........................................................................................................4-44
4.5.1.1
Overcurrent protectors and protection coordination ··········································· 4-44
4.5.1.2
Voltage drop ····························································································· 4-47
4.5.2
Recommended wire size.....................................................................................................4-47
4.5.2.1
3-phase 400V series (MD spec) ···································································· 4-47
4.5.2.2
3-phase 400V series (LD spec)····································································· 4-49
5
4.5.2.3
4.5.3
4.6
Control circuit ............................................................................................................................. 4-56
4.6.1
Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes ........................................................... 4-56
4.6.2
Control terminal layout ....................................................................................................... 4-56
4.6.3
Control wire routes ............................................................................................................. 4-57
4.6.4
DCF disconnection detection circuit wiring route ............................................................... 4-58
4.6.5
Wiring between phase-specific stacks ............................................................................... 4-59
4.7
Mounting and connecting the keypad ........................................................................................ 4-61
4.7.1
Parts required for mounting and connecting the keypad .................................................... 4-61
4.7.2
Installation procedure ......................................................................................................... 4-62
4.8
4.7.2.1
How to mount and remove the keypad on/from the inverter ································· 4-62
4.7.2.2
Mounting the keypad on the door of the cabinet ················································ 4-62
4.7.2.3
External dimensions of the keypad································································· 4-63
Connecting FRENIC-VG Loader ................................................................................................ 4-64
4.8.1
Connecting a USB.............................................................................................................. 4-64
4.8.2
Using the RS-485 communications ports ........................................................................... 4-65
4.8.2.1
Terminal specifications of the RS-485 communications ports ······························· 4-65
4.8.2.2
RS-485 converter ······················································································· 4-65
4.8.2.3
Cables ····································································································· 4-66
4.8.3
4.9
4.9.1
Feature............................................................................................................................... 4-68
4.9.2
Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 4-69
4.9.3
Securing the Lifter .............................................................................................................. 4-69
Chapter 5
4.9.3.1
Lifter securing fixture (for SA430288-01_ LFT-VG1) ·········································· 4-69
4.9.3.2
Lifter securing fixture (for SA433892-01_ LFT-RHF45) ······································· 4-70
Lifter external dimensions .................................................................................................. 4-71
4.9.4.1
LFT-VG1 external dimensions······································································· 4-71
4.9.4.2
LFT-RHF450 external dimensions ································································· 4-72
Peripherals
Precautions for use ...................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1
5.2
Noise reduction .................................................................................................................. 4-67
Dedicated lifter for stacks ........................................................................................................... 4-68
4.9.4
5.1
3-phase 690V series (MD/LD spec)································································ 4-50
Wiring of main circuit and grounding terminals .................................................................. 4-52
Precautions in connecting main circuit peripherals .............................................................. 5-1
5.1.1.1
Fuses ········································································································5-1
5.1.1.2
Breakers/disconnectors (Molded Case Circuit Breaker: MCCB,
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker: ELCB) ······························································5-1
5.1.1.3
Initial charging circuit ····················································································5-1
5.1.1.4
Contactor (magnetic contactor) ·······································································5-1
5.1.1.5
Motor overload protection ··············································································5-1
5.1.2
Precautions for phase advancing capacitors........................................................................ 5-1
5.1.3
Precautions for connecting control circuit instruments ......................................................... 5-1
5.1.4
Precautions for using synchronous motors .......................................................................... 5-2
Selection of peripherals ............................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.1
Main circuit ........................................................................................................................... 5-3
5.2.1.1
5.2.2
Fuses ········································································································5-3
Disconnectors and molded case circuit breakers for wiring (MCCB) ................................... 5-7
6
5.3
5.2.2.1
Contactor (magnetic contactor) ······································································· 5-9
5.2.2.2
Initial charging circuit ·················································································· 5-10
5.2.2.3
Thermal relays ·························································································· 5-12
5.2.2.4
Output transformer ····················································································· 5-13
5.2.2.5
Main circuit monitoring instrument ································································· 5-13
Control circuit .............................................................................................................................. 5-14
5.3.1
5.3.1.1
Procedures for installing/replacing the battery ·················································· 5-14
5.3.1.2
Overseas and aerial transportation of battery (lithium metal battery) ····················· 5-15
5.3.2
5.4
Backup battery ....................................................................................................................5-14
PG amplifier (insulating converter) ......................................................................................5-15
5.3.2.1
Recommended pulse amplifier model ···························································· 5-15
5.3.2.2
External dimensions ··················································································· 5-15
5.3.2.3
Specifications and terminal description ··························································· 5-16
5.3.2.4
Precautions for connection and specifications ·················································· 5-17
Inverter options ...........................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.1
Option list ............................................................................................................................5-18
5.4.2
Restrictions on mounting control option cards and others ..................................................5-19
5.4.2.1
Mountable ports ························································································ 5-19
5.4.2.2
Restrictions when mounting control options ····················································· 5-20
Converter System (Diode Rectifier, PWM Converter, Filter Stack, Braking System)
6.1
6.2
Multi-converter system ..................................................................................................................6-1
Diode rectifiers (RHD-D series) ....................................................................................................6-2
6.2.1
Features................................................................................................................................ 6-2
6.2.2
Standard specifications .........................................................................................................6-3
6.2.2.1
3-phase 400V series ···················································································· 6-3
6.2.2.2
3-phase 690V series ···················································································· 6-4
6.2.3
Basic connection diagrams ...................................................................................................6-5
6.2.3.1
When a diode rectifier and an inverter are connected on a 1:1 basis ······················· 6-5
6.2.3.2
When connecting multiple diode rectifiers ························································· 6-7
6.2.4
Terminal functions .................................................................................................................6-8
6.2.5
Check before use ................................................................................................................6-10
6.2.6
External views ..................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label ··························································· 6-11
6.2.6.2
Appearance ······························································································ 6-11
6.2.7
External dimensions............................................................................................................6-12
6.2.7.1
List of external dimensions - RHD-D series (stack type) ····································· 6-12
6.2.7.2
External dimensions ··················································································· 6-12
6.2.8
Terminal positions ...............................................................................................................6-14
6.2.8.1
Main circuit terminals ·················································································· 6-14
6.2.8.2
Control circuit terminal ················································································ 6-16
6.2.8.3
Switch 1 ··································································································· 6-16
6.2.9
Multi-unit connection (capacity expansion) .........................................................................6-17
6.2.9.1
Parallel connection method ·········································································· 6-18
6.2.9.2
12-phase rectification method······································································· 6-18
6.2.9.3
Capacity reduction compensation based on the supply voltage ··························· 6-19
6.2.9.4
Example of calculating the nominal applied inverter/motor capacity ······················ 6-19
7
6.2.10
System configuration examples ......................................................................................... 6-20
6.2.11
Generated loss ................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.12
Peripherals ......................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.12.1
AC fuse for diode rectifier············································································· 6-23
6.2.12.2
AC reactor (ACR: alternate current reactor) ····················································· 6-24
6.2.12.3
Use of molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)·················································· 6-27
6.2.12.4
Use of earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCBs) ················································· 6-30
6.2.12.5
Use of electromagnetic contactor for power supply circuit ··································· 6-37
6.2.12.6
List of equipment (MCCB and MC)································································· 6-37
6.2.12.7
Use of earth leakage detector (earth leakage relay) ··········································· 6-38
6.2.12.8
Power supply transformer (power receiving transformer) ···································· 6-39
6.2.12.9
Receiving power supply monitor ···································································· 6-42
6.2.13
6.3
Recommended wire size .................................................................................................... 6-46
6.2.13.1
3-phase 400V series ··················································································· 6-46
6.2.13.2
3-phase 690V series ··················································································· 6-47
High-efficiency power regeneration PWM converter .................................................................. 6-48
6.3.1
Features ............................................................................................................................. 6-48
6.3.2
Standard specifications ...................................................................................................... 6-49
6.3.2.1
3-phase 400V series (RHC-C: unit type) ························································· 6-49
6.3.2.2
3-phase 400V/690V series (RHC-D: stack type) ··············································· 6-50
6.3.3
Common specifications ...................................................................................................... 6-51
6.3.4
Control options ................................................................................................................... 6-52
6.3.5
Check before use ............................................................................................................... 6-53
6.3.6
External views .................................................................................................................... 6-54
6.3.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label ··························································· 6-54
6.3.6.2
Appearance ······························································································ 6-54
6.3.7
Terminal functions .............................................................................................................. 6-58
6.3.8
Communication specifications ............................................................................................ 6-61
6.3.9
Basic connection diagrams ................................................................................................ 6-61
6.3.9.1
List of basic connection diagrams ·································································· 6-61
6.3.9.2
Basic connection diagram 1·········································································· 6-62
6.3.9.3
Basic connection diagram 2·········································································· 6-63
6.3.9.4
Basic connection diagram 3·········································································· 6-64
6.3.9.5
Basic connection diagram 4·········································································· 6-65
6.3.10
Protective functions ............................................................................................................ 6-67
6.3.10.1
List of alarm codes ····················································································· 6-67
6.3.10.2
Troubleshooting ························································································· 6-69
6.3.11
List of function codes ......................................................................................................... 6-77
6.3.12
Configuration of peripherals ............................................................................................... 6-79
6.3.12.1
Configuration for the RHF-D series filter stacks ················································ 6-79
6.3.12.2
List of peripherals with no filter stack used ······················································· 6-80
6.3.12.3
Input power supply circuit (MCCB, ELCB) ······················································· 6-82
6.3.13
Parallel system (capacity expansion) ................................................................................. 6-83
6.3.13.1
Transformer-less parallel system ··································································· 6-83
6.3.13.2
Transformer insulation type parallel system ····················································· 6-84
6.3.13.3
Parallel system common specifications ··························································· 6-85
6.3.13.4
Configuration table for transformer-less parallel system······································ 6-87
8
6.3.13.5
Parallel system connection diagram······························································· 6-90
6.3.13.6
Charging circuit in parallel system ································································· 6-91
6.3.14
System configuration examples ..........................................................................................6-92
6.3.15
Wiring..................................................................................................................................6-94
6.3.15.1
Precautions on wiring ················································································· 6-94
6.3.15.2
Wire size ·································································································6-101
6.3.16
6.4
6.3.16.1
List of external dimensions - RHC-D series (stack type) ····································6-105
6.3.16.2
External dimensions ··················································································6-106
6.3.17
Terminal positions .............................................................................................................6-109
6.3.18
Peripheral equipment external dimensions ....................................................................... 6-117
6.3.19
Generated loss .................................................................................................................6-123
6.3.19.1
Generated loss in MD mode ········································································6-123
6.3.19.2
Generated loss in LD mode ········································································6-123
Filter stack (RHF-D series) .......................................................................................................6-124
6.4.1
Features............................................................................................................................ 6-124
6.4.2
Standard specifications .....................................................................................................6-125
6.4.2.1
3-phase 400V series ·················································································6-125
6.4.2.2
3-phase 690V series ·················································································6-126
6.4.3
Basic connection diagrams ............................................................................................... 6-127
6.4.4
Terminal functions .............................................................................................................6-129
6.4.5
Check before use ..............................................................................................................6-131
6.4.6
External views ...................................................................................................................6-132
6.4.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label ·························································· 6-132
6.4.6.2
Appearance ····························································································· 6-132
6.4.7
External dimensions..........................................................................................................6-134
6.4.7.1
List of external dimensions - RHF-D series (stack type) ····································6-134
6.4.7.2
External dimensions ··················································································6-135
6.4.8
Terminal positions .............................................................................................................6-139
6.4.8.1
Main circuit terminals ·················································································6-139
6.4.8.2
Control circuit terminal ···············································································6-143
6.4.9
Configuration of peripherals .............................................................................................. 6-144
6.4.10
AC fuse external view .......................................................................................................6-145
6.4.11
Wire size ...........................................................................................................................6-146
6.4.11.1
3-phase 400V series ·················································································6-146
6.4.11.2
3-phase 690V series ·················································································6-147
6.4.12
6.5
External dimensions..........................................................................................................6-105
Generated loss .................................................................................................................6-148
Braking system (braking unit, braking resistor) .........................................................................6-149
6.5.1
Overview of braking resistor (DBR)...................................................................................6-149
6.5.2
Overview of braking unit ...................................................................................................6-149
6.5.3
Standard combination .......................................................................................................6-150
6.5.4
Installation.........................................................................................................................6-152
6.5.5
Protective operation ..........................................................................................................6-152
6.5.6
Cautions on use of terminal functions ...............................................................................6-153
6.5.6.1
Braking resistor (DBR) ···············································································6-153
6.5.6.2
Braking unit ····························································································· 6-153
6.5.7
Peripheral equipment ........................................................................................................6-157
9
6.5.8
Wire size (obtained from braking unit specifications) ········································ 6-158
6.5.8.2
Wire size (obtained from braking resistor specifications) ··································· 6-159
6.5.9
Chapter 7
7.1
7.2
Wire size selection ........................................................................................................... 6-158
6.5.8.1
External dimensions ......................................................................................................... 6-160
6.5.9.1
Braking resistor (DBR) ·············································································· 6-160
6.5.9.2
Braking unit (10%ED)················································································ 6-161
6.5.9.3
Braking unit (Applicable to 30%ED)······························································ 6-161
EMC Compatible Peripherals
Configuring the FRENIC-VG ........................................................................................................ 7-1
Anti-noise devices ........................................................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.1
Output circuit filter (OFL filter) .............................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1.1
Specifications ······························································································7-2
7.2.1.2
External dimensions and applicable wire sizes ···················································7-3
7.2.2
Radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL) .................................................................. 7-4
7.2.2.1
7.2.3
Power filter (power filter for input by Fuji Electric Technica) ................................................. 7-5
7.2.3.1
Specifications ······························································································7-5
7.2.3.2
Precautions on use ·······················································································7-6
7.2.3.3
External dimensions ·····················································································7-7
7.2.4
Filter capacitor (ground capacitor) for radio noise reduction ................................................ 7-8
7.2.5
Spark killer ........................................................................................................................... 7-9
7.2.6
Noise cut transformer (TRAFY) ............................................................................................ 7-9
7.2.6.1
7.2.7
7.3
Specifications ······························································································7-4
Specifications ···························································································· 7-10
Arrester (arrester for power supply) .................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.7.1
Specifications (an excerpt) ··········································································· 7-11
7.2.7.2
Precautions on use ····················································································· 7-11
7.2.7.3
Examples of circuits ···················································································· 7-12
7.2.7.4
External dimensions ··················································································· 7-13
Noise prevention ........................................................................................................................ 7-14
7.3.1
Grounding .......................................................................................................................... 7-15
7.3.2
Wiring of main circuit of inverter (PWM converter) ............................................................. 7-17
7.3.3
Wiring of control terminals of inverter (PWM converter) ..................................................... 7-19
Chapter 8 Operation
8.1
Function codes............................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1
8.2
8.3
Function code table .............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1.1.1
Function code groups and identification codes ···················································8-1
8.1.1.2
Function code table headers···········································································8-2
8.1.1.3
Function code table ······················································································8-3
8.1.2
Control block diagrams ...................................................................................................... 8-38
8.1.3
Function code details ......................................................................................................... 8-38
Keypad and test run ................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.2.1
Operating from the keypad ................................................................................................. 8-38
8.2.2
Trial operation procedures ................................................................................................. 8-38
Using standard RS-485.............................................................................................................. 8-38
10
8.3.1
Standard RS-485 communication port ................................................................................8-38
8.3.2
Fuji general purpose communication ..................................................................................8-38
8.3.3
Modbus RTU .......................................................................................................................8-38
8.4
FRENIC-VG Loader (Free version).............................................................................................8-38
8.5
Control options............................................................................................................................8-38
Chapter 9
9.1
Selecting Model
Guidance for capacity selection ....................................................................................................9-1
9.1.1
9.1.1.1
Output torque characteristics ·········································································· 9-1
9.1.1.2
Procedures for capacity selection ···································································· 9-2
9.1.2
9.2
Calculation of load torque for rated operation····················································· 9-5
9.1.2.2
Calculation of acceleration and deceleration time ··············································· 9-7
9.1.2.3
Calculation of the motor RMS rating ······························································ 9-11
Inverter capacity selection ..........................................................................................................9-12
Overview of the control method ..........................................................................................9-12
9.2.1.1
Vector control with speed sensor (induction motor, synchronous motor) ················ 9-12
9.2.1.2
Sensor-less vector control (induction motor) ···················································· 9-12
9.2.1.3
V/f control (induction motor) ········································································· 9-12
9.2.2
Selection of MD/LD specification ........................................................................................9-12
9.2.2.1
Precautions for selection ············································································· 9-12
9.2.2.2
Guidance for selection ················································································ 9-13
Converter selection .....................................................................................................................9-14
9.3.1
Converter model selection ..................................................................................................9-14
9.3.2
Converter capacity selection ............................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.2.1
Single unit operation ··················································································· 9-14
9.3.2.2
Operation with multiple units connected·························································· 9-14
9.3.3
9.4
Equation for capacity selection .............................................................................................9-5
9.1.2.1
9.2.1
9.3
Selection of capacity for motor and inverter ..........................................................................9-1
Capacity of resistive braking ............................................................................................... 9-15
9.3.3.1
Review of braking resistor rating ··································································· 9-15
9.3.3.2
Procedures for selection ·············································································· 9-16
9.3.3.3
Precautions for selection ············································································· 9-17
Direct parallel connection system ............................................................................................... 9-18
9.4.1
Restrictions of direct parallel connection system ................................................................ 9-18
9.4.2
Basic configuration of direct parallel connection .................................................................9-19
9.4.3
Function code setup............................................................................................................9-20
9.4.4
Basic connection diagram ...................................................................................................9-21
9.4.4.1
Configuration of 2 units in direct parallel connection ·········································· 9-21
9.4.5
Configuration of 3 units in direct parallel connection ...........................................................9-24
9.4.6
Motor constants ..................................................................................................................9-25
9.4.7
Protective functions in direct parallel connection system ....................................................9-28
9.4.8
Wiring inductance ...............................................................................................................9-29
9.4.8.1
9.4.9
Direct parallel connection combinations and wiring lengths ································· 9-30
Precautions for use .............................................................................................................9-31
9.4.9.1
Powering ON ···························································································· 9-31
9.4.9.2
Setting before operation ·············································································· 9-31
9.4.9.3
Command input ························································································· 9-31
11
9.5
9.4.9.4
Input/output interface (I/O functions)······························································· 9-31
9.4.9.5
Keypad functions ······················································································· 9-33
9.4.9.6
Function codes (F to U) ··············································································· 9-33
9.4.9.7
Function codes (S: command data) ································································ 9-35
9.4.9.8
Function codes (M: monitor codes) ································································ 9-35
Motors ........................................................................................................................................ 9-36
9.5.1
Vibration, noise and vibration proof .................................................................................... 9-36
9.5.2
Allowable radial load on shaft end ..................................................................................... 9-37
9.5.3
Allowable thrust load .......................................................................................................... 9-38
9.5.4
List of special combinations ............................................................................................... 9-39
9.6
9.5.4.1
Combination list of 380V series ····································································· 9-39
9.5.4.2
Combination list of low base speed series ······················································· 9-40
Conversion from SI units ............................................................................................................ 9-41
9.6.1
Conversion of units ............................................................................................................ 9-41
9.6.2
Calculation formulae .......................................................................................................... 9-41
Chapter 10
Maintenance and Inspection
10.1
Inspection cycle ......................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.2
Daily inspection .......................................................................................................................... 10-1
10.3
Periodic inspection ..................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3.1
Periodic inspection 1 (Before power is on or after operation is stopped) ........................... 10-2
10.3.2
Periodic inspection 2 (After power is on, inverter is energized) .......................................... 10-3
10.4
Periodic replacement parts ........................................................................................................ 10-4
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.1
Protective functions..................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2
Before proceeding with troubleshooting ...................................................................................... 11-2
11.3
If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor.............................................................................11-3
11.3.1
List of alarm codes ..............................................................................................................11-3
11.3.2
Possible causes of alarms, checks and measures .............................................................. 11-5
11.4
If the "light alarm" indication (l-al) appears on the LED monitor ........................................... 11-26
11.5
If neither an alarm code nor "light alarm" indication (l-al) appears on the LED monitor ....... 11-27
11.5.1
Abnormal motor operation ................................................................................................. 11-27
11.5.2
Problems with inverter settings ......................................................................................... 11-38
Cabinet Construction
12.1
Installation environment ............................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1
Ambient temperatures ........................................................................................................ 12-2
12.1.2
Humidity (condensation) .................................................................................................... 12-2
12.1.3
Altitude ............................................................................................................................... 12-5
12.1.4
Vibration ............................................................................................................................. 12-5
12.1.5
Surrounding environment ................................................................................................... 12-6
12.2
Construction ............................................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.1
Protective construction ....................................................................................................... 12-8
12.2.1.1
Protective construction by IP class ································································· 12-8
12.2.1.2
Protective construction by NEMA standard class············································· 12-10
12
12.3
Cabinet .....................................................................................................................................12-12
12.3.1
Indoor cabinet ...................................................................................................................12-12
12.3.2
Outdoor cabinet ................................................................................................................12-12
12.3.3
Cabinet installation in indoor special environment ............................................................ 12-14
12.4
Cooling .....................................................................................................................................12-15
12.4.1
Cooling method .................................................................................................................12-15
12.4.2
Installation condition specification and selection of cooling system ..................................12-17
12.4.3
Examples of cooling calculations by cooling system .........................................................12-18
12.4.3.1
Forced cooling by ventilation fan ··································································12-18
12.4.3.2
Cooling by heat exchanger ·········································································12-19
12.4.4
12.5
Cooling by panel cooler ....................................................................................................12-19
Selection of cooling fan.............................................................................................................12-20
12.5.1
Air filter size calculation ....................................................................................................12-21
12.5.2
Principles in designing layout in cabinets..........................................................................12-22
Appendix
Appendix 1
Guideline concerning safety of switchboards ................................................................... 1
Appendix -1.1
Introduction.................................................................................................................... 1
Appendix -1.2
Establishment of company internal structure ................................................................. 1
Appendix -1.3
Specific implementation items for product safety .......................................................... 1
Appendix -1.3.1
Considerations for safety when signing contracts ·········································1
Appendix -1.3.2
Securing safety in planning, development, and design phases ························1
Appendix -1.3.3
Securing safety in manufacturing and inspection phases ······························· 2
Appendix -1.3.4
Securing safety in storage, wrapping and packaging, transport,
assembly, installation, and adjustment phases ······················································2
Appendix -1.3.5
Securing safety in maintenance, checkup, and repair phases ·························2
Appendix -1.3.6
Securing safety in used products and in the disposal phase ···························2
Appendix -1.4
Market support .............................................................................................................. 3
Appendix -1.5
Accident cause analysis and measures to prevent recurrence...................................... 3
Appendix -1.6
Information management .............................................................................................. 3
Appendix -1.7
Education on product safety .......................................................................................... 3
Appendix -1.8
Closing remarks ............................................................................................................ 3
Appendix 2
Excerpt from switchboard and control board standards
by Japan Electrical Manufacturers’ Association ............................................................................... 4
Appendix -2.1
Rating and testing for switchboards and control boards (excerpt) 1460: 2008 .............. 4
Appendix -2.2 Construction and dimensions of switchboards and control boards (excerpt) 1459:
2005 5
Appendix -2.3
Appendix 3
Grounding of switchboards and control boards (excerpt) 1323: 2005 ........................... 6
Characteristics of fan ..................................................................................................... 13
Appendix -3.1
Relationship between air volume and air pressure (static) .......................................... 13
Appendix -3.2
Serial and parallel operation of the fan ........................................................................ 15
Appendix 4
Input to inverters ............................................................................................................ 17
Appendix -4.1
Input current (Harmonic current) ................................................................................. 17
Appendix -4.2
Input power factor........................................................................................................ 18
Appendix -4.3
Improvement of the input power factor ........................................................................ 18
Appendix -4.4
Appendix 5
Generator (synchronous generator) ............................................................................ 19
Proficient way to use inverters (on electric noise) .......................................................... 20
13
Appendix -5.1
Effect of inverters on other instruments .......................................................................20
Appendix -5.2
Definition of noise ........................................................................................................21
Appendix -5.3
Noise countermeasures ...............................................................................................23
Appendix -5.4
Cases of noise countermeasures ................................................................................27
Appendix 6
Grounding as noise countermeasure and ground noise .................................................31
Appendix 7
Harmonics guideline .......................................................................................................32
Appendix -7.1 How to comply with "Guideline on measures to suppress harmonics
for users serviced by high voltage or special-high voltage" (general-purpose inverters)........32
Appendix -7.1.1
Application of the “general purpose inverter”··············································32
Appendix -7.1.2 Correspondence to “Guideline on measures to suppress harmonics
for users serviced by high voltage or special high voltage” ·····································33
Appendix 8
Effect on insulation when driving general purpose motor with a 400 V class inverter ....37
Appendix -8.1
Surge voltage generation mechanism .........................................................................37
Appendix -8.2
Effect of surge voltage .................................................................................................38
Appendix -8.3
Countermeasure for surge voltage ..............................................................................38
Appendix -8.3.1
Suppressing surge voltage ····································································38
Appendix -8.3.2
Using motors with enhanced insulation ·····················································38
Appendix -8.3.3
On existing products ·············································································38
Appendix 9
Appendix -9.1
Wire permissible current (IEC 60364-5-52) ....................................................................39
Permissible current based on ambient temperature, cable laying method ..................39
14
■ Safety precautions
Please read the instructions manual carefully before installation, wiring (connection), operating, or performing
maintenance checkup, and operate the product correctly. Additionally, ensure that you have sound knowledge of the
device and familiarize yourself with all safety information and precautions.
Safety precautions are classified into the following categories in this manual.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions,
possibly resulting in death or serious bodily injuries.
Failure to heed the information indicated by this symbol may lead to dangerous conditions,
possibly resulting in medium level or minor bodily injuries and/or substantial property
damage.
Following the cautionary advices contained under the CAUTION title may still cause serious consequences.
These safety precautions are of utmost importance and must be observed at all times.
Application
(1) FRENIC-VG stack type inverter
 The FRENIC-VG is an equipment to drive 3 phase motors. The inverter may not be used for single-phase motors
and other purposes.
 The FRENIC-VG cannot drive 3 phase motors independently by connecting to a commercial power supply.
Use the PWM converters or diode rectifiers specified by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd in combination with the FRENIC-VG.
Otherwise, fire or accidents may occur.
 FRENIC-VG may not be used for applications directly related to human safety such as life supporting systems.
 Although the product is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where
serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of the inverter.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
(2) RHC-D (PWM converter)
 RHC-D (PWM converter) is an equipment to be used in combination with Fuji Electric's inverter to drive 3 phase
motors. It may not be used for other purposes.
Otherwise, fire or accidents may occur.
 The RHC-D may not be used for applications directly related to human safety such as life supporting systems.
 Although the product is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where
serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of the inverter.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
(3) RHD-D (diode rectifier)
 RHD-D (diode rectifier) is an equipment to be used in combination with Fuji Electric's inverter to drive 3 phase
motors. It may not be used for other purposes.
Otherwise, fire or accidents may occur.
 The RHD-D may not be used for applications directly related to human safety such as life supporting systems.
 Although the product is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where
serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of the inverter.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
15
(4) RHF-D (filter stack dedicated to RHC-D)
 The RHF-D (filter stack dedicated to RHC-D) is an equipment to be used in combination with Fuji Electric's PWM
converter (RHC-D) and inverter to drive 3 phase motors. It may not be used for other purposes.
Otherwise, fire or accidents may occur.
 The RHF-D may not be used for applications directly related to human safety such as life supporting systems.
 Although the product is manufactured under strict quality control, install safety devices for applications where
serious accidents or property damages are foreseen in relation to the failure of the inverter.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
Installation
 Install the inverter on a base made of metal or other non-flammable material.
 Do not install close to flammable objects.
Otherwise, fire may occur.
 The protection structure of the product body is IP00, and contact with the main circuit terminal block (live part) is
possible. For this reason, implement measures such as installation in locations where individuals cannot easily
contact.
Otherwise, it could cause electric shock and injury.
 Do not support the product by its front cover during transportation.
Otherwise, it could cause the product to drop, resulting in injury.
 Prevent foreign materials such as lint, paper fibers, sawdust, dust, and metallic chips from entering the product and
from accumulating on the cooling fins.
 Install by using screws and bolts at the defined tightening torque, following the specified installation method.
Otherwise, fire or accidents may occur.
 Do not install or operate products which are damaged internally or externally.
Otherwise, it could cause fire, accidents and injuries.
16
Wiring
 Shutdown of the entire power supply system caused by functioning of the ground-fault relay in the upstream power
supply line is operationally undesirable. When appropriate earth leakage (zero phase current) detecting devices are
not installed in the power supply system, install an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) on the input side of each
converter (diode rectifier, PWM converter, filter stack).
 Connect to the power supply through molded-case circuit-breakers and earth leakage circuit breakers (with
overcurrent protection) on each converter (diode rectifier, PWM converter, filter stack). Use recommended devices
with the recommended capacities for the molded-case circuit-breaker and earth leakage breaker.
 Use wires in the specified size.
 Tighten terminals with the specified torque.
 When multiple combinations of inverters and motors exist, do not use multicore cables for the purpose of handling
the wiring together.
 Do not connect surge killers to the inverter output (secondary) circuit.
Otherwise, fire may occur.
 Perform C type grounding construction following the supply voltage systems for the converter (diode rectifier, PWM
converter, filter stack).
 Always connect the grounding terminal [ G] to an earthing conductor or earthing copper bar for the converter
(diode rectifier, PWM converter, filter stack) and the FRENIC-VG.
Otherwise, electric shock or fire may occur.
 Qualified electricians should carry out wiring.
 Be sure to perform wiring after turning the power OFF.
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
 Always wire after the product is installed.
Otherwise, it could cause electric shock and injury.
 Confirm that the phase number and the rated voltage of the power supply input to the converter (diode rectifier,
PWM converter, filter stack) matches the phase number and voltage of the power supply to connect.
 Do not connect the power supply lines to the output terminals (P, N) of the converter (diode rectifier, PWM
converter).
 Do not connect the power supply lines to the inverter output terminals (U, V, and W).
Otherwise, fire or accidents may occur.
 In general, sheaths of the control signal wires are not specifically designed to withstand high voltage (i.e., reinforced
insulation is not applied). Therefore, if a control signal wire comes into direct contact with a live conductor of the
main circuit, the insulation of the sheath may be damaged. In this case, the main circuit high voltage may be applied
on the control signal wire, so make sure that the control signal wires do not come into contact with live conductors of
the main circuit.
Otherwise, it could cause an accident or an electric shock.
 When moving the switches, check that the voltage between the major terminals P (+) and N (-) has fallen to a safe
voltage (below DC +25 V) using a tester after confirming that the LED monitor and the charge lamp have turned off
and after 10 minutes has elapsed.
The diode rectifier or filter stack does not contain the LED monitoring function.
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
 Electric noise is generated from FRENIC-VG, PWM converter, filter stack, motor, and wiring. This may cause
malfunction in the peripheral sensors and devices. To prevent malfunctions, implement noise countermeasures.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
17
Operation
 Be sure to mount the front cover of the product before turning the power ON. Do not remove the cover when the
power is ON.
 Do not operate the switches with wet hands.
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
<FRENIC-VG stack type inverter>
 If the auto-reset function has been selected, the inverter may automatically restart and drive the motor depending
on the cause of tripping. Design the machine so that safety for human and the surroundings is ensured after
restarting.
 If the stall prevention function (torque limiter) has been selected, the inverter may operate with
acceleration/deceleration times and speed different from the setup. Design the machine so that safety is ensured
even in these cases.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
 The keypad
keys are enabled only when the keypad operation is selected by F02 function code. Emergency
shut down switch should be prepared separately. When the operation command method is switched from keypad
operation command using link operation selection "LE", the
keys are disabled.
 After the cause of protective function actuation is removed, confirm that the run command is OFF and release the
alarm. If the run command is ON when the alarm is released, the inverter will start supplying power to the motor.
The motor may rotate, which could be dangerous.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
 If the "Restart mode after momentary power failure" (Function code F14 = 3 to 5) is selected, then the inverter
automatically restarts running the motor when the power is recovered. Design the machine so that human safety is
ensured after restarting.
 Set up the function codes after completely understanding this user's manual. When the equipment is operated while
the function code date is changed indiscriminately, motor may rotate at torques and speed which the machine
cannot tolerate.
Otherwise, accidents or injuries may occur.
 Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V, and
W if voltage is applied to the main input power supply of the PWM converter and the diode rectifier.
 Even if the motor is stopped by direct current braking or pre-excitation, voltage is output to inverter output terminals
U, V, and W.
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
 The inverter can be readily set up for high speed operation. When changing the speed setting, carefully check the
specifications of motors and the machine beforehand.
Otherwise, it could cause injury.
<Diode rectifier, PWM converter, filter stack>
 When the protective function of the PWM converter is activated, confirm that the run command is OFF. Remove the
cause of the protective function activation, and release the alarm. If the alarm is released while the run command is
ON, the inverter may restart abruptly, which can be dangerous.
Otherwise, accidents may occur.
 Voltage is applied to the individual main terminals P (+) - N (-) even while the FRENIC-VG is stopped when the input
supply voltage is applied to the converter (diode rectifier, PWM converter, filter stack).
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
 While the filter stack is operating, an electromagnetic sound is generated from the reactors and resistors in it. If the
product is installed in an area with noise restrictions, implement sound insulation.
18
 Do not touch the cooling fins as they become hot.
Risk of burn exists.
<FRENIC-VG stack type inverter>
 The brake function of the inverter does not provide mechanical holding.
 The digital input terminal contains functions for run, stop, and speed commands such as operation command
"FWD" and coast-to-stop command "BX". The speed may change drastically or operation may start abruptly with
changes in the function code setting through the digital input terminals. Perform changes to the function code
settings after adequately securing safety.
 The manipulation method of the operation commands and the function to switch the speed commanding methods
("SS1, 2, 4, 8", "N2/N1", "KP/PID", "IVS", "LE", others) can be assigned to the digital input terminal. When switching
these signals, the operation may start abruptly or the speed may change drastically depending on the conditions.
Otherwise, accidents or injuries may occur.
<Diode rectifier, PWM converter, filter stack>
 Do not touch the reactor (filter reactor, pressurizing reactor, DC reactor, etc.) and the braking resistor as they
become hot.
Otherwise, it could cause injury.
Maintenance checkup and parts replacement
 When moving the switches at checkup, check that the voltage between the major terminals P (+) and N (-) has
fallen to a safe voltage (below DC +25 V) using a tester after confirming that the LED monitor and the charge lamp
have turned off and after 10 minutes has elapsed. The diode rectifier or filter stack does not contain the LED
monitoring function.
Otherwise, electric shock may occur.
 Be sure to perform the daily inspection and periodic inspection described in the instruction manual. Lengthy use of
the product without inspection could result in inverter failure and damage, or accident and fire.
 A periodic inspection cycle of 1 to 2 years is recommended, however, the cycle may be reduced depending on
usage conditions.
 It is recommended that parts for periodic replacement be replaced after the standard number of years indicated in
the instruction manual. Lengthy use of the product without without replacing parts could result in inverter failure and
damage, or accident and fire.
Risk of burn exists.
<FRENIC-VG stack type inverter>
 Contact outputs [30A/B/C] and [Y5A/C] use relays, and may remain ON or OFF, or in an indefinite state when the
life is reached. In the interests of safety, equip the product with an external protection function.
 Continued use of the product with battery consumed may result in loss of data.
Risk of accident
<Diode rectifier>
 Contact outputs [73A/C], [1,2], and [ONA/C] use relays, and may remain ON or OFF, or in an indefinite state when
the life is reached. In the interests of safety, equip the product with an external protection function.
Risk of accident
<PWM converter>
 Contact outputs [30A/B/C], [Y5A/C], and [73A/C] use relays, and may remain ON or OFF, or in an indefinite state
when the life is reached. In the interests of safety, equip the product with an external protection function.
Risk of accident
19
<Filter stack>
 Contact outputs [1，2] and [ONA/B/C] use relays, and may remain ON or OFF, or in an indefinite state when the life
is reached. In the interests of safety, equip the product with an external protection function.
Risk of accident
 Maintenance checkup and parts replacement should be conducted only by qualified personnel.
 Take off watches, rings, and other metallic objects before starting work.
 Use insulated tools.
 Never modify the product.
Otherwise, it could cause electric shock and injury.
Disposal
 Treat the FRENIC-VG and converter (diode rectifier, PWM converter, filter stack) as industrial waste when disposing
of them.
Otherwise, it could cause injury.
 The batteries used in the FRENIC-VG fall under "primary batteries". Discard following the procedures for disposal
defined by each municipality.
Speed control mode
<FRENIC-VG stack type inverter>
 If the control parameters of the automatic speed regulator (ASR) are not appropriately configured under speed
control, turning the run command OFF may not decelerate the motor due to hunting caused by high gain setting.
Stop conditions may not be reached and the motor may continue running.
 Hunting state may be realized by high response in low speed regions during deceleration. The detected speed
deviates from the zero speed area before the zero speed control duration (F39) elapses, and the stop conditions
are not reached. The inverter enters the deceleration mode again and continues running.
Otherwise, it could cause accidents or injuries.
 Adjust the ASR control parameter to an appropriate value. Also implement countermeasures such as causing the
alarm to trip when deviation results between the commanded speed and actual speed by using the speed
mismatch alarm function. Additional measures may include switching by ASR control constant speed or
determination of stopping speed detection by the commanded value.
Torque control mode
<FRENIC-VG stack type inverter>
 When the motor is rotated by load-side torque exceeding the torque command under torque control, turning the run
command OFF may not bring the stop conditions so that the inverter may continue running.
Otherwise, it could cause accidents or injuries.
 To cut off the inverter output, switch to speed control and decelerate to stop, or issue the coast-to-stop command
and cut off the output.
20
General Precautions
Part of the illustrations listed in this user's manual and the instruction manual bundled with the product may be
shown without covers or shields in order to describe the details.
When operating the product, be sure to reinstall the covers and shields exactly as specified, and operate it in
accordance with the instruction manual.
Icons
The following icons are used throughout this manual.
This icon indicates information which, if not heeded, can result in the inverter not operating to full efficiency, as
well as information concerning incorrect operations and settings which can result in accidents.
This icon indicates information that can prove handy when performing certain settings or operations.

This icon indicates a reference to more detailed information.
21
FRENIC- VG
1
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1
Product introduction ....................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2
Features ......................................................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1
1.2.1.1
Control method ............................................................................................................. 1-3
1.2.1.2
Product arrangement and easier change ..................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1.3
Ratings for intended use............................................................................................... 1-3
1.2.1.4
Style designed specifically for installation in a panel .................................................... 1-4
1.2.1.5
How to expand the capacity range of the inverters ....................................................... 1-5
1.2.1.6
How to expand the total capacity of the converter ........................................................ 1-6
1.2.1.7
A wide range of options ................................................................................................ 1-7
1.2.2
Easier maintenance and greater reliability .............................................................................. 1-8
1.2.2.1
Upgraded PC loader functions ..................................................................................... 1-8
1.2.2.2
Multifunctional Keypad ................................................................................................. 1-8
1.2.2.3
More reliable functions ................................................................................................. 1-9
1.2.2.4
Easy change of the cooling fan .................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.2.5
Components with a longer service life .......................................................................... 1-9
1.2.2.6
Enhanced lifetime alarm ............................................................................................... 1-9
1.2.2.7
Useful functions for test run and adjustment .............................................................. 1-10
1.2.2.8
Easy wiring (removable control terminal block) .......................................................... 1-10
1.2.3
Adaptation to environment and safety .................................................................................. 1-10
1.2.3.1
Conforms to safety standards ..................................................................................... 1-10
1.2.3.2
Enhanced environmental resistance........................................................................... 1-10
1.2.3.3
RoHS directive compliance ........................................................................................ 1-11
1.2.4
1.3
A wide range of applications ................................................................................................... 1-3
Functional compatibility with previous models ...................................................................... 1-11
Control method ............................................................................................................................. 1-12
1.3.1
Features and applications of control methods ...................................................................... 1-12
1.3.1.1
Open-loop speed control ............................................................................................ 1-12
1.3.1.2
Closed-loop speed control .......................................................................................... 1-13
Chapter 1 Overview
1.1
Product introduction
1-1
1-2
Features
1.2.1
A wide range of applications
1.2.1.1
Control method
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2
Not only induction motors but also synchronous motors can be driven, and for induction motors, you can select the most
suitable control method according to your individual needs.
Target motors
Control method
Induction motor
 Vector control with a speed sensor
 Vector control without a speed sensor
 V/f Control
Synchronous motor
1.2.1.2
Vector control with a speed sensor (including magnetic pole position detection)
Product arrangement and easier change
The stack type inverters have an arrangement with consideration for the installation of the product into the cabinet and
easier change.
(1)
The inverters (132 to 800 kW) can easily be installed to the cabinet or changed because they have casters.
(2)
With the inverters (630 to 800 kW), stacks are divided for each output phase (U, V and W), which has realized the
lighter weight.
1.2.1.3
Ratings for intended use
The operation mode for the motor is selected according to motor load condition. Motors one or two frame larger than
inverter can be driven for light load (LD) use.
Specification
Applied
load
MD
Middle Duty
Spec
LD
Low Duty
Spec
Feature
Applicable
overload rating
150%, 1min
Can drive motors of frames
one or two sizes larger.
110%, 1 min
1-3
Power supply
voltage
Applicable motor
capacity [kW]
400 V
30 to 800
690 V
90 to 450
400 V
37 to 1000
690 V
110 to 450
1.2.1.4
Style designed specifically for installation in a panel
Fits in smaller panels
Designed specifically for installation in a panel, the stack type inverters fit in smaller panels than the conventional
models.
For crane systems, the panel width can be reduced by 34%, compared with the conventional models.
Also, the inverters can be easily installed in a panel and replaced, thanks to the dedicated design.
<Example of panel configuration for a crane system>
1-4
How to expand the capacity range of the inverters
Direct parallel connection system and multiwinding motor drive system are provided for driving a large capacity motor.
Note) To start the reduced capacity operation,
consideration is needed to the switch over
operation of PG signals or motor constants
and sequence circuit. For details, refer to
chapter 9 of direct parallel.
For more information, refer to:

 "2.1.2. Multi-drive system" in Chapter 2
 "9.4.8.1. Direct parallel connection combinations and wiring lengths" in Chapter 9
1-5
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.1.5
1.2.1.6
How to expand the total capacity of the converter
You can expand the total capacity of the PWM converter (RHC-D) using either a "transformer isolation-less parallel
system" or a "transformer insulation type parallel system".
For more information, refer to:

 PWM converter (RHC-D): "6.3.13. Parallel system (capacity expansion)" in Chapter 6
 Diode rectifier (RHD-D): "6.2.9. Multi-unit connection (capacity expansion)" in Chapter 6
1-6
A wide range of options
 A wide range of options are available that support high speed communication and other various interfaces.
 You can use option cards by just inserting them into the connectors provided inside the inverter. You can install up to
four option cards.
(There are some restrictions on the combinations of option cards. For more information, refer to "5.4.2. Restrictions
on mounting control option cards and others" in Chapter 5.)
1-7
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.1.7
1.2.2
Easier maintenance and greater reliability
1.2.2.1
Upgraded PC loader functions
1.2.2.2
Multifunctional Keypad
 Wide 7-segment LED ensures easy view.
 The back-light is incorporated in the LCD panel, which enables easy inspection in a dark
control panel.
 Enhanced copy feature
Function codes can be easily copied to other inverters.
(Three patterns of function codes can be stored.)
Copying data in advance reduces restoration time when problems occur, by replacing
the Keypad when changing the unit.
 Remote control operation is available.
The Keypad can be remotely operated by extending the cable length
at the RJ-45 connector.
 JOG (jogging) operation can be executed using the Keypad.
 The HELP key displays operation guidance.
1-8
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.2.3
More reliable functions
1.2.2.4
Easy change of the cooling fan
The cooling fan installed at the top can easily be changed
without drawing the stacks out of the cabinet.
However, for the 220 to 800 kW inverter, remove the two
connection bars from the DC side and change the cooling
fan.
Fan main body
1.2.2.5
Components with a longer service life
For the various consumable parts inside the inverter, their
designed lives have been extended to 10 years.
This also extends the equipment maintenance cycles.
<Life conditions>
 Ambient temperature: 30°C
 Load factor: 100% (MD Spec), 80% (LD Spec)
1.2.2.6
Enhanced lifetime alarm
 Lifetime alarms can be checked easily on the
Keypad and PC loader (optional).
 Facility maintenance can be performed much
more easily.
1-9
1.2.2.7
Useful functions for test run and adjustment
 You can customize the display of function codes (by showing or hiding individual items on the loader).
 A simulated fault alarm can be issued by a special function on the Keypad.
 Monitor data hold function
 Simulated operation mode
Simulated connection allows the inverter to be operated with internal parts in the same way as if they were connected
to the motor, without actually being connected.
 The externally input I/O monitor and PG pulse states can be checked on the Keypad.
1.2.2.8
Easy wiring (removable control terminal block)
By the use of removable control terminal block:
 The terminal block can be connected to the inverter
after control wiring work is completed. Wiring work is
simplified.
 Restoration time for updating equipment, problem
occurrence, and inverter replacement has been
drastically reduced. Just mount the wired terminal
block board to the replaced inverter.
1.2.3
Adaptation to environment and safety
1.2.3.1
Conforms to safety standards
 The functional safety (FS) function STO that conforms to the FS standard IEC/EN61800-5-2 is incorporated as
standard.
Safety function
 The FS functions STO, SS1, SLS and SBC that conform to FS standard IEC/EN 61800-5-2 can be also made
available by installing the option card OPC-VG1-SAFE. (Available only when the product is used in conjunction with
the MVK dedicated motor.)
STO: Safe Torque Off
This function shuts off the output of the inverter (motor output torque)
immediately.
SS1: Safe Stop 1
This function decreases the motor speed to shut down the motor output
torque (by STO FS function) after the motor reaches the specified speed or
after the specified time has elapsed.
SLS: Safely Limited Speed
This function prevents the motor from rotating over the specified speed.
SBC: Safe Brake Control
This function outputs a safe signal of the motor brake control.
1.2.3.2
Enhanced environmental resistance
Environmental resistance has been enhanced compared to conventional inverters.
(1)
Environmental resistance of cooling fan has been enhanced.
(2)
Ni and Sn plating is employed on copper bars.
*
Environmental resistance has been enhanced on the FRENIC-VG compared to conventional models; however, the
following environments should be examined based on how the equipment is being used.
a. Sulfidizing gas (present in some activities such as tire manufacturers, paper manufacturers, sewage treatment,
and the textile industry)
b. Conductive dust and foreign particles (such as with metal processing, extruding machines, printing machines,
and waste treatment)
c. Others: under unique environments not included under standard environments
Contact Fuji before using the product in environments such as those indicated above.
1-10
RoHS directive compliance
FRENIC-VG complies with European regulations that limit the use of specific hazardous substances (RoHS) as a
standard.
Six hazardous substances
About RoHS
Lead, mercury, cadmium, hexavalent chromium,
polybrominated biphenyl (PBB), polybrominated biphenyl
ether (PBDE)
Directive 2002/95/EC, promulgated by the European
Parliament and European Council, limits the use of
specific hazardous substances included in electrical and
electronic devices.
*Does not apply to the parts of some inverter models.
1.2.4
Functional compatibility with previous models
The FRENIC-VG has functional compatibility with our previous models of vector control inverters.
 Compatibility with the FRENIC5000VG7S
The function codes of the FRENIC-VG are compatible with those of the VG7, and therefore the latter can be set for
the FRENIC-VG without making any changes (except for the function codes for the M3).
In addition, function codes can be uploaded from the VG7 via the FRENIC-VG loader and directly copied to the
FRENIC-VG.
1-11
Chapter 1 Overview
1.2.3.3
1.3
Control method
1.3.1
Features and applications of control methods
Inverter-based speed regulators for AC motors are most commonly used to control the rotational speed of loads.
This section describes the basic configuration of some speed control methods, their characteristics, and hints about their
applications.
Speed control systems are generally classified into open-loop control and closed-loop control. (Refer to Figure 1.3.1-1.)
Speed control
Open-loop control
V/f Control
Slip compensation control
Closed-loop control
Slip frequency control
Vector control
Vector control without a speed sensor
Figure 1.3.1-1: Classification of speed control methods
1.3.1.1
Open-loop speed control
<Main circuit>
Converter section
Inverter section
+
M3
Acceleration/
Deceleration
computational
unit
Frequency
setting
V/f
pattern
|V＊|
ｆ＊
3-phase voltage
command
calculation
<Control circuit>
PWM
｜V＊| ：Voltage command
f＊
：Frequency command
Figure 1.3.1-2: Basic configuration of open-loop speed control
Torque
As the basic configuration of open-loop control shown in Figure 1.3.1-2
f1
f3 f2
f4
f5
f６
demonstrates, this control method is designed to control the rotational
speed of the load with the aid of the frequency output by the inverter,
while information about the speed under control is not fed back. The
Load torque
"speed-torque characteristic" of an induction motor traces a slight
gradient across frequencies f1 to f6, as shown in Figure 1.3.1-3. If the
voltage frequency supplied to the motor is constant, the rotational speed
shows little variation in response to variations in the load; for example,
the slip at the rated torque is several percent. To put it another way, when
0
N６ N5 N4 N3 N2 N1
controlling the speed of the motor by changing the output frequency of
Speed
the inverter, "V/f control," which controls the ratio between the terminal
Figure 1.3.1-3: Speed - Torque characteristics
voltage of the motor and the applied voltage, is generally applied.
Open-loop control does not require any speed sensor and is adopted mainly for general-purpose inverters. It is used to
make the speed of existing motors variable or when a squared-deceleration torque load, such as a fan or pump, does
not require very fast response.
1-12
Chapter 1 Overview
<Main circuit>
Converter section
Inverter section
+
M3
｜V＊| : Voltage
command
f＊
: Frequency
command
τ
: Calculated
torque value
v
: Detected
voltage value
i
: Detected
current value
ωsl : Compensated
amount of slip
Acceleration/
Deceleration
computational
unit
＋
|V＊|
V/f
pattern
＋
ωsl
Frequency
setting
ｆ＊
K
τ
v
Torque
calculation
3-phase voltage
command
calculation
<Control circuit>
PWM
i
Figure 1.3.1-4: Speed control using slip compensation method
The factors that determine the accuracy of the rotational speed in open-loop speed control include load torque
fluctuation, the accuracy of the output frequency, and power voltage fluctuation. To deal with load torque fluctuations, a
"slip compensation control method" is used, which, as shown in Figure 1.3.1-4, keeps the rotational speed constant by
calculating the output torque from the terminal voltage and primary current of the motor and compensating the output
frequency of the inverter based on the calculated output torque.
1.3.1.2
Closed-loop speed control
"Closed-loop speed control" is the method of compensating speed fluctuations by feeding back speed information.
Closed-loop speed control ensures speed control with a high degree of accuracy by feeding back the rotational speed
under control and can, therefore, be applied to paper machines, machine tools, etc.
<Main circuit>
Converter section
Inverter section
Speed
detector
+
M3
PG
Speed
setting
Acceleration/
Deceleration
computational
unit
N＊ ＋
N
－
Speed
control
Torque
calculation
<Control circuit>
N＊ ：Speed
command
N ：Detected
speed
Figure 1.3.1-5: Basic configuration of closed-loop speed control
Figure 1.3.1-5 shows the basic configuration of closed-loop speed control. Speed information is fed back from a speed
detection sensor, such as a pulse generator (PG), compared with the speed command, and the output frequency of the
inverter is controlled so that the speed command and the detected speed value will match.
As speed control methods, slip frequency control, vector control with a speed sensor, and vector control without a speed
sensor are applied. This section presents an overview of each control method.
This high-performance vector control inverter FRENIC-VG series uses vector control included in closed-loop control to
control speed.
1-13
a) Slip frequency control
<Main circuit>
Converter section
Inverter section
Speed
detector
+
M3
PG
<Control circuit>
Speed
control
＋
N*
－
Speed
controller
＋
＋
V/f
pattern
3-phase voltage
command
calculation
Acceleration/
Deceleration
computational
unit
N
Speed
detection
PWM
N＊ :Speed
command
N :Detected speed
value
Figure 1.3.1-6: Configuration of slip frequency control
Figure 1.3.1-6 shows the configuration of slip frequency control.
The output of the speed controller becomes a slip frequency responsive to the load, and speed fluctuations are
compensated by adding this slip frequency to actual speed. Since this control method is relatively simple, it is applied to
the speed control of general-purpose inverters. Note that it is suitable for applications that do not require high-speed
response because V/f control is used for basic control.
1-14
Chapter 1 Overview
b) Vector control with a speed sensor
Vector control is the control method that enables AC motors to respond faster.
This control method is intended to achieve an equal level of control performance to DC motors by separating the primary
current of an AC motor into a magnetic flux current and a torque current to be controlled.
Compared with the V/f control method, vector control combines the following performance characteristics and is suitable
for applications requiring fast response and a high degree of accuracy.
(1) Satisfactory acceleration/deceleration characteristic
(2) Broad speed control range
(3) Feasibility of torque control
(4) Fast control response
<Main circuit>
Converter section
Inverter section
Speed
detector
+
M3
PG
N
iT* ＋
－
Current
controller
－
iM*
＋
－
Current
controller
iM
iT
Vector
rotator
Speed
control
＋
N*
Vector calculation
Acceleration/
Deceleration
computational
unit
Vector rotator
<Control circuit>
PWM
i
Speed detection
N＊ : Speed command
N : Detected speed value
iT＊ : Torque current command value
iM＊: Excitation current command value
iT : Detected torque current value
iM : Detected excitation current value
I
: Motor current (instantaneous value)
Figure 1.3.1-7: Example of configuration of vector control
Figure 1.3.1-7 shows an example of the configuration of vector control. Performance considerably depends on the
accuracy of the grasping of the motor constant because the vector calculation unit uses the motor constant. In addition,
variations in the motor constant due to the temperature condition also greatly affect performance. This control is
complicated and thus applied mainly in combination with a dedicated inverter and a dedicated motor.
1-15
c) Vector control without a speed sensor
Vector control with a speed sensor offers distinguished performance backed by fast response and a high degree of
accuracy. On the other hand, since it requires a speed sensor, it is sometimes confronted by such issues as the
mounting of the speed sensor and wiring from the speed sensor. In contrast to vector control with a speed sensor, vector
control without a speed sensor is the method of performing vector control by estimating the rotational speed from the
terminal voltage or primary current of the motor without using a speed sensor, and using this estimated value as a speed
feedback signal. Vector control without a speed sensor is slightly inferior to vector control with a speed sensor in
performance.
Figure 1.3.1-8 shows a configuration of vector control without a speed sensor.
<Main circuit>
Converter section
Inverter section
+
M3
Speed
setting
ω２＊
Speed
controller
iT ＊
iT
^２
ω
iM ＊
iM ＊
iM
＊
Torque
current
regulator
VT
Magnetizing
current
controller
VM
＊
V１
iM
＊
ωSL ω1
Slip
frequency
＾ ２
calculation ω
circuit
PWM
pulse
generation
circuit
iα
VD
iＴ
2-phase/
3-phase
Acceleration/
Deceleration
computational
unit
Voltage vector
calculation circuit
<Control circuit>
iβ
Integration
circuit
Magnetic flux
angle
controller
Eα
EM
Inductive
voltage
calculation
circuit
VD
EＴ
Eβ
Figure 1.3.1-8: Example of configuration of vector control without a speed sensor
The FRENIC-VG series is capable of performing this control in combination with a general-purpose motor. However, the
specifications of this combination, including control performance, are lower than those of the combination of the
FRENIC-VG series and a dedicated motor.
1-16
FRENIC- VG
2
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.1
Standard specifications .................................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1
MD spec (for medium overloads) .................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.1.2
LD spec (for light overloads) ......................................................................................... 2-2
2.1.2
2.2
2.3
MD spec (for medium overloads) .................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.2.2
LD spec (for light overloads) ......................................................................................... 2-6
Common specifications .................................................................................................................. 2-8
2.2.1
Installation environment and conformity with standards ......................................................... 2-8
2.2.2
Control methods ..................................................................................................................... 2-9
2.2.3
Control performance ............................................................................................................. 2-10
2.2.4
Control functions ................................................................................................................... 2-11
2.2.5
Configuration/display functions ............................................................................................. 2-13
2.2.6
Protective functions .............................................................................................................. 2-15
Motor specifications ...................................................................................................................... 2-19
Dedicated motor specifications (induction motor with a sensor) ........................................... 2-19
2.3.1.1
Standard specifications for three-phase 400V series ................................................. 2-19
2.3.1.2
Common specifications............................................................................................... 2-19
2.3.1.3
External dimensions of dedicated motors ................................................................... 2-20
2.3.2
Dedicated motor specifications (synchronous motor with a sensor) ..................................... 2-21
2.3.2.1
Standard specifications for three-phase 400V series ................................................. 2-21
2.3.2.2
Common specifications............................................................................................... 2-21
2.3.2.3
External dimensions of dedicated motors ................................................................... 2-22
2.3.2.4
Exclusive cables for inverter connection ..................................................................... 2-23
Connection diagrams and terminal functions ................................................................................ 2-25
2.4.1
Connection diagrams ............................................................................................................ 2-25
2.4.1.1
Standard stack............................................................................................................ 2-25
2.4.1.2
Phase-specific stack ................................................................................................... 2-27
2.4.2
Terminal functions ................................................................................................................. 2-28
2.4.2.1
Terminal functions ....................................................................................................... 2-28
2.4.2.2
Setting up the slide switches ...................................................................................... 2-33
2.4.3
2.5
Multi-drive system ................................................................................................................... 2-4
2.1.2.1
2.3.1
2.4
Single-drive system ................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.1.1.1
Multi-drive system connection diagrams ............................................................................... 2-35
2.4.3.1
Direct parallel connection ........................................................................................... 2-35
2.4.3.2
Multiwinding motor drive ............................................................................................. 2-37
External dimensions ..................................................................................................................... 2-39
2.5.1
2.6
List of the FRENIC-VG's external dimensions ...................................................................... 2-39
2.5.1.1
Figure A (1-frame size: FRN30SVG1S-4 to 45SVG1S-4) ..................................... 2-40
2.5.1.2
Figure B (2-frame size: FRN55SVG1S-4 to 110SVG1S-4)................................... 2-41
2.5.1.3
Figure C (3-frame size: FRN132SVG1S-4 to 200SVG1S-4,
FRN132SVG1S-69 to FRN200SVG1S-69) .......................................................... 2-42
2.5.1.4
Figure D (4-frame size: FRN220SVG1S-4 to 315SVG1S-4,
FRN250SVG1S-69 to FRN450SVG1S-69) .......................................................... 2-43
2.5.1.5
Figure E (4-frame size: FRN630BVG1S-4 to 800BVG1S-4) ................................ 2-44
2.5.1.6
Figure F (2-frame size: FRN90SVG1S-69 to 110SVG1S-69) ............................... 2-45
Generated loss ............................................................................................................................. 2-46
Standard specifications
This chapter describes the standard specifications for a multi-drive system where a single-drive system of the
FRENIC-VG is used in conjunction with multiple units of the FRENIC-VG.
2.1.1
Single-drive system
2.1.1.1
MD spec (for medium overloads)
3-phase 400V series

Standard stack
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-4
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW]
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
45
57
69
85
114
134
160
192
231
287
316
356
396
445
Rated current [A]
60
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
468
520
585
Input power
Overload capability
150% of the rated current for 1 minute
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Allowable fluctuation
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz] *4
Enclosure
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
―
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system:
Braking torque:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter), resistance regenerative braking
(braking unit)
150%
2 kHz
Approx. mass [kg]

30
30
30
37
37
45
45
95
95
95
125
135
135
135
IP00 open type
Phase-specific stack
Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4*5
630
710
800
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW]
630
710
800
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
891
1044
1127
Rated current [A]
1170
1370
1480
Overload capability
Input power
*2
150% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz] *4
Braking system:
Braking torque:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter), resistance regenerative braking
(braking unit)
150%
2 kHz
Approx. mass [kg]
135 x 3
Enclosure
IP00 open type
135 x 3
135 x 3
The MD spec above applies when Function code F80 = 0, 2, or 3. The keypad display shows "HD", however, when F80 =
0 or 2. (Initial value = 0)
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 440 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
*4 Operating synchronous motors other than Fuji Electric’s standard synchronous motor (GNF2 type series) at low
carrier frequency may cause demagnetization due to heating of the permanent magnet by output current harmonics.
Always confirm the motor’s allowable carrier frequencies.
*5 A set of three phase-specific stacks (Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4) for U, V and W phases constitutes a single inverter
unit. (One unit each for output phases U, V, and W)
2-1
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.1
3-phase 690V series

Standard stack
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-69
90
110
132
160
200
250
280
315
355
400
450
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW] *5
90
110
132
160
200
250
280
315
355
400
450
*1
120
155
167
192
258
317
353
394
436
490
550
100
130
140
161
216
265
295
330
365
410
460
Rated capacity [kVA]
Rated current [A]
Input power
Overload capability
150% of the rated current for 1 minute
*2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 575 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 660 to 690 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz] *4
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure
Braking system:
Braking torque:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter), resistance regenerative braking
(braking unit)
150%
2 kHz
45
45
95
95
95
135
135
135
135
135
135
IP00 open type
The MD spec above applies when Function code F80 = 0, 2, or 3. The keypad display shows "HD", however, when F80 =
0 or 2. (Initial value = 0)
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 690 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
*4 Operation at frequencies lower than the allowable carrier frequency of the synchronous motor may cause
demagnetization due to heating of the permanent magnet by output current harmonics. Always confirm your
synchronous motor’s allowable carrier frequencies.
*5 This nominal applied motor capacity assumes the use of a 690 V motor. When you use a motor with different voltage
specifications or want to choose a motor more accurately, make sure that the inverter's rated current is higher than or
equal to the motor's rated current.
2.1.1.2
LD spec (for light overloads)
3-phase 400V series

Standard stack
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-4
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW]
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
57
69
85
114
134
160
192
231
287
316
356
396
445
495
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
468
520
585
650
Rated current [A]
Input power
Overload capability
110% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
―
Allowable fluctuation
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz] *4
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system:
Braking torque:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter), resistance regenerative braking
(braking unit)
110%
2 kHz
30
30
30
37
37
45
IP00 open type
2-2
45
95
95
95
125
135
135
135
Chapter 2 Specifications

Phase-specific stack
630
710
800
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW]
710
800
1000
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
1044
1127
1409
Rated current [A]
1370
1480
1850
Overload capability
110% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Input power
Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4 *5
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system, braking torque
Braking system: Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter), resistance regenerative braking
(braking unit)
Braking torque: 110%
Carrier frequency [kHz] *4
2 kHz
Approx. mass [kg]
135 x 3
Enclosure
IP00 open type
135 x 3
135 x 3
The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD spec).
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 440 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
*4 Operating synchronous motors other than Fuji Electric’s standard synchronous motor (GNF2 type series) at low
carrier frequency may cause demagnetization due to heating of the permanent magnet by output current harmonics.
Always confirm the motor’s allowable carrier frequencies.
*5 A set of three phase-specific stacks (Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4) for U, V and W phases constitutes a single inverter
unit. (One unit each for output phases U, V, and W.)
3-phase 690V series

Standard stack
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-69
90
110
132
160
200
250
280
315
355
400
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW] *5
110
132
160
200
250
280
315
355
400
450
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
155
167
192
258
281
353
394
436
490
550
Rated current [A]
130
140
161
216
235
295
330
365
410
460
Input power
Overload capability
110% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 575 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 660 to 690 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz] *4
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure
Braking system:
Braking torque:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter), resistance regenerative braking
(braking unit).
150%
2 kHz
45
45
95
95
95
135
135
135
135
135
IP00 open type
The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD spec).
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 690 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
*4 Operation at frequencies lower than the allowable carrier frequency of the synchronous motor may cause
demagnetization due to heating of the permanent magnet by output current harmonics. Always confirm your
synchronous motor’s allowable carrier frequencies.
*5 This nominal applied motor capacity assumes the use of a 690 V motor. When you use a motor with different voltage
specifications or want to choose a motor more accurately, make sure that the inverter's rated current is higher than or
equal to the motor's rated current.
2-3
2.1.2
Multi-drive system
To drive a motor of 315 kW or above, you can combine multiple units of the FRENIC-VG in conjunction.
Observe the specifications given in this section.
2.1.2.1
MD spec (for medium overloads)
3-phase 400V series

Direct parallel connection (2 or 3 parallel systems)
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-4
200
Number of parallel systems
220
280
220
2
280
280
3
Nominal applied motor capacity
[kW]
355
400
500
630
710
800
Rated current [A]
716
789
988
1183
1482
1482
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
545
601
752
901
1129
1129
Input power
Overload capability
150% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Auxiliary control power input
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system:
Braking system, braking torque
Braking torque:
Carrier frequency [kHz]
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure

Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter, power regenerative), resistance
regenerative braking (braking unit).
150%
2 kHz
95 x 2
125 x 2
135 x 2
125 x 3
135 x 3
135 x 3
710
800
IP00 open type
Phase-specific stack + direct parallel connection (2 or 3 parallel systems)
Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4 *4
630
Number of parallel systems
630
800
630
2
3
Nominal applied motor capacity
[kW]
1000
1200
1500
1800
2000
2400
Rated current [A]
2223
2223
2812
3335
3905
4218
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
1694
1694
2143
2541
2976
3214
Input power
Overload capability
150% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Auxiliary control power input
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15% (phase-to-phase unbalance rate within 2% *4), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system:
Braking system, braking torque
Braking torque:
Carrier frequency [kHz]
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter, power regenerative), resistance
regenerative braking (braking unit).
150%
2 kHz
135 x 6
135 x 6
135 x 6
135 x 9
135 x 9
135 x 9
IP00 open type
The MD spec above applies when Function code F80 = 0, 2, or 3. The keypad display shows "HD", however, when F80 =
0 or 2. (Initial value = 0)
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 440 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
*4 A set of three phase-specific stacks (Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4) for U, V and W phases constitutes a single inverter
unit.
(Each of the U, V, W phases uses one stack, so six stacks for 2 parallel systems and nine stacks for 3 parallel
systems are required.)
Note: Direct parallel connection requires the optional high-speed serial communication support terminal block
(OPC-VG1-TBSI).
2-4

Direct parallel connection (2 or 3 parallel systems)
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-69
250
280
Number of parallel systems
355
400
450
400
2
450
3
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW]
450
500
630
710
800
1000
1200
Rated current [A]
504
561
694
779
874
1169
1311
602
670
829
930
1044
1397
1566
Rated capacity [kVA]
*1
Input power
Overload capability
150% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 575 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 660 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz, 575 to 600 V, 50/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz]
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure
Braking system:
Braking torque:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter, power regenerative), resistance
regenerative braking (braking unit).
150%
2 kHz
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 3
135 x 3
IP00 open type
The MD spec above applies when Function code F80 = 0, 2, or 3. The keypad display shows "HD", however, when F80 =
0 or 2. (Initial value = 0)
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 690 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 575 to 600 V, 50/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
Note: Direct parallel connection requires the optional high-speed serial communication support terminal block
(OPC-VG1-TBSI).
2-5
Chapter 2 Specifications
3-phase 690V series
2.1.2.2
LD spec (for light overloads)
3-phase 400V series

Direct parallel connection (2 or 3 parallel systems)
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-4
200
250
Number of parallel systems
315
250
2
250
315
3
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW]
400
500
630
710
800
1000
Rated current [A]
789
988
1235
1482
1482
1853
601
752
941
1129
1129
1412
Rated capacity [kVA]
*1
Input power
Overload capability
110% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz]
Braking system:
Braking torque:
2 kHz
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure

Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter, power regenerative), resistance
regenerative braking (braking unit).
110%
95 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 3
135 x 3
135 x 3
710
800
IP00 open type
Phase-specific stack + direct parallel connection (2 or 3 parallel systems)
Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4*4
630
710
Number of parallel systems
800
630
2
Nominal applied motor
3
1200
1500
1800
2000
2400
3000
Rated current [A]
2603
2812
3515
3905
4218
5273
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
1983
2143
2678
2976
3214
4018
capacity [kW]
Overload capability
Input power
Main power input
Auxiliary control power
input
110% of the rated current for 1 minute
*2
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2) and "PWM converter specifications" (section 6.3.2).
Single-phase, 380 to 480 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15% (phase-to-phase unbalance rate within 2% *4), Frequency: +5 to -5%
Braking system, braking
torque
Carrier frequency [kHz]
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure
Braking system:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter, power regenerative), resistance
regenerative braking (braking unit).
Braking torque:
110%
2 kHz
135 x 6
135 x 6
135 x 6
135 x 9
135 x 9
135 x 9
IP00 open type
The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD spec).
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 440 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
*4 A set of three phase-specific stacks (Type: FRN_ _ _BVG1S-4) for U, V and W phases constitutes a single inverter
unit. (Each of the U, V, W phases uses one stack, so six stacks for 2 parallel systems and nine stacks for 3 parallel
systems are required.)
Note: Direct parallel connection requires the optional high-speed serial communication support terminal block
(OPC-VG1-TBSI).
2-6

Direct parallel connection (2 or 3 parallel systems)
Type: FRN_ _ _SVG1S-69
250
315
Number of parallel systems
355
400
355
2
400
3
Nominal applied motor
capacity [kW]
500
630
710
Rated current [A]
561
694
779
874
1169
1311
Rated capacity [kVA] *1
670
829
930
1044
1397
1566
Input power
Overload capability
Refer to "Diode rectifier specifications" (section 6.2.2).
Auxiliary control power
input
Single-phase, 575 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz
Auxiliary fan power input
Single-phase, 660 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz, 575 to 600 V, 50/60 Hz *3
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15%, Frequency: +5 to -5%
Carrier frequency [kHz]
Approx. mass [kg]
Enclosure
1000
1200
110% of the rated current for 1 minute *2
Main power input
Braking system, braking
torque
800
Braking system:
Braking torque:
Depending on power regenerative braking (PWM converter, power regenerative), resistance
regenerative braking (braking unit).
150%
2 kHz
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 2
135 x 3
135 x 3
IP00 open type
The above specifications apply when Function code F80 = 1 (LD spec).
*1 This specification applies when the rated output voltage is 690 V.
*2 When the inverter output frequency converted is less than 1 Hz, the inverter may trip due to an overload earlier than
this specification depending on the ambient temperature or other conditions.
*3 For 575 to 600 V, 50/60 Hz, connector switching is required inside the inverter.
Note: Direct parallel connection requires the optional high-speed serial communication support terminal block
(OPC-VG1-TBSI).
2-7
Chapter 2 Specifications
3-phase 690V series
2.2
Common specifications
This section provides common specifications of the FRENIC-VG.
2.2.1
Installation environment and conformity with standards
Safety
standards
Item
Provided
as
standard
Explanation
Stop
function
Conformity with
standards
(1) US and Canadian Safety Standards
UL, cUL (UL508C, C22.2 No. 14)
(400V series only)
Product standards
(2) European Safety Standards IEC/EN 61800-5-2: SIL2
IEC/EN 62061: SIL2
Installation location
(Note 1)
Installation environment
Safe Torque Off (STO)*
The external digital input signal (terminal EN1 or EN2) forcibly turns off the inverter's
output circuit on the hardware side so that the motor coasts to a stop.
(3) Machinery Directive
EN ISO13849-1: PL-d
IEC/EN 60204-1: Stop category 0
(4) Low Voltage Directive
IEC/EN 61800-5-1 (Over voltage category: 3)
(5) EMC Directives
IEC/EN 61800-3, IEC/EN 61326-3-1
(Emission) EMC-filter (optional): Category C3
(Immunity) 2nd Env.
• Shall be installed indoor (free from corrosive gases, flammable gases, dusts, oil
mist). Pollution degree 2: IEC60664-1
• Shall not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Ambient temperatures
-10 to +40°C
Ambient humidity
5 to 95% RH (without condensation)
Altitude (Note 2)
• Lower than 1,000 m (For use in an altitude between 1,001 to 3,000 m, the output
current should be derated.)
• In an altitude between 2,001 to 3,000 m, the insulation of the control circuit is
degraded from reinforced insulation to basic one.
Vibration
Compliance standards: IEC61800-2
Amplitude 0.3 mm : 2 to 9 Hz
1 m/s2
: 9 to 200 Hz
Compliance standards: IEC61800-5-1
Amplitude 0.075 mm : 10 to less than 57 Hz
1G
: 57 to 150 Hz
Storage temperature
-25 to +70°C (-10 to max. +30°C for long-term storage)
Storage humidity
5 to 95% RH (without condensation)
(Note 1) Do not install the inverter in an environment where it may be exposed to lint, cotton waste or moist dust or dirt
which will clog the heat sink of the inverter.
If the inverter is to be used in such an environment, install it in a dustproof panel of your system.
(Note 2) Insulation and cooling (heat radiation) are dependent on the density of air.
Due to the atmospheric pressure, insulation breakdown easily occurs and the dielectric strength decreases. In
an altitude of 2,001 to 3,000 m, therefore, the insulation of the control circuit is degraded from reinforced
insulation to basic one.
In addition, as the air is thin, the cooling effect (radiation effect) decreases so that the temperature of the heat
generating devices such as inverter increases.
If you install the inverter in an altitude above 1,000 m, apply an output current derating factor as listed in Table
2.2.1-1.
Table 2.2.1-1: Output current derating factor in relation to altitude
Altitude
Output current derating factor
1,000 m or lower
1.00
1,001 to 1,500 m
0.97
1,501 to 2,000 m
0.95
2,001 to 2,500 m
0.91
2,501 to 3,000 m
0.88
2-8
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.2.2
Control methods
This section outlines the motor drive controls and methods.
Control method
Item
Explanation
• Vector control with a speed sensor
For induction motor
• Vector control without a speed sensor
• V/f Control
For synchronous motor
Vector control with a speed sensor (incl. magnetic pole position detection)
Test mode
Simulation mode
• Standard stack:
A single standard stack drives a single motor.
• Phase-specific stack: A set of three phase-specific stacks drives a single
motor.
(The control printed circuit board is mounted on the V-phase stack. As a
master, the V-phase stack controls two slave stacks (U- and W-phase ones).
Single drive
(Available under vector control with/without a speed sensor and V/f control)
Multi-drive
Driving method
Drives a multiwinding motor (Number of windings: 2 to 6).
Note that the same number of inverters as the number of windings is required.
Multiwinding motor drive
(Available only under vector control with a speed sensor)
The option OPC-VG1-TBSI should be used.
Direct parallel
connection
Drives a single motor (single winding) with two or three inverters.
(Available under vector control with a speed sensor and V/f control of induction
motors)
The option OPC-VG1-TBSI should be used.
Phase-specific stack
(Multi-drive function)
Drives a multiwinding motor of a large capacity with two or more inverters of
phase-specific stack type.
Direct parallel connection is possible.
The option OPC-VG1-TBSI should be used.
Figure 2.2.2-1 shows the skeleton configuration for drive systems.
Single drive
Standard stack
Multi-drive
Phase-specific stack
P,N
Direct parallel connection
P,N
Multiwinding motor drive
P,N
P,N
U,V,W
U,V,W
U
V
W
U,V,W
Motor
U,V,W
U,V,W
U,V,W
Motor
Motor
Motor
Multi-drive
Phase-specific stack (Direct parallel connection)
Phase-specific stack (Multiwinding motor drive)
P,N
P,N
U
V
W
U
V
W
U
V
W
Motor
U
V
Motor
Figure 2.2.2-1: Stack configuration summary by driving method
2-9
W
2.2.3
Control performance
The table below lists the control performance specifications of motors.
Vector control without a speed sensor
Vector control with a speed sensor
Synchronous motor control specifications
V/f Control
Induction motor control specifications
Vector control with a speed sensor
Item
Explanation
Speed
command
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
0.005% of maximum speed
0.005% of maximum speed
Setting
resolution
Torque
command,
Torque current
command
0.01% of the rated torque
Control
accuracy
Speed
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
Torque
±3% of the rated torque (when a dedicated motor is in use)
±0.1% of maximum speed (at 25 ±10°C)
±0.005% of maximum speed (at -10 to +40°C)
Control response speed
100 Hz
Maximum speed
150 Hz (when converted to the inverter output frequency)
Speed control range
1: 1500 (When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 1 to 1500 r/min to maximum
speed *1)
1: 6 (Constant torque range: Constant output range)
Speed
command
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
0.005% of maximum speed
0.005% of maximum speed
Setting
resolution
Torque
command,
Torque current
command
0.01% of the rated torque
Control
accuracy
Speed
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
Torque
±5% of the rated torque
±0.1% of maximum speed (at 25 ±10°C)
±0.1% of maximum speed (at -10 to +40°C)
Control response speed
20 Hz
Maximum speed
150 Hz (when converted to the inverter output frequency)
Speed control range
1: 250 (When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 6 to 1500 r/min to maximum
speed *1)
1: 4 (Constant torque range: Constant output range)
Setting resolution
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
0.005% of maximum frequency
0.005% of maximum frequency
Output frequency control
accuracy
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
±0.2% of maximum output frequency (at 25 ±10°C)
±0.01% of maximum output frequency (at -10 to +40°C)
Maximum frequency
150 Hz
Control range
0.2 to 150 Hz
1: 4 (Constant torque range: Constant output range)
Speed
command
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
0.005% of maximum speed
0.005% of maximum speed
Setting
resolution
Torque
command,
Torque current
command
0.01% of the rated torque
Control
accuracy
Speed
Analog setting:
Digital setting:
Torque
±3% of the rated torque (when a dedicated motor is in use)
±0.1% of maximum speed (at 25 ±10°C)
±0.005% of maximum speed (at -10 to +40°C)
Control response speed
100 Hz
Maximum speed
150 Hz (when converted to the inverter output frequency)
Speed control range
1: 1500 (When the base speed is 1500 r/min: 1 to 1500 r/min to maximum
speed *1)
*1 In the case of the PG pulse resolution 1024 P/R.
2-10
Control functions
The table below lists the outline of the control function specifications.
Item
Explanation
• Keypad:
Start/stop operation
and
keys (for forward/reverse rotation),
• Digital input signals:
• Keypad:
key (for stop)
"Switch forward/reverse operation," "Coast to a stop," "Reset
alarm," "Select multistep speed," etc.
and
keys
• External potentiometer: Three-terminal variable resistor (1 to 5 kΩ)
Speed command
• Analog input signals:
0 to ±10 V, 4-20 mA
• UP/DOWN control:
When the digital input signal UP or DOWN is ON, the speed
increases or decreases, respectively.
• Multistep speed:
The combination of the four digital input signals SS1, SS2,
SS4 and SS8 enables 15 different speeds to be selected.
• Digital signal:
Using an option card enables speed setting with "16-bit
parallel signals.
• Serial link operation:
RS-485 (provided as standard). Various communication
options are available.
• Jogging operation:
and
keys or digital input on [FWD] and [REV]
terminals in jogging mode.
(1) Induction motor
• +15 V, +12 V complementary output PG (insulation type): Maximum frequency
receivable: 100 kHz
• +5 V line driver output PG (insulation type)*1:
Maximum frequency
receivable: 500 kHz
(2) Synchronous motor: +5 V line driver output PG (insulation type)
Speed detection
• ABS type *2: Maximum frequency receivable: 100 kHz
• ABZ type *1: Maximum frequency receivable: 500 kHz
• High-resolution serial transmission system (TS5667N253: TAMAGAWA SEIKI,
Co., Ltd.) *3: 17 bits (one rotation) + 16 bits (multi-rotation)
*1 When the option card OPC-VG1-PG (insulation type) is mounted.
*2 When the option card OPC-VG1-PMPG is mounted.
*3 When the option card OPC-VG1-SPGT is mounted.
Speed control
PI calculation with feed-forward terms.
Switching of control parameters: Control parameters are switchable by external signals.
Transistor output signals:
Running status signal
Analog output signals:
Acceleration/deceleration
time
"Inverter running," "Speed arrival," "Speed detected,"
"Inverter overload early warning," "Torque limiting," etc.
"Motor speed," "Output voltage," "Torque," "Load factor," etc.
Specifies the acceleration/deceleration time for a run command to the motor (soft
start/stop).
• Four independent settings can be made for each of acceleration and deceleration.
• S-curve acceleration/deceleration can be selected in addition to linear acceleration/
deceleration
Speed setting gain
Proportional relationship between analog speed setting and motor speed can be specified
in the range of 0 to 200%.
Jump speed
Jump speed (3 points) and jump hysteresis width (1 point) can be specified.
Auto search for idling
motor speed
Automatically searches for the idling motor speed to be harmonized and starts to drive it
without stopping it.
Auto-restart after
momentary power failure
Possible to restart the inverter after a momentary power failure without stopping the motor
depending on the restart mode setting.
Slip compensation control
Compensates for decrease in speed according to the load for stabilized operation.
(Available for IM under V/f control.)
Droop control
The motor speed droops in proportion to output torque. (Not available under V/f control.)
2-11
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.2.4
Item
Explanation
Torque limit
Limits the torque to the predetermined values.
(Selectable from "common to 4 quadrants", "independent driving and braking", etc.)
Torque control
Controls the motor in accordance with the torque command setting.
PID control
PID control with analog input.
Possible to select whether to use the PID output as speed setting or auxiliary setting to be
added or subtracted to/from the main setting.
Cooling fan ON/OFF
control
Stops cooling fans when the motor is stopped and the temperature is low for lifetime
extension and noise reduction of the cooling fans.
Toggle monitor control
Monitors communication between the host equipment (PLC) and the inverter to see
whether the communication is normal.
Torque bias function
The combination of the fixed value (one step, with the polarity switching function by the
motor rotation direction) and external digital input signals provides three steps of torque
bias internal setting. Analog setting (with Hold function) is available.
Motor selection
Selectable from the three types of motors, by Function code F79. Switchable between the
three types of motors by the combination of digital input signals.
Detects the motor temperature. The connectable thermistor types are as follows.
Temperature detection
• NTC thermistor: Fuji Electric vector motor (MVK series) specification equivalent
• PTC thermistor: The trip level is specified by parameters. (Exclusively used for
protection from motor overheat.)
Self-diagnostic function
for PG detection circuit
Self-diagnoses the detection circuit of pulse encoder input signals (PA and PB).
Load adaptive control
Calculates the maximum allowable elevating speed (e.g., vertical carrier machine)
according to the load to improve the operation efficiency of the equipment.
UP/DOWN control
Speed setting by the combination of digital input signals UP, DOWN, and CLR ("Clear
ACC/DEC to zero")
Stop function
Three types of the stop functions by digital input signals STOP1, STOP2, and STOP3.
PG pulse output
Outputs motor PG signals or other input pulses with frequency divided by a fixed or
variable frequency divider.
Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the voltage on the
[PGP] terminal) transistor outputs, by means of a switch in the inverter unit.
Observer
Suppresses load disturbances and vibrations.
Offline tuning
Tunes the motor while the motor is stopped or running, for setting up motor parameters.
Online tuning
Tunes the motor parameters online to compensate for the temperature change.
Position control
Provided as
standard
Position control by servo-lock and integrated oscillation circuit
Option
OPC-VG1-PG (PR): For pulse command input of line driver type
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR): For pulse command input of open collector type
Pulse train, synchronous OPC-VG1-PG (PR): For pulse command input of line driver type
operation (option)
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR): For pulse command input of open collector type
Multiwinding
motor drive
Multiplexed function
system
Direct
parallel
connection*1
Phase-specific stack
(Multi-drive function)
Refer to Section 2.2.2 "Control systems." (Available only under vector control with a
speed sensor)
Requires the option OPC-VG1-TBSI. (Maximum number of multiplexed units: 6)
Refer to Section 2.2.2 "Control systems."
(Available under vector control with/without a speed sensor)
Requires the option OPC-VG1-TBSI. (Maximum number of multiplexed units: 3)
Refer to Section 2.2.2 "Control systems."
Drives a multiwinding motor of a large capacity or enables direct parallel connection, by
connecting two or more inverters composed of phase-specific stacks.
Requires the option OPC-VG1-TBSI.
*1 Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0021 or later.
2-12
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.2.5
Configuration/display functions
This section outlines the configuration and display functions.
Item
Explanation
Display
7-segment LED monitor and backlit LCD
Multilingual display
Japanese, English, Chinese, Korean
• Detected speed value
When the inverter is
running or stopped
• Speed command value
• Output frequency
• Torque current command • Torque command value
value
• Output current
• Power consumption
• Magnetic flux command
(motor output)
value
• Torque calculation value
• DC intermediate voltage
• PID command value
• PID feedback value
• Load shaft speed
• Ai adjusted value (1, 2)
• Ai adjusted value (Ai1)
• PID output value
• Optional monitor 1 to 6
• Output voltage
• Magnetic flux calculation
value
• Ai adjusted value (Ai2)
• Presence of digital input/output signal
• Motor temperature
• Heat sink temperature
• Load factor
• Input power
• Integral power
consumption
• Operation time
• Cumulative run time of the motor/Number of startups (for each motor), etc.
When function codes
are configured
Function code names and data are displayed.
Keypad
Alarm factors that appear:
• are (E-SX error)
• err (Mock alarm)
• arf (Toggle abnormality error)
• l0c (Start delay)
• dcf (DC fuse blown)
• lu
• d0
(Excessive positioning deviation)
• nrb (NTC thermistor wire break error)
• ec
(Encoder communications error)
• 0s
(Overspeed)
• 0c
(Overcurrent)
•
When an alarm
occurs
ecf (Safety stop circuit error) *1
(Undervoltage)
• et1 (Encoder error)
• 0h1 (Heat sink overheat)
• ef
• 0h2 (External alarm)
(Ground fault)
• er1 (Memory error)
• 0h3 (Inverter internal overheat)
• er2 (Keypad communications error)
• 0h4 (Motor protection)
• er3 (CPU error)
• 0l1 (Overload of motor 1)
• er4 (Communications error)
• 0l2 (Overload of motor 2)
• er5 (RS-485 communications error)
• 0l3 (Overload of motor 3)
• er6 (Operation error)
• 0lu (Inverter overload)
• er7 (Output wire fault)
• 0pl (Output phase loss)
• er8 (A/D converter error)
• 0u
(Overvoltage)
• er9 (Speed mismatch)
• p9
(PG wire break)
•
era (UPAC error) *1
• sif (Function safety card error) *1
• erb (Inter-inverter communications link • srf (Function safety card error)*1
error)
• snf (Function safety card error)*1
• erh (Hardware error)
*1 Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0021 or later.
2-13
Item
When a light alarm occurs
Explanation
The light-alarm display "l-al" appears.
The inverter retains the cause of the light alarm to display it.
Keypad
The following contents display by items.
• The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the latest and the
last three pieces of alarm detailed information to display them.
When an alarm occurs
• It also retains the detailed contents of the latest and the last 3 alarms (including
light alarms) to display them.
Loader
• The calendar clock function retains the date and time when an alarm occurred to
display them.
Precision: ±27 seconds/month (Ta = 25°C)
Data retention period: At least 5 years (at surrounding temperature of 25°C)
Historical trace *2
Reads out the sampling data held in the inverter and shows it graphically.
Sampling interval: 62.5 μs to 1 s
Real-time trace *2
Reads out the current data of the running inverter and shows it graphically in
real-time.
Sampling interval: 1 ms to 1 s
Traceback
Reads out the sampling data held in the inverter and shows it graphically when an
alarm has occurred.
Sampling interval: 62.5 μs to 1 s (400 μs for sampling data except current)
The sampling data is retained in the memory by the backup battery.
Data retention period: At least 5 years (at the surrounding temperature 25°C)
Operation monitor *2
I/O monitor, system monitor, alarm history monitor, etc.
Configuration of function
codes
Shows the configuration of the function codes, as well as enabling editing,
transmitting, comparing, and initialization.
Lights when DC power is applied to the inverter unit. Lights when only control power
is ON.
Compatibility
Communication
Maintenance
Charge lamp
• Retains and displays the cumulative life of the main circuit capacitor and the
cumulative run time of cooling fans.
Common functions
• Retains and displays the inverter operation time.
• Retains and displays the maximum output current and the maximum internal
temperature for the past one hour.
RS-485
I/O terminals for RS-485 communication.
Up to 31 inverter units can be connected in multi-drop connection.
Half-duplex system
USB
Accessible from the front, connector type: mini B
USB 2.0 Full Speed
Function code
data
Selecting the VG7 compatible mode makes it possible to use the VG7 function
codes as is on the FRENIC-VG (except function codes for the VG7 3rd motor).
Possible to read out VG7 function code data using the FRENIC-VG Loader and
write it as is into the FRENIC-VG. (Except special inverter versions.)
Various
communications
tools
T-Link, SX-bus, and CC-Link are fully compatible with the VG7 so that software in
the upper PLC is available as is. (Except special inverter versions.)
VG7
*2 Available in the paid-for version of FRENIC-VG Loader (WPS-VG1-PCL).
2-14
Protective functions
The table below lists the name of the protective functions, their description, and what appears on the LED monitor. If an
alarm code appears on the LED monitor, remove the cause of activation of the protective function referring to Chapter 11
"Troubleshooting."
Item
Related
function
code
Explanation
Display
DC fuse blown
If a fuse in the main DC circuit blows due to a short circuit in the IGBT
circuit or other reason, this protective function displays the error to prevent
the secondary damage. The inverter could be broken, so immediately
contact your Fuji Electric representative.
dcf
DC fan lock
This function is activated when the DC fan stops.
dfa
H108
Excessive
positioning
deviation
This function is activated when the positioning deviation between the
command and the detected values exceeds "Setting of function code o18
(Excessive deviation value) x 10" in synchronous operation.
Mounting an option makes o18 effective and displays it on the keypad.
d0
o18
Encoder error 1
This function is activated by an encoder data error or encoder failure
detection when the 17-bit high-resolution ABS interface
(OPC-VG1-SPGT) is used.
et1
Encoder
communications
error
This function is activated if an Encoder communication error occurs when
the 17-bit high resolution ABS interface (OPC-VG1-SPGT) is used.
ec
Safety stop circuit
error*1
This function is activated when the input to either one of EN1 and EN2 is
OFF for the duration exceeding 50 ms (which is regarded as a mismatch).
The alarm state can be reset only by restarting the inverter.
ecf
Ground fault
This function is activated when a ground fault is detected in the inverter
output circuit. If the ground-fault current is large, the overcurrent
protection may be activated.
This protective function is to protect the inverter. For the sake of
prevention of accidents such as human damage and fire, connect a
separate earth-leakage protective relay or an earth-leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB).
ef
Memory error
This function is activated when a memory error such as a data write error
occurs.
(The inverter memory uses a nonvolatile memory that has a limited
number of rewritable times (100,000 to 1,000,000 times). Saving data with
the full save function into the memory so many times unnecessarily will no
longer allow the memory to save data, causing a memory error.)
er1
Keypad
communications
error
H103
This function is activated if a communications error occurs between the
keypad and the inverter control circuit when the start/stop command given
from the keypad is valid (Function code F02 = 0).
F02
Note: Even if a keypad communications error occurs when the inverter is
being driven via the control circuit terminals or the communications
link, the inverter continues running without displaying any alarm or
issuing an alarm output (for any alarm).
er2
CPU error
This function is activated if a CPU error occurs.
er3
Network error
This function is activated if a communications error occurs due to noise or
other reason when the inverter is being driven via a T-Link, SX-bus, E-SX
bus, CC-Link, or field bus.
er4
o30, o31,
H107,
E01-E14,
E15-E28
RS-485
communications
error
This function is activated: if an RS-485 communications error occurs
when the inverter is being driven via the RS-485 and Function code H32 is
set to any of "0" through "2"; or if Function code H38 is set within the
range of 0.1 to 60.0 (s) and the communications link breaks for the
specified period or longer.
er5
H32, H33,
H38, H107
*1 Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0021 or later.
2-15
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.2.6
Item
Explanation
Display
Related
function
code
This function is activated:
• If two or more network options (T-Link, SX-bus, E-SX bus, and CC-Link)
are mounted.
Operation error
• If the SW configuration is the same on two or more PG options.
• If auto tuning (Function code H01) is attempted when any of the digital
input signals BX, STOP1, STOP2 and STOP3 is ON.
• If auto tuning is selected with Function code H01 but the
keypad is not pressed within 20 seconds.
er6
H01
H01
key on the
Output wiring
fault
This function is activated if the wires in the inverter output circuit are not
connected during auto-tuning.
er7
A/D converter
error
This function is activated if an error occurs in the A/D converter circuit.
er8
Speed not
agreed
This function is activated if the deviation between the speed command
(reference speed) and the motor speed (detected or estimated speed)
becomes excessive.
The detection level and detection time can be specified with function codes.
er9
UPAC error *1
This function is activated: if the UPAC option hardware fails; if a
communications error with main unit controller occurs; or the backup
battery is run out.
era
Inter-inverter
This function is activated if a communications error occurs in the
communications inverter-to-inverter communications link using a high-speed serial
link error
communication terminal block (option).
erb
E43, E44,
E45,
H108, H149
H107
Hardware error
This function is activated upon detection of an LSI failure on the printed
circuit board.
erh
Mock alarm
An alarm can be simulated by inputting an external signal (FTB), by
operating the keypad, or by using FRENIC-VG Loader.
err
E01-E14
H108, H142
Start delay
This function is activated when the torque current command value exceeds
the specified level (H140) and the detected or estimated speed value drops
below the specified stop speed (F37), and then the state is kept for the
specified duration (H141).
The detection level and detection time can be specified with function codes.
l0c
H108,
H140, H141
lu
F14
NTC thermistor
wire break error
This function is activated if the thermistor wire breaks when the NTC
thermistor is selected with Function code P30/A31/A131 for motor
M1/M2/M3.
This function works even at extremely low temperatures (approx. -30°C or
below).
nrb
P30,
A31, A131,
H106
Overcurrent
This function stops the inverter output when the output current to the motor
exceeds the overcurrent level of the inverter. When a synchronous motor is
controlled, the function is also activated if the current output to the
synchronous motor exceeds the overcurrent protection level (P44, P64,
P164).
0c
Heat sink
overheat
This function is activated if the temperature surrounding the heat sink (that
cools down the IGBTs) increases due to stopped cooling fans or other
reason.
0h1
Under voltage
This function is activated if the DC intermediate circuit voltage drops to the
insufficient voltage detection level or below for reasons such as a drop in
the power supply voltage. Note that, if F14 is set to 3, 4 or 5, no alarm is
output even if the direct intermediate circuit voltage drops. (Auto-restart
after momentary power failure)

Under voltage detection level
• 400V series: 360 Vdc
• 690V series: 470 Vdc
*1 Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0021 or later.
2-16
Explanation
Display
Related
function
code
External alarm
This function stops the inverter with the protective function by digital input
signal (THR).
Connecting an alarm contact of external equipment such as a braking unit or
braking resistor to the input terminal to which the THR signal is assigned
activates this function according to the contact signal status.
The diode rectifier (RHD) can be protected from overheating by connecting
the alarm output (for any alarm) to the diode rectifier (RHD) to the input
terminal to which the THR signal is assigned.
0h2
E01-E14,
H106
This function is activated if the temperature surrounding the control printed
Inverter internal
circuit board increases due to poor ventilation inside the inverter or other
overheat
reason.
0h3
Motor overheat
This function is activated if the temperature detected by the NTC thermistor
integrated in a dedicated motor for motor temperature detection exceeds the
motor overheat protection level (Function code E30).
0h4
E30, H106
Motor 1
overload
This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection if the
motor 1 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation level
specified by Function code F11.
0l1
F11, H106
Motor 2
overload
This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection if the
motor 2 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation level
specified by Function code A33.
0l2
A33, H106
Motor 3
overload
This function is activated by the electronic thermal overload protection if the
motor 3 current (inverter output current) exceeds the operation level
specified by Function code A133.
0l3
A133,
H106
Inverter
overload
This function is activated if the output current exceeds the overload
characteristic of the inverse time characteristic.
It stops the inverter output depending upon the heat sink temperature and
switching element temperature calculated from the output current.
0lu
F80
Output phase
loss
This function detects a break in inverter output wiring during running and
stops the inverter output.
(Available under vector control for IM with a speed sensor.)
0pl
H103, P01
A01, A101
Overspeed
This function is activated if the motor speed (detected or estimated speed)
exceeds 120% (adjustable with Function code H90) of the maximum speed
(F03/A06/A106).
0s
H90
Overvoltage
This function is activated if the DC intermediate circuit voltage exceeds the
overvoltage detection level for reasons such as a rise in the power supply
voltage, or increase in braking power from the motor.
Note that the inverter cannot be protected from excessive voltage (high
voltage, for example) supplied by mistake.

0u
Overvoltage detection level
• 400V series: 820 Vdc
• 690V series: 1230 Vdc
PG wire break
This function is activated if a wire breaks in the PA/PB circuit on the PG
terminal or in the PGP/PGM power supply circuit. It does not work under
vector control without a speed sensor or under V/f control.
This function is also activated if the use of the PG interface card
(OPC-VG1-PG, OPC-VG1-PMPG) is attempted with PG signal
disconnection or incorrect wiring.
p9
H104
E-SX bus tact
synchronizatio
n error
This error occurs when the tact cycle of the E-SX bus of the MICREX-SX
SPH3000 and the inverter control cycle are out of synchronization with each
other.
are
H108
Toggle
abnormality
error
The inverter monitors 2-bit signals of toggle signal 1 TGL1 and toggle signal
2 TGL2 which are sent from the PLC. When the inverter receives no
prescribed change pattern within the time specified by H144, this error
occurs.
arf
H107
2-17
Chapter 2 Specifications
Item
Item
Explanation
Display
Related
function
code
l-al
H106-H111
This function displays "l-al" on the keypad if a failure or warning
registered as a light alarm occurs. It outputs the light alarm signal on the Y
terminal but it does not issue an alarm output (for any alarm) (30A/B/C), so
the inverter continues to run.
Light alarm objects that can be registered (selectable individually)
Light alarm
(warning)
Motor overheat (OH4), Motor overload (OL1 to OL3),
NTC thermistor wire break error (nrb), External alarm (OH2),
RS-485 communications error (Er5), Network error (Er4),
Toggle abnormality error (ArF), Mock alarm (Err), DC fan lock (dFA),
Speed mismatch (Er9 ), E-SX error (ArE),
Motor overheat early warning (MOH),
Motor overload early warning (MOL),
Lifetime alarm (LiF), Heat sink overheat early warning (OH),
Inverter overload early warning (OL), Battery life expired (BaT),
Start delay (LOC)
Light alarm objects can be checked on the keypad.
Surge
protection
Functional
safety card
error *1
This function protects the inverter against surge voltages which might appear
between one of the power lines, using surge absorbers connected to the
main circuit power terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and control power terminals
(RO, TO).
Protective function for functional safety cards.
 For more information, refer to the functional safety card instruction
manual (INR-SI47-1541).
―
sif
srf
*1 Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0021 or later.
Note: All protective functions are automatically reset if the control power voltage drops to a level at which inverter control
circuit operation can no longer be sustained.
• The inverter retains the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the latest and the last three pieces of alarm
detailed information. However if the DC voltage between main circuit input terminals P(+), N(-) is lower than
necessary level, alarm information will not be saved.
• Stoppage due to a protective function can be reset by the RST key on the keypad or turning OFF and then ON
between the X terminal (to which RST is assigned) and the CM. This action is invalid if the cause of an alarm is
not removed.
• If there are multiple alarms, the inverter cannot reset until the causes of all the alarms are removed.
(The causes of alarms not removed can be checked on the keypad.)
• When an alarm categorized as a light alarm occurs, the 30A/B/C does not operate.
2-18
Motor specifications
2.3.1
Dedicated motor specifications (induction motor with a sensor)
2.3.1.1
Standard specifications for three-phase 400V series
Dedicated motor
rated output (kW)
30
Applicable motor
type (MVK_)
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
300
315
355
400
8187A 8207A 8208A 9224A 9254A 9256A 9284A 9286A 528KA 528LA 531FA 531GA 531HA 535GA 535GA 535HA 535JA
Moment of inertia of
0.34
rotor [kg•m2]
0.41
0.47
0.53
0.88
1.03
1.54
1.77
1.72
1.83
2.33
2.52
5.99
5.99
6.53
Rotor GD2
[kg•m2]
1.65
1.87
2.12
3.52
4.12
6.16
7.08
6.88
7.32
9.32
10.08 12.34 23.96
23.96
26.12 28.72
1.34
Rated speed /Max.
speed [r/min]
1500/3000
Vibration
V10 or less
Cooling fan
Voltage [V]
1500/2400
2.76
1500/2000
V15 or less
380,400,415 V/50 Hz,
400,440 V/60 Hz
400 V/50 Hz, 400, 440 V/60 Hz
―
Number of
phases/poles
Three-phase, 4P
Input power
[W]
150/210
80/
120
270/390
2200
3700
Current [A]
0.38/0.39 to 0.4
0.39/
0.4,
0.4
1.0/1.0,1.0
4.6/4.3,4.1
7.8/7.1,7.6
Approx.mass [kg]
2.3.1.2
7.18
235
280
296
380
510
570
710
760
1270
1310
1630
1685
1745
2230
2230
2310
2420
Common specifications
Item
Insulation class,
number of poles
Terminal structure
Explanation
Class F, 4P
Main terminal box (lug type):
Main circuit terminals x 3 or x 6, NTC thermistor terminal x 2 (for MVK8 series) or x 3 (for
MVK9 and MVK5 series; including one spare)
Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block):
Pulse encoder (PGP, PGM, PA, PB, SS), cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Mounting method
Foot mounted with bracket (IMB3),
Note: Contact your Fuji Electric representative for other mounting.
Degree of protection,
cooling method
IP44, totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. A cooling fan blows air
over the motor toward the drive-end.
Installation location
Indoors, 1000 m or less in altitude.
Ambient temperature,
humidity
-10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
Finishing color
Munsell N5
Standard conformity
MVK8 series: JEM1466 or JEC-2137-2000
Standard accessories
Pulse encoder (1024 P/R, +15 V, complementary output), NTC thermistor(s) (1 or 2), and
cooling fan
MVK9 or MVK5 series: JEC-2137-2000
Note 1: For applicable motors of 55 kW or above, the torque accuracy is ±5%. When higher accuracy is required,
contact your Fuji Electric representative.
Note 2: For dedicated motors other than 4-pole ones with the base speed of 1500 r/min, contact your Fuji Electric
representative.
2-19
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.3
2.3.1.3
External dimensions of dedicated motors

Figure A

Figure B

Figure C

Figure D
Motor
Dimensions [mm]
rated
Motor
output
type
Fig.
A
C
D
E
F
G
I
J
K
454
180 376 139.5 139.5 20
428
75
75
490
200 411 159 152.5
466
225 445 178
K1
K2
Shaft extension [mm]
KD
KL
L
M
N
R
XB
Z
Q
QR
S
Approx.
T
U
W
60 305 824.5 350 330 370.5 121 14.5 110 1.5 55m6 10
6
16
7
18
[kW]
30
MVK8187A
37
MVK8207A
A
45
MVK8208A
55
MVK9224A
723
75
MVK9254A
693.5
90
MVK9256A
711.5
110
MVK9284A
132
MVK9286A
160
MVK528JA
200
MVK528LA
220
MVK531FA
B
C
300
315
1015.5
155.5
174.5
184
605
280
143
228.5
628
209.5
80
515
30
85
364 915.5 390 360 425.5 133
95
391 1155 436 366
-
-
743
80
106
100 120
35
798
203
1157
1194
1308
1359
506
557
432
411 463.5
449 483.5
468
519 569.5
120 210
1604 560 557 588.5
254
140 240
1713 630 648
60m6
18.5
149
140
[kg]
235
280
11
65m6
2
168
544
228.5 30 1234 125
296
380
75m6 12
7.5
20
510
570
710
24
190
85m6
170
1
22
14
9
760
1230
1350
1690
1073 315 689 254
1425 150
D
-
640
216
1111
355 778 305
355
95m6
180 330
MVK535JA
1750
1820
28
1510 160
25
102 413
36
MVK535GA
355 MVK535HA
400
764
789.5
250 MVK531GA
280 MVK531HA
250 545 203
25
mass
1956 730 890
845
280
2
210
100m
6
2230
16
10
28
2310
2420
Note 1: The MVK9224A (55 kW) has an auxiliary terminal box for fan, in addition to the configuration shown in Figure B.
Note 2: Dimensional tolerance of rotary shaft height C
C ≤ 250 mm: 0 to -0.5 mm, C > 250 mm: 0 to 1.0 mm
2-20
Dedicated motor specifications (synchronous motor with a
sensor)
2.3.2.1
Standard specifications for three-phase 400V series
Dedicated motor
rated output
[kW]
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
Applicable motor
2139A
type (GNF)
2165A
2167A
2185A
2187A
2207A
2224B
2226B
2254B
2256B
2284B
2286B
Moment of
inertia of rotor
([kg•m2]
0.090
0.153
0.191
0.350
0.467
0.805
0.882
0.994
1.96
2.22
2.89
3.24
Rotor GD2
[kg•m2]
0.360
0.610
0.763
1.401
1.868
3.220
3.53
3.98
7.84
8.88
11.6
13.0
273
340
Base
speed/Max.
speed (r/min)
250
280
300
1500/2000
Rated current [A]
57/54
72
83
100
135
158
198
Vibration
Cooling fan
220
232
369
420
480
520
V10 or less
Voltage [V]
Frequency
[Hz]
200 to
240 V
50/60
Hz
Number of
phases/
poles
Three-p
hase,
2P
Input power 54 to 58/
[W]
70 to 78
Approx.mass
[kg]
2.3.2.2
Three-phase, 4P
90/120
0.18/
0.27/
0.22 to
0.24 to 0.25
0.21
Current [A]
127
380,400,415/400,415,440,460 V
50/60 Hz
400 to 420 V/50 Hz, 400 to 440 V/60 Hz
170
150/210
0.38/
0.39 to 0.4
192
247
325
420
80/120
270/390
0.36,0.38,0.41
/0.4,0.4,0.4,0.4
0.95,0.95,1/1,1,1,1
520
580
760
810
1020
1080
Common specifications
Item
Insulation class,
number of poles
Terminal structure
Explanation
Class F, 6P
Main terminal box (lug type): Main circuit terminals x 3 or x 6, NTC thermistor terminal x 2 or
x 3 (for 110 kW or higher; including one spare)
Auxiliary terminal box (terminal block): Cooling fan (FU, FV, FW)
Pulse encoder (connector type)
Rotation direction
CCW when viewed from the drive side
Mounting method
Legs mounted (IMB3)
Overload resistance
150% for 1 minute
Time rating
S1
Degree of protection,
Cooling method
IP44, Totally enclosed forced-ventilation system with cooling fan motor. A cooling fan blows
air over the motor toward the drive-end.
Installation location
Indoors, 1,000 m or less in altitude
Ambient temperature,
humidity
-10 to +40°C, 90% RH or less (no condensation)
Noise
30 kW to 90 kW: 80 dB (A) or less at 1 m apart, 110 to 300 kW: 90 dB (A) or less at 1 m apart
Vibration resistance
6.86 m/s2 (0.7G)
Finishing color
Munsell N1.2
Standard conformity
JEM 1487:2005
Standard built-in parts
Pulse encoder (1024 P/R, +5 VDC, A, B, Z, U, V, W line driver output),
one NTC thermistor (Two for 110 kW or above) and cooling fan
Note: Contact your Fuji Electric representative for other mounting.
2-21
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.3.2
2.3.2.3
External dimensions of dedicated motors
Shaft extension

Figure A

Figure B

Figure C

Figure D

Figure E

Figure F
Motor
Dimensions [mm]
rated
Motor
Flame
output
type
no.
Fig.
A
C
D
E
F
424.5 132 272
108
140
G
I
Shaft extension [mm]
J
K
KD KL
L
M
N
R
311 45
50
60 247 782.5 250 313
358
845.5
375
XB
Z
Q
QR
S
Approx.
T
U
W
Y
14.5 110 1.5 55m6 10
6
16 M10X20
7
18
[kW]
30
GNF2139A 132Hh
37
GNF2165A 160Lg
45
GNF2167A 160Jg
55
GNF2185A 180Lg
75
GNF2187A 180Jg
90
GNF2207A 200Jg
110
GNF2224B 225Kg
132
GNF2226B 225Hg
160
GNF2254B
200
GNF2256B
220
250
280
300
250Hg
A
470.5
B
501
510
C
D
180 375
159
618.5 200 410
178
576
711
761
E
160 319 139.5
829
225 446
250
508
505
203
127
20
157.5
139.5
177.5 25
200
250
228.5
376 75
75
80
85
428
549
100
320
356
906.5
350
300
370 405.5
910.5 390 330 400.5 121
881
280 570
140
254
80 107 1126.5 450 479
508
1249
526
538
626
588
28 628 100
142
32 763
203 1469 557 677
1349
506
GNF2286B
65m6
192
M12X25
85m6
247
325
420
168
170
102 303 1521 628 680
127
170
11
75m6 12 7.5 20
24
[kg]
520
22
580
760
640
35 878 120
2
1061.5 420 450 485.5
280
F
60m6
18.5
120
GNF2284B
280Jf
108
mass
190
1
14
95m6
28
9
M20×35
25
810
1020
1020
1080
1080
Note 1: Models of 110 kW output or above are exclusive to direct connection. For indirect connection, contact your Fuji
Electric representative.
Note 2: Dimensional tolerance of rotary shaft height C
C ≤ 250 mm: 0 to -0.5 mm, C > 250 mm: 0 to 1.0 mm
2-22
Exclusive cables for inverter connection
Item
Cable type
Specifications (Structure)
Motor side plug shape
Wiring length
(L dimension)
Straight plug
Right-angle plug
5m
CB-VG1-PMPG-05S
CB-VG1-PMPG-05A
15 m
CB-VG1-PMPG-15S
CB-VG1-PMPG-15A
30 m
CB-VG1-PMPG-30S
CB-VG1-PMPG-30A
50 m
CB-VG1-PMPG-50S
CB-VG1-PMPG-50A
Remarks
<Straight plug>
Cable configuration
<Right-angle plug>
diagram
• Wiring table
Wiring table
pin arrangement
• Pin arrangement
Motor side
connector #
Inverter side
connector #
1
9 or 20
Power +5 V
2
10 or 19
0V common
3
3
A-phase
4
2
A-phase
reversed
5
5
B-phase
6
4
B-phase
reversed
7
-
Z-phase *1
8
-
Z-phase
reversed *1
9
8
Magnetic pole
position F0
10
7
Magnetic pole
position* F0
11
13
Magnetic pole
position F1
12
12
Magnetic pole
position* F1
13
15
Magnetic pole
position F2
14
14
Magnetic pole
position* F2
15
-
Shielded wire
Function
Motor side Connector arrangement
White marking
indication position
Viewed from P in the above figure
Optional OPC-VG1-PMPG connector arrangement
*1 For the PG card (OPC-VG1-PMPG), Z
phase or Z phase reversed signals are not
required.
2-23
Inside the connector
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.3.2.4
Item
Specifications (Structure)
3-phase (U, V, W) interface
Main power
source
3-phase
power supply
50/60Hz
MOTOR
FRENIC-VG
U
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
【PGP】
【PGM】
【PA】
OPC-VG1-PMPG
【*PA】
Connection
example
【PB】
【*PB】
【F0】
【*F0】
【F1】
【*F1】
【F2】
【*F2】
【F3】
【*F3】
U
V
V
W
W
9 or 20
10 or 19
DC+5V 1
0V
2
A
5
4
B
3
4
5
Bnot
6
8
7
U
9
Unot
10
13
V
11
12
Vnot
12
15
W
14
Wnot
13
14
No
connection
SS
(*2)
3
2
SM
Anot
15
E
PG
E
E
*2 When the customer prepares the inverter connection cable, the shield (SS) of the PG shielded wire should
be connected to CN15 at the motor side. For inverter side, no connection is required.
Reference: Connectors and contact terminals recommended
The following specifications are recommended for customers who produce inverter connection cables.
At the inverter side connector:
10320-52F0-008
At the motor side connector contact terminal:
Sumitomo 3M Co., Ltd.
JN1-22-22F-PKG100
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited
Logo position
Max. applicable wire size:
AWG20 (Outer dia. of coated cable:
φ1.5 mm or less)
At the motor side connector: JN2DW15SL (Straight plug connector)
At the motor side connector: JN2FW15SL1 (Angle plug connector)
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited
Japan Aviation Electronics Industry, Limited
Note 1: The following specifications are recommended for PG shielded wires.
Type
Braided, shielded wires
Number of cores
14 or more
Dia. of lead
0.2 to 0.3 mm2
Outer dia. of coated cable
Max. φ1.5 mm
Twisted-pair cable (Outer dia.: Approx. φ10)
Note 2: The PKG in contact terminal models denotes that 100 terminals are packed in bulk.
Note 3: Joint with contact terminals should be presoldered.
2-24
Connection diagrams and terminal functions
2.4.1
Connection diagrams
2.4.1.1
Standard stack
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.4
The connection example of the inverter (standard stack) is shown below.
MFR
MFS
MFT
Power panel
MFR1
MFS1
MFT1
Fan power
input
(Note 13)
TH1 (Note 11)
MC-F1
FU
FV
FW
MF1
Diode rectifier
FRENIC-VG
(Note 15)
F1
MC1
R MCCB
S
T
Main power
input
R0
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
P
(Note 15)
73
F1
U
V
W
N
Grounding
terminal
DCF1
DCF2
MC1
(Note 13)
PWM
converter
MFR1
MFS1
MFT1
(Note 9)
MFR
MFS
MFT
Fan
power
input
(Note 5)
M1
3～
E
G
PWM converter system
(Note 14)
U
V
W
Transformer
To other
motor fan
(Note 11)
TH2
MC-F2
FU
FV
FW
MF2
Filter
P
N
+10VDC
(Note 6)
〔13〕
2
〔12〕
(Note 10)
0V
DC/DC
Charge
lamp
Voltage
detector
ACR
〔11〕
1
(Note 6)
Analog input 1 (+)
Input signal off (-)
[OFF] (Note 6)
Analog input 2 (+)
Input signal off (-)
[OFF]
〔Ai1
〕
(Note 8)
SW3
〔Ai2〕
〔M〕
+24VDC
Voltage input
(0 to ±10 V DC)
(FA)
(FB)
SW7,8 (CM)
(Note 8)
(Note 10) 0V
30A
30B
0V
Processing controller
(EN2)
30C
Y5A
(Note 12)
Digital input
Digital input 1
Select multistep speed SS1
Digital input 2
Select multistep speed SS2
Digital input 3
Select multistep speed SS4
Digital input 4
Select multistep speed SS8
(X1)
Digital input 5
ASR, Select ACC/DEC time RT1
Digital input 6
ASR, Select ACC/DEC time RT2
Digital input 7
Coast to a stop BX
Digital input 8
Reset alarm RST
Digital input 9
External alarm trip THR
(Note 7)
(REV)
Y5C
<Y1>
Signal output section
SOURCE
Signal input section
SINK
(PLC)
(Note 8) SW1
(FWD)
TH1
THC
15V 12V
SW6
(Note 8)
Speed magnetic(Note 6)
flux calculator
(PGP)
(Note 14) 0V
(PGM)
(PA)
Speed/
(PB)
magnetic-flux
(Note 10)
(EN1)
Run forward command /
Stop command
Run reverse command /
Stop command
(Note 6)
<Y2>
<Y3>
<Y4>
(X2)
PGP
PGM
PA
PB
SS,E
(X4)
〔AO3〕
(Note 10)
〔M〕
0V
DX+
DX-
USB connector
SW4
(Note 8)
2-25
Transistor output 1
Speed existence N-EX
Transistor output 2
Speed agreement 1
N-AG1
Transistor output 3
Speed arrival N-AR
Transistor output 4
Detected speed 1 N-DT1
(Note 7)
Analog output 1
Detected speed 1 N-FB1±
Analog output 2
Torque current command IT-REF±
Analog output 3
Speed setting 4 N-REF4
Analog output common
(X6)
(CM)
Relay output
Ready-to-run RDY
〔AO1〕
(X5)
(X9)
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
(30A,30B,30C)
Transistor output
common
〔AO2〕
(X7)
(Note 6)
PG
<CMY>
(X3)
(X8)
NTC
thermistor
detector
Open collector
output
Complementary
output
Current input
(4 to +20 mA DC)
3～
E
position detector
(PS)
Safety switch
PWM
Voltage
detector
(Note 5)
M2
Pulse Outpot
Analog intput
3
Gate
driver
(Note 10)
0V
〔TH1〕
〔THC〕
Current
U
V
W
(Note 7)
Analog output
R1 Auxiliary fan
To other inverter
T1 power input
stack
(Note 4)
Auxiliary
control
R0 power input
(Note 3)
T0
Fan power
input
Grounding
terminal
G
DCF1
DCF2
G
To other inverter
stack
(Note 7)
U
V
W
Contact outputs
F2
Transistor outputs
F2
(Note 15)
Speed setting
input
FRENIC-VG
(Note 15)
Ec
(Note 7)
Data transmission
(RS-485)
(Note 1)
For wiring protection, install the recommended circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage breaker (ELCB) (with
an overcurrent protection feature) on the input side (i.e., the primary side) of the PWM converter or diode
rectifier. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
(Note 2)
Aside from the MCCB or the ELCB, install the recommended electromagnetic contactor (MC) as necessary as
it will be used when disconnecting the power supply from the PWM converter or diode rectifier. Connect a
surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as an MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 3)
To retain an alarm output signal issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the protective function
or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect these terminals to the power
supply lines. Without power supply to these terminals, the inverter can run.
(Note 4)
Connect the fan power supply terminals to power source when capacity of inverter is above 90 kW.
(Note 5)
A grounding terminal for a motor. It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for
suppressing inverter noise.
(Note 6)
For wiring enclosed with
, use twisted or shielded wires. In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should
be connected to ground. If the inverter is significantly affected by external induction noise, however,
connection to
may be effective to suppress the influence of noise.
Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible. (recommended: 10 cm or
more). When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring, set them at right angles.
(Note 7)
The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X9],
transistor output terminals [Y1] to [Y4], relay contact output terminals [Y5A/C], analog output terminal [AO1] to
[AO3], and analog input terminals [Ai1] and [Ai2].
(Note 8)
Slide switches on the control printed circuit board (control PCB).
(Note 9)
The motor cooling fan voltage differs from motor to motor. Add a transformer as needed.
(Note 10)
are insulated inside the inverter unit.
(Note 11) Use the auxiliary contact (manual reset) of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC.
(Note 12) Jumper bars are mounted between safety terminals [EN1]/[EN2] and [PS] by factory default. To use the safety
function, remove the jumper bars before connection of safety devices.
(Note 13) Diode rectifiers and PWM converter types are available for use as the inverter power supply (converter).
Additionally, selection of recommended peripherals matching the converter to be used is necessary. Refer to
"Chapter 6 Converter System" for details.
(Note 14) When used in combination with a PWM converter, be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter
auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic
contactor (MC1). This is not necessary if used in combination with a diode rectifier. When using the product
with a non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to install an insulated transformer. For more information,
refer to "6.3.15-(5)" in Chapter 6.
(Note 15) Be sure to use the fuse (F1, F2). Use the fuses on the P (+) side for the 400V series or on both the P (+) and N
(-) sides for the 690V series.
2-26
Phase-specific stack
The following diagram shows the connection example of the phase-specific stack type, 630 to 800 kW (400V series)
inverter. A single phase-specific stack consists of 3 units of the standard stack (4-frame size). Connections required in
this case include stack-to-stack connections in addition to the connections described in "2.4.1.1 Standard stack". (The
following example assumes that they are connected to a PWM converter.)
* Stack-to-stack connection cables (signal wires) are bundled with the product.
(Note 1)
Connect a step-down transformer to ensure that the sequence circuit voltages are exactly the same as shown
in the connection diagram.
(Note 2)
When used in combination with a PWM converter, be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter
auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic
contactor (52). This is not necessary if used in combination with a diode rectifier. When using the product with
a non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated transformer. For more information, refer to
"6.3.15-(5)" in Chapter 6.
(Note 3)
Be sure to connect the power supply for the inverter's AC fan to the main power directly (not via contact b of
#73 or #52) so that the power can be fed through terminals R1 and T1.
(Note 4)
Create a sequence in which the PWM converter gets ready for operation before the run signal is input to the
inverter.
(Note 5)
Set the timer for 52T to 1 second.
(Note 6)
Configure one of the inverter's terminals X1 to X9 for use by the external alarm (THR).
(Note 7)
Ensure correct phase sequence when connecting wires to terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1.
2-27
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.4.1.2
2.4.2
Terminal functions
This section describes terminal functions of the inverter.
2.4.2.1
Terminal functions
Symbol
Name
U, V, W
Inverter output
terminal
Connects a three-phase motor.
For the stack type, one terminal connects to one phase (one stack).
DC input terminal
To be used for connection to the DC link bus. Connect to the diode rectifier or
PWM converter stack output terminals P (+) and N (-).
Auxiliary control
power input
Connects the same AC power lines as the main power input for a backup of
the control circuit power supply.
For information on terminal ratings, refer to "4.5.3-(4) Control power auxiliary
input terminals R0 and T0" in Chapter 4.
Auxiliary fan power
input
To be used for an auxiliary power input to AC cooling fans in the inverter (90
kW or higher). No connection is required for a 75 kW or lower inverter.
For information on terminal ratings, refer to "4.5.3-(5) Fan power auxiliary
input terminals R1 and T1 (R3 and T3 on the converter side)" in Chapter 4.
Inputs for detection
of fuse blown
Terminals for detecting a blowout of the DC fuse connected to the inverter
main input power supply.
When the circuit between terminals [DCF1] and [DCF2] is OFF, the inverter
detects the blowout of the DC fuse.
Remove the shorted piece and connect the DC fuse microswitch to use.
Grounding for
inverter
Grounding terminal for inverter chassis.
P (+), N (-)
Main circuit
R0, T0
R1, T1
Grounding
DCF1
DCF2
G
Functions
13
Power supply for
potentiometer
Power supply for a speed command potentiometer (Variable resistor: 1 to 5 kΩ).
The potentiometer of 1/2 W rating or more should be connected.
Specifications: 10 VDC, 10 mA max.
12
Voltage input for
speed setting
The speed is commanded according to the external analog voltage input.
Specifications
• Reverse operation with ± signals: 0 to ±10 VDC/0 to maximum speed
The maximum input is ±15 VDC; however, the voltage out of the range of
±10 VDC is regarded as ±10 VDC. (Upper limit: ±10 VDC)
• Input impedance:
Analog input 1
Analog input 2
Analog input
Ai1
Ai2
10 kΩ
(1) Analog input voltage from external equipment.
Possible to assign various signal functions (Input signal off, Auxiliary
speed setting 1, Torque limiter *), selected with Function codes E49 and
E50 to these terminals.
(2) Only for terminal [Ai2], the input is switchable between voltage and
current with the SW3 configuration.
(3) To use terminal [Ai2] for current input speed setting (N-REFC), turn SW3
to the I position, set F01 or C25 to "9" and set E50 to "26."
After that, check that the current input is normal on the I/O check screen*.
*
For more information, refer to the separate volume "Unit Type Function
Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
Specifications
• Voltage input: 0 to ±10 VDC, Input impedance: 10 kΩ
The maximum input is ±15 VDC; however, the voltage out of the range of
±10 VDC is regarded as ±10 VDC. (Upper limit: ±10 VDC)
•
11, M
Analog input
common
Current input (only on [Ai2]): Input impedance 250 Ω
The maximum input is 30 mADC; however, the current out of the range of
20 mADC is regarded as 20 mADC. (Upper limit: 20 mADC)
Common for analog input signals ([12], [Ai1] and [Ai2]).
Isolated from other control circuit common terminals [CM], [CMY] and [PGM].
2-28
Name
Functions
FWD
Run forward/stop
command
When terminals [FWD] and [CM] are closed, the motor runs in the forward
direction; when they are opened, the motor decelerates to a stop.*1
REV
Run reverse/stop
command
When terminals [REV] and [CM] are closed, the motor runs in the reverse
direction; when they are opened, the motor decelerates to a stop.*1
X1
X2
X3
X4
X5
X6
X7
X8
X9
Digital input 1
Digital input 2
Digital input 3
Digital input 4
Digital input 5
Digital input 6
Digital input 7
Digital input 8
Digital input 9
(1) Various signals such as "Coast to a stop," "External alarm trip," and
"Select multistep speed" can be assigned to these terminals by setting
Function codes E01 to E09.*2
(2) It is possible to switch the operation mode of each terminal with Function
code E14. *2
When short-circuited: ON (Active ON)
When short-circuited: OFF (Active OFF)
*1
Input mode, i.e. SINK/SOURCE, is changeable by using SW1.
For the location of SW1, refer to "2.4.2.2 Setting up the slide switches".
*2
For more information on setting the functions, refer to "4.3 Function code
details" in Chapter 4 of the separate volume "Unit Type Function Code
Edition" (24A7--0019).
[General-purpose digital input
circuit specifications]
PLC
<Control circuit>
Operating
voltage
SINK
24VDC
SW1
X1 to X9
6.6kΩ
Digital input
CM
EN1
EN2
Input terminal for
safety function
Minimum
Maximum
ON level
0V
2V
OFF level
22 V
27 V
ON level
22 V
0V
27 V
2V
―
4.5 mA
―
0.5 mA
OFF level
(SOURCE)
Operating current in ON state
(with an input voltage of 0 V)
Allowable leak current in the
OFF state
SOURCE
FWD,REV,
Item
Operating
voltage (SINK)
When [EN1]-[PS] or [EN2]-[PS] is opened (OFF), the switching element of the
inverter main circuit turns OFF and the inverter output transistor stops its
operation.
(1) When not using the safety function, short the circuit between [EN1]-[PS]
and [EN2]-[PS] with jumper bars. (Factory default: Shorted with jumper
bars. Keep the short bars connected.)
(2) The input mode of terminals [EN1] and [EN2] is fixed at SOURCE. It
cannot be switched to SINK.
Terminal EN circuit specification
PS
<Control circuit>
EN1
Item
24VDC
6.6kΩ
EN2
6.6kΩ
Minimum
Maximum
22 V
27 V
0V
2V
Operating current in ON
state
(with an input voltage of 0 V)
―
4.5 mA
Allowable leak current in the
OFF state
―
0.5 mA
Operating
voltage
(SOURCE)
ON level
OFF level
CM
PS
[EN] terminal power
Power terminal exclusive to terminals [EN1] and [EN2].
Rated voltage: +24 VDC (based on terminal [CM])
PLC
PLC signal power
(1) Connects to PLC (Programmable Logic Controller) output signal power
supply. Rated voltage: +24 VDC (Allowable voltage fluctuation range: +22
to +27 VDC), Maximum 100 mA
(2) This terminal is also used to supply power to the load connected to the
transistor output terminals. Refer to "transistor output" described later in
this table for more information.
CM
Digital input common
Common terminals for digital input signals
Electrically isolated from terminals [11], [M] and [CMY].
2-29
Chapter 2 Specifications
Symbol
Symbol
Name

Functions
Using a relay contact to turn any of [FWD], [REV] and [X1] to [X9] ON or OFF
Figure 2.4.2-1 shows two examples of a circuit configuration using a relay contact. In circuit (a), the
slide switch SW1 is turned to SINK and in circuit (b), to SOURCE.
This terminal section operates on minute current, so use a minute load relay. Using a general load
relay may cause malfunction.
(Recommended product: Fuji control relay Model HH54PW)
<Control circuit>
<Control circuit>
PLC
PLC
SINK
SINK
24VDC
SW1
SW1
SOURCE
FWD,REV,
X1 to X9
CM
24VDC
SOURCE
FWD,REV,
X1 to X9
6.6kΩ
CM
(a) With the switch turned to SINK
6.6kΩ
(b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Digital input
Figure 2.4.2-1: Circuit configuration using a relay contact

Using a programmable logic controller (PLC) to turn any of [FWD], [REV] and [X1] to [X9]
ON or OFF
Figure 2.4.2-2 shows two examples of a circuit configuration using a programmable logic controller
(PLC). In circuit (a), the slide switch SW1 is turned to SINK and in circuit (b), to SOURCE.
Circuit (a) uses an external power supply. When using this type of circuit, observe the following.
• Connect the + node of the external power supply (which should be isolated from the PLC's power) to
terminal [PLC] of the inverter.
• Do not connect terminal [CM] of the inverter to the common terminal of the PLC.
<Control circuit>
<Control circuit>
Programmable
logic controller
PLC
PLC
Programmable
logic controller
SINK
24VDC
SINK
24VDC
SW1
SW1
FWD,REV,
X1 to X9
CM
24VDC
SOURCE
FWD,REV,
X1 to X9
6.6kΩ
CM
(a) With the slide switch turned to SINK and an
external power supply being used
SOURCE
6.6kΩ
(b) With the switch turned to SOURCE
Figure 2.4.2-2: Circuit configuration using a PLC
Analog output

Ao1
Ao2
Ao3
For details about the slide switch configuration, refer to "2.4.2.2 Setting up the slide switches".
Analog output 1
Analog output 2
Analog output 3
Output of monitor signals with analog DC voltage. Various signals such as
"Detected speed," "Speed setting," and "Torque current command" can be
assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E69 to E71. For more
information, refer to "4.3 Function code details" in Chapter 4 of the separate
volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
Specifications
• Voltage output:
0 to ±10 VDC, Connectable impedance: Min. 3 k
• Gain adjustment range: 0 to ±100 times
M
Analog output
Common terminals
Common terminals for analog output signals ([Ao1], [Ao2] and [Ao3]).
Isolated from other control circuit common terminals [CM], [CMY] and [PGM].
2-30
Name
Functions
Y1
Y2
Y3
Y4
Transistor output 1
Transistor output 2
Transistor output 3
Transistor output 4
Various signals such as "inverter running," "Speed valid," and "Speed
agreement" can be assigned to these terminals by setting Function codes E15
to E18.
For more information, refer to "4.3 Function code details" in Chapter 4 of the
separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
* It is possible to switch the operation mode for transistor output terminals
[Y1]-[Y4] and [CMY] between "Active ON" (ON when the signal is output)
and "Active OFF" (OFF when the signal is output).
[Transistor output circuit specification]
Transistor output
<Control circuit>
Item
Operating
voltage
Maximum
ON level
2V
OFF level
27 V
Y1 to Y4
Operating load current in
the ON state
50 mA
CMY
Leakage current when
OFF
0.1 mA
Figure 2.4.2-3: Transistor output circuit
Note 1: When a transistor output drives a control relay, connect a
surge-absorbing diode across relay's coil terminals.
Note 2: Through terminal [PLC], power can be supplied to the relay.
Short-circuit between terminals [CMY] and [CM] in this case.
[Terminal PLC specifications] 24 VDC, Allowable voltage fluctuation range: 22
to 27 VDC, 100 mA max.
CMY
Transistor output
common
Common terminal for transistor output signals.
Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [11], [M], and [PGM].
Y5A
Y5C
General-purpose
relay output
(1) The relay contact (1a) selects and outputs the same various signals as
those from terminals [Y1] to [Y4].
(2) It is possible to switch the operation mode for these terminals with
Function code E28.
Contact output
• When ON signal is issued, [Y5A]-[Y5C] is short-circuited (Excited:
"Active ON").
• When ON signal is issued, [Y5A]-[Y5C] is opened (Not excited: "Active
OFF").
30A
30B
30C
Alarm output (for any
alarm)
(1) Outputs a contact signal (relay contact, 1C) when the protective function
stops the inverter.
(2) It is possible to switch the operation mode for these terminals with
Function code F36.
• When ON signal is issued, [30A]-[30C] is short-circuited (Excited:
"Active ON").
• When ON signal is issued, [30A]-[30C] is opened (Not excited: "Active
OFF").
[Contact output specification]
Contact rating: 250 VAC 0.3 A cosφ＝0.3, 48 VDC 0.5 A (resistance load)
• The contact outputs (terminals Y5A/C, 30A/B/C) are mechanical contacts. Frequent ON/OFF operations
cannot be permitted.
The guideline for the life of relay contacts is 200,000 times if turned ON/OFF at 1 second intervals at rated
load. Signals turned ON/OFF at high frequency should be output from terminals Y1 to Y4.
Furthermore, even if using an AC power supply, the contact life may be shorter with loads for which the
contact current direction is fixed (loads with half-wave rectifier circuit, etc., e.g., timers, power supply devices
for motor electromagnetic brakes).
In cases such as this, instead of connecting the load directly to the contact output terminals, connect a control
relay, etc. (separately installed) which satisfies load conditions to the contact output terminals, and then
connect to the load via this relay.
2-31
Chapter 2 Specifications
Symbol
Communication
Symbol
DX+
DX-
USB
connector
PA
PB
Name
RS-485
communications
ports 2 (Terminal
block)
USB port
Pulse generator
2-phase signal input
Functions
Input/output terminals to transmit data through the RS-485 communications
link between the inverter and a computer or other equipment such as a PLC.
(For setting of the terminating resistor, refer to "2.4.2.2 Setting up the slide
switches".
A USB port connector (mini B) that connects an inverter to a computer.
Using FRENIC-VG Loader (inverter support software) running on the
computer supports editing the function codes, transferring them to the
inverter, verifying them, test-running the inverter and monitoring the inverter
running status.
In addition, using an optional software enables traceback operation.
The PG interface uses a complementary output mode.
[PA]: Input terminal for A phase of the pulse generator
[PB]: Input terminal for B phase of the pulse generator
When 12 V power supply is in use: H level ≥ 9 V, L level ≤ 1.5 V
When 15 V power supply is in use: H level ≥ 12 V, L level ≤ 1.5 V
Input pulse frequency: 100 kHz or below, Duty:
50±10%
Wiring length: 100 m or less
PGP
Pulse generator
power output
terminal
(Note) False detection may occur due to noise. Make the wiring length as
short as possible and take sufficient noise control measures.
Output terminals of power supply of pulse generator.
The output voltage is switchable between 12 V and 15 V with the slide switch
SW6 on control print circuit board.
• +15 Vdc ±10%, maximum current: 270 mA (default status: 15V)
Speed detection
• +12 Vdc ±10%, maximum current: 270 mA
PGM
Common terminal
(For the output voltage switch SW6, refer to "2.4.2.2 Setting up the slide
switches".)
Common terminal for pulse generator power/signal. Electrically isolated from
terminals [11], [M] and [CMY]. Not electrically isolated from terminal [CM], but
not equivalent voltage.
FA
FB
Pulse generator
output
(1) The signal divided to 1/n from the original pulse generator signal is
output. n is programmable switch with Function code E29.
(2) Switchable between open collector and complementary (equivalent to the
voltage on terminal [PGP]) transistor outputs.
Default status: open collector
(For switching, refer to "2.4.2.2 Setting up the slide switches".)
Open collector
Item
<Control circuit>
Operating
voltage
FA,FB
CM
Maximum
ON level
2V
OFF level
Indefinite (dependent
on the receiving side)
Operating load current in
<Pulse receiver> the ON state
15 mA
15 V
Rated voltage
Complementary:
<Control circuit>
Operating
voltage
15kΩ
Temperature
detection
Common terminal
NTC/PTC thermistor
connection
THC
Common terminal
High level
Low level
Minimum
Maximum
PGP-3V
―
2V
―
FA,FB
Operating current in the ON
state
―
20 mA
CM
Allowable leak current in the
OFF state
―
0.5 mA
10Ω
CM
TH1
Item
<Pulse receiver>
PGP
Common terminal for pulse generator output [FA] and [FB].
Monitors the motor temperature with NTC or PTC thermistor.
For a PTC thermistor, the motor overheat protection level can be specified
with Function code E32.
Common terminal for NTC and PTC thermistors.
Electrically isolated from terminals [CM], [CMY] and [PGM].
2-32
Setting up the slide switches
Switching the slide switches (see Figure 2.4.2-4: Location of the slide switches on the control PCB) located on the PCB
allows you to customize the operation mode of input/output terminals such as analog outputs.
To access the slide switches, remove the front cover so that you can see the control PCB. (Open also the keypad
enclosure.)
 For information on removing the front cover and opening/closing the keypad case, refer to "4.2.2.2 Procedure for
removing and attaching the front cover" in Chapter 4.
Table2.4.2-1: Function of each slide switch
Switch
SW1
Function
Switches the service mode of the digital input terminals between SINK and SOURCE.
• This switches the input mode of digital input terminals [X1] to [X9], [FWD] and [REV] to be used as
the SINK or SOURCE mode.
• Factory default: SINK
SW2
Reserved for particular manufacturers.
SW3
Switches the input mode of the terminal [Ai2]
between voltage and current.
SW3
Input form
Voltage input (Factory default)
V position
Current input
I position
Terminal Ai2 is available as a current input terminal only when the speed setting is <N-REFC>.

SW4
Refer to Chapter 4 of the separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
Switches the terminating resistor of RS-485 communications port 2 on the terminal block ON and
OFF.
• If the inverter is connected to the RS-485 communications network as a terminating device, turn
the switch to ON.
SW5
Reserved for particular manufacturers.
SW6
Switches the output voltage of terminal [PGP] between 12 V and 15 V.
Select the voltage level that matches the power voltage of the pulse encoder to be connected.
SW6
Output voltage
SW7
SW8
12 V
12 V
15 V (Factory default)
15 V
Switches the output mode of terminals [FA] and [FB] between open collector output and
complementary output.
SW7
(Terminal [FA])
SW8
(Terminal
[FB])
Open collector output (Factory default)
1
1
Complementary output
2
2
Output form
2-33
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.4.2.2
The following diagram shows the location of slide switches on the control PCB for the input/output terminal configuration.
SW5
SW8 SW7
SW1
SW3
SW2
SW6
SW4
Figure 2.4.2-4: Location of the slide switches on the control PCB
SW1
SINK
Factory
default
SOURCE
SW2
SW3
SW4
V
SW5
SW6
SW7
SW8
OFF
I
ON
15V
1
12V
2
－
(1)
Use a pointed tool (such as the tip of tweezers) to move the switch. Be careful not to touch other
electronic components. Push the slider firmly to the edges as the connection is open when the slider is in
the intermediate position. SW2 and SW5 are switches for the manufacturer, so please do not move the
positions.
(2)
When moving the switches, check that the direct intermediate circuit voltage between the P (+) and N (-)
terminals of the major circuit has fallen to a safe voltage (+25 VDC or lower) using a tester after
confirming that the LED monitor and the charge lamp have turned off and 10 minutes have elapsed
from power off.
2-34
Multi-drive system connection diagrams
2.4.3.1
Direct parallel connection
In direct parallel connection, two or more inverter units drive one single-winding motor. Up to three inverter units can be
connected in direct parallel connection.
For more information, refer to "9.4 Direct parallel connection system" in Chapter 9.
(Note 9)
MFR
MFS
MFT
Power panel
Motor fan
power input
Fan power
input
Transformer
FU
FV
FW
(Note 13)
F
MC1
(Note 17)
73
F
U
V
W
N
DCF1
DCF2
G
MC1
(Note 13)
PWM converter system
Auxiliary
control
power input
(Note 3)
Auxiliary fan
power input
(Note 4)
PWM
converter
(Note 19)
P
Filter
R0
T0
R1
T1
Ec
(FWD
)
To other
inverter stack
(Note 7)
(Note 15)
(REV)
FTX
(X7:BX)
U2
V2
W2
(a)
G
DC/DC
Gate
driver
Voltage
detector
ACR
Current
detector
〔TH1〕
〔THC〕
0V
(Note 10)
0V (PGP)
(PGM)
(PA)
(PB)
Processing
controller
Speed/
magnetic-flux
position
detector
OPC-VG1-TBSI
【TX】
【RX】
30A
30B
(CM)
Stack fan
power input
MF
Grounding (Note 5)
terminal
Charge
lamp
Signal input section
R MCCB
S
T
Main
power
input
R0
(Note 2)
FU
FV
FW
FRENIC-VG
Slave Stack
<INV2>
Diode rectifier
(Note 1)
(Note 11)
Thermal relay
30C
(Note 6)
Y5A
Y5C
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
(30A,30B,30C)
Relay output
Ready-to-run RDY
(Note 7) (Note 16)
U2
V2
W2
(a) (Note 18)
F
P
(Note 17)
F
N
Auxiliary fan
power input
R1
T1
(Note 4)
Digital input
<Relay sequence>
(Note 15)
(Note 16)
<INV1>
<INV2>
<INV1>
30C
30C
Y5C
30
30
RDY
30A
30A
Y5A
RDY
(Note 7)
(Note 15)
<INV2
>
R0
T0
FX
(FWD
)
RX
(REV)
FTX
(X7 BX)
(CM)
FWD
REV
Y5A
FTX
RDY
FX
Voltage
detector
U1
V1
W1
G
E
Gate
driver
ACR
Current
detector
(Note 6)
〔TH1〕
〔THC〕
0V
(Note 10)
(Note 6)
0V (PGP)
(PGM)
Speed/
(PA)
magnetic-flux
(PB)
position
Processing
controller
detector
OPC-VG1-TBSI
【TX】
【RX】
30A
30B
(Note 6)
Y5C
RDY
DC/DC
U
V
W
30C
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
(30A,30B,30C)
Y5A
Y5C
Relay output
Ready-to-run RDY
(Note 7) (Note 16)
RX
2-35
M
3～
Grounding (Note 5)
terminal
Charge
lamp
Signal input section
DCF1
DCF2
G
(Note 3)
(Note 14)
Optical
fiber cable
FRENIC-VG
Master Stack
<INV1>
TH1
THC
NTC
thermistor
(Note 9)
PGP
PGM
PG
PA
PB
SS,E
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.4.3
(Note 1)
For wiring protection, install the converter-specific recommended circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage
breaker (ELCB) (with an overcurrent protection feature) on the input side (i.e., the primary side) of the
converter. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
(Note 2)
Aside from the MCCB or the ELCB, install the converter-specific recommended electromagnetic contactor
(MC) as necessary as it will be used when disconnecting the power supply from the converter. Connect a
surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as an MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 3)
To retain an alarm output signal issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the protective function
or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect these terminals to the power
supply lines. Without power supply to these terminals, the inverter can run.
(Note 4)
Connect to the fan power supply terminals for cases above 90 kW.
(Note 5)
A grounding terminal for a motor. It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for
suppressing inverter noise.
(Note 6)
For wiring enclosed with
, use twisted or shielded wires. In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should
be connected to ground. If the inverter is significantly affected by external induction noise, however,
connection to
may be effective to suppress the influence of noise.
Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible (recommended: 10 cm or
more). When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring, set them at right angles.
(Note 7)
The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X9],
transistor output terminals [Y1] to [Y4], relay contact output terminals [Y5A/C], analog output terminal [AO1] to
[AO3], and analog input terminals [Ai1] and [Ai2].
(Note 9)
The motor cooling fan voltage differs from motor to motor. Add a transformer as needed.
(Note 10)
are insulated inside the inverter unit.
(Note 11) Use the auxiliary contact (manual reset) of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC.
(Note 13) Available converters include diode rectifiers and PWM converter types. Additionally, selection of
recommended peripherals matching the converter to be used is necessary. Refer to "Chapter 6 Converter
System" for details.
(Note 14) Direct parallel connection requires the optional high-speed serial communication support terminal block
(OPC-VG1-TBSI). The option comes with an optical cable (5 m).
If the optical cable in use is bent (at a curvature of 35 mm or smaller), an alarm (Inter-inverter communications
link error: erb) may occur. Lay the optical cable at a curvature of 35 mm or greater.
(Note 15) For the safety, configure the sequence circuit that causes all inverters running in direct parallel connection to
coast to a stop (BX signal) when an inverter failure (heavy alarm) occurs. Do not assign BX signal via the
communications link.
(Note 16) Configure the circuit that inputs a run command after the inverter ready-to-run signals on all inverters running
in direct parallel connection are established. A run command and reset signal are valid only when they are
entered to the master inverter. (There is no problem with them if entered via the communications link.)
(Note 17) Be sure to use the fuse (F). Use the fuses on the P (+) side for the 400V series or on both the P (+) and N (-)
sides for the 690V series.
(Note 18) When a motor is run in a direct parallel connection system, there is a restriction on the wiring length between
the inverter and motor.
Refer to "9.4.8 Wiring inductance" and ensure that the wiring length between the inverter and motor
is greater than the minimum wiring length.
(Note 19) When used in combination with a PWM converter, be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter
auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic
contactor (MC1). This is not necessary if used in combination with a diode rectifier. When using the product
with a non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated transformer.
For more information, refer to item (5) in section "6.3.15".
2-36
Multiwinding motor drive
Multiwinding motor drive system controls a special motor having more than one winding.
An inverter unit per motor winding is required. Generally, this system applies when VG7 or older inverter series are
updated. (Vector control with a speed sensor is the only system which can be applied.)
(Note 9)
MFR
MFS
MFT
Power panel
Motor fan
power input
Fan power
input
Transformer
FU
FV
FW
(Note 13)
R0
F
MC1
(Note 18)
73
F
DCF1
DCF2
G
(Note 13)
PWM converter system
PWM
converter
Auxiliary
control
power input
(Note 3)
Auxiliary
fan power
input
(Note 4)
Filter
R0
T0
R1
T1
Ec
(FWD)
To other
inverter stack
(Note 7)
(Note 15)
(REV)
FTX
(X7:BX)
G
Grounding (Note 5)
terminal
Charge
lamp
Gate
driver
DC/DC
Current
detector
〔TH1〕
〔THC〕
ACR
Voltage
detector
0V
(Note 10)
0V (PGP)
(PGM)
Speed/
(PA)
magnetic-flux
(PB)
position
Processing
controller
detector
OPC-VG1-TBSI
【TX】
【RX】
30A
30B
(CM)
Stack fan
power input
MF
U2
V2
W2
U
V
W
N
MC1
(Note 19)
P
Signal input section
R MCCB
S
T
30C
(Note 6)
Y5A
Y5C
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
(30A,30B,30C)
Relay output
Ready-to-run RDY
(Note 7) (Note 16)
F
(Note 18)
F
P
N
Auxiliary fan
power input
R1
T1
(Note 4)
<Relay sequence>
(Note 15)
(Note 16)
<INV1>
<INV2>
<INV1>
30C
30C
Y5C
30
30
RDY
30A
30A
Y5A
RDY
(Note 7)
(Note 15)
<INV2>
R0
T0
FX
(FWD
)
RX
(REV)
FTX
(X7 BX)
(CM)
FWD
REV
Y5A
FTX
RDY
FX
Voltage
detector
U
V
W
U1
V1
W1
G
E
Gate
driver
ACR
Current
detector
(Note 6)
〔TH1〕
〔THC〕
Processing
controller
(Note 6)
detector
OPC-VG1-TBSI
【TX】
【RX】
30C
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
(30A,30B,30C)
Y5A
Y5C
Relay output
Ready-to-run RDY
(Note 7) (Note 16)
RX
2-37
TH1
THC
NTC
thermistor
0V
(Note 10)
0V (PGP)
(PGM)
Speed/
(PA)
magnetic-flux
(PB)
position
30A
30B
(Note 6)
Y5C
RDY
DC/DC
M
3～
Grounding (Note 5)
terminal
Charge
lamp
Signal input section
(Note 3)
(Note 14)
Optical
fiber cable
FRENIC-VG
Master Stack
<INV1>
DCF1
DCF2
G
Digital input
Main
power
input
FU
FV
FW
FRENIC-VG
Slave Stack
<INV2>
Diode rectifier
(Note 2)
(Note 1)
(Note 11)
Thermal relay
PGP
PGM
PG
PA
PB
SS,E
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.4.3.2
(Note 1)
For wiring protection, install the converter-specific recommended circuit breaker (MCCB) or earth leakage
breaker (ELCB) (with an overcurrent protection feature) on the input side (i.e., the primary side) of the
converter. Ensure that the circuit breaker capacity is equivalent to or lower than the recommended capacity.
(Note 2)
Aside from the MCCB or the ELCB, install the converter-specific recommended electromagnetic contactor
(MC) as necessary as it will be used when disconnecting the power supply from the converter. Connect a
surge absorber in parallel when installing a coil such as an MC or solenoid near the inverter.
(Note 3)
To retain an alarm output signal issued on inverter's programmable output terminals by the protective function
or to keep the keypad alive even if the main power has shut down, connect these terminals to the power
supply lines. Without power supply to these terminals, the inverter can run.
(Note 4)
Connect to the fan power supply terminals for cases above 90 kW.
(Note 5)
A grounding terminal for a motor. It is recommended that the motor be grounded via this terminal for
suppressing inverter noise.
(Note 6)
For wiring enclosed with
, use twisted or shielded wires. In principle, the shielded sheath of wires should
be connected to ground. If the inverter is significantly affected by external induction noise, however,
connection to
may be effective to suppress the influence of noise.
Keep the control circuit wiring away from the main circuit wiring as far as possible (recommended: 10 cm or
more). When crossing the control circuit wiring with the main circuit wiring, set them at right angles.
(Note 7)
The connection diagram shows factory default functions assigned to digital input terminals [X1] to [X9],
transistor output terminals [Y1] to [Y4], relay contact output terminals [Y5A/C], analog output terminal [AO1] to
[AO3], and analog input terminals [Ai1] and [Ai2].
(Note 9)
The motor cooling fan voltage differs from motor to motor. Add a transformer as needed.
(Note 10)
are insulated inside the inverter unit.
(Note 11) Use the auxiliary contact (manual reset) of the thermal relay to trip the MCCB or MC.
(Note 13) Available converters include diode rectifiers and PWM converter types. Additionally, selection of
recommended peripherals matching the converter to be used is necessary. Refer to "Chapter 6 Converter
System" for details.
(Note 14) Multiwinding motor drive requires the optional high-speed serial communication support terminal block
(OPC-VG1-TBSI). The option comes with an optical cable (5 m).
(Note 15) For the safety, configure the sequence circuit that causes all inverters driving a multiwinding motor to coast to
a stop (BX signal) when an inverter failure (heavy alarm) occurs. Do not assign BX signal via the
communications link.
(Note 16) Configure the circuit that inputs a run command after the inverter ready-to-run signals on all inverters driving a
multiwinding motor are established. A run command and reset signal are valid only when they are entered to
the master inverter. (There is no problem with them if entered via the communications link.)
(Note 18) Be sure to use the fuse (F). Use the fuses on the P (+) side for the 400V series or on both the P (+) and N (-)
sides for the 690V series.
(Note 19) When used in combination with a PWM converter, be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter
auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic
contactor (MC1). This is not necessary if used in combination with a diode rectifier. When using the product
with a non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated transformer.
For more information, refer to item (5) in section "6.3.15".
2-38
External dimensions
2.5.1
List of the FRENIC-VG's external dimensions

Chapter 2 Specifications
2.5
3-phase 400V series
Standard stack
capacity
[kW]
FRN30SVG1S-4
Dimensions [mm]
W
H
D
Approx.
mass [kg]
Figure
226.2
740
406.3
30
A
37
B
Remarks
FRN37SVG1S-4
FRN45SVG1S-4
FRN55SVG1S-4
880
FRN75SVG1S-4
FRN90SVG1S-4
45
FRN110SVG1S-4
FRN132SVG1S-4
1100
567.3
95
C
125
D
FRN160SVG1S-4
FRN200SVG1S-4
FRN220SVG1S-4
1400
FRN250SVG1S-4
135
FRN280SVG1S-4
FRN315SVG1S-4
FRN630BVG1S-4
135×3
E
A set of three stacks constitutes a single
inverter unit.
Figure
Remarks
FRN710BVG1S-4
FRN800BVG1S-4

3-phase 690V series
Standard stack
capacity
[kW]
FRN90SVG1S-69
Dimensions [mm]
W
H
D
Approx.
mass [kg]
226.2
880
406.3
45
F
1100
567.3
95
C
135
D
FRN110SVG1S-69
FRN132SVG1S-69
FRN160SVG1S-69
FRN200SVG1S-69
FRN250SVG1S-69
1400
FRN280SVG1S-69
FRN315SVG1S-69
FRN355SVG1S-69
FRN400SVG1S-69
FRN450SVG1S-69
2-39
2.5.1.1
Figure A (1-frame size: FRN30SVG1S-4 to 45SVG1S-4)
2-40
Figure B (2-frame size: FRN55SVG1S-4 to 110SVG1S-4)
2-41
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.5.1.2
2.5.1.3
Figure C (3-frame size: FRN132SVG1S-4 to 200SVG1S-4,
FRN132SVG1S-69 to FRN200SVG1S-69)
2-42
Figure D (4-frame size: FRN220SVG1S-4 to 315SVG1S-4,
FRN250SVG1S-69 to FRN450SVG1S-69)
2-43
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.5.1.4
2.5.1.5
Figure E (4-frame size: FRN630BVG1S-4 to 800BVG1S-4)
2-44
Figure F (2-frame size: FRN90SVG1S-69 to 110SVG1S-69)
2-45
Chapter 2 Specifications
2.5.1.6
2.6
Generated loss
The following table shows inverter generated losses.
F26: Motor operating sound (carrier frequency) is 2 [kHz]. (The carrier frequency is fixed at 2 kHz.)
Power-based
series
3-phase 400V
3-phase 690V
Generated loss [W]
Type
MD spec
LD spec
FRN30SVG1S-4
550
700
FRN 37SVG1S-4
700
850
FRN 45SVG1S-4
800
1000
FRN55SVG1S-4
1100
1450
FRN75SVG1S-4
1400
1600
FRN90SVG1S-4
1700
2000
FRN110SVG1S-4
2050
2400
FRN132SVG1S-4
2200
2650
FRN160SVG1S-4
2550
3100
FRN200SVG1S-4
3050
3350
FRN220SVG1S-4
3550
3950
FRN250SVG1S-4
3950
4350
FRN280SVG1S-4
4300
4750
FRN315SVG1S-4
4850
5350
FRN 630BVG1S-4
9300
10600
FRN710BVG1S-4
10350
11350
FRN800BVG1S-4
11400
14150
FRN90SVG1S-69
1600
1950
FRN110SVG1S-69
2100
2400
FRN132SVG1S-69
2150
2500
FRN160SVG1S-69
2400
3050
FRN200SVG1S-69
3200
3500
FRN250SVG1S-69
4100
4500
FRN280SVG1S-69
4450
4950
FRN315SVG1S-69
4900
5400
FRN355SVG1S-69
3550
3950
FRN400SVG1S-69
4050
4500
FRN450SVG1S-69
4550
－
2-46
FRENIC- VG
3
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
3.1
Transportation ................................................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.1
Transportation in packed state ................................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2
Transportation in unpacked state ............................................................................................ 3-1
3.1.2.1
Transportation............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.2.2
General caution ............................................................................................................ 3-2
3.1.2.3
Work procedure for lifting by crane ............................................................................... 3-3
3.1.3
Transportation after assembling the product into a cabinet .................................................... 3-5
3.1.3.1
Crane operation ............................................................................................................ 3-5
3.1.3.2
Transportation on rollers ............................................................................................... 3-6
3.2
Check before use ........................................................................................................................... 3-7
3.3
External views ................................................................................................................................ 3-9
3.4
3.3.1
Overall external views ............................................................................................................. 3-9
3.3.2
Warning plate and warning label ........................................................................................... 3-13
Environment for transportation / temporary storage ..................................................................... 3-14
3.4.1
Transportation / temporary storage ....................................................................................... 3-14
3.4.2
Long-term storage ................................................................................................................ 3-14
Transportation
This section explains the transportation and storage of the FRENIC-VG and converters.
3.1.1
Transportation in packed state
The packing form varies according to the type or order of the FRENIC-VG or converter.
<Transportation in pile>
<Vertical packing: Wood frame package>
Insertion positions
of jaws (forks)
Insertion positions
of jaws (forks)
Transportation in pile: Up to 3 packages can be loaded
Transportation in pile: Not available
Figure 3.1-1: External appearance of package
Note 1)
When you transport the package, place it on a pallet and hoist the pallet, or lift it using a fork lifter or a hand
lifter, etc.
Note 2)
Be sure not to transport the product by hooking wires to a crane as the product is stored in a cardboard or a
wood frame. It will lead to the drop of the product.
3.1.2
Transportation in unpacked state
3.1.2.1
Transportation
This section explains the transportation of the unpacked product.
Be sure to transport the product in the state shown in Figure 3.1-2.
(a) FRENIC-VG laid sideways
(b) FRENIC-VG in its upright position
(1)
You can transport the product after laying it down sideways, i.e.,
with the left side face down (when viewed from the front) as shown
in (a).
(2)
Alternatively, you can transport the product while keeping it upright
as shown in (b). In this case, however, you should take care not to
topple it.
As far as possible, lay the product sideways as shown in (a) or put
it in a cabinet before transporting it.
Figure 3.1-2: Transportation state for unpacked product
3-1
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
3.1
3.1.2.2
General caution
Before you start operating a crane, be sure to check the following:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Use a crane with the sufficient capacity for the weight of
the cabinet.
Visually check that the hanging rings (eye bolts) are not
loosened and/or cracked and that the screw sections are
not bent and/or broken.
Be sure to check the wires and ropes before using them.
Do not use the wires and ropes listed below:
Loosened
Loosened
Sticking out
Lifted
Spark / fire ball marks
Disconnected
Kinked
a) Those through which large current such as short-circuit
current flowed
b) Those with external flaws such as spark marks and fire
ball marks
Figure 3.1-3: Unacceptable wires/ropes
c) Those of which wires are disconnected
d) Those which are significantly rusted
e) Those which are clearly abraded
f) Those of which the core steel is exposed or of which the
twist is deformed
g) Those which are kinked (These wires and ropes are not
acceptable even if they are repaired)
(4)
If a wire comes into contact with any corner, cover the
corner with a buffer material so that it will not be damaged
or scratched.
(5)
Upon loading and unloading, be sure not to suddenly
move up and down the product. In addition, pay attention
to the front and back, and left and right directions so that
the product will not come into contact with any objects.
(6)
During transportation, be careful not to drop and/or fall the
product by vibration and at a curve.
3-2
cracked
Screw sections
are bent
Figure 3.1-4: Unacceptable hanging ring (eye bolt)
Work procedure for lifting by crane
The work procedure to follow when you use a crane is explained below.
Raising from the laying state
1-frame, 2-frame sizes
When hoisting the unit,
FRENIC-VG may slide in
this direction.
When raising the unit from the horizontal
position, attach wire ropes to two points on the
FRENIC-VG's upper section and slowly pull up
using the crane.
(Same applies to 3-frame,
4-frame sizes)
When pulling up, exercise caution as
the bottom side may slide.
When raising the unit, face the front of the
product and attach wire ropes to two points on
the right side, as in the figure on the right.
(In the package, the right side of the product's
front faces the top.)
3-frame, 4-frame sizes
When raising the unit from the horizontal
position, place braces between the bar
terminals and casters, and ensure that the unit
is horizontal when mounted on the braces.
To ensure that the casters do not contact the
ground, use braces with a height of 60 mm or
higher. Next, attach wire ropes to two points on
the FRENIC-VG's upper section and slowly pull
up using the crane.
If the unit is stood up without using
braces, a load will be applied to the
casters, causing damage.
Furthermore, when standing the unit
up, ensure that the bar terminals and
casters do not contact the braces.
When pulling up, exercise caution as
the bottom side may slide.
Bar terminal
Caster
60mm
When raising the unit, face the front of the
product and attach wire ropes to two points on
the right side, as shown in the figure on the
right.
(In the package, the right side of the product's
front faces the top.)
3-3
Brace
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
3.1.2.3
Lifting in the installed condition
Lift the FRENIC-VG as follows when it is installed on
a cabinet.
1-frame, 2-frame sizes
Hook wires onto the front left and two rear right
locations (viewed from the front) as shown on the
right.
3-frame, 4-frame sizes
Hook wires onto the front right and two rear right
locations (viewed from the front) as shown on the
right.
1-frame, 2-frame sizes
3-frame, 4-frame sizes
Lifting in the horizontal condition
Transport the FRENIC-VG in its horizontal condition
as follows.
1-frame, 2-frame sizes
Hook wires onto the three locations shown
below.
3-frame, 4-frame sizes
Hook wires onto the four locations shown below.
1-frame, 2-frame sizes
3-frame, 4-frame sizes
3-4
Transportation after assembling the product into a cabinet
When you transport the FRENIC-VG, be extremely careful not to apply vibration and shock to it.
In the case of long distance transportation, do not transport the product using rollers, and be sure to transport it by lifting
with a crane and the like.
3.1.3.1
Crane operation
When you transport the product using a crane or other heavy equipment, clear obstacles on the transportation route and
follow the instructions given in "3.1.2.2 General caution".
(1)
Figure 3.1-5 illustrates the methods of hooking wires. If there is only a single panel, use the method (a). Use the
method (b) for 2 panels, and the method (c) for 3 panels.
Hanging ring
(Eye bolt)
60 °
or less
(a) For single panel
Hanging ring
(Eye bolt)
Hanging ring
(Eye bolt)
60 ° or less
60 ° or less
(b) For 2 panels
(c) For 3 panels
Figure 3.1-5: How to hook wires
(2)
As shown in Figure 3.1-5, hook a wire to each hanging ring. Be sure not to hook a single wire as shown in Figure
3.1-6. The hanging angle must be 60° or less.
(3)
Firstly, lift the product by approx. 30 mm to confirm the safety (the tension of wires and hanging angle, etc.) and
verify that the cabinet is not tilted. Then, lift the product for transportation.
(4)
When you lift down the cabinet, be sure to slowly lift it down in parallel with the floor.
(5)
When anchors are attached, remove them before installation in principle.
Such anchors as shown in Figure 3.1-8 can be removed after installation.
Single hooking wire
Anchor
Figure 3.1-6: Incorrect hooking of
wires
Figure 3.1-7: Tilt of cabinet (bad
example)
3-5
Figure 3.1-8: Anchor
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
3.1.3
3.1.3.2
Transportation on rollers
When you transport the product on rollers, follow the procedure given below:
(1) Check the transportation route and clear obstacles.
(2) Give the workers clear instructions and signs for the work procedure and work method.
(3) In a place where the floor might get scratched, install protection plates in the traveling direction. As shown in Figure
3.1-9, protection plates must be placed as sprints or in the shape of "ハ".
(a) Bad example
Do not separate the plates.
(b) In the splint form
(c) In the shape of "ハ"
Splint
Figure 3.1-9: Layout of protection plates (protection of floor)
(4)
Install rollers of which the diameter is approx. 50 mm and of which the length is 300 mm longer than the cabinet to
the bottom of the cabinet, and slowly move the product following the instructions given below as checking the
safety.
a) There must be always 3 or more rollers so that the cabinet will not tilt.
b) The rollers must protrude by 150 mm or more from the both ends of the cabinet during transportation.
c) Use a hammer to correct and cut rollers.
(5)
When the traveling direction is changed, shift the protection plates little by little to the new direction as shown in
Figure 3.1-11.
Traveling direction
Dire
ct
chan ion
ge
Figure 3.1-10: Transportation on rollers
Figure 3.1-11: Change of transportation direction
3-6
Check before use
Unpack the package and check the following:
An inverter and the following accessories are contained.
Accessories •
•
Instruction manual
CD-ROM (containing the FRENIC-VG User's Manual, FRENIC-VG Loader software (free version), and
FRENIC-VG Loader Instruction Manual)
The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts missing. The main and sub
nameplates are attached to the inverter as shown in Figure 3.3-1 to -4. Check these nameplates to see that the inverter
is exactly the type you ordered.
(a) Main Nameplate
(b) Sub Nameplate
Figure 3.2-1: Nameplate
TYPE: Inverter stack
FRN 160 S VG 1 S
FRN
Series
name
シリ－ズ名
FRENIC series
FRENICシリ－ズ
Indication
表示
標準適用モータ容量
Nominal
applied motor
30
37
45
30kW
37kW
45kW
Indication
destination/Instruction Manual
表示 Shipping
仕向先・取扱説明書
J
E
C
表示
Indication
～
450kW
630kW
～
～
電圧区分
Voltage
class
450
630
800kW
表示
Indication
形状
Inverter
structure
S
B
標準スタックタイプ
Standard stack type
相別スタックタイプ
Phase-specific
stack type
English
英語
Chinese
中国語
400400V系列
V class series
4
69
800
Japanese
日本語
Indication
表示
～
Indication
表示
4J
690690V系列
V class series
Structure
構造
S
標準形type
Standard
Indication
表示
開発系列series
Development
1
1シリ－ズ
1 series
Indication
表示
適用分野
Applicable
area
VG
高性能べクトル制御形
High
performance vector control
The FRENIC-VG is available in two drive modes depending upon the inverter capacity: Medium Duty (MD) and Low Duty
(LD) modes. Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate.
Medium Duty: MD mode designed for medium duty load applications.
Overload capability: 150% for 1 min. Continuous ratings = Capacity of inverters
Low Duty
: LD mode designed for light duty load applications.
Overload capability: 110% for 1 min. Continuous ratings = One rank or two ranks higher capacity of inverters
SOURCE
: Input voltage, input current
OUTPUT
: Number of output phases, rated output voltage, output frequency range
: Rated output capacity, rated output current, rated overload current
IP Code
: IP protection level
SCCR
: Short-circuit capacity
MASS
Mass of the product in kilogram
SER.No.
: Production number 2 8 A 4 5 6 A 0 0 0 1 BA 2 3 2
Week of production:
nth week of production when the first week of January
is "01".
Production year: Last digit of the year
Product version
3-7
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
3.2
: Mark of conformity with European standards
: Mark of conformity with UL Standards and CSA Standards (cUL-listed for Canada)
: Mark of conformity with WEEE Directive
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact your Fuji
Electric representative.
3-8
External views
3.3.1
Overall external views
■
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
3.3
3-phase 400V series
Cooling fan
Hanging hole (φ18)
Hanging hole (φ18)
Keypad
P (+) bar
Keypad case
N (-) bar
Hanging hole (φ18)
Control terminal
Front cover
Warning plate
Handle Sub nameplate
Main nameplate
Figure 3.3-1: FRN30-45SVG1S-4 (Frame 1)
Cooling fan
Hanging hole (φ18)
Hanging hole (φ18)
Keypad
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Keypad case
Hanging hole (φ18)
Control
terminal
Front cover
Warning plate
Handle
Main nameplate
Figure 3.3-2: FRN55-110SVG1S-4 (Frame 2)
3-9
Sub nameplate
Hanging hole (φ26)
Hanging hole (φ26)
Cooling fan
Cooling fan
Handle
Keypad
P (+) bar
Hanging
hole (φ26)
Keypad case
N (-) bar
Warning
plate
Handle
Control
terminal
Main
nameplate
Hanging
hole (φ26)
Caster
Front cover
Sub nameplate
Figure3.3-3: FRN132-200SVG1S-4 (Frame 3)
Hanging hole (φ26)
Hanging
hole (φ26)
Cooling fan
N (-) bar
Handle
P (+) bar
Keypad case
Keypad
Warning
plate
Control
terminal
Main nameplate
Handle
Caster
Hanging
hole (φ26)
Front cover
Sub nameplate
Figure3.3-4: FRN220-315SVG1S-4 (Frame 4)
3-10
Hanging
hole (φ26)
W-phase
Hanging
hole (φ26)
Hanging
hole (φ26)
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Keypad
Handle
Front cover
Warning
plate
Handle
Main
nameplate
Hanging hole
(φ26)
Keypad case
Control circuit
terminal block
Caster
Sub
nameplate
Figure 3.3-5: FRN630-800BVG1S-4 (Frame 4)
3-11
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
V-phase
U-phase
■
3-phase 690V series
Cooling fan
Hanging hole (φ18)
Hanging hole
(φ18)
P (+) bar
Keypad
N (-) bar
Keypad case
Hanging hole
(φ18)
Control circuit
terminal block
Warning
plate
Front cover
Handle
Main nameplate
Sub nameplate
Figure 3.3-6: FRN90-110SVG1S-69 (Frame 2)
Hanging hole (φ26)
Hanging hole (φ26)
Cooling fan
Hanging hole
(φ26)
P (+) bar
Handle
Keypad
N (-) bar
Hanging hole
(φ26)
Keypad case
Control circuit
terminal block
Warning
plate
Handle
Main nameplate
Caster
Front cover
Sub nameplate
Hanging hole (φ26)
Figure 3.3-7: FRN132-200SVG1S-69 (Frame 3)
3-12
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
Hanging hole (φ26)
Cooling fan
Hanging hole (φ26)
N (-) bar
Handle
Keypad case
P (+) bar
Control circuit
terminal block
Keypad
Warning
plate
Handle
Caster
Front cover
Sub nameplate
Hanging hole (φ26)
Figure 3.3-8: FRN250-450SVG1S-69 (Frame 4)
3.3.2
Warning plate and warning label
Figure 3.3-9: Warning plate and warning label
3-13
3.4
Environment for transportation / temporary storage
This section explains the environment for transportation and temporary storage after purchase.
Carefully note that the storage environment requirements differ depending on whether the product is stored temporarily
or for a long time.
3.4.1
Transportation / temporary storage
Environment requirements for transportation and temporary storage are listed below.
Table 3.4-1: Transportation / temporary storage environment
Item
Explanation
Storage temperature
(Note 1)
-25 to + 70°C
Relative humidity
5 to 95% (Note 2)
Atmosphere
Avoid exposure to dust, direct sunlight, corrosive gases, flammable gas, oil mist, steam,
water droplets and vibration.
Avoid exposure to excessive salt content. (0.01 mg/cm2 or less per year)
Atmospheric pressure
Avoid use in environments where abrupt changes in temperature
may cause condensation or freezing.
86 to 106 kPa (during storage)
70 to 106 kPa (during transportation)
(Note 1)
Assuming comparatively short time storage, e.g., during transportation or the like.
(Note 2)
Even if the humidity is within the specified requirements, avoid such places where the product will be
subjected to sudden changes in temperature that will cause condensation or freeze to form.
Points to note for temporary storage
(1)
Do not leave the product directly on the floor.
(2)
If the environment does not satisfy the specified requirements listed in Table 3.4-1, wrap the product in an airtight
vinyl sheet or the like for storage.
(3)
If the product is to be stored in a high-humidity environment, put a drying agent (such as silica gel) in the airtight
package described in (2) above.
3.4.2
Long-term storage
You should store the product in the conditions given below if you do not use it for an extended period.
(1)
The storage site must satisfy the requirements specified for temporary storage.
However, for storage exceeding three months, the surrounding temperature range should be within the range from
-10 to 30°C. This is to prevent electrolytic capacitors in the product from deterioration.
(2)
The package must be airtight to protect the product from moisture. Add a drying agent (such as silica gel) inside
the package to maintain the relative humidity inside the package within 70%.
(3)
If the product has been installed to the equipment or cabinet at construction sites where it may be subjected to
humidity, dust or dirt, then temporarily remove the product and store it in the environment specified in Table 3.4-1.
Precautions for storage over 1 year
If the product has not been powered on for a long time, the property of the electrolytic capacitors may deteriorate. Power
the product on once a year and keep the product powering on for 30 to 60 minutes. Do not connect the product to the
load circuit (secondary side) or run it.
For details, see the "Long-Term Storage Manual" (SI47-1741).
3-14
Drying agent type: Use Silica-Gel Type A Class 1.
Take out drying agent from the package and put it in a cloth bag. Clearly write “Drying Agent” on the bag and hang the
bag above the control devices such as the electromagnetic switch and inverter using a cord. Hang the bag in a way that
it does not contact the control devices. (If the control devices contact the bag over the long time, they will be rusted by
moisture absorbed by the drying agent.)
Calculate the necessary quantity of the drying agent W [kg] using the equation given below:
W  N  A  M [kg ]
N: The reference quantities of the drying agent is shown in the table below.
These values are applicable when polyethylene film is used as a
moisture-proof packing material.
Relative humidity at Reference quantity of drying
storage site
agent: N [kg/m2 • month]
70% RH or less
0.05
71 to 90% RH
0.25
A: Surface area of moisture-proof packing material [m2]; internal area of control
panel and operation panel
M: Effective period (in months) of the drying agent. It is recommended to put the
drying agent for 6 months.
When you open the package after storage, be sure to remove the drying agent.
(If you power on the inverter as the drying agent is left inside, it might be melted.)
3-15
Chapter 3 Transportation and Storage
Handling of drying agent
FRENIC- VG
4
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.1
4.2
Precautions for installation ............................................................................................................. 4-1
4.1.1
Installation environment .......................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2
Required ventilation ................................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3
Installation direction and spacing to surroundings .................................................................. 4-3
4.1.4
Stack derating by ambient temperature .................................................................................. 4-4
Installation ...................................................................................................................................... 4-6
4.2.1
4.2.1.1
Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW)......................... 4-6
4.2.1.2
Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V: 132 to 200 kW) ....................................... 4-11
4.2.1.3
Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW) ....................................... 4-14
4.2.2
4.4
Installing stacks in cabinets .................................................................................................. 4-23
4.2.2.1
Precautions................................................................................................................. 4-23
4.2.2.2
Procedure for removing and attaching the front cover ................................................ 4-25
4.2.2.3
Installing Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW)........ 4-26
4.2.2.4
Installing Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) ... 4-28
4.2.2.5
Connecting output terminals of Frame 3 and 4 size stacks
(400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) ............................................................. 4-31
4.2.3
4.3
Fixation points and terminal positions ..................................................................................... 4-6
Connecting DC bus bars ....................................................................................................... 4-33
4.2.3.1
Connecting bus bars for Frame 1 to 3 size stacks
(400V: 30 to 200 kW, 690V: 90 to 200 kW) ................................................................. 4-33
4.2.3.2
Connecting bus bars for Frame 4 size
(400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW) ............................................................. 4-33
Basic configuration of cabinets ..................................................................................................... 4-34
4.3.1
Appearance of cabinets ........................................................................................................ 4-34
4.3.2
Internal layouts of cabinets ................................................................................................... 4-35
4.3.2.1
Internal layout for Frame 1 size (400V: 30 to 45 kW).................................................. 4-35
4.3.2.2
Internal layout for Frame 2 size (400V: 55 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW) ............... 4-36
4.3.2.3
Internal layout for Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V:
132 to 200 kW) ........ 4-37
4.3.2.4
Internal layout for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V:
250 to 450 kW) ........ 4-38
Bus bars ....................................................................................................................................... 4-40
4.4.1
Materials and surface treatment of bus bars ......................................................................... 4-40
4.4.2
Connection of bus bars (sizes of holes in bus bars, drilling pitches) ..................................... 4-40
4.4.3
Connection methods and tightening torques ........................................................................ 4-41
4.4.3.1
4.5
Rated current of Cu bus bars...................................................................................... 4-42
Main circuit wires .......................................................................................................................... 4-44
4.5.1
Wire selection criteria ........................................................................................................... 4-44
4.5.1.1
Overcurrent protectors and protection coordination .................................................... 4-44
4.5.1.2
Voltage drop................................................................................................................ 4-47
4.5.2
4.5.2.1
3-phase 400V series (MD spec) ................................................................................. 4-47
4.5.2.2
3-phase 400V series (LD spec) .................................................................................. 4-49
4.5.2.3
3-phase 690V series (MD/LD spec) ............................................................................ 4-50
4.5.3
4.6
4.7
4.8
Wiring of main circuit and grounding terminals ..................................................................... 4-52
Control circuit ................................................................................................................................ 4-56
4.6.1
Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes .............................................................. 4-56
4.6.2
Control terminal layout .......................................................................................................... 4-56
4.6.3
Control wire routes ................................................................................................................ 4-57
4.6.4
DCF disconnection detection circuit wiring route .................................................................. 4-58
4.6.5
Wiring between phase-specific stacks .................................................................................. 4-59
Mounting and connecting the keypad ........................................................................................... 4-61
4.7.1
Parts required for mounting and connecting the keypad ....................................................... 4-61
4.7.2
Installation procedure............................................................................................................ 4-62
4.7.2.1
How to mount and remove the keypad on/from the inverter ....................................... 4-62
4.7.2.2
Mounting the keypad on the door of the cabinet ......................................................... 4-62
4.7.2.3
External dimensions of the keypad ............................................................................. 4-63
Connecting FRENIC-VG Loader ................................................................................................... 4-64
4.8.1
Connecting a USB ................................................................................................................ 4-64
4.8.2
Using the RS-485 communications ports .............................................................................. 4-65
4.8.2.1
Terminal specifications of the RS-485 communications ports ..................................... 4-65
4.8.2.2
RS-485 converter ........................................................................................................ 4-65
4.8.2.3
Cables......................................................................................................................... 4-66
4.8.3
4.9
Recommended wire size ....................................................................................................... 4-47
Noise reduction ..................................................................................................................... 4-67
Dedicated lifter for stacks.............................................................................................................. 4-68
4.9.1
Feature ................................................................................................................................. 4-68
4.9.2
Specifications ........................................................................................................................ 4-69
4.9.3
Securing the Lifter ................................................................................................................. 4-69
4.9.3.1
Lifter securing fixture (for SA430288-01_ LFT-VG1) .................................................. 4-69
4.9.3.2
Lifter securing fixture (for SA433892-01_ LFT-RHF45) .............................................. 4-70
4.9.4
Lifter external dimensions ..................................................................................................... 4-71
4.9.4.1
LFT-VG1 external dimensions .................................................................................... 4-71
4.9.4.2
LFT-RHF450 external dimensions .............................................................................. 4-72
Precautions for installation
This section describes precautions about the installation environment, power supply system, and wiring of stack type
inverters (FRENIC-VG and converters), and connections of peripheral equipment. Strictly observe the following
precautions when handling stacks.
4.1.1
Installation environment
Install your stack type inverter in a location that complies with the installation environment requirements specified in
"2.2.1 Installation environment and conformity with standards" in Chapter 2.
The product is basically designed to be installed in cabinets. It is recommended that they be installed in cabinets for
safety reasons. To install the product in a special environment exceeding the specified range of specifications, it is
necessary to design cabinets suitable for the environment, examine where stacks should be installed, and derate output.
 For further information, see "Chapter 12 Cabinet Construction" of this manual.
Special environment
Possible problems
Examples of measures
Major applications
Corrosive gas, such as a
sulfidizing gas
A corrosive gas, such as a
sulfidizing gas, may cause the
parts inside the stack type inverter
to corrode, resulting in a
malfunction.
Either of the following measures may
be necessary:
• Mount the product in a cabinet of
hermetic structure (IP6X level) or
using an air purge mechanism.
• Place the product in a location
free of the effect of such gases.
Paper manufacturing,
sewage disposal,
sludge treatment, tire
manufacturing, gypsum
manufacturing, metal
processing, particular
processes of textile
manufacturing, etc.
Much conductive dust or
foreign material (e.g.
metal powder, cutting
chips, carbon fiber,
carbon dust)
If conductive dust or foreign
material enters the product, it may
cause a short circuit or another
problem inside.
Either of the following measures may
be necessary:
• Mount the product in a cabinet of
hermetic structure.
• Place each product in a location
free of the effect of conductive
dust.
Wire drawing machines,
general metal
processing, extruding
machines, printing
machines, garbage
incinerators, industrial
waste treatment, etc.
Much fibrous dust or
paper dust
Cooling efficiency may decrease
due to the clogging of the cooling
fin of the stack, or the electronic
circuit may malfunction if fibrous
dust or paper dust enters the
product.
Any of the following measures
against dust may be necessary.
• Adopt a cabinet of hermetic
structure capable of shutting out
dust.
• Adopt a cabinet design ensuring
maintenance space for periodical
cleaning of the cooling fin.
• Perform periodical maintenance.
Textile manufacturing,
paper manufacturing,
etc.
High humidity or much
dew condensation
In an environment where a
humidifier is installed to ensure the
quality of workpieces or in an
air-conditioned environment
without a dehumidifying function,
humidity may reach a high level or
dew condensation may occur,
resulting in a short circuit inside
the product or an electronic circuit
malfunction.
•
Such a measure as the installation
of a space heater inside the
cabinet may be necessary.
Outdoor installation, film
manufacturing lines,
pumps, food
processing, etc.
Vibration or shock
exceeding the specified
level
A shock produced when a carrier
runs over a rail joint, or a vibration
or shock exceeding the specified
level caused by blasting at a
construction site may cause
damage to the structure of the
product.
•
Cushioning material or another
vibration absorbing material may
be required for the product
installation area to ensure safety.
Installation on a carrier
or self-propelled
machine, ventilation at
construction sites,
pressing machines, etc.
Fumigation in export
packaging
Halogen compounds, including
methyl bromide used for
fumigation, may corrode some
parts inside the stack type inverter.
•
When exporting the stack type
inverter in a cabinet, pack it in
fumigated wooden crates.
When exporting the stack type
inverter alone, use laminated
veneer lumber (LVL).
Export to overseas
countries
•
4-1
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.1
4.1.2
Required ventilation
When installing the stack type inverter in a cabinet of IP20 or equivalent protection level, it is necessary to fulfill the air
volume required by the stack type inverter in addition to the observance of the working temperature range. If the required
air volume cannot be fulfilled, the FRENIC-VG or converter will generate unusual heat and cause an overheat protection
alarm trip.
The tables below show the required air volume per stack for each of the FRENIC-VG inverter and converter models (or,
for 630 kW and over, the required air volume per three stacks). Calculate the required air volume based on the number
of stacks to be installed in a cabinet, and set ventilation.
 For further information, see "Chapter 12 Cabinet Construction".
Table 4.1.2-1: Required air volumes of the FRENIC-VG (inverters)
Standard stack
Model (FRN)
Required air
volume
[m3/min]
30SVG1S-4
2.0
Phase-specific stack
Model (FRN)
90SVG1S-69
37SVG1S-4
110SVG1S-69
45SVG1S-4
132SVG1S-69
55SVG1S-4
1.5
75SVG1S-4
Required air
volume
[m3/min]
5.8
Model (FRN)
Required air
volume
[m3/min]
630BVG1S-4
44.1
710BVG1S-4
8.5
800BVG1S-4
160SVG1S-69
200SVG1S-69
90SVG1S-4
5.8
110SVG1S-4
250SVG1S-69
14.7
280SVG1S-69
132SVG1S-4
8.5
315SVG1S-69
160SVG1S-4
355SVG1S-69
200SVG1S-4
400SVG1S-69
220SVG1S-4
14.7
450SVG1S-69
250SVG1S-4
280SVG1S-4
315SVG1S-4
Table 4.1.2-2: Required air volumes of the converters
Standard stack
Model (RHC)
volume
[m3/min]
Model
(RHF/RHD)
volume
[m3/min]
Model
(RHF/RHD)
volume
[m3/min]
Model
(RHF/RHD)
volume
[m3/min]
RHC132S-4D
8.5
RHC132S-69D
8.5
RHF160S-4D
14.7
RHF160S-69D
14.7
RHC160S-4D
RHC160S-69D
RHF220S-4D
RHF220S-69D
RHC200S-4D
RHC200S-69D
RHF280S-4D
RHF280S-69D
RHC220S-4D
14.7
RHC250S-69D
14.7
RHF355S-4D
RHF355S-69D
RHC280S-4D
RHC280S-69D
RHD200S-4D
8.5
RHF450S-69D
RHC315S-4D
RHC315S-69D
RHD315S-4D
14.7
RHD220S-69D
RHC355S-69D
RHD450S-69D
RHC400S-69D
RHC450S-69D
Phase-specific stack
Model (RHC)
volume
[m3/min]
RHC630B-4D
44.1
RHC710B-4D
RHC800B-4D
4-2
Installation direction and spacing to surroundings
The FRENIC-VG inverters and converters must be mounted only in the direction shown in Figure 4.1.3-1 (direction of the
reading of the nameplate). For information on surrounding space, refer to Table 4.1.3-1 and Figure 4.1.3-2. Also, follow
the space requirements shown in Table 4.1.3-1 when mounting stacks side by side.
Table 4.1.3-1: Surrounding space
C
B
C
D
Unit: mm
E
Frame 1
Frame 2
Frame 3
Frame 4
10
10
300
350
50
Another appliance
20
Between
stacks
E
B
A
20
20
20
―
A
350
(100)
50
Table 4.1.3-2: Frame size and capacity
D
Figure 4.1.3-1 : Mounting direction and peripheral space
requirements
Frame size
Frame 1
400V series
690V series
30 to 45 kW
―
Frame 2
55 to 110 kW
90 to 110 kW
Frame 3
132 to 200 kW
132 to 200 kW
Frame 4
220 to 315 kW
630 to 800 kW
250 to 450 kW
(1)
Stacks cannot be mounted on top of each other.
(2)
Only a DC fuse (fuse designated by Fuji Electric) can be mounted in space C (above the exhaust fan of
the stack).
A general appliance capable of working at a temperature of up to 70°C can be mounted in this space. In
this case, mount it so that it does not block the exhaust fan of the stack.
(3)
The stack has an air intake in the lower area. Keep about 60% of the 350-mm space in the lower area
open. When installing an appliance in this space, keep a distance of at least 100 mm between it and the
stack.
F
F
F
F
F: 10 to 135 mm
U-phase
V-phase
W-phase
U-phase
V-phase
W-phase
Optical fiber cable
(5 m)
Master
Slave
Figure 4.1.3-2: Spacing between phase-specific stacks (Frame 4: 630 to 800 kW)
4-3
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.1.3
(1)
If space F exceeds 135 mm, the spacing between the stacks (U-phase, V-phase, and W-phase) is too
large to connect the standard cable.
(2)
When using direct parallel connection, connect the master and slave (or, for the phase-specific stack,
V-phase) with the Optical fiber cable (5 m). Therefore, the master and slave must be installed within the
distance at which they can be connected.
*The Optical fiber cable (5 m) comes standard with the optional high-speed serial communication support
terminal block (OPC-VG1-TBSI).
4.1.4
Stack derating by ambient temperature
In cases where the ambient temperature exceeds 40°C, operation up to 55°C is possible if derating is considered.
Carefully note that the derating curve differs depending on the product model.
Use the FRENIC-VG (inverter) 400V series 30 to 75kW and 630 to 800kW, and all capacities of RHF (filter stack)
400/690V series at ambient temperatures of up to 40 °C.

FRENIC- VG (inverters)
Standard stack
Model
Figure
Phase-specific stack
Model
Figure
Model
FRN30SVG1S-4
FRN132SVG1S-4
A
FRN630BVG1S-4
FRN37SVG1S-4
FRN160SVG1S-4
B
FRN710BVG1S-4
FRN55SVG1S-4
―
FRN200SVG1S-4
(Not available)
FRN220SVG1S-4
D
FRN75SVG1S-4
FRN250SVG1S-4
A
FRN90SVG1S-4
FRN280SVG1S-4
B
FRN315SVG1S-4
D
FRN45SVG1S-4
FRN110SVG1S-4
D
FRN90SVG1S-69
C
FRN250SVG1S-69
FRN110SVG1S-69
E
FRN280SVG1S-69
FRN132SVG1S-69
C
FRN315SVG1S-69
FRN160SVG1S-69
D
FRN355SVG1S-69
B
FRN200SVG1S-69
―
E
―
FRN400SVG1S-69
C
FRN450SVG1S-69
D

FRN800BVG1S-4
Figure
―
(Not available)
E
Converters
Standard stack
Model
Figure
Phase-specific stack
Model
Figure
Model
RHC132S-4D
A
RHC220S-4D
D
RHC630B-4D
RHC160S-4D
B
RHC280S-4D
B
RHC710B-4D
RHC200S-4D
D
RHC315S-4D
D
RHC800B-4D
RHD200S-4D
D
RHD315S-4D
D
RHF280S-4D
―
(Not available)
RHF160S-4D
RHF220S-4D
―
(Not available) RHF355S-4D
RHC132S-69D
C
RHC250S-69D
RHC160S-69D
D
RHC280S-69D
RHC200S-69D
E
RHC315S-69D
―
RHD220S-69D
RHF160S-69D
RHF220S-69D
―
―
F
E
RHC355S-69D
B
RHC400S-69D
C
RHC450S-69D
D
RHD450S-69D
D
RHF280S-69D
―
(Not available) RHF355S-69D
―
RHF450S-69D
―
(Not available)
4-4
Figure
―
(Not available)
100
80
80
60
40
20
0
-10
10
30
40
20
Operable region
0
60
40
50
60
70
0
-10
80
Operable region
0
Ambient temperature [°C]
110
100
100
80
80
Load factor [%]
Figure D
110
Load factor [%]
Figure C
60
40
20
0
-10
10
30
40
50
60
70
0
-10
80
100
80
80
Load factor [%]
110
100
Load factor [%]
Figure F
110
60
40
10
30
40
80
60
50
60
70
80
50
60
70
80
Operable region
0
10
30
40
60
40
20
Operable region
0
70
50
Ambient temperature [°C]
Figure E
0
-10
40
40
Ambient temperature [°C]
20
30
60
20
Operable region
0
10
Ambient temperature [°C]
50
60
70
0
-10
80
Operable region
0
Ambient temperature [°C]
10
30
40
Ambient temperature [°C]
Figure 4.1.4-1: Derating curve
4-5
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
110
100
Load factor [%]
Figure B
110
Load factor [%]
Figure A
4.2
Installation
4.2.1
Fixation points and terminal positions
4.2.1.1
Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW)
[1]
Fixation points (common to Frame 1 and 2 sizes)
For Frame 1 and 2 sizes (400V series: 30 to 45 kW [Frame 1], 55 to 110 kW [Frame 2]. 690V series: 90 to 110 kW
[Frame 2]), there are two supporting points for installation. When installing them in cabinets, securely fix them at these
supporting points.

For setting of the terminating resistor, refer to "4.2.2 Installing stacks in cabinets".
<Points of mounting>
(1)
Fixing hole in the upper area of the back face (2 x φ10: M8 screw or stud bolt)
(2)
Tapped hole for fixation in the lower area of the front face (2 x M5-12 (up to 25) when the recommended plate
thickness of the attachment for fixation is 2.3 mm)
Fixation holes
Wiring port (with
grommet) for DC fuse
disconnection detection
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
With the front face cover removed
Control cable
lead-through hole
Tapped holes
for fixation
Control cable
lead-through hole
Leg
Hand opening
*This configuration applies also to Frame 2 size stacks (400V: 55 to 110 kW,
690V: 90 to 110 kW)
Leg
Figure 4.2.1-1: Fixation points for Frame 1 size (400V: 30 to 45 kW)
When using the tapped holes for fixation in the front face to fix the stack, make attachments for fixation from sheet metal.
Fixation hole for stack type
Provide an attachment for installation
for each unit of the stack type inverter.
This surface comes into contact
with the stack type inverter.
Fixation hole for
stack type
Figure 4.2.1-2: Attachment for fixing lower section (recommended)
4-6
The recommended dimensions of the attachment (front lower section) for fixing Frame 1 and 2 size (400V: 30 to 110 kW,
690V: 90 to 110 kW) stacks to the cabinet are shown below. This attachment should be used to fix the stacks individually.
Recommended plate
thickness: 2.3 mm
Attachment
Fixation hole
(Fixation hole for stack type)
Figure 4.2.1-3: Shape of attachment for fixing lower section
4-7
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
<Dimensions for the attachment for fixing lower section>
[2]
Terminal positions and screw sizes (main circuit terminals)

Frame 1 size (400V:30 to 45 kW), models: FRN30SVG1S-4 to FRN45SVG1S-4
Unit: [mm]
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
Terminal name
Terminal symbol
Screw size
Terminal tightening torque
Applicable crimped terminal size
Output terminal
U, V, W
M8
13.5 N·m
R60-8/MAX
DC input terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding terminal
G
Figure 4.2.1-4: Terminal positions for Frame 1 size (400V: 30 to 45 kW)
4-8
Frame 2 size (400V:55 to 110 kW), models: FRN55SVG1S-4 to FRN110SVG1S-4
Unit: [mm]
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

Terminal name
Terminal symbol
Screw size
Terminal tightening torque
Applicable crimped terminal size
Output terminal
U, V, W
M10
27 N·m
R150-10/MAX
DC input terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding terminal
G
Figure 4.2.1-5: Terminal positions for Frame 2 size (400V: 55 to 110 kW)
4-9

Frame 2 size (690V:90 to 110 kW), models: FRN90SVG1S-69 to FRN110SVG1S-69
Unit: [mm]
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
Terminal name
Terminal symbol
Screw size
Terminal tightening torque
Applicable crimped terminal size
Output terminal
U, V, W
M10
27 N·m
R150-10/MAX
DC input terminal
P (+), N (-)
Grounding terminal
G
Figure 4.2.1-6: Terminal positions for Frame 2 size (690V: 90 to 110 kW)
4-10
4.2.1.2
Fixation points
For Frame 3 size (400V series: 132 to 200 kW, 690V series: 132 to 200 kW), there are four supporting points for
installation. When installing them in cabinets, securely fix them at these supporting points.

For setting of the terminating resistor, refer to "4.2.2 Installing stacks in cabinets".
<Points of mounting>
(1)
Fixation plate provided in the upper area of the back face (with a set-in guide installed on the cabinet side)
(2)
Fixation plate provided in the lower area of the back face (with a set-in guide installed on the cabinet side)
(3)
Tapped hole for fixation in the upper area of the front face (2 x M8-25, when the recommended plate thickness of
the attachment for fixation is 2.3 mm)
(4)
Tapped hole for fixation in the lower area of the front face (2 x M8-25, when the recommended plate thickness of
the attachment for fixation is 2.3 mm)
Fixation plate
P (+) bar
Tapped holes
for fixation
N (-) bar
Wiring port (with
grommet) for DC fuse
disconnection detection
Hand opening
Control cable
lead-through hole
Fixation plate
Hand opening
Caster
Control cable
lead-through hole
Tapped holes
for fixation
Figure 4.2.1-7: Fixation points for Frame 3 size (400V/690V: 132 to 200 kW)
When using the tapped holes for fixation in the front face to fix the stack, make attachments for fixation from sheet metal.

Attachments for fixation of the same shape as the one shown in Figure 4.2.1-12: Attachment for fixing lower
section (recommended) and Figure 4.2.1-13: Attachment for fixing upper section (recommended) can be used.
(Refer to page 4-16.)
4-11
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
[1]
Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V: 132 to 200 kW)
[2]
Terminal positions and screw sizes (main circuit terminals)

Frame 3 size (400V:132 to 200 kW), models: FRN132SVG1S-4 to FRN200SVG1S-4
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
To connect output terminals for Frame 3 size, use a relay
bus bar provided on the cabinet side.
The relay bus bar should be fixed using an insulator.
Terminal
symbol
Terminal name
Output terminal U, V, W
DC input
terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding
terminal
G
Bolt size
M12
208 (dimensions between outer casters)
Figure 4.2.1-8: Terminal positions for Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW)
4-12
Terminal
tightening torque
48 N·m
Frame 3 size (690V:132 to 200 kW), models: FRN132SVG1S-69 to FRN200SVG1S-69
Unit: [mm]
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

To connect output terminals for Frame 3 size, use a relay
bus bar provided on the cabinet side.
The relay bus bar should be fixed using an insulator.
Terminal name
Terminal
symbol
Output terminal U, V, W
DC input
terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding
terminal
G
Bolt size
M12
208 (dimensions between outer casters)
Figure 4.2.1-9: Terminal positions for Frame 3 size (690V: 132 to 200 kW)
4-13
Terminal
tightening torque
48 N·m
4.2.1.3
[1]
Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW)
Fixation points
For Frame 4 size (400V series: 220 to 800 kW, 690V series: 250 to 450 kW), there are four supporting points for
installation. When installing them in cabinets, securely fix them at these supporting points.

For setting of the terminating resistor, refer to "4.2.2 Installing stacks in cabinets".
<Points of mounting>
(1)
Fixation plate provided in the upper area of the back face (with a set-in guide installed on the cabinet side)
(2)
Fixation plate provided in the lower area of the back face (with a set-in guide installed on the cabinet side)
(3)
Tapped hole for fixation in the upper area of the front face (2 x M8-25, when the recommended plate thickness of
the attachment for fixation is 2.3 mm)
(4)
Tapped hole for fixation in the lower area of the front face (2 x M8-25, when the recommended plate thickness of
the attachment for fixation is 2.3 mm)
Fixation plate
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Tapped holes
for fixation
Wiring port (with
grommet) for DC fuse
disconnection detection
Hand opening
Control cable
lead-through hole
Fixation plate
Hand opening
Caster
Control cable
lead-through hole
Tapped holes
for fixation
Figure 4.2.1-10: Fixation points for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 315 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW)
4-14
Tapped holes
for fixation
Fixation plate
Tapped holes
for fixation
Figure 4.2.1-11: Fixation points for Frame 4 size (400V: 630 to 800 kW)
4-15
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
Fixation plates
When using the tapped holes for fixation in the front face to fix the stack, make attachments for fixation from sheet metal.
Fixation holes
for stack type
This surface comes
into contact with the
stack type inverter.
Provide an attachment for installation
for each unit of the stack type inverter.
Attachment
fixation holes
This surface comes
into contact with the
stack type inverter.
Attachment
fixation holes
Attachment
fixation holes
Figure 4.2.1-12: Attachment for fixing lower
section (recommended)
Figure 4.2.1-13: Attachment for fixing upper section (recommended)
<Dimensions for the attachment for fixing lower section>
The recommended dimensions of the attachment (front lower section) for fixing Frame 3 and 4 size (400V: 132 to 800
kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) stacks to the cabinet are shown below. This attachment should be used to fix the stacks
individually.
(Fixation holes for stack type)
Attachment
fixation holes
Recommended
plate thickness:
2.3 mm
Figure 4.2.1-14: Attachment for fixing lower section
4-16
The recommended dimensions of the attachment (front upper section) for fixing Frame 3 and 4 size (400V: 132 to 800
kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) stacks to the cabinet are shown below. Using this attachment, fix the stack type inverters
together before putting them in the cabinet.
Attachment
fixation hole
(Fixation hole for stack type)
Recommended
plate thickness:
2.3 mm
Figure 4.2.1-15: Attachment for fixing upper section
(1)
This attachment should be applied to cabinets with width 800 and flat steel sheets bent to 45 degrees.
(2)
For stack type inverters, your design should be based on the horizontal spacing (clearance) of 12 mm
(assuming the use of a cabinet with a width of 800).
(3)
A height of 35 mm is recommended for surfaces in contact with stack type inverters. If this recommended
value is exceeded, the keyholes on the surface cover will be hidden, making cover removal impossible.
<Position of the set-in guide hole for the back face lower fixation plate>
The following figure illustrates the position of the set-in guide hole for the attachment that supports the back face lower
fixation plate for Frame 3 and 4 size (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) stacks as well as the position of the
screw clearance hole for stack type inverters.
Guiding plate width
(stack contacting surface)
190
80
1
22
8
5
12
50
5
2xφ16
(Screw
clearance
hole)
(Fixation plate position)
(Center position)
Set-in guide hole
(with screw clearance section)
Shown at left is the
front view of the stack
type inverter.
Figure 4.2.1-16: Positions of the set-in guide hole for the back face lower fixation plate and the screw clearance hole for
stack type inverters
(1)
The figure above shows the dimensions for a single unit of stack type inverter.
(2)
For stack type inverters, your design should be based on the horizontal spacing (clearance) of 12 mm
(assuming the use of a cabinet with a width of 800).
4-17
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
<Dimensions for the attachment for fixing upper section>
<Position of the set-in guide hole for the back face upper fixation plate>

Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V: 132 to 200 kW)
The following figure illustrates the positions of the set-in guide hole for the back face upper fixation plate and the screw
clearance hole for stack type inverters.
Guiding plate width
(stack contacting surface)
184.8
71
0.5
2xφ16
(Screw
clearance
hole)
8
4
25
50
0.5
56.9
21
56.9
(Fixation plate position)

(Center position)
Set-in guide hole
(with screw clearance section)
Shown at left is the front
左図はスタックタイプ
view of the stack type
を正面から見た状態を
inverter.
図示しています
Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW)
The following figure illustrates the position of the set-in guide hole for the back face upper fixation plate.
Guiding plate width
(stack contacting surface)
71
Fixing screw x 2
8
54.5
25
0.5
4
50
0.5
(Fixation
plate position)
55
Shown at left is the
左図はスタックタイプ
front view of the stack
を正面から見た状態を
type inverter.
図示しています
(Center position)
Set-in guide hole
(with screw clearance section)
55
Figure 4.2.1-17: Set-in guide hole for the back face upper fixation plate
(1)
The figure above shows the dimensions for a single unit of stack type inverter.
(2)
For stack type inverters, your design should be based on the horizontal spacing (clearance) of 12 mm
(assuming the use of a cabinet with a width of 800).
4-18
Terminal positions and screw sizes (main circuit terminals)

Frame 4 size (400V:220 to 315 kW), models: FRN220SVG1S-4 to FRN315SVG1S-4
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
To connect output terminals for Frame 4 size, use a
relay bus bar provided on the cabinet side.
The relay bus bar should be fixed using an insulator.
Terminal name
Terminal
symbol
Output terminal U, V, W
DC input
terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding
terminal
G
Bolt size
Terminal
tightening torque
M12
48 N·m
208 (dimensions between outer casters)
Figure 4.2.1-18: Terminal positions for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 315 kW)
4-19
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
[2]

Frame 4 size (400V: 630 to 800 kW), models: FRN630BVG1S-4 to FRN800BVG1S-4 (V-phase)
Unit: [mm]
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
To connect output terminals for Frame 4 size, use a
relay bus bar provided on the cabinet side.
Terminal
symbol
Terminal name
Output terminal AC
DC input
terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding
terminal
G
Bolt size
Terminal
tightening torque
M12
48 N·m
208 (dimensions between outer casters)
Figure 4.2.1-19: V-phase terminal positions for Frame 4 size (400V: 630 to 800 kW)
4-20
Frame 4 size (400V: 630 to 800 kW), models: FRN630BVG1S-4 to FRN800BVG1S-4 (U- and W-phases)
Unit: [mm]
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the
right side face>
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
To connect output terminals for Frame 4 size, use a
relay bus bar provided on the cabinet side.
Terminal
name
Terminal
symbol
Output
terminal
AC
DC input
terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding
terminal
Bolt size
Terminal
tightening torque
M12
48 N·m
G
Figure 4.2.1-20: U- and W-phase terminal positions for Frame 4 size (400V: 630 to 800 kW)
4-21
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring


Frame 4 size (690V: 250 to 450 kW), models: FRN250SVG1S-69 to FRN450SVG1S-69
Unit: [mm]
<Internal front view>
<Side face view: from the right side face>
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
To connect output terminals for Frame 4 size, use a
relay bus bar provided on the cabinet side.
The relay bus bar should be fixed using an insulator.
Terminal
name
Terminal
symbol
Output
terminal
U, V, W
DC input
terminal
P(+), N(-)
Grounding
terminal
G
Bolt size
Terminal
tightening torque
M12
48 N·m
208 (dimensions between outer casters)
Figure 4.2.1-21: Terminal positions for Frame 4 size (690V: 250 to 450 kW)
4-22
Installing stacks in cabinets
4.2.2.1
Precautions
(1)
Circulation of exhaust air outside cabinets
Provide a cabinet adopting forced ventilation with an air intake in
the lower area of the front door and an exhaust opening in the
ceiling of the cabinet.
(Cabinet of IP20 or equivalent protection level)
Note that even if an exhaust opening is provided in the ceiling in
the longitudinal direction as shown in Figure 4.2.2-1, most of the
exhaust heat will be released from the front face when there is a
wall or something behind the back face of the cabinet. If the
exhaust area is small and exhaust heat is released only in the
direction of the front face, exhaust air velocity will significantly
increase.
There is little clearance
between the wall and the
back face of the cabinet,
and air cannot be released
from the back face.
Wall
Low in
height
Route of
exhaust
heat
Exhaust
opening
On the other hand, air is introduced into the cabinet from the air
intake, so that there is a possibility that it will be circulated
through a route as shown in Figure 4.2.2-1.
To prevent exhaust heat released from the cabinet from being
introduced through the air intake, consider the location of
installation and increase the exhaust area of the exhaust
opening.
There is no
exhaust opening
in the side face.
Cabinet body
Air intake
Figure 4.2.2-1: Example of heated exhaust
intake (bad example)
If air is circuited through a route as shown in the right figure,
the inside temperature of the cabinet may increase, and the
stack may cause an overheat trip.
(2)
Partition of side faces of cabinet
When installing stacks side by side and connecting cabinets,
install a partition plate between cabinets as shown in Figure
4.2.2-2.
In partition plates, open only a hole for passing the PN bar
provided in the upper area of the cabinets. (Maintain an
insulation distance between the PN bars and steel panel of each
cabinet.)
If no partition plate is installed between cabinets, exhaust air
may circulate inside the cabinets and may not be completely
released, which may result in an overheat trip of the stacks.
(3)
Circulation of exhaust air released from stacks inside
cabinets
When maintaining a horizontal spacing (clearance) of 10 mm or
over between stacks contained in the same cabinet, install a
circulation prevention plate in a position close to the upper area
of the stacks to prevent the ingress of exhaust air released from
the stacks into the clearance.
Partition plates
Figure 4.2.2-2: Example of installation of
partition plates
1) If a circulation prevention plate is not
used, the stacks may cause an
overheat trip.
Circulation
prevention
plate
2) If you mount the stacks on the
cabinet side surfaces, similarly
attach circulation prevention plates.
If the clearance
is 50 mm
Figure 4.2.2-3: Example of installation of exhaust air circulation
prevention plate
4-23
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.2.2
(4)
Horizontal installation of stacks
Install stacks horizontally in cabinets in the direction shown in Figure 4.1.3-1 (on page 4-3).
If a stack is installed aslant, it may be distorted, or the casters may bend.
(5)
Tightening torques
Table 4.2.2-1: Tightening torques
Tighten screws and bolts to the torques specified in Table
4.2.2-1.
If tightening torques are specified for the place or equipment,
tighten them to the specified torques.
In addition, use screws and bolts in combination with a spring
washer or flat washer.
(1)
(2)
If the tightening torque applied to a conductive
portion greatly deviates from the specified torque,
the screw may become loose or the conductive
portion will be separated, resulting in failure to
maintain the normal contact state and unusual
heat generation from the contact portion.
Specified tightening torques are different between
conductive portions (contact portion between bus
bars or between a crimped terminal and an
appliance terminal, etc.) and structures (steel
panels and frames of cabinets, etc.).
4-24
[Unit: N·m]
Designation of
screw
Conductive
portion
Structure
M3
0.53±0.06
0.7±0.08
M3.5
0.88±0.11
1.2±0.14
M4
1.3±0.16
1.8±0.21
M5
2.7±0.32
3.5±0.42
M6
5±0.6
5.8±0.7
M8
12±1.4
13.5±1.6
M10
24±2.9
27±3.2
M12
40±4.8
48±5.8
M16
85±10.2
118±14
Procedure for removing and attaching the front cover
(1)
Loosen the screws fastening the front cover (four screws for Frame 1; six for Frame 2: eight for Frame 3: ten for
Frame 4).
Potbelly-shaped holes are used for the points of mounting of the front cover and allow the front cover to be
removed without unfastening the screws.
(2)
When the front cover is not provided with a hand opening, hold the right and left ends of the front cover with both
hands, and slide and remove it.
When the front cover is provided with a hand opening, lift the hand opening, and slide and remove the front cover.
(3)
Attach the front cover by reversing the removal procedure.
(4)
To make the control terminal on the control PCB visible, open the keypad case.
The keypad case opens and closes on the left side.
Keypad case
Screws
Keypad
Screws
Front cover
Figure 4.2.2-4: How to remove the front cover
4-25
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.2.2.2
4.2.2.3
(1)
Installing Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110
kW)
Installation procedure
To install in cabinets Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V series: 30 to 45 kW [Frame 1], 55 to 110 kW [Frame 2]. 690V
series: 90 to 110 kW [Frame 2]), use the following procedure:
1) Place a stack on the stack installation frame. Then, push both side faces of the stack (area below the center) to the
specified position.
2) Fix the stack with screws at the points of fixation on the further side. (M8 bolt x 2)
3) Using a fixation attachment, fix the stack with a screw (M5-12 to 25) at the point in the lower area of the front face.
• Fix the stack in order of “points of fixation”
(2), and (3) shown in the left figure.
2) Fixation points
• Carry out steps (3) mentioned above by
making reference to (3) Description.
(2)
Removal procedure
Remove the stack by reversing the "(1)
Installation procedure" above.
Guide
3) Fixation points
When drawing out the stack, remove the front
cover of the stack, and hold the hand opening
provided in the lower area.
Fixation attachment
Installation frame
Hand opening
Figure 4.2.2-5: How to fix Frame 1 and 2 size stacks
(400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW) in a cabinet
Figure 4.2.2-6: Position of hand opening
(1)
Frame 1 and 2 size (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW) stacks are not provided with casters, and
the legs in the lower area of the stack rub against the cabinet when setting or drawing it out. If a painted
steel panel is used on the cabinet side, the paint will come off from the rubbed area, and the area will get
corroded. For this reason, it is advisable to use SUS panels or plated steel panels rather than painted
steel panels. The legs of stacks that come into contact with cabinets use a plated steel panel (unpainted),
and the cut face of the panel is chamfered so as not to cause damage to cabinets.
(2)
Secure work space behind the back face to fix the stack at the points of fixation on the back face.
(3)
Installing a guide for setting and drawing out stacks on the cabinet in advance ensures the smooth setting
and draw-out of stacks.
(4)
Create the fixation attachment on the front face of the stack according to the recommended dimensions.
(See Figure 4.2.1-3 (on page 4-7).)
Design the cooling fan of the stack to be detached without removing this fixation attachment.
(5)
The upper area of the stack is designed to attach a DC fuse. Lay out this area so that this DC fuse can be
easily attached and detached.
(6)
Do not fix the stack aslant.
4-26
Description
1) Fixing the lower area of the front face of the stack (step 2 of "(1) Installation procedure").
Fix the lower area of the front face of each stack to be installed in a cabinet.
Temporarily fasten the fixation attachment to the stack and then to the frame of the cabinet. After the fixation
attachment is temporarily fastened to the stack and the frame, securely tighten the temporarily fastened points of
fixation.
Fixation attachment
Pan head screws
M5 x 12 (2 places)
Fixation attachment
Installation frame
Bolts
M8 x 12 (2 places)
Fixation attachment
Figure 4.2.2-7: Fixing the front face lower area for Frame 1 and 2 size stacks (400V: 30 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW)
4-27
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
(3)
4.2.2.4
Installing Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450
kW)
To install in cabinets Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V series: 132 to 200 kW [Frame 3], 220 to 800 kW [Frame 4]. 690V
series: 132 to 200 kW [Frame 3], 250 to 450 kW [Frame 4]), use the following procedure:
When installing stacks of these frame sizes, attach a bus bar terminal, which relays the main circuit terminal in the lower
area of the stacks, in advance.
(1)
Installation procedure
Follow the procedure described below to install a stack in a cabinet.
1) Place a stack on the stack installation frame. Then, hold the hand opening, and push the stack until the fixation plate
on the back face is fitted into the set-in guide.
2) Using a fixation attachment, fix the stack with a bolt (M8-16 bolt) at the point in the lower area of the front face.
3) Using a fixation attachment, fix the stack with a bolt (M8-16 bolt) at the point in the upper area of the front face.
Fix the stack in order of "points of fixation" (2) and (3) shown in the figure below.
(2)
Removal procedure
Remove the stack by reversing "(1) Installation procedure" above. When drawing out the stack, remove the front cover
of the stack, and hold the hand opening provided in the lower area.
1) Set-In guide
3) Fixation points
Hand opening
Fixation attachment
Fixation attachment
1) Set-In guide
2) Fixation points
Guide rail
Installation frame
Figure 4.2.2-8: How to fix Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) in a cabinet
(1)
Frame 3- and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW) are provided with casters. Install
caster guides on the cabinet. If caster guides are painted, the paint may come off when setting or drawing
out stacks. It is advisable to use SUS panels or plated steel panels.
(2)
Create the fixation attachment on the front face of the stack according to the recommended dimensions.
(See Figure 4.2.1-14 (on page 4-16) and Figure 4.2.1-15 (on page 4-17).)
Design the cooling fan of the stack to be detached without removing this fixation attachment.
(3)
The upper area of the stack is designed to attach a DC fuse. Lay out this area so that this DC fuse can be
easily attached and detached.
(4)
Do not fix the stack aslant.
4-28
(3)
Description
Caster outer perimeters for the respective inverter models are specified in the figures listed below. Install guide rails
based on the specified perimeter according to the dimensions of the inverter used.
• 400V series, 132 to 200 kW  Figure 4.2.1-8 (page 4-12)
• 690V series, 132 to 200 kW  Figure 4.2.1-9 (page 4-13)
• 400V series, 220 to 315 kW  Figure 4.2.1-18 (page 4-19)
• 400V series, 630 to 800 kW  Figure 4.2.1-19 (page 4-20)
• 690V series, 250 to 450 kW  Figure 4.2.1-21 (page 4-22)
(A) Guide rail on back face
(B) Guide rail on front face
Figure 4.2.2-9: Examples of guide rails
2) Fixation plate set-in guide on the back face of the stack
The relationship between the sizes of the holes in the set-in guide and the position of the stack fixation plate is shown
in Figure 4.2.1-16 and Figure 4.2.1-17 (on pages 4-17 and 4-18). Note that size and the clearance are different
between the upper and lower holes.
If it is possible to bend as the figure below, it is advisable to use a 2.3-mm-thick steel sheet to manufacture a set-in
guide. When bending a steel sheet only in the vertical direction to manufacture a set-in guide, use a 3.2-mm-thick
steel sheet.
Punch holes in the set-in guide in the directions specified in the figures below.
(A) Lower area of back face
(B) Upper area of back face
Set-in guide
hole-punching direction
Set-in guide
Set-in guide
hole-punching
direction
Fixation plate
Set-in guide
Fixation plate
Steel plate shape recommended when t = 3.2 mm
Figure 4.2.2-10: Overview of set-in guide for Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW)
4-29
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
1) Guide rail
3) Fixing the lower area of the front face of the stack (step 2 of "(1) Installation procedure")
Fix the lower area of the front face of each stack to be installed in a cabinet.
Temporarily fasten the fixation attachment to the stack and then to the frame of the cabinet.
After the fixation attachment is temporarily fastened to the stack and the frame, securely tighten the temporarily
fastened points of fixation on the stack side.
Finally, pushing the stack in the direction of the back face, securely tighten temporarily fastened points of fixation on
the cabinet side.
(1) Temporarily fasten the fixation
attachment to the stack and then
to the lower area.
M8 x 16 (2 places)
Fixation
attachment
Fixation points
Installation frame
Installation frame
(2) After (1), securely tighten the bolts on the stack
side. Then, pushing the stack in the direction of
the back face, securely tighten the bolts on the
M8 x 16 (2 places) cabinet side.
Figure 4.2.2-11: Fixing the front face lower area for Frame 3 and 4 size stacks
(400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW)
4) Fixing the upper area of the front face (step 3 of "(1) Installation procedure")
The upper areas of the front faces of stacks are designed to collectively fix the stacks to be installed with a fixation
attachment.
Temporarily fasten the fixation attachment to the frame of the cabinet, and fix each stack. Finally, pushing the stack in
the direction of the back face, securely tighten the temporarily fastened points on the frame side.
Design this fixation attachment with a tolerance that presses it in the direction of the back face.
M8 x 16 (2 places)
Fixation
attachment
Figure 4.2.2-12: Fixing the front face lower area for Frame 3 and 4 size stacks
(400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW)
4-30
Connecting output terminals of Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to
800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW)
In Frame 3 and 4 size stacks (400V: 132 to 800 kW, 690V: 132 to 450 kW), connect a wire and etc. by connecting a relay
copper bar to stack output terminal. This section describes relay copper bars.
Relay copper bars of the same shape are available for both Frame 3 and 4 size stacks.
Figure 4.2.2-13 shows the recommended size of a relay copper bar. Prepare a relay copper bar based on the figure, as
well as an insulator for fastening this copper bar to the frame of the cabinet.
(1)
Connect a relay copper bar before installing a stack.
(2)
When removing stack type inverters, loosen the stack type output terminal bolts, lift and then pull out to
prevent the output terminals interfering with the relay copper bar.
200
95(85min) *2
6.5
40
120
18.5
20
15
b
5
5
[Description of installation]
Position of
stack
installation
frame
Stack output
terminal
ø15
Use insulating supports of height shown in the table below,
and secure the insulating supports, etc. at two points.
h
t
80.5
2-ø12
insulating
supports
1) Modify the area marked with ＊＊＊ according
to the design of the cabinet structure.
2) Adjust the minimum length of *2 to 85 mm.
Design the structure of the cabinet
so that it will fit in this position.
Relay copper bar
Voltage:
*[V]
Model capacity:
# [kW]
Relay copper bar size:
t [mm]×b [mm]
Insulating support height:
h [mm]
132 to 200
5×30
27 to 31
220 to 315
10×30
630 to 800
10×125
132 to 220
5×30
27 to 31
250 to 450
10×30
26 to 30
160 to 220
5×30
34 to 38
280 to 355
10×30
33 to 37
160 to 220
5×30
34 to 38
280 to 450
10×30
33 to 37
Model
Inverters:
FRN*SVG1S-#
PWM converters:
RHC*S-#D
Diode rectifiers:
RHD*S-#D
400
690
400
Filter stacks:
RHF*S-#D
690
26 to 30
Figure 4.2.2-13: Recommended size of a relay copper bar, insulating supports
4-31
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.2.2.5
Connect the relay copper bar and
output wiring before installing the
stack.
The clearance between the stack output terminal and the relay
copper bar is 1 mm or greater. The stack output terminal is designed
such that its vertical position can be adjusted.
Fix the stack to the cabinet and then make connections as shown below.
The stack is designed to be installable in a cabinet without modification.
Stack output
terminal
The vertical position of the stack output
terminal can be adjusted by loosening
this bolt.
Relay copper bar
Figure 4.2.2-14: Precautions when connecting a relay copper bar
4-32
Connecting DC bus bars
A stack has DC bus bar connection terminals P (+) and N (-) in the upper area. By setting DC bus bars in the upper area
of the cabinet side, the P (+) and N (-) terminals can be easily connected.

(1) For DC bus bars on the cabinet side, see "4.3 Basic configuration of cabinets".
(2) Select a bus bar size according to "4.4 Bus bars".
4.2.3.1
Connecting bus bars for Frame 1 to 3 size stacks (400V: 30 to 200 kW,
690V: 90 to 200 kW)
For Frame 1 to 3 size stacks (400V: 30 to 200 kW, 690V: 90 to 200
kW), the P (+) and N (-) terminals are attached on the right side of
the stack.
(Refer to Figure 4.2.1-1 (on page4-6) and Figure 4.2.1-7 (on page
4-11).)
DC bus bars
Nuts
Since nuts are welded to the P (+) and N (-) terminals, position them
so that the DC bus bars from the DC line will contact on the reverse
side.
(Refer to Figure 4.2.3-1.)
P (+) and N (-) terminals
Figure 4.2.3-1: Examples of DC bus bar
connections for Frame 1 to 3
size stacks
4.2.3.2
Connecting bus bars for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to
450 kW)
For Frame 4 size stacks (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW), the P (+) and N (-) terminals are attached on the
front side of the stack. (Refer to Figure 4.2.1-10 (on page 4-14).) Since nuts are welded to the backside of these
terminals, position them so that the DC bus bars from the DC line will contact on the front side. (Refer to Figure 4.2.3-2.)
DC bus bars
Nuts
P (+) and N (-) terminals
Figure 4.2.3-2: Examples of DC bus bar connections for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW)
4-33
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.2.3
4.3
Basic configuration of cabinets
The basic structure of a stack cabinet is designed to accommodate three stacks. Design the cabinet structure based on
this basic structure.
4.3.1
Appearance of cabinets
The basic cabinet structure is as shown below.
Cabinet specifications
(1)
Ambient temperature
: -5 to 40°C (annual average temperature: 35°C), temperature at inlet of stack: 40°C
(maximum value)
(2)
IP protection level
: IP20
(3)
Maintenance and inspection : Only access to the front face
(4)
Air intake
: Provided with a dust collection filter (for coarse dust)
(5)
Single swinging door
: Handle type. The door is fixed at three points - upper, lower, and central points.
(6)
Size
: Overall length = 800 x 2560 x 630
Body = 2200 x 800 x 600 (+30), height of exhaust opening = 260, channel base =
100
Exhaust opening [exhaust opening] *1
Side
face
Front
face
Sizes of holes: 9 x 100
*1. The exhaust opening requires
hole punching all around.
<Effective area>
- Front/back: 0.144 m2
- Both side faces: 0.1044 m 2
• 0.2484 m2/total
Rod (inner)
Intake air filter *2
Japan Vilene PS/400N
(recommended)
(Other: PS/150N，PS/300N)
Filter cassette: Punched steel plate *3
Sizes of holes: 9 x 100
Handle
*2. For the air intake, the front door
requires hole punching.
<Effective area>
0.2808 m2/total
*3. For the intake air filter, holes
should be punched within the
area from the cabinet body to
the position shown at left to
meet the intake area specified
in *2.
Channel base
541
Figure 4.3.1-1: Appearance of cabinet
4-34
Internal layouts of cabinets
This section shows the internal layouts of cabinets, assuming the case where stack type inverters are used in
conjunction with peripheral equipment (DCF: DC fuse) and a ACL (radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor) connected
on the output side.
As a DC bus (DC bus bar), Cu x 100 (in two parallel rows) is adopted in consideration for connection of plural stacks and
the low impedance of the PN bus.
4.3.2.1
Internal layout for Frame 1 size (400V: 30 to 45 kW)
Internal cross section
Cross section of A-A
Protective cover
(polyvinyl
chloride)
Cross section of X-X
Wire
Stack output
terminal
Front side
Protective cover
(made of steel panel,
0 x 30 hole punched)
Figure 4.3.2-1: Example of internal layout for Frame 1 size (400V: 30 to 45 kW)
Components

400V series
Model: FRN_
Specifications Rated current
[A]
30SVG1S-4
37SVG1S-4
45SVG1S-4
MD spec
60
75
91
LD spec
75
91
112
DC fuse
F1-F3
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
Zero-phase reactor
ACL1-3
ACL-40B (x4)
ACL-40B (x4)
ACL-74B (x4)
External wire terminal
Z1-Z3
LT2E-080 (4pin)
LT2E-090 (4pin)
LT2E-150 (4pin)
(1)
The number of turns of the radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL) depends on the type and size
of the wire to be used.
Thus, when this layout is applied, it is assumed that the wire is passed through the radio noise reducing
zero-phase reactor only once.
(2)
The external wire terminal block is selected based on the rated current of each inverter.
(Selection criteria: ambient temperature of 40°C and temperature rise of 30K.)
4-35
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.3.2
4.3.2.2
Internal layout for Frame 2 size (400V: 55 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW)
Internal cross section
Cross section of A-A
Protective cover
(polyvinyl
chloride)
Cross section of X-X
Wire
Stack output
terminal
Front side
Protective cover
(made of steel panel,
0 x 30 hole punched)
Figure 4.3.2-2: Internal layout for Frame 2 size (400V: 55 to 110 kW, 690V: 90 to 110 kW)
Components

400V series
Model: FRN_
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
75SVG1S-4
90SVG1S-4
110SVG1S-4
150
176
210
176
210
253
DC fuse
F1-F3
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
Zero-phase reactor
ACL1-3
ACL-74B (x4)
External wire terminal Z1-Z3

LT2E-200 (4pin)
LT2E-300 (4pin)
690V series
Model: FRN_
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
90SVG1S-69
110SVG1S-69
100
130
130
140
DC fuse
F1-F3
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
Zero-phase reactor
ACL1-3
―
External wire terminal Z1-Z3
LT2E-150 (4pin)
(1)
The number of turns of the radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL) depends on the type and size
of the wire to be used.
Thus, when this layout is applied, it is assumed that the wire is passed through the radio noise reducing
zero-phase reactor only once.
(2)
The external wire terminal block is selected based on the rated current of each inverter.
(Selection criteria: ambient temperature of 40°C and temperature rise of 30K.)
4-36
Internal layout for Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V:
132 to 200 kW)
Internal cross section
Cross section of A-A
Protective
cover
(polyvinyl
chloride)
Cross section of X-X
Front side
Protective cover
(made of steel panel,
0 x 30 hole punched)
Insulation
tube
Cu6x40
Figure 4.3.2-3: Internal layout for Frame 3 size (400V: 132 to 200 kW, 690V: 132 to 200 kW)
Components

400V series
Model: FRN_
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
DC fuse
Zero-phase reactor
External wire terminal

F1-F3
ACL1-3
Z1-Z3
E
132SVG1S-4
253
304
160SVG1S-4
304
377
200SVG1S-4
377
415
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
F200160PB (x4)
Cu5x30 (x3)
Cu6x25
690V series
Model: FRN_
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
DC fuse
Zero-phase reactor
External wire terminal
F1-F3
ACL1-3
Z1-Z3
E
132SVG1S-69
140
161
160SVG1S-69
161
216
200SVG1S-69
216
235
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
―
Cu3x30 (x3)
Cu6x25
(1)
The number of turns of the radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL) depends on the type and size
of the wire to be used. Thus, when this layout is applied, it is assumed that the wire is passed through the
radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor only once.
(2)
The external wire terminals are selected based on the rated current of each inverter.
(Selection criteria: ambient temperature of 40°C and temperature rise of 30K.)
4-37
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.3.2.3
4.3.2.4
Internal layout for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V:
250 to 450 kW)
Cross section of A-A
Internal cross section
Protective
cover
(polyvinyl
chloride)
Cross section of X-X
Front side
Protective cover
(made of steel
panel, 0 x 30
hole punched)
Insulation
tube
Cu6x40
Figure 4.3.2-4: Internal layout for Frame 4 size (400V: 220 to 800 kW, 690V: 250 to 450 kW)
Components

400V series
Model: FRN_
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
220SVG1S-4
250SVG1S-4
280SVG1S-4
315SVG1S-4
415
468
520
585
468
520
585
650
DC fuse
F1-F3
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
Zero-phase reactor
ACL1-3
F200160PB (x4)
External wire terminal
Z1-Z3
Cu10x30 (x3)
E
Cu6x25
Model: FRN_
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
630BVG1S-4
710BVG1S-4
800BVG1S-4
1170
1370
1480
1370
1480
1850
DC fuse
F1-F3
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
Zero-phase reactor
ACL1-3
F200160PB (x4)
External wire terminal
Z1-Z3
Cu10x125 (x3)
E
Cu6x25
4-38
690V series
Model: FRN_
250SVG1S-69
280SVG1S-69
315SVG1S-69
265
295
330
295
330
365
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
DC fuse
F1-F3
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
Zero-phase reactor
ACL1-3
―
External wire terminal
Z1-Z3
Cu5x30 (x3)
E
Cu6x25
Model: FRN_
355SVG1S-69
400SVG1S-69
450SVG1S-69
365
410
460
410
460
―
Specifications Rated current MD spec
[A]
LD spec
DC fuse
F1-F3
Refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
Zero-phase reactor
ACL1-3
―
External wire terminal
Z1-Z3
Cu5x30 (x3)
E
Cu6x25
(1)
The number of turns of the radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL) depends on the type and size
of the wire to be used.
Thus, when this layout is applied, it is assumed that the wire is passed through the radio noise reducing
zero-phase reactor only once.
(2)
The external wire terminals are selected based on the rated current of each inverter.
(Selection criteria: ambient temperature of 40°C and temperature rise of 30K.)
4-39
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring

4.4
Bus bars
Use a bus bar to connect DC bus bar connection terminals [P (+), N (-)] and output terminals (U, V, W). This section
describes bus bars.
4.4.1
Materials and surface treatment of bus bars
Use bus bars made of any of the materials specified in JIS H3140 and subjected to any of the surface plating processes
complying with JIS H0404.
Material of bus bars : C1100BB
: C1020BB
Surface plating
: Ep-Cu/Sn3
: Ep-Cu/Sn-Pb(5-10)3
4.4.2
Copper (electric conductivity: 97%)
... JIS H3140
Tin plating (plating thickness: 3 μm)
Tin lead alloy (plating thickness: 3 μm)
... JIS H0404
Connection of bus bars (sizes of holes in bus bars, drilling
pitches)
According to the size of bus bar, the number of connection holes and the hole pitch are specified as shown in Table
4.4.2-2.
Connect bus bars in any of the patterns shown in Table 4.4.2-1. If bus bars of different widths are used, connect them
based on the bus bar of the smaller width.
Table 4.4.2-1: Connection patterns of bus bars
a ＝ b
Straight
connection
a<b
a>b
b
a
L-branched
connection
a
b
a
b
b
T-branched
connection
b
a
a
a
b
a
a
b
Based on the
smaller bus bar
b
Table 4.4.2-2: Connection of bus bars (relatively narrow bus bars) and bolt holes and pitches
Bus bar [mm]
3 to 10 mm thickness
Thickness
Size of hole [mm]
Overlap
dimension
A x B [mm]
a
b
c
e
15
15×15
―
―
―
―
20
20×20
25
25×25
30
30×30
40
40×40
50
50×50
60
60×60
Width
(B)
d
Applicable
bolt
Effective
contact area
[mm2]
7
M6
187
10
M8
322
12
M10
787
15
M12
1423
Application diagram
547
―
―
―
―
2323
19
4-40
M16
3317
When the terminal of the mating
appliance has two holes or when
there is a possibility that the bus
bar will rotate (slip out of position)
because of the structure, two holes
need drilled in the bus bar.
Secure an effective contact area equal to or larger than the appropriate value specified in the table above.
(2)
Set the contact surface pressure at 5 [N/mm2] or over.
(3)
The bearing surface pressure of the bolt shall not exceed 50 [N/mm 2] in order to prevent creep.
(4)
The stress of the bolt shall not exceed the yield point of 226 N/mm 2 (bolt made of 4T).
(5)
These specifications apply to up to three bus bars connected in parallel.
(6)
The effective contact area means the area of the contact portion calculated by subtracting the area of the
bolt hole (d).
Table 4.4.2-3: Connection of bus bars (wide bus bars) and bolt holes and pitches
Bus bar [mm]
a
b
c
e
d
Applicable
bolt
Effective
contact area
[mm2]
75
75×75
40
40
17.5
17.5
15
M12
4919
80
80×80
20
20
5694
100
80×100
25
7294
Width
Thickness
(B)
10 mm thickness
Size of hole [mm]
Overlap
dimension
A x B [mm]
50
Application diagram
The precautions stated in Table 4.4.2-2 apply.
4.4.3
Connection methods and tightening torques
Connect bus bars using a bolt as shown in Figure 4.4.3-1. Use plural washers Hexagon head bolt (iron)
or belleville springs for bus bars that are connected in a frequently vibrating
location or in which stress concentrates to prevent the bus bars from
becoming loose.
In addition, comply with Table 4.2.2-1 "Tightening torques" (on page 4-24).
(1)
(2)
Hexagon nut (iron)
Flat washer
(iron) *1
Flat washer
(iron) *1
Spring washer No. 2
(iron or SUS)
It is recommended that belleville springs, spring washers, and
nuts be mounted on surfaces where they can be easily
checked after tightening.
Figure 4.4.3-1: Example of connection
Use bolts and nuts plated with Ep-Fe, Zn5, or CM2.
of bus bar
4-41
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
(1)
4.4.3.1
Rated current of Cu bus bars
Rated currents of bus bars are as shown in Table 4.4.3-1 (on page 4-43). However, if the ambient temperature of the
cabinet is higher than 40°C and in some other cases, the derating of the current must be considered.
[Current capacity of bus bars]
Bus bars are selected based on the assumption that the temperature is 70°C (ambient temperature = 40°C and
temperature rise = 30K). If ambient temperature drops below 40°C, the value of temperature rise increases. Consider a
correction factor according to Figure 4.4.3-3.
In addition, the reduction rate of the supplied current depends on the layout of bus bars. When supplying a large current,
plan the current by making reference to Figure 4.4.3-2.
Correction factor
2000
[Conditions]
● Equivalent to general
commercial power supply
(AC)
● Size of bus bar: 10 x 60
Tin plating
● Free-air condition
Current [A]
1500
Vertical layout
1000
Horizontal
layout
1000
Temperature rise (K)
Figure 4.4.3-3: Temperature correction factor
1
10
100
Temperature rise [K]
Figure 4.4.3-2: Derating in installation direction
(reference)
4-42
Dimensions (mm)
Thickness Width
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
15
Cross
sectional
area
[mm2]
No parallel
connection
DC
2 parallel rows
When equal
to thickness
AC (50/60Hz)
DC
AC (50/60Hz)
1920
1790
3 parallel rows
When equal
to thickness
DC
AC (50/60Hz)
3670
3060
4230
3330
15
45
180
180
20
65
225
225
25
75
275
275
30
90
320
320
25
100
325
325
30
120
380
375
40
160
485
480
25
125
370
365
30
150
430
425
40
200
550
540
50
250
660
650
60
300
780
860
75
375
950
930
25
150
410
410
30
180
480
470
40
240
610
600
50
300
730
720
60
360
860
840
75
450
1050
1010
2090
1910
80
480
1110
1070
2190
2000
100
600
1350
1280
2620
2330
25
200
500
490
30
240
570
560
40
320
720
700
50
400
860
840
60
480
1010
970
75
600
1220
1160
2390
2120
80
640
1290
1220
2510
2210
100
800
1580
1470
2990
2560
40
400
830
800
1730
1600
50
500
990
950
2010
1810
60
600
1150
1090
2280
2010
75
750
1390
1290
2680
2290
80
800
1460
1360
2810
2380
100
1000
1780
1620
3310
2730
4750
3490
125
1250
2150
1930
3930
3160
5570
3960
150
1500
2550
2260
4550
3590
6410
4450
125
1500
2390
2100
4290
3300
6140
4120
150
1800
2800
2430
4930
3700
7000
4590
100
1500
2110
1920
150
2250
3160
2660
5510
3870
7900
4790
175
2625
3550
2960
6080
4240
8660
5200
200
3000
4070
3350
6850
4680
9680
5700
(1)
The selection conditions applied to this table are ambient temperature: 40°C and temperature rise: 30K.
(2)
The layout of bus bars is a vertical layout.
(3)
The material of bus bars is one complying with “4.4.1 Materials and surface treatment of bus bars” (on
page 4-40).
4-43
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
Table 4.4.3-1: Rated currents of CU bus bars
4.5
Main circuit wires
This section describes the wire sizes for the inverter main circuit section.
Depending on the wiring method for the main circuit section, noise may be applied to the control circuit system, and the
system may malfunction.

See Chapter 7 "EMC Compatible Peripherals" and Appendix 5 "Proficient way to use inverters (on preventing
electric noise)" and Appendix 6 "Grounding as noise countermeasure and ground noise".
4.5.1
Wire selection criteria
Unless otherwise required by a special application, use the wire types listed below.
<400V series>
 600 V vinyl-insulated wire (IV wire)
This is an insulated wire with a rated voltage of 600 V and a maximum permissible temperature of 60°C. It can be
widely used for main circuits and control circuits inside cabinets or indoors.
However, this wire is low in flexibility and permissible current and is not suitable for large-capacity applications.
 600 V class 2 vinyl wire or 600 V polyethylene-insulated wire (HIV wire)
This is an insulated wire with a rated current of 600 V and a maximum permissible temperature of 75°C. It is superior
in flexibility to IV wires of the same class and permits a large current to flow.
Thus, it is applicable to the main circuit sections inside cabinets or indoor.
 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire (FSLC wire)
This is an insulated wire with a rated current of 600 V and a maximum permissible temperature of 90°C. It is much
superior in flexibility to IV wires of the same class and permits a large current to flow. Thus, it can be used not only for
large-capacity applications but also for the reduction of the exclusive area of wires or the streamlining of work.
For your reference, Board Lex manufactured by Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. is equivalent to this wire.
<690V series>
Use wires rated at 1000 V or higher voltage. The maximum permissible temperature should be 70°C for PVC (polyvinyl
chloride) or 90°C for XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene) or EP (ethylene-propylene rubber) according to IEC 60364-5-52:
2001(JIS C 60364-5-52: 2006).
(Examples of wires: NYY, NYCWY (70°C))
• IEC 60364-5-52：2001 Electrical installations of buildings - Part 5-52：Selection and erection of electrical equipment
- wiring systems
• JIS C 60364-5-52:2006 "Electrical installations of buildings -- Part 5-52: Selection and erection of electrical equipment
-- Wiring systems"
4.5.1.1
Overcurrent protectors and protection coordination
Select a wire size that does not burn out with an overcurrent.
• PWM converter input/output side : Time until a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) causes an overcurrent trip,
or time until the overcurrent protection function of a PWM converter stack starts
to work.
• Diode rectifier input/outputs side : Time until a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) causes an overcurrent trip.
• Inverter output side
: Time until the overcurrent trip function of an inverter starts to work.
Figure 4.5.1-1 shows the operating characteristic of an MCCB. The right side of this operating characteristic curve is the
operating range, and the left side is the non-operating range. Judging from this curve, the wire showing the characteristic
 is a proper wire. (The wires with the characteristics  and  are improper.)
4-44
 Short-time domain
Note that the short-time domain may intersect with the
permissible current characteristic of the wire at a point close to
the point of intersection of the time delay trip and instantaneous
trip characteristics of an MCCB (portion ◯
A in Figure 4.5.1-1).
To make it easy to consider the short-time domain of IV wires,
combinations of the rated currents of the MCCB and protectable
wire sizes are shown in Table 4.5.1-1.
Consider FSLC wires based on the short-time characteristic
shown in Figure 4.5.1-2 and the operating characteristic curve of
the MCCB. For the operating characteristic curve of the MCCB,
see the catalog for it or engineering documents.
Permissible current
of wire-operating
time
Inverter
input
current
Current
Figure 4.5.1-1: Protection coordination between
MCCB and wire
Table 4.5.1-1: Sizes of 600 V vinyl insulated wires (IV wires) protectable in short-time domain
Rated current
of MCCB
[A]
Wire size
[mm2]
15
20
30
40
50
60
75
100 125 150 175 200 225 250 300 350 400 500 600 700
2.0
3.5
5.5
8.0
14
22
38
60
100
Domain that can
be protected
150
200
250
325
(1)
The short-time permissible temperature of the wire is set at 100°C.
(2)
Separately calculate an applicable wire size in case of a fault break.
Time [s]
Current [kA]
Figure 4.5.1-2: Short-time characteristics of 600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wires (FSLCs)
4-45
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
Permissible current of wire [A] > Rated current of MCCB [A]
Operating
characteristic of
MCCB
Operating time
 Continuous domain
To prevent the MCCB from operating after the current exceeds
the permissible current (continuously supplied current) of the
wire. The following relationship must be fulfilled:
 Short circuit domain


 t2

The square product  i 2  dt or I 2 ( t 2  t1) of the passing current (short


t
1



circuit current) from t1 (at which a short circuit occurred) to t2 (at which the
cutoff of the MCCB was completed) is called the "short-time capacity" of the
wire or the "total cutoff" I2･t of the MCCB at the time of short circuit current
cutoff. When the relationship between them is as shown below, the wire can
be protected.
Short circuit
current of wire
[kA2s]
>
Total cutoff I2·x t at the time of
[kA2s]
short circuit current cutoff
Obtain the short circuit capacity of the wire from the catalogue for it or
engineering documents. Calculate the total cutoff I 2･t of the MCCB at the
time of short circuit current cutoff using the equation given below.
Total cutoff of MCCB at the time of short circuit current cutoff:
I 2t  Is 2  tCB[kA2 s]
Table 4.5.1-2: Short-time currents
Wire size
[mm2]
2.0
3.5
5.5
8.0
14
22
38
60
100
150
200
250
325
Short-time capacity [kA2s]
IV wire
FLSC wire
0.054
0.165
0.408
0.863
2.64
6.53
19.47
48.55
135
303
539
843
1425
0.079
0.242
0.597
1.262
3.865
9.544
28.47
71.0
197.2
443.7
788.8
1232.5
―
Is: Short circuit current passing through the MCCB, or the rated cutoff
capacity [kA] of the MCCB when the short circuit current is
unknown.
tCB: Operating time of the MCCB corresponding to the short circuit
current, or the operating time [s] of the MCCB at the rated cutoff
capacity when the short circuit current is unknown.
When the short-time characteristic curve of the wire is available, calculate the protectable time to the short circuit
current and the operating time of the MCCB from this curve and the operating characteristic curve of the MCCB. The
short circuit current passing through the wire and that passing through the MCCB are the same. Thus, compare the
protectable time to the short circuit current of the wire with the operating time of the MCCB.
tw[s]>tC B[s]
tw: Protectable time to the short circuit current of the wire
Use Table 4.5.1-2 for the short-time capacity of the wire.
Obtain the operating time of the MCCB from the catalogue for it or engineering documents.
4-46
Since the wiring distance inside a cabinet is short, it is unlikely that any problem will occur even if the wire size is
determined based on the permissible current. However, it is necessary to check for a voltage drop when considering
wiring, including external cables. The wire size is determined by its electric resistance, not its permissible current, if the
wiring distance is long.
3  r   I
1000
ΔV 
ΔV
r
...
Temperature correction factor
Calculate a voltage drop using the equation given below.
Equation 4.5.1-1
: Voltage drop [V]
: Resistance value corresponding to the
conductor temperature [Ω/km]
: Wiring distance [m]
: Passing current [A]

I
Calculate the value of r using the equation given below.
r＝K·r20
Conductor temperature [C]
K:
Temperature correction factor
r20:
Conductor resistance value at 20°C [Ω]
Figure 4.5.1-3: Temperature correction factor K
4.5.2
Recommended wire size
4.5.2.1
3-phase 400V series (MD spec)
Table 4.5.2-1: Recommended wire sizes (MD spec, ambient temperature: 40°C)
FRN
VG1S
30
30S
37
37S
45
45S
22
55
55S
38
22
75
75S
60
38
90
90S
Current
[Adc]
60°C
75°C
90°C
Current
[Adc]
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
55
14
8
8
65
t3×25
14
8
8
68
22
14
14
80
(75)
22
14
14
82
38
22
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
60°C
75°C
90°C
14
8
5.5
14
110
110S
132
132S
100
160
160S
150
200
200S
200
220
220S
250
250
250S
325
280
280S
315
315S
2×200
630
630B
―
―
710
710B
―
800
800B
―
101
38
137
60
38
38
164
100
60
201
100
60
241
150
100
292
200
150
365
250
200
402
325
457
2×200
150
150
200
250
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
22
60
100
Inverter output [U, V, W]
200
512
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
60°C
75°C
90°C
5.5
97
22
119
t3×30
38
22
38
162
(90)
60
38
195
60
238
286
t4×40
347
(160)
100
433
150
200
476
t8×50
250
(400)
325
250
200
541
325
250
606
―
60
682
[mm2]
5.5
8
75
8
91
14
38
150
112
22
176
60
100
210
t5×30
253
100
(150)
304
150
t10
415
×30
468
200
(300)
520
150
377
200
250
Grounding
terminal
[ G]
14
60
100
150
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
Current
[A]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
DC bus bars P (+), N (-)
When PWM converter is used When diode rectifier is used
576
2×250
2×200
―
1151
―
―
―
1365
t8×50
―
3×250 2×250
t10
1170
―
―
1298
―
―
―
1538
(400)
―
4×250 2×325
×125
1370
―
―
1462
―
―
―
1733
―
4×325 3×325 (1250) 1480
38
60
585
150
*An “IV wire,” a “600 V HIV insulated wire,” and a “600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire” were used at
permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial wiring.
(1)
The current values of the DC bus bar were calculated on the assumption that the converter (PWM
converter or diode rectifier) supply voltage was 400 V AC.
(2)
The grounding wire is cited from the permissible short circuit current defined in internal wire regulations.
(3)
When using wires of 150 mm2 or greater, use relay bus bars so that the wires can be connected. (The
Frame 3 and 4 size inverters' output terminals are configured to connect wires by use of relay bus bars.)
(4)
Use bus bars to connect to a DC line of 630 kW or greater. It is also recommended that the inverter output
side be connected using a bus bar.
4-47
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
Voltage drop
4.5.1.2
Table 4.5.2-2: Recommended wire sizes (MD spec, ambient temperature: 50°C)
FRN
VG1S
Current
[Adc]
60°C
30
30S
22
8
5.5
55
22
37
37S
38
14
8
68
38
45
45S
22
14
82
60
55
55S
60
75
75S
100
38
38
90
90S
60°C
75°C
90°C
22
(75)
38
22
100
292
325
200
200S
325
200
150
365
2×200
220
220S
2×200
402
2×250
250
250S
2×250
457
2×325
512
―
22
60
8
38
22
112
60
38
150
210
325
100
253
t4×40
200
(150)
304
(160)
250
150
325
200
377
t10
415
t8×50
2×200
×30
468
(400)
2×250
2×20 (300)
0
520
60
100
250
325
585
22
176
t5×30
250
5.5
14
60
150
[mm2]
91
100
176
Grounding
terminal
[ G]
75
(90)
150
150
91
8
14
t3×30
100
250
14
112
250
160S
75°C
150
200
160
60°C
Bus
bar
90°C size2
[mm ]
60
241
200
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
38
201
150
325
t3×25
75
150
110S
280
60
164
132S
200
―
100
110
250
60
14
137
132
280S
100
90°C
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
101
60
75°C
Current
[Adc]
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
Inverter output [U, V, W]
Current
[A]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
DC bus bars P (+), N (-)
When PWM converter is used When diode rectifier is used
210
t5×30
253
(150)
304
150
377
t10
415
×30
468
(300)
2×325
38
60
520
315
315S
2×325
250
576
3×325
630
630B
―
―
―
1151
―
―
―
1170
t8×50
―
4×250
t10
1170
585
710
710B
―
―
―
1298
―
―
―
1370
(400)
―
4×325
×125
1370
800
800B
―
―
―
1462
―
―
―
1480
―
5×325
(1250) 1480
150
*An “IV wire,” a “600 V HIV insulated wire,” and a “600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire” were used at
permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial wiring.
(1)
The current values of the DC bus bar were calculated on the assumption that the converter (PWM
converter or diode rectifier) supply voltage was 400 V AC.
(2)
The grounding wire is cited from the permissible short circuit current defined in internal wire regulations.
(3)
When using wires of 150 mm2 or greater, use relay bus bars so that the wires can be connected. (The
Frame 3 and 4 size inverters' output terminals are configured to connect wires by use of relay bus bars.)
(4)
Use bus bars to connect to a DC line of 630 kW or greater. It is also recommended that the inverter output
side be connected using a bus bar.
4-48
4.5.2.2
3-phase 400V series (LD spec)
14
22
38
60
100
150
200
250
325
2×200
2×250
―
―
―
14
22
38
60
100
8
14
22
38
60
100
150
150
200
250
200
325
―
―
―
250
―
―
―
68
22
14
82
38
22
101
60
38
137
164
100
60
201
100
241
150
292
200
150
365
250
200
402
325
250
457
512 2×200 325
576 2×250
649 2×325 2x200
1151
―
―
1298
―
―
1462
―
―
14
22
38
60
100
150
200
250
325
―
―
―
80
97
119
162
195
238
286
347
433
476
541
606
682
769
1538
1733
2166
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
t3×25
(75)
t3ｘ30
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
60°C 75°C 90°C
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
22
14
―
38
60
22
38
60
(90)
100
150
t4×40
(160)
t8ｘ50
8
14
38
60
100
100
200
250
325
(400)
150
t5×30
(150)
150
200
250
200
t10
×30
(300)
2×200
2×250 325
250
t8×50
―
4×250 2×325
t10
(400)
―
4×325 3×325 ×125
―
5×325 4×325 (1250)
Grounding
terminal
[ G]
[mm2]
75
8
91
14
112
150
22
176
210
253
38
304
377
60
415
468
520
585
650
100
1370 150
1480
1850 2×150
30S
37S
45S
55S
75S
90S
110S
132S
160S
200S
220S
250S
280S
315S
630B
710B
800B
38
14
22
8
14
68
82
60
101
100
38
38
137
60
164
150
100
60
201
200
241
250
150
100
292
325
200
150
365
2×200
402
2×250 250
200
457
325
512
2×325
250
576
3×325 2×200 325
649
―
3×325 2×325 1151
―
4×325 3×325 1298
―
5×325 4×325 1462
38
60
100
150
200
250
325
2×200
2×250
2×325
14
22
38
60
100
150
14
22
38
60
100
150
250
325
2×200
200
250
3×325
325
4×325 2×250 2×200
―
5×325 4×325
―
―
―
―
―
80
97
119
162
195
238
286
347
433
476
541
606
682
769
1538
1733
2166
Inverter output [U, V, W]
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
t3×25
(75)
t3ｘ30
(90)
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
60°C 75°C 90°C
38
60
100
150
14
22
38
60
14
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
―
22
38
100
60
200
100
t4×40 250
150
t5×30
(160)
325
200
150
(150)
2×200
t8×50 2×250 250
200
t10
(400)
325
×30
2×325
250
(300)
3×325 2×200 325
t8×50
―
4×325 3×325
t10
(400)
―
5×325 4×325 ×125
―
―
5×325 (1250)
Current
[A]
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
710
800
1000
Current
[Adc]
DC bus bars [P (+), N (-)]
When PWM converter is used When diode rectifier is used
FRN
Permissible
Permissible
VG1S
temperature* [mm2]
temperature* [mm2]
60°C 75°C 90°C
60°C 75°C 90°C
Current
[Adc]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
Table 4.5.2-4: Recommended wire sizes (LD spec, ambient temperature: 50°C)
Grounding
terminal
[ G]
[mm2]
75
8
91
14
112
150
22
176
210
253
38
304
377
60
415
468
520
585
650
100
1370 150
1480
1850 2×150
*An “IV wire,” a “600 V HIV insulated wire,” and a “600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire” were used at
permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial wiring.
(1)
The current values of the DC bus bar were calculated on the assumption that the converter (PWM
converter or diode rectifier) supply voltage was 400 V AC.
(2)
The grounding wire is cited from the permissible short circuit current defined in internal wire regulations.
(3)
When using wires of 150 mm2 or greater, use relay bus bars so that the wires can be connected. (The
Frame 3 and 4 size inverters' output terminals are configured to connect wires by use of relay bus bars.)
(4)
Use bus bars to connect to a DC line of 630 kW or greater. It is also recommended that the inverter output
side be connected using a bus bar.
4-49
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
30S
37S
45S
55S
75S
90S
110S
132S
160S
200S
220S
250S
280S
315S
630B
710B
800B
Inverter output [U, V, W]
Current
[A]
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
710
800
1000
Current
[Adc]
DC bus bars [P (+), N (-)]
When PWM converter is used When diode rectifier is used
FRN
Permissible
Permissible
VG1S
temperature* [mm2]
temperature* [mm2]
60°C 75°C 90°C
60°C 75°C 90°C
Current
[Adc]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
Table 4.5.2-3: Recommended wire sizes (LD spec, ambient temperature: 40°C)
3-phase 690V series (MD/LD spec)
4.5.2.3
Table 4.5.2-5: Recommended wire sizes (MD spec, ambient temperature: 40°C)
70°C
90°C
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
90°C
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
90°C
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
90
90S
35
25
95
50
35
114
t2×30
35
25
110
110S
50
35
117
70
50
139
(60)
50
35
132
132S
70
50
140
167
t3×45
70
50
160
160S
70
170
95
70
201
(135)
200
200S
120
212
150
95
252
120
95
250
250S
2×70
2×50
265
2×95
2×70
316
t4×50
2×70
2×50
t6×30
265
280
280S
2×95
2×70
297
352
(200)
2×70
(180)
295
315
315S
355
355S
2×120
2×95
400
400S
2×150
450
450S
2×185
2×150
334
2×120
376
2×150
2×95
396
2×95
446
2×120
424
2×185
2×120
503
477
2×240
2×150
563
2×150
―
Current
[A]
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
Inverter output [U, V, W]
When diode rectifier is used
Current
[Adc]
FRN
VG1S
Current
[Adc]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
DC bus bars [P (+), N (-)]
When PWM converter is
used
Grounding
terminal
[ G]
[mm2]
100
14
130
22
t4×30
140
(120)
161
216
38
330
365
2×95
410
2×120
460
60
Table 4.5.2-6: Recommended wire sizes (LD spec, ambient temperature: 40°C)
70°C
90°C
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
90°C
70
50
139
167
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
90°C
t2×30
50
35
t3×45
70
50
t4×30
161
120
95
(120)
216
2×70
2×70
t6×30
295
(180)
330
110
90S
50
35
117
110S
70
50
140
160
132S
70
170
95
70
201
(135)
200
160S
212
150
95
252
t4×50
220
200S
120
277
(200)
280
250S
315
280S
355
95
233
2×95
2×70
297
2×95
2×70
352
334
2×120
2×95
396
2×95
315S
2×120
2×95
376
2×150
446
2×120
400
355S
2×150
424
2×185
2×120
503
450
400S
2×185
530
2×240
2×150
563
2×150
Bus
bar
size
70°C
132
120
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
Current
[A]
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
Inverter output [U, V, W]
When diode rectifier is used
Current
[Adc]
FRN
VG1S
Current
[Adc]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
DC bus bars [P (+), N (-)]
When PWM converter is
used
[mm2]
―
130
[mm2]
22
140
235
2×150
Grounding
terminal
[ G]
365
2×95
410
2×120
460
38
60
*A “PVC (polyvinyl chloride) wire” and an “XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene) wire” were used at permissible
temperatures of 70°C and 90°C, respectively, and the wire sizes were selected based on the permissible current
under the following conditions. If the use conditions are different, select the wire sizes based on use conditions that
comply with IEC 60364-5-52:2001(JIS C 60364-5-52:2006).
Ambient temperature: 40°C, Multicore cable: 3 cores (conductor: copper), A single cable: aerial wiring, Two or more
cables: electric duct wiring
(1)
The current values of the DC bus bar were calculated on the assumption that the converter (PWM
converter or diode rectifier) input voltage was 690 V AC.
(2)
When using wires of 150 mm2 or greater, use relay bus bars so that the wires can be connected. (The
frame 3 and 4 size inverters' output terminals are configured to connect wires by use of relay bus bars.)
(3)
Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
4-50
Inverter output [U, V, W]
FRN
VG1S
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
90°C
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
90°C
22
90
90S
14
14
95
22
110
110S
22
22
117
38
132
132S
38
160
160S
200
200S
60
250
250S
100
280
280S
315
315S
355
355S
400
400S
450
450S
140
170
60
60
212
100
265
100
150
297
376
150
200
201
252
100
316
352
150
200
Bus
bar
size
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
[mm2]
70°C
90°C
[mm2]
t2×30
(60)
22
14
—
38
22
t3×45
(135)
38
60
t4×50
(200)
396
[mm2]
100
100
200
100
14
130
22
t4×30
140
(120)
161
60
216
t6×30
265
(180)
295
150
365
150
563
38
330
503
250
Bus
bar
size
Grounding
terminal
Current [ G]
[A]
446
424
530
167
60
150
334
114
139
38
38
Current [Adc]
When PWM converter is used When diode rectifier is used
Current [Adc]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
DC bus bars [P (+), N (-)]
60
410
200
460
DC bus bars [P (+), N (-)]
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
90°C
22
110
90S
22
132
110S
38
160
132S
200
160S
220
200S
280
117
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
90°C
38
22
38
140
[mm2]
139
t2×30
38
22
—
167
t3×45
170
60
212
100
60
250S
100
100
150
100
352
315
280S
150
150
396
355
315S
400
355S
450
400S
334
376
150
200
200
530
201
(135)
252
t4×50
60
277
(200)
100
38
t4×30
161
60
(120)
216
100
t6×30
295
(180)
330
235
150
365
503
250
200
563
130
22
140
446
424
Bus
bar
size
90°C
60
297
Permissible
temperature* [mm2]
70°C
38
233
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
60
Grounding
terminal
Current [ G]
[A]
[mm2]
Inverter output [U, V, W]
Current
[Adc]
FRN
VG1S
When PWM converter is used When diode rectifier is used
Current
[Adc]
Standard load
capacity [kW]
Table 4.5.2-8: Recommended wire size, domestic selection (LD spec., ambient temperature 40 °C)
150
200
38
60
410
460
*: The power supply voltage is 690 VAC.
(1)
PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C.
(2)
Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
4-51
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
Table 4.5.2-7: Recommended wire size, domestic selection (MD spec., ambient temperature 40 °C)
4.5.3
Wiring of main circuit and grounding terminals
(1) Inverter output terminals U, V, and W and terminal
G for motor grounding
1) Connect the inverter output terminals U, V, and W to the terminals U, V, and W of the three-phase motor in the
correct order of phases.
2) Connect the grounding wire of the output wires (U, V, and W) to the terminal ( G) for grounding.
When multiple combinations of inverters and motors exist, do not use multicore cables for the purpose of
handling the wiring together.
Inverter 1
Inverter 1
Motor 1
Inverter 2
Motor 1
Inverter 2
Motor 2
Motor 2
Multicore cable
Inverter 3
Inverter 3
Motor 3
(2)
Terminal
Motor 3
G for inverter grounding
This is the grounding terminal provided with the chassis (case) of the inverter. Do not fail to connect the grounding
terminal for safety and as a measure against noise. Technical standards concerning electrical equipment make it
mandatory to perform grounding work of metallic frames for electrical appliances to prevent electric shock or fire.
Connect the grounding terminal on the power supply side as
described below.
1) According to technical standards concerning electrical
equipment, connect the grounding terminal to a grounding
pole to which class C grounding work was applied.
2) Connect a thick grounding wire having a large surface
area along as short a route as possible.
Table 4.5.3-1: Grounding of appliances according
to technical standards concerning electrical
equipment
Type of grounding work
Grounding resistance
Class C grounding work
10 Ω or less
3) For 132 to 450 kW stacks, follow Figure 4.5.3-1 and
Figure 4.5.3-2 on the connections to grounding terminals.
Figure 4.5.3-1: Example of grounding wiring for
Frame 3 size (132 to 200 kW)
Figure 4.5.3-2: Example of grounding wiring for
Frame 4 size (220 to 450 kW)
4-52
Inverter DC bus bar connection terminals/converter output terminals P (+), N (-)
The inverter uses DC (direct current) input and the converter uses DC (direct current) output terminals.
Bus bar connections are assumed, but when connecting by electric lines, keep the distance between the stacks to
max. 2 m.
When connecting to the DC bus bar by wires, keep the distance to max. 2 m.
Stack-to-stack distance
should be 2 m or smaller.
DCF (DC fuse)
PN bus bar
Within 2 m
Within 2 m
DCF (DC fuse)
Inverter
Inverter
Figure 4.5.3-3: Restriction when connecting P (+) and N (-) terminals by electric lines
When using long electric lines, route the P (+) and N (-) lines together and do not route beside control
circuits.
(Do not route the P (+) and N (-) electric lines separately.)
(4)
Control power auxiliary input terminals R0 and T0
The inverter can operate even if the power is not supplied to the control power auxiliary input terminals. However, if
the main power to the inverter is turned off, the control power will also be shut down, and output signals of the
inverter and the keypad will be no longer displayed.
To retain an alarm output signal to be issued when the protective function operates or keep the keypad displayed
even if the main power to the inverter is shut down, connect the power to the control power auxiliary input terminals.
If a magnetic contactor (MC) is used on the input side of the inverter, connect the wire from the input (primary) side
of the MC.
Terminal rating: 400V series: 380 to 480 V AC, 50/60 Hz, maximum current 0.5 A
690V series: 575 to 690 V AC, 50/60 Hz, maximum current 0.5 A
AC power MCCB1
Converter stack
MC
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
Or
Isolation
transformer
DC
F
P(+)
Inverter stack
P(+)
N(-)
MC
Auxiliary b
contact of MC
N(-)
R0
DC/DC
T0
MCCB2
Inverter
control power
FAN
R1
T1
FAN
Figure 4.5.3-4: Connection of terminals R0 and T0
Terminal name
Recommended wire size [mm2]
Control power auxiliary input terminals R0 and T0
2.0
If wires of a larger size than a recommended wire size are used, they may not be inserted into the control
cable lead-in hole in the front cover depending on the number of wires.
4-53
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
(3)
When connecting the FRENIC-VG to a PWM converter by connecting the power to the control power auxiliary input
terminals (R0 and T0) of the FRENIC-VG, insert an isolation transformer or the auxiliary b contact of a magnetic
contactor on the power supply side as shown in Figure 4.5.3-4.
When adding an isolation transformer, select the appropriate isolation transformer based on the sum of the
required capacities of the FRENIC-VG and PWM converter, referring to the following tables:

Required transformer capacity for the inverter (FRENIC-VG)
Model
30S
37S
45S
55S
90S 110S 132S 160S 200S 220S 250S 280S 315S 355S 400S 450S 630B 710B 800B
FRNVG1S-4
200 VA
FRNVG1S-69

—
—
600 VA
200 VA
—
Required transformer capacity for the converter (RHC-D series)
Model
132S
160S
RHC□-4D
RHC□-69D
(5)
—
200 VA
200S
220S
200VA
200VA
250S
－
280S
315S
355S
400S
200VA
450S
500S
630B
200VA
－
710B
800B
600VA
－
－
Fan power auxiliary input terminals R1 and T1
400V stacks with 90 kW or higher capacity and all 690V stacks are equipped with fan power supply terminals, so
connect them to AC power supply. Switch the fan power supply switching connectors “U1” and “U2” according to
the power supply specifications.
Terminal rating:
• 400V series:
380 to 440 VAC/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz, Maximum current: 1.0 A
(For phase-specific stacks, the maximum current is 3 times larger than above.)
• 690V series:
660 to 690 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maximum current 1.0A
575 to 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maximum current 1.0A

Inverter (FRENIC-VG) - Rated capacity of terminals R1 and T1
Model
90
110
132
160
FRNVG1S-4
100 VA
FRNVG1S-69
100 VA

200
220
250
280
315
355
400
200 VA
—
450
630
—
710
800
600 VA
200 VA
—
Converter (RHC-D series) - Rated capacity of terminals R3 and T3
Model
RHC□-4D
RHC□-69D
132S
160S
200S
100VA
100VA
220S
250S
200VA
－
－
280S
315S
355S
200VA
400S
450S
－
200VA
500S
630B
710B
800B
600VA
－
Fan power supply switching connectors are located on "Auxiliary power supply printed circuit board" attached to
the lower section of the stack.
● 400V series (90 kW or higher)
Auxiliary power supply printed
circuit board
4-54
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
● 690V series (all capacities)
Auxiliary power
supply printed
circuit board
Short circuit
harness
Short circuit
harness
Configuration
Applied
voltage
400V series: 398 to 440 V/50 Hz, 430 to
480 V/60 Hz
690V series: 660 to 690 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(Factory shipping state)
400V series: 380 to 398 V/50 Hz, 380 to
430 V/60 Hz
690V series: 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Figure 4.5.3-5: Description of fan power supply switching connector
AC power MCCB1
Converter stack
MC
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
Or
DC
F
P(+)
Inverter stack
P(+)
N(-)
MC
Isolation
transformer
Auxiliary b
contact of MC
N(-)
R0
DC/DC
T0
MCCB2
Inverter
control power
FAN
R1
T1
FAN
Figure 4.5.3-6: Connection of terminals R1 and T1
Terminal name
Recommended wire size [mm2]
Fan power auxiliary input terminals R1 and T1
2.0
• Terminals R1 and T1 are insulated from terminals R0, T0, P (+), and N (-). Thus, terminals R1 and T1
do not require an isolation transformer, unlike terminals R0 and T0.
When inserting an MCCB2 in terminals R1 and T1 as shown in Figure 4.5.3-6, assign the auxiliary a
contact of this MCBB2 to the operation interlock circuit of the inverter. When the MCCB2 is turned off,
the cooling fan of the inverter will not run even if the inverter is in operation, and the inverter will cause
an overheat trip.
• If wires of a larger size than a recommended wire size are used, they may not be inserted into the
control cable lead-in hole in the front cover depending on the number of wires.
4-55
4.6
Control circuit
4.6.1
Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes
Table 4.6.1-1 shows the screw specifications and wire sizes for the wiring of the control circuit.
The control circuit terminal block is common regardless of the inverter capacity.
Table 4.6.1-1: Screw specifications and recommended wire sizes
Common terminal
Control circuit
terminal
Screw specifications
Screw size
Tightening torque [N·m]
M3
0.7
Recommended wire size [mm2]
1.25
If wires of a larger size than a recommended wire size are used, they may not be inserted into the control cable
lead-in hole in the front cover depending on the number of wires.
4.6.2
Control terminal layout
Figure 4.6.2-1 shows the control terminal layout.
Contact output
Reinforcing insulation
(Max. 250 V AC, overvoltage category II, pollution degree 2)
Figure 4.6.2-1: Control terminal layout
4-56
4.6.3
Control wire routes
(1)
DCF disconnection detection circuit wiring route. (The control wire is led into the stack from the upper area of the
front face.)
(2)
Route through which the control wire is led into the stack from the left side of the front cover.
(3)
Route through which the control wire is led into the stack from the right side of the front cover.
If the control wire routed inside the stack comes into contact with any of the electronic parts inside the stack, the wire
may burn out.
A binding fixture is attached to the inside of the stack. Bind the wire at the binding fixture.
(1) DCF disconnection
detection circuit wiring
route
(3) Route through which the
control wire is led into the
stack from the right side of
(2) Route through which the
the front cover
control wire is led into the
stack from the left side of
the front cover
Figure 4.6.3-1: Control wire routes for Frame 1 size (400V: 30 to 45 kW) (example)
4-57
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
In general, there are three control circuit wiring routes.
4.6.4
DCF disconnection detection circuit wiring route
Figure 4.6.4-1 shows the DCF disconnection detection circuit wiring route. On the PCB, aluminum electrolytic capacitors,
high-voltage circuits, and heat sinks for cooling electronic parts are packaged.
If the wire comes into contact with any of these parts, the part may come off due to vibrations. For this reason, do not fail
to fasten the wire using the binding band fixture. In addition, exercise care not to apply an excessive tension to the wire.
Frame 4 size
• 400V: 200 to 800 kW
• 690V: 250 to 450 kW
Tying band fixture
Wire route
Wire route
Fuse blowout detection
connection terminal
Frame 1, 2 and 3 size
• 400V: 30 to 200 kW
• 690V: 90 to 200 kW
Tying band fixture
Fuse blowout detection
connection terminal
Figure 4.6.4-1: DCF disconnection detection circuit wiring route
4-58
Wiring between phase-specific stacks
After phase-specific stack inverters (FRN630BVG1S-4 to FRN800BVG1S-4) are installed, stack-to-stack wiring is
required. To connect the stacks, use the wires that come with the product. For details, refer to Figure 4.6.5-1 to Figure
4.6.5-3.
• Applicable inverter models: FRN630BVG1S-4 to FRN800BVG1S-4
• Applicable PWM converter models; RHC630B-4D to RHC800B-4D
U-phase (R-phase)
V-phase (S-phase)
W-phase (T-phase)
*The inverter has U-, V-, and W-phases. The PWM converter has R-, S-, and T-phases.
Figure 4.6.5-1: Gate, fuse disconnection alarm, and inverter overheat protection wires connected between
phase-specific stacks
Figure 4.6.5-2: Auxiliary power supply and CT (current detection) wires connected between phase-specific stacks
4-59
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.6.5
[Inverter]
U-phase
V-phase
W-phase
(R-phase)
(S-phase)
(T-phase)
[PWM converter]
Figure 4.6.5-3: Details of CT (portion A) wiring route between phase-specific stacks
4-60
Mounting and connecting the keypad
The keypad can be mounted in the following patterns:
Cabinet
Cabinet
Keypad
(back face)
■ Attaching the keypad to the inverter body (state at the time of the
delivery of the inverter)
■ Mounting the keypad on the door of the cabinet and remote-operating it
(Refer to 4.7.2.2 Mounting the keypad on the door of the cabinet.)
■ Remote-operating the keypad in your hand
Inverter
Inverter
Remote
operation Keypad
Remote
operation
Keypad fixing
fixing
extension
cable
extension
cable
screws
screws
Figure 4.7.1-1: Example of installing keypad
4.7.1
Parts required for mounting and connecting the keypad
Use a keypad extension cable produced by Fuji Electric or a commercially available LAN cable (straight) to connect the
keypad and the inverter. When mounting the keypad on the door of the cabinet, fix it with screws from the inside face of
the door.
The parts required for mounting and connecting the keypad are not attached to the inverter. Prepare them yourself.
Part name
Model
Remarks
Keypad extension cable *1
CB-1S, CB-3S, CB-5S
Available in three different lengths: 5 m, 3 m, 1 m.
The number in each model indicates the length of
the cable.
Keypad fixing screw
M3 x 12 *2
Two fixing screws are required.
*1
When using a commercially available LAN cable, select a straight cable (within 20 m) for 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
complying with the category 5 specification of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568A of the U.S.
<Recommended LAN cables>
Manufacturer: Sanwa Supply Inc.
Model
: KB-10T5-01K (1 m)
: KB-STP-01K (1 m) –
*2
Shielded cable (with improved noise resistance). Use this cable to
make the inverter compliant with EMC Directives.
When mounting the keypad on the cabinet, use fixing screws of proper length for the thickness of the steel panel.
When the thickness of the steel panel is 1.2 to 2.3 mm: Use M3 x 12 screws. (When the thickness of the steel
panel is 1 mm, use M3 x 10 screws.)
4-61
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.7
4.7.2
Installation procedure
After the wiring of the inverter is completed, mount the keypad according to the procedure described below. Before
mounting the keypad, turn off the power to the inverter. The procedure described here proceeds on the assumption that
the inverter used is a unit type, but is also applicable to stack type inverters.
4.7.2.1
(1)
How to mount and remove the keypad on/from the inverter
Holding down the hook marked with an arrow shown
in the figure below, pull the keypad toward you and
remove it.
(2)
Set the keypad on the latches shown in the figure
below. Push the keypad in the direction of the
terminal cover (arrow (1)) into the case of the
inverter (arrow (2)).
(2)
(1)
Figure 4.7.2-1: Removing the keypad
4.7.2.2
(1)
Figure 4.7.2-2: Mounting the keypad
Mounting the keypad on the door of the cabinet
Cut the door of the cabinet on which the keypad will be mounted to the panel cutting dimensions shown in "4.7.2.3
External dimensions of the keypad" below.
(2) Mount the keypad as shown in Figure 4.7.2-3.
RJ-45 connector
• Use M3 x 12 screws (thickness of the door: 2.3 mm).
Cabinet
• Tightening torque: 0.7 N·m
Pan head screw
(set screw)
M3 x 12
(3) Connect the RJ-45 connector of the keypad and the RJ-45
connector (modular jack) of the inverter using the keypad
extension cable or a commercially available LAN cable
(straight).
(Refer to Figure 4.7.2-4.)
The cable may get caught between the door and the
cabinet and get damaged when the door opens or closes.
Fasten the cable with a tying part, such as INSULOK.
However, do not tie the cable more than necessary.
Figure 4.7.2-3: Mounting the keypad
RJ-45 connector
(modular jack)
Panel surface
Cabinet door
Keypad extension
cable or LAN cable
(Cat.5 straight)
RJ-45 connector
Figure 4.7.2-4: Connecting the keypad and the inverter
4-62
External dimensions of the keypad
The outside dimensions of the keypad are shown in the figure below. When mounting the keypad on the door of the
cabinet, cut the door to the dimensions specified in the figure.
Depth
Portion of panel to be
cut out
M3 x 12
(prepared
by user)
Keypad
surface
Fixing screw
holes
Back view
* When mounting the keypad on
a panel of different thickness
from the abovementioned
dimension, use screws of
proper length.
Back panel cutting dimensions (view A)
4-63
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.7.2.3
4.8
Connecting FRENIC-VG Loader
To use the FRNIC-VG Loader software that runs on a personal computer, it can be connected in the two ways described
below. Select either connection method according to the usage of the equipment.
(1)
Using the USB connector (mini type B) on the front panel of the stack inverter, connect a personal computer and an
inverter.
(2)
Using the RS-485 communications ports of the inverter control terminal, connect a personal computer and multiple
inverters (up to 31 inverters can be connected) in a multidrop configuration.

For more information on FRENIC-VG Loader, refer to "FRENIC-VG Loader Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-1588
(WPS-VG1-STR), INR-SI47-1616 (WPS-VG1-PCL))."
• The RJ-45 connector for keypad connection is designed exclusively for keypad communication. It cannot be
connected for RS-485 communication or to FRENIC-VG Loader.
• Do not connect an inverter to the LAN port of the personal computer, an Ethernet hub, or a telephone line.
The inverter or the unit to which the inverter is connected may get damaged.
4.8.1
Connecting a USB
A USB cable connection port (closed by a plastic cover) is provided on the right side of the keypad.
A USB connector appears from under the cable connection port cover. Insert a USB cable into the port.
USB connection
cover
USB connector
Connector for
manufacturer use
Figure 4.8.1-1: Connecting a USB cable
• The connector below the USB connector is reserved for manufacturer use and cannot be used.
• A USB cable is not attached to inverters or the FRNIC-VG Loader software (CD-ROM). Prepare one
yourself.
4-64
Using the RS-485 communications ports
4.8.2.1
Terminal specifications of the RS-485 communications ports
Connect the RS-485 communications ports to the terminals for RS-485 communication [DX+, DX-: half-duplex system
(two-wire system)] on the control circuit terminal block. In addition, a terminating resistor is contained (for switching). Set
it according to the connection configuration.
Terminal symbol Description
DX-
DX+ DX-
RS-485 communication 112-Ω terminating resistor
data (-)
contained Switch
RS-485 communication connection/disconnection by
operating the SW4*1.
data (+)
DX+
Figure 4.8.2-1: RS-485 terminals
(part of control terminal block)
4.8.2.2
Remarks
*1
For details of the SW4, see “2.4.2.2 Setting up the slide switches” in
Chapter 2.
*2
There is no grounding terminal for shielding. Ground the shielded wire
to the host unit.
RS-485 converter
Standard personal computers are not provided with an RS-485 communications port but are provided with an RS-232C
or USB communications port.
To prevent this problem, use an RS-232C/RS-485 converter or USB/RS-485 converter. Note that the inverter will not
properly function if a converter other than a recommended one that underwent a communication performance check is
used.
Recommended converters (System Sacom Industry Corp.)
Name
Model
RS-232C/RS-485 converter
KS-485PTI
USB/RS-485 converter
USB-485I RJ45-T4P
Remarks
A converter fixture (UTK-01) is available.
Website of System Sacom Industry Corp.: http://www.sacom.co.jp/
4-65
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.8.2
4.8.2.3
Cables
Use twisted-pair shielded cables of 0.5 mm2 (0.3 to 1.25 mm2) [AWG20 (AWG16 to AWG22)].
Recommended cables
• AWM2789 cable for long-distance connection (Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd. standard specification: DTS5023) 2-pair
product
• Cat. 5E-compatible cable (Cat. 5 cable provided with a shield) when using a LAN cable
Website of Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd.: http://www.furukawa.co.jp/
FRENIC-VG loader
(personal computer)
Converter
USB-485I RJ45-T4P Power
（or KS-485PTI）
supply
DX+
Converter power
supply
＜INV1＞
DX+ Station No.: 01
DX-
DX-
G
USB cable
(or RS-232C cable)
*2
＜INV2＞
DX+ Station No.: 02
*1
*1 The control terminals of the inverter do not include a terminal for
connecting (relaying) cable shields. Thus, use an insulated sleeve
terminal or another proper crimped terminal to connect shields with
each other.
*2 Ground a shield on the converter side.
DX-
＜INVn＞
DX+ Station No.: n
DX- SW4:ON
Figure 4.8.2-2: Connection diagram
• Maximum wiring length: 500 m (There is no restriction on the wiring distance between stations.)
• Provide the end unit with a terminating resistor. The recommended converters and inverters contain a
terminating resistor. Set the terminating resistor to “Connect” using the appropriate selector switch or jumper
switch.
• Even if FRENIC-VG Loader is not used, keep active the RS-485 communications line between the converter
and the inverter. (If the converter is disconnected from the communications line, the communications line will
serve as an antenna, and the converter will malfunction due to noise.)
4-66
Noise reduction
In some working environments, noise produced by an inverter may cause abnormal communication or malfunctions of
the master’s instrumentation units, converters, etc.
See Appendix 5 "Proficient way to use inverters (on electric noise)" in addition to this section.
Isolated converter
: Use a recommended converter.
Twisted-pair shielded wire
: Use a recommended wire.
Change of grounding
: If an instrumentation unit and an inverter are grounded together, they may malfunction.
Prepare grounding exclusively for instrumentation units. Use a large-size wire for
grounding.
Reinforcement of converter
power supply
: Noise may propagate through the power supply for an instrumentation unit. It is
recommended that an isolation transformer for power supply (TRAFY), noise cutting
transformer, or LC filter be used.
Addition of inductance
: By slipping a ferrite core over the signal circuit or using an LC filter, add inductance to
the circuit to ensure high impedance against high-frequency noise.
Ferrite core
Master
Inverter
Slip the ferrite core over the circuit or wind it
around the circuit twice or three times.
Figure 4.8.3-1: Example of setting of ferrite core
Filtering
: Form a low-pass filter (LPF) by connecting capacitors to signal input/output terminals in
parallel to prevent rigging or high-frequency noise.
<Filtering effect>
Filtering is a method for separating normal signals from rigging resulting from signal
reflection or normal mode noise. In general, rigging has a higher frequency than
signals and can, therefore, be separated by an LPF.
Normal mode noise
Rigging
Signal
Inverter’s or master’s unit or
converter
Receiving end
C: Capacitor
(approx. 0.01 to 0.001 μF)
R: Terminating resistor (100 Ω)
Figure 4.8.3-2: Description of effect of filtering
Using an LC filter, ferrite core, or CR for filtering with a high damping rate for the communications line will make
the waveform inactive and interrupt communication. (Communication error occurs.)
To continue communication with an inactive waveform, reduce the communication speed with H34
(communication speed setting function).
4-67
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.8.3
4.9
Dedicated lifter for stacks
4.9.1
Feature
(1)
(2)
This is a dedicated lifter for transporting and replacing the FRENIC-VG series (stack type). It allows you to easily
put a stack type inverter in the cabinet and take it out.
The lifter is available with the following products (stack type):
• FRENIC- VG series inverters (stack type)
• RHD-D series diode rectifiers
• RHC-D series PWM converters
• RHF-D series filter stacks
The lifter pallet can be moved up and down (with a winching mechanism) and moved horizontally (with a ball screw
mechanism) and can be easily aligned to the cabinet.
[Appearance]
Figure 4.9.1-1: Appearance of the lifter
(3)
Figure 4.9.1-2: Example of using the lifter
The lifter can be easily installed by use of the lifter fixture (SA430288-01), which is designed to fix the cabinet and
lifter pallet.
This fixture allows easy installation even if the cabinet front face has no space to put the tip of the lifter pallet.
• The lifter can be used without the fixture.
• The fixture must be fastened on the cabinet side.
• The fixture should be prepared by you.
• Design the cabinet so that the fixture can be attached.
Lifter pallet
The lifter pallet can be
aligned to the cabinet.
Lifter fixture
Cabinet side
Lifter fixture
Figure 4.9.1-3: Example of using the lifter fixture
4-68
Specifications
Item
Specifications
Model
LFT-VG1
LFT-RHF450
Maximum load weight
250 [kg] (2450N)
280 [kg]（2744N）
External dimensions [mm]
702 (W) x 1254 (D) x 1450 (H)
Lifting height [mm]
0 to 800
Move up/down
Hand-wound: winching mechanism
Move horizontally
Hand-wound: ball screw mechanism
(rightward: 0 to 120 [mm],
leftward: 0 to 120 [mm])
Anti-fall device
With an anti-fall device (protection in case of broken wire rope)
Front and rear wheels
Front wheels: 90-degree steerable
Rear wheels: free type (with a stopper)
Approximate weight
120 [kg]
Finishing color
25-70B 5Y7/1, half-gloss
Ambient temperatures
-10 to 50°C
External dimensions
SA496984-01
4.9.3
Hand-wound: ball screw mechanism
(rightward: 0 to 65 [mm],
leftward: 0 to 65 [mm])
125 [kg]
SA497688-01
Securing the Lifter
When using a lifter, a lifter securing fixture may be used.
The fixture should be prepared by you as needed.
4.9.3.1
Lifter securing fixture (for SA430288-01_ LFT-VG1)
Material: SPHC, t3.2
Plating:
Specification JIS Ep-Fe/Zn8/CM2-F
To be post-plated.
Unit: mm
Change _* * *_ based on the structural design of the cabinet.
4-69
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.9.2
4.9.3.2
Lifter securing fixture (for SA433892-01_ LFT-RHF45)
Material: SPHC, t3.2
Plating:
Specification JIS Ep-Fe/Zn8/CM2-F
To be post-plated.
Unit: mm
Change _* * *_ based on the structural design of the cabinet.
4-70
Lifter external dimensions
4.9.4.1
LFT-VG1 external dimensions
Chapter 4 Installation and Wiring
4.9.4
Minimum radius of
rotation: 985 mm
Wire rope
Move to left
Lower pulley
Move to right
Winch
handle
Lifting height 0 to 800 mm
Upper pulley
Ø75 90° switching type
4-71
LFT-RHF450 external dimensions
Minimum radius of
rotation: 985 mm
Move to left
Upper pulley
Move to right
Wire rope
Lower pulley
Winch handle
Lifting height 0 to 800 mm
4.9.4.2
ø75 90° switching type
4-72
ø100 Movable caster
(with a stopper)
FRENIC- VG
5
Chapter 5 Peripherals
5.1
Precautions for use ........................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1
5.2
Precautions in connecting main circuit peripherals ................................................................. 5-1
5.1.1.1
Fuses............................................................................................................................ 5-1
5.1.1.2
Breakers/disconnectors (Molded Case Circuit Breaker: MCCB,
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker: ELCB) ......................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1.3
Initial charging circuit .................................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1.4
Contactor (magnetic contactor) .................................................................................... 5-1
5.1.1.5
Motor overload protection ............................................................................................. 5-1
5.1.2
Precautions for phase advancing capacitors .......................................................................... 5-1
5.1.3
Precautions for connecting control circuit instruments............................................................ 5-1
5.1.4
Precautions for using synchronous motors ............................................................................. 5-2
Selection of peripherals .................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.1
Main circuit ............................................................................................................................. 5-3
5.2.1.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.2.2.1
Contactor (magnetic contactor) .................................................................................... 5-9
5.2.2.2
Initial charging circuit .................................................................................................. 5-10
5.2.2.3
Thermal relays ............................................................................................................ 5-12
5.2.2.4
Output transformer ..................................................................................................... 5-13
5.2.2.5
Main circuit monitoring instrument .............................................................................. 5-13
Control circuit ............................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.3.1
Backup battery...................................................................................................................... 5-14
5.3.1.1
Procedures for installing/replacing the battery............................................................ 5-14
5.3.1.2
Overseas and aerial transportation of battery (lithium metal battery) ......................... 5-15
5.3.2
5.4
Fuses............................................................................................................................ 5-3
Disconnectors and molded case circuit breakers for wiring (MCCB) ...................................... 5-7
PG amplifier (insulating converter) ....................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.2.1
Recommended pulse amplifier model ........................................................................ 5-15
5.3.2.2
External dimensions ................................................................................................... 5-15
5.3.2.3
Specifications and terminal description ...................................................................... 5-16
5.3.2.4
Precautions for connection and specifications............................................................ 5-17
Inverter options............................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.4.1
Option list.............................................................................................................................. 5-18
5.4.2
Restrictions on mounting control option cards and others .................................................... 5-19
5.4.2.1
Mountable ports .......................................................................................................... 5-19
5.4.2.2
Restrictions when mounting control options ............................................................... 5-20
5.1
Precautions for use
Precautions for use including the selection and connectivity of inverter peripherals are described below.
5.1.1
Precautions in connecting main circuit peripherals
5.1.1.1
Fuses
5.1.1.2
Breakers/disconnectors (Molded Case Circuit Breaker: MCCB,
Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker: ELCB)
An MCCB or ELCB cannot be used for the input (DC bus bar) and output sections of the inverter. (due to the
characteristics of MCCB/ELCB)
•
The output of the inverter has protective functions (overcurrent, ground fault, open phase, etc.), so no MCCB or
ELCB is required. If an MCCB is used inevitably for the purpose of short protection, select a breaker with capacity
which trips at a larger current than the rated inverter capacity. (An ELCB in particular cannot be used.) Protective
coordination with the electric wire size should also be confirmed before the selection.
•
To use as a disconnector, use the non-auto switch which detaches the overcurrent trip function.
5.1.1.3
Initial charging circuit
The common converter performs initial charging for the entire system at once. Refer to this chapter if initial charging
circuit is to be inevitably implemented for each inverter. When the instructions in this chapter are not followed,
peripherals may be adversely affected, resulting in damage in some cases.
5.1.1.4
Contactor (magnetic contactor)
For the contactor (electromagnetic contactor) attached to the DC bus bar and the output side, configure the sequence
such that opening and closing operations are performed while the inverter is stopped (inverter output is cut off).
5.1.1.5
Motor overload protection
When connecting to and operating the motor on a 1:1 basis, use the electronic thermal function of the inverter. For the
following cases, electronic thermal function cannot protect to maintain normal state, so attach thermistors (NTC / PTC)
or thermal relays to the motor for protection.
•
Applications where start and stop are frequent, where loading variation occurs frequently, and where very low speed
operation is continuous.
•
Motors other than the standard three phase motor is used (electronic thermal characteristics are different).
Do not use a thermal relay on the inverter’s input (DC bus bar) side. The thermal relay will not function properly due to
direct current voltage containing high frequency components.
5.1.2
Precautions for phase advancing capacitors
Do not attach phase advancing capacitors to the inverter output (secondary) side. When connected to inverter output,
the phase advancing capacitors can burn and be damaged, or make the inverter trip from overcurrent due to the
switching frequency of the inverter.
Attaching phase advancing capacitors to the power supply side does not improve the power factor because the inverter
is capacitive.
When attaching the phase advancing capacitors to the power receiving side for other instruments, attach reactors which
match the phase advancing capacitors.
5.1.3
Precautions for connecting control circuit instruments
PG amplifier (isolation amplifier)
In facilities where PG (pulse generator) is attached to motors to control vectors with long distance wiring, the stray
capacitance of the long wires distort PG waveforms, making normal speed detection impossible. In these cases, attach
isolation amplifiers (PG amplifiers) for pulse detection.
When PG amplifiers are attached, PG cut off detection protection function is disabled. Enable the inverter’s speed
mismatch detection function and use it to replace the PG cut off detection protection function.
5-1
Chapter 5 Peripherals
Fuses have limited life. Fuji Electric recommends replacing these periodically. If the attachment of the fuse is inadequate,
accidents can occur due to the impact of fuse melting, so fasten the fuse with the appropriate tightening torque.
5.1.4
Precautions for using synchronous motors
Be careful of the following matters when using synchronous motors.
(1)
When using motors other than Fuji’s standard synchronous motor (GNF2), please contact Fuji Electric.
(2)
One inverter cannot operate multiple synchronous motors.
(3)
Synchronous motors cannot be operated using direct input from commercial power supplies.
(4)
Synchronous motors become a generator and a voltage is induced on the motor terminals when they are rotated.
Disconnectors and contactors may be attached on inverter outputs for maintenance checkups. Exercise caution on
the following points, especially when using contactors.
<Problem>
The following problems exist when using contactors (52-2) on inverter outputs and the instantaneous power failure
restart mode.
(1)
Tripping of inverter alarm, diode damage, and fuse (DCF) melting may occur.
(2)
Welding, contact stain, and contact failure of the main contact points on contactor (52-2) may occur.
Synchronous motors become a generator (such as in the case of fans) when rotated from the load side, and the main
circuit capacitors inside the inverter are charged via the inverter return flow diodes.
Even in the case when the inverter cuts off the gate from the inverter driven control state, the synchronous motors
become a generator as in the above case, and charge the inverter.
Hence, when the synchronous motor is a generator, the voltage on the synchronous motor terminals is higher than the
inverter intermediate voltage, and the contactor (52-2) is turned on, rush current flows in the route in Figure 5.1.4-1,
causing the problems (1) and (2) above. (Similar phenomenon occurs when recovering from instantaneous power
failure.)
Return flow diodes
Cing path to the invert when the
synchronous motor becomes a
generator
Intermediate
voltage
Figure 5.1.4-1: Path of rush current
Problem does not exist if 52-2 is still ON, but rush current flows in this path when it turns from OFF to ON. (The larger the
voltage difference between the motor terminal voltage and the inverter intermediate voltage, the larger the rush current.)
<Countermeasure>
When driving synchronous motors, select instruments which can maintain open and close states for devices to be
attached to the inverter output.
(1)
Use of large switch (Non-auto switch of Fuji Electric’s G-TWIN molded case circuit breaker series).
(2)
Use of mechanical latches (e.g., systems which can turn contactors off only during alarms, such as SC-N**/VS) for
the case of contactors.
5-2
5.2
Selection of peripherals
5.2.1
Main circuit
5.2.1.1
Fuses
To reduce secondary damage to other instruments in the event the inverter is damaged, install a fuse between the input
(DC bus bar) and the inverter. The recommended connection for the 400V series is on the P side (+ side), but N side (side) will provide the same protection without any problems.
For the 690V series, install fuses on both the P side (+ side) and N side (- side).
Chapter 5 Peripherals
The FRENIC-VG contains fuse disconnection detection terminals, allowing detection
of fuse disconnection. (Inverter alarm will trip.)
Purchase the microswitches for disconnection detection along with fuses.
Fuses other than those in the “Application list” below cannot be
used.
(1) Application list
Fuse manufacturer -
Eaton: http://www.eaton.com/
*This product can be also purchased from Fuji Electric.
Table 5.2.1-1: Application list (400V series)
Motor
rated
Voltage Specifications
capacity
[kW]
MD
400 V
LD
Fuse
Rated
output
[A]
Rated
DC
current
[A]
Inverter type
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
630
710
800
60
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
468
520
585
1170
1370
1480
65
80
97
119
162
195
238
286
347
433
476
541
606
682
1365
1538
1733
FRN30SVG1S-4
FRN37SVG1S-4
FRN45SVG1S-4
FRN55SVG1S-4
FRN75SVG1S-4
FRN90SVG1S-4
FRN110SVG1S-4
FRN132SVG1S-4
FRN160SVG1S-4
FRN200SVG1S-4
FRN220SVG1S-4
FRN250SVG1S-4
FRN280SVG1S-4
FRN315SVG1S-4
FRN630BVG1S-4
FRN710BVG1S-4
FRN800BVG1S-4
170M3394-XA
1
170M3395-XA
1
170M3396-XA
170M3448-XA
1
1
B
60
70
170M4445-XA
170M5446-XA
170M6546-XA
1
1
1
C
D
E
85
110
125
170M6547-XA
170M6548-XA
170M6500-XA
170M7532
170M7633
1
1
1
3
3
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
710
800
1000
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
468
520
585
650
1370
1480
1850
80
97
119
162
195
238
286
347
433
476
541
606
682
769
1538
1733
2166
FRN30SVG1S-4
FRN37SVG1S-4
FRN45SVG1S-4
FRN55SVG1S-4
FRN75SVG1S-4
FRN90SVG1S-4
FRN110SVG1S-4
FRN132SVG1S-4
FRN160SVG1S-4
FRN200SVG1S-4
FRN220SVG1S-4
FRN250SVG1S-4
FRN280SVG1S-4
FRN315SVG1S-4
FRN630BVG1S-4
FRN710BVG1S-4
FRN800BVG1S-4
170M3394-XA
1
170M3395-XA
170M3396-XA
170M3448-XA
Type
Quantity Fig.
A
Generated Approx.
loss
mass
[W]
[kg]
45
0.38
55
F
G
130
135
145
225
235
A
45
1
1
1
B
55
60
70
170M4445-XA
170M5446-XA
170M6546-XA
1
1
1
C
D
E
85
110
125
170M6547-XA
170M6548-XA
170M6500-XA
1
1
1
F
130
135
145
170M7633
3
G
235
170M7595
3
0.58
0.90
1.25
3
0.38
0.58
0.9
1.25
3
260
Note 1) Rated DC current is calculated using a diode rectifier and assuming that the received power voltage is 400 VAC
50 Hz.
5-3
Table 5.2.1-2: Application list (690V series)
Motor
Rated
rated
output
Specifications
capacity
[A]
[kW]
Voltage
MD
690 V
LD
Fuse
Rated
DC
current
[A]
Inverter type
Type
90
100
117
FRN90SVG1S-69
Quantity Fig.
Generated
loss
[W]
Approx.
mass
[kg]
170M3448-XA
2
B
70
0.38
110
130
143
FRN110SVG1S-69
132
140
169
FRN132SVG1S-69
160
161
204
FRN160SVG1S-69
200
216
254
FRN200SVG1S-69 170M4445-XA
2
C
85
0.58
250
265
315
FRN250SVG1S-69 170M6546-XA
2
E
125
1.25
280
295
355
FRN280SVG1S-69
315
330
397
FRN315SVG1S-69
355
365
446
FRN355SVG1S-69 170M6547-XA
400
410
501
FRN400SVG1S-69
450
460
561
FRN450SVG1S-69
110
130
143
FRN90SVG1S-69
132
140
169
FRN110SVG1S-69
160
161
204
FRN132SVG1S-69
200
216
220
280
2
130
170M3448-XA
2
B
254
FRN160SVG1S-69
235
277
FRN200SVG1S-69 170M4445-XA
2
295
355
FRN250SVG1S-69 170M6546-XA
2
315
330
397
FRN280SVG1S-69
355
365
446
FRN315SVG1S-69
400
410
501
FRN355SVG1S-69 170M6547-XA
450
460
561
FRN400SVG1S-69
2
70
0.38
C
85
0.58
E
125
1.25
130
(2) Connection diagram
直流母線
DC
bus
DCF
2
1
2
1
Figure 5.2.1-1 shows the connection diagram for the fuse
and disconnection detection microswitch.
＜INV＞
（DCコモン電源）
(DC
common power supply)
P
DCF1
DCF2
DCF
U
Motor
モ－タ
V
IM
W
N
Figure 5.2.1-1: Fuse wire connection diagram
For the 400V series, install a fuse to the P side (+ side). (*
The N side (- side) will also provide the same protection.)
For the 690V series, install fuses on both the P side (+
side) and N side (- side).
Connect microswitches to [DCF1, DCF2] terminals of the
inverter. (These terminals support b contact output, and
detect fuse disconnection when the contact is open.)
(3) How to install a fuse
Bus bar
Bus bar
Nut
Fuse
Nut
Figure 5.2.1-2 shows how to install a fuse. Install hexagon
socket set screws into the fuse and fasten the bus bars
with nuts.
Hexagon
socket set
screw
Hexagon socket
set screw
Figure 5.2.1-2: Installing a fuse
5-4
(4) External dimensions
Table 5.2.1-3: Fuse external dimensions table
Dimensions (mm)
A
B
D
E
F
G
H
A
74
75
59
45
M8
5
φ17
B
80
81
C
80
81
69
53
8
φ20
77
61
M10
10
φ24
92
76
M12
120
105
M10
D
E
81
F
G
83
91
-
106.6
Note) Column H shows the fuse main circuit terminals.
■
Figure A-F
Fuse terminals (electrodes)
Microswitch mounting seats
■
φ30
Figure G
F: Fuse terminal (electrode): M10 x 4
G: Screw groove 10 [mm]
Figure 5.2.1-3: Fuse external shape
5-5
10
φ56
Chapter 5 Peripherals
Fig.
(5) Microswitch
Tab terminal
3.5
Type: 170H3027
1
33.0max
37.5max
0.8
4
2
Figure 5.2.1-4: Microswitch contact structure
2.0±0.3
17.0±1.0
6.3
Install the microswitch to the fuse so that its tab
terminals face down.
50.5±1.0
Press in the microswitch so that the claws for
attaching the microswitch will hook onto the fuse
body.
Figure 5.2.1-5: Microswitch external shape
This red block protrudes if the fuse is
disconnected. (3.5 mm)
25.0
Figure 5.2.1-6: Installing a microswitch
5-6
5.2.2
Disconnectors and molded case circuit breakers for wiring
(MCCB)
This section describes disconnectors and molded case circuit breakers for wiring (hereinafter referred to as "MCCBs")
used in the inverter input/output circuit.
•
Used to disconnect the inverter's input power supply from the converter before maintenance of the
facilities
Used to disconnect the inverter and motor from each other
When using an MCCB on the input (DC bus bar) and/or output side of the inverter, it is necessary to use a non-auto
switch that excludes the overcurrent trip function.
Inverter input side
The opening and closing of the disconnector or MCCB installed on the inverter input side should be performed after
confirming that both the converter and inverter charge lamps are off.
Inverter output side
Use of a non-auto switch is recommended when installing a disconnector or MCCB on the inverter output side. If MCCB
is necessary for the purpose of short protection, use one that has larger capacity than the inverter rated capacity. In this
case, also consider protective coordination with the electric wire.
* Normally, protective coordination with the electric wire is achieved with the inverter’s protective functions (overcurrent,
ground fault, open phase, etc.). However, if the user’s facility standards require protective coordination with MCCBs as
a rule, that rule should be followed.
(1) Application list
Use the combinations in the following table.
690V
400V
Voltage
Table 5.2.2-1: Application list
Motor rating
Inverter type (FRN)
Capacity Capacity
[kW]
[kW]
MD Spec
LD Spec
Diode rectifier
PWM converter
Input current
Input current
MCCB*2
[Adc]*1
[Adc]*1
MCCB*2
Inverter output
side MCCB*2
400AF
400AF
400AF
630AF
630AF
800AF
800AF
-
-
30
60 30SVG1S-4
-
65
37
75 37SVG1S-4
30SVG1S-4
80
68.8
45
91 45SVG1S-4
37SVG1S-4
97
82.9
55
112 55SVG1S-4
45SVG1S-4
119
102
75
150 75SVG1S-4
55SVG1S-4
162
138
90
176 90SVG1S-4
75SVG1S-4
195
161
110
210 110SVG1S-4
90SVG1S-4
238
197
132
253 132SVG1S-4
110SVG1S-4
286
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
630
710
800
1000
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
304 160SVG1S-4
377 200SVG1S-4
415 220SVG1S-4
468 250SVG1S-4
520 280SVG1S-4
585 315SVG1S-4
650
1170 630BVG1S-4
1370 710BVG1S-4
1480 800BVG1S-4
1850
-
132SVG1S-4
160SVG1S-4
200SVG1S-4
220SVG1S-4
250SVG1S-4
280SVG1S-4
315SVG1S-4
630BVG1S-4
710BVG1S-4
800BVG1S-4
347
433
476
541
606
682
769
1365
1538
1733
2166
100 90SVG1S-69
130 110SVG1S-69
140 132SVG1S-69
161 160SVG1S-69
216 200SVG1S-69
265
295 250SVG1S-69
330 280SVG1S-69
365 315SVG1S-69
410 355SVG1S-69
460 400SVG1S-69
100 450SVG1S-69
90SVG1S-69
110SVG1S-69
132SVG1S-69
160SVG1S-69
200SVG1S-69
250SVG1S-69
280SVG1S-69
315SVG1S-69
355SVG1S-69
400SVG1S-69
117
143
169
204
254
277
315
355
397
446
501
561
5-7
56.3
235
630AF
800AF
-
285
355
386
440
491
552
625
1102
1243
1400
1750
96
118
140
170
212
231
261
293
329
373
418
470
Chapter 5 Peripherals
[Examples •
of use]
•
•
•
Instruments in the table are products of Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/fcs/).
For information on available non-auto switch series, see the catalog of Fuji Electric’s G-TWIN breakers for
high-voltage DC circuits.
Refer to catalogs and information from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. for external dimensions and installation
methods.
Columns marked with *1 show the inverter input current (DC) values when the individual converters are
applied.
For the diode rectifiers, the diode rectifier input voltage is equivalent to 3φ 400 VAC 50 Hz.
For MCCBs with *2, it is recommended to use a non-auto switch.
(2) Connection diagram
1) MCCBs on the inverter input side
When installing an MCCB (non-auto switch) on the DC bus bar, refer to the catalog of Fuji Electric’s "breakers for
high-voltage DC circuits". When operating an MCCB (non-auto switch), take the following precautions if applicable:
 When diode converters are used, always confirm that the input power supply is cut off before operating.
 When using PWM converters, always confirm that the input power supply is cut off and that both charge lamps for the
inverter and converter are unlit before operating.
 Add the state where the inverter input side MCCB is closed (ON) as a turning-on interlock condition for the main
power input MCCB.
2) MCCBs on the inverter output side
DC bus (DC common
直流母線
power supply)
（DCコモン電源）
＜INV＞
DCF
P
U
DCF1
DCF2
When connecting an MCCB (non-auto switch) on the
inverter output side, wire it as shown in Figure 5.2.2-1.
Take the following precautions if applicable:
MCCB (non-auto switch)
MCCB（ノンオートスイッチ）
V
NSW
Motor
モ－タ
IM
W
 Operate the opening and closing of the MCCB when
the inverter is suspended.
 Add the state where the inverter output side MCCB
is closed (on) as a condition to start the inverter.
N
Figure 5.2.2-1: Example of an MCCB connected to the inverter
output side
In the connection shown in Figure 5.2.2-1, do not operate the MCCB while the inverter is running. Doing so
would activate the inverter's protective functions.
5-8
Contactor (magnetic contactor)
5.2.2.1
This section describes the contactors (magnetic contactors) used in the inverter output circuits.
[Examples
of use]
•
Used to disconnect the inverter from the input power supply converter before facility maintenance, etc.
•
Used to disconnect the inverter and motor from each other
•
Used to switch from commercial power supply operation to inverter-based operation
•
Do not attach main circuit surge absorption units (Fuji Electric SZ-ZM, etc.) to the contactors.
•
The inverter will be damaged if commercial power supply is connected to the inverter output side
(secondary side). Interlock the commercial power supply side contactor and the inverter output side
contactor to prevent simultaneous ON state.
•
When using the instantaneous power failure restart function, connect the connection confirmation signal of
the inverter output side contactor to the inverter’s general purpose contact input terminal (X terminal) and
set the [IL: interlock function] for the X terminal.

For more information, refer to Chapter 4 of the separate volume "Unit/Function Codes Edition"
(24A7--0019).
(1) Application list
Use the combinations in the following table.
Table 5.2.2-2: Application list
690V
400V
Voltage
Motor rating
Capacity [kW]
Current (A)
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
630
710
800
1000
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
315
355
400
450
60
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
468
520
585
650
1170
1370
1480
1850
100
130
140
161
216
235
265
295
330
365
410
460
Inverter type (FRN)
MD Spec
LD Spec
30SVG1S-4
37SVG1S-4
45SVG1S-4
55SVG1S-4
75SVG1S-4
90SVG1S-4
110SVG1S-4
132SVG1S-4
160SVG1S-4
200SVG1S-4
220SVG1S-4
250SVG1S-4
280SVG1S-4
315SVG1S-4
630BVG1S-4
710BVG1S-4
800BVG1S-4
90SVG1S-69
110SVG1S-69
132SVG1S-69
160SVG1S-69
200SVG1S-69
250SVG1S-69
280SVG1S-69
315SVG1S-69
355SVG1S-69
400SVG1S-69
450SVG1S-69
30SVG1S-4
37SVG1S-4
45SVG1S-4
55SVG1S-4
75SVG1S-4
90SVG1S-4
110SVG1S-4
132SVG1S-4
160SVG1S-4
200SVG1S-4
220SVG1S-4
250SVG1S-4
280SVG1S-4
315SVG1S-4
630BVG1S-4
710BVG1S-4
800BVG1S-4
90SVG1S-69
110SVG1S-69
132SVG1S-69
160SVG1S-69
200SVG1S-69
250SVG1S-69
280SVG1S-69
315SVG1S-69
355SVG1S-69
400SVG1S-69
Inverter output side MC
SC-N2
SC-N2S
SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N7
SC-N8
SC-N11
SC-N12
SC-N14
612CM *1
616CM *1
SC-N3
SC-N4
SC-N5
SC-N7
SC-N8
SC-N11
SC-N12
SC-N14
*1. Aichi Electric Works Co., Ltd.
Instruments in the table are products of Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/fcs/).
Refer to catalogs and information from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. for external dimensions and installation methods.
5-9
Chapter 5 Peripherals
Perform the opening and closing of the contactor attached to the inverter output side while the inverter is suspended
(i.e., in free run state).
Initial charging circuit
5.2.2.2
Inverters do not have a built-in initial charging circuit. If the system configuration requires an initial charging circuit,
configure it using the steps described in this section.
(1) Application list
Use the combinations in Table 5.2.2-3.
Table 5.2.2-3: Application list
690V
400V
Voltage
Diode rectifier
Inverter type
Input current [A]*1
MD Spec
LD Spec
FRN30SVG1S-4
65
FRN37SVG1S-4
FRN45SVG1S-4
MC type (73)
MD Spec
LD Spec
80
SC-N1
SC-N1
80
97
SC-N1
SC-N2
97
119
SC-N2
SC-N2
FRN55SVG1S-4
119
162
SC-N2
SC-N2S
FRN75SVG1S-4
162
195
SC-N2S
SC-N3
FRN90SVG1S-4
195
238
SC-N3
SC-N3
FRN110SVG1S-4
238
286
SC-N3
SC-N4
FRN132SVG1S-4
286
347
SC-N4
SC-N5
FRN160SVG1S-4
347
433
SC-N5
SC-N7
FRN200SVG1S-4
433
476
SC-N7
SC-N7
FRN220SVG1S-4
476
541
SC-N7
SC-N8
FRN250SVG1S-4
541
606
SC-N8
SC-N8
FRN280SVG1S-4
606
682
SC-N8
SC-N10
FRN315SVG1S-4
682
769
SC-N10
SC-N11
FRN90SVG1S-69
117
143
SC-N2
SC-N2S
FRN110SVG1S-69
143
169
SC-N2S
SC-N2S
FRN132SVG1S-69
169
204
SC-N2S
SC-N3
FRN160SVG1S-69
204
254
SC-N3
SC-N4
FRN200SVG1S-69
254
277
SC-N4
SC-N4
FRN250SVG1S-69
315
355
SC-N4
SC-N5
FRN280SVG1S-69
355
397
SC-N5
SC-N5
FRN315SVG1S-69
397
446
SC-N5
SC-N7
FRN355SVG1S-69
446
501
SC-N7
SC-N8
FRN400SVG1S-69
501
561
SC-N8
SC-N8
FRN450SVG1S-69
561
SC-N8
-
-
Charging resistor type
(R0)
Quantity
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
1
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
2
PWM
converter
Contact
Fuji
Electric.
(Parallel)
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
3
(Parallel)
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
4
(Parallel)
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
6
(Parallel)
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
2
(Series)
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
4
(2 series,
2 parallel)
HF5C5504(80W
7.5Ω)
6
(2 series,
3 parallel)
•
Instruments in the table are products of Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/fcs/).
Refer to catalogs and information from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. for external dimensions and installation
methods.
•
Regarding the column marked with *1, the input voltage is equivalent to 3φ 400 VAC 50 Hz when a diode
rectifier is used.
•
Contact your Fuji Electric representative for information on the 400V series 630 to 800 kW models and the
690V series.
5-10
(2) Connection diagram, external dimensions of charging resistors
Recommended
wire IV2 mm22
推奨電線：IV2mm
R0
Relay terminal
中継端子
＜INV＞
72
1
3
5
P
2
1
2
3
4
6
5
4
U
V
W
73
N
φ 4.5
34
4.5
power supply)
（DCコモン電源）
52-2
IM
500±10
5
6
Y5A
Control
制御
power
電源
supply
PRT-73
Y5C
73 Connection
73投入指令
140
150
Lead wire
command
Y5C
20
1
<INV>
73X
Y5A
Mounting face
73X
73
Figure 5.2.2-2: Example of connection of DC bus side
disconnector
Figure 5.2.2-3: External dimensions of charging resistor
 Use a 3-phase parallel terminal board (SZ-SP), which is a contactor option, to connect the initial charging contactor
(73).
 Install the main section of the charging resistor with approximately 10 mm spacing from other resistors, other
instruments, and structural parts.
 When using multiple charging resistors, connect them in parallel. IV2 mm 2 is recommended for the relay wires.
 Contact your Fuji Electric representative for information on the charging resistor (R0) when configuring the system
with PWM converters.
Depending on the system configuration, the configuration of the charging resistor may need to be reconsidered.
Use the charging circuit up to once an hour. Repeating initial charging too often may cause failures in the
charging resistor.
5-11
Chapter 5 Peripherals
DC bus (DC common
直流母線
Thermal relays
5.2.2.3
The inverter contains the electronic thermal function for motor protection. However, the electronic thermal function
cannot detect an overload on individual motors when one inverter drives multiple motors. In this case, use thermal relays
for overload protection of the motors.
(1) Application list
The following is an application list of thermal relays for Fuji’s standard motors. However, applications may differ from this
table depending on use conditions. In conditions that require more than one minute of start-up time, the setup should be
reconsidered. For the 690V series, selected appropriate thermal relays based on the rated current of the motor used.
400 V
Voltage
Table 5.2.2-4: Application list
Motor
Standard thermal relay [TR-], 2E thermal relay [TK-] types
Capacity
(kW)
Current
[A]
0.4
0.75
1.5
2.2
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
18.5
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
1.2
1.8
3.3
4.6
7.5
11
15
21
28
34
39
54
66
80
99
134
160
192
229
278
343
•
•
0N
0NH
5-1N
5-1NH
N2
N2H
N3
N3H
N5
N5H
N6
N6H
N7
N7H
N8
N8H
0.8-1.2 (0.8)
1.4-2.2 (1.4)
2.8-4.2 (2.8)
4-6 (4)
6-9 (6)
9-13 (9)
12-18 (12)
18-26 (18)
24-36 (36)
28-40 (28)
34-50 (50)
45-65 (45)
53-80 (53)
65-95 (65)
85-125 (85)
110-160 (110)
125-185 (125)
Instruments in the table are products of Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (http://www.fujielectric.co.jp/fcs/).
Refer to catalogs and information from Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. for external dimensions and installation
methods.
The tripping characteristic curves for thermal relays differ between cold start and hot start.
Configure after confirming the overload current and time of the motor at hot start.
However, if starts/stops are frequent and the start-up current of the motor is large, the thermal relay may trip
mistakenly. Consider the use depending on the mechanical application.
If the used set point current
value is lower than the 20℃
reference
(2) Precautions for use
Thermal relays regulate current referencing ambient
temperature of 20C. The operating current varies by
ambient temperature change, increasing current at low
temperature and decreasing current at high temperature.
The operating characteristic compensates for the
deficiency.
Correction coefficient
Ambient temperature compensation characteristics
If the used set point current
value is higher than the 20℃
reference
Hence, the set point of the current may need to be adjusted
depending on use conditions. When the operating
temperature differs widely from 20C, use “Figure 5.2.2-4”
Ambient Temperature [C]
as a rough guideline to calculate the set point current after
Figure 5.2.2-4: Operating temperature correction coefficient
compensation.
Set point current value at 20 C
 Set point value of thermalrelay
Correctioncoefficient for installation condition (cabinet internal temperature)
5-12
Installation on the inverter output side
If thermal relay is selected according to the motor rated current, it may cause trip mistakenly. Reference the following to
implement countermeasures.
Principles for selection (example)
 Measure the current of the installed circuit with thermal relay, and select the rated current for the thermal relay. For
current measurement, use a clamp meter (HIOKI made: 3284/200 A, 3285/2000 A equivalent products).
Countermeasures for mistaken trips
 Install an OFL filter (OFL--4A).
 Increase the set point value on the thermal relay adjustment dial.
 Install at a location distant from the inverter wiring (close to the motor).
 Attach a temperature sensor to the motor for motor temperature protection, without installing a thermal relay.
•
Do not use delay type thermal relays or those above N10 type because they falsely trip more readily
compared to standard types.
For protection of loads with long start times (loads with large inertia) and motors with large capacity (over
90 kW), attach temperature sensors to motors to implement temperature protection.
(3) Connection diagram
For large capacity motors, use instrument
transformers (CT) and thermal relays in combination.
DC bus (DC common
直流母線
＜INV＞
（DCコモン電源）
power supply)
DCF
Refer to Figure 5.2.2-5.
P
DCF1
DCF2
U
CT1
V
W
CT2
モ－タ
Motor
IM
N
サーマルリレー
Thermal
relay
Figure 5.2.2-5: Example of thermal relay connection with large
current
5.2.2.4
Output transformer
Typical transformers cannot be connected to the inverter output side for the following reasons.
When transformers are needed, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
(1)
Inverter output voltages contain direct current components accompanying slightly unbalanced IGBT switching.
These direct current components cause bias magnetism.
(2)
If the torque boost is set for increasing motor torque at low frequencies, the V/f ratio increases, resulting in higher
magnetic flux density. This causes overexcitation of the transformer, causing magnetic saturation of the magnetic
core and overheating.
(3)
Because surge voltage accompanying IGBT switching occurs, enhancement of insulation matching surge voltage
is necessary.
* Transformers (special) can be used only when the control method is V/f control. (Do not use a transformer when vector
control is in use.)
5.2.2.5
Main circuit monitoring instrument
“6.2.12.9 Receiving power supply monitor” in Chapter 6 shows meters that can be attached to the inverter output side.

Refer to "6.2.12.9 Receiving power supply monitor" in Chapter 6.
5-13
Chapter 5 Peripherals
 Confirm that the current is within the motor’s allowable heat characteristics.
5.3
Control circuit
5.3.1
Backup battery
When saving trace back memory or using calendar functions while the inverter is not powered, batteries are needed for
memory storage. This inverter contains the battery in the standard package, so attach the battery when using the above
features.
Table 5.3.1-1: Battery specifications
Model
OPK-BP
* When battery runs out, purchase this model.
Battery voltage /
capacity
3.6 V-1100 mAh
Classification
Thionyl chloride lithium battery
Replacement cycle
5 years (operating temp: 60C, inverter not
powered)
1 2
Units: [mm]
Φ17
55
31
Figure 5.3.1-1: External dimensions of the battery
Procedures for installing/replacing the battery
5.3.1.1
Battery installation steps are described below.

For information on how to set the date/time, refer to Section 3.4. 4.12 in Chapter 3 of the separate volume
"Unit/Function Codes Edition" (24A7--0019).
(1)
Remove the front cover.
(2)
Open the keypad case and remove connectors CN5 and CN8 on the
control print circuit board.
(3)
Remove the keypad case.
Connectors CN5 and CN8 are located
on the upper left side, viewed from the
front side of the control print circuit
board.
Keypad
タッチパネ
ル
(4)
Keypad case
Attach the battery into the battery (5)
holder near the upper left side of the
control circuit board.
Insert firmly the lead wire connector of the battery into connector CN7
on the control print circuit board.
Battery
CN7
The above completes the battery installation.
For battery replacement, remove the battery in the reverse
order. Then install the new battery, following the steps.
Figure 5.3.1-2: Battery replacement steps
5-14
5.3.1.2
Overseas and aerial transportation of battery (lithium metal battery)
(1)
Transportation of lithium metal battery by embedding it into instruments
When transporting control boards with more than five inverters containing batteries, attach a label as shown in
Figure 5.3.1-3 and prepare transportation documents.
(2)
Transportation of lithium metal battery by packaging it with
instruments
Attach a label as shown in Figure 5.3.1-3 and prepare a certificate of
conformance to drop test in the transportation material.
For air transport, the number of batteries which can be bundled is
limited to two additional to the number required for instrument
operation.
120 x 110 mm
Figure 5.3.1-3: Label to attach to package
exterior
For details, contact the transportation company.
5.3.2
Dimensions
PG amplifier (insulating converter)
When the motor speed cannot be normally detected due to distorted PG waveforms resulting from the long wiring to the
pulse generator (PG) for motor speed detection, use a PG amplifier that corrects and amplifies PG waveforms.
5.3.2.1
Recommended pulse amplifier model
•
SHP-115150 (FAITH product)
Type number nomenclature
•
SHC-215150 (FAITH product)
SHP-
The only difference between the above products is in the control
power supply specifications of the PG amplifier.
PG voltage of the standard vector motor type is 15 V.
Power supply voltage
1: 100-110VAC, 50/60 Hz
2: 200-220VAC, 50/60 Hz
Detector power supply
05: 5VDC
10: ±5VDC
12: 12VDC
15: 15VDC
Output voltage
12: 12VDC
15: 15VDC
External power supply
0: None
1: Available (same as output voltage)
Contact your Fuji Electric representative when purchasing these
products.
5.3.2.2
External dimensions
114
94
70
150
138
125
16
4-ø5.5
Figure 5.3.2-1: External dimensions of the PG amplifier
5-15
•
Steel closed box (IP20 equivalent)
•
Paint color: Cream color (Munsell 5Y7/1)
•
Approx. mass: 1 kg
•
Position approx. 10 mm away from instruments
such as control relays and structural parts. Also,
position more than 100 mm away from the main
circuit instruments and wiring.
Chapter 5 Peripherals
Exercise caution on the following items when transporting the battery (lithium metal battery) by itself, by packaging it with
other instruments, or by embedding it into instruments.
Specifications and terminal description
5.3.2.3
(1) Specifications
Item
Maximum input frequency
Specifications
100 kHz
Isolation between input and output Isolator using photo coupler
signals
Input interface
Voltage input (input impedance: 500 kΩ)
Signal levels*
H level
L level
SHP-05
3.5 to 18 V
0 to 0.8 V
SHP-10
3.5 to 6 V
-1 to -6 V
SHP-12
8 to 18 V
0 to 1 V
SHP-15
8 to 18 V
0 to 1 V
Phase of input and output signals
Same phase
Delay between input and output
signals
500nS
Output interface
Complementary (loading impedance over 500 Ω)
Signal level
H= over 10 V, L= below 1 V (loading impedance 10 kΩ)
External power supply for PG*
5 VDC, 12 V, 15 V
Control power supply*
100-110 VAC, 200-220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Withstand voltage
1500 VAC/1 minute (between input and output terminals, between power terminal and casing)
Insulated resistance
100 MΩ or higher (500 VDC, between all terminals and casing)
Operating temperature, humidity
0 to 50C, 35 to 85% Rh (avoid condensation)
Storage temperature, humidity
-10 to 60C, 35 to 85% Rh (avoid condensation)
Power consumption
Approximately 7 VA
Specifications marked with * in the table are determined by the model.
(2) Terminal description
Terminal
No.
Terminal description
1
N.C
2
N.C
3
A-phase input (+ side)
4
A-phase input (- side, common side)
5
B-phase input (+ side)
6
B-phase input (- side, common side)
7
PG power supply (+ side)
8
PG power supply (common side)
9
-5 V terminal
11
A-phase output (- side, common side)
12
A-phase output (+ side)
13
B-phase output (- side, common side)
14
B-phase output (+ side)
15
External power supply (+ side)
16
External power supply (- side, common side)
17
Earthing terminal
18
AC power supply input
19
5-16
5.3.2.4
Precautions for connection and specifications
(1) Connection diagram
Connect the wiring as shown in Figure 5.3.2-2.
PG amplifier
＜Motor＞
PGP
PGM
PA
PB
13
12
14
8
7
3
5
PGM
PGP
PG
PA
PB
SS
18
19
17
Control power
supply 100 VAC,
50 Hz
U
V
W
U
V
W
G
E
IM
 Connect the grounding terminal of the PG
amplifier to the same ground connection as the
inverter. (Connect to the common ground bus
when housed inside a cabinet.)
 For the pulse signals, use shielded lines between
the motor and the PG amplifier, and between the
PG amplifier and the inverter.
•
Inside cabinet: MVVS-3 over 0.3 mm2 core
•
Outside cabinet: CVVS-4 over 2 mm2 core
 Connect the shield of the shield line between the
motor and PG amplifier to the SS (E) terminal
dedicated for motor signals.
Figure 5.3.2-2: Connection diagram
(2) Precautions for use
When the PG amplifier is used, "PG cut off" detection (p9 ), one of the inverter protective functions, becomes
unavailable because the connection to the inverter's terminal "PGP" is lost. Therefore, configure to use the speed
mismatch alarm function [E45] instead of the PG cut off function in the function code setup.
In addition, disable the PG cut off alarm function (p9 ) with function code [H104].

For information on how to set the date/time, refer to Section 3.4. 4.12 in Chapter 3 of the separate volume
"Unit/Function Codes Edition" (24A7--0019)For information on how to set the date/time, refer to "Chapter 4
Control and Operation" of the separate volume "Unit/Function Codes Edition" (24A7--0019).
5-17
Chapter 5 Peripherals
＜INV＞
Inverter options
5.4
This section contains an overview of control options and the restrictions on installation in inverters.

For information on how to set the date/time, refer to Section 3.4. 4.12 in Chapter 3 of the separate volume
"Unit/Function Codes Edition" (24A7-J-0019)For information on how to set the date/time, refer to "Chapter 6
Control Options" of the separate volume "Unit/Function Codes Edition" (24A7-J-0019).
5.4.1
Option list
Category
Name
Synchronous interface
Analog card (for
A port only)
Aio extension card
Switch functions
using SW
Type
OPC-VG1-SN
Synchronous interface circuit for dancer control
OPC-VG1-AIO
Ai 2 points + Ao 2 points extension card
OPC-VG1-DIA
Di interface card
OPC-VG1-DI
OPC-VG1-DIB
Dio extension card
OPC-VG1-DIO
16 bit Di binary or BCD 4 digits + sign used for
speed command, torque command, torque
current command setup.
(Setting must be switched depending on which
port is used)
OPC-VG1-DIOA
Function selection Di x 4bits + function selection
Do x 8bits extension
OPC-VG1-DIOB
UPAC I/O extension Di x 16 bits + Do x 10 bits
T link interface card
OPC-VG1-TL
T link interface card
CC-Link interface card
OPC-VG1-CCL
This interface card supports CC-Link
OPC-VG1-PG (SD)
Digital 8 bit (for
A or B port only)
OPC-VG1-PG
OPC-VG1-PG (LD)
OPC-VG1-PG (PR)
OPC-VG1-PG (PD)
PG interface card
+5 V line driver type encoder interface (A, B, Z
signals) (500 kHz)
Used for motor speed, line speed, position
command, and position detection.
OPC-VG1-PGo (SD)
Open collector type encoder interface (A, B, Z
OPC-VG1-PGo (LD) signals) (100 kHz)
OPC-VG1-PGo
OPC-VG1-PGo (PR) Used for motor speed, line speed, position
command, and position detection.
OPC-VG1-PGo (PD)
OPC-VG1-SPGT
17 bit high resolution ABS encoder interface
OPC-VG1-PMPG
Supports +5 V line driver
output
OPC-VG1-PMPGo
Supports open collector
output
PROFIBUS-DP interface
card
OPC-VG1-PDP (*1)
PROFIBUS-DP interface card
DeviceNet interface card
OPC-VG1-DEV (*2)
DeviceNet interface card
SX bus interface card
OPC-VG1-SX
SX bus interface card
E-SX bus interface card
OPC-VG1-ESX
E-SX bus interface card
PMPG interface card for
driving synchronous
motor
Field bus
interface card
(for C port only)
Specifications
Digital 16 bit (for User Programmable
D port only)
Application Card
A, B, position of
magnetic pole
(max. 4 bits)
OPC-VG1-UPAC (*1)
Used for inverter control from customized
software created by the user
PROFINET-IRT
interface card
OPC-VG1-PNET (*3)
Supports PROFINET-RT and IRT
Safety card (for
E port only)
Functional safety card
OPC-VG1-SAFE (*1)
Functional safety standard compatible card
Control circuit
terminal (for F
port only)
High speed serial
communication
supported terminal
board
OPC-VG1-TBSI (*1)
Used for multiplexed systems such as
multi-winding motor driving and direct parallel
systems
Loader
Inverter support loader
WPS-VG1-STR
CD-ROM (free) for Windows
WPS-VG1-PCL
CD-ROM (paid version) for Windows
(*1) Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0021 or later.
(*2) Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0030 or later.
(*3) Available with FRENIC-VG types with PROFINET support (i.e., type numbers that end with "PN").
5-18
5.4.2
Restrictions on mounting control option cards and others
5.4.2.1
Mountable ports
Control options are restricted by function on the ports which can be mounted (attachment section). Refer to Table 5.4.2-1
Option mounting port and Figure 5.4.2-1 Option mounting locations.
CN
Port
3
A
2
Category
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Digital 8bit, analog card
1
1
1
B
Digital 8bit
1
0
0
6
C
Field bus interface card
0
0
1
10
D
Digital 16bit
1
1
0
16
E
Safety card
0
1
1
1
F
Control circuit terminal
1
1
1
D port
(CN10)
A port
(CN3)
E port
(CN16)
B port
(CN2)
F port (CN1)
C port (CN6)
Figure 5.4.2-1: Option mounting locations
5-19
Chapter 5 Peripherals
Table 5.4.2-1: Option mounting port
5.4.2.2
Restrictions when mounting control options
Some combinations of control option digital cards (8 bit and 16 bit) cannot be mounted together, due to their functions.
Construct the system in accordance with Table 5.4.2-2 " Control options which can be mounted together".
Table 5.4.2-2: Control options which can be mounted together
OK: Can be mounted together NG: Cannot be mounted together
P
M
P
P
G
G
S
T
U
P
A
D
C
E
S
D
T
/
/
P
B
S
P
N
I
I
C
S
N
I
L
P
P
G
S
X
A
E
O
O
L
X
G
M
T
I
C
T
o
P
G
o
*7
Model
OPC-VG1
-□□□□
SN
P
D
P
D
E
V
S
A
F
E
*8
NG
AIO
NG NG
DI
*1
OK OK OK
DIO
*1
OK OK OK OK
TL
OK OK OK OK NG
CCL
OK OK OK OK NG NG
PG/PGo
OK OK OK OK OK OK
*3
PMPG/PMPGo
*4
OK OK OK OK OK OK
*3
SPGT
*5
*6
TBSI
*7 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK
*1 *2
*6
NG
OK OK OK OK NG NG NG
NG
SX
OK OK OK OK OK NG OK OK OK NG NG
ESX
OK OK OK OK NG NG OK OK OK NG NG NG
UPAC
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG NG NG
PNET
OK OK OK OK NG NG OK OK OK NG NG NG NG NG
PDP
OK OK OK OK NG NG OK OK OK NG NG NG NG NG NG
DEV
OK OK OK OK NG NG OK OK OK NG NG NG NG NG NG NG
SAFE
OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG
TBSI
T
B
S
I
*8 OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK OK NG OK OK OK OK OK OK
*6
NG
As shown above, certain combinations of communication related option cards (such as the OPC-VG1-TL and the
OPC-VG1-CCL) cannot be mounted together. An attempt to mount such cards together will result in an operation
procedure alarm (er6 ).
*1
*2
*3
The use method for OPC-VG1-DI, DIO, PG, and PGo can be selected by the setup of the SW on the print board.
Two cards of OPC-VG1-DI, DIO, PG, and PGo each can be mounted, but an operation procedure alarm ( er6) will
be activated if the setup of the 2 cards determining the use method becomes identical.
When using the OPC-VG1-PG for motor speed detection, inputs from main control print circuit board terminals (PA
and PB) are not available.
When two cards of OPC-VG1-PG/PGo and/or OPC-VG1-PMPG/PMPGo are mounted, the following restrictions
apply:
VG1-PG/PGo(SD)
VG1-PMPG/PMPGo
*4
*5
*6
*7
*8
VG1-PG/PGo(LD)
VG1-PG/PGo(PR)
VG1-PG/PGo(SD)
VG1-PMPG/PMPGo
NG
VG1-PG/PGo(LD)
OK
NG
VG1-PG/PGo(PR)
OK
NG
NG
VG1-PG/PGo(PD)
OK
NG
NG
VG1-PG/PGo(PD)
NG
When OPC-VG1-PMPG is attached, the available terminals change depending on the control method selected.
When the vector control with speed sensor for induction motor is selected, terminals (PA and PB) of the main
control print circuit board are available.
When the vector control with speed sensor for synchronous motor is selected, OPC-VG1-PMPG is available.
The OPC-VG1-SPGT can only be mounted on B port.
When this combination is needed, contact your Fuji Electric representative.
Restrictions when TBSI is used in as a part of SIU system.
Restrictions when TBSI is used for multi-winding motor drive or direct parallel system.
5-20
FRENIC- VG
6
Converter System
(Diode Rectifier, PWM Converter, Filter Stack, Braking System)
6.1
Multi-converter system ................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.2
Diode rectifiers (RHD-D series) ...................................................................................................... 6-2
6.2.1
Features ................................................................................................................................. 6-2
6.2.2
Standard specifications........................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2.1
3-phase 400V series ..................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.2.2
3-phase 690V series ..................................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.3
Basic connection diagrams ..................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3.1
When a diode rectifier and an inverter are connected on a 1:1 basis ........................... 6-5
6.2.3.2
When connecting multiple diode rectifiers .................................................................... 6-7
6.2.4
Terminal functions ................................................................................................................... 6-8
6.2.5
Check before use.................................................................................................................. 6-10
6.2.6
External views ...................................................................................................................... 6-11
6.2.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label ...................................................................... 6-11
6.2.6.2
Appearance ................................................................................................................ 6-11
6.2.7
External dimensions ............................................................................................................. 6-12
6.2.7.1
List of external dimensions - RHD-D series (stack type) ............................................ 6-12
6.2.7.2
External dimensions ................................................................................................... 6-12
6.2.8
Terminal positions ................................................................................................................. 6-14
6.2.8.1
Main circuit terminals .................................................................................................. 6-14
6.2.8.2
Control circuit terminal ................................................................................................ 6-16
6.2.8.3
Switch 1 ...................................................................................................................... 6-16
6.2.9
Multi-unit connection (capacity expansion) ........................................................................... 6-17
6.2.9.1
Parallel connection method ........................................................................................ 6-18
6.2.9.2
12-phase rectification method..................................................................................... 6-18
6.2.9.3
Capacity reduction compensation based on the supply voltage ................................. 6-19
6.2.9.4
Example of calculating the nominal applied inverter/motor capacity ........................... 6-19
6.2.10 System configuration examples ............................................................................................ 6-20
6.2.11
Generated loss ..................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.12 Peripherals ........................................................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.12.1
AC fuse for diode rectifier ........................................................................................... 6-23
6.2.12.2
AC reactor (ACR: alternate current reactor) ............................................................... 6-24
6.2.12.3
Use of molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs) ........................................................... 6-27
6.2.12.4
Use of earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCBs) ........................................................... 6-30
6.2.12.5
Use of electromagnetic contactor for power supply circuit .......................................... 6-37
6.2.12.6
List of equipment (MCCB and MC) ............................................................................. 6-37
6.2.12.7
Use of earth leakage detector (earth leakage relay) ................................................... 6-38
6.2.12.8
Power supply transformer (power receiving transformer) ........................................... 6-39
6.2.12.9
Receiving power supply monitor ................................................................................. 6-42
6.2.13 Recommended wire size ....................................................................................................... 6-46
6.3
6.2.13.1
3-phase 400V series ................................................................................................... 6-46
6.2.13.2
3-phase 690V series ................................................................................................... 6-47
High-efficiency power regeneration PWM converter ..................................................................... 6-48
6.3.1
Features ................................................................................................................................ 6-48
6.3.2
Standard specifications ......................................................................................................... 6-49
6.3.2.1
3-phase 400V series (RHC-C: unit type)..................................................................... 6-49
6.3.2.2
3-phase 400V/690V series (RHC-D: stack type)......................................................... 6-50
6.3.3
Common specifications ......................................................................................................... 6-51
6.3.4
Control options ...................................................................................................................... 6-52
6.3.5
Check before use .................................................................................................................. 6-53
6.3.6
External views ....................................................................................................................... 6-54
6.3.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label ....................................................................... 6-54
6.3.6.2
Appearance ................................................................................................................ 6-54
6.3.7
Terminal functions ................................................................................................................. 6-58
6.3.8
Communication specifications............................................................................................... 6-61
6.3.9
Basic connection diagrams ................................................................................................... 6-61
6.3.9.1
List of basic connection diagrams ............................................................................... 6-61
6.3.9.2
Basic connection diagram 1 ........................................................................................ 6-62
6.3.9.3
Basic connection diagram 2 ........................................................................................ 6-63
6.3.9.4
Basic connection diagram 3 ........................................................................................ 6-64
6.3.9.5
Basic connection diagram 4 ........................................................................................ 6-65
6.3.10 Protective functions............................................................................................................... 6-67
6.3.10.1
List of alarm codes ...................................................................................................... 6-67
6.3.10.2
Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 6-69
6.3.11
List of function codes ............................................................................................................ 6-77
6.3.12 Configuration of peripherals .................................................................................................. 6-79
6.3.12.1
Configuration for the RHF-D series filter stacks .......................................................... 6-79
6.3.12.2
List of peripherals with no filter stack used ................................................................. 6-80
6.3.12.3
Input power supply circuit (MCCB, ELCB) .................................................................. 6-82
6.3.13 Parallel system (capacity expansion) .................................................................................... 6-83
6.3.13.1
Transformer-less parallel system ................................................................................ 6-83
6.3.13.2
Transformer insulation type parallel system ................................................................ 6-84
6.3.13.3
Parallel system common specifications ...................................................................... 6-85
6.3.13.4
Configuration table for transformer-less parallel system ............................................. 6-87
6.3.13.5
Parallel system connection diagram ........................................................................... 6-90
6.3.13.6
Charging circuit in parallel system .............................................................................. 6-91
6.3.14 System configuration examples ............................................................................................ 6-92
6.3.15 Wiring.................................................................................................................................... 6-94
6.3.15.1
Precautions on wiring.................................................................................................. 6-94
6.3.15.2
Wire size ................................................................................................................... 6-101
6.3.16 External dimensions............................................................................................................ 6-105
6.3.16.1
List of external dimensions - RHC-D series (stack type) ........................................... 6-105
6.3.16.2
External dimensions.................................................................................................. 6-106
6.3.17 Terminal positions ............................................................................................................... 6-109
6.3.18 Peripheral equipment external dimensions ......................................................................... 6-117
6.3.19 Generated loss ................................................................................................................... 6-123
6.4
6.3.19.1
Generated loss in MD mode ..................................................................................... 6-123
6.3.19.2
Generated loss in LD mode ...................................................................................... 6-123
Filter stack (RHF-D series) ......................................................................................................... 6-124
6.4.1
Features ............................................................................................................................. 6-124
6.4.2
Standard specifications....................................................................................................... 6-125
6.4.2.1
3-phase 400V series ................................................................................................. 6-125
6.4.2.2
3-phase 690V series ................................................................................................. 6-126
6.4.3
Basic connection diagrams ................................................................................................. 6-127
6.4.4
Terminal functions ............................................................................................................... 6-129
6.4.5
Check before use................................................................................................................ 6-131
6.4.6
External views .................................................................................................................... 6-132
6.4.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label .................................................................... 6-132
6.4.6.2
Appearance .............................................................................................................. 6-132
6.4.7
External dimensions ........................................................................................................... 6-134
6.4.7.1
List of external dimensions - RHF-D series (stack type) ........................................... 6-134
6.4.7.2
External dimensions ................................................................................................. 6-135
6.4.8
Terminal positions ............................................................................................................... 6-139
6.4.8.1
Main circuit terminals ................................................................................................ 6-139
6.4.8.2
Control circuit terminal .............................................................................................. 6-143
6.4.9
Configuration of peripherals ................................................................................................ 6-144
6.4.10 AC fuse external view ......................................................................................................... 6-145
6.4.11
Wire size ............................................................................................................................. 6-146
6.4.11.1
3-phase 400V series ................................................................................................. 6-146
6.4.11.2
3-phase 690V series ................................................................................................. 6-147
6.4.12 Generated loss ................................................................................................................... 6-148
6.5
Braking system (braking unit, braking resistor) ........................................................................... 6-149
6.5.1
Overview of braking resistor (DBR) .................................................................................... 6-149
6.5.2
Overview of braking unit ..................................................................................................... 6-149
6.5.3
Standard combination ......................................................................................................... 6-150
6.5.4
Installation .......................................................................................................................... 6-152
6.5.5
Protective operation ............................................................................................................ 6-152
6.5.6
Cautions on use of terminal functions ................................................................................. 6-153
6.5.6.1
Braking resistor (DBR) .............................................................................................. 6-153
6.5.6.2
Braking unit............................................................................................................... 6-153
6.5.7
Peripheral equipment.......................................................................................................... 6-157
6.5.8
Wire size selection .............................................................................................................. 6-158
6.5.8.1
Wire size (obtained from braking unit specifications) ................................................ 6-158
6.5.8.2
Wire size (obtained from braking resistor specifications) .......................................... 6-159
6.5.9
External dimensions ........................................................................................................... 6-160
6.5.9.1
Braking resistor (DBR) .............................................................................................. 6-160
6.5.9.2
Braking unit (10%ED) ............................................................................................... 6-161
6.5.9.3
Braking unit (Applicable to 30%ED) .......................................................................... 6-161
6.1
Multi-converter system
A converter that converts AC power to DC power is separately required to use the FRENIC-VG stack type inverters. For
this purpose, two versions of stack type converts (i.e., diode rectifiers and PWM converters) are available to support your
system configuration needs.
A converter may also be connected to more than one inverter via DC bus bars, to conserve energy more efficiently by
transferring regenerative energy of the inverter, while reducing the capacity of the converter at the same time.
In addition, unit type PWM converters (RHC-C series) are also available for use in combination with the FRENIC-VG
stack type inverters.
Converter type
Diode rectifier
Stack type
RHD-D series
Description
Max. output capacity*1
• AC power is converted to DC power by diode rectifier, which is then
supplied to inverter.
400V series
• 1450 kW (MD spec)
• 1640 kW (LD spec)
• Supply of high capacity power is enabled by parallel connection.
• Equipped with DC reactor for input power factor improvement
690V series
(reduction of the harmonic currents). On the other hand, reduction of • 2000 kW (MD spec)
harmonic currents generated by 12-pulse rectifier is also made
possible by installing a power transformer.
( Refer to Section
• By connecting a braking unit and a braking resistor (DBR), it may
6.2.)
also be made to convert regenerative energy from motor (electric
power energy) to thermal energy, for processing of regenerative
energy.
High-efficiency
power
regeneration
PWM converter
Stack type
RHC-D series
Unit type
RHC-C series
RHC-D series
(Transformer parallel
system)
• Supply of high capacity power is enabled by parallel connection.
400V series
• Use of PWM control makes it possible to greatly reduce the harmonic • 2400 kW (MD spec)
current of the AC power supply.
• 3000 kW (LD spec)
(The power factor is controlled at approximately "1".)
690V series
• The regenerative energy is returned to the AC power. The
• 1200 kW
regenerative energy is applicable to a large load.
(MD, LD spec)
• IGBT is driven by PWM control to convert AC power to DC power,
which is then supplied to inverter.
( Refer to Section
6.3.)
Filter stack
Stack type
RHF-D series
• This filter stack is dedicated to use with the RHC-D series
high-efficiency power regeneration PWM converters.
( Refer to Section
6.4.)
• All peripherals (filter, booster, charging circuits, etc.) required to run a
PWM converter are packaged in a single unit.
• It is possible to save wiring work and installation space for
*Dedicated to use
*
2
peripherals.
with the RHC-D
• Built on the same stack design and shape as inverters and PWM
converters, these products effectively help reduce the panel size.
Braking system
(braking unit)
(braking resistor)
• These products provide a braking system that consumes
regenerative energy from a motor as thermal energy by use of a
resistor. (thus achieving high braking performance).
( Refer to Section
6.5.)
• Braking unit: BU-4C
Standard rating at duty cycle of 10%ED. Can be increased to duty
cycle of 30%ED Max. by installing the optional fan unit (BU-F).
• Braking resistor: DBV-
Two standard types are available: duty cycle 10%ED and 20%ED.
*1
The Max. output capacity values are based on the assumption that the respective converters are connected in
parallel. The number of connectable units varies depending on the converter.
*2
Cannot be used with unit type PWM converters (RHC-C series).
6-1
Chapter 6 Converter System
This chapter describes two different versions of stack type converters (i.e., diode rectifiers and PWM converters), filter
stacks (RHF-D series), and braking systems (braking unit + braking resistor).
6.2
Diode rectifiers (RHD-D series)
6.2.1
Features
■
Converter type
Diode rectifier converts AC power to DC power, and then supplies DC power to inverter.
Diode
rectification circuit converts
ダイオード整流回路により交流
AC power to DC power.
電源を直流電源に変換します。
交流
AC
直流
DC
Diode
ダイオード
rectification
整流回路
circuit
Power
電源
supply
交流
AC
Motor
モータ
インバータ
Inverter
Diode rectifier
ダイオード整流器
(RHD-D)
（RHD-D）
■
Substantial applicable capacity
A high capacity system can be constructed by connecting diode rectifiers in parallel.
(12-phase rectification + parallel connection (using 6 units of diode rectifiers))
• 400V series: 1450 kW (MD spec) or 1640 kW (LD spec) (at supply voltage of 400 V)
• 690V series: 2000 kW (MD spec) (at supply voltage of 690 V)
<Example of constructing a high capacity system>
RFI
RFI
Power
電源
supply
RFI
RFI
I
TBSI
RFI
I
ACR
RFI
TBSI
I
TBSI
RFI: Diode rectifier
RFI：ダイオード整流器
I: Inverter
I：インバータ
TBSI: Optical communication card (optional)
TBSI：光通信カード（オプション）
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
ACR
12-phase
rectification
12相整流
transformer
トランス
RFI:
Diode rectifier
RFI：ダイオード整流器
I:I：インバータ
Inverter
TBSI:
Optical communication
TBSI：光通信カード（オプション）
card
(optional)
ACR：交流リアクトル
ACR: AC reactor
3 units connected in parallel
RFI
RFI
RFI
I
I
TBSI
単巻線
Singleモータ
winding
motor
I
TBSI
I
TBSI
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
Multiwinding
多巻線
motor
モータ
TBSI
TBSI
I
12-phase rectification (6 units in all)
To connect multiple diode rectifiers in parallel (so that all of them have the same output), ensure that they all
have the same capacity.
■
Reduction of harmonic currents
The RHD-D series diode rectifiers are equipped with a built-in DC reactor for reduction of the harmonic currents. Further
reduction of harmonic currents is made possible by creating a 12-phase rectification system in combination with a power
transformer, when connecting more than one unit in parallel.
■
Braking device
A discharging resistor braking device (that consists of a braking unit and braking resistor) is available an externally
mounted option. You can select the capacity based on the required regenerative energy amount, thereby constructing a
compact system.
6-2
3-phase 400V series
RHD200S-4D
RHD315S-4D
Continuous capacity [kW] *1
227
353
Nominal applied inverter/motor
capacity *1
200
315
Overload rating
150% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
Voltage
513 to 679 VDC (variable according to input voltage and load)
Max. connection capacity [kW] *1 *2
600
945
Min. connection capacity [kW] *1
110
180
Required power supply capacity [kVA]
248
388
Continuous capacity [kW] *1
247
400
Nominal applied inverter/motor
capacity *1
220
355
Output
LD spec
Model
Overload rating
110% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
Voltage
513 to 679 VDC (variable according to input voltage and load)
Max. connection capacity [kW] *1 *2
600
1065
Min. connection capacity [kW] *1
110
180
Required power supply capacity [kVA]
271
435
Input power
Main power supply
Number of phases, voltage, and frequency
Fan power supply
auxiliary input
Number of phases,
voltage, and frequency
3-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz
400 V input
Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 480 V/60 Hz *3
200 V input
Single-phase, 200 to 220 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *4
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15% (inter-phase unbalance rate: within 2% *5)
Frequency wave number: +5% to -5%
Approx. mass [kg]
125
Enclosure
Common Specifications
160
IP00
Refer to "2.2.1 Installation environment and conformity with
standards" in Chapter 2.
*1
Reduction of capacity is required for supply voltage under 400 V. Reduction of capacity is also required when
multiple units are connected.
*2
Due to the restriction of the initial charging circuit, this is the total capacity of inverters that can be connected.
However, the capacity of inverters that can be run at the same time is limited to the continuous capacity. This
shows the total capacity of inverters that can be connected. However, the capacity of inverters that can be run in
driving mode at the same time is the continuous capacity.
*3
For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz power supply, switching of converter internal terminals (U1, U2) is
required.
*4
200 V power supply can also be used. For details, refer to "6.2.4 Terminal functions".
*5
Interphaseunbalance rate (%) 
Max. voltage[V] - Min. voltage[V]
 67
3 - phase average voltage
6-3
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.2.2.1
Output
Standard specifications
MD Spec
6.2.2
Output
3-phase 690V series
Model
RHD220S-69D
RHD450S-69D
Continuous capacity [kW]*1
252
504
Nominal applied inverter/motor
capacity*1
220
450
Overload rating
150% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
Voltage
776 to 1091 VDC (variable according to input voltage and load)
Max. connection capacity [kW] *1 *2
660
1350
Min. connection capacity [kW] *1
132
250
Required power supply capacity [kVA]
270
549
Continuous capacity [kW]*1
280
-
Nominal applied inverter/motor
capacity*1
250
-
Output
LD spec
MD Spec
6.2.2.2
Overload rating
110% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
Voltage
776 to 1091 VDC (variable according to input voltage and load)
Max. connection capacity [kW] *1 *2
750
-
Min. connection capacity [kW] *1
132
-
Required power supply capacity [kVA]
308
-
Input power
Main power supply
Number of phases, voltage, and frequency
Fan power supply
auxiliary input
Number of phases,
voltage, and frequency
3-phase, 575 to 690 V/50 Hz, 60 Hz
690 V input
Single-phase, 660 to 690 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz, 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60
Hz*3
200 V input
Single-phase, 200 to 220 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *4
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: +10 to -15% (inter-phase unbalance rate: within 2% *5)
Frequency wave number: +5% to -5%
Approx. mass [kg]
125
160
Enclosure
IP00
Common Specifications
Refer to "2.2.1 Installation environment and conformity with
standards" in Chapter 2.
*1
This specification applies when the supply voltage is 690 V. Reduction of capacity is required for supply voltage
under 690 V. Reduction of capacity is also required when multiple units are connected.
*2
Due to the restriction of the initial charging circuit, this is the total capacity of inverters that can be connected.
However, the capacity of inverters that can be run at the same time is limited to the continuous capacity. This
shows the total capacity of inverters that can be connected. However, the capacity of inverters that can be run in
driving mode at the same time is the continuous capacity.
*3
For 690 V series 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz power supply, switching of converter internal terminals (U1, U2) is
required.
*4
200 V power supply can also be used. For details, refer to "6.2.4 Terminal functions".
*5
Interphaseunbalance rate (%) 
Max. voltage[V] - Min. voltage[V]
 67
3 - phase average voltage
6-4
6.2.3
Basic connection diagrams
6.2.3.1
When a diode rectifier and an inverter are connected on a 1:1 basis
Diode rectifier
ダイオード整流器
(RHD-D)
（RHD-D）
(Note
3) (Note
(注３)
(注６) 6)
Microswitch
for AC
ACヒューズ
fuse 断線検出用
disconnection
detection
マイクロスイッチ
(Note
(注６)6)
52
電
源
c
Inverter
インバータ
(stack type)
（スタックタイプ）
R0
d
Fac
L1/R
Fac
L2/S
Fac
L3/T
DCR
P(+)
73
(Note
(注7)
7)
DCF1
DCF2
P(+)
Fdc
DCR
N(-)
U
V
(Note
7)
(注7)
N(-)
W
R0
T0
R1
T1
FWD
M
Fdc
R1
T1
(Note
4)
(注４)
a
b
(Note
5)
(注５)
R11
R12
T11
T12
ACFAN
a
b
Voltage
電圧
detection
検出
U3
U2
U1
(Note
(注２)2) c d
(Note 6)
1 (注６)
2
73R
73T
73A
73C
73-1
73-2
ONA
X7(BX)
(Note 1)
(注１)
73
73
(Note
(注２) 2)
CM
X9(THR)
13
12
CM
11
ONC
E(G)
E(G)
Figure 6.2.3-1: Basic connection diagram (when a diode rectifier and an inverter are connected on a 1:1 basis)
Note
1) Construct a sequence in which the "Coast to a stop" command is input to the inverter until the initial charging
of the diode rectifier is completed. Assign the "Coast to a stop" command (BX) to one of the inverter's
terminals X1 to X9. Use function code E14 to configure the b-contact input so that input occurs on the
b-contact. In this connection configuration, the motor will be in "coast to a stop" state when an instantaneous
power failure occurs. Therefore, when using the circuit for purposes such as vertical transportation, provide
an external interlock circuit.
Note
2) The overheat signal of the diode rectifier is output. Make sure to connect one of the inverter's terminals X1 to
X9 to external alarm (THR). Use function code E14 to configure the b-contact input so that input occurs on the
b-contact.
Note
3) When using microswitches for AC fuse disconnection detection, assign external alarm (THR) to one of the
inverter's terminals X1 to X9, and connect all of the microswitches in series. Use function code E14 to
configure the b-contact input so that input occurs on the b-contact.
Note
4) When inputting 200 VAC as the fan power supply, remove jumper wires from between terminals R11 and R12
and from between terminals T11 and T12, and then connect the input to terminals R12 and T12.
Note
5) The control signal and drive power supply for the charging circuit contactor (73) can be input from the outside.
To do so, make the wiring as illustrated in Figure 6.2.3-2. Additionally, contactors 73A and 73C can also be
used for the external sequence circuit.
Note
6) When connecting multiple diode rectifiers, use the electromagnetic contactor for power supply (52) at the
same time. Furthermore, connect overheat signal outputs (1, 2), charging circuit operation signals (ONA, ONB,
ONC), and AC fuse blow detection microswitch output in series between each stack.
Note
7) For the 400V series, connect "Fdc" (fuse) to either the P (+) side or N (-) side.
For the 690V series, connect "Fdc" (fuse) to both the P (+) and N (-) sides.
(Use two microswitches and connect them in series.)

Be sure to assign the inverter digital input terminal (X1 to X9) to the external alarm (THR), and to connect the
diode rectifier overheat signal outputs (1, 2).

Be sure to stop the inverter when the overheat signal is output.
Risk of fire, accident
6-5
Chapter 6 Converter System
Power supply
Electromagnetic
contactor
電源用
for power
supply
電磁接触器
Microswitch
for DC
DCヒューズ
fuse disconnection
断線検出用
detection
マイクロスイッチ
Figure 6.2.3-2: Control signal connection for the charging circuit contactor (73)
6-6
When connecting multiple diode rectifiers
Diode rectifier
ダイオード整流器
(RHD-D)
(RHD-D)
(Note
3) (Note
(注６)6)
(注３)
Microswitch
for AC
ACヒューズ
fuse disconnection
断線検出用
detection
マイクロスイッチ
c
(Note
(注６)6)
Electromagnetic
contactor
電源用
for power
supply
電磁接触器
Power supply
R0
d
52
電
源
Inverter
インバータ
(stack
type)
スタック
DCF1
DCF2
F
L1/R
F
L2/S
F
L3/T
R1
T1
(Note
4)
(注４)
a
b
Microswitch
for DC
DCヒューズ
fuse disconnection
断線検出用
detection
マイクロスイッチ
(Note
5)
(注５)
DCR
Fdc
P(+)
73
P(+)
(注7)7)
(Note
DCR
ACFAN
a
b
電圧
Voltage
detection
検出
U1
U2
R11
R12
T11
T12
(Note
(注２)2)
1
(Note
(注６)6)
2
73R
73T
73A
73C
73-1
73-2
c f
N(-)
W
R0
T0
R1
T1
FWD
(Note
(注２) 2)
X9(THR)
CM
ONA
ONC
E(G)
Diode rectifier
ダイオード整流器
stack
スタック
(Note(注３)
3) (Note
(注６)6)
(Note 6)
52
CM
13
12
11
X7(BX)
E(G)
Electromagnetic
(注６)
contactor for
電源用
power supply
電磁接触器
M
(Note
(注１)1)
73
73
V
Fdc
N(-)
U
Microswitch
for AC
ACヒューズ
fuse disconnection
断線検出用
detection
マイクロスイッチ
e
R0
d
F
L1/R
F
L2/S
F
L3/T
R1
T1
(Note
4)
(注４)
(Note
5)
(注５)
DCR
P(+)
73
DCR
N(-)
ACFAN
電圧
Voltage
detection
検出
U1
U2
R11
R12
T11
T12
(Note 2) e f
(注２)
(Note 6)
1 (注６)
2
73R
73T
73A
73C
73-1
73-2
ONA
(注１)1)
(Note
73
73
ONC
E(G)
Figure 6.2.3-3: Basic connection diagram (with two diode rectifiers connected in parallel)
* When connecting multiple diode rectifiers, use the electromagnetic contactor for power supply (52) at the same time.
Furthermore, connect overheat signal outputs (1, 2), charging circuit operation signals (ONA, ONC), and AC fuse
blow detection microswitch output in series between each stack.
6-7
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.2.3.2
6.2.4
Terminal functions
Output signals
Input signals
Main circuit
Terminal symbol
Name
Specifications
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T Main power input
Connect to a 3-phase power supply.
P (+), N (-)
Converter output
Connect to inverter power input terminals P(+) and N(-).
E(G)
Converter grounding
Grounding terminal for the chassis (case) of the diode rectifier.
R1, T1
Fan power input
(400V series: when
400 V is input)
(690V series: when
690 V is input)
To be used as supply input of AC cooling fan of inside the diode rectifier.
Internal switching connector needs to be changed to meet supply
voltage.
Refer to "4.5.3 (5) Fan power auxiliary input terminals R1 and T1" in
Chapter 4.
R11, R12
T11, T12 *1
To be used when inputting 200 VAC as the power to the AC cooling fan
inside the diode rectifier.
Fan power input
When inputting 200 VAC as the fan power supply, remove jumper wires
(when 200 V is input)
from between terminals R11 and R12 and from between terminals T11
and T12, and then connect the input to terminals R12 and T12.
73R
73T
Power supply for
charging circuit
Driving supply of charging circuit contactor.
Not to be used as power supply for an external circuit.
U1, U2 *2
Supply voltage
switching terminal
Change the terminal connection depending on the power supply
connected to the fan power input terminals.
(Refer to Figure 6.2.4-2.)
73-1
73-2
Charging circuit
contactor
Control input
Control signal input for charging circuit contactor
Control signal may also be input externally.* 3
<Coil rated capacity>
• 400V series
At power on ... 200 V/50 Hz: 390 VA, 220 V/60 Hz: 460 VA
At power hold ... 200 V/50 Hz: 28.6 VA, 220 V/60 Hz: 28.8 VA
• 690V series
At power on ... 200 V/50 Hz: 470 VA, 220 V/60 Hz: 500 VA
At power hold ... 200 V/50 Hz: 40.0 VA, 220 V/60 Hz: 39.0 VA
73A *4
73C
Control signal output
for charging circuit
Control signal for charging circuit
Contact rating: 250 VAC 0.5 A cos φ=0.3, 30 VDC 0.5 A
ONA
ONC
Charging circuit
operation signal
Auxiliary contact output for charging circuit contactor
To be used as signal for operational check of charging circuit.
Contact rating: 24 VDC 3 A * Min. working voltage/current: 5 VDC 3 mA
1
2
Overheat signal
output
Signal is output when internal parts of diode rectifier are overheated.
Contact rating: 24 VDC (max. 27 V), max. 0.3A/max. 6W
* Min. usage voltage, current: 1 VDC, 0.1mA
*1
Terminals R11, R12, T11, and T12 are 200 V power terminals
and their withstand voltage is 2000 VAC for 1 minute.
*2
Terminals U1 and U2 can be switched as shown in Figure
6.2.4-2.
*3
Refer to Figure 6.2.3-2 for connection method.
Contactor should be powered after completion of initial charging.
Do not open contactor while inverter is in operation. This poses a
risk of damaging the initial charging circuit.
*4
Refer to Figure 6.2.4-1 for timing chart of output signal, and DC
PN voltage at signal output.

Be sure to assign the inverter digital input terminal (X1 to X9) to the external alarm (THR), and to connect the
diode rectifier overheat signal outputs (1, 2).

Be sure to stop the inverter when the overheat signal is output.
Risk of fire, accident
6-8
Figure 6.2.4-1: 73A - 73C signal timing chart
Configuration
400V series: 398 to 440 V/50 Hz, 430 to 460 V/60 Hz
690V series: 660 to 690 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
(Factory default)
400V series: 380 to 398 V/50 Hz, 380 to 430 V/60 Hz
690V series: 575 to 600 V, 50 Hz/60 Hz
Figure 6.2.4-2: Supply voltage switching terminals
6-9
Chapter 6 Converter System
Applied
Voltage
6.2.5
Check before use
Unpack the package and check the following:
Check that you have properly received the product main unit and the following accessories.
Accessories
Instruction manual
Check that the inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts missing. The
main and sub nameplates are attached to the main unit. The main nameplate is located on the front face of the main unit
(as shown in Figure 6.2.6-2 and Figure 6.2.6-3). Check these main nameplates to see that the inverter is exactly the type
you ordered.
(a) Main Nameplate
(b) Sub Nameplate
Figure 6.2.5-1: Nameplate
TYPE: Diode rectifier (RHD-D)
RHD 200 S
RHD
RHD
シリ－ズ名
Series
name
ダイオード整流器
Diode rectifier
表示
Indication
Standard
applicable rated capacity
標準適用定格容量
200
200
220
220
315
315
450
450
200kW
200kW
220kW
220kW
315kW
315kW
450kW
450kW
表示
Indication
形状
Inverter
structure
標準スタックタイプ
Standard stack type
Indication
表示
SS
4 DJ
Indication
表示
JJ
EE
CC
仕向先・取扱説明書
日本語
Japanese
英語
English
中国語
Chinese
Shipping destination/Instruction Manual
表示
Indication
開発系列series
Development
Dシリーズ
D series
表示
Indication
電圧区分
Voltage
class
400V系列
400 V
class series
690V系列
690 V
class series
DD
44
69
69
The diode rectifier may be used by selecting either MD spec/LD spec, depending on the applicable load. Specifications
in each mode are printed on the nameplate.
Medium Duty : MD spec: designed for medium duty overload applications. Overload current rating: 150% for 1 min., Continuous
rating capacity = Capacity of inverters
Low Duty
: LD spec: designed for light duty overload applications. Overload current rating: 110% for 1 min., Continuous rating
capacity = One rank or two ranks higher capacity of inverters
SOURCE
: Power supply rating (MD spec, LD spec)
OUTPUT
: Output rating (MD spec, LD spec)
IP Code
: IP protection grade
SCCR
: Short-circuit capacity
MASS
: Mass
SER.No.
: Production number
2 8 A456A0004BA
Production year
(Last digit of the year)
Serial number of production lot
Production month
1 to 9:
X, Y, or Z:
January to September
October, November, or December
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact your Fuji
Electric representative.

Refer to Chapter 3 "Transportation and Storage of Stack" for information on transportation and long-term storage
of diode rectifiers.

Refer to Chapter 4 "Installation and Wiring" for information on installation of diode rectifiers.
For information on the main circuit wire sizes, refer to "6.2.13 Recommended wire size".

For more details, refer to the Instruction Manual. (400V: INR-SI47-1786, 690V: INR-SI47-1852)
6-10
External views
6.2.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.2.6
Figure 6.2.6-1: Warning label and falling warning label
6.2.6.2
Appearance
Cooling
fan
冷却ファン
Hanging
hole
吊り穴
Cooling
fan
冷却ファン
吊り穴hole
Hanging
Handle
取っ手
Handle
取っ手
Front
cover
表面カバー
Front
cover
表面カバー
転倒警告ラベル
Falling
warning label
Falling
warning label
転倒警告ラベル
Warning
label
警告ラベル
Warning
label
警告ラベル
Handle
取っ手
Handle
取っ手
Main nameplate
定格銘板
Main定格銘板
nameplate
Caster
Caster
キャスター
Figure 6.2.6-2: Frame 3 size
(RHD200S-4D, RHD220S-69D)
Figure 6.2.6-3: Frame 4 size
(RHD315S-4D, RHD450S-69D)
6-11
6.2.7
External dimensions
6.2.7.1
List of external dimensions - RHD-D series (stack type)
Unit: [mm]
Power-based
series
400V
690V
6.2.7.2
(1)
Model
H
D
Approx. mass
[kg]
Remarks
226.2
1100
565
125
Frame 3 size
226.2
1400
565
160
Frame 4 size
226.2
1100
565
125
Frame 3 size
226.2
1400
565
160
Frame 4 size
Figure
W
RHD200S-4D
A
RHD315S-4D
B
RHD220S-69D
A
RHD450S-69D
B
External dimensions
Figure A (Frame 3 size: RHD200S-4D, RHD220S-69D)
(Hanging hole)
Fixation
plate
Fixation
plate
6-12
Figure B (Frame 4 size: RHD315S-4D, RHD450S-69D)
(Hanging hole)
Fixation
plate
Chapter 6 Converter System
(2)
Fixation
plate
6-13
6.2.8
Terminal positions
6.2.8.1
Main circuit terminals
Unit: [mm]
Figure 6.2.8-1: Frame 3 size (RHD200S-4D, RHD220S-69D)
6-14
Unit: [mm]
Chapter 6 Converter System
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
Figure 6.2.8-2: Frame 4 size (RHD315S-4D, RHD450S-69D)
6-15
6.2.8.2
Control circuit terminal
Figure 6.2.8-3: Control terminal layout
6.2.8.3
Switch 1
400V series
690V series
SW1
400V 690V
Do not change Switch 1 from the factory default.
Make sure that Switch 1 is set to the factory
default before turning on the power.
Setting of Switch 1
400V series
400 V
690V series
690 V
Figure 6.2.8-4: Switch 1 layout
6-16
6.2.9
Multi-unit connection (capacity expansion)
A high capacity system can be constructed by connecting diode rectifiers (RHD-D) in parallel.
There are two methods of capacity expansion: parallel connection and 12-phase rectification.
Parallel connection method
12-phase rectification method
<Nominal applied inverter/motor capacity>
<Nominal applied inverter/motor capacity>
• 400V series: (at supply voltage of 400 V)
850 kW for MD spec or 950 kW for LD spec
• 400V series: (at supply voltage of 400 V)
1450 kW for MD spec or 1640 kW for LD spec
• 690V series: (at supply voltage of 690 V)
1200 kW for MD spec
• 690V series: (at supply voltage of 690 V)
2000 kW for MD spec
RFI
Power
電源
supply
RFI
RFI
RFI
I
RFI
I
I
TBSI
I
ACR
RFI
TBSI
I
TBSI
RFI: Diode rectifier
RFI：ダイオード整流器
I: Inverter
I：インバータ
TBSI: Optical communication card (optional)
TBSI：光通信カード（オプション）
単巻線
Singleモータ
winding
motor
ACR
12-phase
rectification
12相整流
transformer
トランス
RFI:
Diode rectifier
RFI：ダイオード整流器
I:I：インバータ
Inverter
TBSI:
Optical communication
TBSI：光通信カード（オプション）
card
(optional)
ACR：交流リアクトル
ACR: AC reactor
Figure 6.2.9-1: 3 units connected in parallel
RFI
RFI
RFI
TBSI
単巻線
Singleモータ
winding
motor
I
TBSI
I
TBSI
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
Multiwinding
多巻線
motor
モータ
TBSI
TBSI
I
Figure 6.2.9-2: 12-phase rectification and parallel connection
(Note 1)
To connect multiple diode rectifiers so that all of them have the same output, ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
(Note 2)
The maximum applied capacity is calculated on the assumption that the capacity reduction compensation
factor based on the supply voltage is 100%. For information on how to accurately calculate the capacity based
on the use conditions, refer to "6.2.9.1 Parallel connection method" to "6.2.9.4 Example of calculating the
nominal applied inverter/motor capacity".
6-17
Chapter 6 Converter System
Up to three diode rectifiers can be connected in parallel to Up to six diode rectifiers (two sets of three rectifiers
the same power supply system.
connected in parallel) by use of a 12-phase rectification
transformer.
Connect an AC reactor (ACR) to the secondary side of the
12-phase rectification transformer.
6.2.9.1
(1)
Parallel connection method
Output capacity reduction
Up to three diode rectifiers (RHD-D) can be connected in parallel. Parallel connection requires reduction of the output
capacity. Use the reduction rates shown in Table 6.2.9-1, calculate and consider the output capacity.
(The reduction rates shown apply to the 400V series at supply voltage of 400 V and to the 690V series at supply voltage
of 690 V.)
Diodeダイオード整流器(RHD-D)
rectifier (RHD-D) container格納盤
panel
Table 6.2.9-1: Output capacity reduction rates for the parallel connection method
Number of sets connected in parallel
Output capacity reduction rate
2 parallel sets
92 [%]
3 parallel sets
92 [%]
(2)
C
C1
C2
B
B
B
A
A
A
直流母線
DC
bus
(bus
bar)
（ブスバー）
Precautions for connecting rectifiers
1) Ensure that all the diode rectifiers (RHD-D) have the same wiring length
(portion A) from the power supply to their input terminal.
2) Ensure that all the diode rectifiers (RHD-D) have the same wiring length
(portion B) from their output terminal to the DC bus bar.
3) The wiring length for portion C should be within 500 mm. Also, the wiring
length for portion C1 should be equal to that for portion C2.
C1
C2
C
Figure 6.2.9-3: Precautions for parallel
connection
6.2.9.2
(1)
12-phase rectification method
Output capacity reduction
Output capacity reduction (applicable to the 400V series at supply voltage of 400 V and to the 690V series at supply
voltage of 690 V)
Up to six diode rectifiers (RHD-D) can be connected by use of a 12-phase rectification transformer in combination with
parallel connection. Whether or not combined with parallel connection, 12-phase rectification requires reduction of the
output capacity. Use the reduction rates shown in Table 6.2.9-2, and calculate and consider the output capacity.
(The reduction rates shown apply to the 400V series at supply voltage of 400 V and to the 690V series at supply voltage
of 690 V.)
Table 6.2.9-2: Output capacity reduction rates for the 12-phase rectification method
(2)
Configuration
400V series
690V series
12-phase rectification
87%
77%
12-phase rectification combined with parallel connection
77%
70%
Precautions for connecting rectifiers
Ensure that the 12-phase rectification transformer meets the specifications in Table 6.2.9-3.
Table 6.2.9-3: 12-phase rectification transformer specifications
Characteristics
400V
Series
690V
Series
No-load voltage difference (voltage
transformation ratio) between Δ and Y
1.5 V or
lower
3.0 V or
lower
%X
4% or higher
Unbalance rate between Δ and Y (%X)
10% or lower
%R
1% or higher
Unbalance rate between Δ and Y (%R)
10% or lower
DC side
Reactor
Power
supply
Δ
Y
Δ
12-phase
rectification
transformer
(*)
Diode rectifier
Reactor
(*)
(*) If the supply voltage includes 5th and/or 7th order components, a reactor is required on the secondary side of the
12-phase rectification transformer.
This reactor must have an inductance equivalent to 10% or higher of the required power capacity of the diode
rectifiers.
In addition, the variation in inductance must not exceed 10%.
6-18
6.2.9.3
Capacity reduction compensation based on the supply voltage
When capacity reduction is required for parallel connection and/or 12-phase rectification, the reduction rate can be
mitigated based on the supply voltage. To calculate the compensation factor based on the supply voltage, use the
formula given below.
However, if (reduction rate) x (compensation factor) is higher than 100%, use 100% as the upper limit.
Compensation factor (%) 
Even when the supply voltage is lower than 400 V, use the formula above to reduce the capacity (in the case of the
400V series).
6.2.9.4
Example of calculating the nominal applied inverter/motor capacity
The nominal applied inverter/motor capacity can be calculated using the formula below.
Nominal applied inverter/m otor capacity [kW]
= (Stack capacity [kW]) x (number of units) x (parallel connection degression rate [12 - phase rectification reduction rate])
x(supply voltage compensation factor)
Example
1
Example
2
Example
3
(Note 1)
Conditions
Parallel
connection
reduction
rate
: 440 V
: RHD315-4D (MD) x
6 units
Connection method : 3 parallel sets x
12-phase rectification
77%
Supply voltage
Stacks used
Supply voltage
Stacks used
: 480 V
: RHD200-4D(MD) x
2 units
Connection method : 12-phase rectification
Supply voltage
Stacks used
: 380 V
: RHD315-4D (LD) x
3 units
Connection method : 3 parallel sets
12-phase
rectification
reduction
rate
Supply voltage
compensation
factor
Nominal applied
inverter/motor capacity
110%
(440 V/400 V)
1600 kW (MD)
(315×6×77%×110%)
-
87%
120%
(480 V/400 V)
400 kW (MD)
(200 x 2 x 100%) (Note 1)
92%
-
95%
(380 V/400 V)
930 kW (LD)
(355×3×92%×95%)
87% x 120%=104.4%. Hence, use 100%, the upper limit.
6-19
Chapter 6 Converter System
(*)
Supply voltage [V]
400 [V]
6.2.10 System configuration examples
System configuration diagram
(Symbols in diagram)
RFI: Diode rectifier
No.
I: Inverter, TBSI: Optical communication card
(optional)
RFI
1
RFI
2
Power
supply
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
3
RFI
4
*
RFI
Inverter configured
system
-
Multiple
Direct
parallel
3
(Max)
Multiwinding
driving
6
(Max)
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
• MD: up to 315
kW
• LD: up to 355
kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to 450
kW
1
SingleMultiwinding
winding
motor
motor
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
-
or
I
RFI
1
TBSI
I
RFI
-
I
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
Capacity
expansion
method
I
Power
電源
supply
Remarks*
• Applied
inverter/motor
Number of Capacity Number of
capacity
connected expansion connected
• Precautions
units
method
units
Diode rectifier
configured system
When used
without
connecting
(sharing) each
RFI output.
2
Parallel
connection
-
Multiple
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
• MD: up to 315
kW
• LD: up to 355
kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to 450
kW
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
When used by
connecting
(sharing) each
RFI output.
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
3
Parallel
connection
2
-
Multiple
• MD: up to 579
kW
• LD: up to 653
kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to 828
kW
The nominal applied inverter/motor capacity is calculated on the assumption that the capacity reduction
compensation based on the supply voltage is 100%. For information on how to accurately calculate the capacity
based on the use conditions, refer to "6.2.9.1 Parallel connection method" to "6.2.9.4 Example of calculating the
nominal applied inverter/motor capacity".
(Note 1)
To connect multiple diode rectifiers so that all of them have the same output, ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
(Note 2)
When using direct parallel connection and multi-winding driving systems, ensure that all the inverters have the
same capacity.
6-20
Power
電源
supply
5
Diode rectifier
configured system
Capacity
expansion
method
RFI
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
RFI
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
RFI
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
Remarks*
• Applied
inverter/motor
Number of
capacity
connected
•
Precautions
units
Inverter configured
system
Number of Capacity
connected expansion
units
method
When used by
connecting
(sharing) each
RFI output.
Parallel
connection
3
-
Multiple
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
• MD: up to
869 kW
• LD: up to
979 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to 1240
kW
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
6
2
I
RFI
Multiwinding
driving
Parallel
connection
TBSI
RFI
I
6
(Max)
3
RFI
RFI
7
I
TBSI
Single-winding
単巻線モータ
motor
I
TBSI
I
Multiwinding
多巻線モータ
motor
Parallel
connection
RFI
8
RFI
Single-winding
単巻線モータ
motor
I
TBSI
RFI
*
I
TBSI
I
or
または
Multiwinding
多巻線モータ
motor
Parallel
connection
TBSI
3
(Max)
Multiwinding
driving
6
(Max)
2
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
Direct
parallel
Direct
parallel
3
(Max)
Multiwinding
driving
6
(Max)
3
[Applied capacity]
When using
3 units of RFI
<400V series>
• MD: up to
945 kW
• LD: up to
1065 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to
1350 kW
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
• MD: up to
579 kW
• LD: up to
653 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to
828 kW
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
• MD: up to
869 kW
• LD: up to
979 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to
1240 kW
The nominal applied inverter/motor capacity is calculated on the assumption that the capacity reduction
compensation based on the supply voltage is 100%. For information on how to accurately calculate the capacity
based on the use conditions, refer to "6.2.9.1 Parallel connection method" to "6.2.9.4 Example of calculating the
nominal applied inverter/motor capacity".
(Note 1)
To connect multiple diode rectifiers so that all of them have the same output, ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
(Note 2)
When using direct parallel connection and multi-winding driving systems, ensure that all the inverters have the
same capacity.
6-21
Chapter 6 Converter System
No
System configuration diagram
(Symbols in diagram)
RFI: Diode rectifier
I: Inverter, TBSI: Optical communication card
(optional)
No
System configuration diagram
(Symbols in diagram)
RFI: Diode rectifier
I: Inverter, TBSI: Optical communication card
(optional)
ACR
I
RFI
TBSI
9
ACR
12-phase
12相整流
rectification
トランス
transformer
Single-winding motor
I
RFI
TBSI
ACR
I
RFI
or
または
ACR
12相整流
12-phase
トランス
rectification
transformer
TBSI
RFI
RFI
ACR
RFI
12
ACR
12相整流
12-phase
トランス
rectification
transformer
12-phase
rectification
I
Multiwinding
多巻線モータ
I
Single-winding
単巻線モータ
motor
12-phase
rectification
RFI
RFI
RFI
Multiwinding
driving
6
(Max)
Direct
parallel
3
(Max)
Multiwinding
driving
6
(Max)
2
Direct
parallel
3
(Max)
Multiwinding
driving
6
(Max)
4
motor
RFI
RFI
*
Single-winding
単巻線モータ
motor
TBSI
11
2
Single-winding
単巻線モータ
motor
I
RFI
ACR
または
or Multiwinding
motor
多巻線モータ
I
12-phase
rectification
Single-winding
単巻線モータ
motor
TBSI
RFI
Inverter
configured system
Multiwinding motor
多巻線モータ
単巻線モータ
I
ACR
10
Capacity
expansion
method
TBSI
RFI
Remarks*
• Applied
inverter/motor
Number of Capacity Number of
capacity
connected expansion connected
•
Precautions
units
method
units
Diode rectifier
configured system
I
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
TBSI
I
TBSI
I
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
• MD: up to
548 kW
• LD: up to
617 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to
783 kW
[Applied capacity]
When using
3 units of RFI
<400V series>
• MD: up to
970 kW
• LD: up to
1093 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to
1386 kW
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
I
TBSI
[Applied capacity]
<400V series>
• MD: up to
548 kW
• LD: up to
617 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to
783 kW
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
Multiwinding
多巻線
motor
モータ
12-phase
rectification
TBSI
TBSI
Direct
parallel
3
(Max)
Multiwinding
driving
6
(Max)
6
• MD: up to
1450 kW
• LD: up to
1640 kW
<690V series>
• MD: up to
2000 kW
I
The nominal applied inverter/motor capacity is calculated on the assumption that the capacity reduction
compensation based on the supply voltage is 100%. For information on how to accurately calculate the capacity
based on the use conditions, refer to "6.2.9.1 Parallel connection method" to "6.2.9.4 Example of calculating the
nominal applied inverter/motor capacity".
(Note 1)
To connect multiple diode rectifiers so that all of them have the same output , ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
(Note 2)
When using direct parallel connection and multi-winding driving systems, ensure that all the inverters have the
same capacity.
6-22
6.2.11 Generated loss
The Table 6.2.11-1 shows diode rectifier generated losses.
Table 6.2.11-1: Diode rectifier generated losses
Power-based
series
Generated loss [W]
Model
690V
LD spec mode
1650
1900
RHD315S-4D
2550
3250
RHD220S-69
1200
1450
2450
-
D
RHD450S-69D
Chapter 6 Converter System
400V
MD spec mode
RHD200S-4D
6.2.12 Peripherals
6.2.12.1
AC fuse for diode rectifier
This is an AC fuse used for protecting a diode rectifier.
Use the inverter's fuse disconnection detection terminals to implement the detection of
fuse disconnection. Purchase microswitches along with fuses.
* Fuse other than the types listed in "Application table" may not be used.
(1)
Application table
Fuse manufacturer: Eaton website: http://www.eaton.com/
*This product can be also purchased from Fuji Electric.
Table 6.2.12-1: Application table
Voltage Specifications
Nominal applied
motor capacity
[kW]
MD
400 V
LD
MD
690 V
LD
(2)
AC Fuse
Diode rectifier model
Model
Fig.
Generated loss
[W]
Approx. mass
[kg]
1.25
200
RHD200S-4D
170M6547
E
130
315
RHD315S-4D
170M6500
F
145
220
RHD200S-4D
170M6547
E
130
355
RHD315S-4D
170M6500
F
145
220
RHD220S-69D
170M6497
F
130
450
RHD450S-69D
170M6501
F
150
250
RHD220S-69D
170M6497
F
130
External dimensions
For information on fuse external dimensions and installation steps, refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
(3)
Microswitch
Model: 170H3027
* For details, refer to "5.2.1.1 Fuses" in Chapter 5.
6-23
1.25
1.25
1.25
(4)
Connection diagram
ACF1
ACF2
Power
電源
supply
ACF3
＜CNV1＞
L1/R
DC bus
直流母線
DCR
L2/S
L3/T
DCR
N(-)
Connect this relay contact (30CNV) to one of
terminals X1 to X9 on each inverter.
1
2
DC24V
(±10%)
Relay (30CNV)
リレ-(30CNV)
Coil spec
コイル仕様
DC24 V,
Under 50 mA
DC24V,
50mA以下
30
CNV
Use the relay sequence shown in Figure 6.2.12-1.
When using multiple inverters, abnormality signals for
the microswitches and diode rectifiers (CNV1)
associated with the AC fuses (ACF1 to ACF3) should
be input to the relay (30CNV).
P(+)
84X
Assign "Coast to a stop" (BX) or external alarm (THR)
to the inverter side.
If you choose to assign BX, make this a self-holding
circuit (to be cancelled by reset PBS, etc.) as
necessary.
Figure 6.2.12-1: Fuse wire connection diagram
6.2.12.2
AC reactor (ACR: alternate current reactor)
An AC reactor is used for the purpose of preventing load allocation of diode rectifiers from becoming unbalanced when
connected in parallel. It is also used when the supply voltage is unstable (extreme inter-phase voltage unbalance).
(1)
Applied example
When there are thyristor-driven loads or when phase-advancing capacitors are turned ON or OFF in the same power
supply system
Power supply
transformer
MCCB
or ELCB
Voltage depression
Voltage
MCCB
or ELCB
Voltage
MCCB
or ELCB
Time
AC
reactor
(ACR)
Inverter
Thyristor
converter
Time
Phase advancing
capacitor ON
Power factor
adjustment capacitor
(a) Connection example
(b) Example of voltage depression by thyristor
converter
(c) Example of voltage fluctuation when the phase
advancing capacitor is turned ON.
Figure 6.2.12-2: Description of receiving power supply
When the inter-phase unbalance rate of the inverter power supply exceeds 2%
Interphaseunbalance rate (%) 
Max. voltage (V) - Min. voltage (V)
 67
3 - phase average voltage (V)
6-24
When connecting diode rectifiers in parallel
＜CNV1＞
DCR
Power
supply transformer
電源トランス
PT
MCCB
ACR1
U
X
V
Y
W
Z
MC1
ACF11
to 13
ACF11～13
P(+)
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
DCR
N(-)
DCR
ACR2
U
X
V
Y
W
Z
MC2
ACF21
to 23
ACF21～23
P(+)
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
DCR
N(-)
＜INV1＞
DCF1 P(+) U
N(-)
V
W
M1
＜INVn＞
DCFn P(+) U
N(-)
V
W
Mn
Figure 6.2.12-3: Configuration with two converters
Note 1)
The diode rectifier and AC reactor used should be of the identical type.
Note 2)
The contactor and AC reactor may be arranged in the opposite order of arrangement shown in this diagram.
Note 3)
The wiring from MCCB to diode rectifiers (CNV1, CNV2) should be made the same length whenever possible.
(2)
AC reactor specifications
配線用遮断器
Molded case
circuit
breaker
(MCCB)
AC reactor
(MCCB)
or Earth 交流リアクトル
または
(ACR)
leakage
circuit
漏電遮断器
breaker
(ELCB)
(ELCB)
X
U
V
Y
W
Z
Magnetic
電磁接触器
contactor
(MC)(MC)
T1
L1
T2
L2
T3
L3
Figure 6.2.12-4: AC reactor (ACL) and connection example
6-25
ダイオード
Diode
rectifier
整流器
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
Chapter 6 Converter System
＜CNV2＞
Table 6.2.12-2: List of AC reactor specifications
Power
supply
system
Reactor
model
Reactance
Rated [mΩ/phase] Winding Generated Approx.
current
resistance
loss
mass
50
60
[A]
[mΩ]
[W]
[kg]
Figure
Hz
Hz
400 V ACR4-110
250
16.7
20
0.523
60.3
24
ACR4-132
270
20.8
25
0.741
119
ACR4-220
561
10
12
0.236
ACR4-280
825
6.67
8
ACR4-355
825
6.67
ACR4-450
950
ACR4-530
ACR4-630
Note
A
Dimensions
W
W1
D
D1
D2
G
H
J
250 100 136 105 202
245
M8
(9.5×18)
M12
32
250 100 146
115
207
M8
(10×16)
250
M12
107
40
320 120 150
110
240
M10
(12×20)
300
M12
0.144
108
52
380 130 150
110
260
M10
(12×20)
300
M12
8
0.144
245
52
380 130 150
110
260
M10
(12×20)
300
M12
6.67
8
0.136
473
95
B
460 155 290 230 200
M12
(φ15)
490 4×M12
1100
5.75
6.9
0.0824
340
100
C
480 155 420 370
M12
(15×25)
380 4×M12
1300
4.87
5.84
0.0713
422
110
M12
(15×25)
390 4×M12
510 170 420 370
-
1) Generated losses listed in the above table are calculated under the conditions shown below.
• The power supply is 3-phase 400 VAC, 50 Hz and the inter-phase voltage unbalance ratio is 0%.
• The power supply capacity is "500 kVA" or "a capacity 10 times larger than the rated capacity of the
inverter", whichever is larger.
• For the load motor, a 4-pole standard motor is used at full load (100%).
Note
2) For information on AC reactors other than listed above, refer to "8.5.4 AC reactor (ACR)" in Chapter 8 of the
separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
<Common>
Withstand voltage: 2500 VAC for 1 min. (Insulation class: Class H)
Insulation resistance: 100 MΩ (1000 V-Megger)
Ambient temperature: -20 to 50°C
Humidity: 90% Rh or less
Indoor altitude 1000 m or less
<External dimensions>
Figure A
Figure B
Figure C
Figure 6.2.12-5: External dimensions of AC reactor (ACL)
6-26
6.2.12.3
Use of molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)
A molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) protects the main circuit terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) of a converter (inverter) and
is mainly used to protect the wiring from overload and short-circuiting to prevent a secondary accident after breakage of
an inverter.
The degree of inverter protection generally depends on the overcurrent and overload protection functions built in the
inverter.
Equipment selection list for each converter model
• Diode rectifiers:
Refer to "6.2.12.6 List of equipment (MCCB and MC)".
• PWM converters: Refer to "6.3.12.3 Input power supply circuit (MCCB, ELCB)".
• The modeled case circuit breakers (MCCBs) used for converters (including diode rectifiers and PWM
converters) should be those for general wiring.
• Motor protection breakers may not be used for converters and inverters because they are rated to meet
conditions for full-voltage starting.
(1)
Overcurrent tripping method
The overcurrent tripping devices should be a thermal-electromagnetic type, full electromagnetic type, or electronic type
with higher harmonics prevention measures taken (RMS value detection method).
Table 6.2.12-3: Comparison of current tripping operations
Comparison
item
Electronic type
A bimetal is used.
A bimetal has the
property that changes
the shape by the
temperature.
Current
Therefore, the effect
of the temperature is
not large, but the
Operation
temperature may
current
affect the internal
components, causing the rated current to
change.
* When the overcurrent relay is equipped
with an ambient temperature compensation
device, the rated current rarely changes.
The rated current does not change.
However, as the viscosity of the silicon oil in
the dash pod changes, the operation time
changes.
A current detection
circuit detects the
conduction current.
The temperature drift
of the electronic device
exists, but it does not
affect greatly.
The impact is small.
(Almost non-change.)
Since the weight
of the plunger in
the dash pod
affects the
operation, the
operation current
value changes
depending on the
mounting posture.
Operation time
Full electromagnetic type
(2)
Current
Ambient
temperature
The impact is small.
(Almost non-change.)
Operation
time
Effect of
mounting
posture
Operation
time
Ambient
temperature
Effect of
ambient
temperature
Thermal-electromagnetic type
Current
Current value does not
change when mounted
on the vertical surface
Rated voltage
The rated voltages stated in the catalog or technical reference of the MCCB are the applicable maximum voltages.
6-27
Chapter 6 Converter System

(3)
Rated current
1) An appropriate MCCB should be selected that does not operate (trip) by either the input current or overload current
during motor operation and protects the wires reliably. The MCCB operation characteristic curve shown in Figure
6.2.12-6 becomes the boundary line. The right portion shows that the MCCB operates while the left portion shows that
it does not operate. Therefore, select an appropriate MCCB so that the right position shows the allowable current of
the wire along the MCCB operation characteristic curve while the left portion shows the current during
converter/inverter operation.
MCCB may operate.
MCCB operation
characteristic
Allowable current
characteristic of
electric wire
Input
current at
inverter
rating
Allowable current
characteristic of
electric wire
Operation time (min)
Operation time (min)
MCCB operation
characteristic
Inverter
overload
current
MCCB operates.
Inverter
overload
current
Input
current at
inverter
rating
Wiring may not be protected
in this area.
MCCB operates.
Inverter
charging
current
MCCB conduction current/input current at inverter rating (%)
(a): Correct selection example
MCCB conduction current/input current at inverter rating (%)
(b): Incorrect selection example
Figure 6.2.12-6: How to select the rated current of molded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
2) The rated current stated in the catalog or technical reference of the MCCB shows the value at an operating
temperature of 40°C. When storing the MCCB in a cabinet, the temperature coefficient (which should be reduced to
0.85 to 0.95 during operation depending on the MCCB) should be taken into consideration according to the set
temperature inside the cabinet.
Rated current when using INV  Rated current of MCCB 
(4)
1
Temperature correctioncoefficient (0.85 to 0.95)
Rated breaking current
Select an appropriate MCCB with the ability to break the short-circuit current. This is called full capacity breaking
method.
In addition to this method, a cascade breaking method is also available that breaks the short-circuit current in
cooperation with the breaker of the power supply if the breaking capacity of the MCCB for the inverter is insufficient.
(However, there are restrictions on the combinations of breakers and protectors.)
When the short-circuit current value is unknown, calculate it
while referring to the references shown below:
Power
supply transformer
電源トランス
• Fuji auto breaker technical reference (EH150)
• Technical description catalog
calculation method (CY002)."
"Short-circuit
When the short-circuit accident point is the
current
The value of the MCCB output terminal should be used as
the short-circuit current value that becomes the reference.
MCCB-1
MCCB-2
配線
Wiring
インピ－
impedance
ダンス
CNV
MCCB-3
terminal on the MCCB load side, the wiring
短絡事故点がMCCB負荷側端子であれば，
impedance does not affect and the short配線インピーダンスが影響しないので
circuit current becomes large.
短絡電流は大きい。
(The wiring impedance from the secondary
（電源トランス2次～MCCB-3
side of the power supply transformer to the
の配線インピ－ダンスが影響する）
MCCB-3
may affect.)
When the short-circuit accident point is close
短絡事故点がCNVの入力付近の場合，
to the CNV input, the wiring impedance
配線インピーダンスが影響して，
affects and the short-circuit current becomes
短絡電流は少ない。
small.
Bus
bar
Busバー
If the short-circuit current is calculated with the value of the
DCF1 DCF2 DCF3
converter input terminal, the calculated value becomes small
when the wiring is long since the impedance of the wire is
taken into consideration. As a result, the breaking capacity
becomes insufficient if a short-circuit accident occurs in the
INV1
INV2
INV3
main circuit terminal of the MCCB.
(Refer to Figure 6.2.12-7.)
Figure 6.2.12-7: Accident point and short-circuit current
6-28
(5)
Selective tripping coordination
This selective tripping coordination means a relationship where only the breaker on the power supply side closest to the
accident point operates and upstream breakers do not operate. This relationship needs to be established in both the
overload and short-circuit areas. The selective tripping coordination is used when the reliable power supply is required
for the power supply system with an important load.
Operation characteristics of
MCCB for inverter (MCCB-3)
Operation characteristics of
MCCB for power supply
transformer (MCCB-1)
Operation time
Operation characteristics of
MCCB for power supply
transformer (MCCB-1)
Inverter
input
current
Operation time
Operation characteristics of
MCCB for inverter (MCCB-3)
Inverter
input
current
Current
Current
(a): Example of a good combination
(b): Example of a bad combination
Figure 6.2.12-8: Selective tripping coordination
Table 6.2.12-4: List of Fuji Electric’s MCCB (G-TWIN series) models: extracted from G-TWIN catalog (EH130)
Series/Applications Standard
For general wiring
Specifications
Frame Basic
(A)
name
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
(Note 3)
(Note 4)
(Note 5)
Rated braking
capacity
For motor For primary Momentary breaking type Non-auto With earth With ZCT With
Class 2
single-phase heat
side of
leakage
Momentary Momentary protection
Momentary Momentary switch
3-wire
transformer
alarm
fixed type adjustable
fixed type adjustable (1)
neutral line resistant
type
type
open-phase type
(3)
protection
Global
Distribution Momentary
panel
fixing type
module
for general
wiring
(4)
(5)
(2)
The rated breaking capacity is not described since the model is a switch.
The product is dedicated to the single-phase 3-wire circuit. Icu at 100 VAC/ 200 VAC becomes as follows. BW50EAN: 5 kA, BW100EAN: 25 kA, BW250EAN: 35 kA,
BW400EAN: 50 kA.
The specifications of class 2 heat resistant type is different from the value listed above table. For details, refer to the list of Fuji heat resistant type equipment catalog (No.
AH060).
The product is not applicable to the 400 V-circuit.
For details about UL ratings, refer to the list of specifications (page 20).
6-29
Chapter 6 Converter System
For example, if a short-circuit accident occurs at point X in Figure 6.2.12-7, the short-circuit current flows to the MCCB-1
and MCCB-3.
If the MCCB-1 is tripped by this short-circuit current, a power failure also occurs in the load of the MCCB-2. Therefore, to
satisfy the selective tripping coordination, it is necessary to combine the MCCBs so that the tripping operation of the
MCCB-3 is completed before the MCCB-1 operates in all ranges of the overcurrent protective area. (Refer to Figure
6.2.12-8.)
6.2.12.4
Use of earth leakage circuit breakers (ELCBs)
To protect work personnel from an electric shock, prevent fire caused by earth leakage, or maintain the electric facilities,
an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) should be used instead of an MCCB to prevent such accidents. When using an
ELCB with a converter or an inverter, the ELCB may function by the leakage current caused by high frequency switching
operations.

• The overcurrent protective function of an ELCB is the same as an MCCB.
Refer to "6.2.12.3 Use of molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)".
• For information on the equipment used for each diode rectifier model, refer to "6.2.12.6 List of equipment
(MCCB and MC)".
(1)
Rated current sensitivity
As a rule, to aim at prevention of electric shock accidents, a product with high sensitivity and high-speed operation
should be used. To aim at prevention of fire caused by earth leakage or damage to the unit, a product with medium
sensitivity can be used. Additionally, the sensing time may need to be changed according to the wiring distance or motor
capacity.
When the current sensitivity to be used is defined in a legally controlled place (an ELCB with high sensitivity and
high-speed operation is used), investigate whether or not unnecessary operation is performed by continuous leakage
current. In other cases, determine an appropriate ELCB in the manner shown below.
Table 6.2.12-5: Examples of current sensitivity selection standards
Medium
sensitivity type
High sensitivity
type
Current
sensitivity
(2)
15 mA
30 mA
100 mA
200 mA
500 mA
1000 mA
3000 mA
Operating conditions
Place where the risk of an electric shock accident is very high (moistened place, etc.)
Place where a human body needs to be protected even when touching any electrically live line.
Movable or transportable grounding wire may be cut. However, when the ELCB has a large
capacity, it may malfunction.
Unit installation work is difficult. (15 mA: Refer to Article 28 of the Electrical Equipment Technical
Standards.)
Protection from an electric shock accident caused by earth leakage in a circuit where units are
installed securely.
(For details about unit grounding resistance, refer to Table 6.2.12-8.)
Protection from fire caused by earth leakage
When the high sensitivity type ELCB is used, it malfunctions.
Operation time and grounding resistance
According to Article 19 of the Electrical Equipment Technical Standards, the grounding resistance is relaxed as shown in
"Table 6.2.12-6" when an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) is connected. Additionally, when the grounding resistance
of the grounding work for prevention of electric shock accident conforms to Table 6.2.12-8 and the operation time is 0.1
sec. or less (high-speed type), an ELCB with medium sensitivity can be used according to the relationship with allowable
human body contact voltage (Table 6.2.12-7).
Equipment frame grounding
Table 6.2.12-6: Grounding and the grounding resistance of electrical equipment according to Electrical Equipment
Technical Standards
Equipment for 100 V or
200 V
Equipment for 400 V
Class D
grounding work
Class C
grounding work
ELCB is installed in the electric
circuit.
(Operation time is 0.5 sec. or less.)
Grounding resistance is
500  or less.
ELCB is not installed in the electric
circuit.
Grounding resistance is
100  or less.
ELCB is installed in the electric
circuit.
(Operation time is 0.5 sec. or less.)
Grounding resistance is
500  or less.
ELCB is not installed in the electric
circuit.
Grounding resistance is
10  or less.
6-30
(From low-voltage protective circuit guideline)
Class
Contact status
Allowable contact voltage
Class 1
Most part of human body is in the water.
2.5 V or lower
Class 2
Human body is moistened significantly.
Metallic electric machine unit is always in contact with
a part of human body from the structural aspect.
25 V or lower
In cases other than classes 1 and 2, the risk is high
when the contact voltage is applied in the normal
human body status.
50 V or lower
Class 3
Class 4
(3)
In cases other than classes 1 and 2, the risk is low
No limit.
even when the contact voltage is applied in the normal
human body status.
There is no risk to apply any contact voltage.
Table 6.2.12-8: Protective grounding
resistance values
ELCB
Grounding resistance [Ω]
current
sensitivity
[mA]
Moistened or other place
with a high risk of an
electric shock.
Other
places
30
500
500
50
500
500
75
333
500
100
250
500
150
166
333
200
125
250
300
83
166
500
50
100
1,000
25
50
Continuous leakage current
When an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) is connected to the inverter input side, the inverter output side also
becomes the protective area as illustrated in Figure 6.2.12-9.
Therefore, the high-frequency charging/discharging current that flows through the wiring on the inverter output side or
static capacitance to the earth of the motor becomes the continuous leakage current. This may cause the ELCB to
operate.
Figure 6.2.12-9: Leakage current transmission route
The level of the leakage current that flows the ELCB may vary depending on the power supply transformer (and also
depending on the transformer grounding). The following summarizes the leakage current calculation methods.
6-31
Chapter 6 Converter System
Table 6.2.12-7: Allowable contact voltage
Table 6.2.12-9: Grounding method and continuous leakage current
Kind of system
Leakage current to the static capacitance to the earth (overview)
When the static capacitance to the earth of each phase of the electric
circuit is balanced, the following Equation is established in the steady
status
Neutral point grounding



I
C  I CR  I CS  I CT  0
and no leakage current flows.
Actually, the distribution line of each phase does not have the same
conditions or the contacts become uneven when the switch is turned
ON or OFF. This may cause the leakage current to flow through the
static capacitance to the earth of a specific phase.
Therefore, the zero phase current of the leakage current that flows
through the static capacitance to the earth for at least one phase
needs to be taken into consideration.
IΔn ≧10  2f  (C1  C 2 )  VC ･･････････････Equation 6.2.12-1
S-phase grounding
The leakage current flows through the static
capacitance to the earth of a phase other than
IC
the grounding phase.


I
C  I CR  I CT
R
ICT
ICR
The vector of each leakage current is
illustrated in the figure on the right.
S
T
IΔn ≧10  3  2f  (C1  C2 ) VC ･･････････Equation 6.2.12-2
Table 6.2.12-10
Leakage current (3-φ 200 VAC, 60 Hz) per km when
the CV wires are used in wiring through the metal
conduit pipes (tightly in contact with the grounding).
Noise filter
Vc: Grounding voltage of main circuit
f: Power supply frequency [Hz]
Ct: Static capacitance to the earth between ELB and INV
(For one phase of cable)
Cf: Static capacitance of noise filter (For one phase)
C2: Static capacitance to the earth between INV and motor
(For one phase of cable)
Figure 6.2.12-10: Leakage current model diagram
Wire size
[mm2]
Static capacitance
[uF]
Leakage current
[mA]
5.5
8
14
22
38
60
100
150
200
250
315
0.250
0.276
0.341
0.353
0.450
0.457
0.444
0.531
0.496
0.547
0.616
33
36
45
46
59
60
57
68
65
71
80
As the rated current sensitivity is summarized as described above, it can be investigated and calculated from the
contents. Actually, it is very difficult to calculate the leakage current according to the inverter or motor grounding method,
or cables to be used, etc.
Therefore, Fuji Electric summarizes the relationship between the rated current sensitivity and wiring distance on the
output side in Table 6.2.12-11 from the data based on the actual machine test with an inverter and a motor combined.
6-32
(4)
ELCB installation place
Install the ELCB on the converter input side (primary side: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T). Since the voltage and frequency on the
converter output side or inverter output side (secondary side) do not meet the ELCB specifications, the ELCB does not
operate correctly. (Do not use.) Normal operation may not be attained by installing an ELCB on the input side of each
converter when more than one converter is connected in parallel to the same supply system. (Refer to Figure 6.2.12-11.)
MCCB1
MCCB2
(a) Bad installation example
CNV1
INV1
M1
INV2
M2
INV3
M3
INV4
M4
CNV2
(b) Good installation example
Figure 6.2.12-11: ELCB installation place
(5)
Settings on the inverter side
An appropriate ELCB is selected under conditions that the inverter carrier frequency is 1 kHz or more and that the
operation frequency is 60 Hz or less. When the carrier frequency is set to a level less than 1 kHz, it is greatly redundant
by the fundamental current. So, the safety factor that is twice larger than the normal level should be used.
(6)
Applicable category of rated current sensitivity of ELCB
Table 6.2.12-11: Applicable category of rated current sensitivity of ELCB
Power-based Standard application
series
motor (kW)
3.7
5.5
7.5
11
15
10 m
Wiring distance/current sensitivity
30 m
50 m
100 m
200 m
300 m
30 mA
100 mA
18.5
22
200 mA
30
37
45
500 mA
400V
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
1000 mA
250
280
315
355
400
3000 mA
(Special)
450
500
630
710
6-33
Chapter 6 Converter System
ELCB1
(1)
The list above is obtained when Fuji Electric’s earth leakage circuit breaker or earth leakage relay applies
to the test setup.
(2)
The rated current of the standard application motor is the numeric values for Fuji Electric’s standard
motor (4-pole, 400 VAC, 50 Hz).
(3)
The power supply grounding is calculated when the neutral point grounding is performed with 400 V class
Y-connection.
(4)
The values listed above are calculated based on the static capacitance to the earth when 3-core 600 V
cross linked-polyethylene-insulated wire (CV wire) is used in a wiring through metal conduit pipes (tightly
in contact with the grounding). When the wire has a static capacitance to the earth smaller than that of the
CV wire, the wiring distance can be made longer in reverse proportion to the decrease ratio of the static
capacitance to the earth.
(5)
The values listed above are calculated with the metal conduit pipe wiring (tightly in contact with the
grounding). When the static capacitance to the earth is small by separating the wire from the grounding,
the wiring distance can be made longer.
(6)
The wiring distance is the total distance from the inverter to the motor. Therefore, when multiple motors
are connected to one inverter, the wiring length becomes the total wiring length.
M  1＋2＋3＋4
M : Total wiring length
Transformer
Inverter
Motor
Wiring line length
(7)
Motor
Enhanced model for inverter
Fuji Electric’s G-TWIN series earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) standard models are designed to be applied to
inverter circuits. However, when the static capacitance to the earth is large due to the wiring length or noise filter, the
leakage current becomes large and the ELCBs do not function correctly.
To suppress this unnecessary operation, an enhanced model for inverters is available that provides an earth leakage
detection circuit improved in terms of frequency characteristics.
(In particular, a grounding capacitor with a large static capacitance is used for the noise filter.)
The enhanced model for inverters can detect a ground
fault on the secondary side of the inverter at an
operation frequency of 120 Hz or less.
However, Fuji Electric’s inverters are equipped with
the ground fault detection and output phase loss
protective functions.
Additionally, when using the Y-connection neutral point
grounding method, the current sensitivity becomes dull
in response to a ground fault on the secondary side of
the inverter. For this reason, the protective grounding of
the load (class C and D grounding) should be 10 Ω or
less.
Magnification to operation current at 50 Hz
When placing an order, specify "-01065" at the end of the model.
Enhanced model for inverter
[Model suffix [-01065]]
Standard
model
Leakage frequency (Hz) lg
Figure 6.2.12-12: Frequency characteristics of the enhanced
model for inverters
6-34
Table 6.2.12-12: List of Fuji Electric’s ELCB (G-TWIN series) models - extracted from G-TWIN Catalog (EH130)
Series/Applications Standard
For general wiring
Specifications
Rated braking capacity
Momentary fixed type
With single-phase 3-wire neutral For resistance welding
line open-phase protection
machine
(1)
Momentary fixing type for
general wiring
(2)
Chapter 6 Converter System
Frame Basic
(A)
name
Global
For motor protection
(Note 1) The product is dedicated to the single-phase 3-wire circuit. Icu at 100 VAC/ 200 VAC becomes as follows. EW50EAN: 50 kA, BW100EAN: 25 kA,
BW250EAN:35 kA, EW400EAN:50 kA
(Note 2) For details about UL ratings, refer to the list of specifications (page 34).
Table 6.2.12-13: List of Fuji Electric’s ELCB (G-TWIN series) current sensitivities
Specifications
Rated current sensitivity [mA]
High-speed type
15
30
50 (EW50RAG-3P and EW100EAGU-3P only)
100
100/200 or 100/200/500 setting can be switched.
100/200/500 setting can be switched. (EW100EA D only)
100/200/500/1000 setting can be switched.
Time delay type
High-speed/time
delay type
(8)
Some models provide the ability to switch
different current sensitivity and operating
time settings although available only in
particular frame sizes.
 Refer to the G-TWIN Catalog
(EH130).
Ground fault protection coordination
As the period of time from detection of a ground fault to the operation of the ELCB is shorter, the earth leakage protection
characteristics become more excellent. However, it is necessary to consider the ground fault protection coordination in
the same manner as the selective tripping coordination for the overcurrent protection.
The ground fault protection coordination performs the selective tripping coordination between the upstream (power
supply side) and downstream (load side) ground fault protection devices. If a ground fault accident occurs on the
downstream side, only this ground fault device is tripped and the upstream ELCBs do not operate.
For example, even though ELCB-1 and ELCB-2 with different rated current sensitivity and the same operation time are
used as illustrated in" Figure 6.2.12-13", both ELCBs may operate if a ground fault accident exceeding 500 mA occurs.
(Shaded portion
in the figure.)
When a model with a slow operation time (time delay type) is applied to the upstream ELCB-1, the coordination can be
established. Therefore, the ground fault protection coordination needs a combination of ELCBs with not only different
rated current sensitivity, but also different operation time.
6-35
200 mA 500 mA
100 mA 250 mA
ELCB-2
Secondary side of
transformer
ELCB-1
Inverter
Operation
time
Secondary side of
transformer
Secondary side
of transformer
ELCB-1
ELCB-2
Inverter
Operation
time
Power supply
transformer
200 mA 500 mA
100 mA 250 mA
Inverter
Inverter
Ground fault
(a) Example of ground fault
Ground fault current
Ground fault current
(b) Example of protection
coordination not established
(c) Example of protection
coordination established
Figure 6.2.12-13: Ground fault protection coordination of earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
(9)
Model applicable to different voltage
Fuji Electric's standard earth leakage circuit breaker can be used for a circuit with a voltage of up to 440 V. If the circuit
voltage exceeds this level, use a special voltage earth leakage circuit breaker. When placing an order, specify "-C5" at
the end of the model.
Table 6.2.12-14: Fuji Electric’s ELCB (G-TWIN series) models applicable to different voltage - extracted from G-TWIN
Catalog (EH130)
Model
Number of poles
Rated operation AC voltage (V)
Operable AC voltage range (V)
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (V)
Rated current Io (A)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated current sensitivity (mA)
Rated
braking
capacity
(kA)
Model
Number of poles
Rated operation voltage
Operable AC voltage range
Rated impulse withstand voltage Uimp (kV)
Rated current Io (A)
Rated frequency (Hz)
Rated current sensitivity (mA)
Rated
braking
capacity
(kA)
6-36
6.2.12.5
Use of electromagnetic contactor for power supply circuit
An electromagnetic contactor (MC) to be installed on the input side of the converter is used for the purposes shown
below.
• The inverter is separated from the power supply by operation of the converter or inverter protective function or
external signal.
• The stop command cannot be input due to circuit trouble and the emergency stop needs to be activated.
Do not turn ON or OFF the electromagnetic contactor on the input side (primary side) frequently. Doing so may
cause an inverter failure (faulty wiring may occur in the charging circuit). When it is necessary to frequently turn
ON or OFF the electromagnetic contactor, do not exceed the frequency of once per 30 minutes. To maintain an
inverter service life of 10 years or longer, turn ON or OFF the electromagnetic contactor once per hour.
If it is required to start or stop the operation frequently, perform this operation using the "FWD" or "REV" signal
of the control circuit terminals or the
,
, or
key on the keypad.
6.2.12.6
List of equipment (MCCB and MC)
Table 6.2.12-15: List for selection of Molded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs), Earth Leakage Circuit Breakers (ELCBs),
and Electromagnetic Contactors (MCs)
Voltage
Nominal applied
motor capacity [kW]
400 V
690 V
Diode rectifier model
200
RHD200S-4D
315
RHD315S-4D
220
RHD200S-4D
355
RHD315S-4D
220
RHD220S-69D
450
RHD450S-69D
250
RHD220S-69D
Specifications
MCCB，ELCB
MC
MD
500AT
SC-N12
700AT
SC-N14
500AT
SC-N12
800AT
SC-N14
LD
MD
LD
300AT
SC-N11
600AT
SC-N14
350AT
SC-N11
(1)
Install the MCCB or ELCB on the input side of the converter.
(2)
This table selects an appropriate MCCB or ELCB under conditions that the temperature inside the cabinet
is 50°C or less. Select installation environment conditions by considering the correction coefficient (0.85
to 0.93) according to the ambient temperature conditions. To select a specific model, consider the
short-circuit breaking capacity of the equipment.
(3)
When selecting an electromagnetic contactor (MC), it is assumed that the wire type to be connected is
HIV wire (allowable temperature is 75°C). When using other wires, select an electromagnetic contactor
(MC) again by considering the terminal block size and wire size.
(4)
To prevent any consequential accident if the converter is broken, use an appropriate MCCB or ELCB with
the rated current shown in the table above.
Do not use any MCCB or ELCB with a rated current larger than the required level.
6-37
Chapter 6 Converter System
• The inverter needs to be separated from the power supply if molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) connected to the
power supply side cannot be turned OFF when starting the maintenance and inspection work of the inverter. (In this
case, it is recommended to add an interlock mechanism, such as manual switch to the operation circuit of the MC.)
6.2.12.7
Use of earth leakage detector (earth leakage relay)
This section describes an earth leakage relay that eliminates the breaking performance of the earth leakage circuit
breaker and contains an earth leakage detection function.
The following shows recommended earth leakage relays (Fuji Electric).
ZCT
RRD
type
This earth leakage relay has the same frequency characteristics of the
leakage current as the standard type of Fuji Electric's ELCB.
There are two types of ZCTs available: the through type and the bus bar
integrated type. An earth leakage of up to approx. 3000 A can be detected.
Additionally, the high-speed type and the time delay type are also provided.
Rated current sensitivity
: Switching is possible. (100/200 mA, 200/500
mA, 500/1000 mA)
Rated non-operation current : Rated current sensitivity x 50% or switching is
possible.
EL type
This earth leakage relay has the same frequency characteristics of the
leakage current as Fuji Electric's enhanced ELCB model for inverters
("-01065" is attached to the end of the model).
 Figure 6.2.12-12 Refer to "Frequency characteristics of the enhanced
model for inverters".
The ZCT is only available in the through type and applicable to approximately
1200 A (three wires, HIV or FLSC wires, are passed through). The high-speed
type and the time delay type are provided.
Rated current sensitivity
: 30 mA, Switching is possible. (100/200 mA,
200/500 mA, 500/1000 mA)
Rated non-operating current : Rated current sensitivity x 50%
Main
body
Figure 6.2.12-14: Basic circuit configuration diagram
(1)
For details about specifications, refer to Fuji Electric’s earth leakage relay catalog.
(2)
Place the main unit 10 cm or more far from the power system (particularly, large current system)
equipment or wires.
If the main unit is put close to such equipment, the external magnetic field may adversely affect it.
(3)
When necessary, pass or connect the neutral wires in the circuit. However, do not pass or connect the
class C or D grounding wire.
(4)
The signal cable between the relay and ZCT [Z1 and Z2 terminals] should be a twist pair cable with a
cross-sectional area of 0.3 to 2 mm2 and its length is 10 m or less.
(5)
Make the wiring of the signal cable 10 cm or more far from other power cables [control power supply and
test circuit (T1 and T2 terminals), etc.].
6-38
6.2.12.8
Power supply transformer (power receiving transformer)
When specifying a power supply transformer capacity on the input side, required power supply capacity of the converter
(diode rectifier or PWM converter) and voltage drop when the power is turned ON should be taken into consideration.
(1)
Transformer capacity
DCF1
Power supply
＜CNV1＞
Power
transformer
PT
P(+)
P1
MCCB
V1
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
i1
PT
P1
P2
PM2
V1
I1
iC2
Charging
current
(inrush
current)
N(-)
＜INV1＞
P(+)
P2
C2
U
V
W
Pm2
M1
N(-)
: Power transfo rme r capa city [kVA]
: Converter power cap aci ty r equiremen t [kVA]
: Inve rte r ou tpu t ca pacity [kVA]
P1 ≧
: Motor capa city [kW]
: Input voltage [V]
3  V1  I1
[ kVA] ･･･
1000
PT ≧ P1  Safetyratio [kVA]
: Input curre nt [A]
Equation
6.2.12-3
･･･Equation
6.2.12-4
Figure 6.2.12-15: Circuit configuration
(2)
Voltage drop
When the wiring distance to the load is short like transformer to be installed inside the cabinet, the voltage drop can be
calculated simply from the percent impedance of the transformer.
When the power is turned ON, the charging (rush) current flows into the smoothing capacitor of the converter and the
voltage largely drops in the transient status.
However, for this voltage drop, an initial charging circuit is normally provided in the converter to suppress the rush
current. Additionally, this rush current is set to a level that is the rated current of the inverter or less.
When large capacity equipment is installed in the converter, inverter, or other AC power supply system, the voltage drop
must be taken into consideration when selecting a transformer.
ΔV＝%Z t 
• ΔV
n  P1
[%] ･･･ Equation 6.2.12-5
PT
• %ZT
: Voltage drop in transient status [V]
: Percent impedance of transformer [%]
• n
: Current magnification in transient status
• P1
: Required power supply capacity of inverter [kVA]
• PT
: Capacity of transformer to be used [kVA]
The current magnification (n) in the transient status is set to a value 4 times larger than the inverter input current I1.
Actually, the current magnification may become 20 times larger than the inverter input current I1. However, since this
symptom occurs within a short time (several ms), there are normally no problems.
This transient voltage drop that occurs when the power is turned ON does not adversely affect the inverter itself, but it
affects the unit connected to the same power supply transformer as the inverter. To avoid the effects on such units, the
following relationship must be satisfied.
Allowable lower limit voltage of unit [V] < Vn ･･･Equation 6.2.12-6 • Vn: Transformer output voltage in transient
status [V]
１－ΔV
Vn＜Vo 
[V ] ･･･
Equation 6.2.12-7 • Vo: Transformer voltage in no-load status [V]
100
If this %ZT is pointed out as a problem, this is solved when the %ZT is made larger than the calculated transformer
capacity value. Additionally, a transformer with %Z T specified is prepared to solve the problem, but this transformer may
become a special product.
6-39
Chapter 6 Converter System
The following shows a simple calculation method to calculate the transformer capacity from the required power supply
capacity of the converter. However, when determining the transformer capacity, the calculated value should be multiplied
by the safety ratio. Additionally, when the power supply to the control circuit is supplied from this transformer, the power
supply capacity of the control circuit should be also added.
The %ZT of the general transformer has the trend shown below.
• %ZT is small in the oil transformer.
• %ZT is large in the molded transformer.
When the transformer is commonly used by other power load, select an appropriate transformer by considering the
operating conditions, such as system impedance and load.
If the power supply voltage decreases to a level lower than the allowable lower limit voltage of the inverter, the inverter
does not operate correctly and the protective function may operate. In particular, when starting a large capacity motor, a
large voltage drop occurs by the start current.
Power supply
transformer
XT
Voltage drop
VT20-VT2n
γr
Voltage
Power ON
(MCCB on secondary side of
transformer is turned ON.)
INV operation
(Load operation)
Impedance of
power supply
transformer
ZT
Inverter and motor
Voltage during
operation
INV
Initial
charging
IM
I1
MC
M
Normal operation
voltage
(Lower limit
level)
0
Time
This may adversely affect the
inverter or peripheral equipment.
Motor
INV
Line starting
motor start
Peripheral equipment,
such as electromagnetic
contactor
Figure 6.2.12-16: Secondary fluctuation of transformer
(3)
Other items
1) In the V-connection transformer, since the inter-phase balance of the power supply impedance is not balanced when
viewed from the converter, the unbalance of the input current of each phase becomes large. So, use a 3-phase
transformer for the power supply transformer.
2) When a three-winding transformer with a phase difference between the secondary (delta connection) and tertiary (star
connection) windings is used to drive multiple inverters, the harmonic current on the primary side is reduced. Note
that the harmonic current of the secondary and tertiary windings is not reduced. To reduce the second and tertiary
harmonic currents, connect the DC reactor (DCR).
(This reduces the harmonic current close to the fundamental wave current components.)
3) To ensure the safety and prevent noise propagation, use a two-winding type or three-winding type transformer with
the grounding terminal. When noise resistance or surge resistance is required, use a static shield type transformer.
6-40
<Reference: Fuji Electric’s molded transformer: Extracted from catalog TC76-7V.>
Type
Products applicable to top runner
Products not applicable to top runner
Top runner MOLTRA Super-high efficient
MORLTRA
High Efficient)
Compact MOLTRA
Primary voltage
High voltage
(6/3 kV class)
High voltage
(6/3 kV class)
Low voltage
(400/200 V class)
Number of phases
Single-phase
Single-phase
Single-phase
3-phase
3-phase
Single-phase
3-phase
3-phase
Standard
capacity
3-phase
High voltage Special high voltage class
(6/3 kV class) (20/30 kV class)
FM-KT type
FM-LC type
FM-KF type
FM-CT type
FM-CS type
FM-EH type
FM-CF type
FM-CH type
<Reference: Fuji Electric’s molded transformer: Extracted from catalog TC76-7V.>
Model (Series)
Heat resistant class
Number of phases
Frequency (Hz)
Rated capacity (kVA)
Primary voltage
Rated voltage (V)
Tap voltage
Insulation
Secondary voltage Voltage (V)
Insulation
 Cooling
 Wheels
 Accessories (options)
 Order quantity
 Desired delivery time
Other remarks
Operating environment






KT-CT type KS-CS type KF-CF type
Standard Class B Class F Class H
Single-phase 3-phase Scott connection
50 60 50/60
CH-EH type LC type
210 420 3300 6600 11000 22000 33000
Standard  2.5, 5.0% tap
Standard  
R210-105 210 420 (50 Hz) 440 (60 Hz) 3300 6600
Standard 
(With neutral point)  Delta connection Delta transformer
Standard Natural cooling Wind cooling
Provided None
Contact prevention plate Dial thermometer Protective case
The operating environment conforms to the following normal conditions defined in JEC-2200.
If the operating environment is other than that shown below, specify it separately.
(1) Ambient temperature
Max. temperature 40C (Average temperature during day time is 35C.
Annual average temperature is 20C or less.)
Min. temperature -5C
(2) Altitude
1000 m or less
(3) Circuit voltage waveform: The voltage waveform of the circuit connected to the transformer is almost
the sine waveform.
(4) Circuit voltage balance:
The voltage of the 3-phase circuit connected to the transformer is almost
balanced.
Describe desired specifications or enclose a desired specification by a circle in the table.  shows absolutely required items.
Note: The guarantee of this product covers only the purchased product and delivered single product. Consequential damages (damages or losses of
machine and equipment and losses of profits) resulting from the malfunction are expected from the guarantee.
6-41
Chapter 6 Converter System
FM-KS type
<Reference: Fuji Electric’s oil transformer: Extracted from catalog TC77g.>
Standard specification series products
Specifications
Type
Standard conformity
Number of phases
Rated frequency
Rated primary voltage
Tap voltage
Rated secondary voltage
Connection
Transformer with standard specifications (JIS product series)
Single-phase
50 or 60 Hz
3-phase
R6600/F6300/6000 V(50 kVA or less) F6750/R6600/F6450/F6300/6150 V(75 kVA or more)
Dedicated to
single-phase 3-wire
Rated
capacity
[kVA]
Oil deterioration prevention method
Standard paint color
Insulation strength
Air sealed type (1000 KVA or less)
Munsell color notification N5.5, full gloss (500 KVA or less)
Oil sealed type (1500 KVA or more)
Munsell color notification N7, full gloss (750 KVA or more)
Withstand voltage Primary 6600 V: 22 kV, Secondary 210 V: 2 Kv Secondary 400 V class: 4 kV, Lightning impulse withstand voltage Primary 6600 V: Switch the CN13, CN14, section 60 kV
Note 1) Transformer with specifications other than those described above can also be manufactured. Contact Fuji Electric separately. 2) Tap-less
transformer is also manufactured.
6.2.12.9
Receiving power supply monitor
(1)
Transformer for instrument (VT)
■
Converter stack input side
General VT for 50/60 Hz can be used.
■
Inverter output side
Table 6.2.12-16: Fuji Electric’s coil molded transformer
The output voltage waveform of the inverter is a square
wave (rectangular wave).
The output waveform on the secondary side of the
transformer for instrument (VT) is a pulse shape distorted
waveform. The voltage cannot be measured correctly and
the iron core of the VT is saturated magnetically, possibly
causing burning. Additionally, when the inverter is operated
at a low speed, the frequency becomes low and the
voltage becomes close to the DC voltage. In this case, the
VT may be burnt.
Model
Rating
Rated load
CD32□-○1 CD34□-○1 CD36□-○1
220/110V，440/110V
15VA
50VA
100VA
Accuracy class
1.0・1P
3.0・3P
1.0・1P
Rated frequency
50/60Hz
Withstand voltage 220 V product: 2 kV, 440 V product: 4 kV
□: F (Primary side with fuse), N (without fuse)
○: 2 or 4 (Rated primary voltage specifications)
Therefore, the VT should not be connected to the output
side of the inverter.
Avoid short-circuiting the secondary side of the VT or short-circuiting with a low impedance. (An excessive
current flows to the secondary winding of the VT, causing burning of the secondary winding. This may lead to
the insulation breakage of the primary winding. Finally, inter-phase short-circuit may result.)
6-42
(2)
Current transformer for instrument (CT)
■
Converter stack input side
General CT for 50/60 Hz can be used. However, since harmonic components are included, a larger rated load is taken.
■ Inverter output side
As a current including a large amount of high frequency and harmonic
components may flow, the iron core loss increases. An allowance 10
times larger than the rated load should be given.
Electric wire
resistance []
Load [VA]
Load
CT rated load [VA] ≥ 10 x (rated load of instrument + wire load) [VA]
P  r   
Chapter 6 Converter System
The wire load should be calculated from Figure 6.2.12-17.
I
[VA] ･･･････････ Equation 6.2.12-8
1000
P : Wire load [VA]
r
: Resistance value of wire [Ω/km]
I
: Rated secondary current of CT [A]
 : Wiring distance of wire (round trip distance) [m]
Do not open the secondary side of the CT.
If the secondary side is open while the primary current flows,
a high voltage is produced to flow the secondary current
according to the CT ratio.
Therefore, the insulation of the secondary winding is broken
to produce a short-circuit, possibly resulting in burning.
Electric wire distance ℓ/2[m]
Figure 6.2.12-17: Wire load of circuit
Table 6.2.12-17: Fuji Electric’s molded current transformer
Product name
Model
With primary winding
Square window through type
CC3L1 CC3L2 CC3L3 CC3P1 CC3P2 CC3P3
CC3M2
CC3M3
Rated primary current
10 to 750 A
5 to 50 A
150 to 750 A 200 to 6,000 A
Rated secondary current
5 A or 1 A
Rated load
5 VA 15 VA 40 VA 5 VA 15 VA 40 VA
15 VA
40 VA
Rated overcurrent strength
40
Max. voltage
1,150 V
Error class
1.0 class
Rated frequency
50/60 Hz
Insulation method
Double-molding (*1)
(*1) Epoxy molding is used to insulate a rated primary current of 5,000 or 6,000 A.
(3)
Voltmeter
■
Converter input side
Round window through type
The waveform is distorted by the effect of the harmonic. However, since the commercial power supply is measured, "a
moving-iron type" or "rectifier type voltmeter" should be used.
■
Inverter output side
The output voltage including high-frequency components is measured. "A rectifier type voltmeter" should be used that
indicates a value close to the r.m.s. value of the fundamental wave.
6-43
Ammeter
■
Converter input side
Voltage
(4)
Time
Since the harmonic current with a high peak value called "rabbit's ear" is
measured, "a moving-iron type" or "r.m.s. value response type (RMS type)"
should be used that indicates the general r.m.s. value including harmonic
components.
Inverter output side
A current with the harmonic components superimposed on the fundamental
wave current is measured. The current cannot be measured accurately in all
frequency areas. The following models can be used conditionally.
Area of 20 Hz or more:
Voltage
■
Input current waveform (primary side)
Time
Moving-iron type, rectifier type, r.m.s. value
rectifier type,
: R.m.s. value response type (RMS type)
(5)
Frequency meter and wattmeter (watt-hour meter)
■
Inverter output side
Output current waveform (secondary side)
Figure 6.2.12-18: Current waveform
General purpose analog output terminal of the inverter should be used.
As a value ranging from 0 to 10 VDC (4-20 mA DC) is output, a meter with
the scale plate used for the DC voltmeter should be used.
Fuji Electric Technica's analog meter
 Panel meter
 Wide angle meter
Product name
Model
Operation
principle
Inverter
Primary Secondary
side
side
 (Note)

1, 2
Product name
Model
AC ammeter
FS- type
AC voltmeter
FS- type
AC ammeter
AC voltmeter
Single-phase
wattmeter
Single-phase 3-wire
wattmeter
3-phase wattmeter
3-phase reactive
power meter
3-phase balanced
power factor meter
3-phase unbalanced
power factor meter
Frequency meter
FR- type
FR- type
Moving-core
type
Moving-core
type
Rectifier type
Rectifier type
AC ammeter
SWR- type

×
AC voltmeter
×

 (Note) 1
×
AC ammeter
FR- W1 type
Converter type 
×
AC voltmeter
FR- W2 type
Converter type 
×
FR- W3 type
Converter type 
×
FR- V3 type
Converter type 
×
FR- FP3 type Converter type ×
×
FR- PFU type Converter type ×
×
FR- F type
×
Converter type 
Operation
principle
RMS value
rectifier type
RMS value
SWR- type
rectifier type
RMS value
SWRA- type
response type
RMS value
SWRA- type
response type
Single-phase
SWC- type
wattmeter
Single-phase 3-wire
SWC1- type
wattmeter
3-phase wattmeter
SWC2- type
3-phase 4-wire
SWC3- type
wattmeter
3-phase reactive
SWC2- type
power meter
3-phase 4-wire
SWC3- type
reactive power meter
3-phase balanced
SWA1- type
power factor meter
3-phase unbalanced
SWA2- type
power factor meter
3-phase 4-wire
SWA4- type
power factor meter
Frequency meter
SWP1- type
Inverter
Primary Secondary
side
side
×
 (Note) 1

×

 (Note) 1

×
Converter type 
×
Converter type 
×
Converter type 
×
Converter type 
×
Converter type 
×
Converter type 
×
Converter type ×
×
Converter type ×
×
Converter type ×
×
Converter type 
×
Carefully check the following on the inverter output side.
(1)
When the operation frequency is less than 20 Hz, the indication may fluctuate.
(2)
When the inverter is operated at a carrier frequency of 5 kHz or more, overcurrent loss produced in the
metallic part inside the moving-iron type instrument increases, possibly causing burning.
(3)
When monitoring in a low speed area, it is recommended to use the analog output of the inverter stack.
6-44
(6)
Multi-meter
The following introduces multi-meters that monitor the electric power in the input power supply system of the converter.
Two kinds of multi-meters are recommended as multi-meters to be mounted in the cabinet. Investigate an appropriate
multi-meter suitable for the purpose.
PPMC3- (Fuji Electric)
Features
• The current input signal is intended for the general purpose CT (secondary side, 1 A, 5 A).
An appropriate selection suitable for the application can be made.
• The RS485 interface can be built-in.
Communication/function software: Dedicated data collection software is available.
• Data for an extended period of time can be recorded into a SD card. The data stored in the
SD card can be loaded onto the personal computer and can be edited using Excel.
UM03-ARA3 (F-MPC04S series products: Fuji Electric FA Components & Systems)
Features
• This multi-meter is compact and lightweight with front panel dimensions of 48 x 96 mm and
easy to install on individual equipment or power distribution panel.
• Dedicated CT is used. When monitoring a large capacity, this can be made in a
combination with general purpose CT.
• The RS-485 is built-in as standard function. The same communication cable as the F-MPC
series product can be used.
• A wide variety of output functions suitable for preventive maintenance can be selected.
Power alarm/current pre-alarm output (provided as standard), electric energy pulse signal
(provided as standard), earth leakage alarm, earth leakage pre-alarm output (model with
leakage current measurement function only)
• The rush current of the welding machine, etc. can be measured.
All cycles of the voltage and current are sampled at a high speed to perform the calculation.
Monitor measurable items
Measurement contents
PPMC
UM03
Voltage


Current


Harmonic current

*1
Leakage current

*2
Active power


Reactive power


Power factor


Electric energy


Reactive energy


Frequency


Remarks
*1
The total harmonic current of only R/T phase can be measured. The total of 3rd, 5th, and 7th harmonic currents is
measured.
*2.
The measurement is possible only when the model is specified.

For details, refer to relevant catalog or technical reference.
6-45
Chapter 6 Converter System
• This multi-meter is compact and lightweight with front panel dimensions of 48 x 96 mm and
easy to install on individual equipment or power distribution panel.
6.2.13 Recommended wire size
The wire size of the main circuit is calculated based on the Equation below.
I AC 
PM
3  Vin  cos   CNV   INV   M
[ A] ･･･
Equation 6.2.13-1
3
I DC 
 I AC [ A] ･････････････････････････････
2
Equation 6.2.13-2
• PM
: Motor capacity [kW]
• Vin
: Converter input voltage [A]
•  INV : Inverter efficiency
• M
: Motor efficiency
3-phase 400V series
Ambient temperature: 40°C
200S
315
315S
220
200S
355
315S
MD
LD
Main input: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
Wire size (Permissible Bus bar
temperature) (Note 1)
size
60°C
75°C
90°C
[mm2]
200
150
100
t5x30
2x200
250
200
250
150
2x200
325
Output: P(+), N(-)
Wire size (Permissible Bus bar
temperature) (Note 1)
size
GroundControl
ing wire
wire
2
[mm ]
[mm2]
60°C
75°C
90°C
[mm2]
Current
[Adc]
200
Specifications
Current
[A]
Nominal
applied
motor RHD-4D
capacity
[kW]
357
250
200
150
t4x40
421
38
t10x30
559
2x250
325
250
t8x50
654
60
150
t5x30
390
325
200
150
t4x40
458
60
250
t10x30
628
2x325
2x200
325
t8x50
741
100
(Note 2)
1.25
1.25
Ambient temperature: 50°C
200
200S
315
315S
220
200S
355
315S
Specifications
MD
LD
Main input: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
Wire size (Permissible Bus bar
temperature) (Note 1)
size
60°C
75°C
90°C
[mm2]
325
150
150
t5x30
―
325
250
2x200
200
2x325
2x200
Output: P(+), N(-)
Wire size (Permissible Bus bar
temperature) (Note 1)
size
GroundControl
ing wire
wire
2
[mm ]
[mm2]
60°C
75°C
90°C
[mm2]
Current
[Adc]
Nominal
applied
motor RHD-4D
capacity
[kW]
Current
[A]
(2)
: Converter output current [A]
•  CNV : Converter efficiency
Additionally, when using the wire, the wiring length must be 2 m or
less.
(1)
: Converter input current [A]
• IDC
• cos θ : Input power factor
The structure from the converter output to the DC bus bar should be
designed to cover it with the bus bar.
6.2.13.1
• IAC
357
2x200
250
150
t4x40
421
38
t10x30
559
―
2x200
325
t8x50
654
60
150
t5x30
390
2x250
250
200
t4x40
458
38
250
t10x30
628
―
2x250 2x200
t8x50
741
60
(Note 2)
1.25
1.25
The power supply voltage is 400 VAC.
(Note 1)
An "IV wire," a "600 V HIV insulated wire," and a "600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire" were used
at permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial wiring.
(Note 2)
The grounding wire is cited from the permissible short circuit current defined in internal wire regulations.
6-46
6.2.13.2
Ambient temperature: 40°C (IEC standard)
220
220S
450
450S
250
220S
MD
LD
Output: P(+), N(-)
Wire size (Permissible Bus bar
temperature) (Note 1)
size
[mm2]
70°C
90°C
Ground- Control
ing wire wire
[mm2] [mm2]
120
95
t5x30
226
150
120
t4x40
277
22
2x150
2x120
t10x30
460
2x240
2x150
t8x50
561
38
150
95
t5x30
258
185
150
t4x40
315
60
1.25
The power supply voltage is 690 VAC.
(Note 1)
A "PVC (polyvinyl chloride) wire" and an "XLPE (cross-linked polyethylene) wire" were used at permissible
temperatures of 70°C and 90°C, respectively, and the wire sizes were selected based on the permissible
current under the following conditions. If the use conditions are different, select the wire sizes based on use
conditions that comply with IEC 60364-5-52:2001(JIS C 60364-5-52:2006).
Ambient temperature: 40°C, Multicore cable: 3 cores (conductor: copper), A single cable: aerial wiring, Two or
more cables: electric duct wiring
(Note 2)
Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
Ambient temperature: 40°C (domestic selection)
220
220S
450
450S
250
220S
MD
LD
Output: P(+), N(-)
Wire size (Permissible
temperature) (Note 1)
Bus bar
size [mm2]
Current
[Adc]
Main input: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
Nominal
RHD Specifi Wire size (Permissible
applied motor
Bus bar
-69D cations temperature) (Note 1)
capacity [kW]
size [mm2]
75°C
90°C
Current
[A]
(2)
Ground- Control
ing wire
wire
[mm2] [mm2]
75°C
90°C
60
60
t5x30
226
100
60
t4x40
277
22
200
150
t10x30
460
200
150
t8x50
561
60
100
60
t5x30
258
100
100
t4x40
315
38
The power supply voltage is 690 VAC.
(Note 1)
PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C.
(Note 2)
Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
6-47
1.25
Chapter 6 Converter System
Current
[A]
Main input: L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
Nominal
RHD
Specifi- Wire size (Permissible Bus bar
applied motor
-69D cations temperature) (Note 1)
size
capacity [kW]
[mm2]
70°C
90°C
Current
[Adc]
(1)
3-phase 690V series
6.3
High-efficiency power regeneration PWM converter
6.3.1
Features
■
Compliant with the harmonic wave
suppression guidelines
Comparison of input current
waveforms
The current on the power supply side is converted <Without PWM converter>
into the sine waveform by the PWM control to
greatly reduce the harmonic current. When this
converter is combined with the inverter, the
conversion coefficient Ki stated in "Japanese
Guideline
for
Suppressing
Harmonics
by
Customers Receiving High Voltage or Special High
Voltage" issued by the Agency for Natural
Resources and Energy of the Ministry of Economy,
Trade, and Industry is handled as zero (0) (no
harmonic is produced).
■
<With PWM converter>
Power supply equipment capacity can be reduced.
Since the current with the same phase as the power supply phase voltage is flowed by the power factor control, the
operation with a power factor of almost "1" can be made.
Therefore, the power supply transformer capacity can be reduced or the unit can be made compact when compared to
the standard type inverter.
Braking performance is improved significantly.
All of the regenerative energy generated by highly frequent acceleration and
deceleration operations or the lift are returned to the power supply side. This
ensures the energy saving.
Additionally, as the current waveform of the regenerative energy also
becomes the sine waveform, this does not cause any trouble in the power
supply system. The following describes the regenerative performance.
Unit type
• Continuous regenerative rating : 100%
• Regenerative rating for 1 min.
Stack type
: 150% (CT spec)
: 120% (VT spec)
• Continuous regenerative rating : 100%
• Regenerative rating for 1 min.
: 150% (MD spec)
: 110% (LD spec)
Allowable regenerative electric power
characteristics
Max. allowable regenerative
electric power (150%, 1min.)
Allowable regenerative electric power
■
Continuous allowable regenerative
electric power (100%, continuous)
Power supply voltage (V)
■
Protective and maintenance functions are enhanced.
(1)
Use of trace back (option) function makes it possible to easily analyze the cause of the alarm trip.
(2)
The past alarm contents (memory for past ten alarms) can be checked using the segment LED.
(3)
If a momentary power failure occurs, the gate is shut down and the operation is immediately restarted after the
power has been recovered.
(4)
A warning signal, such as overload, fin overheat, or service life is used to give an alarm before the converter is
tripped.
■
Network functions are enhanced
This PWM converter can be connected to Fuji Electric’s network systems, such as SX bus, T-Link, CC-Link (optional).
The RS-485 is provided as standard. (Unit type: RHC-C only)
6-48
■ Applicable capacity are enhanced
(1)
Two models, unit type (RHC-C) and stack type (RHC-D), are available. An appropriate model for the system can be
selected.
(2)
Use of high-speed serial card (OPC-VG7-SI) (optional) makes it possible to perform the parallel operation of the
PWM converters. As the power supply transformer is used for the input power supply, up to six parallel operations
can be performed.
• Transformer-less parallel system: 3-parallel operation (stack type 400 V)  MD spec: 2400 kW, LD spec: 3000
kW)
Use of the transformer-less parallel system with the unit type (RHC-C) requires the product dedicated to
transformer-less parallel systems (RHC-4CR) as well as the optical link option card for parallel systems
(OPC-VG7-SIR).
This section is focused on the RHC-D series (stack type) PWM converters.
For more information on the stack and unit types, refer to the separate volume instruction manual.

For details on the unit type, refer to the RHC-C Instruction Manual (INR-HF51746c).
For details on the stack type, refer to the RHC-D Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-1722).
6.3.2
Standard specifications
The standard specifications described here include those for the RHC-C series (unit type) as well.
6.3.2.1
3-phase 400V series (RHC-C: unit type)
Item
Applicable inverter
capacity (kW)
Continuous capacity
(kW)
Overload rating
Voltage
Required power supply
capacity (kVA)
Output
CT mode
Model
Input
power
Applicable inverter
capacity (kW)
Continuous capacity
(kW)
Overload rating
Voltage
Required power supply
capacity (kVA)
Carrier frequency *2
Number of phases,
voltage, and frequency
Allowable voltage and
frequency fluctuation
Output
VT mode
Carrier frequency *2
Standard specifications
RHC-4C
30 37 45
55
75
90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
30
37
45
55
75
90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500 630
36
44
53
65
88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 400 448 560 705
150% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
640 to 710 VDC (variable according to input power voltage) *1
38
47
57
70
93 111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610 762
Standard 15 kHz
Standard 10 kHz
37
45
55
75
44
53
65
88 103 126 150 182 227 247 314 353 400 448 560
Standard
6 kHz
90 110 132 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 500
120% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
640 to 710 VDC (variable according to input power voltage) *1
47
57
70
93
111 136 161 196 244 267 341 383 433 488 610
Standard 10 kHz
Standard 6 kHz
3-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 460 V/60 Hz *3
Voltage: -15 to +10%, Frequency; ±5%, Voltage unbalance ratio; 2% or less *4
*1
When the power supply voltage is 400 V, 440 V, and 460 V, the output voltage is approx. 640 VDC, 686 VDC and
710 VDC, respectively.
*2
When the OPC-VG7-SIR is installed (to provide a transformer-less parallel system), the carrier frequency is
automatically set to 5kHz.
*3
When the power supply voltage is 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, the tap switching inside the PWM
converter is required.
When the power supply voltage is less than 400 V, the capacity needs to be reduced.
*4
Inter-phase unbalance rate [%] = (Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V])/3-phase average voltage x 67
6-49
Chapter 6 Converter System
• Insulated parallel system with a transformer: 6-parallel operation (stack type 400 V)  MD spec: 4800 kW, LD
spec: 6000 kW)
6.3.2.2
3-phase 400V/690V series (RHC-D: stack type)
Item
Standard specifications
RHC□S-4D
132
160 200 220 280 315 630 710 800 132 160 200 250 280 315 355 400 450
132
160 200 220 280 315 630 710 800 132 160 200 250 280 315 355 400 450
Continuous
capacity (kW)
150
182 227 247 314 353 705 795 896 150 182 227 280 314 353 400 448 504
Overload rating
150% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
Voltage
640 to 710 VDC (variable according to input power 895 to 1073 VDC (variable according to input
voltage) *2
power voltage) *3
Required power supply
capacity (kVA)
161
Carrier frequency *3
196 244 267 341 383 762 858 967 161 196 244 304 341 383 433 488 549
5kHz
5kHz
5kHz
Applicable inverter
capacity (kW)
160
200 220
－
315 355 710 800 1000 132 160 200 250 280 315 355 400
Continuous
capacity (kW)
182
227 247
－
353 400 795 896 1120 160 200 220 280 315 355 400 450
Overload rating
110% of the continuous rating for 1 minute
Voltage
640 to 710 VDC (variable according to input power 895 to 1073 VDC (variable according to input
voltage) *2
power voltage) *3
Output
LD mode
RHC□S-69D
Applicable inverter
capacity (kW)
Output
MD mode
Model
RHC□B-4D *1
Required power supply
capacity (kVA)
Carrier frequency *3
196
244 267
－
383 433 858 967 1210 196 245 267 341 383 433 488 549
5kHz
5kHz
5kHz
Allowable voltage and
frequency fluctuation
Voltage: -15 to +10%, Frequency; ±5%,
Voltage unbalance ratio; 2% or less *7
Voltage: -15 to +10%, Frequency; ±5%,
Voltage unbalance ratio; 2% or less *7
Input power
3-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 460 V/60 Hz *5
3-phase, 3-wire type, 660 to 690 V,
50Hz/60Hz
3-phase, 3-wire type, 575 to 600 V,
50Hz/60Hz *6
Number of phases,
voltage, and frequency
*1
The RHCB-4D consists of three stacks per set.
*2
When the power supply voltage is 400 V, 440 V, and 460 V, the output voltage is approx. 640 VDC, 686 VDC and
710 VDC, respectively.
*3
The output voltage is 895 VDC when the power supply voltage is 575 V, and 1073 VDC when the power supply
voltage is 690 V.
*4
When the OPC-VG7-SIR is installed (to provide a transformer-less parallel system), the carrier frequency is
automatically set to 2.5 kHz.
*5
When the power supply voltage is 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz, the tap switching inside the PWM
converter is required.
When the power supply voltage is less than 400 V, the capacity needs to be reduced.
*6
The tap inside the converter must be switched when the power supply voltage is 575 to 600 V / 50Hz or 575 to 600
V / 60Hz.
The capacity must be reduced when the power supply voltage is less than 690 V.
*7
Inter-phase unbalance rate [%] = (Max. voltage [V] - Min. voltage [V])/3-phase average voltage x 67
6-50
Common specifications
Item
Specifications
Display
Control method
AVR constant control with DC ACR minor
Start/stop operation
Starts the rectification when the power is turned ON after connection.
Starts boosting when it receives the run signal (RUN-CM short-circuit or run command from the
communication). After that, the converter is ready to run.
Running status signal
Running, power running, regenerative operation, ready-to-run, alarm output (for any alarm), etc.
Overload rating
switching
Unit type
Stack type
CT spec: 150% of overload rating for 1 min. VT spec: 120% of overload rating for 1 min.
Either rating is selected. (CT spec is fixed when the capacity is 500 kW or more.)
MD spec: 150% of overload rating for 1 min., LD spec: 110% of overload rating for 1 min.
Either rating is selected.
Carrier frequency
Unit type: 5 kHz to 15 kHz (The setting range may vary depending on the capacity.)
Stack type: Fixed at 5 kHz *1
Input power factor
0.99 or more (at full load) *2
Input harmonic current
Conversion coefficient Ki can be set to zero (0) according to the harmonics suppressing guideline by
METI.
Restart after
momentary power
failure
Shuts down the gate when the voltage level reaches the under-voltage level if a momentary power
failure occurs, and the PWM converter is automatically restarted after the power recovers.
Power limiting control
Controls the power to the preset limit value or less.
Alarm display
(protective functions)
Refer to "Table 6.3.10-1 List of alarm displays and protective operations".
Alarm history
Saves and displays the alarm history data for past ten alarms. Saves and displays the detailed contents
of the trip cause for past one alarm.
Monitor
Displays the input power, input current in RMS, input voltage in RMS, DC intermediate current, and
power supply frequency.
Load factor
Allows the user to measure the load factor with the keypad.
Display language
Allows the user to specify or refer to function codes in any of the three languages: Japanese, English,
and Chinese.
Charging lamp
Lights up when the main circuit capacitor is charged.
For the stack type, it lights up when only the auxiliary control power input is active.
Structure/environment
 Unit type: Refer to the RHC-C Instruction Manual (INR-HF51746c).
 Stack type: Refer to "2.2.1 Installation environment and conformity with standards" in Chapter 2.
*1
When the OPC-VG7-SIR is installed (to provide a transformer-less parallel system), the carrier frequency is
automatically set to 2.5 kHz.
*2
When the power supply voltage is 420 V (400V series) or higher, or 630 V or higher (690V series), and the
operating load is 50% or higher, the power factor for the power supply drops to approx. 0.95 (only during
regenerative operation).
6-51
Chapter 6 Converter System
Control
6.3.3
6.3.4
Control options
Control options shown below can be used for the PWM converter.
Category
Model
Name
Specifications
Analog card
OPC-VG7-AIO
Aio extension card
Extension card for analog signal output x 2 points
Dio extension card
Extension card for digital output (Y terminal) x 8 points
This card is used when DIOA is set.
Digital card
OPC-VG7-DIO
(Applicable to 8-bit
bus.)
OPC-VG7-TL
Digital card
(Applicable to
16-bit bus.)
T link interface card
For Fuji Electric’s private link: T-Link communication
OPC-VG7-CCL
CC-Link interface card
For CC-Link communication
OPC-VG7-SI
Optical link card for parallel
system
For converter parallel operation (for insulated parallel system
with a transformer)
OPC-VG7-SIR
Optical link card for parallel
system
For converter parallel operation (for transformer-less parallel
system)
The special version (RHC-4CR) is required when this
system is applied to the unit type (RHC-C). (The stack type
can be used with the standard type.)
OPC-VG7-SX
SX bus interface card
SX bus interface card
Allowable option combinations
Example 2
Example 3
Example 4
Example 1
Max. number of mountable cards
Analog card
1
1
0
0
Digital card
(Applicable to 8-bit bus.)
1
―
2
2
Digital card
(Applicable to 16-bit bus.)
―
1
0
1
Category
Remarks
Analog (1 card) + digital (1 card) or digital (2 cards)
(It is impossible to mount the TL and CCL at the same time.)
It is possible to mount this card and the TL or SI at the
same time. It is impossible to mount this card and the CCL
at the same time.
Take great care since there are restrictions on mounting of option card.

AIO
For more information, refer to the RHC-C instruction manual (INR-HF51746c) and the RHC-D Instruction
Manual (INR-SI47-1722).
TR
DIO
TL
CCL
AIO
NG
TR
OK
NG
DIO
OK
OK
NG
TL
OK
OK
OK
NG
CCL
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
SI
SIR
SX
SI
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
SIR
OK
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
SX
OK
OK
OK
OK
NG
OK
OK
NG
PDP
OK
OK
OK
NG
NG
OK
OK
NG
6-52
PDP
NG
6.3.5
Check before use
Unpack the package and check the following:
Check that you have properly received the product main unit and the following accessories.
Accessories
Instruction manual
Chapter 6 Converter System
The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts missing. The main and sub
nameplates are attached to the main unit. The main nameplate is located on the front face of the main unit (as shown in
Figure 6.3.6-2 and Figure 6.3.6-3). Check these main nameplates to see that the inverter is exactly the type you ordered.
(a) Main Nameplate
(b) Sub Nameplate
Figure 6.3.5-1: Nameplate
TYPE: PWM converter (RHC-D)
The PWM converter (RHC-D) is available in two drive modes depending upon the applied load: Medium Duty (MD) spec
and Low Duty (LD) spec modes.
Specifications in each spec are printed on the nameplate.
Medium Duty : MD spec: designed for medium duty overload applications. Overload current rating: 150% for 1 min., Continuous
rating capacity = Capacity of inverters
Low Duty
: LD spec mode: designed for light duty overload applications. Overload current rating: 110% for 1 min., Continuous
rating capacity = One rank or two ranks higher capacity of inverters
SOURCE
: Power supply rating (MD spec, LD spec)
OUTPUT
: Output rating (MD spec, LD spec)
IP Code
: IP protection grade
SCCR
: Short-circuit capacity
MASS
: Mass
SER.No.
: Production number
2 8 A456A0002BA
Production year
(Last digit of the year)
Serial number of production lot
Production month
1 to 9:
X, Y, or Z:
January to September
October, November, or December
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact your Fuji
Electric representative.

Refer to Chapter 3 "Transportation and Storage of Stack" for information on transportation and long-term storage
of PWM converters.

Refer to Chapter 4 "Installation and Wiring" for information on installation of PWM converters.
For information on the main circuit wire sizes, refer to "6.3.15.2 Wire size".
6-53
6.3.6
External views
6.3.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label
Figure 6.3.6-1: Warning label and falling warning label
6.3.6.2
Appearance
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Handle
Cooling fan
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Key pad
Handle
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Control
terminal
Main
nameplate
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Caster
Front cover
Sub nameplate
Figure 6.3.6-2: Frame 3 size (RHC132S to RHC200S-4D)
6-54
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Cooling fan
N (-) bar
P (+) bar
Key pad
Chapter 6 Converter System
Handle
Control
terminal
Main
nameplate
Handle
Caster
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Front cover
Sub nameplate
Figure 6.3.6-3: Frame 4 size (RHC220S to RHC315S-4D)
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Cooling fan
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Handle
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Key pad
Control
terminal
Main
nameplate
Handle
Front cover
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Caster
Sub nameplate
Figure 6.3.6-4: Frame 3 size (RHC132S to RHC200S-69D)
6-55
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Cooling fan
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Hanging hole
(ø26)
N (-) bar
P (+) bar
Handle
Key pad
Control
terminal
Main
nameplate
Handle
Front cover
Hanging hole
(ø26)
Caster
Sub nameplate
Figure 6.3.6-5: Frame 4 size (RHC250S to RHC450S-69D)
6-56
For phase-specific stacks, the keypad can be installed to the S-phase stack only.
S-phase
R-phase
Hanging hole (φ26)
T-phase
Hanging
hole (φ26)
P (+) bar
N (-) bar
Keypad
Handle
Front cover
Handle
Main nameplate
Hanging hole (φ26)
Cooling fan
Control terminal
Sub nameplate
Caster
Figure 6.3.6-6: Frame 4 size (RHC630B to RHC800B-4D)
6-57
Chapter 6 Converter System
Hanging
hole (φ26)
Main circuit
Category
6.3.7
Terminal functions
Terminal symbol
Terminal name
L1/R, L2/S, L3/T
Main power input
Connect to 3-phase power supply via dedicated reactor, etc.
P(+), N(-)
Converter output
Connect to inverter power input terminals P(+) and N(-).
E(G)
Earthing terminal
Grounding terminal for the chassis (case) of the PWM converter.
R0, T0
Auxiliary control
power input
Connect to the backup terminal of the power supply for the control
power supply and the same power supply system as the main power
input.
For information on terminal ratings, refer to "4.5.3 (4) Auxiliary control
power input and fan power input".
R1, S1, T1
For voltage detection Voltage detection terminals used to control the inside of the PWM
Synchronous power converter. These terminals are connected to the power supply sides of
supply input
the dedicated filter.
R2, T2
(400V series)
Connection terminal for AC fuse disconnection detection.
Control monitor input No connection is required when the filter stack (RHF-D) is used.
(690V series)
There are no R2 or T2 terminals.
R3,T3
Fan power input
Specifications
(400V series)
Connection terminals for the AC cooling fan inside the stack. Connect
these terminals to the same power supply system as the main power
input. Jumper wires are connected between R1 and R3 and between
T1 and T3 when the product is shipped from the factory. Remove the
jumper wires and wire these terminals independently when the fan
power supply is used individually. For information on how to connect
the terminals, refer to the PWM converter (RHC-D) instruction manual.
For information on terminal ratings, refer to "6.3.15.1-(5) Auxiliary
control power input (R0, T0) and fan power input (CNV: R3, T3 INV:
R1, T1)".
(690V series)
There are no R3 or T3 short-circuit wires.
If using a separate fan power supply, switch the tap inside the
converter, and connect the fan power supply to the R3 and T3
terminals. Refer to the PWM converter (RHC-D) instruction manual for
information on the connection method.
6-58
Terminal name
Specifications
[RUN]
Start/stop command
When the portion between the RUN and CM is turned ON, the converter
performs boosting. The converter stops when this portion is turned OFF.
[RST]
Alarm reset command
If an alarm stop occurs, remove the cause of the alarm. When the portion
between the RST and CM is turned ON, the protective function in operation
is cancelled to restore the operation.
[X1]
Digital input
The following function can be assigned to terminal X1.
0: External alarm [THR], 1: Current limit cancellation [LMT-CCL],
2: 73 answer back [73ANS], 3: Current limit switching [I-LIM],
4: Option DI [OPT-DI]
[CM]
Digital input common
Common terminal for the digital input signals
[PLC]
PLC signal power
Connect the PLC output signal power supply. (Rated voltage 24 V (22 to 27
V) DC)
+24V
Item
min.
typ.
max.
ON level
0V
―
2V
OFF level
22 V
22 V
27 V
Operating current in the ON state
―
3.2 mA
4.5 mA
Allowable leak current in the OFF state
―
―
0.5 mA
Operating voltage
PLC
6.8kΩ
RUN,X1,RST
CM
[DCF1]
[DCF2]
0V
Input for DC fuse
disconnection detection
This terminal is intended to connect the microswitch for DC fuse blow
detection in the case the converter output is protected with a DC fuse. It
supports the b-contact output.
24 VDC 12 mA Typ
6-59
Chapter 6 Converter System
Category
Input signals
Terminal
symbol
Category
Output signals
Terminal
symbol
Terminal name
[AO1]
Analog output
[M]
Analog output common
Specifications
This terminal can be configured to output the signal selected from the
following.
0: Input power [PWR], 1: Input current in RMS [I-AC],
2: Input voltage in RMS [V-AC], 3: DC intermediate voltage [V-DC],
4: Power supply frequency [FREQ], 5: +10 V test [P10],
6: -10 V test [N10]
Specifications: 0 to ±10 VDC, connectable impedance: Min. 3 kΩ
When the OPC-VG7-AIO option is used, up to two AO extension functions
(A04, A05) can be added. * Ai functions cannot be used.
[Y1]
[Y2]
[Y3]
Transistor output
This terminal can be configured to output the signal selected from the
following.
0: Running [RUN], 1: Ready-to-run [RDY],
2: Power supply current limiting [IL], 3: Service life warning [LIFE],
4: Cooling fin overheat warning [PRE-OH],
5: Overload warning [PRE-OL], 6: Driving [DRV],
7: Regenerative operation running [REG],
8: Current limit warning [CUR], 9: Momentary stop restarting [U-RES],
10: Power supply frequency synchronizing [SY-HZ],
11: Alarm contents 1 [AL1], 12: Alarm contents 2 [AL2],
13: Alarm contents 4 [AL4], 14: Option DO [OPT-DO]
When the OPC-VG7-DIO option is used, up to eight DO outputs (Y11 to
Y18) can be added. * Di functions cannot be used.
[CME]
Transistor output
common
Common terminal for the transistor output signals. Electrically isolated from
terminal CM.
Item
Operating voltage
Y1-Y3
28-30V
CME
min.
typ.
max.
ON level
―
1V
2V
OFF level
―
24 V
27 V
Operating current in the ON state
―
―
50 mA
Allowable leak current in the OFF state
―
―
0.1 mA
(1)
When connecting a relay, connect a surge-absorbing diode to both ends of the exciting coil.
(2)
For PWM converters, it is not possible to drive a relay by use of terminal PLC although that is
possible with the FRENIC-VG.
[30A]
[30B]
[30C]
Alarm output (for any
alarm)
Outputs the signal if the converter protective function operates to activate
the alarm stop.
(Contact: 1C, In the case of an error, portion between 30A and 30C: ON)
(Contact capacity: 250 VAC, 0.3 A cos φ = 0.3)
[Y5A]
[Y5C]
Relay output
Signals that can be selected with these terminals are similar to those with
Y1 to Y3 terminals.
(Contact capacity: 250 VAC, 0.3 A cos φ = 0.3)
[73A]
[73C]
Charging circuit control
output
Control output for external charging circuits.
These terminals can be used to output operation signals for the
electromagnetic contactor for charging circuit.
(Contact capacity: 250 VAC, 5 A Max.)
• The contact outputs (terminals Y5A/C, 30A/B/C, 73A/C) are mechanical contacts. Frequent ON/OFF
operations cannot be permitted. Signals turned ON/OFF at high frequency at terminal Y5A/C should be
output from terminals Y1 to Y3.
Furthermore, even if using an AC power supply, the contact life may be shorter with loads for which the
contact current direction is fixed (loads with half-wave rectifier circuit, etc., e.g., timers, power supply devices
for motor electromagnetic brakes).
In cases such as this, instead of connecting the load directly to the contact output terminals, connect a
control relay, etc. (separately installed) which satisfies load conditions to the contact output terminals, and
then connect to the load via this relay.
6-60
Communication specifications
Item
Specifications
General communication
specifications
Run information, running status, function code monitor function (polling), RUN, RST,
and X1 can be controlled (selected). (* Function codes other than "S" codes cannot
be written.)
Network
(option)
T link
Option to be used: OPC-VG7-TL
Performs the T link communication with the T link module of the MICREX-F or
MICREX-SX.
SX bus
Option to be used: OPC-VG7-SX
Performs the SX bus connection with the MICREX-SX.
CC-Link
Option to be used: OPC-VG7-CCL
Performs the connection with the CC link master unit.
Optical communication *
(option)
Option to be used: OPC-VG7-SI, OPC-VG7-SIR
Use of this option makes it possible to perform the load allocation control of the parallel
multiplex system.
6.3.9
Basic connection diagrams
6.3.9.1
List of basic connection diagrams
How to wire the filter circuits and sequence units differs depending on the inverter used in conjunction with the PWM
converter capacity. From Table 6.3.9-1, select the appropriate basic connection diagram.
Table 6.3.9-1: List of basic connection diagrams for PWM converters (RHC-D series)
Basic
connection
diagrams
PWM converter *2
Filter circuit
1
Configuration of peripherals *1
2
Configuration of peripherals *1
3
Configuration of peripherals *1
Filter stack (RHF-D series)
RHF160S-4D to RHF355S-4D
4
RHF160S-69D to RHF450S-69D
Inverter
Specifications
Model
MD
RHC132S-4D to RHC220S-4D
LD
RHC132S-4D to RHC200S-4D
MD
RHC280S-4D to RHC315S-4D
LD
RHC280S-4D to RHC315S-4D
MD
RHC630B-4D to RHC800B-4D
LD
RHC630B-4D to RHC800B-4D
MD
RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D
LD
RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D
MD
RHC132S-69D to
RHC450S-69D
LD
Recommended *3
Stack type
Stack type
Stack type
○
Stack type
○
RHC132S-69D to
RHC400S-69D
*1
The peripherals are those shown in "6.3.12.2 List of peripherals with no filter stack used".
*2
A single unit of PWM converter is used.
*3
This means recommended basic connections.
RHC630B-4D to RHC800B-4D
Configuration with peripherals is recommended.
RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D
RHC132S-69D to RHC450S-69D
Use of filter stack is recommended. When using a single PWM converter or using an insulated parallel system with
a transformer (where multiple PWM converters are run in parallel), the filter circuit can be configured with
peripherals. This is not possible, however, when using a transformer-less parallel system (where multiple PWM
converters are run in parallel). Use a filter stack when using a transformer-less parallel system.
6-61
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.3.8
6.3.9.2
Basic connection diagram 1
■
RHC132S-4D to RHC220S-4D (MD spec)
■
RHC132S-4D to RHC200S-4D (LD spec)
Symbol
Equipment name
Lr
Pressurizing reactor
Lf
Reactor for filter
Cf
Capacitor for filter
Rf
Resistor for filter
R0
Charging resistor
Fac
AC fuse
Fdc
DC fuse
73
Electromagnetic contactor
for charging circuit
52
Electromagnetic contactor
for power supply
When the charging circuit box is not used.
R0
Converter
Lr
F
F
73
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
R2
T2
(Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to ensure that the sequence circuit voltages are exactly the same as shown
in the connection diagram.
(Note 2) Be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power
via contact b of the charging circuit electromagnetic contactor (73) or power supply electromagnetic contactor
(52). When using the product with a non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated
transformer. For more information, refer to "6.3.15-(5)" in Chapter 6.
(Note 3) Be sure to connect the power supply for the inverter's AC fan to the main power directly (not via contact b of
#73 or #52) so that the power can be fed through terminals R1 and T1.
(Note 4) Create a sequence in which the PWM converter gets ready for operation before the run signal is input to the
inverter.
(Note 5) Configure one of the inverter's terminals X1 to X9 for use by the external alarm (THR).
(Note 6) Ensure correct phase sequence when connecting wires to terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1.
6-62
6.3.9.3
Basic connection diagram 2
RHC280S-4D to RHC315S-4D (MD spec)
■
RHC280S-4D to RHC315S-4D (LD spec)
Chapter 6 Converter System
■
Symbol
Lr
Lf
Cf
Rf
R0
Fac
Fdc
73
52
6F
Equipment name
Pressurizing reactor
Reactor for filter
Capacitor for filter
Resistor for filter
Charging resistor
AC fuse
DC fuse
Electromagnetic contactor for
charging circuit
Electromagnetic contactor for power
supply
Filter circuit electromagnetic
contactor
(Note 1) Connect a step-down transformer to ensure that the sequence circuit voltages are exactly the same as shown
in the connection diagram.
(Note 2) Be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power
via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic contactor (52). When using the product with a non-grounded
power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated transformer. For more information, refer to "6.3.15-(5)" in
Chapter 6.
(Note 3) Be sure to connect the power supply for the inverter's AC fan to the main power directly (not via contact b of
#52) so that the power can be fed through terminals R1 and T1.
(Note 4) Create a sequence in which the PWM converter gets ready for operation before the run signal is input to the
inverter.
(Note 5) Set the timer for 52T to 1 second.
(Note 6) Configure one of the inverter's terminals X1 to X9 for use by the external alarm (THR).
(Note 7) Ensure correct phase sequence when connecting wires to terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1.
6-63
Basic connection diagram 3
6.3.9.4
■
RHC630B-4D to RHC800B-4D (MD spec)
■
RHC630B-4D to RHC800B-4D (LD spec)
Inverter stack
VG1 series
PWM converter stack
RHC-D series
R-phase
stack
L1/R
R0
73
Power supply
CTU
13
12
11
E(G)
RUN
T-phase DCF1
stack
DCF2
FX
L3/T
P(+)
E(G)
N(-)
Symbol
Lr
Lf
Cf
Rf
R0
Fac
Fdc
73
52
6F
DCF1
Fdc
DCF2
CTW
(Note 5)
FWD
CM
M
e f(Note 4)
FX
CN10
CN23
CN94
6F
CN71
RUN
CN51
52T
a
b
R0
T0
R1
T1
X9(THR)
CM
30A
30B
30C
CN96
CN51
CN61
CN71
CN16
CN101
52-1 52-2 52-3
i
j
g
h
CTT
52A
V
Stop
52-3
52-3
73
e
f
CN19
CN101
52-2
FX
V-phase
stack
DCF2
P(+)
N(-)
30A (Note 6)
30B
30C
CN96
CN51
CN61
CN71
CN16
CN101
6F
52-2
Y5A
Y5C
E(G)
CN71
52T
Run
DCF1
Fdc
CN8
CN23
CN94
52-1
CN19
CN101
52A
52-1
DCF1
DCF2
P(+)
N(-)
RST
CM
52T
RDY
E(G)
CN8
CN22
CN93
RUN
g
(Note 2) 52
h (Note 3)
i j
Insulated
transformer
S-phase
stack
L2/S
R2
T2
R3
T3
R1
S1
T1
R0
T0
73A
73C
RUN
CN17
CN100
c
d
RDY
c
d
N(-)
CN96
CN51
CN61
CN71
CN16
CN100
Cf2
CN51
Cf1
RDY
P(+)
CN22
CN93
CN17
CN100
Fac
6F
a
b
P(+)
Fac
(Note 7)
Readyto-run
U-phase
stack U
DCF2
N(-)
CTR
Lr
Lf
Rf
220 V or
below
(Note 1)
Fdc
E(G)
CN96
CN51
CN61
CN71
CN16
CN100
52-1 to 52-3
DCF1
DCF1
DCF2
W-phase
stack
P(+)
W
N(-)
E(G)
Equipment name
Pressurizing reactor
Reactor for filter
Capacitor for filter
Resistor for filter
Charging resistor
AC fuse
DC fuse
Electromagnetic contactor for charging circuit
Electromagnetic contactor for power supply
Filter circuit electromagnetic contactor
(Note 1)
Connect a step-down transformer to ensure that the sequence circuit voltages are exactly the same as shown
in the connection diagram.
(Note 2)
Be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power
via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic contactor (52). When using the product with a
non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated transformer. For more information, refer to
"6.3.15-(5)" in Chapter 6.
(Note 3)
Be sure to connect the power supply for the inverter's AC fan to the main power directly (not via contact b of
#52) so that the power can be fed through terminals R1 and T1.
(Note 4)
Create a sequence in which the PWM converter gets ready for operation before the run signal is input to the
inverter.
(Note 5)
Set the timer for 52T to 1 second.
(Note 6)
Configure one of the inverter's terminals X1 to X9 for use by the external alarm (THR).
(Note 7)
Ensure correct phase sequence when connecting wires to terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1.
6-64
Basic connection diagram 4
■
RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D (MD spec)
■
RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D (LD spec)
■
RHC132S-69D to RHC450S-69D (MD spec)
■
RHC132S-69D to RHC400S-69D (LD spec)
L4
L5
Microswitch for
AC fuse blow
delection
l
L1
Lr
Lf
U0
L2
V0
Fac
L3
W0
52
Rf
Cf
i
j
73-2
(Note 1)
200V/50Hz
220V/60Hz
Readyto-run
a
b
RDY
c
d
52T
73T
ONA
ONB
73
52A
52A
52T
52T
RUN
(Note 6)
CM
Y5A
Y5C
G
R3 (Note 11)
T3
c
d
Run
52
52
Fdc
X1(THR)
RUN
FX
R1
S1
T1
R0
T0
73A
73C
RUN
RST
CM
e
f
DCF1
DCF2
P(+)
(Note 10)
N(-)
73
ONC
m
n
m
n
g
h
U
V
N(-)
R0
T0
R1
T1
M
W
ef
FWD
FX
X9(THR) CM
CM
a
b
30A
30B
30C
13
12
11
G
G
Stop
(Note 5)
73T
L3/T
30A
30B
30C
73
i
j
RDY
ACFAN
Insulated
transformer
RDY
P(+)
L1/R
2
(Note 2) 52
g
(Note 3)
h
(Note 10)
Fdc
L2/S
1
U2
R11
R12
T11 FUS2
T12
73-1
(Note 7)
kl
R3 FUS1
T3 U1
(Note 8)
Microswitch for
DC fuse blow
delection
DCF2
Fac
Fac
Inverter stack
VG1 series
DCF1
L6
k
Power supply
PWM converter stack
RHC-D series
Filter stack
RHF-D siries
R0
73
RUN
F
X
(Note 9)
6-65
Symbol
Equipment name
Lr
Pressurizing reactor
Lf
Reactor for filter
Cf
Capacitor for filter
Rf
Resistor for filter
R0
Charging resistor
Rf
Resistor for filter
Fac
AC fuse
Fdc
DC fuse
73
Electromagnetic contactor for charging
circuit
52
Electromagnetic contactor for power supply
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.3.9.5
(Note 1)
Connect a step-down transformer to ensure that the sequence circuit voltages are exactly the same as shown
in the connection diagram.
(Note 2)
Be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power
via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic contactor (52). When using the product with a
non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated transformer. For more information, refer to
"6.3.15-(5)" in Chapter 6.
(Note 3)
Be sure to connect the power supply for the inverter's AC fan to the main power directly (not via contact b of
#52) so that the power can be fed through terminals R1 and T1.
(Note 4)
Create a sequence in which the PWM converter gets ready for operation before the run signal is input to the
inverter.
(Note 5)
Set the timer for 52T to 1 second.
When using microswitches for AC fuse disconnection detection, assign external alarm (THR) to the PWM
converter's terminal X1, and connect all of the microswitches in series.
(Note 6)
Be sure to assign the PWM converter digital input terminal (X1) to the external alarm (THR), and to connect
the filter stack overheat signal outputs (1, 2). Set contact b input with function code E14 to input with contact b.
Furthermore, connect the microswitch for AC fuse blow detection to the digital input terminal (X1) in series
with all microswitches and the overheat signal outputs (1, 2).
(Note 7)
Ensure correct phase sequence when connecting wires to terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1.
(Note 8)
When inputting 200 VAC as the fan power supply, remove jumper wires from between terminals R11 and R12
and from between terminals T11 and T12, and then connect the input to terminals R12 and T12. Note that
these terminals are dedicated to the internal fan power supply. Do not use them for any other purposes.
(Note 9)
Be sure to set the timer for 73T to 5 seconds.
(Note 10) For the 400V series, connect "Fdc (fuse)" to the P (+) side. No "Fdc (fuse)" is required at the N (-) side. For the
690V series, connect "Fdc (fuse)" to the P (+) side and N (-) side.
Furthermore, use two microswitches and connect them in series.
(Note 11) With the 690V series, there are no R3 or T3 short-circuit wires.

Be sure to assign the PWM converter digital input terminal (X1) to the external alarm (THR), and to connect the
filter stack overheat signal outputs (1, 2).

Be sure to stop the PWM converter and inverter when the overheat signal is output. Furthermore, shut off
electromagnetic contactors 52 and 73.
Risk of fire, accident
6-66
6.3.10 Protective functions
If an error occurs in the PWM converter, the protective function operates to immediately stop (trip) the PWM converter
and display the alarm code on the keypad. If the protective function operates, check and remove the cause, and then
replace any defective parts. When a reset command is input after that, the operation of the protective function is
cancelled, and then the converter operation can be restarted.
For details about alarm contents, refer to Table 6.3.10-1.
6.3.10.1
List of alarm codes
Alarm name
Display
Operation contents
AC fuse blown
ACF
Operates if the external AC fuse of PWM converter is blown due to short-circuiting or
breakage of internal circuits.
AC overcurrent
AOC
Operates if the momentary value of the AC current exceeds the overcurrent detection
level due to short-circuiting or ground fault of the power supply circuit.
ALV
Operates if the AC power supply voltage drops to the insufficient voltage detection
level or less during PWM converter operation.
No alarm is output when "F02: Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Mode
selection)" is set to "1" (Restart).
AC insufficient voltage detection level (400V system: 176 Vrms, 690V series: 350
Vrms)
AC input current
error
ACE
Operates if the deviation between the PWM converter current command value and
input AC power supply detection value exceeds the input current error detection level.
No alarm is output when "F02: Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Mode
selection)" is set to "1" (Restart).
AC overvoltage
AOV
Operates if the AC power supply voltage exceeds the AC overvoltage detection level.
AC overvoltage detection level (400V system: AC 552 Vrms, 690V series: 828 Vrms)
DC overvoltage
dOV
If the regenerative energy from the motor is equal to or greater than the PWM
converter braking capability, this function is activated activated if the DC intermediate
circuit voltage rises and exceeds the DC overvoltage detection level.
DC overvoltage detection level (400V system: DC 800 Vdc, 690V series: 1230 Vdc)
DC fuse blown
dCF
Operates if the DC fuse is blown by short-circuit or breakage of the internal circuit
when the DC fuse is installed in the PWM converter output.
dLV
This function is activated if the DC intermediate circuit voltage drops to the insufficient
voltage detection level or below due to a drop in the power supply voltage during
PWM converter operation.
No alarm is output when "F02: Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Mode
selection)" is set to "1" (Restart).
DC insufficient voltage detection level (400V system: 371 Vdc, 690V series: 540
Vrms)
LPV
This function operates when powered ON and is connected to L1/R, L2/S, or L3/T of
the main power supply input of the main circuit.
If an open-phase or 3-phase power supply voltage unbalance occurs in the 3-phase
power supply, it is necessary to power ON again (power ON reset) in order to reset the
alarm.
AC insufficient
voltage
DC insufficient
voltage
Input open-phase
Operates if any of the following occurs.
Synchronous
power supply
frequency error
• Power supply frequency detection value is beyond the range of 46 to 54 Hz or 56 to
64 Hz (only when powered ON).
FrE
• Frequency is ±15% or more of the reference frequency (50/60 Hz).
• Value three times larger than the standard deviation of the power supply frequency
(3 σ) detects 5 Hz or more (when the run command is input).
No alarm is output when "F02: Restart Mode after Momentary Power Failure (Mode
selection)" is set to "1" (Restart).
6-67
Chapter 6 Converter System
Table 6.3.10-1: List of alarm displays and protective operations
Alarm name
Display
Operation contents
Charging circuit
error
PbF
This function operates when "73 answer back" [73ANS] is selected in the X1 function
selection.
The function also operates if X1 is not input (electromagnetic contactor for charging
circuit bypass is closed) within 0.5 sec. after the charging circuit control output [73A]
signal of the PWM converter has operated.
The alarm is reset by switching the X1 function selection or powering ON again
(power ON reset).
Cooling fin
overheat
OH1
Operates if the temperature around the cooling fins that cool the semiconductor
elements of the main circuit increases due to cooling fan stop.
External alarm
OH2
Performs the PWM converter alarm stop operation by the external signal input (THR).
Overheat inside
converter
OH3
Operates if the temperature around the control PCB increases due to poor ventilation
inside the PWM converter.
Converter overload
OLU
Operates if the AC power supply current exceeds the overload level shown in Figure
6.3.10-1.
MD mode: 150%/60 sec.
LD mode: 110%/60 sec.
Memory error
Er1
Operates if an error occurs in the memory, such as a data write error.
Keypad
communication
error
Er2
Operates if the keypad transmission error occurs.
CPU error
Er3
Operates if the CPU error occurs.
Network unit error
Er4
Operates if a transmission error occurs due to noise during PWM converter operation
through T-Link, SX bus, or CC-Link.
Operates if a PLC unit error, communication faulty wiring, or option failure occurs.
Operation error
Er6
Operates if multiple network options (T-Link, SX bus, or CC-Link) are installed.
A/D converter error
Er8
Operates if an error occurs in the A/D converter circuit.
Erb
Operates if a transmission error occurs in the communication between the PWM
converters using the high-speed serial card (OPC-VG7-SI, OPC-VG7-SIR).
* High-speed serial card: This card is required to configure the parallel operation of
the PWM converters.
Optical network
error
480
480
420
420
360
360
→Operation
time [s]
→動作時間[s]
②LD仕様
(2)
LD mode
→動作時間[s]
→Operation
time [s]
①MD仕様
(1)
MD mode
300
240
300
240
180
180
120
120
60
60
0
80
0
100
120
140
160
180
→Converter
input current value [%]
→コンバータ入力電流値[%]
(100%:
Converter rated input current)
（100%：コンバータ定格入力電流）
90
100
110
120
→Converter
input current [%]
→コンバータ入力電流[%]
(100%:
Converter rated input current)
（100%：コンバータ定格入力電流）
Figure 6.3.10-1: Overload trip time
6-68
6.3.10.2
(1)
Troubleshooting
If the protective function operates [PWM converter main unit]
Overcurrent
AOC
(1) Overcurrent (AOC)
NO
Perform the correct
wiring.
Is the phase order of the wiring to L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R1, S1, and T1 correct?
YES
YES
Remove the short-circuit
or ground fault.
Does any short-circuit or ground fault occur in the wiring or unit of the AC/DC
circuit?
YES
Connect to the power
supply meeting the
specifications.
YES
Chapter 6 Converter System
NO
Decrease the load or
increase the converter
capacity.
Is the load too large?
NO
Does the power supply voltage exceed the specifications?
NO
The converter may be defective.
Consult Fuji Electric.
(2) AC fuse blown (ACF)
AC fuse blown
ACF
(3) DC fuse blown (dCF)
Is the phase order of the wiring
to the AC fuse blown detection
terminals R2 and T2 correct?
Is CN30 connected?
NO
Perform the correct
wiring.
Short-circuit failure may occur
inside the converter. Contact
Fuji Electric.
DC fuse blown
dCF
YES
Is any unit other than that stated in the basic
connection diagram connected to the portion
between the electromagnetic contactor for
the charging circuit and the converter?
YES
Disconnect the units other
than those stated in the
basic connection diagram.
NO
Short-circuit failure may occur
inside the converter. Contact
Fuji Electric.
(4) Overvoltage (AOV, dOV)
Perform the correct
wiring.
NO
Overcurrent
AOV DOV
Is the phase order of the wiring to L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R1, S1, and T1 correct?
YES
Decrease the power supply
voltage to the upper limit of
the specification value or less.
NO
Is the power supply voltage within the specification
value range?
YES
Does a power failure occur during regenerative
operation?
• Make the inverter deceleration
time longer.
• Review the regenerative load.
• Review the converter capacity.
Make the inverter
acceleration time longer.
YES
NO
YES
Is the regenerative load too large?
NO
YES
Does the operation start after completion of rapid
acceleration?
NO
Adjustment inside the
converter is needed.
YES
Does the operation start if the load becomes light
rapidly?
NO
Does the AC power supply use the generator?
YES
NO
Consult Fuji Electric.
6-69
Braking method needs to be
investigated.
Consult Fuji Electric.
(5) Insufficient voltage (ALV, dLV)
Insufficient
voltage (ALV,
dLV)
YES
Does a power failure (including
momentary power failure) occur?
Reset and restart the
operation.
NO
YES
Does a unit failure or connection failure
occur in the power supply circuit?
Replace the defective unit or
correct incorrect connection.
NO
Does the electromagnetic
contactor (73) for the charging
circuit operate only when the main
power supply is turned ON?
NO
Check the sequence circuit of
the electromagnetic contactor
for the charging circuit.
NO
Review the power supply
system to satisfy the
specification value.
YES
Is the power supply voltage within
the specification value range?
YES
Is there any load requiring a large
start current in the same power
supply system?
YES
NO
YES
Does the circuit breaker or
electromagnetic contactor operate
when it is powered ON?
NO
NO
Converter may be faulty.
Contact Fuji Electric.
Converter control circuit is
faulty or malfunctions by
noise.
Contact Fuji Electric
(6) Overheat inside converter (OH3), cooling fin overheat
(OH1), IPM error (IPE)
Overheat inside
converter
OH3
Review the capacity of the
power supply transformer.
YES
Does the DC voltage (between P and N) of
the main circuit exceed the detection level
stated in Table 7.1.1?
6.3.10-1
YES
NO
Is the capacity of the power
supply transformer proper?
Cooling fin overheat
OH1
Is the load too large?
IPM error
IPE
YES
Decrease the load.
NO
Regulate the ambient
temperature to a level within
the specification value range.
NO
Replace the cooling fan.
YES
Is the cooling wind passage
blocked?
Is the load too large? Does
the load exceed the
overload resistance of the
converter?
Is the acceleration/deceleration
operation performed frequently?
NO
YES
Does the cooling fan
rotate?
Converter overload
(OLU)
YES
Decrease the load or increase
the converter capacity.
YES
Review the operation pattern
or increase the converter
capacity.
NO
NO
Is the ambient temperature within
the specification value range?
(7) Converter overload (OLU)
YES
Remove the obstruction.
NO
Converter is faulty or
malfunctions by noise.
Contact Fuji Electric.
6-70
Converter is faulty. Contact
Fuji Electric.
(8) Memory error (Er1), CPU error (Er3)
(11) Synchronous power supply frequency error (FrE)
Synchronous power supply
frequency error (FrE)
Memory error (Er1), CPU error
(Er3)
Repair the faulty location.
Turn OFF the power once. After
the charging lamp (CRG) has
turned off, turn ON the power
again.
NO
Is the power supply frequency
within a range of 46 Hz to 54 Hz
or 56 Hz to 64 Hz?
Is there any noise
production source around
the converter?
NO
NO
Review the power supply
system to satisfy the
specifications.
YES
YES
Is the wiring to the AC power
supply detection terminals R1,
S1, and T1 performed?
Converter is faulty or
malfunctions by noise.
Contact Fuji Electric.
YES
Converter is correct.
Continue the operation.
NO
Perform the wiring correctly.
YES
Is the capacity of the power
supply transformer too small?
(9) Input open-phase (LPV)
NO
Connect a power supply that
satisfies the required power supply
capacity stated in the specification.
YES
Input open-phase
LPV
Does any chattering occur in
the contact on the power supply
side before powering ON?
NO
Replace the contactor or add
a timer to the sequence circuit
to prevent chattering.
YES
Are the electric wires connected to
the power supply terminals L1/R,
L2/S, and L3/T of the main circuit?
NO
Connect the electric wires to all
of three phases.
Does this error occur when the
power is turned OFF?
YES
YES
Change the sequence so that
the conductive load is
separated when the power
supply is turned OFF.
NO
Is any screw on the
terminal block loose?
NO
Tighten the loose screw on the
terminal block.
Is there any significant
waveform distortion in the
power supply waveform?
YES
Is the voltage unbalance of
the 3-phase power supply
large?
YES
YES
Power supply is faulty.
Investigate the power supply
system including the wiring.
NO
Converter is faulty or
malfunctions by noise.
Contact Fuji Electric
Converter is faulty or
malfunctions by noise.
Contact Fuji Electric.
(10) A/D converter error (Er8)
A/D converter error (Er8)
Is any circuit on the PCB shortcircuited or any dust sticking to
the PCB?
YES
Repair the faulty location.
NO
Converter is faulty or
malfunctions by noise.
Contact Fuji Electric.
6-71
NO
Change to other power supply
system.
Chapter 6 Converter System
Does the error code
disappear?
(12) Touch panel communication error (Er2)
(14) Charging circuit error (PbF)
Touch panel communication error
(Er2)
Are the connector and outlet of the
touch panel inserted correctly?
Charging circuit error
(PbF)
NO
Is the auxiliary contact of the
electromagnetic contactor for the
charging circuit connected to “73”
answerback [73ANS] of the digital
input terminal (X terminal)?
* Auxiliary contact of the
electromagnetic contactor for the
power supply for 280 kw or more.
Repair the faulty location.
YES
Connect the auxiliary contact.
If not connected, change the
definition of the digital input (X
terminal).
NO
YES
Turn OFF the power once. After
the charging lamp has turned off,
turn ON the power again.
Is the correct data displayed on
the touch panel?
YES
NO
Does the auxiliary contact of the
electromagnetic contact for the
charging circuit operate within 0.5 sec.
after the charging circuit control output
[73A] has been output?
* Auxiliary contact of the
electromagnetic contactor for the
power supply for 280 kw or more.
Converter is correct.
Continue the operation.
However, if the touch panel
communication error occurs
frequently, the converter may be
faulty.
Contact Fuji Electric.
Check the sequence circuit of the
electromagnetic contactor for the
charging circuit.
NO
YES
Converter is faulty or
malfunctions by noise.
Contact Fuji Electric.
Converter is faulty.
Contact Fuji Electric.
(13) External alarm (OH2)
(15) AC input current error (ACE)
AC input current error
(ACE)
External alarm (OH2)
Is the alarm signal of the external
unit connected to the external
alarm [THR] of the digital input (X
terminal)?
NO
Is any wiring or unit in the AC or
DC circuit short-circuited or
grounded?
Connect the alarm signal contact.
If not connected, change the
definition of the digital input (X
terminal).
YES
Remove the short-circuit fault or
grounding fault.
NO
YES
Does the alarm function of the
connected external unit operate?
YES
Does a momentary power failure
occur?
Remove the cause of the alarm
operation of the external unit.
YES
Reset the converter and restart the
operation.
Or, put the converter in the mode,
Restart after momentary power
failure (F02=1).
NO
NO
Does the operation definition of
E14 (normal open/close) meet the
alarm signal of the external unit?
NO
Does the load status exceed the
current limit level (H15 to H18)?
Change the definition of the
normal open/close.
NO
YES
Consult Fuji Electric.
Converter is faulty or
malfunctions by noise.
Contact Fuji Electric.
6-72
YES
Increase the current limit level,
decrease the load, or increase the
converter capacity.
(2)
If the protective function operates [Network option: Network error (Er4)]
<T-Link: OPC-VG7-TL>
The T-Link option provides two kinds of alarms, light alarm and heavy alarm, according to the failure level.
Cause
Light alarm
Heavy alarm
• Noise is applied to the
communication line.
• Communication line is
disconnected.
• Address is duplicated.
(Setting mistake of RSW 1
and 2)
Power to MICREX (PLC) is
shut down (OFF).
Resolve the cause of the alarm (automatic resolution by
restoring the communication), and give the reset command
(reset from the keypad, [RST], or communication).
Reset method
Alarm may occur only when the
run command is sent from the
Failure state control T-Link.
T-Link option hardware is faulty
(breakage or defect).
Remove the cause of the
hardware failure and reset the
power supply (power ON reset).
Momentary Er4 alarm
Alarm can be controlled with function codes
H02 and H03.
<SX bus: OPC-VG7-SX>
The SX bus option provides two kinds of alarms, light alarm and heavy alarm, according to the failure level.
Item
Light alarm
Heavy alarm 1
• Option hardware failure
Cause
Communication data error due • All master units are failed.
to noise application to the
• Disconnection is detected.
communication line.
• SX bus power supply is
shut down.
Reset method
Resolve the cause of the alarm (automatic resolution by
restoring the communication), and give the reset command
(reset from the keypad, [RST], or communication).
Remove the cause of the
hardware failure and reset the
power supply (power ON reset).
Alarm may occur only when
the run command is sent from
Failure state control the SX bus.
Heavy alarm 2
• Option mounting failure
Momentary Er4 alarm
Alarm can be controlled with function codes
H02 and H03.
Keypad display
(Communication
error code)
1
2
3
(1)
If any heavy alarm 1 occurs, reset also the power supply to the MICREX-SX (power ON reset) depending
on the CPU status.
(2)
The communication error code of a light alarm or heavy
alarm can be checked on the Maintenance Information
Communication Status screen on the keypad. To display
the Communication Status screen, press the PRG key on
the Operation Mode screen to change to the Menu
screen, use the ∧ or ∨ key to move the arrow mark at
0
NRK=xxxxx
NRR=xxxxx xx
NRO=xxxxx xx
NRL=xxxxx xx
the left end of the screen to "5. Maintenance”, and then
press the FUNC/DATA key.
After that, press the V key three times to display the following screen.
6-73
-: No
communication
error
1: Light alarm
2: Heavy alarm 1
3: Heavy alarm 2
Chapter 6 Converter System
Item
<CC-Link: OPC-VG7-CCL>
The CC-Link option provides two kinds of alarms, light alarm and heavy alarm, according to the error level.
Item
Light alarm (operation in the case of communication Heavy alarm (operation in the case of option
line error)
error)
Cause
Reset method
Alarm output
control
• Master unit is failed.
• Option hardware error
• Disconnection is detected.
• Option mounting failure
• Communication data error (Noise is applied to
the communication line.)
After the cause of the alarm has been removed
(automatic release by resetting communication),
give the reset.
• Error is detected only in the CC-Link operation
mode.
• Alarm output method if an error is detected can
be controlled with function codes H02 and H03.
Communication
error code
Remove the cause of the hardware failure
and reset the power supply (power ON reset).
Momentary Er4 alarm
01
02
(3) If the protective function operates [Parallel system: OPC-VG7-SI/OPC-VG7-SIR is used.]
1)
Parallel system alarm display
If an alarm occurs in the master or slave (PWM converter) unit (protective function operates) during parallel system
operation, all units enter the alarm mode and the operations of all converters stop.
At the same time, the alarm code showing the cause of the alarm No. 1 is displayed on the LED displays of the keypads
of all units. According to this alarm code display, a unit in which the alarm occurred can be judged.
Additionally, even when multiple alarms occur at the same time, the cause of only alarm No. 1 is displayed as alarm
caused by other station. Furthermore, the alarm history display is the normal alarm display.
OH2.
2)
Dot display
OH2
0=OH2
0=OH2
External alarm
PRG → Program menu
RESET → Reset
External alarm
PRG → Program menu
RESET → Reset
Alarm occurs in the other station.
(Alarm trip caused by other station)
Alarm occurs in its own station
(Alarm trip caused by its own station)
Link error among converter links (Erb)
If the optical cable has any faulty wiring or the connector drops during PWM converter operation, the protective function
operates by the link error among converters (Erb). (All stacks operate at the same time.) When the PWM converter alarm
output is used as external alarm conditions of the inverter, the inverter is tripped by the alarm and stops in the
coast-to-a-stop mode.
Even when the reset command (any of the keypad, terminal block, and communication system, etc.) is input without the
cause of the alarm reset, the alarm state cannot be cancelled. Be sure to investigate the cause of the alarm, and then
reset it.
6-74
<Troubleshooting "Erb">
If the "Erb" alarm occurs, the following causes may be considered. Check the causes.
• The optical cable is not connected or inserted into the connector completely.  Insert the cable securely into the
optical connector.
• The optical cable is bundled or bent with a bending radius of 35 mm or less. Bend the optical cable to a specified
level.
• The connection plugs of the optical cable do not meet the connector colors (gray and blue) of the PCB.
Match the connector colors on the cable side with those on the PCB side.
3)
Operation procedure error (Er6)
If the station number of this optical communication option is set incorrectly or if the same communication option card is
installed in the inverter, the protective function operates.
This function provides preventive measures so that unstable operation caused by illegal operation is not performed.
<Troubleshooting "Er6">
• The optical link option hardware station number SW1 setting is set to 6 or more.
• The optical link option hardware number SW1 setting is higher than H13 "Number of parallel system slave stations".
Make the setting correctly.
• Two optical link options are installed.  Install only one optical link option.
4)
Reset process
All stations are reset at the same time by the reset command of the master (slave) unit under conditions that the cause of
the alarm is reset.
Master alarm status
Slave alarm status
Reset target
Reset command from master unit
Valid
Valid
All units
Reset command from slave unit
Valid
Valid
All units
6-75
Chapter 6 Converter System
• The optical cable connection is not formed as a loop.  Be sure to loop back the signal from the master.
(4)
Ready-to-run of PWM converter is not completed.
The PWM converter outputs the ready-to-run signal [RDY] that is the inverter operation condition after the run command
[RUN] has been input.
The following describes the troubleshooting if the ready-to-run completion signal is not output after the run command has
been input.
Ready-to-run completion signal is not output.
Is the charging lamp (CRG) lit or
the touch panel displayed?
NO
YES
Are the voltages of the power
supply terminals (L1/R, L2/S,
and L3/T) correct?
Is the converter tripped by the
alarm?
NO
Input RUN.
NO
YES
Is the run command (RUN)
input?
Converter may be faulty.
Contact Fuji Electric.
YES
Perform the correct wiring to R1,
S1, and T1.
NO
Is the wiring to the synchronous
power supply input terminals
(R1, S1, and T1) performed?
YES
Perform the correct wiring.
Check that the phase order of the
power supply (R, S, and T) is
correct.
NO
Is the wiring performed as
described in the basic
connection diagram? Is each
phase correct?
YES
Review the sequence circuit.
NO
Is the electromagnetic contactor
for the charging resistor is
turned ON by the charging
circuit control output [73A]
signal (220 kW or less)?
YES
Perform the correct wiring and
operate the peripheral equipment
correctly.
NO
NO
Turn ON the power.
YES
YES
Remove the cause of the alarm
and start the operation after the
alarm has been reset.
Are the power supply breaker and
electromagnetic contactor turned
ON?
Does the recommended
product with the reactor model
and electric wire size apply?
YES
Converter may be faulty.
Contact Fuji Electric.
6-76
NO
Check for failure, such as voltage
drop, open-phase, connection
fault, or contact fault. After that,
process it properly.
6.3.11 List of function codes
Terminal functions
Function code
Min.
unit
Data range
No.
Name
Factory
default
value
―
0
F00
Data protection
0 to 1
F01
Harmonic filter selection
0 to 1
0
F02
Restart after momentary power failure
(operation selection)
0 to 1
0
F03
Current rating switching
0 to 1
0
F04
LED monitor (display selection)
0 to 5
0
F05
LCD monitor (display selection)
0 to 2
2
F06
LCD monitor (language selection)
0 to 2
0
F07
LCD monitor (contrast adjustment)
0 to 10
5
F08
Carrier frequency
5
5
E01
X1 function selection
0 to 4
1
―
4
E02
Y1 function selection
0 to 14
1
―
0
E03
Y2 function selection
2
E04
Y3 function selection
3
E05
Y5 function selection
1
E06
Y11 function selection
E07
Y12 function selection
E08
Y13 function selection
0
E09
Y14 function selection
0
E10
Y15 function selection
0
E11
Y16 function selection
0
E12
Y17 function selection
0
E13
Y18 function selection
0
E14
I/O function normally open/closed
0000 to 007F
E15
RHC overload warning level
50 to 105%
1
%
80
E16
Cooling fan ON/OFF control
0 to 1
1
―
0
E17
Output during current limiting (hysteresis width)
0 to 30%
1
%
10
E18
AO1 function selection
0 to 10
1
―
1
E19
AO4 function selection
E20
AO5 function selection
E21
AO1 gain setting
E22
AO4 gain setting
E23
AO5 gain setting
E24
AO1 bias setting
E25
AO4 bias setting
E26
AO5 bias setting
E27
AO1-5 filter setting
(1)
OPC-VG7-DIO
option function
0 to 14
1
Unit
1
―
0
0
0000
0
OPC-VG7-AIO
option function
0
-100.00 to 100.00
(multiplication)
0.01
(multiplication)
1.00
1.00
OPC-VG7-AIO
option function
1.00
-100.0 to 100.0%
0.1
%
0.0
0.0
OPC-VG7-AIO
option function
0.0
0.000 to 0.500s
0.001
s
0.010
The settings of the functions in the shaded portions in the list can be changed during operation. Other
functions should be set after the operation has been stopped.
6-77
Chapter 6 Converter System
Basic functions
Function
Table 6.3.11-1: List of function codes
Function
High performance functions
User application functions
Function code
Min.
unit
Unit
Factory
default
value
0 to 255
1
―
1
0 to 3
1
―
3
Data range
No.
Name
H01
Station address
Built-in RS-485
function
H02
Operation selection in
case of error
H03
Timer operation time
Communication
option
common function
0.01 to 20.00s
0.01
s
2.00
H04
Transmission speed
0 to 4
1
―
2
H05
Data length selection
0 to 1
0
H06
Parity bit selection
0 to 2
0
H07
Stop bit selection
0 to 1
0
H08
Communication faulty
wiring time
H09
H10
H11
TL transmission format
H12
Parallel system
H13
Number of parallel
system slave stations
H14
Alarm data deletion
H15
Power supply current limit (drive 1)
H16
Power supply current limit (drive 2)
H17
Power supply current limit (braking 1)
H18
Power supply current limit (braking 2)
H19
Current limit warning (level)
-150 to 150%
H20
Current limit warning (timer)
0 to 60s
1
s
0
U01
Reserved for particular
manufacturers.
-32768 to 32767
1
―
0
U02
SX bus station number
monitor
-32768 to 32767
1
―
0
U03
DC fan alarm cancellation
0000 to FFFF
1
―
0000
U04
AVR control response
-32768 to 32767
1
―
0
U05
DC voltage commend value selection
-32768 to 32767
1
―
0
U06
Reserved for particular manufacturers.
-32768 to 32767
1
―
0
U07
Reserved for particular manufacturers.
-32768 to 32767
0
U08
Reserved for particular manufacturers.
-32768 to 32767
0
U09
Reserved for particular manufacturers.
-32768 to 32767
0
U10
Reserved for particular manufacturers.
-32768 to 32767
0
Built-in RS-485
function
0.0 to 60.0s
0.1
Response interval time
0.00 to 1.00s
Protocol selection
0 to 3
0 to 1
OPC-VG7-TL
function
OPC-VG7-SI
function
OPC-VG7-SX
option function
s
60.0
0.01
s
0.05
1
―
0
1
―
0
0 to 1
0
1 to 5
1
0 to 1
0
0 to 150%
1
%
150
150
-150
-150 to 0%
-150
100
(1)
U01 and U06 to U10 are function codes that are reserved for the manufacturer. Do not change them from
the factory default values.
(2)
U codes to be displayed on the keypad are USER P1 to USER P10.
(3)
The settings of the functions in the shaded portions in the list can be changed during operation. Other
functions should be set after the operation has been stopped.
6-78
6.3.12 Configuration of peripherals
6.3.12.1
In the case of MD
RHF160S-4D
1
RHC160S-4D
RHF160S-4D
RHC200S-4D
Microswitch
Model
1
170M5446
3
SC-N11
1
170M6546
3
500
SC-N12
1
170M6547
3
1
500
SC-N12
1
170M6547
3
RHF280S-4D
1
600
SC-N14
1
170M6499
3
RHC315S-4D
RHF355S-4D
1
700
SC-N14
1
170M6500
3
RHC132S-69D
RHF160S-69D
1
175
SC-N6
1
RHC160S-69D
RHF160S-69D
1
200
SC-N7
1
170M5447
3
RHC200S-69D
RHF220S-69D
1
250
SC-N8
1
170M5448
3
RHC250S-69D
RHF280S-69D
1
300
SC-N8
1
RHC280S-69D
RHF280S-69D
1
350
SC-N11
1
170M6548
3
RHC315S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
400
SC-N11
1
RHC355S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
RHC400S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
170M6500
3
RHC450S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
600
SC-N14
1
Model
300
SC-N8
1
350
RHF220S-4D
1
RHC220S-4D
RHF220S-4D
RHC280S-4D
形式
170H3027
3
* For information on peripherals for RHC630B to 800B-4DJ, refer to "6.3.12.2 List of peripherals with no filter stack
used".
In the case of LD
RHC132S-4D
RHF160S-4D
1
RHC160S-4D
RHF220S-4D
1
RHC200S-4D
RHF220S-4D
RHC280S-4D
RHC315S-4D
AC Fuse
Microswitch
Model
Quantity
Model
Quantity
PWM converter
model
MCCB/ELCB
rated current
[A]
Electromagnetic
contactor
1
170M5446
3
1
170M6546
3
SC-N12
1
170M6547
3
700
SC-N14
1
170M6499
3
800
SC-N14
1
170M6500
3
1
200
SC-N7
1
RHF220S-69D
1
250
SC-N8
1
170M5447
3
RHC200S-69D
RHF220S-69D
1
300
SC-N8
1
170M5448
3
RHC250S-69D
RHF280S-69D
1
350
SC-N11
1
RHC280S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
400
SC-N11
1
170M6548
3
RHC315S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
RHC355S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
RHC400S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
600
SC-N14
1
170M6500
3
Model
350
SC-N11
500
SC-N12
1
500
RHF355S-4D
1
RHF355S-4D
1
RHC132S-69D
RHF160S-69D
RHC160S-69D
Model
Quantity
Filter stack
Quantity
3-phase 690V
3-phase 400V
Power-based
series
(2)
170H3027
3
* For information on peripherals for RHC630B to 800B-4DJ, refer to "6.3.12.2 List of peripherals with no filter stack
used".
6-79
Chapter 6 Converter System
RHC132S-4D
AC Fuse
Quantity
Model
Quantity
PWM converter
model
MCCB/ELCB
rated current
[A]
Electromagnetic
contactor
Quantity
Filter stack
Quantity
3-phase 690V
3-phase 400V
Power-based
series
(1)
Configuration for the RHF-D series filter stacks
The "MCCB (ELCB) rated current" column shows the recommended rated current values at panel
temperatures 50°C or lower.
* Since the ambient temperature is 40°C, the installation environment standards for MCCBs or ELCBs have
been selected taking into account the correction coefficient depending on the temperature conditions (0.90
for 800AF or lower; 0.85 for 1000AF or higher). To select a specific model, consider the short-circuit breaking
capacity of the equipment.

6.3.12.2
Refer to "6.2.12.3 Use of molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)" and "6.2.12.4 Use of earth leakage
circuit breakers (ELCBs)".
List of peripherals with no filter stack used
When configuring a transformer-less parallel system with RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D, use the RHF-D
series filter stacks to implement an input filter. You cannot implement a filter circuit by use of peripherals.
In the case of MD
1
SC-N8
1
SC-N11
1
SC-N11
1
200
RHC200S-4D
SC-N12
1
SC-N12
1
220
RHC220S-4D
280
RHC280S-4D
SC-N3
1
SC-N14
1
315
RHC315S-4D
630
RHC630B-4D
SC-N12
3
710
RHC710B-4D
SC-N4
1
800
RHC800B-4D
SC-N14
3
RHC-D model
Pressurizing
reactor
(Lr)
132
RHC132S-4D
LR4-160C
1
RF4-160C
1
LFC4-160C
1
CF4-160C
1
160
RHC160S-4D
200
RHC200S-4D
LR4-220C
1
RF4-220C
1
LFC4-220C
1
CF4-220C
1
220
RHC220S-4D
280
RHC280S-4D
LR4-280C
1
RF4-280C
1
LFC4-280C
1
CF4-280C
1
315
RHC315S-4D
LR4-315C
1
RF4-315C
1
LFC4-315C
1
CF4-315C
1
630
RHC630B-4D
LR4-630C
1
RF4-630C
1
LFC4-630C
1
CF4-630C *1
710
RHC710B-4D
LR4-710C
1
RF4-710C
1
LFC4-710C
1
800
RHC800B-4D
LR4-800C
1
RF4-800C
1
LFC4-800C
1
Quantity
Quantity
Resistor for
filter
(Rf)
Reactor for
filter
(Lf)
Capacitor for
filter
(Cf)
Quantity
SC-N8
RHC160S-4D
Quantity
RHC132S-4D
160
(52)
Quantity
132
(73)
Quantity
RHC-D model
Contactor for
filter circuit
(6F)
Quantity
Main contactor
Applied motor
capacity [kW]
Charging circuit
contactor
Applied motor
capacity [kW]
(1)
―
―
SC-N4
1
1
SC-N7 *2
1
CF4-710C *1
1
SC-N8
1
CF4-800C *
1
1
*1 Two units of capacitors of the identical type will be delivered when an order is made for any of CF4-630C to
CF4-800C for quantity = "1".
*2 When you apply OPC-VG7-SIR and use it in a transformer-less parallel system, change "(6F)" to "SC-N8".
6-80
In the case of LD
RHC-D model
Quantity
(52)
160
RHC132S-4D
SC-N11
1
SC-N11
200
RHC160S-4D
SC-N12
1
220
RHC200S-4D
315
RHC280S-4D
355
RHC315S-4D
710
RHC630B-4D
1
SC-N12
1
1
SC-N14
1
SC-N4
1
SC-N12
3
3
RHC-D model
Pressurizing
reactor
(Lr)
160
RHC132S-4D
LR4-160C
1
RF4-160C
1
LFC4-160C
1
CF4-160C
200
RHC160S-4D
LR4-220C
1
RF4-220C
1
LFC4-220C
1
CF4-220C
220
RHC200S-4D
315
RHC280S-4D
LR4-315C
1
RF4-315C
1
LFC4-315C
1
CF4-315C
1
355
RHC315S-4D
LR4-355C
1
RF4-355C
1
LFC4-355C
1
CF4-355C *1
1
710
RHC630B-4D
LR4-710C
1
RF4-710C
1
LFC4-710C
1
CF4-710C *1
1
800
RHC710B-4D
LR4-800C
1
RF4-800C
1
LFC4-800C
1
CF4-800C *1
1
1000
RHC800B-4D
LR4-1000C
1
RF4-1000C
1
LFC4-1000C
1
CF4-1000C *1
1
Resistor for
filter
(Rf)
Reactor for
filter
(Lf)
Capacitor for
filter
(Cf)
Quantity
3
SC-N16
Quantity
SC-N14
RHC800B-4D
Quantity
RHC710B-4D
Quantity
800
1000
Applied motor
capacity [kW]
SC-N3
1
Contactor for
filter circuit
(6F)
―
―
SC-N4
1
SC-N8
1
SC-N11/SF
1
1
*1 Two units of capacitors of the identical type will be delivered when an order is made for any of CF4-630C to
CF4-800C for quantity = "1".
Three units of capacitors of the identical type will be delivered when an order is made for any of CF4-1000C for
quantity = "1".
6-81
Chapter 6 Converter System
Quantity
(73)
Main contactor
Quantity
Charging circuit
contactor
Applied motor
capacity [kW]
(2)
6.3.12.3
Input power supply circuit (MCCB, ELCB)
PWM converter (400V series)
Applicable
capacity [kW]
MD spec
132
160
LD spec
MCCB/ELCB rated current [A]
RHC132S-4D
―
300
RHC160S-4D
RHC132S-4D
350
200
RHC200S-4D
RHC160S-4D
500
220
RHC220S-4D
RHC200S-4D
500
280
RHC280S-4D
―
600
315
RHC315S-4D
RHC280S-4D
700
355
―
RHC315S-4D
800
630
RHC630B-4D
―
1400
710
RHC710B-4D
RHC630B-4D
1600
800
RHC800B-4D
RHC710B-4D
1800
1000
―
RHC800B-4D
2200
The "MCCB (ELCB) rated current" column shows the recommended rated current values at panel
temperatures 50°C or lower.
* Since the ambient temperature is 40°C, the installation environment standards for MCCBs or ELCBs have
been selected taking into account the correction coefficient depending on the temperature conditions (0.90
for 800AF or lower; 0.85 for 1000AF or higher). To select a specific model, consider the short-circuit breaking
capacity of the equipment.

Refer to "6.2.12.3 Use of molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)" and "6.2.12.4 Use of earth leakage
circuit breakers (ELCBs)".
6-82
6.3.13 Parallel system (capacity expansion)
A "parallel system" means that multiple PWM converters are connected in parallel to increase the total capacity of the
converters. For example, when three 200 kW PWM converters are driven in parallel, this converter parallel system can
produce an output power up to 600 kW or equivalent.
Controlling a parallel system requires the use of the optical link option card for parallel systems (OPC-VG7-SIR) so that
each individual converter can be controlled in terms of synchronous behavior and load current balancing.
(1)
If a PWM converter failure occurs during parallel operation of two PWM converters and one converter stops, the
reduced capacity operation with the other remaining converter can be made (single converter operation).
(2)
There are two kinds of parallel systems: transformer-less connection and transformer insulation connection. Select
a desired system.
To connect PWM converters in parallel (so that all of them have the same output voltage), ensure that they all
have the same capacity.
6.3.13.1
Transformer-less parallel system
In this system, the input to each PWM converter is not insulated
by a transformer or the like and the PWM converters are
connected to the same power supply system.
電源トランス
Power
transformer
• Unit type is a dedicated product.
(RHC-4CR * Standard equipment for the OPC-VG7-SIR)
• The OPC-VG7-SIR (option) allows the use of the stack type.
Table 6.3.13-1: Transformer-less parallel system control
specifications
Item
Specifications
Unit
Stack
Applicable converter
CT spec only
MD spec, LD spec
Max. number of
converters connected
in parallel
3 units (Master: 1 unit, Slave: 2 units)
Output voltage
Fixed at 710 VDC
Carrier frequency
5 kHz
MC
Lf Rf
MC
Lr
Lf Rf
Lf
Input power supply *1
3-phase 380 to 440 V 50/60 Hz
Input power factor
Approx. 0.94 (30% or more load)
*1 When the input power supply voltage is less than 400 V, the
capacity needs to be reduced.
6-83
Lr
Lf Rf
Lf
Lr
Lf
R,S,T
R,S,T
R,S,T
Master
PWM
マスタ
converter
PWMコンバータ
Slave
1 PWM
スレーブ1
converter
PWMコンバータ
Slave
2 PWM
スレーブ2
converter
PWMコンバータ
OPC-VG7SIR
OPC-VG7SIR
OPC-VG7SIR
P,N
IN
OUT
直流母線（INV-DC入力）
DC
bus (INV-DC input)
2.5 kHz
MC
P,N
IN
OUT
P,N
IN
OUT
Optical
cable
光ケ－ブル
Figure 6.3.13-1: Transformer-less parallel system
connection diagram
Chapter 6 Converter System
A parallel system is characterized by the following:
6.3.13.2
Transformer insulation type parallel system
This system insulates the input to the PWM converter by use of
a transformer.
電源トランス
Power
transformer
Use the OPC-VG7-SI optical link option card.
Table 6.3.13-2: Transformer insulation type parallel system
control specifications
Item
Applicable converter
Lf Rf
Specifications
Unit
CT spec, VT
spec
MC
Stack
MC
Lr
Lf Rf
Lf
MD spec, LD spec
Max. number of
converters connected 6 units (Master: 1 unit, Slave: 5 units)
in parallel
R,S,T
Output voltage
640 to 710 VDC
Carrier frequency
Same as rating
specifications.
Input power supply *1
400V series:
3-phase, 380 to 440 V/50Hz,
380 to 460 V/60 Hz
Input power factor
Approx. 0.99 (100% or more load) *2
Lr
Lf Rf
IN
OUT
R,S,T
Slave
1 PWM
スレーブ1
converter
PWMコンバータ
P,N
Lr
Lf
R,S,T
OPC-VG7SI
電源トランス
Power
transformer
MC
Lf
Master
PWM
マスタ
converter
PWMコンバータ
P,N
電源トランス
Power
transformer
OPC-VG7SI
IN
OUT
Slave
2 PWM
スレーブ2
converter
PWMコンバータ
P,N
OPC-VG7SI
IN
5 kHz
直流母線（INV-DC入力）
DC
bus (INV-DC input)
Figure 6.3.13-2: Transformer insulation type
parallel system connection diagram
*1 When the input power supply voltage is less than 400 V, the
capacity needs to be reduced.
*2 When the power supply voltage is 420 V or more and the
operating load is 50% or more, the power factor of the power
supply is reduced to approx. 0.95 (only during regenerative
operation).
6-84
OUT
6.3.13.3
Parallel system common specifications
Specifications
Parallel control method
AVR constant control with DC ACR minor
Input harmonic current
Conversion coefficient Ki can be set to zero (0) according to the harmonics suppressing
guideline by METI.
Restart after momentary
power failure
When a momentary power failure occurs, the gate is shut off at the insufficient voltage
level, and the converter resumes operation automatically following recovery.
Control function
A part of the slave unit functions is restricted. *1
Protective functions
Communication
Item
*1
Data transmission
method
Asynchronous serial communication through plastic optical fiber (loop-back method)
Transmission rate
1 Mbps
Error check method
Parity, framing, overrun, BCC, or time-out monitor
20 m (0 to 70°C) - If the wiring length exceeds 20 m, the communication cannot be
Max. optical cable
guaranteed due to transmission loss.
length (Transmission
* Optical cable supplied with OPC-VG7-SI as standard: 5 m (10 m or 15 m cable
distance)
should be ordered separately.)
Erb alarm process
(Erb: Link error)
All PWM converters in the parallel system are stopped when an alarm output (30A/B/C)
is received. *2
Process if protective
function operates
All PWM converters in the parallel system are stopped when an alarm output (30A/B/C)
is received. *2
When 30A/B/C is operated, all the PWM converters should be forcibly stopped via an
external sequence to ensure the safety.
Protective function
reset process
When a reset command is sent to a desired PWM converter connected through the
optical link option card, all the other PWM converter are also reset at the same time
(when the cause of the alarm is removed).
The function code setting is restricted as follows.
The master can be set in the same manner as the standard product except for carrier frequency setting (F08).
However, the slave functions are restricted.
 For details, refer to the instruction manuals listed below.
*2
• RHC-C series
Optical link option for parallel system (OPC-VG7-SI): INR-HF52179
• RHC-C series
Optical link option for transformer-less parallel system (OPC-VG7-SIR): INR-HF51998
• RHC-D series
High-efficiency power regeneration PWM converter (stack type): INR-SI47-1722
For more information on the any alarm protective operation for all the converters in parallel system:
 Refer to "(3) If the protective function operates [Parallel system: OPC-VG7-SI/OPC-VG7-SIR is used.]" in
"6.3.10.2 Troubleshooting".
6-85
Chapter 6 Converter System
Table 6.3.13-3: Specifications common to both "transformer-less" and "transformer insulation type" parallel systems
Optical fiber cable connection
The optical fiber cable plug colors at both ends are
different from each other (gray and blue).
Table 6.3.13-4: Connectors on the optical link option card
Connect each optical fiber cable to the same-colored
connector on the optical link option card. The connection
is performed so that the entire connection is looped.
Blue
Gray
ブルー
グレー
(receive)
(受信) (send)
(送信)
7 8
TX
Gray
Transmitter (optical
communication send)
R-2528
RX
Blue
Receiver (optical
communication receive)
5 6
7 8
4
4
Blue
Gray
ブルー
グレー
(receive)
(send)
(受信)
(送信)
SW1
R-2528 T-1528
9 0 1
2 3
2 3
Gray
グレー
(send)
(送信)
Blue
ブルー
(受信)
(receive)
Overview
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
SLAVE 2
スレーブ２
R-2528 T-1528
9 0 1
5 6
T-1528
Blue
Gray
ブルー
グレー
(receive)
(send)
(受信)
(送信)
SW1
R-2528 T-1528
9 0 1
4
Color
2 3
7 8
Name
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
SLAVE 1
スレーブ１
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
OPC-VG7-SI/SIR
MASTER
マスタ
SW1
Part number
5 6
(1)
Blue
ブルー
(受信)
(receive)
Gray
グレー
(送信)
(send)
Blue
ブルー
(受信)
(receive)
Gray
グレー
(送信)
(send)
（３台の例）
(Example
of 3 units)
Figure 6.3.13-3: Example of optical fiber cable connections
Table 6.3.13-5: Max. absolute rating of plastic fiber cable
Item
Storage temperature
range
Mini Maxi Unit
mum mum
-40
Tension
+75
°C
50
N
Remarks
30 min. or less
Short-time bending
radius
10
—
mm
Long-time bending
radius
35
—
mm
Tensile strength (long
time)
—
1
N
Flexibility
—
1000 times Bent 90° on 10 mm-mandrel (mandrel, spindle).
Impact
—
0.5
kg
Operation stops within 1 hr. and "Erb" alarm is given.
If the cable is bent to a radius of 35 mm or less for a long time, "Erb"
alarm may be given.
Be sure to keep that the bending radius is 35 mm or more.
Impact test shall conform to MIL-1678, Method2030, Procefurel.
6-86
6.3.13.4
Configuration table for transformer-less parallel system
You can implement a redundant system with a greater capacity by connecting two or three converters that have the
same capacity in parallel.
Table 6.3.13-6 to Table 6.3.13-8 provides a list of typical combinations but other configurations are also possible.
Table 6.3.13-6: Example of combinations in a transformer-less parallel system
(in the case of the 400V series in the MD spec mode)
Phase-specific
Chapter 6 Converter System
Single unit
Connected
system
Capacity
(kW)
Applicable
converter
Applicable
converter
Number
of units
132
RHC132S-4D
160
RHC160S-4D
200
RHC200S-4D
220
RHC220S-4D
280
RHC280S-4D
315
RHC315S-4D
355
RHC200S-4D
2
400
RHC200S-4D
2
500
RHC280S-4D
2
630
RHC315S-4D
2
RHC630B-4D
710
RHC280S-4D
3
RHC710B-4D
800
RHC280S-4D
3
RHC800B-4D
Applicable converter
Applicable
converter
Number
of units
1000
RHC630B-4D
2
1200
RHC630B-4D
2
1500
RHC800B-4D
2
1800
RHC630B-4D
3
2000
RHC710B-4D
3
2400
RHC800B-4D
3
*1
Requires the option OPC-VG7-SIR.
*2
To connect PWM converters in parallel (so that all of them have the same output), ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
6-87
Table 6.3.13-7: Example of combinations in a transformer-less parallel system (in the case of the 400V series in the LD
spec mode)
Single unit
Phase-specific
Connected
system
Capacity
(kW)
Applicable
converter
Applicable
converter
Number
of units
160
RHC132S-4D
200
RHC160S-4D
220
RHC200S-4D
400
RHC160S-4D
2
500
RHC280S-4D
2
630
RHC280S-4D
2
710
RHC315S-4D
2
RHC630B-4D
800
RHC280S-4D
3
RHC710B-4D
1000
RHC315S-4D
3
RHC800B-4D
Applicable converter
Applicable converter
Number
of units
280
315
RHC280S-4D
355
RHC315S-4D
1200
RHC630B-4D
2
1500
RHC710B-4D
2
1800
RHC800B-4D
2
2000
RHC800B-4D
2
2400
RHC710B-4D
3
3000
RHC800B-4D
3
*1
Requires the option OPC-VG7-SIR.
*2
To connect PWM converters in parallel (so that all of them have the same output), ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
6-88
Table 6.3.13-8 Example of combinations in a transformer-less parallel system (in the case of the 690V series)
MD spec
LD spec
Capacity
(kW)
Applicable
converter
132
Applicable
converter
Number
of units
Applicable
converter
Applicable converter
Number
of units
RHC132S-69D
-
-
-
160
RHC160S-69D
RHC132S-69D
200
RHC200S-69D
RHC160S-69D
250
RHC250S-69D
RHC200S-69D
280
RHC280S-69D
RHC250S-69D
315
RHC315S-69D
RHC280S-69D
355
RHC355S-69D
RHC315S-69D
400
RHC400S-69D
RHC355S-69D
450
RHC450S-69D
RHC400S-69D
500
RHC250S-69D
2
RHC250S-69D
2
630
RHC315S-69D
2
RHC280S-69D
2
710
RHC355S-69D
2
RHC315S-69D
2
800
RHC400S-69D
2
RHC355S-69D
2
1000
RHC355S-69D
3
RHC315S-69D
3
1200
RHC400S-69D
3
RHC355S-69D
3
1350
RHC450S-69D
3
RHC400S-69D
3
*1
Requires the option OPC-VG7-SIR.
*2
To connect PWM converters in parallel (so that all of them have the same output), ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
6-89
Chapter 6 Converter System
Connected
system
6.3.13.5
Parallel system connection diagram
R3,T3
CRX
【RUN】
【X1】
【RST】
【CM】 P,N
D
RHCRHC
D-Type
マスタ
MASTER
R0,T0
R1,S1,T1
R3,T3
【Y5A】
【Y5C】
→【RDY】
【30A】
【30B】
【30C】
→【30】
CRX
【RUN】
【X1】
【RST】
【73A】
【73C】
【CM】 P,N
RX TX
Main power
主電源
supply
L1/R,L2/S,
L3/T
Control power
制御電源
supply
R0,T0
R1,S1,T1
R3,T3
【Y5A】
【Y5C】
→【RDY】
【30A】
【30B】
【30C】
→【30】
CRX
【RUN】
【X1】
【RST】
【73A】
【73C】
【CM】 P,N
RHC
D
RHC
D-Type
スレーブ1
SLAVE 1
RX TX
SW1=2
SW2-1=ON
SW2-2=OFF
R1,S1,T1
Control power
制御電源
supply
L1/R,L2/S,
L3/T
OPC-VG7-SI□
R0,T0
Main power
主電源
supply
SW1=1
SW2-1=ON
SW2-2=OFF
Control power
制御電源
supply
RX TX
OPC-VG7-SI□
L1/R,L2/S,
L3/T
SW1=0
SW2-1=ON
SW2-2=OFF
Main power
主電源
supply
OPC-VG7-SI□
Optical
fiber cable
光ファイバーケーブル
【Y5A】
【Y5C】
→【RDY】
【30A】
【30B】
【30C】
→【30】
【73A】
【73C】
D
RHCRHC
D-Type
スレーブ2
SLAVE
2
直流母線（インバータへ電源供給）
DC
bus (power supply to inverter)
Figure 6.3.13-4: Parallel system connection diagram
(1)
(2)
(3)
Configure a sequence where the units are
powered ON at the same time.
The parallel system does not detect any alarm
unless the operation starts.
If an alarm occurs (30X operation), all PWM
converters are stopped by the alarm. To ensure
the safety, open the RUN signals of all the
converters.
MASTER
SLAVE 1
SLAVE 2
30C
30C
30C
30
30
30
30A
30A
30A
コンバ-タ run
Converter
運転指令
command
インバ-タrun
Inverter
運転指令
command
MASTER
Y5C
30X
MASTER
MASTER
バイパス
Bypass
SLAVE 1
バイパス
Bypass
MASTER
MASTER
バイパス
Bypass
RDY
Y5A
SLAVE 2
バイパス
Bypass
SLAVE 1
Y5C
SLAVE11
SLAVE
バイパス
Bypass
RDY
Y5A
Configure a sequence where the run command is
sent to the inverters after the ready-to-run [RDY]
signals of all PWM converters have been
confirmed.
SLAVE 2
Y5C
RDY
Y5A
30X
CRX
SLAVE22
SLAVE
バイパス
Bypass
IRX
Figure 6.3.13-5: Converter run command sequence (1)
(4)
The alarms of all PWM converters (units) can be simultaneously reset by inputting the [RST] signal from
any unit. When switched to the single unit system, only the unit that inputs the [RST] signal is to be reset.
(5)
When using the parallel/single unit system switching function, assign [OPT-DI] to the contact input of X1.
Configure a sequence circuit where the [OPT-DI] signal is input and the run command bypasses the
alarm circuits other than those for the single unit operation unit and inputs to only the single unit operation
unit when switching to the single unit system.
(6)
Input the run and stop commands to both the Run and
運転・停止
stop
master and slave units.
(7)
The run and stop commands are the same
as the standard model.
commands
指令
OPCVG7-SI□
OPCVG7-SI□
OPCVG7-SI□
Master
マスタ
Slave 1
スレーブ1
Slave 2
スレーブ2
[RUN]
【RUN】
P,N
[RUN]
【RUN】
P,N
[RUN]
【RUN】
P,N
Figure 6.3.13-6: Converter run command sequence (2)
6-90
6.3.13.6
Charging circuit in parallel system
When only one charging circuit is used for the parallel system or when the PWM converter has the reduced unit (single
unit) operation mode, select an appropriate charging circuit (charging resistor and electromagnetic contactor) based on
the capacity calculated using Equation 6.3.13-1.
• Calculate the total capacity of the PWM converters and inverters connected to the DC bus bar (PN).
• After that, the total capacity is multiplied by "1/2". Select the appropriate charging resistor (R0) and electromagnetic
contactor (73) from the appropriate PWM converter capacity stated in "6.3.12.2 List of peripherals with no filter stack
used" according to the calculated capacity.
 P
CNV  PINV
 ･･･ Equation 6.3.13-1
＜CNV1＞
<CNV1>
73
Power supply
transformer
電源トランス
MCCB1
52-1
PWM converter
PWMコンバータ
(master)
（マスタ）
R0
Lf1
Lr1
ACF1
R，S，T
6F1
P,N
OPC-VG7SIR
Rf1
Cf1
＜INV1＞
P,N
Lr2
M
＜INV3＞
PWM converter
PWMコンバータ
(slave)
（スレーブ）
Lf2
U,V,W
Inverter
インバータ
P,N
52-2
M
＜INV2＞
P,N
＜CNV2＞
<CNV2>
MCCB2
U,V,W
インバータ
Inverter
ACF2
R，S，T
6F2
P,N
OPC-VG7SIR
Rf2
Cf2
U,V,W
Inverter
インバータ
＜INV4＞
P,N
U,V,W
Inverter
インバータ
M
＜INV5＞
P,N
U,V,W
Inverter
インバータ
Figure 6.3.13-7: Parallel system configuration (such as configured by one charging circuit)
6-91
M
M
Chapter 6 Converter System
1

2
DC
bus
直流母線
P(CHG) 
6.3.14 System configuration examples
System configuration diagram
No
(Symbols in diagram)
F: Filter circuit or filter stack (RHF-D)
C: PWM converter (RHC-C,RHC-D)
I: Inverter, TBSI, SI, SIR: Optical communication card
(Option)
Transformer
トランス
（多相）
(multi-phase)
F
C
I
TBSI
1
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
Transformer
トランス
(multi-phase)
（多相）
F
C
F
C
多巻線
I
Multiwinding
モータ
motor
I
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
Transformer
トランス
(multi-phase)
（多相）
F
C
I
F
C
I
SI
TBSI
SI
TBSI
C
I
3
Power
電源
supply
F
F
C
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
I
TBSI
4
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
F
C
F
C
多巻線
I
Multiwinding
モータ
motor
Power
電源
supply
TBSI
F
C
F
C
I
Multiwinding
多巻線
motor
モータ
I
TBSI
Power
電源
supply
F
C
I

Applicable
 Unit type (RHC-C)
 Applicable
 Stack type (RHC-D)
• RHC132S to 315S-4D
 X Not applicable (*2)
• RHC630B to 800B-4D
  Applicable
—
—
(For direct parallel
connection, use
No.3.)
 Applicable
C: Up to 6
parallel sets
I: Up to 3
parallel sets

Applicable
 Applicable
C: Up to 6 units
I: Up to 6
parallel sets

Applicable
 Unit type (RHC-C)
 Applicable
 Stack type (RHC-D)
• RHC132S to
315S-4D̶
 X Not applicable *2
• RHC630B to 800B-4D
  Applicable
(To ensure that all
the PWM converters
have the same
output, use No.7.)
—
—
—
—
X Not applicable
TBSI
6
Filter circuit (peripheral
equipment) application
X Not applicable
I
TBSI
5
 Applicable
C: Up to 6 units
I: Up to 6
parallel sets
Filter stack
(RHF-D)
application *1
X Not applicable
TBSI
2
System
configuration
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
(To ensure that all
the PWM converters
have the same
output, use No.8.)
*1 The filter stacks (RHF-D) are dedicated to the use with stack type PWM converters (RHC-D). It cannot be used with
unit type PWM converters (RHC-C).
*2 There are restrictions on the use of a filter circuit (peripheral equipment) with stack type PWM converters (RHC-D).
Refer to "6.3.12.2 List of peripherals with no filter stack used".
(Note 1)
When using any of the above in direct parallel connection and multi-winding driving systems, ensure that all
the inverters have the same capacity.
(Note 2)
When a single PWM converter is used to drive multiple inverters, ensure that the PWM converter capacity is
equal to or greater than the inverter capacity (total).
(Note 3)
When a motor is run in a direct parallel connection system, there is a restriction on the wiring length of motor.
Refer to "9.4.8 Wiring inductance" in Chapter 9.
(Note 4)
Be sure to turn ON the main power to all the PWM converters at once.
6-92
No
F
C
I
SIR
TBSI
SIR
TBSI
F
C
I
F
C
I
SIR
TBSI
SIR
TBSI
C
I
7
Power
電源
supply
8
Power
電源
supply
F
F
9
C
Power
電源
supply
多巻線
Multiwinding
モータ
motor
10
多巻線
 Applicable
I: Up to 6
parallel sets

Applicable
 Applicable
I: Up to 3
parallel sets

Applicable
Multiwinding
モータ
motor
I
TBSI
TBSI
I

Applicable
 Unit type (RHC-C)
 Applicable
 Stack type (RHC-D)
• RHC132S to 315S-4D
 X Not applicable
(*2)
• RHC630B to 800B-4D
  Applicable
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
TBSI
C
Filter circuit (peripheral
equipment) application

Applicable
TBSI
F
Power
電源
supply
 Applicable
C: Up to 3
parallel sets
I: Up to 6
parallel sets
Filter stack
(RHF-D)
application *1
 Applicable
C: Up to 3
parallel sets
I: Up to 3
parallel sets
I
I
System
configuration
Single単巻線
winding
モータ
motor
 Unit type (RHC-C)
 Applicable
 Stack type (RHC-D)
• RHC132S to
315S-4D
 X Not applicable
(*2)
• RHC630B to 800B-4D
  Applicable
*1 The filter stacks (RHF-D) are dedicated to the use with stack type PWM converters (RHC-D). It cannot be used with
unit type PWM converters (RHC-C).
*2 There are restrictions on the use of a filter circuit (peripheral equipment) with stack type PWM converters (RHC-D).
Refer to "6.3.12.2 List of peripherals with no filter stack used".
(Note 1)
When using any of the above in direct parallel connection and multi-winding driving systems, ensure that all
the inverters have the same capacity.
(Note 2)
When a single PWM converter is used to drive multiple inverters, ensure that the PWM converter capacity is
equal to or greater than the inverter capacity (total).
(Note 3)
When a motor is run in a direct parallel connection system, there is a restriction on the wiring length of motor.
Refer to "9.4.8 Wiring inductance" in Chapter 9.
(Note 4)
Be sure to turn ON the main power to all the PWM converters at once.
To connect PWM converters in parallel (so that all of them have the same output), ensure that they all have the
same capacity.
6-93
Chapter 6 Converter System
System configuration diagram
(Symbols in diagram)
F: Filter circuit or filter stack (RHF-D)
C: PWM converter (RHC-C,RHC-D)
I: Inverter, TBSI, SI, SIR: Optical communication card
(Option)
6.3.15 Wiring
6.3.15.1
(1)
Precautions on wiring
Main circuit (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T)
When installing filter stacks (RHF-D series)
The main circuit's power supply terminals L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T should be connected to the filter stack's terminals U1, V1,
and W1.
When not installing filter stacks (RHF-D series)
The main circuit's power supply terminals L1/R, L2/S, and L3/T should be connected to the power supply through the
charging circuits (R0, 73), pressurizing reactor (Lr), filter circuits (Lf/Rf/Cf), contactor for power supply (MC), and molded
case circuit breaker (MCCB).
Install the charging circuit box, if applicable, between the power supply terminals (L1/R, L2/S, L3/T) and the
electromagnetic contactor for the charging circuit. Do not connect any other device (such as a zero-phase reactor)
between the charging circuit box and any of L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, and T2.
The same circuit configuration is also used for the
Power
capacity range that uses the charging box. supply
Additionally, an MCCB or electromagnetic
contactor (MC) should be used to ensure that the
main circuit can be separated from the power
supply system when the protective function of the
PWM converter or inverter operates (alarm trip)
for some reason.
R0
(Charging resistor)
Lf
MCCB
PWM
converter
Lr
MC (Filter reactor) (Boosting reactor)
73
F
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
F
Rｆ
R1
S1
T1
The wirings of the filter circuit, pressurizing
reactor, and charging circuit should be connected
as illustrated in Figure 6.3.15-1.
(Filter resistor)
Cｆ
Control
circuit
(Filter capacitor)
Figure 6.3.15-1: Main input circuit of PWM converter
(1) If the wiring is connected incorrectly, the PWM converter does not operate correctly, possibly causing
damage to each unit.
(2) The pressurizing slightly generates electromagnetic sound due to high frequency current flowing through
it.
If this electromagnetic sound is undesirable, store the boosting reactor into the cabinet.
1)
Capacitor for filter
The wiring length between the filter capacitor and filter reactor must
be 5 m or less.
Lf
(Filter reactor)
Lr
(Boosting reactor)
L1/R
L2/S
The effect of the filter may decrease due to the effect of
the wiring inductance.
The filter resistor generates the heat during PWM converter
operation. Even when the inverter stops, the PWM converter
performs the constant power factor control as the PWM converter
operates.
The surface temperature of this resistor may reach approx. 100°C.
So, it is recommended to install the filter resistor on the cabinet
ceiling (cabinet exterior).
(Refer to "12.5.2 Principles in designing layout in cabinets" in
Chapter 12.)
PWM converter
L3/T
L ≤ 5m
Rf
(Filter resistor)
Cf
(Filter capacitor)
Figure 6.3.15-2: Wiring length of filter circuit
When storing the filter resistor into the cabinet, heat radiation measures must be investigated sufficiently. (Investigate a
structure where the heat of the filter resistor does not adversely affect units stored inside the cabinet.)
6-94
(2)
Main circuit (P(+), N(-))
Connect the converter output terminals (P(+),N(-)) to the inverter DC input terminals (P(+),N(-)). Bus bar connections are
assumed. When connecting by wire, ensure that the distance between the stacks (i.e., between the PWM converter and
inverter) is within 2 meters.
Similarly, when connecting wires to a branch line or terminal of the DC bus bar, ensure that the wiring length is within 2
meters and that the wires are in close contact (or twisted).
Stack-to-stack
distance should
be 2 m or smaller.
All the wires should
be identical.
DC bus bars
Within 2 m
Within 2 m
DCF
DCF
PWM converter
Inverter
PWM converter
Figure 6.3.15-3: Connecting P and N terminals
by wires
(3)
Inverter
Figure 6.3.15-4: Connecting P and N terminals
by bus bars
Grounding
To ensure the safety and take noise prevention measures, be sure to ground the grounding terminals
G of the PWM
converter and inverter. In the Electrical Equipment Technical Standards, it is instructed to perform the grounding to the
metallic frame of the electrical equipment so as to prevent accidents, such as electric shock or fire.
To connect the terminal, follow the steps below.
1) Connect to grounding electrodes on which class C grounding work (400V series) or class A grounding work (690V
series) has been carried out in accordance with the Electrical Equipment Technical Standards.
2) Connect a thick wire to the grounding terminal with a short distance and connect the grounding terminal to the
grounding pole dedicated to the inverter system.
For details, refer to "6.3.15.2 Wire size".
6-95
Chapter 6 Converter System
In close contact (or twisted)
DC bus bar branch
(DC bus bar branch
terminal)
Control Circuit
1)
R1, S1, and T1 terminals
PWM
converter
PWMコンバ－タ
Since the R1, S1, and T1 terminals are intended to input the
reference signal of the converter, connect a filter reactor (Lf) without
waveform distortion to the power supply side. The wiring length
must be 5 m or less.
Digital input terminals (RUN, X1, RST, PLC, CM)
 When inputting using the relay contact, use a contact (high
contact reliability) that does not cause any contact fault.
Example: Fuji Electric’s control relay HH54PW
Transistor output terminals (Y1, Y2, Y3, CME)
Lf
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
Control
power Synchronous
制御
同期電源
supply
power supply
電源端子
検出
terminal
detection
 The digital input terminals are turned ON or OFF by the CM
terminal.
On the other hand, when the digital input terminals are
turned ON or OFF by the open collector output of the
programmable controller (PLC) using the external power
supply, they may malfunction due to round-about leakage
circuit.
In this case, use the PLC terminal to make the connection
as illustrated in Figure 6.3.15-6.
3)
MC
R0
T0
2)
MCCB
R1
S1
T1
(4)
Figure 6.3.15-5: Connection of voltage
detection terminal
PLC
PWM converter
PWMコンバ－タ
PLC
External
外部
power
supply
電源
DC24V
RUN,X1,
RST
CM
Figure 6.3.15-6: Prevention of round-about leakage
by external power supply
 Carefully check the polarities of the external power supply.
 When connecting a control relay, connect a surge
absorption diode to both ends of the exciting coil.
Contact output terminals (Y5A, Y5C, 30A, 30B, 30C)
5)
Charging circuit control signals (73A, 73C)
These are control output signals for the charging circuit. Wire these
signals, referring to the basic connection diagram.
6)
30A
The contact specifications are 220 VAC, Max. 50 mA (cosφ=
0.3)/service life 200 thousand cycles, 24 VDC, 1 A (T = 7 ms)/service
life 150 thousand cycles. If the terminals exceed these specification
values, they should be relayed by the relays with large contact
capacity. Additionally, when multiple contact points are needed, the
contacts should be amplified using relays having many contact points.
30C
30
30B
4)
Number
接点数 of contacts
X
Contact
接点出力
output
電源
Power supply
Figure 6.3.15-7: Amplification of the contact
capacity and the number of contacts
Charging circuit drive input (RHF-D series filter stacks) (73-1, 73-2)
These are control input signals for the charging circuit. Wire these signals, referring to the basic connection diagram.
6-96
7)
Sequence circuit
The breaker on the power supply side may trip depending on the failure contents of the PWM converter stack. In the
standard circuit configuration, the sequence circuit is connected from the secondary side of the MCCB to the auxiliary
power supply circuit. So, the auxiliary power supply is also shut down.
In this case, the failure status is not retained. As the breaker is turned ON next, and the contactor is turned ON, the
damage inside the converter may expand. To prevent expansion of damage, it is recommended to retain the alarm signal
of the PWM converter using the keep relay.
Additionally, a configuration needs to be investigated that stops the operation of the converter by taking the safety into
consideration if the protective function on the inverter stack side operates (alarm trip).
DCF1
<CNV1>
P,N
30A
30CX
30C
RUN
RUN
Y5A
CM
Y5C
Ready運転
to-run
準備
DCF2
<INV1>
MC
30CX
FX1
DCF3
<INV2>
X7(BX)
P,N
30A
CM
30C
30CX
FX2
FWD
CM
<INV3>
X7(BX)
P,N
30A
CM
30C
30CX
FX3
FWD
X7(BX)
P,N
30A
CM
30C
FWD
CM
CM
Y5C
<CNV>
30C
30C
RCX
RCX
RCX
<INV1>
30C
<INV2>
30C
<INV3>
30C
30V1
Y5A
30A
Reset
運転
Run
運転
Run
運転
Run
30A
30A
30A
30V2
30V3
30VX
30C
MC
RUN
RCX
S
R
30CX
FX1
FX2
FX3
30V1
30V2
30V2
30VX
Figure 6.3.15-8: Example of sequence configuration
(5)
Auxiliary control power input (R0, T0) and fan power input (CNV: R3, T3 INV: R1, T1)
The wiring to the "R0, T0" "R1, T1" and "R3, T3" terminals may vary depending on the applicable inverter/PWM
converter. As described in the group shown in
Table 6.3.15-1, perform the wiring according to the applicable inverter/PWM converter.
Groups D and E apply to the configuration that connects the stack type inverter and PWM converter stack. This section
describes group E.
Table 6.3.15-1: Wiring to R0 and T0 terminals
Group
A
B
C
D
Applicable inverter/converter
Wiring to R0 and T0 Terminals
FRN22G11S- or less, FRN22P11S- or less
FRN15VG7S- or less
FRN500BVG7S-4DC to FRN800BVG7S-4DC
FRN30G1S-2 or less, FRN55G1S-4 or less
FRN37F1S-2 or less, FRN45F1S-4 or less
Insert the "b" contact of the contactor (52 or 73) to the
wiring to R0, T0.
FRN30G11S- or more, FRN30P11S- or more
FRN18.5VG7S- or more
Switch "CN RXTX" inside the inverter.
(For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
inverter.)
FRN37G1S-2 or more, FRN75G1S-4 or more
FRN45F1S-2 or more, FRN55F1S-4 or more
Insert the "b" contact of the isolation transformer or
contactor (52 or 73) to the wiring to R0, T0.
INV:
Insert the "b" contact of the isolation transformer or
contactor (52 or 73) to the wiring to R0, T0.
FRN30SVG1S-4 to FRN75SVG1S-4
INV:
E
FRN90SVG1S-4 or more
FRN90SVG1S-69 or more
CNV: RHC132S-4D or more
RHC132S-69D or more
6-97
Chapter 6 Converter System
DC
bus (bus bar)
直流母線（ブスバ－）
Table 6.3.15-2: Wiring to CNV terminals R3 and T3 and to INV terminals R1 and T1
Group
C
Applicable inverter
Wiring to the "R1, T1" and "R3, T3" terminals
FRN37G1S-2 or more, FRN75G1S-4 or more
FRN45F1S-2 or more, FRN55F1S-4 or more
Switch "CN R"/"CN W" inside the inverter.
(For details, refer to the instruction manual for the
inverter.)
INV:
No fan power supply is needed.
Since the fan to be used is a DC fan, the power is
supplied from the power supply inside each stack.
FRN30SVG1S-4 to FRN75SVG1S-4
D
INV:
FRN90SVG1S-4 or more
FRN90SVG1S-69 or more
CNV: RHC132S-4D or more
RHC132S-69D or more
E
The wiring is needed.
• Switch the "U1, U2" connector switch in each stack
according to the power voltage specifications.
Refer to "4.5.3 Wiring of main circuit and grounding
terminals" in Chapter 4.

Even when the power supply is not input to the auxiliary control power input (R0, T0) terminals, the PWM converter or
inverter can be operated. However, if the main power is turned off, the control power will also be shut down, and output
signals of the PWM converter and inverter and the keypad will be no longer displayed. To retain an alarm output signal to
be issued when the protective function operates or keep the keypad displayed even if the main power is shut down,
connect the DC power supply to the auxiliary control power input terminals.
[R0 and T0 terminal ratings]
• 400V series: 380 to 480 VAC, 50/60Hz, maximum current: 0.5 A
• 690V series: 575 to 690 VAC, 50/60Hz, maximum current: 0.5 A
When adding an isolation transformer, select the appropriate isolation transformer based on the sum of the required
capacities of the inverter and PWM converter, referring to the following tables:
■ Required transformer capacity for the inverter (FRENIC-VG)
Model
30S 37S 45S 55S 90S 110S 132S 160S 200S 220S 250S 280S 315S 355S 400S 450S 630B 710B 800B
FRNVG1S-4
FRNVG1S-69
■
200 VA
200 VA
―
―
―
600 VA
―
200 VA
Required transformer capacity for the converter (RHC-D series)
Model
132S
160S
RHC□-4D
RHC□-69D
200S
220S
200VA
200VA
250S
－
280S
315S
355S
400S
200VA
450S
500S
630B
200VA
－
710B
800B
600VA
－
－
[CNV: R3 and T3 terminal ratings, INV: R1 and T1 terminal ratings]
• 400V series:
380 to 440 VAC/50Hz, 380 to 480 VAC/60Hz, Maximum current: 1.0 A
(For phase-specific stacks, the maximum current is 3 times larger than above.)
• 690V series:
660 to 690 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maximum current 1.0 A
575 to 600 VAC, 50/60 Hz, maximum current 1.0 A
■
Inverter (FRENIC-VG) - Rated capacity of terminals R1 and T1
Model
90S
110S
FRNVG1S-4
FRNVG1S-69
■
132S
160S
200S
100 VA
100 VA
220S
250S
280S
315S
355S
400S
200 VA
―
450S
630B
―
710B 800B
600 VA
―
200 VA
Converter (RHC-D series) - Rated capacity of terminals R3 and T3
Model
RHC□-4D
RHC□-69D
132S
160S
100VA
100VA
200S
220S
250S
200VA
－
－
280S
315S
355S
200VA
450S
－
200VA
6-98
400S
500S
630B
710B
600VA
－
800B
If the fan power input is the same as the main power supply
PWM converters and inverters contain internal parts (such as the AC fan) that operate on the AC power. Therefore, "R3
and T3" terminals of a PWM converter and "R1 and T1" terminals of an inverter must be supplied with AC power.
Note that the PWM converters or inverters belonging to group D do not need this fan power supply.
＜CNV1＞
＜INV1＞
DCF1
Lf
MC
MCCB
ACF1
＜CNV1＞
Lf
MC
MCCB
＜INV1＞
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
電
源
P(+)
ACF2 L1/R
ACF1
電
源
L2/S
L3/T
ACF2
R1
S1
T1
N(-)
MC
R0
T0
PN母線
PN bus bar DCF1
(Bus bar)
(Busバ－)
PN母線
PN bus bar
(Bus bar)
(Busバ－)
T*
(T1)
R*
(R1)
CN33
＜INV2＞
補助電源
Auxiliary
power supply
DCF2
F
U1
CN33
CN15
MF
CN13
U
V
W
M2
M2
R0＜INV3＞
Auxiliary
補助電源power
DCF3 T0 P(+)
supply
MF
U2
T*
(T1)
U
V
W
P(+)
R1 Fan
power supply
ファン電源
T1 *1
※1
N(-)
R0 Auxiliary
補助電源power
T0 supply
R1 Fan
power supply
ファン電源
T1 *1
※1
CN13
U2
M1
R0＜INV2＞
Auxiliary
補助電源power
DCF2 T0 P(+)
supply
N(-)
U1
U
V
W
M1
R1 Fan
ファン電源
power supply
T1 *1
※1
N(-)
R0 Auxiliary
補助電源power
T0 supply
R1 Fan
ファン電源
power supply
T1 *1
※1
Fan
power supply
ファン電源
*1
※1
Fan
power
F
ファン電源
R* supply
*1
※1 (R1)
U
V
W
P(+)
N(-)
同期電源
Synchronous
power
検出 detection N(-)
supply
R1 R3Synchronous
ファン電源
Fan
power power
supply
同期電源
※1 detection
S1 T3 supply
検出
*1
T1 R0
補助電源
Auxiliary
power supply
T0
R3 ファン電源
Fan power supply
T3 *1
※1
MC
P(+)
CN14
CN15
＜INV3＞
DCF3
CN13
U
V
W
P(+)
CN14
CN13
N(-)
U
V
W
M3
M3
*1
It is necessary to interchange the U1 and U2
connectors according to the power supply voltage
specifications.

Refer to "4.5.3 Wiring of main circuit and grounding
terminals" in Chapter 4.
R0 Auxiliary
補助電源power
Figure 6.3.15-9: Example of connections when supplying fan power from the same T0
system
supplyas main power supply
R1 Fan
power supply
ファン電源
T1 *1
※1
N(-)
R0 Auxiliary
補助電源power
T0 supply
R1 Fan
power supply
ファン電源
T1 *1
※1
Figure 6.3.15-9 shows that the fan power supply is supplied at the same time when the PWM converter becomes ready
to run.
There is no problem even when the connection is made from the primary side of the same MC as the synchronous
power supply detection. In this case, if the fan ON/OFF control function setting of the PWM converter or inverter is set to
the factory default ("disabled"), you can operate the fan by just turning ON the MCCB.
From view points of the energy saving and fan service life, it is recommended to change the function or construct the
circuit as illustrated in the Figure.
If the fan power supply switching connector is set incorrectly, the cooling fan does not operate at correct RPM
and required air volume cannot be obtained. As a result, the overheat (OH1) or overload (OU1) protective
function of the converter or inverter may operate (alarm trip).
6-99
Chapter 6 Converter System
Power supply
Power supply
P(+)
Cautions on application to non-grounding system power supply
If a ground fault accident occurs on the inverter output side when the power receiving voltage system of the PWM
converter is not grounded, a round-about leakage circuit may be constructed through the grounding. If this
round-about leakage circuit is constructed, this may cause damage to the control power supply circuit of the PWM
converter or inverter.
When using such non-grounding system power supply, use an insulation transformer for the input to the auxiliary control
power input terminal of the PWM converter or inverter as illustrated in Figure 6.3.15-10 to insulate the power receiving
voltage.
When insulating with the insulation transformer, it is not necessary to insert the "b"-contact of the MC.
Additionally, if the power supply system is not clear, it is also recommended to install the transformer in the same
manner.
＜CNV1＞
Power supply
R0
MCCB
MC
Lr
Lf
P(+)
73
ACF1
電
源
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
ACF2
Rｆ
R2
T2
Cｆ
N(-)
R1
S1
T1
R3
T3
R0
T0
絶縁トランス
Isolation
transformer
R0
T0
DC/DC
To
inverter
インバータ
スタックへ
stack
Figure 6.3.15-10: Example of connections with insulation transformer installed
When connecting an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB), connect the terminals R0 and T0 to the primary side
(power supply side) of the earth leakage circuit breaker.
If connected to the secondary side of the earth leakage circuit breaker, the earth leakage circuit breaker may
malfunction since the terminals R0 and T0 of the main power supply inputs of the PWM converter (L1/R to
L3/T) are single phase in response to three-phase inputs. When connecting terminals R0 and T0 to the primary
side of the earth leakage circuit breaker, be sure to connect the transformer for insulation or the auxiliary "b"
contact of the electromagnetic contactor (MC) to the position illustrated in the figure below.
* The following figure describes the PWM converter as an example. For a diode rectifier, perform also the
connections in the same manner.
＜CNV1＞
Power supply
R0
ELCB
MC
Lr
Lf
73
P(+)
ACF1
電
源
L1/R
L2/S
L3/T
ACF2
Rｆ
R2
T2
Cｆ
N(-)
R1
S1
T1
R3
T3
R0
T0
Isolation
絶縁トランス
transformer
MC
R0
T0
インバータ
To
inverter
スタックへ
stack
Figure 6.3.15-11: Connection of earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB)
6-100
DC/DC
(6)
Other cautions
Be sure to connect to a power supply with required power supply capacity or more stated in "6.3.2 Standard
specifications".
If the power supply capacity is smaller than required, the initial charging cannot be performed correctly (power supply is
failed) or the protective function of the PWM converter or inverter may operate (alarm trip) due to waveform distortion on
the power supply side.
6.3.15.2
Wire size
The wire size of the main circuit can be calculated based on the equations shown below.
I AC 
kVA
[ A] ･･･
3  Vin  cosθ
Equation 6.3.15-1
I filt  Total r.m.s. value of filter capacitor
PCNV
[ A] ････
Vdc
Vin
I CHG 
[ Ap  p ] ････
3  R0
I DC 
• IAC
: PWM converter input current [A]
• Ifilt
: Filter circuit current [A]
• IDC
: PWM converter output current [A]
• ICHG
: Charging circuit current [Ap-p]
Equation 6.3.15-2
The reactance components for the capacitor
inside the PWM converter or inverter are not taken
Equation 6.3.15-3
into consideration. Additionally, as the charging
completion time is 1 sec. or less, select an wire
Design a structure where the portion from the output of the with a short-time capacity (I2t). (Charging time:
PWM converter to the DC bus bar is connected with the Cu 0.5 sec.)
bar as much as possible.
• kVA
: Required power capacity of PWM
Additionally, when using a wire, the wiring length must be 2
m or less.
• Vin
converter [kVA]
: Input voltage of PWM converter [V]
• cos θ : Input power factor of PWM converter
• Pcnv
: Rated capacity of PWM converter [kW]
• Vdc
: Output voltage of PWM converter [V]
• R0
: Charging resistance [Ω]
<Precautions for selecting wire (for all types)>
(1)
An "IV wire," a "600 V HIV insulated wire," and a "600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire" were
used at permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial
wiring.
(2)
Wire size is selected at supply voltage of 400 VAC.
(3)
The wire size of the charging circuit is calculated based on the short-time allowable current.
(4)
The grounding wire is cited from the permissible short circuit current defined in internal wire regulations.
(5)
RHC630B to 800B-4D is phase-by-phase stack type (single-phase composition per stack).
Therefore, wire connected per stack is given here.
6-101
Chapter 6 Converter System
Additionally, if a small capacity transformer is used for the sequence check inside the cabinet, the similar problem may
occur. In such case, open (turn OFF) the portion between the "RUN and CM" of the PWM converter, and perform the
sequence check of other parts.
Permissible
temperature
Permissible
temperature
RHC-4D
(Note 1)
60°C
75°C
90°C
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
132S
100
60
60
160S
150
100
100
200S
200
150
220S
200
280S
325
200
150
315S
2×200
250
200
550
630B
4×325 2×325 2×250
1099
710B
—
800B
—
233
t5×30
(150)
(Note 1)
60°C 75°C 90°C
5.5
3.5
2
Current
[Adc]
Resistance circuit for
filter
Current
[A]
Main input (including peripheral
equipment)
Charging circuit
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
60°C 90°C
33
2
2
133
282
353
t10×
3×325 2×325
125
(1250)
4×325
489
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
60°C
75°C
100
100
90°C
8
5.5
3.5
44
14
8
5.5
58
8
64
38
183
266
200
100
100
60
1239
1396
60
3.5
532
325
t4×40
(160)
150
250
3.5
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
60
150
384
t10×30
(300)
Output: P(+), N(-)
150
250
200
3.5
532
—
235
22
1.25
285
38
355
60
386
t8×50
(400)
2×200
3.5
Control wire
[mm2]
Ambient temperature: 40°C
Grounding wire
[mm2]
1)
Current
[Adc]
3-phase 400V series (MD spec)
Current
[Ap-p]
(1)
491
552
—
—
207
—
—
—
233
—
—
—
1102
t8×50
(400)
150
1243
1400
* For the RHC630 to 800B-4D, the wire or bus bar size is one phase (unit) worth.
Ambient temperature: 50°C
160S
75°C
90°C
200
100
60
250
150
100
200S
325
220S
2×200
200
280S
2×250
250
200
315S
2×325
325
250
630B
—
3×325 2×325
710B
—
4×325 3×250
800B
—
233
t5×30
(150)
60°C 75°C 90°C
8
3.5
3.5
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
60°C 90°C
33
2
2
133
282
150
—
(Note 1)
353
14
5.5
5.5
44
266
384
3×325
t10×30
(300)
489
(Note 1)
60°C
75°C
90°C
200
100
60
250
150
100
325
200
150
325
200
2×325 2×325
250
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
t4×40
(160)
2×200
22
14
8
550
t10
×125
(1250)
Permissible
temperature
58
3.5
3.5
532
64
3.5
532
235
22
1.25
285
38
355
60
386
1099 150
60
38
183
—
—
—
1239
100
60
207
—
—
—
233
—
—
—
1396 200
3.5
2x250
Control wire
[mm2]
132S
60°C
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
Grounding wire
[mm2]
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
Output: P(+), N(-)
Current
[Adc]
Permissible
temperature
RHC-4D
Charging circuit
Current
[Ap-p]
Resistance circuit for
filter
Current
[Adc]
Main input (including peripheral
equipment)
Current
[A]
2)
t8×50
(400)
491
552
1102
t8×50
(400)
150
1243
1400
* For the RHC630 to 800B-4D, the wire or bus bar size is one phase (unit) worth.
Permissible
temperature
Permissible
temperature
RHC-4D
(Note 1)
60°C
75°C
90°C
132S
150
100
100
160S
200
150
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
t5×30
(150)
200S
280S
(Note 1)
60°C 75°C 90°C
Current
[Adc]
Resistance circuit for
filter
Current
[A]
Main input (including peripheral
equipment)
282
5.5
3.5
2
33
353
8
5.5
3.5
44
Charging circuit
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
60°C 90°C
2
2
384
250
200
315S
2×200
325
250
630B
5×325 3×325 2×325
710B
—
4×325
800B
—
5×325 4×325
t10×30
(300)
t10×
125
(1250)
550
14
8
619
14
1239 100
60
1396
1777 150
100
8
64
3.5
3.5
133
3.5
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
60°C
75°C
90°C
150
100
100
200
150
250
532
2×200
250
200
2×250
325
250
—
—
—
532
150
38
207
60
233
—
—
—
100
300
—
—
—
* For the RHC630 to 800B-4D, the wire or bus bar size is one phase (unit) worth.
6-102
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
t4×40
(160)
266
72
3.5
Output: P(+), N(-)
Control wire
[mm2]
Ambient temperature: 40°C
Grounding wire
[mm2]
1)
Current
[Adc]
3-phase 400V series (LD spec)
Current
[Ap-p]
(2)
285
38
1.25
355
60
386
t8×50
(400)
552
625
100
1243
t8×50
1400
(400)
150
1750
200
Ambient temperature: 50°C
90°C
250
150
100
160S
325
200S
2×200
200
280S
2×325
325
315S
282
t5×30
(150)
150
8
3.5
3.5
(Note 1)
60°C 90°C
33
14
5.5
5.5
44
550
22
14
8
64
619
38
14
72
60
207
2
2
630B
—
4×325 2×325
710B
—
5×325 3×325
800B
—
t10×30
(300)
5×325
t10
×125
(1250)
1239 150
100
1396 200
1777 250
150
100
133
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
60°C
75°C
90°C
250
150
100
325
384
250
2×200
—
353
60°C 75°C 90°C
Permissible
temperature
3.5
3.5
3.5
3.5
200
150
325
250
3×325 2×200
325
266
2×200
532
2×325
532
Bus
bar
size
[mm2]
t4×40
(160)
285
38
1.25
355
60
386
—
—
—
233
—
—
—
300
—
—
—
t8×50
(400)
552
625
100
1243
t8×50
1400
(400)
150
1750
200
Chapter 6 Converter System
75°C
(Note 1)
Control wire
[mm2]
132S
60°C
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
Grounding wire
[mm2]
Permissible
temperature
(Note 1)
Output: P(+), N(-)
Current
[Adc]
Permissible
temperature
RHC-4D
Charging circuit
Current
[Ap-p]
Resistance circuit for
filter
Current
[Adc]
Main input (including peripheral
equipment)
Current
[A]
2)
* For the RHC630 to 800B-4D, the wire or bus bar size is one phase (unit) worth.
(3)
Three-phase 690V series, IEC standard (MD spec.)
1)
Ambient temperature: 40°C
132S
75°C
90°C
38
22
160S
38
200S
95
250S
100
280S
60
100
Bus bar
size [mm2]
Current
[A]
t5×30
(150)
135
t10×30
(300)
315S
355S
150
450S
90°C
38
22
163
38
205
60
253
100
Bus bar
size [mm2]
Current
[Adc]
t4×40
(160)
140
22
1.25
60
283
100
319
400S
75°C
Control
wire
[mm2]
RHC-69D
Output: P(+), N(-)
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
Grounding
wire
[mm2]
Main input (including peripheral equipment)
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
212
t8×50
(400)
150
38
293
373
405
200
261
329
359
150
170
150
455
418
200
60
470
Note 1) PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C.
Note 2) Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
(4)
Three-phase 690V series, IEC standard (LD spec.)
1)
Ambient temperature: 40°C
75°C
90°C
132S
38
38
160S
60
200S
250S
100
150
355S
400S
Current
[A]
t5×30
(150)
60
100
280S
315S
Bus bar
size [mm2]
90°C
163
38
38
205
60
60
283
100
100
319
150
t4×40
(160)
253
t10×30
(300)
170
22
1.25
212
t8×50
(400)
293
38
329
373
405
455
Current
[Adc]
231
359
150
200
75°C
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
Control
wire
[mm2]
RHC-69D
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
Grounding
wire
[mm2]
Output: P(+), N(-)
Main input (including peripheral equipment)
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
150
200
418
60
470
Note 1) PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C.
Note 2) Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
6-103
(5)
Three-phase 690V series, domestic selection (MD spec.)
1)
Ambient temperature: 40°C
75°C
90°C
38
22
160S
38
200S
60
250S
100
280S
60
100
Bus bar
size [mm2]
Current
[A]
t5×30
(150)
135
t10×30
(300)
315S
355S
150
75°C
90°C
38
22
163
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
t4×40
(160)
38
205
60
253
100
283
60
150
150
140
22
1.25
170
261
38
293
329
359
373
405
200
Current
[A]
212
t8×50
(400)
100
319
400S
450S
Output: P(+), N(-)
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
Control
wire
[mm2]
132S
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
Grounding
wire
[mm2]
Main input (including peripheral equipment)
RHC-69D
150
455
418
200
60
470
Note 1) PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C.
Note 2) Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
(6)
Three-phase 690V series, domestic selection (LD spec.)
1)
Ambient temperature: 40°C
75°C
90°C
132S
38
38
160S
60
200S
250S
100
280S
315S
150
355S
400S
Bus bar
size [mm2]
Current
[A]
t5×30
(150)
60
100
75°C
90°C
163
38
38
205
60
60
283
100
100
319
150
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
t4×40
(160)
253
t10×30
(300)
170
22
1.25
212
t8×50
(400)
293
38
329
373
405
455
Current
[A]
231
359
150
200
Output: P(+), N(-)
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
Control
wire
[mm2]
Permissible temperature (Note 1)
Grounding
wire
[mm2]
Main input (including peripheral equipment)
RHC-69D
150
200
418
60
470
Note 1) PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C.
Note 2) Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
6-104
6.3.16 External dimensions
6.3.16.1
List of external dimensions - RHC-D series (stack type)
Power
supply
voltage
Model
Figure
[Unit: mm]
W
H
D
Approx. mass
[kg]
A
226.2
1100
565
95
Remarks
RHC160S-4D
RHC200S-4D
RHC220S-4D
400V
series
RHC280S-4D
125
B
226.2
1400
565
C
226.2
1400
565
135×3
A
226.2
1100
565
105
B
226.2
1400
565
140
RHC315S-4D
135
RHC630B-4D
RHC710B-4D
RHC800B-4D
RHC132S-69D
RHC160S-69D
RHC200S-69D
RHC250S-69D
690V
series
RHC280S-69D
RHC315S-69D
RHC355S-69D
RHC400S-69D
RHC450S-69D
6-105
A set of three
stacks constitutes a
single inverter unit.
Chapter 6 Converter System
RHC132S-4D
6.3.16.2
(1)
External dimensions
Figure A (Frame 3 size: RHC132S-4D to RHC200S-4D, RHC132S-69D to RHC200S-69D)
6-106
Figure B (Frame 4 size: RHC220S-4D to RHC315S-4D, RHC250S-69D to RHC450S-69D)
Chapter 6 Converter System
(2)
6-107
(3)
Figure C (Frame 4 size: RHC630B-4D to RHC800B-4D)
6-108
6.3.17 Terminal positions
Main circuit terminals
Unit: [mm]
Chapter 6 Converter System
(1)
6.3.17-1: Frame 3 size (RHC132S to 200S-4D)
6-109
Select terminal screws that allow for a distance
of 10 mm or greater to the chassis.
Figure 6.3.17-2: Frame 4 size (RHC220S to 315S-4D)
6-110
Unit: [mm]
Unit: [mm]
Chapter 6 Converter System
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the chassis.
Figure 6.3.17-3: Frame 4 size (RHC630B to 800B-4D, S-phase)
6-111
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the chassis.
Figure 6.3.17-4: Frame 4 size (RHC630B to 800B-4D, R-phase, T-phase)
6-112
Unit: [mm]
Unit: [mm]
Chapter 6 Converter System
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the chassis.
Figure 6.3.17-5: Frame 3 size (RHC132S to 200S-69D)
6-113
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the chassis.
Figure 6.3.17-6: Frame 4 size (RHC250S to 450S-69D)
6-114
Unit: [mm]
Control Circuit terminals
■
400V series
Chapter 6 Converter System
(2)
Screw size: M3
Screw size: M4
Screw size: M4
Figure 6.3.17-7: Control terminal layout (400V series)
6-115
■ 690V series
Reserved for
manufacturer use.
Do not change the wiring.
Screw size: M3
Screw size: M4
Screw size: M4
Screw size: M4
Figure 6.3.17-8 Control terminal layout (690V series)
6-116
6.3.18 Peripheral equipment external dimensions
Pressurizing reactor (LR4-C)
Figure A
Figure B
For terminal
Mø
Figure C
Nameplate
Chapter 6 Converter System
(1)
Details of terminals
Nameplate
Details of terminals
Terminal details
LR4-710C: CuP.t8×100
LR4-800C: CuP.t10×100
LR4-1000C: CuP.t12×100
400 V
Voltage
Model
Rated
current
[A]
M
Mass
[kg]
Figure
Heat
resistant
class
W
WP
D
DP
DT
H
K
LR4-160C
304
380
125
300
260
185
550
15
M12
140
A
H
LR4-220C
418
450
150
330
290
230
620
15
M12
200
LR4-280C
532
480
160
330
290
240
740
15
M16
250
LR4-315C
599
480
160
340
300
250
760
15
M16
270
LR4-355C
674
480
160
355
315
255
830
15
M16
310
LR4-400C
760
480
160
380
330
260
890
19
M16
340
LR4-500C
950
525
175
410
360
290
960
19
M16
420
LR4-630C
1200
600
200
440
390
285
640
19
―
450
B
LR4-710C
1350
645
215
440
390
295
730
19
―
510
C
LR4-800C
1520
690
230
450
400
290
850
19
―
600
LR4-1000C
1750
770
255
550
480
340
940
23
―
950
Dimensions [mm]
6-117
(2)
Filter reactor (LFC4-C)
Figure A
Figure C
Figure B
For terminal
Mø
For terminal
Mø
Nameplate
4-øK
mounting
hole
CW
CH
Details of terminals
LFC4-630C: CuP. t10×75
LFC4-710C: CuP. t8×100
LF4-800C: CuP. t10×100
LFC4-1000C: CuP. t12×100
Terminal details
400 V
Voltage
Dimensions [mm]
Model
Rated
current
[A]
W
WP
D
DP
DT
H
K
M
CW
CH
Heat
Mass
Figure resistant
[kg]
class
LFC4-160C
304
255
85
137
110
150
245
10
M12
―
―
22
A
LFC4-220C
418
300
100
210
180
170
320
10
M12
―
―
35
B
LFC4-280C
532
330
110
230
195
195
330
12
M16
―
―
43
LFC4-315C
599
315
105
230
195
200
365
12
M16
―
―
48
LFC4-355C
674
315
105
235
200
210
395
12
M16
―
―
53
LFC4-400C
760
345
115
235
200
235
420
12
M16
―
―
60
LFC4-500C
950
345
115
240
205
240
480
12
M16
―
―
72
LFC4-630C
1200
435
145
295
255
200
550
15
―
75
17.5
175
LFC4-710C
1350
480
160
295
255
215
570
15
―
100
30
190
LFC4-800C
1520
480
160
320
270
220
600
15
―
100
30
220
LFC4-1000C
1750
480
160
320
270
240
700
15
―
100
30
240
6-118
C
H
Filter capacitor (CF4-C)
Figure A
Figure B
4-øF mounting hole
4-øF mounting hole
3-terminal bolt
3-terminal bolt
(for J
screw
thread)
(for J screw
thread)
Mounting leg
Mounting
leg
Mounting
leg
• Install vertically. Do not install horizontally.
• Be sure to fasten all the mounting legs to the panel, etc. Figure A: Two (2) mounting legs, Figure B: Four (4)
mounting legs
Vibration or impact may cause breakage.
400 V
Voltage
Model
Dimensions [mm]
Mass
[kg]
Figure
Quantity
used
1
W
W1
D
D1
E
F
H
H1
J
CF4-160C
280
265
90
55
80
7
260
―
M6
6.0
A
CF4-220C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
310
125
M12
13.0
B
CF4-280C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
350
165
M12
15.0
B
CF4-315C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
460
275
M12
20.0
B
CF4-355C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
520
335
M12
23.0
B
CF4-400C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
610
425
M12
27.0
B
CF4-500C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
310
125
M12
13.0
B
CF4-630C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
460
275
M12
20.0
B
CF4-710C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
520
335
M12
23.0
B
CF4-800C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
610
425
M12
27.0
B
CF4-1000C
435
400
100
―
80
15 x 20
slotted hole
610
425
M12
27.0
B
2
3
Note 1) The models CF4-500C to CF4-800C use two capacitors while the CF4-1000C use three capacitors. (Parallel
connection)
If ordered with quantity = "1", two capacitors will be delivered for the CF4-500C to CF4-800C or three capacitors
for the CF4-1000C.
6-119
Chapter 6 Converter System
(3)
(4)
Filter resistor
Figure A
Dimensions [mm]
L
l
D
G
H
K
A
J
φC
Mass
Quantity
Figure
[kg]
used
411
385
330
47
40
40
46
16
9.5
8.2
0.85
A
3
Mass
[kg]
Quantity
used
GRZG400 0.38 Ω
M
Figure
Model
22
B
1
GRZG400 0.26 Ω
GRZG400 0.53 Ω
(Filter resistor - continued)
Figure C
Terminal
M12 eye bolt
Figure B
M12 eye bolt
Terminal
Grounding terminal
4-ø15 mounting hole
Voltage
Model
RF4-160C
Dimensions [mm]
W
W1
D
D1
D2
H
H1
400
370
470
460
320
240
55
RF4-220C
400 V
RF4-280C
25
655
625
470
460
320
240
55
31
RF4-315C
35
RF4-355C
36
RF4-400C
38
RF4-500C
RF4-630C
41
655
625
530
520
320
440
55
755
725
530
520
320
440
55
70
RF4-710C
RF4-800C
RF4-1000C
80
6-120
―
C
(5)
Charging resistor
Figure B
Lead
wire
リ－ド線
7
12.5
32
Figure A
10
4.5×8.5
20
30
500±10
20
1
80
Chapter 6 Converter System
Figure C
34
4.5
φ4.5
500±10
5
140
150
20
1
Lead wire
リ－ド線
M
L
l
D
G
H
K
A
GRZG120 2 Ω
217
198
165
33
22
22
32
GRZG400 1 Ω
411
385
330
47
40
40
46
Mass
[kg]
Quantity
used
Dimensions [mm]
Figure
Model
5.5
0.25
A
3
5.5
0.85
J
φC
―
6
―
9.5
TK50B 30 Ω (HF5B0416)
See Figure B
0.15
B
80W 7.5 Ω (HF5C5504)
See Figure C
0.19
C
6-121
(6)
AC fuse
Figure A
Figure B
Figure C
*Side view of A70P1600-4TA
Dimensions [mm]
Mass
[kg]
Quantity
used
Model
*Side view of A70P2000-4
HF5G2655
Figure
Voltage
SA598473
11×13
0.15
A
2
11×13
0.25
W
W1
W2
H
D
D1
G
E
CR6L-150/UL
95
70
40
34
30
25
3.2
CR6L-200/UL
107
82
43
42
37
30
4
400 V
CR6L-300/UL
A50P400-4
110
78.6
53.1
―
38.1
25.4
6.4
10.3×18.4
030
A50P600-4
113.5
81.75
56.4
―
50.8
38.1
6.4
10.3×18.2
0.60
A70QS800-4
180.2
129.4
72.2
―
63.5
50.8
9.5
13.5×18.3
1.1
A70P1600-4T
See Figure C
C
A70P2000-4
SA598473
B
See above
4.5
HF5G2655
4.7
6-122
6.3.19 Generated loss
Generated loss in MD mode
400V
2450
RHC160S-4D
2850
1000
LFC4-160C
160
RF4-160C
1
568
RHC200S-4D
3500
RHC220S-4D
4000
LR4-220C
1240
LFC4-220C
200
RF4-220C
1
751
RHC280S-4D
RHC315S-4D
4900
LR4-280C
5500
LR4-315C
1430
LFC4-280C
220
RF4-280C
1
1660
LFC4-315C
260
RF4-315C
RHC630B-4D
10550 LR4-630C
2300
LFC4-630C
510
RHC710B-4D
11500 LR4-710C
2600
LFC4-710C
RHC800B-4D
13100 LR4-800C
2900
LFC4-800C
Model
LR4-160C
Model
Generated
loss [W]
Model
Generated
loss [W]
RHC132S-4D
Converter stack
Quantity
Model
Filter resistor
Generated
loss [W]
Model
Filter reactor
Generated
loss [W]
Pressurizing reactor
Generated
loss [W]
Converter
690V
RHC132S-69D
2650
RHC160S-69D
3050
RHC200S-69D
3900
RHC250S-69D
5000
1027
RHC280S-69D
5450
1
1154
RHC315S-69D
6000
RF4-630C
1
4722
RHC355S-69D
4150
630
RF4-710C
1
5361
RHC400S-69D
4700
620
RF4-800C
1
6024
RHC450S-69D
5300
* The generated loss of the filters shown above is the value for all quantities.
6.3.19.2
Generated loss in LD mode
400V
1000
LFC4-160C
LR4-220C
1240
5450
LR4-315C
6100
RHC160-4D
3450
RHC200-4D
3800
RHC280-4D
RHC315-4D
Model
Generated
loss [W]
LR4-160C
Generated
loss [W]
2950
RHC132-4D
Converter stack
Model
Quantity
Model
Model
Filter resistor
Generated
loss [W]
Model
690V
Filter reactor
Generated
loss [W]
Pressurizing reactor
Generated
loss [W]
Converter
160
RF4-160C
1
568
RHC132S-69D
3150
LFC4-220C
200
RF4-220C
1
751
RHC160S-69D
3750
RHC200S-69D
1660
LFC4-315C
260
RF4-315C
1
4250
1154
RHC250S-69D
5550
LR4-355C
1910
LFC4-355C
300
RF4-355C
1
1286
RHC280S-69D
6100
RHC630B-4D 11850 LR4-710C
2600
LFC4-710C
630
RF4-710C
1
5361
RHC315S-69D
6700
RHC710B-4D 12900 LR4-800C
2900
LFC4-800C
620
RF4-800C
1
6024
RHC355S-69D
4600
RHC800B-4D 16200 LR4-1000C
4500
LFC4-1000C 1080 RF4-1000C
1
7728
RHC400S-69D
5200
* The generated loss of the filters shown above is the value for all quantities.
6-123
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.3.19.1
6.4
Filter stack (RHF-D series)
6.4.1
Features
■ This filter stack is dedicated to use with the RHC-D series high-efficiency power regeneration PWM converters .
<Lineup>
Applicable to the 400V series PWM converters for 132 kW to 315 kW
Applicable to the 690V series PWM converters for 132 kW to 450 kW
* Cannot be used with unit type PWM converters (RHC-C).
■ All peripherals (filter circuit, pressurizing reactor, charging circuits, etc.) required to run a PWM converter are
packaged in a single unit.
This eliminates the need to separately procure peripherals (such as a pressurizing reactor, filter reactor, filter
capacitor, charging box, charging resistor).
■ It is possible to save wiring work and installation space for peripherals.
■ Built on the same stack design and shape as inverters and PWM converters. These products effectively help reduce
the panel size.
Power
supply
Charging
充電回路 circuit
Filter
stack
52
Filter
フィルタ
circuit
回路
PWM
converter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
Inverter
昇圧
Pressurizing
リアクトル
reactor
*※52は別途準備が必要です。
Part 52 must be separately prepared since it is not
フィルタスタックには内蔵していません。
contained
in the filter stack.
The filter stacks (RHF-D) are dedicated to the use with stack type PWM converters (RHC-D series) indicated
below. It is not applicable to any other PWM converters.
• 400V series: RHC132S-4D to RHC315S-4D
• 690V series: RHC132S-69D to RHC450S-69D

For information on the peripheral equipment for the PWM converters (RHC-D), refer to "6.3.12 Configuration of
peripherals".
6-124
Standard specifications
6.4.2.1
3-phase 400V series
Filter model
Applicable converter
model RHCS-4D
MD mode
LD mode
Input power
Rated current (A)
Main power supply
Number of phases, voltage, and
frequency
Fan power supply
Number of phases,
voltage, and
frequency
RHF160S-4D
RHF220S-4D
RHF280S-4D
RHF355S-4D
132
200
280
315
160
220
—
—
132
160
—
315
—
200
—
—
282
384
489
619
3-phase, 380 to 440 V/50 Hz, 380 to 460 V/60 Hz
400 V input Single-phase, 380 to 440 V/50Hz, 380 to 460 V/60 Hz *1
200 V input Single-phase, 200 to 220 V/50 Hz, 200 to 230 V/60 Hz *2
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: -15% to +10%, Frequency: -5% to +5%, Voltage unbalance ratio: 2% or
less *3
Permissible carrier frequency
2.5 kHz，5 kHz
Approx.mass [kg]
155
195
Enclosure
IP00 open type
Noise level
75dB (condition: A-range, distance: 1 m) *4
230
250
*1
For 380 to 398 V/50 Hz or 380 to 430 V/60 Hz power supply, switching of the filter stack internal terminals (U1, U2)
is required.
*2
200 V power supply can also be used. For details, refer to "6.2.4 Terminal functions".
*3
Interphaseunbalance rate (%) 
*4
This is the noise level measured when the filter stack is connected with a PWM converter and inverter of the same
capacity and runs at its ratings.
Max. voltage[V] - Min. voltage[V]
 67
3 - phase average voltage
6-125
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.4.2
6.4.2.2
3-phase 690V series
Filter model
Applicable
converter model
RHC□S-69D□
MD mode
LD mode
Rated current (A)
RHF160S-69D RHF220S-69D RHF280S-69D RHF355S-69D RHF450S-69D
132
200
250
315
400
160
-
280
355
450
132
160
-
280
355
-
200
250
315
400
163
223
283
359
455
255
280
Input power
Main power supply
3-phase, 3-wire type, 660 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz
Number of phases, voltage, 3-phase, 3-wire type, 575 to 600 V, 50/60 Hz
and frequency
Voltage: -15% to +10%, Frequency: -5% to +5%
Fan power
supply
Number of
phases,
voltage, and
frequency
690 V input
Single-phase, 660 to 690 V, 50/60 Hz
Single-phase, 575 to 600 V, 50/60 Hz*1
Voltage: -15% to +10%, Frequency: -5% to +5%
200 V input
Single-phase, 200 to 220 V/50 Hz,200 to 230 V/60 Hz
Voltage: -15% to +10%, Frequency: -5% to +5%
Allowable fluctuation
Voltage: -15% to +10%, Frequency: -5% to +5%,
Voltage unbalance ratio: 2% or less
2.5kHz，5kHz
Permissible carrier frequency
Approx.mass [kg]
180
205
230
Enclosure
IP00 open type
Noise level*2
75dB (condition: A-range, distance: 1 m)
*1
For 575 to 600 V, 50/60 Hz power supply, switching of the filter stack internal terminals (U1, U2) is required.
*2
This is the noise level measured when the filter stack is connected with a PWM converter and inverter of the same
capacity and runs at its ratings.
6-126
Basic connection diagrams
L4
L5
Microswitch for
AC fuse blow
delection
l
L1
Lr
Lf
V0
Fac
L3
W0
52
Rf
Cf
i
j
73-2
Readyto-run
a
b
RDY
c
d
52T
73T
52A
52T
52A
52
52T
RUN
Y5A
Y5C
G
R3 (Note 11)
T3
c
d
Run
52
(Note 6)
CM
73
ONC
m
n
RUN
FX
R1
S1
T1
R0
T0
73A
73C
RUN
RST
CM
e
f
DCF2
m
n
g
h
U
V
N(-)
R0
T0
R1
T1
M
W
(Note 4)
ef
FWD
FX
X9(THR) CM
CM
a
b
30A
30B
30C
13
12
11
G
G
Stop
(Note 5)
73T
Fdc
X1(THR)
DCF1
P(+)
(Note 10)
N(-)
30A
30B
30C
73
i
j
RDY
ONA
ONB
73
Insulated
transformer
RDY
L3/T
2
ACFAN
(Note 2) 52
g
(Note 3)
h
P(+)
L2/S
1
U2
R11
R12
T11 FUS2
T12
73-1
L1/R
(Note 10)
Fdc
kl
R3 FUS1
T3 U1
(Note 1)
200V/50Hz
220V/60Hz
(Note 7)
U0
L2
(Note 8)
Microswitch for
DC fuse blow
delection
DCF2
Fac
Fac
Inverter stack
VG1 series
DCF1
L6
k
Power supply
PWM converter stack
RHC-D series
Filter stack
RHF-D siries
R0
73
RUN
F
X
(Note 9)
Symbol
Equipment name
Lr
Pressurizing reactor
Lf
Reactor for filter
Cf
Capacitor for filter
Rf
Resistor for filter
R0
Charging resistor
Rf
Resistor for filter
Fac
AC fuse
Fdc
DC fuse
73
Electromagnetic contactor for charging circuit
52
Electromagnetic contactor for power supply
Figure 6.4.3-1: Basic connection diagram
6-127
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.4.3
(Note 1)
Connect a step-down transformer to ensure that the sequence circuit voltages are exactly the same as shown
in the Figure 6.4.3-1.
(Note 2)
Be sure to connect the PWM converter and inverter auxiliary power input terminals (R0, T0) to the main power
via contact b of the power supply electromagnetic contactor (52). When using the product with a
non-grounded power supply, it is necessary to add an insulated transformer. For more information, refer to
"6.3.15-(5)" in Chapter 6.
(Note 3)
Be sure to connect the power supply for the inverter's AC fan to the main power directly (not via contact b of
#52) so that the power can be fed through terminals R1 and T1.
(Note 4)
Create a sequence in which the PWM converter gets ready for operation before the run signal is input to the
inverter.
(Note 5)
Set the timer for 52T to 1 second.
(Note 6)
Be sure to assign the PWM converter digital input terminal (X1) to the external alarm (THR), and to connect
the filter stack overheat signal outputs (1, 2). Set contact b input with function code E14 to input with contact b.
Furthermore, connect the microswitch for AC fuse blow detection to the digital input terminal (X1) in series
with all microswitches and the overheat signal outputs (1, 2).
(Note 7)
Ensure correct phase sequence when connecting wires to terminals L1/R, L2/S, L3/T, R2, T2, R1, S1, and T1.
(Note 8)
When inputting 200 VAC as the fan power supply, remove jumper wires from between terminals R11 and R12
and from between terminals T11 and T12, and then connect the input to terminals R12 and T12. Note that
these terminals are dedicated to the internal fan power supply. Do not use them for any other purposes.
(Note 9)
Be sure to set the timer for 73T to 5 seconds.
(Note 10) For the 400V series, connect "Fdc (fuse)" to the P (+) side. No "Fdc (fuse)" is required at the N (-) side. For the
690V series, connect "Fdc (fuse)" to the P (+) side and N(-) side.
Furthermore, use two microswitches and connect them in series.
(Note 11) With the 690V series, there are no R3 or T3 short-circuit wires.

Be sure to assign the PWM converter digital input terminal (X1) to the external alarm (THR), and to connect the
filter stack overheat signal outputs (1, 2).

Be sure to stop the PWM converter and inverter when the overheat signal is output. Furthermore, shut off
electromagnetic contactors 52 and 73.
Risk of fire, accident
6-128
Terminal functions
Terminal symbol
Name
L1, L2, L3
Main power input
Connect to a 3-phase power supply.
U0, V0, W0
Filter output
Connect to the PWM converter's power input terminals L1/R, L2/S, and
L3/T.
L4, L5, L6
Charging circuit input
Connect to a 3-phase power supply.
E(G)
For filter grounding
Grounding terminal for the chassis (case) of the filter stack.
R3, T3
Fan power input
Connection terminals for the AC cooling fan power supply inside the
stack. If the fan uses the same voltage as the main power supply,
connect this terminal to the power supply.
R11, R12
T11, T12 *1
Fan power input
(for 200 V input)
Use this terminal when inputting 200 VAC as the power to the AC
cooling fan inside the stack.
When using a 200 V power supply, remove the jumper wires connected
when shipped from the factory and connect terminals R12 and T12 to
the power supply.
When using the same voltage as the main power supply, ensure that
jumper wires are connected between R11 and R12 and between T11
and T12 (factory default).
U1, U2 *2
Supply voltage
switching terminal
Change the terminal connection depending on the power supply
connected to the fan power input terminals.
(Refer to Figure 6.4.4-1.)
Main circuit
Input signals
Output signals
Specifications
73-1
73-2
Charging circuit
contactor
Control input
These are control signal input terminals for the charging circuit
contactor.
<Coil rated capacity>
● 400V series
When turned ON ... 200 V/50 Hz: 120 VA, 220 V/60 Hz： 135 VA
When retained ...
200 V/50 Hz: 12.7 VA, 220 V/60 Hz： 12.4 VA
ONA
ONB
ONC
Charging circuit
operation signal
These are auxiliary contact output terminals for the charging circuit
contactor.
To be used as signal for operational check of charging circuit.
• Contact rating: 24 VDC 3 A
* Min. working voltage/current: 5 VDC 3 mA
1
2
Overheat signal output
Signal is output when internal parts of filter stack are overheated.
• Contact rating: 24 VDC (max. 27 V), max. 0.3A/max. 6W
* Min. usage voltage, current: 1 VDC, 0.1mA
*1 Terminals R11, R12, T11, and T12 are 200 V power terminals and their withstand voltage is 2000 VAC for 1 minute.
*2 Terminals U1 and U2 can be switched as shown in Figure 6.4.4-1.
Configuration
400V series:
Applied voltage
398 to 440 V/50 Hz,
430 to 460 V/60 Hz
690V series: 660 to 690V, 50/60Hz
(Factory default)
400V series:
690V series:
Figure 6.4.4-1: Supply voltage switching terminal
6-129
380 to 398 V/50 Hz,
380 to 430 V/60 Hz
575 to 600V, 50/60Hz
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.4.4

Be sure to assign the PWM converter digital input terminal (X1) to the external alarm (THR), and to connect the
filter stack overheat signal outputs (1, 2).

Be sure to stop the PWM converter and inverter when the overheat signal is output. Furthermore, shut off
electromagnetic contactors 52 and 73.
Risk of fire, accident
6-130
6.4.5
Check before use
Unpack the package and check the following:
Check that you have properly received the product main unit and the following accessories.
Accessories
Instruction manual
Chapter 6 Converter System
The inverter has not been damaged during transportation—there should be no dents or parts missing. The main
nameplates are attached to the main unit. The main nameplate is located on the front face of the main unit (as shown in
Figure 6.4.6-2 and Figure 6.4.6-3). Check these main nameplates to see that the inverter is exactly the type you ordered.
(a) Main Nameplate
(b) Sub Nameplate
Figure 6.4.5-1: Main nameplate
TYPE: Filter stack (RHF-D)
Specifications in each mode are printed on the main nameplate.
SOURCE
OUTPUT
IP Code
MASS
SER.No.
: Power supply rating
: Output rating
: IP protection grade
: Mass
: Production number
Production year
(Last digit of the year)
2 8 A456A0003BA
Serial number of production lot
Production month
1 to 9:
X, Y, or Z:
January to September
October, November, or December
If you suspect the product is not working properly or if you have any questions about your product, contact your Fuji
Electric representative.

Refer to Chapter 3 "Transportation and Storage" for information on transportation and long-term storage of filter
stacks.

Refer to Chapter 4 "Installation and Wiring" for information on installation of filter stacks.
For information on the main circuit wire sizes, refer to "6.4.11 Wire size".
6-131
6.4.6
External views
6.4.6.1
Warning label and falling warning label
Figure 6.4.6-1: Warning label and falling warning label
6.4.6.2
Appearance
Cooling fan
Cooling fan
Hanging hole
Hanging hole
Handle
Handle
Front cover
Front cover
Falling warning label
Falling warning label
Warning label
Warning label
Handle
Handle
Main nameplate
Main nameplate
Caster
Caster
Figure 6.4.6-2: Frame 3 size
(RHF160S to RHF220S-4D,RHF160S-69D)
Figure 6.4.6-3: Frame 4 size
(RHF280S to RHF355S-4D,RHF220S to
RHF355S-69D)
6-132
Cooling fan
Hanging hole
Chapter 6 Converter System
Handle
Front cover
Falling warning label
Warning label
Handle
Caster
Main nameplate
Figure 6.4.6-4: Frame 5 size (RHF450S-69D)
6-133
6.4.7
External dimensions
6.4.7.1
List of external dimensions - RHF-D series (stack type)
Unit: [mm]
Power
supply
voltage
Model
RHF160S-4D
400V
series
RHF220S-4D
RHF280S-4D
RHF355S-4D
RHF160S-69D
690V
series
Figure
W
H
D
A
226.2
1166
565
B
226.2
1400
565
A
226.2
1166
565
C
226.2
1400
565
RHF220S-69D
RHF280S-69D
155
195
230
250
180
215
RHF355S-69D
RHF450S-69D
Approx. mass
[kg]
230
255
D
336.2
1400
6-134
565
280
Remarks
6.4.7.2
Figure A (Frame 3 size: RHF160S-4D, RHF220S-4D,RHF160S-6D)
Chapter 6 Converter System
(1)
External dimensions
6-135
(2)
Figure B (Frame 4 size: RHF280S-4D, RHF355S-4D)
6-136
Figure C (Frame 4 size: RHF220S to 355S-69D)
Chapter 6 Converter System
(3)
6-137
(4)
Figure D (Frame 5 size: RHF450S-69D)
6-138
6.4.8
Terminal positions
6.4.8.1
Main circuit terminals
Unit: [mm]
Chapter 6 Converter System
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
Install relay bar terminals at the cabinet side
for the main power supply output terminals.
Furthermore, secure firmly with an insulator
to prevent terminal shorting.
Terminal
name
Main power
supply input
Main power
supply output
Grounding
terminal
Terminal
symbol
Bolt size
L1,L2,L3
U0,V0,W0
M12
G
Figure 6.4.8-1: Frame 3 size (RHF160S-4D, RHF220S-4D, RHF160S-69D)
6-139
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
Install relay bar terminals at the cabinet side
for the main power supply output terminals.
Furthermore, secure firmly with an insulator
to prevent terminal shorting.
Terminal
name
Main power
supply input
Main power
supply output
Grounding
terminal
Terminal
symbol
Bolt size
L1,L2,L3
U0,V0,W0
M12
G
Figure 6.4.8-2: Frame 4 size (RHF280S-4D,RHF355S-4D)
6-140
Unit: [mm]
Unit: [mm]
Chapter 6 Converter System
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
Install relay bar terminals at the cabinet side
for the main power supply output terminals.
Furthermore, secure firmly with an insulator
to prevent terminal shorting.
Terminal
name
Main power
supply input
Main power
supply output
Grounding
terminal
Terminal
symbol
Bolt size
L1,L2,L3
U0,V0,W0
M12
G
Figure 6.4.8-3: Frame 4 size (RHF220S to 355S-69D)
6-141
Select terminal screws that allow for a
distance of 10 mm or greater to the
chassis.
Install relay bar terminals at the cabinet side
for the main power supply output terminals.
Furthermore, secure firmly with an insulator
to prevent terminal shorting.
Terminal
name
Main power
supply input
Main power
supply output
Grounding
terminal
Terminal
symbol
Bolt size
L1,L2,L3
U0,V0,W0
M12
G
Figure 6.4.8-4: Frame 5 size (RHF450S-69D)
6-142
Unit: [mm]
Control circuit terminal
Figure 6.4.8-5: Control terminal layout
Chapter 6 Converter System
6.4.8.2
6-143
6.4.9
Quantity
RHC132S-4D
RHC160S-4D
RHC200S-4D
RHC220S-4D
RHC280S-4D
RHC315S-4D
RHF160S-4D
RHF160S-4D
RHF220S-4D
RHF220S-4D
RHF280S-4D
RHF355S-4D
1
1
1
1
1
1
RHC132S-69D
RHF160S-69D
RHC160S-69D
RHF160S-69D
RHC200S-69D
Model
Quantity
AC Fuse
Model
300
350
500
500
600
700
SC-N8
SC-N11
SC-N12
SC-N12
SC-N14
SC-N14
1
1
1
1
1
1
170M5446
170M6546
170M6547
170M6547
170M6499
170M6500
1
175
SC-N6
1
1
200
SC-N7
1
RHF220S-69D
1
250
SC-N8
1
RHC250S-69D
RHF280S-69D
1
300
SC-N8
1
RHC280S-69D
RHF280S-69D
1
350
SC-N11
1
RHC315S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
400
SC-N11
1
RHC355S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
RHC400S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
RHC450S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
600
SC-N14
1
Microswitch
Model
170H3027
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
170M5447 3
170M5448 3
170M6548 3
170M6500 3
In the case of LD
RHC132S-4D
RHF160S-4D
1
RHC160S-4D
RHC200S-4D
RHC280S-4D
RHC315S-4D
RHF220S-4D
RHF220S-4D
RHF355S-4D
RHF355S-4D
RHC132S-69D
RHC160S-69D
AC Fuse
Microswitch
Model
350
SC-N11
1
170M5446 3
1
1
1
1
500
500
700
800
SC-N12
SC-N12
SC-N14
SC-N14
1
1
1
1
170M6546
170M6547
170M6499
170M6500
RHF160S-69D
1
200
SC-N7
1
RHF220S-69D
1
250
SC-N8
1
RHC200S-69D
RHF220S-69D
1
300
SC-N8
1
RHC250S-69D
RHF280S-69D
1
350
SC-N11
1
RHC280S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
400
SC-N11
1
RHC315S-69D
RHF355S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
RHC355S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
500
SC-N12
1
RHC400S-69D
RHF450S-69D
1
600
SC-N14
1
Model
Model
Quantity
Model
Electromagnetic
contactor
Quantity
PWM converter
model
MCCB/ELCB
rated current
[A]
Quantity
Filter stack
Quantity
3-phase 690V
3-phase
400V
Power-base
d series
(2)
MCCB/ELCB
rated current
[A]
Electromagnetic
contactor
Quantity
Model
Filter stack
Quantity
PWM converter
model
3-phase 690V
Power-based
series
In the case of MD
3-phase 400V
(1)
Configuration of peripherals
170H3027
3
3
3
3
3
170M5447 3
170M5448 3
170M6548 3
170M6500 3
The "MCCB/ELCB rated current" column shows the recommended rated current values at panel temperatures
50°C or lower.
* Since the ambient temperature is 40°C, the installation environment standards for MCCBs or ELCBs have
been selected taking into account the correction coefficient depending on the temperature conditions (0.90
for 800AF or lower; 0.85 for 1000AF or higher). To select a specific model, consider the short-circuit breaking
capacity of the equipment.

Refer to "6.2.12.3 Use of molded case circuit breakers (MCCBs)" and "6.2.12.4 Use of earth leakage
circuit breakers (ELCBs)".
6-144
6.4.10 AC fuse external view
Table 6.4.10-1: AC fuse external dimensions table
Dimensions [mm]
Drawing
No.
A
B
D
E
F
G
H
170M5446
80
81
77
61
M10
10
ø24
0.9
81
83
92
76
M12
10
ø30
1.25
81
91
92
76
M12
10
ø30
1.25
Weight [kg]
170M5447
170M5448
170M6546
170M6548
170M6499
170M6500
Note) Column H shows the fuse main circuit terminals.
Fuse terminals (electrodes)
Tab terminals
3.5
Microswitch securing sections
1
33.0max
37.5max
0.8
4
2
Figure 6.4.10-1: Microswitch contact structure
2.0±0.3
17.0±1.0
6.3
Attach the microswitch to the fuse so that its
tabterminals face down.
50.5±1.0
Press in the microswitch so that attachment claws
hook firmly onto the fuse body.
Figure 6.4.10-2: Microswitch external shape
This red block protrudes if the fuse is blown.
(3.5 mm)
25.0
Figure 6.4.10-3: Microswitch attachment method
6-145
Chapter 6 Converter System
170M6547
6.4.11 Wire size
6.4.11.1
(1)
3-phase 400V series
Ambient temperature: 40°C
Applicable
PWM
RHF-4D
converters
capacity [kW]
132
160S
160
200
Main input (L1, L2, L3)
Output (U0, V0, W0)
Wire size [mm2] (Permissible
temperature) (Note 1)
60°C
75°C
90°C
100
100
60
150
220S
100
200
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
t5 × 30
(150)
150
235
22
282
38
384
280
280S
315
355S
2×200
2×150
(Note 2)
Charging
circuit
(L4)
(L5)
(L6)
[mm2]
Other
(R3, T3)
(73-1，73-2)
(R11, R12)
(T11, T12)
[mm2]
Control
terminal
(1, 2)
(ONA)
(ONB)
(ONC)
[mm2]
2
2
1.25
Charging
circuit
(L4)
(L5)
(L6)
[mm2]
Other
(R3, T3)
(73-1，73-2)
(R11, R12)
(T11, T12)
[mm2]
Control
terminal
(1, 2)
(ONA)
(ONB)
(ONC)
[mm2]
2
2
1.25
355
220
2×100
t10 × 30
(300)
355
(2)
Current
[A]
Grounding
wire
[mm2]
60
489
3.5
560
619
100
Ambient temperature: 50°C
Applicable
PWM
RHF-4D
converters
capacity [kW]
132
Wire size [mm2] (Permissible
temperature) (Note 1)
60°C
75°C
90°C
160S
200
100
60
250
150
100
220S
2×150
160
200
Main input (L1, L2, L3)
Output (U0, V0, W0)
220
280
280S
315
355S
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
t5 × 30
(150)
150
2×200
200
2×325
2×200
Current
[A]
(Note 2)
235
22
282
38
355
384
2×150
Grounding
wire
[mm2]
t10 × 30
(300)
355
60
489
3.5
560
619
100
The power supply voltage is 400 VAC.
(Note 1)
An "IV wire," a "600 V HIV insulated wire," and a "600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire" were used
at permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial wiring.
(Note 2)
The grounding wire is cited from the permissible short circuit current defined in internal wire regulations
.
6-146
6.4.11.2
IEC standard, ambient temperature 40 °C
Applicable
PWM
converters
capacity [kW]
132
Main input (L1, L2, L3)
Output (U0, V0, W0)
RHF□-69D
Wire size [mm2]
(Permissible temperature)
(Note 1)
160S
75°C
90°C
70
35
160
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
t5 x 30
(150)
50
135
220S
95
250
280S
150
95
185
120
355S
240
150
450S
300
185
405
2x150
2x95
455
315
t10 x 30
(300)
205
50
253
2.5
Control
terminal
(1, 2)
(ONA)
(ONB)
(ONC)
[mm2]
2.5
0.75
95
4
283
319
355
35
Other
(R3, T3)
(73-1，73-2)
(R11, R12)
(T11, T12)
[mm2]
163
200
280
70
Current
[A]
Charging
Grounding
circuit
wire
(L4)
[mm2]
(L5)
(Note 2)
(L6)
[mm2]
120
359
400
450
150
(Note 1)
PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C, and the
wire sizes were selected based on the permissible current under the following conditions. If usage conditions
differ, select wire sizes based on usage conditions that comply with IEC 60364-5-52:2001 (JIS C
60364-5-52:2006).
Ambient temperature: 40 °C, Multicore cable: 3 cores (conductor: copper), Single cable: aerial wiring, Two or
more cables: electric duct wiring
(Note 2)
Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
(2)
Domestic selection, ambient temperature 40 °C
Applicable
PWM
converters
capacity [kW]
132
Main input (L1, L2, L3)
Output (U0, V0, W0)
RHF□-69D
Wire size [mm2]
(Permissible temperature)
(Note 1)
160S
75°C
90°C
38
22
160
38
200
220S
60
250
280S
100
280
315
t5 x 30
(150)
60
100
355S
Bus bar
size
[mm2]
450
135
Other
(R3, T3)
(73-1，73-2)
(R11, R12)
(T11, T12)
[mm2]
Control
terminal
(1, 2)
(ONA)
(ONB)
(ONC)
[mm2]
22
2
2
1.25
38
3.5
(Note 2)
163
205
t10 x 30
(300)
150
253
283
319
355
400
Current
[A]
Charging
circuit
(L4)
(L5)
(L6)
[mm2]
Grounding
wire
[mm2]
359
450S
150
405
200
60
455
(Note 1)
PVC was used for permissible temperature of 70 °C, and XLPE for permissible temperature of 90 °C.
(Note 2)
Refer to Appendix 9 for information on wire permissible current based on ambient temperature.
6-147
Chapter 6 Converter System
(1)
3-phase 690V series
6.4.12 Generated loss
Table 6.4.12-1 shows filter stack generated losses.
Table 6.4.12-1: Filter stack generated losses
Power-based series
3-phase 400V
3-phase 690V
Model
Generated loss [W]
RHF160S-4D
2850
RHF220S-4D
3700
RHF280S-4D
4600
RHF355S-4D
5250
RHF160S-69D
2550
RHF220S-69D
3350
RHF280S-69D
4150
RHF355S-69D
5050
RHF450S-69D
6550
6-148
6.5
Braking system (braking unit, braking resistor)
The braking system (braking unit and braking resistor) provides a braking system that consumes regenerative energy
from a motor as thermal energy by use of the resistor.
It can be used when using the RHD-D series diode rectifiers to construct a system where regenerative energy is
generated.
6.5.1
Overview of braking resistor (DBR)

For information on how to select a braking resistor, refer to "9.1.3.3 Selecting the
braking resistor with the correct rating” in Chapter 9 of the separate volume "Unit
Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
A braking resistor overheat error function that detects the overheat error of the braking resistor is available.
The overheat error signal should be taken into the FRENIC-VG to prevent burning of the braking resistor.

For information on the specifications, external dimensions, and connection method, refer to "8.5.1.1 overview of
braking resistor (DBR)” in Chapter 8 of the separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
6.5.2
Overview of braking unit
This braking unit for braking control is intended to consume the regenerative energy from
the motor as thermal energy.
It is used in conjunction with the braking resistor.
The standard duty cycle of the braking unit is the 10%ED rating. When the fan unit (option:
BU-F) is installed, however, the braking capacity is increased to the 30%ED.
Additionally, up to 15 braking units can be connected in parallel.
In addition to the standard series, BUC560-4C with a continuous regenerative capacity of
560 kW is also available.
This section describes the braking unit on the assumption of using the standard series braking unit.

For details, refer to the instruction manuals listed below.
Instruction manual for braking unit: INR-HF51196*
Supplemental description of instruction manual for braking unit: INR-HF51614*
Table 6.5.2-1: Standard braking unit specifications
Model: BU-4C
37
55
90
132
220
Min. connection resistance
[Ω]
12
7.5
4.7
3.0
1.9
Max. braking electric power
[kW]
37
56
90
135
240
Generated loss: 10%ED
[W]
35
40
50
60
80
Rated input current
[Arms]
12
19
31
47
79
Mass
[kg]
4
5.5
5.5
9
13
Braking torque:
100%
%ED: Duty cycle *1
10%ED (30%ED) *2
Braking time *1
10 sec. (30 sec.) *2 /100 sec.-cycle
Operating voltage
[V]
*1.
%ED and braking time are calculated
under the conditions shown below.
Braking electric
power
Max. braking
electric power
T1
T1
T0
%ED = (T1/T0) x 100%
• T1: Braking time
• T0: Repetition period
The rated current is the r.m.s. value
current in the T0 zone.
758
Protective functions
Fuse blown, Bu overheat, braking
operation error, DBR overheat
Cooling method
Self-cooling (forced cooling)
Operating environment
Same as inverter
Max. number of units
connected in parallel
15 units (Master, 1 unit, Slave, 14 units)
The remaining slave units are controlled at the detection level of the master
braking unit operation.
6-149
*2.
The value in (
) shows the
capability when the optional fan unit
(BU-F) is installed.
Chapter 6 Converter System
The FRENIC-VG provides two kinds of braking resistors (DBR):10%ED and 20%ED.
6.5.3
(1)
Standard combination
10%ED spec
Braking resistor
Model
Resistance
value [Ω]
Braking unit
3.7
DB3.7V-41B
1
96
5.5
DB5.5V-41B
1
64
7.5
DB7.5V-41B
1
DB11V-41B
15
(Cycle is 100 sec.
or less)
Discharging
capability
[kWs]
Duty
cycle
[%ED]
Average
loss
[kW]
27.8
10
0.278
35.3
29.4
10
52.5
43.8
41.3
0.413
48
71.6
59.7
56.3
0.563
1
32
105
87.5
82.5
0.825
DB15V-41B
1
24
143
119
113
1.13
18.5
DB18.5V-41B
1
18
177
147
139
1.39
22
DB22V-41B
1
16
210
175
165
1.65
DB30V-41B
1
10
286
239
225
2.25
DB37V-41B
1
9.0
353
294
278
2.78
DB45V-41B
1
8.0
430
358
338
3.38
DB55V-41C
1
6.5
525
438
413
4.13
DB75V-41C
1
4.7
716
597
563
5.63
DB90V-41C
1
3.9
859
716
675
6.75
DB110V-41C
1
3.2
1050
875
825
8.25
DB132V-41C
1
2.6
1261
1050
990
9.90
DB160V-41C
1
2.2
1528
1273
1200
12.0
DB200V-41C
1
3.5/2
1910
1592
1500
15.0
DB220V-41C
1
3.2/2
2101
1751
1650
16.5
DB160V-41C
2
2.2/2
2674
2228
2100
21.0
DB160V-41C
2
2.2/2
3008
2507
2363
23.6
DB132V-41C
3
2.6/3
3390
2825
2663
26.6
DB132V-41C
3
2.6/3
3820
3183
3000
30.0
DB132V-41C
4
2.6/4
4775
3979
3750
37.5
DB160V-41C
4
2.2/4
6016
5013
4725
DB30V-41B
1
10
259
216
DB37V-41B
1
9.0
315
263
248
2.78
DB45V-41B
1
8.0
385
321
303
3.38
DB55V-41C
1
6.5
525
438
413
4.13
DB75V-41C
1
4.7
630
525
495
5.63
DB90V-41C
1
3.9
770
642
605
6.75
DB110V-41C
1
3.2
924
770
726
8.25
DB132V-41C
1
2.6
1120
934
880
9.9
DB160V-41C
1
2.2
1401
1167
1100
12.0
DB200V-41C
1
3.5/2
1541
1284
1210
15.0
DB220V-41C
1
3.2/2
1961
1634
1540
16.5
DB160V-41C
2
2.2/2
2486
2072
1953
21.0
DB160V-41C
2
2.2/2
2801
2334
2200
23.6
DB132V-41C
3
2.6/3
3151
2626
2475
26.6
DB132V-41C
3
2.6/3
3501
2918
2750
30.0
DB132V-41C
4
2.6/4
4412
3677
3465
37.5
DB160V-41C
4
2.2/4
4972
4143
3905
47.3
Model
BU37-4C
A
45
BU55-4C
BU90-4C
55
75
BU132-4C
90
Quantity
(units)
60
Hz
37
1
1
1
1
110
132
160
200
220
280
3-phase 400 V
Repetition braking
(150%-torque
conversion value)
50
Hz
30
315
355
400
BU220-4C
D
BU220-4C
F
G
630
H
BU220-4C
BU220-4C
BU55-4C
45
55
90
2
E
500
75
1
C
37
BU90-4C
3
4
1
1
A
BU132-4C
110
1
132
LD
spec
Torque [N•m]
Continuous braking
Braking
time
[s]
11
MD
spec
Max. braking torque
[%]
Standard combination
Quantity
(units)
Connection diagram
MD/LD
spec
Regenerative
capacity (kW)
Power supply voltage
Table 6.5.3-1: List of regenerative performance (10%ED spec)
160
200
220
280
355
400
450
500
BU220-4C
1
C
D
BU220-4C
2
E
F
630
G
710
H
BU220-4C
BU220-4C
3
4
150
110
10
The models DB160V-41C to DB220V-41C use two braking resistors per unit.
Example) Four braking resistors are used for two units of the model DB160V-41C.
6-150
204
47.3
10
2.25
(2)
20%ED spec
DB3.7V-42B
1
96
5.5
DB5.5V-42B
1
64
7.5
DB7.5V-42B
1
DB11V-42B
Repetition braking
(Cycle is 100 sec.
or less)
Discharging
capability
[kWs]
Duty
cycle
[%ED]
Average
loss
[kW]
55.5
20
0.555
35.3
29.4
20
52.5
43.8
82.5
0.825
48
71.6
59.7
113
1.13
1
32
105
87.5
165
1.65
DB15V-42B
1
24
143
119
225
2.25
18.5
DB18.5V-42B
1
18
177
147
278
2.78
22
DB22V-42B
1
16
210
175
330
3.30
DB30V-42C
1
12
286
239
450
4.50
DB37V-42C
1
9.0
353
294
555
5.55
DB45V-42C
1
8.0
430
358
675
6.75
DB55V-42C
1
6.5
525
438
825
8.25
DB75V-42C
1
4.7
716
597
1125
11.3
DB90V-42C
1
3.9
859
716
1350
13.5
DB110V-42C
1
3.2
1050
875
1650
16.5
DB132V-42C
1
2.6
1261
1050
1980
19.8
DB160V-42C
1
2.2
1528
1273
2400
24.0
DB200V-42C
1
3.5/2
1910
1592
3000
30.0
DB220V-42C
1
3.2/2
2101
1751
3300
33.0
DB160V-42C
2
2.2/2
2674
2228
4200
42.0
DB160V-42C
2
2.2/2
3008
2507
4725
47.3
DB132V-42C
3
2.6/3
3390
2825
5325
53.3
DB132V-42C
3
2.6/3
3820
3183
6000
60.0
DB132V-42C
4
2.6/4
4775
3979
7500
75.0
DB160V-42C
4
2.2/4
6016
5013
9450
DB30V-42C
1
12
259
216
DB37V-42C
1
9.0
315
263
495
5.55
DB45V-42C
1
8.0
385
321
605
6.75
DB55V-42C
1
6.5
525
438
825
8.25
DB75V-42C
1
4.7
630
525
990
11.3
DB90V-42C
1
3.9
770
642
1210
13.5
DB110V-42C
1
3.2
924
770
1452
16.5
DB132V-42C
1
2.6
1120
934
1760
19.8
DB160V-42C
1
2.2
1401
1167
2200
24.0
DB200V-42C
1
3.5/2
1541
1284
2420
30.0
DB220V-42C
1
3.2/2
1961
1634
3080
33.0
DB160V-42C
2
2.2/2
2486
2072
3905
47.3
DB132V-42C
3
2.6/3
2801
2334
4400
53.3
DB132V-42C
3
2.6/3
3151
2626
4950
53.3
DB132V-42C
3
2.6/3
3501
2918
5500
60.0
DB132V-42C
4
2.6/4
4412
3677
6930
75.0
DB160V-42C
4
2.2/4
4972
4143
7810
94.6
BU37-4C
+BU-F
A
37
45
BU90-4C
+BU-F
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
280
315
355
400
C
D
E
F
500
G
630
H
37
55
90
A
110
132
160
200
220
280
355
400
450
500
C
D
E
F
630
G
710
H
1
1
1
BU132-4C
+BU-F
1
BU220-4C
+BU-F
1
BU220-4C
+BU-F
BU220-4C
+BU-F
BU220-4C
+BU-F
BU55-4C
+BU-F
45
75
BU55-4C
+BU-F
Quantity
(units)
60
Hz
Model
BU90-4C
+BU-F
2
3
4
1
1
BU132-4C
+BU-F
1
BU220-4C
+BU-F
1
BU220-4C
+BU-F
BU220-4C
+BU-F
BU220-4C
+BU-F
2
3
4
150
110
20
(1)
This option is a custom order production product.
(2)
The fan unit (BU-F) is needed for the braking unit.
The models DB200V-42C and DB220V-42C use two braking resistors per unit.
Example) Two braking resistors are used for one unit of the model DB200V-42C.
6-151
407
94.6
20
4.50
Chapter 6 Converter System
Resistance
value [Ω]
3.7
Torque [N•m]
(150%-torque
conversion value)
50
Hz
30
3-phase 400 V
Braking resistor
Model
15
LD
spec
Braking unit
Continuous braking
Braking
time
[s]
11
MD
spec
Max. braking torque
[%]
Standard combination
Quantity
(units)
Connection diagram
MD/LD
spec
Regenerative
capacity (kW)
Power supply voltage
Table 6.5.3-2: List of regenerative performance (20%ED spec)
6.5.4
Installation
Braking resistor (DBR)
(1)
In the case of continuous regeneration, the braking resistor heats the average loss of the repetition braking (cycle:
100 sec.) stated in the List of regenerative performance values in Section 6.5.3.
Additionally, when the braking resistor uses metallic grid resistance elements, its surface temperature may reach
100°C or more.
Therefore, it is recommended to install the braking resistor on the top of the cabinet. (Refer to "12.5.2 Principles
in designing layout in cabinets" in Chapter 12.)
(2)
When storing the braking resistor into the cabinet, heat radiation measures must be investigated sufficiently.
(Investigate a structure where the heat of the DBR does not adversely affect units stored inside the cabinet.)
Braking unit
(1)
Install vertically. Do not install upside down or horizontally.
(2)
Keep a space as illustrated in Figure 6.5.4-1. Additionally, since the
heat radiates toward the upper portion, do not install units vulnerable to
the heat at the upper portion of the braking unit.
(3)
(4)
Cooling fins are installed on the rear of the braking unit. When the
braking unit operates continuously, the fin temperature may increase to
approx. 90°C. So, appropriate materials that can endure the
temperature increase should be used for the rear.
When using multiple braking units, arrange them horizontally to
minimize the mutual heat interference. However, when installing the
braking units vertically due to restrictions on space inside the cabinet,
partition plates or the like should be mounted to prevent the effects of
the heat at the lower portion on the upper portion. (Refer to "12.5.2
Principles in designing layout in cabinets" in Chapter 12.)
6.5.5
Upper
Left
100 mm
Braking unit
BU-4C
Right
50 mm
or
greater
50 mm
or
greater
Lower
100 mm
Figure 6.5.4-1: Restrictions on
braking unit installation
Protective operation
If an error stated in Table 6.5.5-1 occurs, the braking unit stops the DB drive and outputs the alarm signal (for any alarm)
from terminals 1 and 2. (The alarm signal (for any alarm) has no error content classifications.) It is necessary to use this
alarm signal so as to put the inverter in the coast-to-a-stop status (i.e., [OH2: external alarm] or [BX: coast-to-a-stop
command] is input to the X terminal).
Table 6.5.5-1: Contents of protective operation
Item
Contents (Structure)
Fuse blown
Operates if the fuse in the braking unit main circuit is blown by short-circuit or breakage of
the circuit.
Cooling unit overheat
Operates if the temperature of the unit cooling fins increases due to frequent braking
operation exceeding the specifications, high ambient temperature, or clogging of cooling
fins.
IGBT (switching element)
conduction error
Operates if the IGBT (switching element) detects the conduction even when the DB drive
signal shows the stop status.
Braking resistor overheat
Operates if the operation frequency of the braking resistor becomes high and the
temperature of the braking resistor increases.
6-152
6.5.6
Cautions on use of terminal functions
6.5.6.1
Braking resistor (DBR)
Table 6.5.6-1: List of braking resistor (DBR) terminals
Terminal name
Description
P, DB
DB unit connection terminal
Connect the P(+)R and DB terminals of the braking unit to these
terminals.
1, 2
Braking resistor overheat error
Braking resistor overheat error detection terminal
For braking resistor grounding
Grounding terminal
G
6.5.6.2
(1)
Braking unit
Main circuit and grounding terminal connections
Table 6.5.6-2: Functions of main circuit and grounding terminals
Terminal
symbol
Terminal name
P(+), DB(-)
Braking resistor
connection terminal
Connect to the P(+)R and DB terminals of the braking resistor.
P(+)R, DB
Braking resistor
connection terminals
Connect to the braking resistor.
For braking unit
grounding
Grounding terminal
G
(1)
Description
DC interconnecting terminals [(P(+), N(-)]
1) Connect the DC intermediate circuit terminals P(+) and N(-) of the inverter to the terminals P(+) and N(-) of the
braking unit.
2) Lay out the units so that the wiring length is 5 m or less. Additionally, perform the twist wiring or close-contact
(parallel) wiring for two wires.
(2)
Braking resistor connection terminals [(P(+)R and DB)]
1) Connect the terminals P and DB of the braking resistor to the terminals P(+)R and DB of the braking unit.
2) Lay out the units so that the wiring length is 10 m or less. Additionally, perform the twist wiring or close-contact
(parallel) wiring for two wires.
(3)
Unit grounding terminal [G]
To ensure the safety and take noise prevention measures, be sure to ground the unit grounding terminal
G. In
the Electrical Equipment Technical Standards, it is instructed to perform the grounding to the metallic frame of the
electrical equipment so as to prevent accidents, such as electric shock or fire.
When making connections, observe the following:
1) According to the Electrical Equipment Technical Standards, connect the grounding terminal to the grounding
pole where the class C grounding work has been made.
2) Connect a thick wire to the grounding terminal with a short distance and connect the grounding terminal to the
grounding pole dedicated to the inverter system.
For more details, refer to Section 6.5.8.1.
6-153
Chapter 6 Converter System
Terminal
symbol
(2)
Control terminal connections
Table 6.5.6-3: Functions of control terminals
Terminal
symbol
Terminal name
Description
1, 2
Braking unit alarm output
(for any alarm)
Outputs a failure signal, such as IGBT overheat or fuse blown
inside the braking unit
Additionally, this terminal also detects an alarm to stop the DB
operation when an error signal is input from the braking unit or
braking resistor.
Rating: 24 VDC, 3 to 30 mA (max)
i1, i2
DB drive slave input terminal
o1, o2,
DB drive master output terminal
Use this terminal when connecting braking units in parallel.
Remaining slave units are controlled at the DB operation
detection level of the master unit.
 For details, refer to "6.5.6.2 (3) Examples of connection
diagrams".
CN5, CN6
Option fan power supply connection
connector
Connect the fan power wires when an optional fan is installed.
2-1) Braking unit alarm output (for any alarm) [1, 2]
Connect the braking unit and braking resistor terminals to the contact inputs assigned to the external alarm input in
series like 1212. A photo-coupler is used inside the braking unit to detect an error signal from other braking unit or
braking resistor as illustrated in Figure 6.5.6-1. This photo-coupler has a voltage drop of approx. 1 V. When multiple
braking units are connected as a loop, the alarm does not operate by the voltage drop of the photo-coupler.
Therefore, the DB error detection loop
connection is restricted as follows.
BU
unit
BUユニット
(master)
(マスタ－)
• Direct input to INV: Up to 3 units
故障
Failure
contact
接点
• Detection by relay: Up to 4 units
1
DB error
DB異常検
detection
出信号
signal
BU unit
BUユニット
(slave)
(スレ－ブ)
Alarm
アラ－ム
detection
検出
1V
2
DBR
Overheat
過熱
error
異常
1
故障
Failure
contact
接点
2
1
BU unit
BUユニット
(slave)
(スレ－ブ)
Alarm
アラ－ム
detection
検出
1V
2
DBR
Overheat
過熱
error
異常
1
故障
Failure
contact
接点
2
1
Alarm
アラ－ム
detection
検出
1V
2
DBR
Overheat
過熱
error
異常
1
2
Figure 6.5.6-1: Braking unit and DBR alarm detection circuit (example)

For details on relay connections, refer to Figure 6.5.6-6 "Circuit diagram when detecting DB error by relay".
2-2) DB drive master-slave terminals [input: i1, i2, output: o1, o2]
 These terminals are used when two or more braking units are a) Setting on master
side
connected in parallel.
SW1
(Master-slave wiring.)
For details about how to connect the terminals, refer to Figure 6.5.6-5. 1
 When using a single braking unit, set SW1 as illustrated in Figure
6.5.6-2-a. (Factory default)
 When using braking units in the parallel connection, the SW1 is as
follows:
• Master: Short-circuit 2-3 of a). (Factory default)
• Slave: Short-circuit 1-2 of b).
 To prevent malfunction by noise, use a twisted wiring for the
"master-slave wiring" and make the connection with a wiring
length of 1.5 m or less (as a rough guideline).
6-154
2
3
b) Setting on slave
side
SW1
1
2
SW1
3
SW1
Figure 6.5.6-2: Switching braking unit's SW1
2-3) Option fan power supply connection connectors (CN5 and
CN6)
 Connect the DC power supply of the BU-F fan unit (option).
 The connectors CN5 and CN6 have the same function.
 Do not short-circuit the connectors when they are not used.
Separate the control wiring from the main circuit
wiring.
(Preventive measures against malfunction by noise.)
(2)
Secure the control wiring inside the braking unit so
that it is not directly in contact with the electrically live
part of the main circuit (terminal block of main circuit).
 For details, refer to the braking unit instruction
manual (INR-HF51196*).
Switch
SW1
Control
terminal
block
CN5 CN6
Figure 6.5.6-3: Braking unit control PCB
(3)
Examples of connection diagrams
Converter
output
コンバータ出力
コンバ－タ出力
Converter
output
Wiring
length
配線長さ
Wiring
length
配線長さ
2 m2m以下
or lower
10 m or
10m以下
Braking unit (BU□□□-4C)
制動ユニット（BU□□□-4C）
P(+)
1 2 3
G
SW1
Wiring
length
配線長さ
Braking
resistor
制動抵抗器
P(+)R
P
DB
DB
CHAR
GE
N(-)
lower
2 m2m以下
or lower
Braking
unit (BU□□□-4C),
制動ユニット（BU□□□-4C）
master
マスタ－
P(+)
ファン
Fan unit
ユニット
CN5,6
12 3
G
DB過熱
overheat
1 DB
2
G
<Inverter 1>
＜インバータ1＞
P(+)
P(+)R
N(-)
DB
SW1
M
G
ファン
Fan unit
ユニット
CN5,6
G
1.5m
1.5 m or
以下
lower
ファン
resistor
Fan unit Braking
制動抵抗器
ユニット
i1 i2 o1 o2 1 2
12 3
SW1
CN5,6
P(+)
<Inverter 2>
＜インバータ2＞
N(-)
DB
DB
2
G
X9【THR】
P(+)R
P
DB
overheat
DB過熱
1 DB
CM
P(+)
lower
i1 i2 o1 o2 1 2
DC bus (PN)
直流母線（PN）
DC bus (PN)
直流母線（PN）
i1 i2 o1 o2 1 2
Braking
resistor
制動抵抗器
10 m or
10m以下
P(+)R
CHAR
GE
N(-)
Wiring
length
配線長さ
CHAR
GE
N(-)
M
G
P(+)R
P
DB
DB
制動ユニット（BU□□□-4C）
Braking
unit (BU□□□-4C),
スレ－ブ
slave
overheat
DB過熱
1 DB
2
＜インバータ3＞
<Inverter 3>
<Inverter 1>
＜インバータ1＞
P(+)
P(+)R
P(+)
N(-)
DB
M
M
N(-)
G
G
G
CM
X9【THR】
Figure 6.5.6-4: Basic connection diagram
Figure 6.5.6-5: Connection diagram with braking units used
in parallel
6-155
Chapter 6 Converter System
(1)
(4)
DB circuit error is detected by relay
When detecting the error signal of the braking unit or braking resistor by the relay or when stopping multiple inverters,
use the configuration illustrated in Figure 6.5.6-6.
From diode
converter
Braking unit
(master)
Braking resistor
P(+)
P(+)R
P
N(-)
DB
DB
２
１
1
2
SW1
1・
2
3
*1
G
<INV1>
G
Braking unit
(slave)
Braking resistor
P(+)
P(+)R
P
N(-)
DB
DB
２
１
1
i1
i2
o1
o2
PN bus bar
PN bus bar
i1
i2
o1
o2
2
SW1
1
2
3 ・
30DBY
9
5
P(+)
P(+)R
N(-)
DB
M
G
X9[THR]
CM
<INV2>
G
G
10
30DBY
6
P(+)
P(+)R
N(-)
DB
M
G
X9[THR]
CM
Braking unit
(slave)
Braking resistor
<INV3>
P(+)
P(+)R
P
P(+)
P(+)R
N(-)
DB
DB
N(-)
DB
２
１
1
30DBY
11
7
2
SW1
1
2
3 ・
i1
i2
o1
o2
X9[THR]
CM
G
G
<INV4>
Braking unit
(slave)
Braking resistor
P(+)
P(+)R
P
N(-)
DB
DB
30DBY
12
8
P(+)
P(+)R
N(-)
DB
M
G
X9[THR]
CM
1
２
１
i1
i2
o1
o2
M
G
2
SW1
1
2
3 ・
G
G
*1
12
30DBX
X4
16
11
30DBX
X3
30DBX
RS4N-DE DC24V
(Fuji Electric)
15
DC24V
8(+)
X4
4(-)
7(+)
X3
3(-)
6(+)
X2
5(+)
X1
2(-)
1(-)
30DBY
14(+) HH54PW-FL
DC24V
30D
(Fuji Electric)
BY
13(-)
Figure 6.5.6-6: Circuit diagram when detecting DB error by relay
(1)
Use a relay that excites the coil using a minute current for the relay, to which the error signal of the
braking unit is input. (Recommended: RS4N-DE 24VDC)
(2)
In this circuit example, "DB error" to be input to the inverter is normally ON (ON during normal operation).
Therefore, the DB error (OH2) is given if the inverter control power starts up earlier than the external 24 V
power supply.
(3)
When using the DBR for the equipment that restarts after momentary stop, back up the 24 V power
supply. If measures for momentary stop are not taken, the DB error (OH2) is given.
6-156
6.5.7
Peripheral equipment
The peripherals used in the braking system as shown in Figure 6.5.7-1 have the following circuits.
NSW:
A circuit breaker used to separate the braking unit from the DC bus bar (PN).
Since this circuit breaker is used in the common bus bar (DC) shared with the inverter, do not use
a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) with braking characteristics. Be sure to use a non-auto
switch.
Charging circuit:
This circuit is intended for initial charging of the braking unit. The circuit is composed of an initial
charging resistor, a magnetic contactor, and an option box "MCA-VG7-VSU".
Charging circuit
From diode converter
R0
NSW
PN bus bar
73
DBR
BU unit(BU□□□-4 C)
Fuse
P(+)
P(+)R
P
DB
DB
CHARGE
N(-)
Fan unit
123
G
MCA-VG7
-VSU
AC 400 to
440 V
50/60 Hz
30BU
Chapter 6 Converter System
It is not particularly necessary to install the peripheral equipment for normal operation applications.
SW1
CN5,6
i1 i2 o1 o2 1
2
DB
1 overheat
73A
2
73
G
Figure 6.5.7-1: Peripheral equipment configuration for braking system
Quantity
used
Circuit breaker (NSW)
BU37-4C
1
BW400RAS-4P
BU55-4C
1
BU90-4C
1
BU132-4C
1
BU220-4C
1
4
SC-N1+SZ-SP3
Charging resistor
GZG100W 20ΩJ
Voltage detector
MCA-VG7-VSU
(JRM)
2
3
Charging circuit
Magnetic contactor (73)
BW630RAS-4P
SC-N3+SZ-SP4
80W7.5Ω
SC-N6+SZ-SP6
(HF5C5504)
SC-N7+SZ-SP7
*1. SZ-SP: 3-phase parallel terminal plate (for short-circuiting of main contact of magnetic contactor)
(1) Open or close the circuit breaker while the DC bus bar is not turned ON.
When operating the circuit breaker while the DC bus bar is turned ON, the external handle that can be
operated when the cabinet door is closed should be combined with a non-auto switch.
(2) The circuit breaker should be used in the common DC bus bar shared with the inverter. Therefore, a
molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) or an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) with braking
characteristics cannot be used.
(3) A 4-pole non-auto switch for DC that can keep the withstand voltage should be used for the circuit breaker.
(4) When using multiple braking units, perform the branch wiring from the secondary side of the unit (73), etc.
6-157
6.5.8
Wire size selection
The wire size of the main circuit is calculated from the current value shown below.
I DB ( AVG ) 
PAVG
[ A] ･･･ Equation 6.5.8-1
R DB
• IDB (AVG):
DB average current [A] when converting it into the
average loss
• IDB (PEAK): DB peak current [A] in max. braking-regenerative
time period
I DB ( PEAK ) 
Vdc
[ A] ････
R DB
Equation 6.5.8-2
• PAVG:
Average loss of DBR [W]
• RDB:
Resistance value of DBR [Ω]
• VDC:
Braking unit operating voltage (DC intermediate
circuit voltage) [V]
Normally, the wire size is calculated from the average loss of the braking resistor. If the maximum electric power is large
with low frequency, the wire size should be also calculated from the short-time allowable current in the peak
current-regenerative time period.
6.5.8.1
Wire size (obtained from braking unit specifications)
The wire size of a braking unit is selected so that it meets the braking resistor specifications. This section describes
applicable wire sizes from the braking unit specifications. For information on how to select the wire size based on the
braking resistor specifications, see Section 6.5.8.2.
The DB average current is calculated from "Table 6.5.2-1 Standard braking unit specifications" in "6.5.2 Overview of
braking unit" to select appropriate wire sizes, using Equation 6.5.8-1.
Table 6.5.8-1: Recommended wire size based on the braking unit specifications
Terminal
size
Main
circuit
grounding wire
Main circuit: P(+), N(-), P(+)R, DB
10%ED (Standard)
IDB(AVG)
[A]
30%ED (BU-F installed)
Temperature inside cabinet is
40°C or less.
60°C
75°C
90°C
2
2
2
BU37-4C
M4
12.0
BU55-4C
M5
19.4
BU90-4C
M6
31.0
5.5
3.5
BU132-4C
M8
47.5
8
5.5
5.5
BU220-4C
M10
79.5
22
14
14
IDB(AVG)
[A]
Temperature inside cabinet is
50°C or less.
60°C
75°C
Grounding wire
G
Control
wire
2
1.25
90°C
21.6
5.5
2
2
33.6
8
5.5
3.5
53.6
22
8
5.5
3.5
82.2
38
22
14
5.5
137.7
100
38
38
14
An "IV wire," a "600 V HIV insulated wire," and a "600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire" were used at
permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial wiring.
6-158
6.5.8.2
Wire size (obtained from braking resistor specifications)
Regenerative capacity
(kW)
Model
Quantity
60°C 75°C 90°C
MD
3.7
DB3.7V-4□B
1
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.5
DB5.5V-4□B
1
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.5
DB7.5V-4□B
1
2.0
2.0
11
DB11V-4□B
1
2.0
15
DB15V-4□B
1
3-phase 400V
18.5 DB18.5V-4□B
LD
Temperature inside cabinet is 50°C or less.
Temperature inside cabinet is 40°C or less.
10%ED rating
10%ED rating
60°C 75°C 90°C
Current [A]
60°C 75°C 90°C
20%ED rating
Current [A]
Current [A]
20%ED rating
Current [A]
Braking resistor
60°C
75°C 90°C
1.7
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.4
2.0
2.0
2.0
1.7
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.4
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.6
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.6
2.0
3.4
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
3.4
2.0
2.0
2.0
4.8
2.0
2.0
5.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
5.1
2.0
2.0
2.0
7.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
9.7
2.0
2.0
2.0
6.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
9.7
1
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
12.4
2.0
2.0
2.0
8.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
12.4
22
DB22V-4□B
1
2.0
2.0
2.0
10.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
14.4
2.0
2.0
2.0
10.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
14.4
30
DB30V-4□C
1
2.0
2.0
2.0
15.0
3.5
2.0
2.0
19.4
2.0
2.0
2.0
15.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
19.4
37
DB37V-4□C
1
3.5
2.0
2.0
17.6
5.5
3.5
2.0
24.8
2.0
2.0
2.0
17.6
3.5
2.0
2.0
24.8
45
DB45V-4□C
1
3.5
2.0
2.0
20.5
8.0
3.5
2.0
29.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
20.5
3.5
3.5
2.0
29.0
55
DB55V-4□C
1
5.5
3.5
2.0
25.2
14
5.5
3.5
35.6
3.5
2.0
2.0
25.2
5.5
3.5
3.5
35.6
75
DB75V-4□C
1
8.0
5.5
3.5
34.6
14
8.0
5.5
48.9
5.5
3.5
3.5
34.6
8.0
5.5
5.5
48.9
90
DB90V-4□C
1
14
5.5
3.5
41.6
22
14
8.0
58.8
8.0
5.5
3.5
41.6
14
8.0
5.5
58.8
110 DB110V-4□C
1
14
8.0
5.5
50.8
38
14
14
71.8
14
5.5
5.5
50.8
14
14
8.0
71.8
132 DB132V-4□C
1
22
14
8.0
61.7
38
22
14
87.3
14
8.0
5.5
61.7
22
14
14
87.3
160 DB160V-4□C
1
38
14
14
73.9
60
38
22
104
22
14
8.0
73.9
38
22
14
104
200 DB200V-4□C
1
38
22
14
92.6
100
38
22
131
22
14
14
92.6
38
38
22
131
220 DB220V-4□C
1
60
22
22
102
100
38
38
144
38
22
14
102
60
38
22
144
280 DB160V-4□C
2
100
38
38
138
150
60
60
195
60
38
22
138
100
60
38
195
315 DB160V-4□C
2
100
38
38
147
150
100
60
207
60
38
22
147
100
60
38
207
355 DB132V-4□C
3
150
60
38
175
200
100
60
248
60
60
38
175
150
100
60
248
400 DB132V-4□C
3
150
60
60
186
200
100
100
263
100
60
38
186
150
100
60
263
500 DB132V-4□C
4
200
100
60
240
325
150
100
340
100
100
60
240
200
150
100
340
630 DB160V-4□C
4
250
150
100
293
2x200
200
150
381
150
100
100
293
200
150
100
381
37
DB30V-4□C
1
2.0
2.0
2.0
14.9
3.5
2.0
2.0
19.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
14.9
2.0
2.0
2.0
19.2
45
DB37V-4□C
1
3.5
2.0
2.0
17.3
5.5
3.5
2.0
24.5
2.0
2.0
2.0
17.3
3.5
2.0
2.0
24.5
55
DB45V-4□C
1
3.5
2.0
2.0
20.3
8.0
3.5
2.0
28.7
2.0
2.0
2.0
20.3
3.5
2.0
2.0
28.7
75
DB55V-4□C
1
5.5
3.5
2.0
26.3
14
5.5
3.5
37.2
3.5
2.0
2.0
26.3
5.5
3.5
3.5
37.2
90
DB75V-4□C
1
8.0
5.5
3.5
33.9
14
8.0
5.5
47.9
5.5
3.5
2.0
33.9
8.0
5.5
5.5
47.9
110 DB90V-4□C
1
14
5.5
3.5
41.1
22
14
8.0
58.2
8.0
5.5
3.5
41.1
14
8.0
5.5
58.2
132 DB110V-4□C
1
14
8.0
5.5
49.7
38
14
14
70.4
8.0
5.5
5.5
49.7
14
14
8.0
70.4
160 DB132V-4□C
1
22
14
8.0
60.8
38
22
14
85.9
14
8.0
5.5
60.8
22
14
14
85.9
200 DB160V-4□C
1
38
14
14
73.9
60
38
22
104
22
14
8.0
73.9
38
22
14
104
220 DB200V-4□C
1
38
22
14
86.8
60
38
22
123
22
14
14
86.8
38
22
22
123
280 DB220V-4□C
1
60
22
22
102
100
38
38
145
38
22
14
102
60
38
22
145
355 DB160V-4□C
2
100
38
38
139
150
60
60
197
60
38
22
139
100
60
38
197
400 DB132V-4□C
3
100
60
38
148
200
100
60
235
60
38
22
148
100
100
60
235
450 DB132V-4□C
3
150
60
38
177
200
100
100
250
60
60
38
177
150
100
60
250
500 DB132V-4□C
3
150
60
60
186
200
100
100
263
100
60
38
186
150
100
60
263
630 DB132V-4□C
4
200
100
60
241
325
150
100
341
100
100
60
241
200
150
100
341
710 DB160V-4□C
4
250
150
100
278
2x200
200
150
394
150
100
60
278
250
150
150
394
(1) An "IV wire," a "600 V HIV insulated wire," and a "600 V cross-linked polyethylene insulated wire" were
used at permissible temperatures of 60°C, 75°C, and 90°C, respectively, and the values represent aerial
wiring.
(2) Either "1" or "2" appears in □ of the braking resistor model shown above. 1: 10%ED, 2: 20%ED
(3) A single DB160V-41C to DB220V-41C, DB200V-42C, or DB220V-42C is comprised of two breaking
resistors.
Examples) DB160V-41C x 2 → 4 breaking resistors
DB200V-42C x 1 → 2 breaking resistors
6-159
Chapter 6 Converter System
Specifications
Power-based series
Table 6.5.8-2: Applicable wire size in various combinations of standard baking resistors
6.5.9
External dimensions
6.5.9.1
Braking resistor (DBR)
Figure B
W
W1
H
H1
H2
D
D1
C
Figure
Figure A
Approx.
mass
[kg]
DB3.7V-41B
420
388
280
248
203
140
1.6
8
A
5
DB5.5V-41B
420
388
480
448
377
140
1.6
10
Model
Dimensions [mm]
Set quantity
7
DB7.5V-41B
DB11V-41B
DB15V-41B
8
420
388
660
628
557
140
1.6
10
11
400 V 10%ED
DB18.5V-41B
DB22V-41B
14
DB30V-41B
19
DB37V-41B
425
388
750
718
647
240
1.6
10
21
550
520
440
430
250
283
―
12
DB90V-41C
650
620
440
430
250
283
―
12
41
DB110V-41C
750
720
440
430
250
283
―
12
57
DB160V-41C
600
570
440
430
250
283
―
12
74
DB200V-41C
725
695
440
430
250
283
―
12
50 (x 2)
420
388
480
448
377
140
1.6
10
DB45V-41B
DB55V-41C
26
B
DB75V-41C
30
DB132V-41C
43
DB220V-41C
DB3.7V-42B
26
51 (×2)
A
DB5.5V-42B
2 units per
set
8
11
DB7.5V-42B
DB11V-42B
DB15V-42B
14
420
388
750
718
647
240
1.6
10
21
DB18.5V-42B
400 V 20%ED
DB22V-42B
26
DB30V-42C
600
570
440
430
250
283
―
12
DB37V-42C
700
670
440
430
250
283
―
12
DB45V-42C
B
24
32
34
DB55V-42C
750
720
440
430
250
283
―
12
45
DB75V-42C
550
520
440
430
250
483
―
12
68
DB90V-42C
650
620
440
430
250
483
―
12
65
DB110V-42C
700
670
440
430
250
483
―
12
82
DB132V-42C
86
DB160V-42C
100
DB200V-42C
700
670
440
430
250
483
―
DB220V-42C
12
85 (×2)
83 (×2)
2 units per
set
For items marked as
in the table above, two resistors of the same shape are used as one set. Carefully
check this point when investigating the installation space.
When ordering one unit of this model, one set (two resistors) will be delivered.
6-160
6.5.9.2
Braking unit (10%ED)
Dimensions [mm]
Model
6.5.9.3
W2
H
H1
H2
H3
H4
D
D1
BU37-4C
150 100 280 265 250
7.5
15
160
1.2
BU55-4C
230 130
4
5.5
BU90-4C
BU132-4C
250 150 370 355 340
BU220-4C
450 435 420
2.4
9
13
Braking unit (Applicable to 30%ED)
As the fan unit is installed, the braking unit capability is increased.
■
Fan unit
BU-F
H5
D2
L (Fan power
supply wire)
149
44
76
320
Model
Braking unit and fan unit
Dimensions [mm]
W
H
H6
H7
D1
D3
BU37-4C
150 135 7.5 280
+BU-F
30
310 160 1.2
64
BU55-4C
230
+BU-F
400 V
■
W4
Voltage
Dimensions (mm)
Model
W5 W6
47.5
BU90-4C
+BU-F
BU132-4C
250
+BU-F
BU220-4C
+BU-F
6-161
57.5 370
400
450
480
D
Chapter 6 Converter System
400 V
W
4 - mounting bolt (M5)
Approx.
mass [kg]
Voltage
2-ø6
FRENIC- VG
7
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible
Peripherals
7.1
Configuring the FRENIC-VG........................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2
Anti-noise devices .......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1
Output circuit filter (OFL filter) ................................................................................................. 7-2
7.2.1.1
Specifications ............................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1.2
External dimensions and applicable wire sizes ............................................................. 7-3
7.2.2
Radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL) ..................................................................... 7-4
7.2.2.1
7.2.3
Power filter (power filter for input by Fuji Electric Technica) .................................................... 7-5
7.2.3.1
Specifications ............................................................................................................... 7-5
7.2.3.2
Precautions on use ....................................................................................................... 7-6
7.2.3.3
External dimensions ..................................................................................................... 7-7
7.2.4
Filter capacitor (ground capacitor) for radio noise reduction ................................................... 7-8
7.2.5
Spark killer .............................................................................................................................. 7-9
7.2.6
Noise cut transformer (TRAFY) .............................................................................................. 7-9
7.2.6.1
7.2.7
7.3
Specifications ............................................................................................................... 7-4
Specifications ............................................................................................................. 7-10
Arrester (arrester for power supply) ...................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.7.1
Specifications (an excerpt) ......................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.7.2
Precautions on use ..................................................................................................... 7-11
7.2.7.3
Examples of circuits .................................................................................................... 7-12
7.2.7.4
External dimensions ................................................................................................... 7-13
Noise prevention........................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.3.1
Grounding ............................................................................................................................. 7-15
7.3.2
Wiring of main circuit of inverter (PWM converter)................................................................ 7-17
7.3.3
Wiring of control terminals of inverter (PWM converter) ....................................................... 7-19
7.1
Configuring the FRENIC-VG
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
The following figure shows a typical installation of the PWM converter.
7-1
7.2
Anti-noise devices
7.2.1
Output circuit filter (OFL filter)
(1)
The OFL filter is an LC filter used at the output side of the inverter for the
following purposes:
(
)
• Protects the motor from insulation damage caused by micro surge
voltage from the inverters.
• Suppresses leakage current (in-line leakage current) in long-distance
wiring.
• Suppresses induction noise from the inverter output side wiring.
Effective for suppression of surge/in-line leakage current in long
wiring length such as in-plant facilities.
(2)
Use output circuit filters in your desired combination, since they are
available for each of the reactor and the capacitor unit.
(3)
Use of output circuit filters is recommended for wiring length in excess of
50 m.

For more information, refer to the Output Circuit Filter (OFL-A) Instruction Manual (INR-HF52131*).
7.2.1.1
Specifications
Power- Applied motor Filter model
based
capacity
(Procurement
series
[kW]
type)
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
280
315
355
630
710
800
1000
400V
OFL-30-4A
OFL-37-4A
OFL-45-4A
OFL-55-4A
OFL-75-4A
OFL-90-4A
OFL-110-4A
OFL-132-4A
OFL-160-4A
OFL-200-4A
OFL-220-4A
OFL-280-4A
OFL-315-4A
OFL-355-4A
OFL-630-4A
Location of use
•
Temperature
Individual type
Reactor
OFL-30-4A-L
OFL-37-4A-L
OFL-45-4A-L
OFL-55-4A-L
OFL-75-4A-L
OFL-90-4A-L
OFL-110-4A-L
OFL-132-4A-L
OFL-160-4A-L
OFL-200-4A-L
OFL-220-4A-L
OFL-280-4A-L
OFL-315-4A-L
OFL-355-4A-L
OFL-630-4A-L
Rated value specifications
Rated current Overload
Max. output
Capacitor unit
[A]
capacity [%] frequency [Hz]
OFL-30-4A-R
OFL-37-4A-R
OFL-45-4A-R
OFL-55-4A-R
OFL-75-4A-R
OFL-90-4A-R
OFL-110-4A-R
OFL-132-4A-R
OFL-160-4A-R
OFL-200-4A-R
OFL-220-4A-R
OFL-280-4A-R
OFL-400-4A-R
OFL-500-4A-R
60
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
520
585
650
1170
120 Hz
380 to 480 V
Shall be installed indoor (free from corrosive gases, flammable gases, dusts, oil mist). Pollution
degree 2: IEC60664-1
Shall not be exposed to direct sunlight.
Storage
temperature
5 to 95% RH (without condensation) Storage humidity
1000 m or lower
400 m or lower
-10 to 50C
Ambient humidity
Altitude
Max. output wiring length
Withstand voltage/insulation
2500 VAC/min, 1 MΩ or higher (500 VDC megger)
resistance
(1)
150%/1 min
180%/0.5 s
Rated
voltage [V]
Contact your Fuji Electric representative for details.
•
Environment
Figure 7.2.1-1: Circuit configuration
-25 to +65C (max. +30C for long-term
storage)
5 to 95% RH (without condensation)
The following range of inverter carrier frequencies can be used:
 OFL-30-4A to OFL-55-4A:
2 to 15 kHz
 OFL-75-4A to OFL-355-4A:
2 to 10 kHz
(2)
Reactor and capacitor unit are delivered as a set if ordered in form as specified according to the "Filter
model (Procurement type)" in this table. As for device nameplate on reactor and capacitor unit, the above
individual type numbers are indicated.
(3)
Resistance of capacitor unit will discharge heat when inverter is in operation. Hence, it is recommended
to install it on top of the cabinet.
7-2
(4)
External dimensions and applicable wire sizes
■
Reactor
■
Capacitor unit
Figure F
Figure C
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
7.2.1.2
In vector control where output circuit filter is used and wiring length is long, current vibration or torque
shortage may occur due to lack of normal motor control, being affected by the inductance of output circuit
filter or wiring.
Be sure to select a location for installing inverter and motor by taking into account the wiring length
between inverter and motor of 100 m or less, even in the case of using output circuit filter.
Figure D
Figure E
Figure G
Approx. mass (kg)
OFL-30-4A
OFL-37-4A
OFL-45-4A
OFL-55-4A
OFL-75-4A
OFL-90-4A
OFL-110-4A
OFL-132-4A
OFL-160-4A
OFL-200-4A
OFL-220-4A
OFL-280-4A
OFL-315-4A
OFL-355-4A
OFL-630-4A
C/F
D/F
E/G
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
210
220
220
260
260
260
300
300
300
320
340
350
440
440
480
175
190
195
200
210
210
230
240
240
270
300
300
275
290
335
210
220
265
275
290
290
330
340
340
350
390
430
450
480
560
70
75
70
85
85
85
100
100
100
105
115
115
150
150
160
140
150
155
160
170
170
190
200
200
220
250
250
230
245
280
90
95
140
150
150
155
170
170
180
190
190
200
170
175
240
160
160
160
160
233
233
233
233
233
333
333
333
－
－
－
J
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
－
K
M5 M6
M5 M6
M6 M8
M6 M8
M8 M10
M8 M10
M8 M10
M10 M10
M10 M10
M10 M12
M10 M12
M10 M12
M12 M12
M12 M12
M12 M12
Generated loss
Wire size [mm2]
[W]
*1
Reactor Capacitor Reactor Capacitor Reactor Capacitor
12
15
17
22
25
28
38
42
48
60
70
78
90
100
170
3
5.5
5.5
5.5
10
10
10
10
13
16
16
19
36
36
36
100
110
150
170
180
190
240
260
300
330
400
450
650
680
1300
470
500
660
740
1020
1170
1170
1540
1910
2190
2190
3120
2640
2640
3400
2
(M4)
Same as wires for inverter
Dimensions (mm)
Filter model Figure
*1 Regarding the wires to be connected to the output circuit filter, use those with an appropriate size as explained below:
 For I/O wiring of the filter reactor, use the wires with the same size as those for the inverter to be used.
 For wiring of the filter capacitor, use the "75C 600 V HIV insulated wires" or "90C 600 V cross-linked
polyethylene-insulated wires". The maximum applicable wire is 5.5 mm 2 (M4 size).
(1)
The wiring length for the filter capacitor must be within 3 m as shown in Figure 7.2.1-1, and the wiring
must be separated from the control circuit.
(2)
The wire to be connected to the filter capacitor must not touch (closely contact) the resistance elements.
If there is a possibility that the wire might contact the resistance elements, be sure to take a measure to
protect the wires (for instance, cover the wires with a glass tube).
(3)
Install the output circuit filter on the inverter side. Wiring length between inverter and OFL filter should be
within 5 m as a rough guideline. However, wiring length longer than this will not pose any particular
problem.
7-3
7.2.2
Radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL)
A radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL) reduces the radio noise generated from the inverter output wiring by
leading the inverter output wiring through it 4 times. Three inverter output wires and one grounding wire (4 wires in all)
should be led through the reactor 4 times in the same direction. If a shielded wire is used, it should also be led through 4
times. Be sure to use wires rated at 75C or higher temperatures.
The ACL may generate a large amount of heat because it absorbs high frequency noise components and radiates into
the air as heat. If this is the case, take appropriate measures such as lowering the carrier frequency, using wires with
higher heat resistance, increasing the number of ACLs to reduce the number of lead-throughs (turns) per ACL, and/or
using a larger sized ACL.
The wire sizes that can be used are determined by the dimension (inside diameter) and installation conditions of the
radio noise reducing zero-phase reactor (ACL).
Refer to Table 7.2-1: Applicable wire sizes.
7.2.2.1
Specifications
ACL-40B
ACL-74B
F200160
(without installation legs)
F200160PB
(with installation legs)
Figure 7.2.2-1: External dimensions of ACL
Table 7.2-1: Applicable wire sizes
Operating conditions
Model
ACL-40B
ACL-74B
F200160
F200160PB
Wire size [mm2]
Quantity
No. of lead-throughs (turns)
1
4
2
2
4
1
22, 38, 5.5×2, 8×2, 14×2, 22×2
1
4
8, 14
2
2
22, 38, 60, 5.5×2, 8×2, 14×2, 22×2
4
1
100, 150, 200, 250, 325, 38×2, 60×2, 100×2
4
1
150×2, 200×2, 250×2, 325×2,
150×3, 200×3, 250×3, 325×3, 250×4, 325×4
2.0, 3.5, 5.5
(1)
The 3 phases (U, V, W) and the dedicated grounding wire for the motor are taken into consideration for
the wires in the above table.
(2)
The use conditions given in the above table are applied when the wires specified in this manual are used.
(IV, HIV, and FLSC wires)
7-4
Operating environment
(1) Location of use : Indoor (There must be no corrosive gas, flammable gas, dust, or oil mist.)
U
: Must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
: -20 to 50C (Storage temperature: -30 to +70C)
(3) Humidity
: 5 to 95%Rh (There must be no dew condensation.)
(4) Altitude
: 1000 m or less
U
V
W
G
Connect the dedicated
grounding wire for the
motor to the grounding
terminal of the inverter,
and then connect it to the
grounding bus bar.
W
Motor side
V
E
Dedicated earth
cable for motor
Figure 7.2.2-2: Leading the grounding wire through the ACL
7.2.3
Power filter (power filter for input by Fuji Electric Technica)
Noise current generated from inverter (converter) is suppressed by installing this filter on the input supply side of
converter.
(1)
Do not use a ground capacitor in combination with the power filter.
(2)
Since leakage current as given in the specification below will flow constantly,
care should be taken for sensitivity current settings of any earth leakage circuit
breaker (ELCB) or leakage detector that is used.
(There will be an electrostatic capacity between the power filter and the ground
since a ground capacitor is installed in the power filter.)
7.2.3.1
Specifications
Model
Rated current
Rated
Leakage current [mA]
[A]
voltage [V]
RNFMCH1-40
150
RNFMC2H-40
200
RNFMC3H-40
300
RNFMC4H-40
400
RNFMC5H-40
500
RNFMC6H-40
600
900
1260
Operating
environment
RNFMC9H-40
RNFMC12H-40
 2.1 mA or lower
(neutral point
grounding)
480
Wire size [mm2]
Voltage
drop [V]
Withstand voltage
[V]
Main circuit
Grounding
1.0 V
or lower
2500 VAC/minute
(between wires
and ground)
Same as
applicable
converters
IV 2 mm2
or higher
 19.0 mA or lower
(S-phase
grounding)
9.9 mA or lower
(neutral point
grounding)
Location of
use
 Indoor (There must be no corrosive gas, flammable gas, dust, or oil mist.)
Temperature
-10 to 50C (Storage temperature: -10 to +60C)
Humidity
5 to 95%Rh (There must be no dew condensation.)
Altitude
1000 m or lower
 Must not be exposed to direct sunlight.
7-5
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
(2) Temperature
Inverter side
7.2.3.2
Precautions on use
Figure 7.2.3-1: Example configuration where a power filter is used
(1)
Connect wires in accordance with the product nameplate.
(2)
Be sure to ground power filter. To reduce the ground wire resistance, select the same wire size as the
converter and lay the wiring at a minimum distance.
(3)
Do not use devices other than those are recommended by Fuji Electric. It may cause risk of burning.
(4)
Shorten the wiring length between the power filter and the converter/inverter (wiring c) as much as
possible.
(5)
Separate the input line (wiring a) of the power filter from the input/output lines (wiring b) of the
converter/inverter as much as possible.
7-6
External dimensions
Rating
plate
Terminal
block with
cover
Terminal block with cover
Earth terminal
(M6)
Rating
plate
RNFMC5H-40, RNFMC6H-40
Terminal
block with
cover
Terminal block with cover
Mass 19.5 kg
Ventilation
hole  4.5
Terminal block with
cover
Earth terminal
(M6)
Main terminal (M16)
Terminal block with cover
Mass 6.5 kg
Terminal symbol plate
Rating
plate
Earth terminal
(M5)
Terminal symbol plate
Ventilation
hole  4.5
Terminal symbol plate
Main
terminal
(M10)
Ventilation
hole  4.5
Mass 4.1 kg
RNFMC2H-40
Terminal
block with
cover
Main terminal (M12)
Rating
plate
Earth terminal (M6)
RNFMC3H-40
Mass 21.0 kg
Hanging hole 2-φ15 (same
on the rear side)
RNFMC9H-40
Earth terminal (M10)
Rating
plate
Terminal symbol plate
Ventilation
hole  4.5
Terminal symbol plate
Terminal
block with
cover
Main
terminal
(M10)
Earth terminal
(M6)
2-(1113)
Terminal block with
cover
Mass 30.0 kg
Mass 11.0 kg
With ventilation hole
With ventilation hole
P Arrow view
Hanging ear
4 – φ15
P Arrow view
Earth terminal (M10)
RNFMC12H-40
Earth terminal (M10)
Mass 50.0 kg
With ventilation hole
With ventilation hole
P Arrow view
Hanging ear
4 - φ15
P Arrow view
Earth terminal (M10)
7-7
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
Earth terminal
(M5)
Terminal symbol plate
Ventilation
hole 4.5
Terminal symbol plate
Main
terminal
(M8)
2- 7
Terminal symbol plate
Terminal
block with
cover
RNFMC4H-40
Terminal symbol plate
RNFMCH1-40
Terminal symbol plate
7.2.3.3
7.2.4
Filter capacitor (ground capacitor) for radio noise reduction
A filter capacitor is effective to reduce AM radio frequency band (1 MHz or lower) noises. Using this filter together with a
zero-phase reactor (ACL) enhances the effectiveness.
If you use this ground capacitor, be sure to use one for each input power supply line regardless of the capacity of the
converter (inverter).
Model: NFM60M315KPD
Cabinet
PN bus (Bus bar)
DCF1
MCC
B
R
S
T
P
(B)
(B)
1uF
1uF
1uF
0.1uF
(BK)
G
U
V
W
N
DCF2
(B)
P
N
CNV
INV1
G
P
U
N
V
W
Grounding
bus
INV2
M1
Fireproof resin filling (black)
(UL94 V-0 product)
Blue
M2
G
Fireproof resin case
(black)
(UL94 V-0 product)
Earth capacitor
*
Black
Seal
The letter in ( ) of the ground capacitors shows the wire sheath color: (B) for blue or
(BK) for black.
Figure 7.2.4-1: Example of circuit
Figure 7.2.4-2: External dimensions
(1)
Take care when selecting an earth leakage circuit breaker (ELCB) or leakage detector, because the
leakage current is increased when a ground capacitor is installed.
(2)
Do not use a ground capacitor together with an EMC filter. (It does not conform to EMC directive.)
(3)
Do not use an RNFMC type power filter in conjunction with a ground capacitor.
(4)
Do not apply a ground capacitor to the DC bus bar or the output side of the inverter. (Doing so might
break the ground capacitor.)
(5)
Do not apply a ground capacitor to a PWM converter system. (Doing so might break the ground
capacitor.)
(6)
About wiring:
 Ground it together with the target device. Make wiring of the ground capacitor as short as possible.
 Do not store this capacitor in the wiring duct for other control wires. (Separate the wiring from other
wires.)
(7)
When you conduct a pressure test or insulation resistance test, disconnect the ground capacitor so that
test voltage will not apply to it. If you conduct a pressure test or the like in the normal state, the ground
capacitor will be broken.
(8)
Cannot be used for 690V series.
7-8
7.2.5
Spark killer
A spark killer is a CR filter that absorbs surge and noise generated from an
electromagnetic contactor or a solenoid valve and prevents malfunctions and
breakage of the devices.
Internal
configuration
UL-1007, CSA TR-64
Standard item
(AWG20 twisted wire)
Specifications
Outside dimensions (mm)
Model
Rated
voltage
Capacitance
F ±20%
Resistance
Ω ±30%
W
H
T
A
S1-B-0
AC250 V
0.1
200 (1/2 W)
17.5
40
7.1
20
0.2
500 (1/2 W)
27.5
10.4
30
S2-A-0
Temperature: -40 to 85C
Humidity: 5 to 95%Rh
The notes 6) and 7) in 7.2.4
also apply.
Unit: mm
Figure 7.2.5-1: External dimensions
7.2.6
Noise cut transformer (TRAFY)
In a general insulation transformer, the primary coil and secondary coil electrically insulate the commercial power supply
with a commercial frequency, and the voltage of the secondary coil based on the turns ratio is generated. While common
mode noise at low frequencies that is close to the commercial frequency can be prevented, if normal mode noise at high
frequencies enters, it is transmitted from the primary coil to the secondary coil by electromagnetic induction and static
electricity induction.
As a measure for this problem, a shielded transformer, in which a shield (screen)
is inserted between the primary coil and secondary coil, is available.
TRAFY is an insulation transformer designed for noise prevention that shields the
primary coil, secondary coil, and the whole device (in a three-tier shielding
structure) and has a noise attenuation feature across broad frequency bands.
In the case that noise enters from a power supply system, and it causes
malfunction of an electronic device, etc., you can prevent the malfunction by
connecting TRAFY to the power supply system of that electronic device.

For more information, refer to the catalog “Fuji Noise/Surge Prevention
Device TRAFY (HS152)”.
7-9
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
Tip solder treatment
Table 7.2-2: Comparison of features of transformers
Type of transformer
Common mode
noise
Insulation transformer
 (Low frequencies only)
Shielded transformer
TRAFY
Sold by Fuji Electric Technica
 (Frequency bands around low
frequency and high frequency)
◎
◎
Normal mode noise ×
×
Structure
Insulates between the primary
and secondary coils to prevent
transmission of noise from the
primary coil to the secondary
coil.
In addition to the structure of an
1) 3-tier shielding structure.
insulation transformer, a shield to
Shielding of the primary coil,
block electrostatic is installed between
secondary coil, and between
the primary and secondary coils to
primary and secondary coils.
prevent transmission of high
2) Alternate arrangement of coils.
frequency noise from the primary coil
Leakage reactance between the
to the secondary coil.
primary and secondary coils is
increased.
Effect of noise
prevention
Prevents common mode noise
at low frequencies.
Prevents common mode noise at low
frequency and high frequency.
(Common mode noise at the primary
coil is transmitted to the ground
through the distribution capacitance
between the primary coil and shield.)
Problems
1) High frequency noise
1)
becomes low impedance
due to small floating
capacitance between the
primary and secondary coils
and the noise is transmitted
to the secondary coil.
2) Normal mode noise is
2)
transmitted to the secondary
coil almost as it is.
7.2.6.1
Prevents both normal mode noise
and common mode noise.
 Normal mode noise
Prevented mainly by the alternate
coil arrangement structure.
 Common mode noise
Prevented mainly by the 3-tier
shielding structure.
Since the induction coefficient
seen from the primary coil,
distribution capacitance against
the shield and iron core are
imbalance, imbalanced common
mode noise turns into normal
mode noise at the secondary coil.
Normal mode noise is transmitted
to the secondary coil almost as it
is.
Specifications
Series
SA (Standard)
HA (High performance)
DA (with power cord)
CA (with outlet)
Model
FFT-SA
FFT-HA
FFT-DA
FFT-CA
Rated capacity [VA]
50,100, 200, 300, 500, 750, 1 K,
1.5 K, 2 K, 3 K, 5 K, 7.5 K, 10 K
100, 200, 300, 500, 750, 1 K, 1.5 K,
500, 750, 1 K
2 K, 3 K, 5 K, 7.5 K, 10 K
No. of phase (Note 1)
Single phase (3 phases)
Single phase
Rated voltage [V] (Note 1)
100/100, 200/100, (200/200), (400/200)
100/100
Rated current
0.5 to 100 A at 100 V, 0.25 to 50 A at 200 V
5, 7.5, 10 A at 100 V
Rated frequency [Hz]
50/60
Leakage current [μA]
100 or less
Insulation type
Type B
Voltage fluctuation range
(Note 2)
4% (10% for 50 VA)
Efficiency [%]
50 VA:
Withstand voltage
2000 VAC – 1 min
Base standard
JEC-2200 (1995)
85 or more, 100 to 750 VA: 90 or more, 1 to 10 kVA: 95 or more
1500 VAC – 1 min
(Note 1) Value within parenthesis is quasi-standard.
(Note 2) Voltage fluctuating range is the value of power factor 0.9.
(Note 3) Please contact us other than the above.
7-10
7.2.7
Arrester (arrester for power supply)
100/200 VAC
For single phase
2-wire type
3-wire type
400 VAC
For 3-phase
3-wire type
For 3-phase
3-wire type
10 kA
20 kA
Without an alarm contact Class 2 heat resistant
Without an alarm contact
CN5112
CN5112-S
or
CN5212
CN5132
CN5132-S
or
CN5232
CN5134
CN5134-S
or
CN5234
CN5134
CN5212
3φ3W, 440 V
3φ4W, 440 V
1φ2W, 120 V
1φ2W, 240 V
110 VDC
490 VAC
280 VAC/140 VDC 280 VAC
4-wire type
7.2.7.1
Specifications (an excerpt)
Without an alarm contact
CN5112
Applicable circuit/rated voltage
1φ2W, 120 V
1φ2W, 240 V
110 VDC
Max. continuous voltage
Uc (50/60 Hz)
280 VAC/140 VDC 280 VAC
Test class
JIS C 5381-1 Class II/IEC61643-1 class II
(50/60 Hz)
Nominal
To ground
discharge current Between lines
In (8/20 μs)
5 kA
Max. discharge
current
Imax (8/20 μs)
To ground
10 kA
Between lines
6 kA
1φ3W, 100/200 V
3φ3W, 240 V
CN5232
CN5234
1φ3W,100/200 V
3φ3W,240 V
3φ3W,440 V
3φ4W,440 V
490 VAC
10 kA
3 kA
2.5 kA
3 kA
2.5 kA
20 kA
5 kA
Total discharge current
I total (8/20 μs)
20 kA
350 μs current
Impulse*1
To ground
1 kA
Voltage
protection level
To ground
1500 V or lower
Between lines
1500 V or lower
N- to ground
―
up
With an alarm contact
CN5132
6 kA
30 kA
40 kA
5 kA
60 kA
2 kA
1.5 kA
2500 V or lower
1500 V or lower
2500 V or lower
2500 V or lower
1500 V or lower
2500 V or lower
1500 V or lower
―
1500 V or lower
Operating conditions
Temperature: -40 to 70C, relative humidity 95% RH or less; There must be no dew condensation or
Connection terminal/wire
Screw terminal connection method:
freezing.
M5 (with protection cover of the charging unit)
Connectable wire: 3.5 to 14 mm2
*1 Shows the performance that electricity can pass through the positive electrode and negative electrode one time each.
7.2.7.2
Precautions on use
In JIS C5381-12: 2004 “Surge protective devices connected to low-voltage power distribution systems -- Selection and
application principles”, it is recommended to install a backup breaker (separator) in series with an arrester (SPD). In this
connection, we have conducted tests of separators in combination with SPD.
As a result of these tests, it is recommended to use a plug-type fuse as an SPD separator.
In addition, a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) is also applicable. However, if you use an MCCB as an SPD separator,
protective coordination with upper stream must be considered. At least, you need to select the breaking capacity
equivalent to that of the breaker for the wiring in the upper stream.
Table 7.2-3: Combination of CN51 (Max. discharge current: 10 kA) series and backup breakers
Breaking
capacity
600 VAC 100 KA
230 VAC 25 KA
440 VAC 10 KA
230 VAC 10 KA
440 VAC 7.5 KA
230 VAC 5 KA
440 VAC 2.5 KA
230 VAC 2.5 KA
440 VAC 1.5 KA
Separator type
AFaC-30X (3 units)
BW50RAG-3P 30
BW50SAG-3P 30
BW32SAG-3P 30
BW32AAG-3P 30
Name
Plug-type fuse
Molded case circuit breaker for wiring (MCCB)

For information about the CN52 Series, refer to Fuji Surge Prevention Device Catalog (HS118).
7-11
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
An arrester absorbs lightning surge that enters from a power supply system and prevents breakage of electronic
devices.
When you conduct a pressure test and/or an insulation resistance test of devices and/or wirings, be sure to
remove the fuse or turn OFF the auto breaker. If you conduct a pressure test or the like in the normal state, it
causes breakage of the arrester and/or incorrect measurement.
7.2.7.3
Examples of circuits
Single phase (120/240 VAC)
Main
board
3-phase (240/440 VAC)
Main
board
Protected
device
SPD
separator
Inverter
SPD
separator
Plug-type fuse or
breaker for wiring
Motor
Plug-type fuse or
breaker for wiring
Shortest wiring
Shortest wiring
The N phase terminal is used only in (N5234.)
Figure 7.2.7-1: Example of circuit
(1)
Induction lightning surge enters via wires connected to buildings, facilities, or devices. To prevent
induction lightning surge from entering inside, install an arrester near the port.
For facilities far from the port, you need to install another arrester.
(2)
About wiring of an arrester:
 Be sure to ground the arrester together with the devices to be protected. The grounding wire between
the arrester and the cabinet must be wired as short as possible. (The devices in the cabinet must be
connected to the common grounding wire of the cabinet.)
If they are grounded separately, the devices in the cabinet cannot be protected.
 The grounding wire of the arrester plays a role to immediately discharge the lightning surge entering
from devices and facilities to the ground. Be sure to connect the grounding wire to the grounding
terminal with a relatively thick (5.5 mm2) wire in the shortest distance.
The IEC standard stipulates that an arrester for power must be connected to the grounding terminal of
a cabinet or equipment with a 3 mm2 wire or a larger wire in the shortest distance (0.5 m or less is
recommended).
Similarly, make the wiring of the power supply side using the same size wire in the shortest distance.
(The surge amount that the arrester can protect varies according to the wiring impedance connected
to the arrester. If wiring is too long, sufficient performance cannot be expected.)
 Perform grounding work in reference to “Restrictions on
sharing grounding wires and grounding poles (1350-13)” of
Internal Wiring Regulations.
Cabinet
MCCB
Power cable
 Do not store the grounding wire in the wiring duct for other
control wires.
(Separate the wiring from other wires.)
F
 If wiring via the arrester is available at the power supply
side, connect wires in V-shape.
SPD
Protected Protected
device
device
Grounding bus
Figure 7.2.7-2: Example of V-shape wire
connection
7-12
7.2.7.4
External dimensions
CN5112/CN5132/CN5134, CN5212/CN5232
CN5234
Terminal cover
Terminal cover
Operation lamp
Operation lamp
(Red LED *2)
(Red LED *2)
Rail lock
35 mm width
Terminal
cover
Rail lock
35 mm width
Terminal cover
(When the rail height is 7.5)
Location to insert the mounting metal fitting
It can be connected to the connection mounting plate for
interchangeable power distribution breaker.
Grounding terminal (E)
N phase terminal
Warning contact
terminal *1
* The 2-pole products are equipped with the operation lamp on the left only.
7-13
Earth terminal (E)
Dimensions of mounting hole
Mounting dimensions when a fitting
metal is used
(Fitting metal is supplied as standard.)
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
Location to insert the mounting metal fitting
It can be connected to the connection mounting plate for
interchangeable power distribution breaker.
7.3
Noise prevention
The noise prevention devices and wiring methods explained in "7.2 Anti-noise devices" are classified by purpose as
shown in Table 7.3-1 and Table 7.3-2. While malfunctions attributable to noise can be alleviated by anti-noise devices,
most malfunctions attributable to noise can be also prevented by grounding and wiring.
 Grounding:
Noise can be reduced by taking a measure to prevent leakage current that contains a high frequency
component of the inverter (converter), which is the source of noise, from entering other grounding
path.
 Wiring:
Noise can be reduced by wiring that is not affected by conduction noise and radiation noise of wiring.
In addition to the information about the noise prevention explained in this section, refer to the following section as well.

Appendix 5 "Proficient way to use inverters (on preventing electric noise)"
Table 7.3-1: Noise prevention at input circuit side
(◎: Quite effective, : Effective, : Slightly effective)
Wiring construction
Alternate
current reactor
(ACL)
Direct
current
reactor
(DCL)
EMC filter
Power filter
Zero-phase
reactor
(ACL)
Ground
capacitor
Reduction of noise terminal voltage
(Leakage noise current on input side)
―
―
◎
*2
Reduction of radiation noise from input
wiring
―
―

Prevention of induction failure from
input wiring
―
―
Reduction of input higher harmonic
current
(Improvement of input power factor)

Prevention of ELCB trip
―
Means
Purpose
Wiring*1
means
Shield wiring
Metal pipe
wiring
*3
―
―
*2
―
―
◎*4

*2

◎
◎*4
◎
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
Remarks
Use of ELCB by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd.
(anti-high frequency products and inverter
reinforced products should be used)
Table 7.3-2: Noise prevention at output circuit side
(◎: Quite effective, : Effective, : Slightly effective)
Means
OFL filter
(OFL-***-4A)
Zero-phase reactor
(ACL)
Suppression of micro surge voltage
◎
Reduction of radiation noise from
output wiring
Wiring construction
Wiring*1
means
Shield wiring
Metal pipe wiring
―
―
―
―

―
◎*4
Prevention of induction failure from
output wiring

*2
◎
◎*4
Reduction of leakage noise current
(Leakage noise current at output side)
―
◎*2
―
◎*4
Purpose
Prevention of ELCB trip
Remarks
Use of OFL filter against in-line leakage current is effective “○”.
If you use ELCB by Fuji Electric, trip can be prevented.
(Use countermeasure products for high frequency or products with
enhanced inverters.)
*1
Wiring means refer to wiring between the main input and main output, separate wiring between the main
circuit and control circuit, and bundled wiring of inverter output (U, V, and W).
*2
If the turn number of wires connected to the zero-phase reactor (ACL) is increased, noise resistance is
enhanced.
*3
Effect of noise prevention is attained by using both ground capacitor and zero phase reactor (ACL).
*4
Poor grounding, even with the use of shielded wire and metal wiring, may reduce noise reduction effect.
(Failure or malfunction of other devices may be caused.)
7-14
7.3.1
Grounding
Be sure to ground the inverter, anti-noise devices, devices with a grounding terminal, frame and board of the transformer,
etc. The purposes of grounding are explained below.
Grounding for safety purpose to prevent disasters such as
electric shock caused by electric leakage.
(2)
Grounding for noise prevention purpose to prevent transmission
of noise generated in the inverter and prevent entry of noise
from outside.
According to “Appendix 6 Grounding as noise countermeasure and
ground noise”, the following 3 points are important for grounding for
noise prevention. Be sure to comply with them when connecting wires
and perform wiring.
 Reduce the impedance of the circuit as much as possible.
Table 7.3-3: Grounding of low voltage devices
stipulated by “National Electrical Code”
Type of
grounding
work
Grounding
resistance
Thickness of
grounding wire
300 V or
lower
Type D
100 Ω or
Diameter 1.6 mm
or more
More
than
300 V
Type C
Rated
voltage
less
10 Ω or
less
 Do not share impedance.
 Separate the wires from noise sources so that induction voltage will
not be induced.
(1)
Wire size
Table 7.3-4: Thickness of grounding wire for
Safety
Class C (Class 3) grounding work in inner wiring
It is stipulated to ground an external package (metal cabinet) of a low
voltage device as shown in Table 7.3.1-1 of "Technical Standards
Concerning Electrical Equipment".
In addition, the grounding wire sizes for Class D (Class 3) or Special
Class C (Class 3) grounding work are stipulated in “Indoor wiring
regulations JEAC8001”. (Table 7.3.1-2)
With these sizes, wires can be protected until the MCCB blocks the
ground current when a wiring route contacts the external metal cover
connecting to the ground.
Noise prevention
Use electric wires with small impedance, in other words, large size
(thick) wires. Even if large size wires cannot be used because of the
connecting terminal size, it is desirable to use at least 5.5 mm 2 wires
from the aspect of noise prevention.
7-15
regulations table 1-16
Min. thickness of grounding wire (thickness of
Rated capacity
copper wire)
(current) of
General wire
Core or valve of movable
breaker
wire for multiple cores
installed in
Single Twisted
When
Single core
grounding
wire
wire single-wire is using a valve
protection
[mm2]
[mm2] used [mm2] for 2 cores
circuit [A]
[mm2]
20
1.6
2.0
1.25
0.75
30
2
1.25
50
2.0
3.5
3.5
2
100
2.6
5.5
5.5
3.5
200
―
14
14
5.5
400
22
22
14
600
38
38
22
800
1000
60
50
60
30
1200
100
80
38
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
(1)
(2)
Wiring
1)
Grounding of motor
Use four wires on the motor (at the output side of the inverter) and connect one of the four wires as a grounding wire to
the grounding bus of the cabinet.
If you use shield pipes, metal pipes, or four-core shielded cabtire cables, etc., connect the shield to the grounding bus of
the cabinet.
Cabinet
In the case that the wires are grounded near the
motor, if leakage current from the inverter flows, the
grounding potential becomes different between the
grounding section of the cabinet and that of the
motor.
PN bus bar
Motor
In this case, not only induction noise from motor
wiring but also from motor grounding will be
increased. This, in turn, will affect the control wire
laid in the vicinity of the motor.

Refer to “Appendix 6”.
Grounding
bus bar
(Cu bar)
Zero-phase
reactor
Shield pipe
(Metal pipe)
Figure 7.3.1-1: Grounding of inverter and peripherals
2)
Grounding in cabinet
General grounding in the cabinet is explained below:
 Install a grounding bus in the cabinet and connect the grounding terminals of the devices in the cabinet to the
grounding bus using wires as thick as possible in the shortest distance.
 Use a thick wire as a grounding wire from the cabinet to the ground and connect them in the shortest distance.
With the grounding explained above, both the circuit impedance and common impedance will be lowered.
If you use a board which does not use a grounding bus, install a terminal with which electric wires from the grounding
pole can be connected to the board close to the grounding point.
3)
Connect the grounding terminals of the inverter and devices and the grounding bus separately
(individually).
In the case of serial connection as shown in Figure 7.3.1-2, common
impedance exists, and Device A is affected by noise of Device B and
Device C, and a failure might occur. Viewing from the ground, the
impedance of Device C is increased by the amount equivalent to the
impedance of Device A and Device B.
Cabinet
PN bus bar
Be sure to connect the grounding wire of each device separately as
shown in Figure 7.3.1-3.
Device
B
Device
A
Device
B
Device
C
Device
A
Grounding
bus bar
(Cu Bar)
Impedance
Figure 7.3.1-2: Serial connection of grounding wires
7-16
Figure 7.3.1-3: Example of connection of
grounding wires
7.3.2
Wiring of main circuit of inverter (PWM converter)
In the wires of the main circuit system of the inverter (PWM converter), large current containing a high frequency
component flows. In addition, there is induction noise of leakage current from the inverter (converter). For these reasons,
it is essential to take noise prevention measures on the wiring of the main circuit.
(1)
Install the zero-phase reactor (ACL) and filters near the main circuit terminal of the inverter (converter) in the
shortest distance so that the wiring will not be a noise source.
(2)
Connect the wires of the main circuit separately from the control wires without installing them side by side as
shown in Figure 7.3.3-9: Space and crossing of wires (page 7-22).
(3)
Do not attempt to lay the main input section and inverter output wirings side by side because doing so would cause
noise to be conducted between lines, impairing the noise prevention effect. (Refer to Figure 7.3.2-1 and Figure
7.3.2-2.)
(If you lay them side by side, be sure to block them from each other using shield pipes, etc.)
INV
INV
Input (R, .S, T) and INV
output (U, V, W) are spur
tracked.
R S T P1 P N U V W
(a) Bad example
Wires of the
primary side and
secondary side of
the power filter are
installed side by
side.
R S T P1 P N U V W
(b) Good example
Figure 7.3.2-1: Example of inverter unit wiring
(a) Bad example
(b) Good example
Figure 7.3.2-2: Example of wiring of EMC filter/power filter
(4)
Closely connect the main circuit wires in a same route (such as the main
input section and inverter output section).
If you use twistable thin wires, twist them.
(5)
Avoid a loop-shaped wiring pattern as shown in Figure 7.3.2-4(a). If
current flows through such wiring, magnetic flux occurs, becoming a
noise source.
INV
MCCB
100
AF
R S T P1 P DB N U V W
If only one phase is connected in
a different route, induction noise
becomes larger.
CT
Figure 7.3.2-3: Wiring route
Magnetic flux
Main
circuit
Main
circuit
Control
circuit
(a) Worst wiring with broadly opened space
Control
circuit
Main
circuit
Control
circuit
Main
circuit
Control
circuit
(c) Good wiring with cables twisted
(b) Rather bad wiring
(d) Best wiring with cables twisted in both circuits
Figure 7.3.2-4: Installation of cables (Reference: Earth and Noise by Kenichi Ito, Nikkan Kogyo Shimbun, Ltd.)
7-17
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
Effective measures
(1)
Precautions on in-line high frequency leakage current
When the wiring length from the inverter to motor is long, overheat and over-current trip of the inverter
occur due to the effect of leakage current containing a higher frequency component that passes through
the floating capacitance between wires of each phase. Moreover, leakage current might increase, and
accuracy of current indication might not be secured. Excessive leakage current might flows depending on
the condition, resulting in breakage of the inverter.
Therefore, the wiring length between inverter and motor must be 100 m or less.
(50 m or less is a rough guideline for 30 kW or less, taking voltage drop caused by wiring impedance into
consideration.)
In-line leakage current can be suppressed by using an output circuit filter (OFL filter) for length
exceeding 100 m.
 Up to 400 m is acceptable if an OFL filter is used in the case of a V/f control system (single drive
system).
 In vector control where output circuit filter is used and wiring length is long, current vibration or torque
shortage may occur due to lack of normal motor control, being affected by the inductance of output
circuit filter or wiring.
Be sure to select a location for installing inverter and motor by taking into account the wiring length
between inverter and motor of 100 m or less, even in the case of using output circuit filter.
This naturally increases the length of PG signal line, which may also create a distortion in waveform in
PG detected waveform, causing malfunction. It is recommended that you consider using pulse
amplifier to amplify PG waveform.
(2)
Points to note when multiple-core cable is used
When there are multiple sets of inverters and motors, do not use a multiple-core cable to house the wires
of the multiple sets.
400 m or less
INV
Inverter 1
U
OFL filter
X1
X2
V
Y1
Y2
W
Z1
Z2
Inverter 2
M
Motor 3
X2
Y2
Z2
Figure 7.3.2-5: Wiring length when an output circuit
filter is used
(3)
Motor 2
Multicore cable
Inverter 3
5 m o r le ss
Motor 1
Figure 7.3.2-6: Do not use multiple-core cable
Surge voltage during inverter driving
When a motor is driven by a PWM system inverter, the surge voltage generated by the switching action of
the inverter element will be increased by the output voltage and applied to the motor terminal. (Refer to
Appendix 8.)
One of the following measures should be taken especially in long motor wiring.
 Use a motor with reinforced insulation. (Our standard motors feature reinforced insulation.)
 Connect an output circuit filter (OFL--A) to the output side (secondary side) of the inverter.
 Keep the wiring length from the inverter to the motor as short as possible. (at maximum, 10 to 20 m).
7-18
7.3.3
Wiring of control terminals of inverter (PWM converter)
The control terminals (for general contact input and analog I/O signals) of the main unit and option card of the inverter
(PWM converter) can operated with small current. Therefore, they are easily affected by noise, and it is essential to take
measures for noise prevention.
Noise can be divided into the 4 types as shown in Figure 7.3.3-1. Most of them can be prevented by using an appropriate
wiring route (separate wiring, etc.), a twisted cable, and a shielded cable. It is also effective to use a zero phase reactor
(wind 5 to 10 times around the zero phase reactor).
As for conduction noise, it is effective to isolate signals from the control terminal side using a control relay or insulation
converter (isolator).
For information on noise and how to take measures, refer to Appendix 5 as well.
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals

Figure 7.3.3-1: Noise types
(1)
How to install twisted cables and shielded cables
In the case of HIV
Twist pitch
1-1) Twisted cables
Regarding the wiring of signal cables, it is recommended to twist and
External
wire the cables as shown in Figure 7.3.3-2.
diameter of wire
In addition, it is recommended to use a 0.5 to 1.25 mm2 KIV wire (JIS
Figure 7.3.3-2: Twisting of vinyl insulated wires
C3316), which is a flexible and easy-to-use 60C and 600 V rated
Conductor
insulated wire.
(soft copper wire)
1-2) Shielded cables
There are two types of the shielded wire: One is a shielded wire in
which a bundle of wires are shielded, and the other is a twisted-pair
shielded wire in which a wire is twisted and shielded.
(As shielded twisted pair cables, a 1-pair cable, 2-pair cable, and
3-pair cable, etc. are available.)
In addition, there are two types of the shielded twisted pair cable: One
has a knitted wire mesh shielding cover, and the other has a shield
winding around inner cables. Although the knitted wire mesh shield is
more effective in shielding, the working efficiency is lowered (refer to
Figure 7.3.3-3).

For information on PROFIBUS-DP and DeviceNet and other
open buses, and for the serial PG interface for motors
(OPC-VG1-SPGT), refer to the installation manual of each bus
and the instruction manual of the option card.
7-19
Knitted wire mesh shield
(soft copper wire)
Insulator
Outer layer
Outer layer (sheath)
(a) Knitted wire mesh shield
Insulator
Conductor
(soft copper wire)
Winding shield
(soft copper line)
Insulator
Outer layer (sheath)
(b) Winding shield
Figure 7.3.3-3: Shielded twisted pair cable
Shield processing of a shielded cable should basically be done by shield clamp connection.
See shield processing below for cases where this is not feasible due to connected equipment.
インバ－タ
Inverter
Shield
Shield clamp method
A termination method in which the shielded part of
a shielded cable is exposed by removing its outer
layer, and held firmly together with the grounding
bus of the cabinet by conductive clamp material
(shield clamp).
Cabinet
キャビネット
Grounded bus
Shield
clamp
Grounded
bus
接地母線
Shield cable
Shield
シールド線
wire
Figure 7.3.3-4: Clamping of shielded wire (example)
<Treatment of the edge of the shielding cover>
(1)
Fold the shielding cover to the
outer side and wind it around .
Approx.
25 mm
Edge to which the shielding cover is not
connected
As shown in Figure 7.3.3-5, treat the edge in a
way that the shielding cover does not come
close to the core cable.
Crimp terminal
Insulation tube
Outer layer (sheath)
Figure 7.3.3-5: Treatment of the edge to which shielding cover is
not connected
(2)
Edge to which the shielding cover is connected
Treat the edge as shown in Figure 7.3.3-6 for a shielded wire wound around the wire cover or as shown in Figure
7.3.3-7 for a knitted shielded wire, and then install the insulation tube and crimp terminal as shown in Figure
7.3.3-8.
Take out the wire.
Electric line
Outer layer (sheath)
Twist the shield insulation.
Vinyl insulation wire
Shield insulation
Solder the wire to the shield
insulation and bend it.
Extend the shield insulation.
Figure 7.3.3-6: Treatment of winding shield
Figure 7.3.3-7: Treatment of knitted shield
Insulation tube
25 mm or more
Approx. 25 mm
Insulation tube
Crimp terminal
Outer layer (sheath)
Cover the shield insulation with a vinyl tube.
(Use 600 V pressure resistant product.)
Crimp terminal
(a) Pulling out of shielding cover to the front side
(b) Pulling out of shielding cover to the rear side
Figure 7.3.3-8: Treatment of the edge to which shielding cover is connected
7-20
(2)
How to install wires
If the wires to the control terminals of the inverter or converter are installed closely to the wires of the main circuit or any
other possible noise sources and the wiring length is long, or they are installed side by side, noise has a large impact.
For this reason, when you wire the cables to the control terminals of the devices, ensure the shortest possible wiring
length while keeping them away from the cables of the main circuit, relay sequence circuit, and transformer circuit for
measuring instruments, etc.
Hr must be 100 mm or more.
Inverter control terminal wiring
Main circuit and inverter control circuit
Leave the wire of the control terminal away from that of the main circuit
by at least 100 mm. (See Figure 7.3.3-9.) If it is installed near the main
circuit out of necessity, put either of the wires into a wire bundling tube
with shield, or block the wire with a shielding plate (steel plate), etc., and
connect the shielded section to the grounding bus of the cabinet.
If the wire crosses the main circuit, install it at the right angle so that
induction of induction noise will be reduced.
2)
Relay sequence circuit/transformer circuit for measuring
instrument and inverter control circuit
Main circuit
Figure 7.3.3-9: Space and crossing of wires
Wiring duct
Install the wires as keeping them away from the cables of the
electromagnetic contactor and other excitation coil circuits because the
wires are affected by surge voltage generated when such circuits are
opened and closed and by noise entering from outside.
The electric wires outside
the wiring duct must be
bundled and installed
along the wiring duct.
To be more specific, separate the wires of the relay sequence circuit and
those of the transformer circuit for measuring instrument in order not to
store the cables of the control terminals into one wiring duct.
Figure 7.3.3-10: Installation of cables inside
(If they are separated even if the distance is small, it has a substantial
and outside of wiring duct
effect.)
If two wiring routes cannot be separated, bundle either of the wires and
install them outside the wiring duct. (Refer to Figure 7.3.3-10.)
(3)
Contact input
Connect the wires of the contact input terminals of the inverter (converter) as short as possible to reduce the effect of
noise. If the wiring length exceeds 20 m, insulate the signals using a control relay. Even when you connect the contacts
of the control relay to the contact inputs of the inverter (converter), be sure to twist the wires. When you use a shielded
wire, connect the shield to the common terminal.
When you connect the contacts to more than one inverter, connect a different contact to each inverter. Do not share the
contact as shown in Figure 7.3.3-13 (a).
INV
Contact
FWD
REV
CM
Contact
FWD
REV
CM
Contact
FWD
REV
CM
Contact
Be sure to twist it with CM.
Figure 7.3.3-11: Shield processing
Inverter 1
Inverter 2
Inverter 2
Be sure to connect only one side of the
shield to the target section.
(CM or grounding bus bar)
INV
Connect the shield to the ground. INV
Inverter 1
Figure 7.3.3-12: Twist processing
7-21
(a) Bad example
(b) Good example
Figure 7.3.3-13: Separation of contacts
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
1)
(1)
Analog input/output (11, M) and digital input (CM), and transistor output (CMY) are separated (electrically
insulated) on a circuit by circuit basis so as to prevent mutual interference between the circuits. The
common terminals of them are separated from the grounding terminal of the inverter or converter. Be
sure to follow the instructions given below, otherwise it will lower the noise resistance.
 Especially in the analog circuit and contact input transistor output, do not connect the common
terminals to each other. Refrain from connecting the common terminal or the shield of a shielded wire
to the ground.
 The shield of a signal line should be connected to the ground when corresponding to the EMC
command (CE marking compatible).
However, malfunction caused by noise may be induced by connecting this shield to the ground.
(2)
Do not connect the common terminals (CM) of multiple inverters to each other. If the common terminals of
multiple inverters are connected to each other, the noise resistance will be lowered.
Prevention of recovery failure due to floating capacitance of AC operation relay
In an AC operation relay, if the wiring of the control circuit is long (e.g., the location of the relay is far from the location of
the switch to operate the relay), the floating capacitance between the wires prevents the relay from recovering even if the
switch is turned OFF. The allowable wiring length not affected by the floating capacitance of our control relay is shown
below.
For precautions such as those to take when the wiring exceeds the allowable wiring length, refer to the catalog of
the relay or other relevant documentation.

Table 7.3-5: Long wiring model
Operation
(1) Operation using continuous input contact
Equivalent
circuit
Board A
Multi-core cable
(2) Operation using instant input contact
Board A
Board B
Multi-core cable
Board B
Table 7.3-6: Allowable wiring length not affected by floating capacitance
Operation circuit
100 V
Allowable
capacitance (F)
Model
HH5
HH62
HH63
HH64
HH2
200 V
Allowable cable length (m)
Operation method
(1)
Operation method
(2)
Allowable
capacitance (F)
Allowable cable length (m)
Operation method
(1)
Operation method
(2)
50 Hz
0.051
170
85
0.013
43
21
60 Hz
0.038
120
60
0.0097
32
16
50 Hz
0.078
260
130
0.018
60
30
60 Hz
0.063
210
100
0.015
50
25
50 Hz
0.096
320
160
0.024
80
40
60 Hz
0.078
260
130
0.018
60
30
50 Hz
0.170
570
280
0.042
140
70
60 Hz
0.150
500
250
0.036
120
60
(Note) The allowable cable length is calculated on the condition that the floating capacitance between cables is 0.3 (μF/km) (measurement example of
CVV 2 mm2).
If a malfunction occurs although you took into consideration the relationship between the floating capacitance and wiring
length, perform the following procedures:
(1)
Connect a resistor in parallel with the excitation coil of the relay.
(2)
Lower the coil power and change the operation from AC to DC.
If the current flowing (running) through the relay circuit is increased or changed to DC power, the effect of the floating
capacitance can be reduced or eliminated. Note that change of the operation power is a large-scale modification,
therefore it must be used as an emergency measure.
7-22
Table 7.3-7: Example of recommended parallel resistance
Recommended resistance/power (k Ω/W)
Coil rated
voltage
(V)
Frequency
(Hz)
(Note) Taking into consideration temperature rise, application is partially limited.
(4)
Analog input and output
Since the analog signals are weak (0 to 10 VDC, 4 to 20 mADC), they are easily affected by noise. Use a twisted wire or
a shielded wire to prevent noise.
If the wiring distance exceeds 20 m, install an insulation converter, etc. For the signals that require response as in the
case of torque control, check the response speed of the insulation converter. The analog input has the primary delay soft
filter setting as one of the function settings. If you set the filtering time suitable for the system, you can reduce the impact
by noise. A zero-phase reactor and LC filter for signals are also effective means.
(1) Keep the wiring distance between insulation converter and inverter as short as possible.
(2) Response speed may decline as an effect of filter when using an LC filter.
Wiring method (1)
Wiring method (2)
Use a twisted pair shielded wire up to the input of the
converter. (Connect the shield to the common
terminal of the converter.)
If you connect the analog input and output terminals of multiple
inverters, insulate them from analog signals entering from
outside.
<Cabinet>
If not, the analog common terminals are connected between
the inverters, and the noise resistance is lowered.
12
11
*1
Twist wiring or twisted pair shielded wires (Connect the
shield to the common side of the converter.)
Speed
instruction
DC 0~10 V
Insulation converter
Insulation
converter
*1
Insulation
converter
INV
12
AO1
ASR
11
12
If you ground the shield, process the ends at the
insulation converter side and connect it to the
grounding terminal.
Override
Speed
instruction
Ai1
INV1
M
Figure 7.3.3-14: Shield processing (1)
<Cabinet>
INV2
ASR
Power supply
M
INV
11
Speed
instruction
DC 0~10 V
Insulation
converter
Power
supply
Power
supply
12
*1
11
*1
Speed setting
Ao1
M
12
11
Ratio setting
Power supply
Figure 7.3.3-15: Shield processing (2)
Figure 7.3.3-16: Twist processing
7-23
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
Model
Cable
length
(m)
When you relay shielded wires via the terminal block, do not connect them to the relay terminal of the common terminal
circuit. Install a dedicated terminal for shielded wires.
Shielded wire
Terminal Shielded wire
Shielded wire
INV
13
12
11
Dedicated terminal
for shielding
Terminal Shielded wire
INV
13
12
11
Do not connect shielded cables to the common terminal of the
signal line at the relay unit.
a) Good example
b) Bad example
Figure 7.3.3-17: Example of use of a relay terminal block
(5)
Common terminal circuit
Inverter control terminal
The common terminal (11) of the analog I/O, common terminal (CM) of the
contact input, and common terminal (CMY) of the transistor output separate
(electrically insulate) their own signals.
Thick and
short
Be sure not to connect the common terminal of the analog I/O to that of other
circuits to share the common terminal. If it is connected to other common
terminals, a malfunction might occur due to mutual interference between the
circuits.
In addition, do not ground the common terminals.
If the common terminals are not sufficient, install a relay terminal block near
the inverter control terminal. If you connect the relay terminal block and
inverter control terminal with a thick cable, you can reduce the impact of noise.
(6)
Relay terminal
block
Figure 7.3.3-18: Relay terminal block for
common terminals
Speed detection unit (PG detection)
1) It is recommended to use a 2 mm2 shielded wire for the pulse generator for motor speed detection. Anti-noise
measures such as creating signals by using pulse amplifier (insulated type) are effective when wiring length is
considerably long.
2) Winding this PG wire on a zero phase reactor (ACL) 5 to 10 turns is an effective anti-noise measure.
 Shield is connected to motor side.
Cabinet
However, if inverter should malfunction by the effect of
noise, noise may be reduced by connecting the shield
to the PGM of the inverter instead of connecting it to
the motor side.
<INV>
Motor side
PGP
PGM
PA
PB
PGP
PGM
PA
PB
SS,E
 Use of a serial PG and a PG card to drive the
synchronous motor, etc. requires a dedicated PG
interface option card.

(7)
PG
Figure 7.3.3-19: Example of PG wiring
Refer to the instruction manual of the dedicated
PG interface option card.
Temperature sensor (NTC thermistor)
It is recommended to use a 2 mm2 shielded wire for the NTC detection thermistor used for motor temperature correction
control and overheat protection function. If the wiring length is considerably long, the overheat protection function of the
motor may not operate normally due to malfunction of the detection circuit in the NTC thermistor. Using temperature
detection signal of the motor as overheat detection/protection by using PTC thermistor or clixon is also an effective
anti-noise measure. (Motor temperature correction calculation in this case, however, will not be performed.)
 Connect shielded wires to the inverter side.
Cabinet
<INV>
TH1
THC
Motor side
TH1
THC
Figure 7.3.3-20: Example of NTC thermistor wiring
7-24
(8)
Control power circuit
When control power is supplied from the main circuit power system for the converter (inverter), there might be impact of
noise from the converter (inverter). However, most of the impact can be reduced by wiring of the main circuit and
arrangement of devices.
The main circuit power system is a 400V system, therefore a general control power prepares power using a step-down
transformer with small capacity.
Use an insulation transformer as a step-down transformer. (It is recommended to use a noise-cut transformer or TRAFY.)
CNV
DCF1
DCF2
INV1
M1
MCCB
CNV
DCF1
INV2
DCF2
M2
Insulation
transformer
MCCB
Insulation
transformer
Electronic
device
Use an insulation transformer as a step-down
transformer. (It is recommended to use a noise-cut
transformer or TRAFY.)
Figure 7.3.3-21: Example of basic circuit
configuration
INV1
M1
INV2
Noise filter
M2
MCCB
Electronic
device
A noise filter with high attenuation is recommended.
Figure 7.3.3-22: Example of circuit configuration (when a
noise filter is used)
7-25
Chapter 7 EMC Compatible Peripherals
MCCB
FRENIC- VG
8
Chapter 8 Operation
8.1
Function codes ............................................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1
8.2
8.3
Function code table ................................................................................................................ 8-1
8.1.1.1
Function code groups and identification codes ............................................................. 8-1
8.1.1.2
Function code table headers ........................................................................................ 8-2
8.1.1.3
Function code table ...................................................................................................... 8-3
8.1.2
Control block diagrams ......................................................................................................... 8-38
8.1.3
Function code details ............................................................................................................ 8-38
Keypad and test run ..................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.2.1
Operating from the keypad ................................................................................................... 8-38
8.2.2
Trial operation procedures .................................................................................................... 8-38
Using standard RS-485 ................................................................................................................ 8-38
8.3.1
Standard RS-485 communication port .................................................................................. 8-38
8.3.2
Fuji general purpose communication .................................................................................... 8-38
8.3.3
Modbus RTU......................................................................................................................... 8-38
8.4
FRENIC-VG Loader (Free version) .............................................................................................. 8-38
8.5
Control options ............................................................................................................................. 8-38
8.1
Function codes
This section lists the function codes.
For more information on the control block diagrams and the function codes, refer to the separate volume "Unit Type
Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
 For more details of the control block diagrams (Section 8.1.2), refer to "4.1 Control block diagrams" in Chapter 4 of
the separate volume.
For more details of the function codes (Section 8.1.3), refer to "4.3 Function code details" in Chapter 4 of the
separate volume.
8.1.1
Function code table
8.1.1.1
Function code groups and identification codes
F ***
Function code group
Table 8.1-1: Function code classification
Function codes
Function
Fundamental function
F00 to F85
Fundamental functions
Extensional terminal function
E01 to E118
Terminal functions
E51, E52
Remarks
For the option OPC-VG1-AIO
E55, E56
E59, E60
E63, E64
E67, E68
E72, E73
E77, E78
E82, E83
E103, E104
E107, E108
Control function
C01 to C73
Control function
Motor Parameter function
P01 to P51
Motor parameter function M1
High performance function
H01 to H228
High performance functions
Alternative motor parameters
A01 to A171
Motor parameter functions
M2 and M3
option function
o05 to o197
Option function
o01 to o04
For the options OPC-VG1-DIA and -DIB
o05
For the option OPC-VG1-PG (PD)
o06 to o08
For the option OPC-VG1-PG (LD)
o09 to o11
For the option OPC-VG1-PMPG
o12 to o19
For the option OPC-VG1-PG (PR)
o30 to o32
For communications options (such as OPC-VG1-TL
and OPC-VG1-CCL)
o33, o34, o50
For the terminal block dedicated to the OPC-VG1-TBSI
high-speed serial communications
o38 to o40
For the option OPC-VG1-UPAC
o101 to o197
For communications options (such as OPC-VG1-TL
and OPC-VG1-CCL)
Lift function
L01 to L15
Lift functions
User function
U01 to U64
User functions (UPAC)
Intended for use with the UPAC option
U101 to
U150
User functions
Reserved for manufacturer use
8-1
Chapter 8 Operation
Identification code unique to the group
SaFety function
SF00 to
SF31
Serial communication function S01 to S17
Monitoring function
8.1.1.2
Intended for use when functional safety is implemented
For more details, refer to the Functional Safety Option
Instruction Manual.
Safety function
Command functions
M01 to M222 Data monitor functions
Operable from the LOC (Keypad), COM (Link: T link,
RS-485, SIU, SX, field bus) and UPAC
Function code table headers
The function code table uses the headers listed below (8.1.1.3).
Table 8.1-2: Function code table header list
Item
Description
Function code
Identification code of function code
* The function code of
is a parameter varying between unit type and stack
type.
Although it may be displayed or set for stack type, it will be an invalid function
code.
Communications 485 No.
address
Address to be used to refer to or change function code data using a communications
option.
Available for all communications options except OPC-VG1-TL.
Link No.
Address to be used to refer to or change function code data using a communications
option (OPC-VG1-TL, OPC-VG1-SX, etc.). Blank link number fields mean that the
corresponding function codes cannot be accessed.
Name
Name assigned to a function code.
Dir
Number of second layer codes in the keypad function code data directory structure.
0: First layer code (no second layer), 1: Second layer code,
2 or more: First layer code (Value will show the number of second layer codes)
Data setting range
Allowable data setting range and definition of each data.
Change when running
Indicates whether or not the function code data can be changed when the inverter is
running.
: Change while running allowed, X: Change while running not allowed
Factory default value
Data preset by factory default. When data is changed, * (asterisks) appears on the
keypad screen. Initial factory default value can be restored by using the initialization
function code.
Data copying
Identifies the function code used when you copy all the data stored in the keypad
memory of a source inverter to other destination inverters.
Initialization
Identifies the function code used to perform initialization (revert to the factory default
values) by H03 “Data initialization”. Most of the function codes will be initialized.
: Data initialized, X: Data not initialized
Format type *1
Indicates the format type used to refer to or change data via the communications link.
Control method:
Enable/Disable
Indicates whether or not the function code is available according to the individual
control method.
Control method
PG : Vector control (Induction motor)
LES : Sensor-less vector control (Induction motor)
VF : V/f control (Induction motor)
SM : Vector control (PMSM)
*1
For more information on function code classifications, refer to "4.2.4 Data format list" in Chapter 4 of the separate
volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition" (24A7-J-0019).
8-2
8.1.1.3
F00
0h
50h
Data protection
0
F01
1h
h
Speed setting N1
0
F02
2h
h
Operation method
0
0 to 1
0: Data change allowed
1: Data protection
Write-protects data from the keypad.
H29 "Link write protect" defines the write-protect from links
(T-link, 485, etc.).
0 to 9
0: Keypad ( / keys)
1: Analog 12 input (0 to ±10 V)
2: Analog 12 input (0 to +10 V)
3: UP/DOWN (initial value 0)
4: UP/DOWN (initial value: previous value)
5: UP/DOWN (initial value: creep speed 1, 2)
6: DIA card input
7: DIB card input
8: Ai (N-REFV) input
9: Ai2 (N-REFC) input
Defines how to set a speed command.
0 to 1
F03
F04
3h
4h
51h
52h
M1 Maximum speed
M1 Rated speed
3
1
0: Key operation ( FWD , REV and STOP keys) (LOCAL mode)
1: External signal (FWD and REV terminals) (REMOTE mode)
Defines how to input the operation method.
50 to 30000 r/min
50 to 30000 r/min
F05
5h
53h
M1 Rated voltage
1
80 to 999 V
F07
7h
54h
Acceleration time 1
0
F08
8h
55h
Deceleration time 1
0
F10
Ah
56h
M1 Electronic thermal
(Operation selection)
3
F11
Bh
57h
M1 Electronic thermal
(Detection level)
1
F12
Ch
58h
1
F14
Eh
h
M1 Electronic thermal
(Thermal time constant)
Restart after momentary power
failure (Operation selection)
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
0 to 2
0: No operation (when using exclusive motor for VG)
1: Operation (for general purpose motors: use in the case of
self-cooling fan)
2: Operation (for inverter motors: use in the case of externally
powered fan)
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
0.5 to 75.0 min
F17
11h
h
Gain (for speed setting on terminal
[12])
0
F18
12h
h
Bias (for speed setting on terminal
[12])
0
F20
14h
59h
3
F21
F22
15h
16h
5Ah
5Bh
DC Braking (Braking starting
speed)
DC Braking (Braking level)
DC Braking (Braking time)
F23
17h
5Ch
Starting speed
0
F24
F26
18h
1Ah
5Dh
5Eh
Starting speed (Holding time)
Motor sound (Carrier frequency)
0
0
*
Function code invalid for
setting change
0
1
1
×
0
×  40    
×
0
  41    
×
0
  42    
×
×
 × 0
1500
Depends  × 0
on capacity
× Depends  × 0
on capacity

  13
5.00
*
Internal parameter of stack type is fixed at 2 kHz. (It will
operate at 2 kHz even if set.)
8-3
   
   
   
   

5.00
  13    

0
 × 85    
 Depends  × 13    
on capacity
 Depends  × 2
on capacity

 0
0
0 to 5
0: No operation (No restart, immediate alarm lu)
1: No operation (No restart, alarm on power return lu)
2: No operation (No restart, alarm after slow down and stop lu)
3: Operation (Restart, continue operation)
4: Operation (Restart, operate at speed when power was cut off)
5: Operation (Restart, operate at starting speed)

0.0 to 200.0%
Ratio to analog speed setting value on control terminal [12].
Limited at ±110% of maximum speed.

-30000 to 30000 r/min
Bias to analog speed setting value on control terminal [12].
Limited at ± maximum speed.

0 to 3600 r/min
0 to 100%
0.0 to 30.0 s
0.0: No operation
0.1 to 30.0 s: Operation
0.0 to 150.0 r/min
Restrict to over 0.1 Hz (for sensor-less, VF control)
Starting speed can be set to secure the torque for starting.
0.00 to 10.00 s
2 to 15 kHz
2: 2 kHz
3: 3 kHz
4: 4 kHz
5: 5 kHz
6: 6 kHz
7: 7 kHz
8, 9: 8 kHz
10, 11: 10 kHz
12, 13, 14: 12 kHz
15: 15 kHz
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
   
100.0
 2
   
0
 5
   
0
 0
   ×


0
0.0
  16    ×
 2    ×
×
0.0
 2
×
×
0.00
2
 3    
  10    
   
Chapter 8 Operation
Data setting range
Classification
Dir
Data copying
Initialization
Name
485 No. Link No.
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Factory default value
Communications
address
Remarks
Fundamental functions (F: Fundamental Functions)
Change when running
Function codes
■
Function code table
Data copying
Initialization
  43    
10.0
 2
0
  90  × × 
0.50
 3
0
  44    
0
  45    
0
  46    
0
  47    
150
10
0.00
 5
 5
 7
   
   
  × 
0.00
 7
  × 
0.00
0.00
0.00
 7
 7
 3
  × 
  × 
  × 
0
  48    
1.00
  12    
1.00
  12    
0.2
0
 2    
  49
  × 
Data setting range
485 No. Link No.
F36
24h
h
30RY Drive mode
0
F37
25h
60h
Stop speed
F38
26h
61h
Stop speed (Detection mode)
F39
27h
62h
F40
28h
63h
Stop speed (Zero speed control
holding time)
Torque limiter mode 1
F41
29h
64h
Torque limiter mode 2
F42
2Ah
65h
Torque limiter value (Level 1)
selection
F43
2Bh
66h
Torque limiter value (Level 2)
selection
F44
F45
F46
2Ch
2Dh
2Eh
67h
68h
69h
F47
2Fh
6Ah
Torque limiter value (Level 1)
Torque limiter value (Level 2)
Mechanical loss compensation
value
Torque bias T1
F48
F49
F50
30h
31h
32h
h
h
h
Torque bias T2
Torque bias T3
Torque bias startup timer
1
1
1
F51
33h
FBh
Torque command monitor
(Polarity selection)
1
F52
34h
h
LED Monitor
(Display coefficient A)
8
F53
35h
h
LED Monitor
(Display coefficient B)
1
F54
F55
36h
37h
h
H
LED Monitor (Display filter)
LED Monitor (Display selection)
1
1
1

-300.00 to 300.00%
Torque biases T1 to T3 are switchable with DI.

-300.00 to 300.00%

-300.00 to 300.00%

0.00 to 1.00 s
Specifies the time required for generating 300% torque.

0 to 1
0: Torque polarity
1: + on drive, - on brake
Specifies the polarity of torque related data output (e.g., AO
monitor, keypad LED monitor, and keypad LCD monitor).

-999.00 to 999.00
Specifies the conversion coefficient for displaying the load shaft
speed and line speed on the keypad LED monitor.
Display value = Motor speed x (0.01 to 200.00)
Data is valid only between 0.01 and 200.00, out of range data
will be restricted.

-999.00 to 999.00
Display coefficient A: Maximum value
Display coefficient B: Minimum value
Display coefficients A and B are used to set the conversion
coefficients for determining the display values for the PID
command value, PID feedback amount, and PID output
(Process amount).
Display value = (Command or feedback value) x (Display
coefficient A - B) + B

0.0 to 5.0 s

00 to 32
00: Speed detection 1/Speed command (r/min) (F56 switches
the display while motor is stopped)
01: Speed setup 4 (ASR input) (r/min)
02: Output frequency command value (slide in) (Hz)
03: Torque current command value (%)
04: Torque command value (%)
05: Torque calculated value (%)
06: Power consumption (Motor output)
(switched by F60) (kW, HP)
07: Output current detected value (A)
08: Output voltage detected value (V)
09: DC link bus voltage detected value (V)
10: Magnetic flux command value (%)
11: Magnetic flux calculated value (%)
12: Motor temperature (°C) (when NTC thermistor is not used,
"---" is displayed)
13: Load axis rotational speed detected value, command value
(r/min)
(Display with the motor stopped is switchable with F56.)
14: Line speed detected value, command value (m/min)
(Display with the motor stopped is switchable with F56.)
15: Ai adjusted value (12) (%)
8-4
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
 × × 
   
   
  × 
  × 
   
   
   
   
   
  × ×
  × ×
   
  × 
   
   
Remarks
Factory default value
0
Dir
Classification
Change when running
Function codes
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
0 to 1
×
0: Excitation operation on alarm
1: Normal excitation operation
3 0.0 to 150.0 r/min
×
Restrict to over 0.1 Hz (for sensor-less, VF control)
1 0 to 1
×
0: Detected speed value
1: Speed command value
Only speed command value is valid, regardless of the setting
value, under sensor-less vector control or V/F control.
1 0.00 to 10.00 s
×
Applies to when timing the application of the mechanical brake.
12 0 to 3
×
0: Limit disable
1: Torque limit
2: Power limit
3: Torque current limit
1 0 to 3
×
0: Same for 4 quadrants at level 1
1: Drive (Level 1) and brake (Level 2)
2: Upper limit (Level 1), lower limit (Level 2)
3: Switch between levels 1 and 2 for all the 4 quadrants
Levels 1 and 2 are specified by the sources defined by F42 and
F43, respectively.
1 0 to 5
×
0: Function code (F44)
1: Ai [TL-REF1]
2: DIA card
3: DIB card
4: Link enable
5: PID output
1 0 to 5
×
0: Function code (F45)
1: Ai [TL-REF2]
2: DIA card
3: DIB card
4: Link enable
5: PID output

1 -300 to 300%

1 -300 to 300%

1 -300.00 to 300.00%
Communications
address
H
1
16: Ai adjusted value (Ai1) (%)
17: Ai adjusted value (Ai2) (%)
18: Ai adjusted value (Ai3) (%)
19: Ai adjusted value (Ai4) (%)
The following data will be hidden depending upon the mode or
options.
20: PID command value (%)
21: PID feedback value (%)
22: PID output value (%)
23: Option monitor 1 (HEX)
24: Option monitor 2 (HEX)
25: Option monitor 3 (DEC)
26: Option monitor 4 (DEC)
27: Option monitor 5 (DEC)
28: Option monitor 6 (DEC)
29: 30: Load factor (%)
31: Input power (F60 switches units.) (kW/HP)
32: Input watt-hour (x 100 kWh)
0 to 1
0: Display command value
1: Display actual value
The display with the motor stopped is switchable with F55.
Relevant data are speed (0), load axis rotational speed (13),
and line speed (14).
0 to 1
0: Display operation guidance screen (Operating condition,
Rotation direction)
1 Display bar graph of operation data (Speed detect 1,
Current, Torque command value)
Switches the running mode screen on the keypad.
0 to 7
0: Japanese
1: English
2-5: 6: Chinese
7: Korean
0 (Low) to 10 (High)

0
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
  49    
   
   
   
   

0
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
   
- - -    
   
   
  50    

0
  51    

0
 × 52    

5
 0

0 to 1
0: kW
1: HP
Switches the display unit for the inverter output (power
consumption) of the keypad LED and LCD monitors and the
selection list (kW-HP) for P02 "Motor selection (M1)".

10 0.1 to 500.0 times

1 0.000 to 10.000 s
P control when set to 0.000

1 0.000 to 9.999 s

1 0.000 to 5.000 s

1 0.000 to 0.100 s
Specifies the first order delay filter time constant for the detected
speed value.
1 0.000 to 0.100 s
×
Specifies the first order delay filter time constant for the torque
command.

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%
4 0 to 1
×
0: Operates when starting operation.
Pre-excitation continues for the duration specified by F74.
1: Operates when starting and stopping operation.
Pre-excitation continues for the duration specified by F74 or
until the magnetic flux command reaches the level specified
by E48, whichever is earlier.

1 10 to 100%
1 0.0 to 10.0 s
×
When the operation command is turned ON (FWD, REV), the
unit automatically enters the pre-excitation state for the time
specified in this function code.
1 100 to 400%
×
3 0 to 3
×
0: Limits to Normal: Level 1, Reverse: level 2.
1: Limits to Normal: Level 1, Reverse: level 1.
2: Limits to upper limit at level 1, lower limit at level 2.
3: Limits to Normal: Level 1, Reverse: level 2.
Terminal [12] input added as a bias

1 -110.0 to 110.0%

1 -110.0 to 110.0%
0 0 to 2
×
0: M1 selected
Note that switching of contacts by X functions has priority
over this function code setting.
1: M2 selected (X function disable)
2: M3 selected (X function disable)
Select a motor to be used from M1, M2 and M3.
0
  53    
F56
38h
H
LED Monitor
(Display when stopped)
1
F57
39h
h
LCD Monitor (Display selection)
1
F58
3Ah
h
LCD Monitor (Language selection)
1
F59
3Bh
1
F60
3Ch
LCD Monitor
(Contrast adjustment)
Output unit (HP/kW) setting
F61
F62
3Dh
3Eh
6Bh
6Ch
ASR1-P (Gain)
ASR1-I (Integral constant)
F63
F64
F65
3Fh
40h
41h
6Dh
6Eh
6Fh
ASR1-FF (Gain)
ASR1 Input filter
ASR1 Detection filter
F66
42h
70h
ASR1 Output filter
F67
F68
F69
F70
F72
43h
44h
45h
46h
48h
71h
72h
73h
74h
h
S-curve acceleration 1 (Start)
S-curve acceleration 1 (End)
S-curve deceleration 1 (Start)
S-curve deceleration 1 (End)
Pre-excitation operation selection
F73
F74
49h
4Ah
h
75h
Magnetic flux level at light load
Pre-excitation (Duration)
F75
F76
4Bh
4Ch
76h
h
Pre-excitation (Initial level)
Speed limiter (Mode selection)
F77
F78
F79
4Dh
4Eh
4Fh
4Fh
FEh
77h
Speed limiter (Level 1)
Speed limiter (Level 2)
Motor selection (M1, M2, M3)
0
8-5
   
10.0
0.200
 2
 4
  × 
  × 
0.000
0.040
0.005
 4
 4
 4
  × 
   
  × 
0.002
 4
  × 
0
0
0
0
0
 0    
 0    
 0    
 0    
  230   × ×
100
0.0
  16  × × ×
 2   × ×
100
0
 0   × ×
  91    
100.0
100.0
0
 6    
 6    
 × 54    
Chapter 8 Operation
37h
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Remarks
LED Monitor (Display selection)
485 No. Link No.
Classification
Data setting range
Data copying
Initialization
Dir
Factory default value
Name
Change when running
Function codes
F55
Communications
address
0
 × 56    

0
 5
   

0.0
 2
   

0.005
 4
   

0.000 to 9999
Specifies a display coefficient for displaying the input watt-hour
data (M116).
M116 = F84 x M115 "Input watt-hour" (kWh)
Specification of 0.000 clears the input watt-hour data.

0.000 to 1.000 s
Specifies a display filter for calculated torque output for
monitoring (keypad LED monitor and keypad LCD monitor).
0.010
  101    
0.100
 4
Data setting range
485 No. Link No.
50h
h
Current rating switching
0
0 to 3
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Stack type
0,2,3 : MD (high duty overload current 150%-1min)
1
: LD (low duty overload current 110%-1min)
*
It switches the dual ratings (MD, LD) of inverter. As for
keypad display, HD display is operated in accordance with
MD spec.
F81
51h
h
Offset for speed setting on
terminal [12]
3
F82
(*1)
52h
h
Dead zone for speed setting on
terminal [12]
1
F83
53h
h
1
F84
54h
h
Filter for speed setting on terminal
[12]
Display coefficient for input
watt-hour data
0
* Invalid for use in stack type
F85
55h
h
Display filter for calculated torque
0
Unit type
0,2 : HD (high duty overload current 150%-1min/200%-3sec)
1 : LD (low duty overload current 120%-1min)
3 : MD (medium duty overload current 150%-1min)
*
It switches the triple ratings (HD, LD, MD) of inverter.
-30000 to 30000 r/min
Specifies the offset for analog speed setting value on control
terminal [12].
0.0 to 150.0 r/min
Limits the speed command value below specified value ± to 0
r/min for analog speed setting value on control terminal [12].
0.000 to 5.000 s
(*1) Supported by ROM version H1/2 0019 or later.
8-6
   
Remarks
Data copying
Initialization
×
Dir
Classification
Factory default value
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Change when running
Function codes
F80
Communications
address
X1 Function selection
13 00 to 79
×
0
 
57
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
00, 01, 02, 03: Multistep speed selection (1 to 15 speeds)
[00: SS1, 01: SS2, 02: SS4, 03: SS8]
   
04, 05: ASR, acceleration and deceleration selection (4
speeds)
[4: RT1, 5: RT2]
06: Self-holding selection
[HLD]
   
07: Coast to a stop
[BX]
   
08: Failure reset
[RST]
   
09: External alarm
[THR]
   
10: Jogging operation
[JOG]
   
11: Speed setting N2/Speed setting N1
[N2/N1]
   
12: Motor M2 selection
[M-CH2]
   
13: Motor M3 selection
[M-CH3]
   
14: Direct current brake command
[DCBRK]
   ×
15: ACC/DEC zero clear command
[CLR]
   
16: UP/DOWN specification creep speed switching
[CRP-N2/N1]
17: UP/DOWN specification UP command
[UP]
   
18: UP/DOWN specification DOWN command
[DOWN]
   
19: Keypad edit permission command (data change
allowed)
[WE-KP]
20: PID control cancel
[KP/PID]
   
21: Normal and reverse operation switching
[IVS]
   
IL]
   
[WE-LK]
   
[LE]
   
25: Universal DI
[U-DI]
   
26: Starting characteristic selection
[STM]
   
27: Synchronous operation command (PG (PR) option
function)
[SYC]
28: Zero speed lock command
[LOCK]
 × × 
29: Pre-excitation command
[EXITE]
  × ×
30: Limitation of speed command value cancel
[N-LIM]
(Related codes: F76, F77, F78)
31: H41 [Torque command] cancel
[H41-CCL]
   
32: H42 [Torque current command] cancel
[H42-CCL]
  × 
33: H43 [Magnetic flux command] cancel
[H43-CCL]
 × × ×
34: F40 [Torque limited mode 1] cancel
[F40-CCL]
  × 
35: Torque limit (Level 1, Level 2 selection)
[TL2/TL1]
   
[BPS]
   
[37: TB1, 38: TB2]
  × 
39: Droop selection
[DROOP]
  × 
40: Ai1 zero hold
[ZH-AI1]
   
41: Ai2 zero hold
[ZH-AI2]
   
42: Ai3 zero hold (AIO option function)
[ZH-AI3]
   
43: Ai4 zero hold (AIO option function)
[ZH-AI4]
   
44: Ai1 polarity reversal
[REV-AI1]
   
45: Ai2 polarity reversal
[REV-AI2]
   
46: Ai3 polarity reversal (AIO option function)
[REV-AI3]
   
47: Ai4 polarity reversal (AIO option function)
[REV-AI4]
   
48: PID command value reverse operation selection
[PID-INV]
49: PG alarm cancel
[PG-CCL]
   
50: Insufficient voltage cancel
[LU-CCL]
   
[H-TB]
  × 
52: STOP1 (decelerate to stop in normal deceleration time)
[STOP1]
53: STOP2 (decelerate to stop in “deceleration time 4”)
[STOP2]
54: STOP3 (Ignore deceleration time specification, and
decelerate to stop using maximum output torque)
55: DIA data latch (DIA option function)
[DIA]
   
56: DIB data latch (DIB option function)
[DIB]
   
[MT-CCL]
 ×  ×
[C-DI1 to C-DI10]
   
68: Load weighting parameter selection (To be supported
soon)
[AN-P2/1]
69: PID clear
[PID-CCL]
 × × 
70: PID FF item enable
[PID-FF]
   
71: Speed limit calculation complete reset signal (To be
supported soon)
[NL-RST]
 × × 
72: Toggle signal 1
[TGL1]
   
73: Toggle signal 2
[TGL2]
   
74: External mock alarm
[FTB]
   
22: Interlock (52-2)
23: Link edit permission command
24: Linked operation selection
36: Bypass
37, 38: Torque bypass command 1/2
51: Ai torque bias hold
57: Multiple system cancel
58-67: Custom Di1-Di10
8-7
   
   
   
 × × 
  × 
 × × 
   
   
   
   
Chapter 8 Operation
78h
Data setting range
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Remarks
101h
Dir
Classification
E01
Name
Data copying
Initialization
485 No. Link No.
Factory default value
Communications
address
Change when running
Terminal functions (E: Extensional terminal Functions)
Function codes
■
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
E01
101h
78h
X1 Function selection
[NTC-CCL] ×
0
 
57
76: Life early warning cancel
[LF-CCL]
77: -
[SPG-AP]
-
78: PID feedback switching signal
[PID-1/2]
   
79: PID torque bias selection
[TB-PID]
Dir
Data setting range
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
   
-
-
-
  × 
E02
102h
79h
X2 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
1
 
57
   
E03
103h
7Ah
X3 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
2
 
57
   
E04
104h
7Bh
X4 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
3
 
57
   
E05
105h
7Ch
X5 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
4
 
57
   
E06
106h
7Dh
X6 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
5
 
57
   
E07
107h
7Eh
X7 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
7
 
57
   
E08
108h
7Fh
X8 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
8
 
57
   
E09
109h
80h
X9 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
9
 
57
   
E10
10Ah
81h
X11 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
25
 
57
   
E11
10Bh
82h
X12 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
25
 
57
   
E12
10Ch
83h
X13 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
25
 
57
   
E13
10Dh
84h
X14 Function selection
1
0 to 79 (Refer to Terminal [X1] Function.)
×
25
 
57
   
E14
10Eh
h
X Function
Normal open/close
0
0000 to 01FF
×
0: Normal open
1: Normal close
Specifies whether to open or close the contact for terminals
[X1] to [X9].
0000
 
35
   
E15
10Fh
85h
Y1 Function selection
13 0 to 84
1
 
58
×
00: In operation
[RUN]
   
01: Speed available
[N-EX]
   
02: Speed agreement
[N-AG1]
  × 
03: Speed achieved
[N-AR]
   
04: Speed detection 1
[N-DT1]
   
05: Speed detection 2
[N-DT2]
   
06: Speed detection 3
[N-DT3]
   
07: Stopped due to insufficient voltage
[LU]
   
08: Torque polarity detected (brake/drive)
[B/D]
  × 
09: Torque limited
TL]
   
10: Torque detect 1
[T-DT1]
   
11: Torque detect 2
[T-DT2]
   
[KP]
   
13: Stopped
[STOP]
   
14: Preparation for operation complete
[RDY]
   
15: Magnetic flux detect signal
[MF-DT]
  × ×
16: Motor M2 selected
[SW-M2]
   
17: Motor M3 selected
[SW-M3]
   
18: Brake release signal
[BRK]
  × 
19: Alarm contents
[AL1]
   
20: Alarm contents
[AL2]
   
21: Alarm contents
[AL4]
   
22: Alarm contents
[AL8]
   
23: Cooling fan in operation
[FAN]
   
24: Retry function in operation
[TRY]
   
25: Universal DO
[U-DO]
   
26: Cooling fin overheat early warning
[INV-OH]
   
27: Synchronization control complete
[SY-C]
 × × 
28: Life early warning
[LIFE]
   
29: Accelerating
[U-ACC]
   
30: Decelerating
[U-DEC]
   
31: Inverter overload early warning
[INV-OL]
   
32: Motor temperature overheat early warning
[M-OH]
   
33: Motor overload early warning
[M-OL]
   
[DB-OL]
  × 
[LK-ERR]
   
36: Load weighting control limited
[ANL]
 × × 
37: Load weighting control in calculation
[ANC]
 × × 
38: Analog torque bias on hold
[TBH]
  × 
[C-DO1 to C-DO10]
   
12: Keypad operation
* Invalid for use in stack type  34: DB overload early warning
35: Transmission failure
39 to 48: Custom Do1-Do10
49: -
-
50: -
 × × 
-
-
-
[MTS]
 × × 
52: Multiple system cancel response
[MEC-AB]
 × × 
53: Multiple system master selection
[MSS]
 × × 
54: Multiple system self error
[AL-SF]
 × × 
55: Stopped due to communication failure
[LES]
   
56: Alarm output (for any alarm)
[ALM]
   
[L-ALM]
   
51: Establishing multiple system communication
57: Light alarm
8-8
Remarks
Change when running
Function codes
485 No. Link No.
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
13 75: NTC thermistor alarm cancel
Communications
address
485 No. Link No.
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
58: Maintenance early warning
[MNT]
60: DC fan lock signal
[DCFL]
   
61: Speed agreement 2
[N-AG2]
  × 
62: Speed agreement 3
[N-AG3]
  × 
63: Axial fan stop signal
[MFAN]
   
   
   
64: Free assignment RDY (*1)
[AS-RDY]
65: 66: Droop selection response
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[DSAB]
  × 
67: Torque command/Torque current command cancel
response
[TCL-C]
  × 
68: Torque limited mode 1 cancel response
[F40-AB]
  × 
71: 73 input command
[PRT-73]
   
72: Y terminal test output ON
[Y-ON]
   
73: Y terminal test output OFF
[Y-OFF]
   
[BATT]
   
76: -
× × × 
77: SPGT battery warning (To be supported soon)
[SPGT-B]
   
78: -
-
-
-
-
79: -
-
-
-
-
74: -
-
75: Life of battery for clock
80: EN terminal detection circuit failure
-
-
-
[DECF]
   
81: EN terminal OFF
[ENOFF]
   
82: Safety function in operation
[SF-RUN]
   
[SF-TST]
   
83: -
-
84: STO diagnosis in progress
-
-
-
E16
110h
86h
Y2 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
2
 
58
   
E17
111h
87h
Y3 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
3
 
58
   
E18
112h
88h
Y4 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
4
 
58
   
E19
113h
89h
Y5 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
14
 
58
   
E20
114h
8Ah
Y11 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E21
115h
8Bh
Y12 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E22
116h
8Ch
Y13 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E23
117h
8Dh
Y14 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E24
118h
8Eh
Y15 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E25
119h
8Fh
Y16 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E26
11Ah
90h
Y17 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E27
11Bh
91h
Y18 Function selection
1
0 to 84 (Refer to Terminal [Y1] Function.)
×
26
 
58
   
E28
11Ch
h
Y Function
Normal open/close
0
0000
 
36
   
E29
11Dh
92h
PG Pulse output selection
0
0
 
92
 × × 
E30
11Eh
h
8
150
 
0
   
E31
11Fh
h
1
50 to 200°C

75
 
0
   
E32
120h
CDh
Motor overheat protection
(Temperature)
Motor overheat early warning
(Temperature)
M1-M3 PTC activation level
0000 to 001F
×
0: Normal open
1: Normal close
Specifies the normal condition of Y1 to Y5.
0 to 10
×
0: No division
1: 1/2
2: 1/4
3: 1/8
4: 1/16
5: 1/32
6: 1/64
0 to 6: Internal PG input is divided and output.
7: Internal speed command: Pulse oscillation mode
8: PG (PD): Pulse detection input oscillation mode
9: PG (PR): Pulse command input oscillation mode
10: Internal PG/PG (SD): Speed detection pulse input
oscillation mode
7 to 10: Input pulse is divided arbitrarily and output. (AB
90° phase difference signal)

50 to 200°C
1
1.60
3
   
E33
121h
h
Inverter overload early warning
1
0.00 to 5.00 V
×
The PTC is activated if the input voltage of the PTC terminal
exceeds this activation level when the PTC thermistor is
selected.

25 to 100%
 
90
 
0
   
E34
122h
h
Motor overload early warning
1
25 to 100%
90
 
0
   

*1 Availble in the ROM version H1/2 02□□, which supports PROFINET-IRT.
*2 Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0020 or later.
8-9
Chapter 8 Operation
* Invalid for use in stack type 
(*2)
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Remarks
Data setting range
Classification
Dir
Data copying
Initialization
Name
Factory default value
Change when running
Function codes
Communications
address
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
0
 
0
E36
124h
h
DB Overload early warning
1
80
 
0
  × 
E37
125h
h
DB Thermal time constant
1
0 to 1000 s

300
 
0
  × 
E38
126h
93h
Speed detection mode
8
000
 
9
  × 
E39
127h
94h
Speed detection level 1
1
1500
 
0
   
E40
128h
95h
Speed detection level 2
1

000 to 111
Detection mode of 0 x E39/E40/E41
0: Speed detection
1: Speed setting
Under V/f control, only the specified reference speed is
valid.

0 to 30000 r/min
If N-FB1± (Detected speed 1) or N-REF4 (Speed setting 4)
exceeds this speed detection level 1, the inverter issues the
detection signal.

-30000 to 30000 r/min
1500
 
5
   
E41
129h
96h
Speed detection level 3
1
-30000 to 30000 r/min

1500
 
5
   
E42
12Ah
97h
Speed arrival (Detection width)
1
3.0
 
2
  × 
E43
12Bh
98h
Speed agreement (Detection width)
1
3.0
 
2
  × 
E44
12Ch
99h
Speed agreement (Off-delay timer)
1

1.0 to 20.0%
If the detected speed comes within the range of N-REF2
(Speed setting 2) ± detection width, the inverter issues the
detection signal.

1.0 to 20.0%
If N-FB2± (Detected speed 2) is within the range of N-REF4
(Speed setting 4) ± detection width, the inverter issues the
detection signal.

0.000 to 5.000 s
E45
12Dh
9Ah
Speed disagreement
Alarm use and disuse
1
E46
12Eh
9Bh
Torque detection level 1
3
E47
12Fh
9Ch
Torque detection level 2
1
E48
130h
9Dh
Magnetic flux detection level
E49
131h
h
Terminal [Ai1] Function
Function codes
485 No. Link No.
E35
123h
h
Name
Dir
DB Overload protection
1
*
E35 to E37
Invalid for use in stack type
Data setting range
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
  × 
0.100
 
4
  × 
00 to 21
×
Digit of 1: Speed disagreement alarm ( er9)
0: Disuse
1: Use
Digit of 10: Lin open phase detection ( lin)
0: Standard level
1: For manufacturer use
2: Cancel

0 to 300%
Calculated value under V/f control.
If the torque command value exceeds this setting value, the
inverter issues the detection signal.

0 to 300%
00
 
9
  × 
30
 
16
   
30
 
16
   
1
10 to 100%
Detection signal is output when the magnetic flux
calculation value exceeds the specified value.
×
100
 
16
  × ×
4
0 to 27
×
0
 
59
00: Input signal cut off
[OFF]
-
   
01: Speed auxiliary setting 1 [AUX-N1] ±10 V/± Nmax
   
02: Speed auxiliary setting 2 [AUX-N2] ±10 V/± Nmax
   
03: Torque limit (Level 1)
[TL-REF1]
±10 V/±150%
   
04: Torque limit (Level 2)
[TL-REF2]
±10 V/±150%
   
05: Torque bias
[TB-REF]
±10 V/±150%
  × 
06: Torque command
[T-REF]
±10 V/±150%
  × 
±10 V/±150%
  × 
08: When UP/DOWN is set, creep speed 1
[CRP-N1]
±10 V/± Nmax
09: When UP/DOWN is set, creep speed 2
[CRP-N2]
±10 V/± Nmax
10: Magnetic-flux command [MF-REF] +10 V/+100%
   
11: Line speed detection
[LINE-N]
±10 V/± Nmax
   
12: Motor temperature
[M-TMP]
+10 V/200°C
   
13: Speed override
[N-OR]
±10 V/±50%
   
14: Universal Ai
[U-AI]
±10 V/±4000 (h)
   
07: Torque current command [IT-REF]
   
 × × ×
15: Amount of PID feedback 1 [PID-FB1] ±10 V/±20000 (d)
   
16: Amount of PID command [PID-REF] ±10 V/±20000 (d)
   
17: PID correction gain
   
[PID-G]
±10 V/±4000 (h)
18 to 24: Custom Ai 1 to 7 [C-AI1 to C-AI7]
   
25: Speed main setting
   
[N-REFV]
±10 V/± Nmax
26: Current input speed setting (4-20 mADC)
[N-REFC]
4-20 mADC/Nmax
(26: Current input speed setting can be used only on Ai2.)
27: Amount of PID feedback 2 [PID-FB2] ±10 V/±20000 (d)
   
   
E50
132h
h
Terminal [Ai2] Function
1
0 to 27 (Refer to Terminal [Ai1] Function.)
×
0
 
59
   
E51
133h
h
Terminal [Ai3] Function
1
×
0
 
59
   
E52
134h
h
Terminal [Ai4] Function
1
×
0
 
59
   
E53
135h
h
Ai1 Gain
4
0 to 27 (Refer to Terminal [Ai1] Function.)
(26: Current input speed setting can be used only on Ai2.)
0 to 27 (Refer to Terminal [Ai1] Function.)
(26: Current input speed setting can be used only on Ai2.)
-10.000 to 10.000 times

1.000
 
8
   
E54
136h
h
Ai2 Gain
1
-10.000 to 10.000 times

1.000
 
8
   
E55
137h
h
Ai3 Gain
1

1.000
 
8
   
E56
138h
h
Ai4 Gain
1

1.000
 
8
   
E57
139h
h
Ai1 Bias
4
-10.000 to 10.000 times (displayed when AIO option is
installed)
-10.000 to 10.000 times (displayed when AIO option is
installed)
-100.0 to 100.0%

0.0
 
6
   
8-10
Remarks
Change when running
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable

0 to 100%
Specifies %ED of the braking resistor relative to the inverter
capacity.
When E35 = 0, the overheat protection function ( dbh) is
disabled.

0 to 100%
Communications
address
Change when running
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
E58
13Ah
h
Ai2 Bias
1
-100.0 to 100.0%

0.0
 
6
   
E59
13Bh
h
Ai3 Bias
1
-100.0 to 100.0% (displayed when AIO option is installed)

0.0
 
6
   
E60
13Ch
h
Ai4 Bias
1
-100.0 to 100.0% (displayed when AIO option is installed)

0.0
 
6
   
E61
13Dh
h
Ai1 Filter
4
0.000 to 0.500 s

0.010
 
4
   
E62
13Eh
h
Ai2 Filter
1
0.000 to 0.500 s

0.010
 
4
   
E63
13Fh
h
Ai3 Filter
1
0.000 to 0.500 s

0.010
 
4
   
E64
140h
h
Ai4 Filter
1
0.000 to 0.500 s

0.010
 
4
   
E65
141h
h
Up/Down limiter (Ai1)
4
0.00
 
3
   
E66
142h
h
Up/Down limiter (Ai2)
1

0.00 to 60.00 s
Specifies the duration required when the inverter internal
data changes from 0 V to 10 V if the voltage on analog input
terminal changes from 0 V to 10 V.

0.00 to 60.00 s
0.00
 
3
   
E67
143h
h
Up/Down limiter (Ai3)
1
0.00 to 60.00 s

0.00
 
3
   
E68
144h
h
Up/Down limiter (Ai4)
1
0.00 to 60.00 s

0.00
 
3
   
E69
145h
h
AO1 Function selection
5
0 to 40

1
 
60
Dir
Data setting range
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
00: Speed detection 1 (Speed meter, one way swing)
[N-FB1+]
± Nmax/10 V
01: Speed detection 1 (Speed meter, two way swing)
[N-FB1±]
± Nmax/±10 V
02: Speed setting 2 (before calculation of
acceleration/deceleration) [N-REF2]
± Nmax/±10 V
03: Speed setting 4 (ASR input) [N-REF4] ± Nmax/±10 V
  × 
04: Speed detection 2 (ASR input) [N-FB2±] ± Nmax/±10 V
  × 
05: Line speed detection
   
[LINE-N±]
  × 
   
   
± Nmax/±10 V
06: Torque current command (Torque ampere meter, two
way swing)
[IT-REF±]
±150%/±10 V
07: Torque current command (Torque ampere meter, one
side swing)
[IT-REF+]
±150%/10 V
08: Torque command (Torque meter, two way swing)
[T-REF±]
±150%/±10 V
09: Torque command (Torque meter, one way swing)
[T-REF+]
±150%/10 V
10: Motor current
[I-AC]
200%/10 V
  × 
11: Motor voltage
   
[V-AC]
  × 
  × 
  × 
   
200%/10 V
12: Power consumption (Motor output) [PWR] 200%/10 V
   
13: DC link bus voltage
   
[V-DC]
800 V/10 V
14: +10 V output test [P10] Output equivalent to +10 V
   
15: -10 V output test [N10] Output equivalent to -10 V
   
16: Motor temperature
   
[TMP-M]
±200°C/±10 V
30: Universal AO [U-AO] -
   
31-37: Custom Ao1-Ao7
[C-AO1 to C-AO7]
38: Input power
[PWR-IN]
   
200%/10 V
39: Magnetic pole position signal
[SMP]
40: PID output value
±200%/±10 V
[PID-OUT]
   
TOP/5 V
× × × 
   
E70
146h
h
AO2 Function selection
1
0 to 40 (Refer to Terminal [Ao1] function.)

6
 
60
   
E71
147h
h
AO3 Function selection
1
0 to 40 (Refer to Terminal [Ao1] function.)

3
 
60
   
E72
148h
h
AO4 Function selection
1
0 to 40 (Refer to Terminal [Ao1] function.)

0
 
60
   
E73
149h
h
AO5 Function selection
1
0 to 40 (Refer to Terminal [Ao1] function.)

0
 
60
   
E74
14Ah
h
AO1 Gain
5
-100.00 to 100.00 times

1.00
 
7
   
E75
14Bh
h
AO2 Gain
1
-100.00 to 100.00 times

1.00
 
7
   
E76
14Ch
h
AO3 Gain
1
-100.00 to 100.00 times

1.00
 
7
   
E77
14Dh
h
AO4 Gain
1

1.00
 
7
   
E78
14Eh
h
AO5 Gain
1

1.00
 
7
   
E79
14Fh
h
AO1 Bias
5
-100.00 to 100.00 times (displayed when AIO option is
installed)
-100.00 to 100.00 times (displayed when AIO option is
installed)
-100.0 to 100.0%

0.0
 
6
   
E80
150h
h
AO2 Bias
1
-100.0 to 100.0%

0.0
 
6
   
E81
151h
h
AO3 Bias
1
-100.0 to 100.0%

0.0
 
6
   
E82
152h
h
AO4 Bias
1
-100.0 to 100.0% (displayed when AIO option is installed)

0.0
 
6
   
E83
153h
h
AO5 Bias
1
-100.0 to 100.0% (displayed when AIO option is installed)

0.0
 
6
   
E84
154h
h
AO1-5 Filter
0
0.000 to 0.500 s

0.010
 
4
   
8-11
Chapter 8 Operation
Name
Remarks
Function codes
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
h
Link command function selection 1
(To be supported soon)
2
00 to 13
00: Input signal cut off
0
  231
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
[OFF]
   
01: Speed auxiliary setting 1
[AUX-N1]
   
02: Speed auxiliary setting 2
[AUX-N2]
   
03: Torque bias
[TB-REF]
  × 
04: When UP/DOWN is set, creep speed 1
[CRP-N1]
   
05: When UP/DOWN is set, creep speed 2
[CRP-N2]
   
06: Line speed detection
[LINE-N]
   
07: Motor temperature
[M-TMP]
   
[N-OR]
   
09: Amount of PID feedback 1
[PID-FB1]
   
10: Amount of PID commands
[PID-REF]
   
[PID-G]
   
12: Amount of PID feedback 2
[PID-FB2]
   
13: Observer torque FB
[OBS-TFB]
08: Speed override
11: PID correction gain
  × 
E91
15Bh
h
Link command function selection 2
(To be supported soon)
1
00 to 12
When E91 is except 0 [OFF], analog setting via the
communications link (S17) has priority over Ai input
specified by Ai function selection. (Refer to the Link
command function selection 1.)

0
  231    
E101
1E01h
h
Ai1 Offset
4
-100.00 to 100.00%

0.00
 
7
   
E102
1E02h
h
Ai2 Offset
1
-100.00 to 100.00%

0.00
 
7
   
E103
1E03h
h
Ai3 Offset
1
-100.00 to 100.00% (displayed when AIO option is installed) 
0.00
 
7
   
E104
1E04h
h
Ai4 Offset
1
-100.00 to 100.00% (displayed when AIO option is installed) 
0.00
 
7
   
E105
1E05h
h
Ai1 Dead zone
4

0.00
 
3
   
E106
1E06h
h
Ai2 Dead zone
1
0.00 to 10.00%
Limits all command values below input values to 0 V.
0.00 to 10.00%

0.00
 
3
   
E107
1E07h
h
Ai3 Dead one
1
0.00 to 10.00% (displayed when AIO option is installed)

0.00
 
3
   
E108
1E08h
h
Ai4 Dead zone
1
0.00 to 10.00% (displayed when AIO option is installed)

0.00
 
3
   
E109
1E09h
h
Dividing ratio for FA, FB pulse output
(Numerator)
2
1000
 
0
 × × 
E110
1E0Ah
h
Dividing ratio for FA, FB pulse output
(Denominator)
1
1000
 
0
 × × 
E114
1E0Eh
h
Speed agreement 2 (Detection width)
4
3.0
 
2
  × 
E115
1E0Fh
h
Speed agreement 2 (Off delay timer)
1
0.100
 
4
  × 
E116
1E10h
h
Speed agreement 3 (Detection width)
1
3.0
 
2
  × 
E117
1E11h
h
Speed agreement 3 (Off delay timer)
1
0.100
 
4
  × 
E118
1E12h
h
Temperature for axial fan stop signal
0
1 to 65535
×
Specifies numerator of the dividing ratio for FA, FB, and
pulse output.
1 to 65535
×
Specifies the denominator of the dividing ratio for FA and
FB pulse output.

1.0 to 20.0%
If N-FB2± (Detected speed 2) is within the range of N-REF4
(Speed setting 4) ± detection width, the inverter issues the
speed agreement signal N-AG2.

0.000 to 5.000 s
Specifies the off-delay timer of the speed agreement signal
N-AG2.

1.0 to 20.0%
If N-FB2± (Detected speed 2) is within the range of N-REF4
(Speed setting 4) ± detection width, the inverter issues the
speed agreement signal N-AG3.

0.000 to 5.000 s
Specifies the off-delay timer of the speed agreement signal
N-AG3.

0 to 200°C
If the NTC detection temperature of the motor having an
NTC thermistor drops below this setting value, the inverter
turns ON the axial fan (Motor cooling fan) stop signal
MFAN.
0
 
0
   
8-12
Remarks

Classification
15Ah
Data setting range
Data copying
Initialization
E90
Dir
Factory default value
485 No. Link No.
Name
Change when running
Function codes
Communications
address
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
C01
201h
h
Jump speed 1
4
0
 
0
C02
202h
h
Jump speed 2
1

0 to 30000 r/min
Enables the inverter to jump over a point on the reference
speed in order to skip a resonance point of the driven
machinery (load) and the motor speed. Up to three different
jump points can be specified.

0 to 30000 r/min
0
 
0
   
C03
203h
h
Jump speed 3
1
0 to 30000 r/min

0
 
0
   
C04
204h
h
Jump width
1
0 to 1000 r/min

0
 
0
   
C05
205h
9Eh
Multistep speed 1
17 0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
Multistep speeds 1 to 15 can be switched by turning
terminal commands SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 ON/OFF.
 0/0.00/  
0.0
0
   
C06
206h
9Fh
Multistep speed 2
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C07
207h
A0h
Multistep speed 3
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C08
208h
A1h
Multistep speed 4
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C09
209h
A2h
Multistep speed 5
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C10
20Ah
A3h
Multistep speed 6
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C11
20Bh
A4h
Multistep speed 7
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C12
20Ch
h
Multistep speed 8
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C13
20Dh
h
Multistep speed 9
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C14
20Eh
h
Multistep speed 10
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C15
20Fh
h
Multistep speed 11
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C16
210h
h
Multistep speed 12
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C17
211h
h
Multistep speed 13
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
 
0
   
C18
212h
h
Multistep speed 14/Creeping speed 1
1
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
C18 and C19 apply also to the creep speed under
UP/DOWN control.
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 0/0.00/
0.0
 
0
   
C19
213h
h
Multistep speed 15/Creeping speed 2
1
0
   
C20
214h
h
Multistep speed agreement timer
1
4
   
C21
215h
h
Multistep speed setting definition
1
93
   
C25
219h
h
Speed setting N2
0
41
   
C29
21Dh
h
Jogging speed
0
0
   
C30
21Eh
h
ASR-P (Gain) JOG
9
 0/0.00/  
0 to 30000 r/min / 0.00 to 100.00% /
0.0 to 999.9 m/min (switch with C21)
0.0
 0.000  
0.000 to 0.100 s
When SS1, SS2, SS4 and SS8 are kept at the same status
for the duration specified by this function code, the inverter
switches the speed setting value.
 
0 to 2
×
0
0: 0 to 30000 r/min
1: 0.00 to 100.00%
2: 0.0 to 999.9 m/min
Defines the unit of multistep speed specified by C05 to C19.
When C21 = 1, the percentage of the maximum speed
(F03/A06/A106) of the selected motor applies.
 
0 to 9
×
0
0: Keypad ( /
keys)
1: Analog 12 input (0 to ±10 V)
2: Analog 12 input (0 to +10 V)
3: UP/DOWN (initial value 0)
4: UP/DOWN (initial value: previous value)
5: UP/DOWN (initial value: creep velocity 1, 2)
6: DIA card input
7: DIB card input
8: Ai (N-REFV) input
9: Ai2 (N-REFC) input
The speed command specified by this function code takes
effect when X terminal function N2/N1 is turned ON.

 
0 to 30000 r/min
50
Specifies the speed to be applied when the motor jogs.
 10.0  
0.1 to 500.0 times
2
C31
21Fh
h
ASR-I (Integral constant) JOG
1
0.000 to 10.000 s
P control when set to 0.000

0.200
 
4
  × 
  × 
C32
220h
h
ASR-JOG (Input filter)
1
0.000 to 5.000 s

0.040
 
4
   
C33
221h
h
ASR-JOG (Detection filter)
1
0.000 to 0.100 s

0.005
 
4
C34
222h
h
ASR-JOG (Output filter)
1
0.000 to 0.100 s
0.002
 
4
  × 
  × 
C35
223h
h
Acceleration time JOG
1
5.00
 
13
   
C36
224h
h
Deceleration time JOG
1
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
×


5.00
 
13
   
C37
225h
h
S-curve JOG (Start side)
1
0 to 50%

0
 
0
   
C38
226h
h
S-curve JOG (End side)
1
0 to 50%

0
 
0
   
C40
228h
h
ASR2-P (Gain)
10 0.1 to 500.0 times

10.0
 
2
  × 
Name
Dir
Data setting range
   
8-13
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Chapter 8 Operation
Change when running
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Remarks
Control functions (C: Control Functions)
Function codes
■
Change when running
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
C41
229h
h
ASR2-I (Integral constant)
1
0.000 to 10.000 s
P control when set to 0.000

0.200
 
4
  × 
C42
C43
22Ah
22Bh
h
h
ASR2-FF (Gain)
ASR2 Input filter
1
1
0.000 to 9.999 s
0.000 to 5.000 s


0.000
0.040
 
 
4
4
  × 
   
C44
22Ch
h
ASR2 Detection filter
1
0.000 to 0.100 s

0.005
 
4
C45
22Dh
h
ASR2 Output filter
1
0.000 to 0.100 s
0.002
 
4
  × 
  × 
C46
22Eh
h
Acceleration time 2
1
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
×

5.00
 
13
   
C47
22Fh
h
Deceleration time 2
1
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s

5.00
 
13
   
C48
C49
230h
231h
h
h
S-curve 2 (Start side)
S-curve 2 (End side)
1
1
0 to 50%
0 to 50%


0
0
 
 
0
0
   
   
C50
232h
h
ASR3-P (Gain)
10 0.1 to 500.0 times

10.0
 
2
C51
233h
h
ASR3-I (Integral constant)
1
0.000 to 10.000 s
P control when set to 0.000

0.200
 
4
  × 
  × 
C52
234h
h
ASR3-FF (Gain)
1
0.000 to 9.999 s

0.000
 
4
C53
235h
h
ASR3 Input filter
1
0.000 to 5.000 s

0.040
 
4
C54
236h
h
ASR3 Detection filter
1
0.000 to 0.100 s

0.005
 
4
C55
237h
h
ASR3 Output filter
1
0.000 to 0.100 s
0.002
 
4
  × 
  × 
C56
238h
h
Acceleration time 3
1
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
×

5.00
 
13
   
C57
239h
h
Deceleration time 3
1

5.00
 
13
   
C58
23Ah
h
S-curve 3 (Start side)
1
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
0 to 50%

0
 
0
   
C59
23Bh
h
S-curve 3 (End side)
1
0 to 50%

0
 
0
   
C60
23Ch
h
ASR4-P (Gain)
10 0.1 to 500.0 times

10.0
 
2
C61
23Dh
h
ASR4-I (Integral constant)
1
0.000 to 10.000 s
P control when set to 0.000

0.200
 
4
  × 
  × 
C62
23Eh
h
ASR4-FF (Gain)
1
0.000 to 9.999 s

0.000
 
4
C63
23Fh
h
ASR4 Input filter
1
0.000 to 5.000 s

0.040
 
4
C64
240h
h
ASR4 Detection filter
1
0.000 to 0.100 s

0.005
 
4
C65
241h
h
ASR4 Output filter
1
0.000 to 0.100 s
0.002
 
4
  × 
  × 
C66
242h
h
Acceleration time 4
1
5.00
 
13
   
C67
243h
h
Deceleration time 4
1
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
0.01 to 99.99 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
×


5.00
 
13
   
C68
244h
h
S-curve 4 (Start side)
1
0 to 50%

0
 
0
   
C69
245h
h
S-curve 4 (End side)
1
0 to 50%

0
 
0
   
C70
246h
h
ASR Switching time
0
0.00 to 2.55 s

1.00
 
3
C71
247h
A5h
Acceleration/deceleration time
switching speed
0
0.00 to 100.00%

0.00
 
3
  × 
   
C72
248h
A6h
ASR Switching speed
0
0.00 to 100.00%

0.00
 
3
C73
249h
h
Creep speed switching (under
UP/DOWN control)
0
00 to 11
(Creep speed 1) (Creep speed 2)
0: Code (C18, C19)
1: Ai (CRP1, CRP2)
×
00
 
9
Name
Dir
Data setting range
8-14
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
  × 
   
  × 
   
  × 
   
Remarks
Function codes
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
M1 Drive control
0
P02
302h
h
M1 Motor selection
P03
303h
A7h
M1 Rated capacity
0 to 5
0: Vector control (Induction motor)
1: Sensor-less vector control (Induction motor)
2: Simulated operation mode
3: Vector control (PMSM)
4: 5: V/f control (Induction motor)
×
0
 ×
55
A8h
M1 Rated current
305h
A9h
M1 Number of poles
26 0 to 50
× Depends 
Display (kW, HP) changes by setting F60 = 0, 1.
on capacity
00 to 35: FRENIC-VG dedicated motor setup
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are automatically
set.
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are automatically
set and write-protected.
36:
P-OTHER (keypad display is P-OTR)
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are write-protected
and cannot be overwritten.
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are automatically
set and write-protected.
37:
OTHER
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are write-protected
and cannot be overwritten.
Write protection of F04, F05, and P03 to P27 is not
performed.
38 to 50: FRENIC-VG dedicated setup (type 8)
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are automatically
set.
Data at F04, F05, and P03 to P27 are automatically
set and write-protected.
For the relationship between the setting data and the motor
type, refer to "List of applicable motors" in Section 4.3.3.2, [82]
codes.
1 For inverters of 400 kW or less
× Depends 
0.00 to 500.00 kW when F60 = 0
on capacity
0.00 to 600.00 HP when F60 = 1
For inverters of 500 kW or more
0.00 to 1200 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 1600 HP when F60 = 1
For multiwinding motors, set the motor capacity per wiring.
1 0.01 to 99.99A
× Depends 
100.0 to 999.9A
on capacity
1000 to 2000A

1 2 to 100 poles
×
4
306h
AAh
M1 %R1
1
0.00 to 30.00%
P07
307h
ABh
M1 %X
1
0.00 to 200.00%
P08
308h
ACh
M1 Exciting current/Magnetic
flux weakening current (-Id)
1
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
P09
309h
ADh
M1 Torque current
1
0.01 to 99.99A
100.0 to 999.9A
1000 to 2000A

P10
30Ah
AEh
M1 Slip frequency (For driving)
1
0.001 to 10.000 Hz

P11
30Bh
AFh
M1 Slip frequency (For braking)
1
0.001 to 10.000 Hz
P12
30Ch
B0h
M1 Iron loss factor 1
1
0.00 to 10.00%
P13
30Dh
B1h
M1 Iron loss factor 2
1
0.00 to 10.00%
P14
30Eh
B2h
M1 Iron loss factor 3
1
0.00 to 10.00%
P15
30Fh
B3h
M1 Magnetic saturation factor 1
1
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 93.75%.
P16
310h
B4h
M1 Magnetic saturation factor 2
1
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 87.5%.
P17
311h
B5h
M1 Magnetic saturation factor 3
1
P18
312h
B6h
M1 Magnetic saturation factor 4
1
P19
313h
B7h
M1 Magnetic saturation factor 5
1
P20
314h
B8h
M1 Secondary time constant
P21
315h
B9h
P22
316h
P23
P24
P04
304h
P05
P06
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
×
82
   
×
3
   
13
×
13
   
×
1
   
Depends  ×
on capacity
 Depends  ×
on capacity
 Depends  ×
on capacity
3
   
3
   
13
   
13
  × 
×
4
  × ×
×
4
  × ×
×
3
  × 
×
3
  × 
×
3
  × 
×
2
  × ×

Depends  ×
on capacity
2
  × ×
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 75%.

Depends  ×
on capacity
2
  × ×
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 62.5%.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 50%.

Depends  ×
on capacity
2
  × ×

Depends  ×
on capacity
2
  × ×
1
0.001 to 9.999 s

×
4
  × ×
M1 Induced voltage factor
1
0 to 999 V
×
0
  × 
BAh
M1 R2 Correction factor 1
1
0.500 to 5.000
×
4
  × 
317h
BBh
M1 R2 Correction factor 2
1
0.500 to 5.000
×
4
  × ×
318h
BCh
M1 R2 Correction factor 3
1
0.010 to 5.000
×
4
  × ×

Depends  ×
on capacity
Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
8-15
Chapter 8 Operation
h
Data setting range
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Remarks
301h
Dir
Classification
P01
Name
Data copying
Initialization
485 No. Link No.
Factory default value
Communications
address
Change when running
Motor parameter functions M1 (P: Motor Parameter Functions)
Function codes
■
M1 Exciting current correction
factor
1
0.000 to 5.000
P26
P27
31Ah
31Bh
BEh
BFh
M1 ACR-P (Gain)
M1 ACR-I (I-time)
1
1
0.1 to 20.0
0.1 to 100.0 ms
P28
31Ch
C0h
M1 PG Pulse resolution
0
100 to 60000
*
Set P28 to 32768 when using the option card
OPC-VG1-SPGT.
P29
31Dh
D6h
0
0000 to 4FFF
P30
31Eh
C1h
M1 External PG correction
factor
M1 Thermistor selection
0
P32
320h
h
M1 Online
Auto tuning
0
P33
321h
h
M1 Maximum output
voltage/Maximum voltage limit
value
P34
322h
h
P35
323h
h
P36
324h
h
P42
32Ah
h
P43
32Bh
P44
Depends  ×
on capacity

 ×
1.0

 ×
1.0
 ×
×
1024
4
  × ×
2
2
0
  × 
  × 
 × × 
×

L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
4000
 ×
9
 × × 
0 to 3
×
0: No thermistor
1: NTC thermistor selected
2: PTC thermistor selected
3: Ai [M-TMP]
The protection level of the motor protective functions should be
specified by E30 to E32.

0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
Selects the compensation function for the resistance change
caused by the temperature rise of the motor running.
1
 ×
84
   
0
 ×
0
  × ×
0
80 to 999 V
×
220/
440
 ×
0
× ×  
M1 Slip compensation
3
-20.000 to 5.000 Hz

0.000
1
0.0 to 20.0
Function specific to V/f control. The following selections are
possible.
0.0:
Automatic torque boost (for fixed torque
characteristic load)
0.1 to 0.9: For squared torque characteristic load
1.0 to 1.9: For proportional torque characteristic load
2.0 to 20.0: For fixed torque characteristic load

0.0
 ×
 ×
8
M1 Torque boost
2
× ×  ×
× ×  ×
M1 Current fluctuation damping 1 0.00 to 1.00
gain
M1 q axis inductance magnetic 10 0.0 to 100.0%
saturation coefficient

0.20
 ×
3
× ×  ×

100.0
 ×
2
× × × 
h
M1 Magnetic flux limiting value
1
50.0 to 150.0%

2
× × × 
32Ch
h
M1 Overcurrent protection level
1
0.00: No operation
0.01 to 99.99A
100.0 to 999.9A
1000 to 2000A
Specifies the allowable current value to prevent the permanent
magnet of a PMSM from getting demagnetized. If the current
exceeding this setting value flows, an overcurrent alarm (OC)
occurs.
Depends  ×
on capacity
 ×
×
0.00
13
× × × 
P45
32Dh
h
M1 Torque correction gain 1
1
0.00 to 10.00
×
3
× × × 
P46
32Eh
h
M1 Torque correction gain 2
1
0.00 to 10.00
×
3
× × × 
P47
32Fh
h
M1 Torque correction gain 3
1
-1.000 to 1.000
×
8
× × × 
P48
330h
h
M1 Torque correction gain 4
1
-1.000 to 1.000
×
8
× × × 
P49
331h
h
M1 Torque correction gain 5
1
-50.00 to 50.00
×
7
× × × 
P50
332h
h
M1 Torque correction gain 6
1
-50.00 to 50.00
×
7
× × × 
P51
333h
h
M1 Torque correction gain 7
1
-1.000 to 1.000
×
8
× × × 
Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity
 Depends 
on capacity

8-16
Remarks
BDh
Classification
319h
Data setting range
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Data copying
Initialization
P25
Dir
Factory default value
485 No. Link No.
Name
Change when running
Function codes
Communications
address
Tuning operation selection
0
0 to 4
0: No operation
0
× ×
61
  × 
   ×
1: ASR auto tuning (To be supported soon)
2: Motor constant auto tuning: R1, Lσ
   ×
   ×
3: Motor stop auto tuning
H02
402h
Eh
Full save function
0
H03
403h
h
Data initialization
0
H04
404h
h
Auto-reset (Times)
0
H05
H06
405h
406h
h
h
Auto-reset (Reset interval)
Cooling fan ON/OFF control
0
0
H08
408h
h
Rev. phase sequence lock
0
H09
409h
C2h
Starting mode (Auto search)
0
H10
40Ah
C3h
Energy-saving operation
0
H11
40Bh
h
Automatic operation OFF function
0
H13
40Dh
C4h
5
H14
40Eh
h
1
1 to 3600 r/min/s
H15
40Fh
h
Restart mode after momentary power
failure setting (Wait time)
Momentary power failure restart
setting
(Speed reduction rate)
Momentary power failure restart
setting
(Operation continuation level)
4: Motor rotation auto tuning
After writing the data, this function's data code
automatically returns to 0.
To save the tuned data, perform the Full save function
(H02).
0 to 1
When auto tuning is executed at H01, or when the data is
written by way of the link system (T-Link, field bus, and
RS-485, etc.), the data goes out when the power supply of
the inverter is turned off.
This function must operate when preservation is necessary.
After writing the data, this function's data code
automatically returns to 0.
0 to 1
Setting H03 to "1" reverts the function code data modified
by the customer to the factory defaults.
Initialization targets include all fields of F, E, C, H, o, L and
U codes except motor parameter fields (P, A) and F04, F05,
F10 to F12, and F58.
Upon completion of the initialization, the H03 data
automatically reverts to "0."
0 to 10
0: No operation
1 to 10 times
The auto-resetting signal can be output to the output
terminal.
0.01 to 20.00 s
0 to 1
0: No operation
1: Operation
It is possible to output the FAN (cooling fan in operation)
signal in conjunction with this function.
This control detects the temperature of the heat sink in the
inverter unit and turns the cooling fan ON/OFF
automatically.
0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 to 2
0: No operation
1: Operation (only when restarting from momentary power
failure)
2: Operation
Auto search detects the idling motor speed at starting and
drives the motor at the same speed.
0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
0 to 4
0: Decelerate to stop when OFF between FWD-CM and
REV-CM
1: Operation OFF when below stop speed in F37 even if
ON between FWD-CM and REV-CM
2: Coast to a stop when OFF between FWD-CM and
REV-CM
3: ASR deceleration to stop when OFF between FWD-CM
and REV-CM (under torque control)
4: Coast to a stop when OFF between FWD-CM and
REV-CM (under torque control)
0.1 to 5.0 s
1
H16
410h
h
Momentary power failure restart
setting
(Self-holding specification of operation
command)
1
H17
411h
h
1
H19
413h
C5h
Momentary power failure restart
setting
(Self-holding time in operation
command)
Active drive
0
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   

0
× ×
11
   
×
0
× ×
11
   
×
0
 
0
   
×
×
5.00  
 
0
3
68
   
   

0
 
68
  × 

2
 
0
×   ×
×
0
 
68
 × × ×

0
 
0
   
×
0.5
 
2
   

500
 
0
× ×  ×

3-phase 200 V: 200 to 300 V
3-phase 400 V: 400 to 600 V
This setting applies when F14 (Operation selection) = 2
(Trip after recovery from power failure) or F14 = 3 (Continue
to run).
0 to 1
×
0: Specified in H17
1: Max. time (operating commands are retained by the
inverter while the control power supply is established
inside the inverter, or while the DC intermediate circuit
voltage is approximately zero)
0.0 to 30.0 s
×
235/  
470
0
   
 
94
   
30.0  
2
   
0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
Under vector control, this function automatically limits the
output torque to avoid an overload trip, etc.
0
 
68
   
8-17
Remarks
×
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
×
1
Chapter 8 Operation
h
Data setting range
Classification
401h
Dir
Data copying
Initialization
H01
Name
Factory default
value
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Change when
running
High performance functions (H: High Performance Functions)
Function codes
■
8
H21
415h
C7h
PID Control (Command selection)
1
H22
H23
H24
H25
H26
H27
416h
417h
418h
419h
41Ah
41Bh
C9h
CAh
CBh
C8h
CCh
CEh
PID Control (P-action)
PID Control (I-action)
PID Control (D-action)
PID Control (Upper limit value)
PID Control (Lower limit value)
PID Control (Speed command
selection)
1
1
1
1
1
1
H28
H29
41Ch
41Dh
CFh
h
Droop control
Link function
(Code protection)
0
2
H30
41Eh
D0h
Link function
(Linked operation)
1
H31
41Fh
h
RS-485 Setup
(Station address)
H32
420h
h
RS-485 Setup (Selection of operation
when error occurs)
H33
H34
421h
422h
h
h
RS-485 Setup (Timer operating time)
RS-485 Setup
(Transmission speed)
H35
423h
h
RS-485 Setup (Data length)
H36
424h
h
RS-485 Setup
(Selection of parity bit)
H37
425h
h
RS-485 Setup
(Selection of stop bit)
H38
426h
h
RS-485 Setup
(Communication interrupt time)
H39
427h
h
H40
428h
h
RS-485 Setup
(Response interval time)
RS-485 Setup
(Protocol selection)
H41
429h
D1h
Torque command selection
4
H42
42Ah
D2h
Torque current command selection
1
H43
42Bh
D3h
Magnetic flux command selection
1
H44
42Ch
D4h
Magnetic-flux command value
1
×
0
 
69
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   

0
 
70
   



×
×
×
1.000  
1.00  
0.000  
100  
-100  
 
0
4
3
4
5
5
95
   
   
   
   
   
   


0.0
0
 
 
2
40
  × 
   
0 to 3
Monitor Command Operation (FWD, REV)

data
0:

×
×
1:


×
2:

×

3:



10 0 to 255
Broadcast: 0: RTU), (99: Fuji)
address: 1 to 255
Specifies the station address of RS-485.
1 0 to 3
0: Forced stop (er5)
1: Stop after continuing operation for timer operating time
(H33) (er5)
2: Stop if transmission failure continues longer than timer
operating time (H33) (er5)
3: Continue operation
1 0.01 to 20.00 s
1 0 to 4
0: 38400bps
1: 19200bps
2: 9600bps
3: 4800bps
4: 2400bps
1 0 to 1
0: 8bit
1: 7bit
1 0 to 2
0: None
1: Even parity
2: Odd parity
1 0 to 1
0: 2bit
1: 1bit
1 0.0 to 60.0 s
0.0: Interrupt detection disable
0.1 to 60.0: Interrupt detection enable
1 0.00 to 1.00 s

0
 
72
   
×
1
 ×
0
   

3
 
73
   
2.00  
 ×
0
3
74
   
   
1
×
1
×
Dir
Data setting range
0 to 3
0: No operation
1: Operation
2: Reverse operation 1
3: Reverse operation 2
0 to 1
0: Keypad or 12 input
1: Analog input [PID-REF]
0.000 to 10.000 times
0.00 to 100.00 s
0.000 to 10.000 s
-300 to 300%
-300 to 300%
0 to 2
0: Disable
1: PID selection
2: Speed adjustment selection
0.0 to 25.0%
0 to 1
0: Writing code from link allowed
1: Write-protects code from link
Setting H29 to "1" protects function code data from getting
changed mistakenly via the link (T-Link, RS-485, etc.).
Via the link, data can be written to the "normal code fields"
(given above) or "command data fields" (S fields). The S
fields are defined by H30.
0 to 2
0: Fuji general purpose inverter protocol
1: SX protocol (Loader protocol)
2: Modbus RTU protocol
When using FRENIC-VG loader, specify “1: SX protocol”.
0 to 5
0: Internal ASR enable
1: Ai (T-REF) enable
2: DIA card enable
3: DIB card enable
4: Link enable
5: PID enable
0 to 4
0: Internal ASR enable
1: Ai (IT-REF) enable
2: DIA card enable
3: DIB card enable
4: Link enable
0 to 3
0: Internal calculation enable
1: Ai (MF-REF) enable
2: Function code H44 enable
3: Link enable
10 to 100%
8-18



0
 ×
75
   

1
 ×
76
   

1
 ×
77
   

60.0  
2
   

0.01  
3
   
 ×
78
   
0
 
64
  × 
×
0
 
65
  × 
×
0
 
66
 × × ×
×
100
 
16
 × × ×
Remarks
PID Control (Operation selection)
Classification
C6h
Data copying
Initialization
414h
Factory default
value
H20
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Change when
running
Function codes
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
7
0 to 2
0: Observer not operational
1: Load disturbance observer
2: Oscillation suppression observer
×
H47
H48
H49
H50
H51
42Fh
430h
431h
432h
433h
D8h
h
D9h
h
DAh
Observer (M1 Compensation gain)
Observer (M2 Compensation gain)
Observer (M1 I-time)
Observer (M2 I-time)
Observer (M1 load inertia)
1
1
1
1
1
0.00 to 1.00 times
0.00 to 1.00 times
0.005 to 1.000 s
0.005 to 1.000 s
H52
434h
h
Observer (M2 load inertia)
1
H53
435h
D5h
Line speed feedback selection
0
H55
437h
h
Zero speed control (Gain)
2
H56
438h
h
1
H57
439h
h
Zero speed control (Completion
range)
Overvoltage suppression
H58
43Ah
h
Overcurrent suppression
1
H60
43Ch
h
Load weighting control (Definition 1 of
load weighting control function)
7
H61
43Dh
h
Load weighting control (Definition 2 of
load weighting control function)
1
H62
43Eh
h
H63
43Fh
h
H64
H65
440h
441h
h
h
H66
H68
442h
444h
h
h
Load weighting control (Hoisting
speed)
Load weighting control (Counter
weight mass)
Load weighting control (Safety factor)
Load weighting control (Machine
efficiency)
Load weighting control (Rated load)
Alarm data deletion
H70
446h
h
For manufacturer 1
2
H71
447h
h
For manufacturer 2
1
H74
44Ah
h
PG detection circuit self-diagnosis
selection
0
H75
44Bh
h
Phase sequence configuration of main
circuit output wires
0
H76
44Ch
h
Main power down detection
0
0
 
79





0.00  
0.00  
0.100  
0.100  
Depe  ×
nds
on
capaci
ty
 0.001  ×
3
3
4
4
4
 
 
 
 
 
0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2
The magnification is switchable by H228.

0 to 3
0: Line speed disable (internal PG enable)
However, higher value is selected between Ai input and
PG (LD) on UPAC.
1: Analog line speed detect (AI-LINE)
2: Digital line speed detect (PG (LD))
3: High selector (selects the higher level between motor
speed and line speed)

0 to 100 times
For details, refer to terminal X function LOCK assigned by
any of E01 to E13.

0 to 100 pulses
4
  × 
0
 
67
   
5
 
0
 × × 
100
 
0
 × × 
2
Data setting range
0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2
The magnification is switchable by H228.
×
×
×
×
×





×
0
 
68
   
×
0
 
68
   
×
0
 
80
 × × 
×
0
 
81
 × × 
1
0 to 1
0: No operation
1: Operation
0 to 1
0: No operation
1: Operation
0 to 3
0: Disable
1: Method 1
2: Method 2
3: Method 3
0 to 1
0: Hoisting with motor rotating normally
1: Lowering with motor rotating normally
0.0 to 999.9 m/min
×
0.0
 
2
 × × 
1
0.00 to 600.00 t
×
0.00  
3
 × × 
1
1
0.50 to 1.20
0.500 to 1.000
×
×
1.00  
0.500  
3
4
 × × 
 × × 
1
0
0.00 to 600.00 t
0 to 1
After writing the data, this function’s data code
automatically returns to 0.
Setting H68 to “1” deletes all of the alarm history, alarm
causes and alarm information held in the inverter memory.
0 to 9999
Reserved. (Do not access this function code.)
0 to 10
Reserved. (Do not access this function code.)
0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
This function activates the inverter’s function for
self-diagnosis of the speed detection circuit by PG (Pulse
generator) signal input (PA, PB).
0 to 1
0: Normal phase U-V-W
1: Reverse phase U-W-V
Switches the phase sequence of the inverter main circuit.
0 to 1
0: No operation
1: Operation
Set this function to “Operation” to enable the AC power
monitoring function.
Set this function to “No operation” when DC power is
supplied, e.g., connecting with a power regenerative
converter but the inverter AC input power is not supplied.
0 to 600 s
Specifies the condition of the cooling fan ON/OFF control
by H06.
0 to 6
0: No operation
1: M1 Number of startups
2: M2 Number of startups
3: M3 Number of startups
4: M1 Cumulative run time
5: M2 Cumulative run time
6: M3 Cumulative run time
Initializes the number of startups and cumulative run time
for each of M1 to M3.
×

0.00  
0
× ×
3
11
 × × 
   
×
0
 ×
0
  × 
×
0
× ×
62
   
×
0
  225  × × ×
×
0
  197    ×

0
 
0
   

600
 
0
   
×
0
× ×
0
   
* Invalid for use in stack type
H77
44Dh
h
Cooling fan ON-OFF control
continuation timer
0
H78
44Eh
h
Initialization of startup counter/total
run time
6
8-19
Chapter 8 Operation
Observer (Mode selection)
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
  × 
Dir
Remarks
D7h
Classification
42Eh
Data copying
Initialization
Change when
running
H46
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Factory default
value
Function codes
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
1
H80
450h
h
Capacity of main circuit capacitor
initial value measurement
1
* Invalid for use in stack type
H81
451h
h
1
h
Initialization of cumulative life of main
circuit capacitor
Number of startups for maintenance
H82
452h
H83
453h
h
Maintenance Interval
1
H84
*1
454h
h
Speed calculation period when
extremely low speed (for maker)
0
H85
455h
h
Calendar clock (Year/month)
4
H86
456h
h
Calendar clock (Day/hour)
1
H87
457h
h
Calendar clock (Minute/second)
1
H88
458h
h
Calendar clock (Setting up clock)
1
H90
45Ah
460h
h
h
Overspeed alarm detection level
ASR operation selecting
0
0
H101
1F01h
h
PID command filter time constant
0
H103
1F03h
h
Protective/Maintenance function
selection 1
9
H96
*1
1
0 to 65535 (in units of 10 hours)
Initializes the cumulative run time when the cooling fan is
replaced.
Usually, write “0” after replacement.
0 to 32767
When the capacitance measurement is user mode (H104),
setting this function code to "0" and shutting down the
inverter power starts measuring the initial value of the
capacitance and writes the measurement result to this
function code.
0 to 65535 (in units of 10 hours)
Initializes the elapsed time of the main circuit capacitor.
0 to 65535
Specifies the number of startups for performing
maintenance of the machinery.
0 to 65535 (in units of 10 hours)
Specifies the maintenance interval for performing
maintenance of the machinery.
0.0 to 200.0ms
The sampling period setting of the encoder pulse in
extremely low speed region.
This is a function code for maker. Do not access this
function code.
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Year, Lower 2 digits: Month
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Day, Lower 2 digits: Hour
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Minute, Lower 2 digits: Second
×
0
× ×
0
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
×
0
× 
0
   
×
0
× 
0
   

0
× 
0
   
8760 × 
0
   

N 0.0
Y Y 2
YNNY

0001 ×  143    

0100 ×  144    

0000 ×  145    

0 to 1
0
0: No operation
1: Setting up clock
Setting H88 to "1" sets up the calendar clock in accordance
with the settings of H85 to H87.
After that, the H88 data automatically reverts to "0."
 120
100 to 160%
N 0
o to 3
0: P priority (VG1)
1: I priority (compatible with VM5 )
2: P priority (compatible with VM5 )
3: For maker (Do not select this)

0 to 5000ms
0
Specifies the time constant of the PID command filter (after
switched by H21).
 0101
0000 to 1111
Selects the protective functions individually.
[0: Disable, 1: Enable]
Thousands digit: Start delay alarm (l0c)
Hundreds digit: Ground fault alarm (ef)
× ×
11
   
  0
  × 
YY201 YYN Y
 
0
   
 
9
   
1110  
9
   
 0000  



9
   
Tenths digit: Output phase loss alarm (0pl)
* Invalid for use in stack type 
H104
1F04h
h
Protective/Maintenance function
selection 2
1
* Invalid for use in stack type 
Units digit: Braking transistor broken ( dba)
0000 to 1111
Selects the protective/other functions individually.
[0: Disable, 1: Enable]
Thousands digit: PG wire break alarm ( p9)
Hundreds digit: Lower the carrier frequency
Tenths digit: Judge the life of main circuit capacitor

Units digit: Select capacitance measurement of main
circuit
(0: Referenced on factory default value, 1:
Referenced on user measurement)
H105
1F05h
h Protective/Maintenance Function
Selection 3
1
0000 to 1111
Selects the protective/maintenance functions individually.
(0: Disable, 1: Enable)
Thousands digit: -Hundreds digit: Speed disaccord alarm er9 operation 1
Tenths digit: Speed disaccord alarm er9 operation 2
Units digit:
Save the integrated value of motor
electronic thermal
*1
*1
H106
1F06h
h
Light alarm object definition 1
1
0000 to 1111
[0: Heavy alarm (err), 1: Light alarm (l-al)]
Digit of 1000: OH4 “motor overheat”
Digit of 100: OL1-OL3 “motor overload” (common for
M1-M3)
Digit of 10: nrb “NTC thermistor disconnected”
Digit of 1: OH2 “external failure”

0000  
9
   
H107
1F07h
h
Light alarm object definition 2
1
0000 to 1111
[0: Heavy alarm (err), 1: Light alarm (l-al)]
Digit of 1000: Er5 “RS-485 failure”
Digit of 100: Er4 “network failure”
Digit of 10: Reserved
Digit of 1: ArF “toggle failure error”

0000  
9
   
H108
1F08h
h
Light alarm object definition 3
1
0000 to 1111
[0: Heavy alarm (err), 1: Light alarm (l-al)]
Digit of 1000: Err “mock alarm”
Digit of 100: dFA “DC fan lock”
Digit of 10: Er9 “speed disagreement” LOC "Start
delay"
Digit of 1:
ArE “E-SX bus tact synchronization error”

0000  
9
   
(*1) Available when ROM version is newer than H1/2 0067.
8-20
Remarks
Cooling fan operation cumulative time
initialization setting
Classification
h
Data setting range
Data copying
Initialization
44Fh
Dir
Factory default
value
H79
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Change when
running
Function codes
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Light alarm object definition 4
1
0000 to 1111
[0: Heavy alarm (err), 1: Light alarm (l-al)]
Digit of 1000: Reserved
Digit of 100: Reserved
Digit of 10: Reserved
Digit of 1:
Reserved

0000  
9
H110
1F0Ah
h
Light alarm object definition 5
1

0000  
9
   
H111
1F0Bh
h
Light alarm object definition 6
1
0000 to 1111
[0: Light alarm cancel, 1: Light alarm ( l-al)]
Digit of 1000: MOH “Motor overheat early warning”
MOL "Motor overload early warning"
Digit of 100: BaT “Battery life”
Digit of 10: LiF “Life early warning”
Digit of 1:
OH/OL “Fin overheat early
warning/Overload early warning”
0 to 1
0: Disable (l-al no indication)
1: Enable (l-al indicated)
H112
1F0Ch
h
M1 Magnetic saturation extension
coefficient 6
7
H113
1F0Dh
h
M1 Magnetic saturation extension
coefficient 7
1
H114
1F0Eh
h
M1 Magnetic saturation extension
coefficient 8
1
H115
1F0Fh
h
M1 Magnetic saturation extension
coefficient 9
1
H116
1F10h
h
M1 Magnetic saturation extension
coefficient 10
1
H117
1F11h
h
M1 Magnetic saturation extension
coefficient 11
1
H118
1F12h
h
M1 Magnetic saturation extension
coefficient 12
1
H125
H126
H127
1F19h
1F1Ah
1F1Bh
h
h
h
Observer (M3 compensation gain)
Observer (M3 I-time)
Observer (M3 load inertia)
3
1
1
H134
1F22h
h
Speed drop detection delay timer
5
H135
1F23h
h
1
H136
1F24h
h
H137
1F25h
h
Speed command detection level
(FWD)
Speed command detection level
(REV)
Speed drop detection level
H138
H140
H141
H142
1F26h
1F28h
1F29h
1F2Ah
h
h
h
h
Speed drop detection delay timer
Start delay detection (Detection level)
Start delay detection (Detection timer)
Mock alarm
1
2
1
0
1
1
Specifies whether or not to display l-al on the LED
monitor when a light alarm occurs.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 43.75%.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 37.5%.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 31.25%.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 25%.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 18.75%.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 12.5%.
0.0 to 100.0%
Compensation factor for exciting current when the magnetic
flux command is 6.25%.
0.00 to 1.00 times
0.005 to 1.000 s
0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2
The magnification is switchable by H228.
0.000: No operation
0.001 to 10.000 s
0.0: No operation
0.1 to 150.0 r/min
0.0: No operation
0.1 to 150.0 r/min
0.0: No operation
0.1 to 150.0 r/min
0.000 to 10.000 s
0.0 to 300.0 %
0.000 to 10.000 s
0 to 1
0: No operation
1: A mock alarm occurs
When H108 does not define a mock alarm as a light alarm,
a heavy alarm (err) occurs; when it defines a mock alarm
as a light alarm, a light alarm (l-al) occurs.
1
 
68
   

43.8  ×
2
 × × ×

37.5  ×
2
 × × ×

31.3  ×
2
 × × ×

25.0  ×
2
 × × ×

18.8  ×
2
 × × ×

12.5  ×
2
 × × ×

6.3
 ×
2
 × × ×



0.00  
0.100  
0.001  
3
4
4
  × 
  × 
  × 
×
0.000  
4
  × 
×
0.0
 
2
  × 
×
0.0
 
2
  × 
×
0.0
 
2
  × 
×



0.000  
150.0  
1.000  
0
× ×
4
2
4
11
  × 
  × 
  × 
   

0.10  
3
   
×
0
  202
×  × ×
FUNC
H144
1F2Ch
h
Toggle data error timer
0
H145
1F2Dh
h
Reverse rotation prevention for
sensor-less control
(Selection of lower limit frequency
operation)
3
H146
1F2Eh
h
1
H147
1F2Fh
h
1
H148
1F30h
h
Reverse rotation prevention for
sensor-less control
(Lower limit frequency (FWD))
Reverse rotation prevention for
sensor-less control
(Lower limit frequency (REV))
First order frequency filter
Depressing the
+ DATA keys on the keypad for 3
seconds will also cause the alarm.
0.01 to 20.00 s
Specifies the toggle signal error detection time.
0 to 3
0: Disable
1: Enable for FWD polarity operation
2: Enable for REV polarity operation
3: Enable for both FWD/REV polarities
0.000 to 10.000 Hz
0
H149
1F31h
h
Machine runaway detection speed
setting
0
H160
1F3Ch
h
M1 Initial magnetic polarity position
detection method
3
H161
1F3Dh
h
M1 Draw current command
1
H162
1F3Eh
h
M1 Pull-in frequency
1
STOP

×
0.000  
4
×  × ×
0.000 to 10.000 Hz
×
0.000  
4
×  × ×
0 to 100 ms
Increase this setting if the speed fluctuation is large under
sensor-less vector control.
0.0 to 20.0%
0.0: Disable
0.1 to 20.0%
Assuming the maximum speed as 100%.
×
0
 
0
×  × ×
×
0.0
 
2
  × 
0 to 3
0: Pull-in by current for IPMSM (Interior Permanent Magnet
Synchronous Motor)
1-3: 10 to 200 %
100%/Motor rated current
×
0
 ×
0
× × × 
×
80
 ×
0
× × × 
0.1 to 10.0 Hz
×
1.0
 ×
2
× × × 
8-21
Chapter 8 Operation
Classification
h
Data setting range
Remarks
Data copying
Initialization
1F09h
Dir
Factory default
value
H109
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
Name
Change when
running
Function codes
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Change when
running
Factory default
value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
H170
1F46h
h
M2 Initial magnetic polarity position
detection method
3
0 to 3
0: Pull-in by current for IPMSM (Interior Permanent Magnet
Synchronous Motor)
1-3: -
×
0
 ×
0
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
× × × 
H171
1F47h
h
M2 Draw current command
1
10 to 200 %
100%/Motor rated current
×
80
 ×
0
× × × 
H172
H180
1F48h
1F50h
h
h
M2 Pull-in frequency
M3 Initial magnetic polarity position
detection method
1
3
0.1 to 10.0 Hz
×
×
1.0
0
 ×
 ×
2
0
× × × 
× × × 
H181
1F51h
h
M3 Draw current command
1
10 to 200%
100%/Motor rated current
×
80
 ×
0
× × × 
H182
H201
1F52h
2001h
h
h
1 0.1 to 10.0 Hz
13 0 to 1
0: H51, H64, H65 enable, H202-H213 disable
1: H51, H64, H65 disable, H202-H213 enable
×
×
1.0
0
 ×
 
2
0
× × × 
 × × 
H202
2002h
h
M3 Pull-in frequency
Load weighting control
(Switching of load weighting control
parameters)
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Load inertia (hoisting 1))
(To be supported soon)
1
×
0.001  
4
 × × 
H203
2003h
h
1
×
1.00  
3
 × × 
H204
2004h
h
1
0.500 to 1.000
Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
×
0.500  
4
 × × 
H205
2005h
h
Load weighting control
(Safety factor (hoisting 1))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Mechanical efficiency (hoisting 1))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Load inertia (hoisting 2))
(To be supported soon)
0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2
Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
The magnification is switchable by H228.
0.50 to 1.20
Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
1
×
0.001  
4
 × × 
H206
2006h
h
1
×
1.00  
3
 × × 
H207
2007h
h
1
0.500 to 1.000
Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
×
0.500  
4
 × × 
H208
2008h
h
Load weighting control
(Safety factor (hoisting 2))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Mechanical efficiency (hoisting 2))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Load inertia (lowering 1))
(To be supported soon)
0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2
Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
The magnification is switchable by H228.
0.50 to 1.20
Applies to winding-up operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
1
×
0.001  
4
 × × 
H209
2009h
h
1
×
1.00  
3
 × × 
H210
200Ah
h
1
0.500 to 1.000
Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
×
0.500  
4
 × × 
H211
200Bh
h
Load weighting control
(Safety factor (lowering 1))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Mechanical efficiency (lowering 1))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Load inertia (lowering 2))
(To be supported soon)
0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2
Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
The magnification is switchable by H228.
0.50 to 1.20
Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is OFF.
1
×
0.001  
4
 × × 
H212
200Ch
h
1
×
1.00  
3
 × × 
H213
200Dh
h
0.500 to 1.000
Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
×
0.500  
4
 × × 
H214
200Eh
h
 
0
 × × 
H215
200Fh
h
H216
2010h
h
H217
2011h
h
H218
2012h
h
H219
2013h
h
H220
2014h
h
H221
2015h
h
H222
2016h
h
Load weighting control
(Safety factor (lowering 2))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Mechanical efficiency (lowering 2))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern function
selection)
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(maximum speed))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 1.1))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 1.2))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 1.4))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 1.6))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 1.8))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 2.0))
(To be supported soon)
0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2
Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
The magnification is switchable by H228.
0.50 to 1.20
Applies to winding-down operation when AN-P2/1 is ON.
Name
Dir
1
Data setting range
0 to 3
0: Pull-in by current for IPMSM (Interior Permanent Magnet
Synchronous Motor)
1-3: -
14 0 to 1
0: H60 definition enable, H215-H224 disable
1: H60 definition disable, H215-H224 enable
×
0
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the maximum speed.
×
50.0  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed.
×
100.0  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*1.1.
×
90.9  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*1.2.
×
83.3  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*1.4.
×
71.4  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*1.6.
×
62.5  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*1.8.
×
55.5  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*2.0.
×
50.0  
2
 × × 
 
 
8-22




Remarks
Function codes
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
h
H225
2019h
h
H226
201Ah
h
H227
201Bh
h
H228
201Ch
h
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*2.5.
×
40.0  
2
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the torque level at the rated speed*3.0.
×
33.3  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the starting speed of the determination section.
The rated speed is assumed as 100%.
×
75.0  
2
 × × 
1
0.1 to 100.0%
Specifies the end speed of the determination section. The
rated speed is assumed as 100%.
×
93.7  
2
 × × 
1
0 to 2
0: Calculation of hoisting and lowering speed limit
individually
1: Drive lowering using speed limit of previous hoisting
Enable the winding-down speed limit calculation under
specific conditions
2: Drive lowering using speed limit of previous hoisting
Limit the winding-down speed with the rated speed
under specific conditions
×
0
0
 × × 
Load inertia magnification setting
0
0 to 2
0: Multiplied by 1 (0.001 to 50.000 kg･m2)
1: Multiplied by 10 (0.01 to 500.00 kg･m2)
2: Multiplied by 100 (0.1 to 5000.0 kg･m2)
H51, H52, H202, H205, H208, H211
Switch the specified scaling factor for the “load inertia”.
×
Dir
Data setting range
630   193  × × 
kW or
less
0
710
kW,
800
kW
1
H322
2116h
h
Notch filter 1 (Resonance frequency)
6
10 to 2000 Hz

H323
2117h
h
Notch filter 1 (Attenuation level)
1
0 to 40 dB

H324
2118h
h
Notch filter 1 (Frequency range)
1
0 to 3

H325
2119h
h
Notch filter 2 (Resonance frequency)
1
10 to 2000 Hz

H326
211Ah
h
Notch filter 2 (Attenuation level)
1
0 to 40 dB

H327
211Bh
h
Notch filter 2 (Frequency range)
1
0 to 3

8-23
 
1000
kW
2
1000  
 
0
 
2
1000  
 
0
2
 
0
0
0
0
0
0
  × 
  × 
  × 
  × 
  × 
  × 
Chapter 8 Operation
2018h
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 2.5))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Multi limit speed pattern
(rated speed x 3.0))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Speed limit determination section
(start speed))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Speed limit determination section
(ending speed))
(To be supported soon)
Load weighting control
(Functional definition 3)
(To be supported soon)
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
 × × 
Name
Remarks
H224
Classification
h
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Data copying
Initialization
2017h
Factory default
value
H223
Change when
running
Function codes
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Change when running
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
A01
501h
h
M2 Drive control
29 0 to 5
0: Vector control (Induction motor)
1: Sensor-less vector control (Induction motor)
2: 3: Vector control (PMSM)
4:
5: V/f control (Induction motor)
×
0
 ×
228    
A02
502h
h
M2 Rated capacity
1
For inverters of 400 kW or less
0.00 to 500.00 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 600.00 HP when F60 = 1
For inverters of 500 kW or more
0.00 to 1200 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 1600 HP when F60 = 1
For multiwinding motors, set the motor capacity per wiring.
×
0.00
 ×
3
Communications
address
Name
Dir
Data setting range
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
13
A03
503h
h
M2 Rated current
1
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
×
0.01
 ×
13
   
A04
504h
h
M2 Rated voltage
1
80 to 999 V
A05
A06
505h
506h
h
h
M2 Rated speed
M2 Max. speed
1
1
50 to 30000 r/min
50 to 30000 r/min
×
80
   
1500
1500
 ×
 ×
 ×
0
×
×
0
0
   
   
A07
507h
h
M2 Number of poles
1
2 to 100 poles
A08
508h
h
M2 %R1
1
×

   
0.00
 ×
 ×
1
0.00 to 30.00%
3
A09
509h
h
M2 %X
   
1
0.00 to 200.00%

0.00
3
   
M2 Exciting current/Magnetic flux
weakening current (-Id)
1
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A

0.01
 ×
 ×
A10
50Ah
h
13
   
A11
50Bh
h
M2 Torque current
1

0.01
 ×
13
  × 
50Ch
h
M2 Slip frequency (For driving)
1
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
0.001 to 10.000 Hz
A12
A13

0.001
h
M2 Slip frequency (For braking)
1
0.001 to 10.000 Hz

0.001
 ×
 ×
4
50Dh
A14
50Eh
h
M2 Iron loss factor 1
1
0.00 to 10.00%

0.00
3
A15
50Fh
h
M2 Iron loss factor 2
1
0.00 to 10.00%

0.00
 ×
 ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × 
A16
510h
h
M2 Iron loss factor 3
1
0.00 to 10.00%

0.00
3
A17
A18
511h
512h
h
h
M2 Magnetic saturation factor 1
M2 Magnetic saturation factor 2
1
1
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 100.0%


93.8
87.5
 ×
 ×
 ×
A19
513h
h
M2 Magnetic saturation factor 3
1
0.0 to 100.0%

75.0
514h
h
M2 Magnetic saturation factor 4
1
0.0 to 100.0%

62.5
 ×
 ×
2
A20
A21
515h
h
M2 Magnetic saturation factor 5
1
0.0 to 100.0%

50.0
2
A22
A23
516h
517h
h
h
M2 Secondary time constant
M2 Induced voltage factor
1
1
0.001 to 9.999 s
0 to 999 V


0.001
0
 ×
 ×
 ×
A24
518h
h
M2 R2 Correction factor 1
1
0.000 to 5.000

1.000
519h
h
M2 R2 Correction factor 2
1
0.000 to 5.000

1.000
 ×
 ×
4
A25
A26
51Ah
h
M2 R2 Correction factor 3
1
0.010 to 5.000

1.000
51Bh
h
M2 Exciting current correction factor
1
0.000 to 5.000

0.000
 ×
 ×
4
A27
A28
A29
51Ch
51Dh
h
h
M2 ACR-P (Gain)
M2 ACR-I (I-time)
1
1
0.1 to 20.0
0.1 to 100.0 ms


1.0
1.0
2
2
A30
51Eh
h
M2 PG Pulse resolution
0
100 to 60000
×
1024
 ×
 ×
 ×
A31
51Fh
h
M2 Thermistor selection
0
1
 ×
84
 × × 
   
A32
520h
h
M2 Electronic thermal
(Operation selection)
3
0
 ×
85
   
A33
521h
h
M2 Electronic thermal
(Detection level)
1
0.01
 ×
13
   
A34
522h
h
1
0.5
 ×
2
   
A51
533h
h
M2 Electronic thermal
(Thermal time constant)
M2 External PG correction factor
0 to 3
×
0: No thermistor
1: NTC thermistor selected
2: PTC thermistor selected
3: Ai [M-TMP]
The protection level of the motor protective functions should
be specified by E30 to E32.

0 to 2
0: No operation (when using exclusive motor for VG)
1: Operation (for general purpose motors: use in the case
of self-cooling fan)
2: Operation (for inverter motors: use in the case of
externally powered fan)

0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A

0.5 to 75.0 min
0
0000 to 4FFF
h
M2 Online auto tuning
0
0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
0
 ×
 ×
9
534h
×

4000
A52
0
 × × 
  × ×
A53
535h
h
0
80 to 999 V
×
80
 ×
0
× ×  
A54
536h
h
M2 Maximum output
voltage/Maximum voltage limit value
M2 Slip compensation
3
-20.000 to 5.000 Hz

0.000
537h
h
M2 Torque boost
1
0.0
2
× ×  ×
× ×  ×
A56
538h
h
M2 Current fluctuation damping gain
1

0.0 to 20.0
Function specific to V/f control. The following selections are
possible.
0.0:
Automatic torque boost (for fixed torque
characteristic load)
0.1 to 0.9: For squared torque characteristic load
1.0 to 1.9: For proportional torque characteristic load
2.0 to 20.0: For fixed torque characteristic load

0.00 to 1.00
 ×
 ×
8
A55
0.20
 ×
3
× ×  ×
8-24
4
4
3
2
2
2
4
0
4
4
0
  × 
  × 
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × 
  × 
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × 
  × 
Remarks
Motor parameter functions M2, M3 (A: Alternative Functions)
Function Codes
■
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
 ×
0
× × × 
1

0.0 to 359.9 (0° to 359.9° CCW direction)
Specifies the offset value for the encoder reference position
and the actual motor magnetic pole position.
0.0
 ×
2
× × × 
M2 Salient pole ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
1
1.000 to 5.000
Specifies the saliency ratio of PMSM.
Setting value = Lq/Ld
To drive a SPM motor, set 1.000.
×
1.000
 ×
4
× × × 
h
M2 q axis inductance magnetic
saturation coefficient
1
0.0 to 100.0%

100.0
 ×
2
× × × 
53Fh
h
M2 Magnetic flux limiting value
1
50.0 to 150.0%

100.0
h
M2 Overcurrent protection levels
1
0.00
13
× × × 
× × × 
A65
541h
h
M2 Torque correction gain 1
1
0.00: No operation
×
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 5000 A
Specifies the allowable current value to prevent the
permanent magnet of a PMSM from getting demagnetized.
If the current exceeding this setting flows, an overcurrent
alarm (OC) occurs.

0.00 to 10.00
 ×
 ×
2
540h
A66
A67
542h
543h
h
h
M2 Torque correction gain 2
M2 Torque correction gain 3
1
1
0.00 to 10.00
-1.000 to 1.000


1.00
0.000
A68
544h
h
M2 Torque correction gain 4
1
-1.000 to 1.000

0.000
A69
545h
h
M2 Torque correction gain 5
1
-50.00 to 50.00

0.00
A70
546h
h
M2 Torque correction gain 6
1
-50.00 to 50.00

0.00
A71
547h
h
M2 Torque correction gain 7
1
-1.000 to 1.000

A101
2401h
h
M3 Drive control
29 0 to 5
0: Vector control (Induction motor)
1: Sensor-less vector control (Induction motor)
2: 3: Vector control (PMSM)
4: 5: V/f control (Induction motor)
A102
2402h
E5h
M3 Rated capacity
1
Function Codes
A59
53Bh
h
M2 ABS signal input definition
13 0 to 16
Specifies according to the encoder specifications.
Defines the interface to detect magnetic polarity position.
0: 1bit (Terminal; F0) Z phase interface
1: 3bit (Terminal; F0, F1, F2) U, V, W phase interface
2: 4bit (Terminal; F0, F1, F2, F3) grey code interface
3 to 5: Reserved
6: SPGT 17 bit serial interface
7 to 16: Reserved
A60
53Ch
h
M2 Magnetic pole position offset
A61
53Dh
h
A62
53Eh
A63
A64
Dir
Data setting range
1.00
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
 ×
 ×
 ×
3
 ×
 ×
8
 ×
 ×
7
0.000
×
5
 ×
228    
For inverters of 400 kW or less
0.00 to 500.00 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 600.00 HP when F60 = 1
For inverters of 500 kW or more
0.00 to 1200 kW when F60 = 0
0.00 to 1600 HP when F60 = 1
For multiwinding motors, set the motor capacity per wiring.
×
0.00
 ×
3
3
8
7
8
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
   
13
A103
2403h
E6h
M3 Rated current
1
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A
×
0.01
 ×
13
   
A104
2404h
E7h
M3 Rated voltage
1
80 to 999 V
A105
2405h
E9h
M3 Rated speed
1
50 to 30000 r/min
×
80
   
1500
 ×
 ×
0
×
0
A106
A107
2406h
2407h
EAh
EBh
M3 Max. Speed
M3 Number of poles
1
1
50 to 30000 r/min
2 to 100 poles
   
1500
4
 ×
 ×
 ×
0
1
   
   
0.00 to 30.00%
×
×

A108
2408h
ECh
M3 %R1
1
A109
2409h
EDh
M3 %X
1
3
   
0.00 to 200.00%

0.00
3
   
1
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A

0.01
 ×
 ×
A110
240Ah
EEh
M3 Exciting current/Magnetic flux
weakening current (-Id)
13
   
A111
240Bh
h
M3 Torque current
1
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9 A
1000 to 2000 A

0.01
 ×
13
  × 
A112
A113
240Ch
240Dh
h
h
M3 Slip frequency (For driving)
M3 Slip frequency (For braking)
1
1
0.001 to 10.000 Hz
0.001 to 10.000 Hz


0.001
0.001
4
4
240Eh
h
M3 Iron loss factor 1
1
0.00 to 10.00%

0.00
 ×
 ×
 ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × 
A114
A115
240Fh
h
M3 Iron loss factor 2
1
0.00 to 10.00%

0.00
3
2410h
h
M3 Iron loss factor 3
1
0.00 to 10.00%

0.00
 ×
 ×
A116
A117
2411h
h
M3 Magnetic saturation factor 1
1
0.0 to 100.0%

93.8
2412h
2413h
h
h
M3 Magnetic saturation factor 2
M3 Magnetic saturation factor 3
1
1
0.0 to 100.0%
0.0 to 100.0%


87.5
75.0
 ×
 ×
 ×
2
A118
A119
A120
2414h
h
M3 Magnetic saturation factor 4
1
0.0 to 100.0%

62.5
2415h
h
M3 Magnetic saturation factor 5
1
0.0 to 100.0%

50.0
 ×
 ×
2
A121
A122
2416h
h
M3 Secondary time constant
1
0.001 to 9.999 s

0.001
4
A123
2417h
h
M3 Induced voltage factor
1
0 to 999 V

0
 ×
 ×
A124
A125
2418h
2419h
h
h
M3 R2 Correction factor 1
M3 R2 Correction factor 2
1
1
0.500 to 5.000
0.500 to 5.000


1.000
1.000
4
4
A126
241Ah
h
M3 R2 Correction factor 3
1
0.010 to 5.000

1.000
 ×
 ×
 ×
A127
241Bh
h
M3 Exciting current correction factor
1
0.000 to 5.000

0.000
4
A128
241Ch
h
M3 ACR-P (Gain)
1
0.1 to 20.0

1.0
 ×
 ×
2
  × ×
  × 
A129
A130
241Dh
241Eh
h
h
M3 ACR-I time
M3 PG pulse resolution
1
0
0.1 to 100.0 ms
100 to 60000

1.0
1024
 ×
 ×
2
0
  × 
 × × 
8-25
×
0.00
3
3
2
2
2
0
4
  × 
  × 
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × ×
  × 
  × 
  × ×
  × ×
Chapter 8 Operation
Factory default value
0
485 No. Link No.
Name
Remarks
Change when running
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
×
Communications
address
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
 ×
84
   
0
 ×
85
   
0.01
 ×
13
   
0.5
 ×
2
   
×

4000
 ×
 ×
9
0
0
 × × 
  × ×
80 to 999 V
×
80
 ×
0
× ×  
3
-20.000 to 5.000 Hz

0.000

0.0 to 20.0
Function specific to V/f control. The following selections are
possible.
0.0:
Automatic torque boost (for fixed torque
characteristic load)
0.1 to 0.9: For squared torque characteristic load
1.0 to 1.9: For proportional torque characteristic load
2.0 to 20.0: For fixed torque characteristic load

0.00 to 1.00
0.0
 ×
 ×
8
1
× ×  ×
× ×  ×
Function Codes
A131
241Fh
F1h
M3 Thermistor selection
0
A132
2420h
F2h
M3 Electronic thermal
(Operation selection)
3
A133
2421h
F3h
M3 Electronic thermal
(Detection level)
1
A134
2422h
F4h
M3 Electronic thermal
(Thermal time constant)
1
A151
2433h
h
M3 External PG correction factor
0
0000 to 4FFF
A152
2434h
h
M3 Online
Auto tuning
0
0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
A153
2435h
E8h
M3 Maximum output
voltage/Maximum voltage limit value
0
A154
2436h
EFh
M3 Slip compensation
A155
2437h
F0h
M3 Torque boost
A156
2438h
h
M3 Current fluctuation damping gain
1
A159
243Bh
h
M3 ABS signal input definition
13 0 to 16
Specifies according to the encoder specifications.
Defines the interface to detect magnetic polarity position.
0: 1bit (Terminal; F0) Z phase interface
1: 3bit (Terminal; F0, F1, F2) U, V, W phase interface
2: 4bit (Terminal; F0, F1, F2, F3) grey code interface
3 to 5: Reserved
6: SPGT 17 bit serial interface
7 to 16: Reserved
A160
243Ch
h
M3 Magnetic pole position offset
A161
243Dh
h
A162
243Eh
A163
A164
Dir
Data setting range
0
 ×
 ×
3
×
0
× ×  ×
× × × 
1

0.0 to 359.9 (0° to 359.9° CCW direction)
Specifies the offset value for the encoder reference position
and the actual motor magnetic pole position.
0.0
 ×
2
× × × 
M3 Salient pole ratio (%Xq/%Xd)
1
1.000 to 5.000
Specifies the saliency ratio of PMSM.
Setting value = Lq/Ld
To drive a SPM motor, set 1.000.
×
1.000
 ×
4
× × × 
h
M3 q axis inductance magnetic
saturation coefficient
1
0.0 to 100.0 %

100.0
 ×
2
× × × 
243Fh
h
M3 Magnetic flux limiting value
1
50.0 to 150.0 %

100.0
h
M3 Overcurrent protection level
1
0.00
13
× × × 
× × × 
A165
2441h
h
M3 Torque correction gain 1
1
A166
2442h
h
M3 Torque correction gain 2
1
0.00: No operation
×
0.01 to 99.99 A
100.0 to 999.9A
1000 to 5000A
Specifies the allowable current value to prevent the
permanent magnet of a PMSM from getting demagnetized.
If the current exceeding this setting flows, an overcurrent
alarm (OC) occurs.

0.00 to 10.00

0.00 to 10.00
 ×
 ×
2
2440h
A167
2443h
h
M3 Torque correction gain 3
1
-1.000 to 1.000

0.000
A168
2444h
h
M3 Torque correction gain 4
1
-1.000 to 1.000

0.000
A169
2445h
h
M3 Torque correction gain 5
1
-50.00 to 50.00

0.00
A170
A171
2446h
2447h
h
h
M3 Torque correction gain 6
M3 Torque correction gain 7
1
1
-50.00 to 50.00
-1.000 to 1.000


0.00
0.000
8-26
0.20
2
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
1.00
1.00
 ×
 ×
3
 ×
 ×
8
 ×
 ×
 ×
7
3
8
7
8
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
× × × 
Remarks
Change when running
1
485 No. Link No.
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
0 to 3
×
0: No thermistor
1: NTC thermistor selected
2: PTC thermistor selected
3: Ai [M-TMP]
The protection level of the motor protective functions should
be specified by E30 to E32.

0 to 2
0: No operation (when using exclusive motor for VG)
1: Operation (for general purpose motors: use in case of
self-cooling fan)
2: Operation (for inverter motors: use in case of externally
powered fans)
Using an NTC thermistor of a FRENIC-VG-dedicated motor
activates the motor overheat protection. If it happens,
disable the electronic thermal overload protection.

0.01 to 99.99A
100.0 to 999.9A
1000 to 2000A

0.5 to 75.0 min
Communications
address
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
o01
601h
F5h
DIA function selection
4
0 to 1
0: Binary
1: BCD
×
0
 
86
   
o02
602h
F6h
DIB function selection
1
0 to 1
0: Binary
1: BCD
×
0
 
86
   
o03
603h
h
DIA BCD input setting
1
99 to 7999
×
1000
 
0
   
o04
604h
h
DIB BCD input setting
1
99 to 7999
×
1000
 
0
   
o05
605h
h
PG (PD) option setting
(Return pulse selection)
0
×
0
 
96
 × × 
o06
606h
h
PG (LD) option setting
(Digital line speed detect definition/
(Encoder pulse resolution))
3
0 to 1
0: Main unit PG
1: PG (PD) option
100 to 60000 P/R

1024
 
0
   
o07
607h
h
PG (LD) option setting
(Digital line speed detect definition/
(Detected pulse correction 1))
1
1 to 9999

1000
 
0
   
o08
608h
h
PG (LD) option setting
(Digital line speed detect definition/
(Detected pulse correction 2))
1
1 to 9999

1000
 
0
   
o09
609h
h
M1 ABS signal input definition
3
0 to 16
Specifies according to the encoder specifications.
Defines the interface to detect magnetic polarity position.
0: 1bit (Terminal; F0) Z phase interface
1: 3bit (Terminal; F0, F1, F2) U, V, W phase interface
2: 4bit (Terminal; F0, F1, F2, F3) grey code interface
3 to 5: Reserved
6: SPGT 17 bit serial interface
7 to 16: Reserved
×
0
 ×
0
× × × 
o10
60Ah
h
M1 Magnetic pole position offset
1

0.0 to 359.9 (0° to 359.9° CCW direction)
Specifies the offset value for the encoder reference position
and the actual motor magnetic pole position.
0.0
 ×
2
× × × 
o11
60Bh
h
M1 Salient pole rate (%Xq/%Xd)
1
1.000 to 5.000
Specifies the saliency ratio of PMSM.
Setting value = Lq/Ld
To drive a SPM motor, set 1.000.
×
1.000
 ×
4
× × × 
o12
60Ch
h
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(Command pulse selection)
8
0 to 1
0: PG (PR) option
1: Internal speed command
×
0
 
97
 × × 
o13
60Dh
h
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(Pulse-train input style selection)
1
0 to 2
0: A, B phase 90 degrees phase difference
1: A phase: command pulse, B phase: command code
2: A phase: normal pulse, B phase: reverse pulse
×
0
 
98
 × × 
o14
60Eh
F7h
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(Command pulse correction 1)
1
1 to 9999

1000
 
0
 × × 
o15
60Fh
F8h
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(Command pulse correction 2)
1
1 to 9999

1000
 
0
 × × 
o16
610h
F9h
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(APR gain 1)
1
0.1 to 999.9 times

1.0
 
2
 × × 
o17
611h
FAh
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(F/F gain 1)
1
0.0 to 1.5 times

0.0
 
2
 × × 
o18
612h
h
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(Width exceeding deviation)
1
0 to 65535 pulses
 65535  
0
 × × 
o19
613h
h
PG (PR) pulse-train option setting
(Zero width deviation)
1
0 to 1000 pulses

20
 
0
 × × 
o20
614h
h
APR gain 2 (To be supported soon)
1
0.1 to 999.9 times

1.0
 
2
o21
615h
h
F/F gain 2 (To be supported soon)
1
0.0 to 1.5 times

0.0
 
2
o22
616h
h
Position control gain switching
selection
(To be supported soon)
3
0
o23
617h
h
Position control switching level
(To be supported soon)
1

0 to 3
0: No operation
1: Position deviation (x 10)
2: Speed detection (10000/max speed)
3: Speed command (10000/max speed)
Select a trigger to switch between the 1st and 2nd gains of
the position control system.
Switching gains can reduce noise or vibration when the
inverter is stopped.

0 to 10000
 × × 
 × × 
  229  × × 
0
 
0
 × × 
o24
618h
h
Position control gain switch timing
(To be supported soon)
1
0 to 1000 ms

0
 
0
 × × 
o30
61Eh
h
Link option setting
(Activity at transmission failure)
0 to 3
×
0: Immediate trip (er4)
1: Trip after continuing operation for time specified as
operation continuance (er4)
2: Trip when transmission failure continues after operation
time (er4)
3: Operation continuance
Specifies the error processing to be performed if a
communications link error occurs.
For CC-Link, when o30 = 0 to 3, the inverter produces
different operation from above.
0
 
73
   
o31
61Fh
h
Link option setting
(Operation time at transmission
failure)
0.01 to 20.00 s
Specifies the duration from an occurrence of
communications problem on the link until the inverter
causes a communications error.
0.10
 
3
   
Name
Dir
1
Data setting range
8-27
×
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Chapter 8 Operation
Change when running
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Remarks
Option functions (O: Option Functions)
Function codes
■
Change when running
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
o32
620h
h
Link option setting
(Transmission format)
1
0 to 4
0: Transmission format 1
1: Transmission format 2
2: Transmission format 3
3: Transmission format 4
4: Transmission format 5
×
0
 ×
87
o33
(*1)
621h
FDh
Multiplex system (Control mode)
2
×
0
  232  × × ×
o34
622h
h
Multiplex System (No. of slave
stations)
1
0 to 5
0: Disable
1: Multi-winding system
2: Multiplex system 1 (Direct parallel system)
3: Multiplex system 2
4: Reserved 1
5: Reserved 2
Selects whether to use terminal block supporting high
speed serial communication as a multi-winding system or
as a multiplex system. Single operation is possible when
disabled.
Refer to MT-CCL (Multiplex system cancel) in the
description of E01 to E13 (Terminal X function).
1 to 5
Specifies the numbers of slave units except a master unit
when the multiplex system is enabled.
×
1
 
0
 × × ×
o38
(*1)
626h
h
UPAC Start/Stop
3
0 to 2
0: Stop UPAC
1: Start UPAC
2: Start UPAC (Initial startup)
Specifies whether to start or stop UPAC option.
×
0
 
68
   
o39
(*1)
627h
h
UPAC memory mode
1
00 to 1F
×
When UPAC is stopped, this function can be used to specify
the affected area.
Setting 0; hold/1; zero clear
1bit: IQ area
2bit: M area
3bit: RM area
4bit: FM area
5bit: SFM area
00
 
9
   
Name
Dir
Data setting range
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
When UPAC is stopped from running or in the stopped
state, this function defines whether to zero-clear or hold the
specified memory area.
O40
(*1)
628h
h
UPAC address
1
100 to 255
Sets up the UPAC station number used to access from PC
to UPAC via RS-485 communication.
×
100
 ×
0
   
o50
632h
h
Multiplex system (Station number
assignment)
0
0 to 5
0: Master
1-5: Slave 1 to 5
×
0
× 
0
 × × ×
o101
(*2)
2501h
h
Free assignment reflection
0
0 to 1
Automatically reset to 0 after data writing.
×
0
× ×
11
   
o122
2516h
h
Write function code assignment 1
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o123
o124
2517h
2518h
h
h
Write function code assignment 2
Write function code assignment 3
0
0
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF


0000
0000
 
 
9
9
   
   
o125
2519h
h
Write function code assignment 4
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o126
251Ah
h
Write function code assignment 5
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o127
251Bh
h
Write function code assignment 6
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o128
251Ch
h
Write function code assignment 7
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o129
o130
251Dh
251Eh
h
h
Write function code assignment 8
Write function code assignment 9
0
0
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF


0000
0000
 
 
9
9
   
   
o131
251Fh
h
Write function code assignment 10
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o132
2520h
h
Write function code assignment 11
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o133
2521h
h
Write function code assignment 12
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o160
253Ch
h
Read function code assignment 1
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o161
o162
(*2)
253Dh
253Eh
h
h
Read function code assignment 2
Read function code assignment 3
0
0
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF


0000
0000
 
 
9
9
   
   
o163
(*2)
253Fh
h
Read function code assignment 4
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o164
(*2)
o165
(*2)
2540h
h
Read function code assignment 5
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
2541H
h
Read function code assignment 6
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o166
(*2)
2542h
h
Read function code assignment 7
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o167
(*2)
o168
(*2)
2543h
h
Read function code assignment 8
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
2544h
h
Read function code assignment 9
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o169
(*2)
2545h
h
Read function code assignment 10
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o170
(*2)
2546h
h
Read function code assignment 11
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
o171
(*2)
2547h
h
Read function code assignment 12
0
0000 to FFFF

0000
 
9
   
(*1) Available when the ROM version is H1/2 0020 or later.
(*2) Availble in the ROM version H1/2 02□□, which supports PROFINET-IRT.
8-28
Remarks
Function codes
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
L01
901h
h
Password data 1
0
× ×
0
  × 
L02
L03
L04
902h
903h
904h
h
h
h
Password data 2
Lift rated speed
Preset S-curve pattern
0
100.0
0
× ×
 
 
0
2
80
  × 
  × 
  × 
L05
L06
L07
L08
L09
L10
L11
L12
L13
L14
905h
906h
907h
908h
909h
90Ah
90Bh
90Ch
90Dh
90Eh
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
h
Select S-curve pattern 1
Select S-curve pattern 2
Select S-curve pattern 3
Select S-curve pattern 4
Select S-curve pattern 5
Select S-curve pattern 6
Select S-curve pattern 7
Select S-curve pattern 8
Select S-curve pattern 9
Select S-curve pattern 10
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Dir
Data setting range
0
8-29
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×










Chapter 8 Operation
Change when running
485 No. Link No.
Name
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable

0 to 9999
A maximum of 8-digit password can be specified with L01
and L02 to restrict access to change or check function code
data. Setting either one of L01 and L02 at any numeral
except "0" enables password protection.

0 0 to 9999

0 0.0 to 999.9 m/min

11 0 to 2
0: Not used
Normal accel/decel, S-curve (15 steps, S-curve 5)
1: Method 1
VG3, VG5 method. SS1, SS2, and SS4 are all OFF
with 12 input enable.
2: Method 2
VG7, FRENIC-VG method. SS1, SS2, and SS4 are all
OFF with zero speed.
Select S-curve pattern and application of multistep speed
setting.

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%

1 0 to 50%
Communications
address
Remarks
Lift functions (L: Lift Functions)
Function codes
■
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
B01h
DBh
USER P1
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U02
B02h
DCh
USER P2
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U03
B03h
DDh
USER P3
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U04
B04h
DEh
USER P4
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U05
U06
B05h
B06h
DFh
E0h
USER P5
USER P6
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U07
B07h
E1h
USER P7
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U08
B08h
E2h
USER P8
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U09
B09h
E3h
USER P9
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U10
B0Ah
E4h
USER P10
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U11
B0Bh
h
USER P11 SX, E-SX bus
Communication format selection
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U12
B0Ch
h
USER P12
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U13
B0Dh
h
USER P13 SX bus
Station number monitor
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U14
B0Eh
h
USER P14
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U15
B0Fh
h
USER P15
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U16
B10h
h
USER P16
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U17
U18
B11h
B12h
h
h
USER P17
USER P18
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U19
B13h
h
USER P19
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U20
B14h
h
USER P20
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U21
B15h
h
USER P21
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U22
B16h
h
USER P22
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U23
U24
B17h
B18h
h
h
USER P23
USER P24
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U25
B19h
h
USER P25
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U26
B1Ah
h
USER P26
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U27
B1Bh
h
USER P27
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U28
B1Ch
h
USER P28
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U29
U30
B1Dh
B1Eh
h
h
USER P29
USER P30
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U31
B1Fh
h
USER P31
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U32
B20h
h
USER P32
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U33
B21h
h
USER P33
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U34
B22h
h
USER P34
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U35
U36
B23h
B24h
h
h
USER P35
USER P36
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U37
B25h
h
USER P37
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U38
B26h
h
USER P38
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U39
B27h
h
USER P39
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U40
B28h
h
USER P40
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U41
U42
B29h
B2Ah
h
h
USER P41
USER P42
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U43
B2Bh
h
USER P43
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U44
B2Ch
h
USER P44
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U45
B2Dh
h
USER P45
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U46
U47
B2Eh
B2Fh
h
h
USER P46
USER P47
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U48
B30h
h
USER P48
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U49
B31h
h
USER P49
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U50
B32h
h
USER P50
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U51
B33h
h
USER P51
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U52
U53
B34h
B35h
h
h
USER P52
USER P53
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U54
B36h
h
USER P54
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U55
B37h
h
USER P55
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U56
B38h
h
USER P56
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U57
B39h
h
USER P57
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U58
U59
B3Ah
B3Bh
h
h
USER P58
USER P59
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U60
B3Ch
h
USER P60
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U61
B3Dh
4Bh
USER P61/U-Ai1
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U62
B3Eh
4Ch
USER P62/U-Ai2
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U63
B3Fh
4Dh
USER P63/U-Ai3
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U64
U101
B40h
2701h
4Eh
h
USER P64/U-Ai4
USER P101
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U102
2702h
h
USER P102
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U103
2703h
h
USER P103
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U104
2704h
h
USER P104
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U105
2705h
h
USER P105
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U106
U107
2706h
2707h
h
h
USER P106
USER P107
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
Function codes
Factory default value
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
U01
Communication
s address
Name
485
No.
Dir
Data setting range
Link No.
8-30
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Remarks
User functions (UPAC) (U: User Functions)
Change when running
■
Classification
h
USER P108
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
2709h
h
USER P109
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U110
270Ah
h
USER P110
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U111
270Bh
h
USER P111
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U112
U113
270Ch
270Dh
h
h
USER P112
USER P113
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U114
270Eh
h
USER P114
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U115
270Fh
h
USER P115
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U116
2710h
h
USER P116
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U117
2711h
h
USER P117
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U118
U119
2712h
2713h
h
h
USER P118
USER P119
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U120
2714h
h
USER P120
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U121
2715h
h
USER P121
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U122
2716h
h
USER P122
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U123
2717h
h
USER P123
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U124
U125
2718h
2719h
h
h
USER P124
USER P125
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U126
271Ah
h
USER P126
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U127
271Bh
h
USER P127
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U128
271Ch
h
USER P128
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U129
271Dh
h
USER P129
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U130
U131
271Eh
271Fh
h
h
USER P130
USER P131
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U132
2720h
h
USER P132
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U133
2721h
h
USER P133
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U134
2722h
h
USER P134
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U135
2723h
h
USER P135
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U136
U137
2724h
2725h
h
h
USER P136
USER P137
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U138
2726h
h
USER P138
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U139
2727h
h
USER P139
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U140
2728h
h
USER P140
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U141
2729h
h
USER P141
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U142
U143
272Ah
272Bh
h
h
USER P142
USER P143
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U144
272Ch
h
USER P144
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U145
272Dh
h
USER P145
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U146
272Eh
h
USER P146
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U147
272Fh
h
USER P147
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
U148
U149
2730h
2731h
h
h
USER P148
USER P149
0
0
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767


0
0
 
 
5
5
   
   
U150
2732h
h
USER P150
0
-32768 to 32767

0
 
5
   
Dir
Data setting range
8-31
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Chapter 8 Operation
Data copying
Initialization
2708h
U109
Name
Remarks
Factory default value
U108
Function codes
Link No.
Change when running
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485
No.
Communication
s address
0
×
150
×
10.00
0.01 to 99.9 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
×
0
30 to 30000 r/min
0
0.01 to 99.9 s
100.0 to 999.9s
1000 to 3600 s
SS1/SLS Upper limit value
0
0 to 30000 r/min
Motor maximum speed
0
50 to 30000 r/min
h
Upper limit monitor wait time
0
2809h
h
PG Breakdown detection
SF10
280Ah
h
SF11
280Bh
h
SF12
280Ch
SF20
Initialization
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
Classification
Communications
address
× ×
0
   
× ×
0
   
× ×
13
   
5.00
× ×
13
   
×
300
× ×
0
   
×
10.00
× ×
13
   
×
300
× ×
0
   
×
1500
× ×
0
   
0.01 to 99.9 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
×
0.00
× ×
13
   
0
0 to 1
0: Disable
1: Enable
×
1
× ×
68
   
PG Pulse resolution
0
100 to 60000
×
1024
× ×
0
   
Speed detection filter
0
0.000 to 0.100 s
×
0.010
× ×
4
   
h
STO Diagnosis early warning time
0
0.0 to 1.0 s
×
0.0
× ×
2
   
2814h
h
Terminal [SL1]/[SL2] function
selection
0
0 to 2
0: No function
1: SS1 function
2: SLS function
×
0
× ×
219    
SF21
2815h
h
SS1 Stop mode
0
0 to 1
0: Speed monitoring
1: Time monitoring
×
1
× ×
220    
SF22
2816h
h
Encoder selection
0
×
0
× ×
221    
SF23
2817h
h
Fault reaction selection
0
0 to 2
0: Recommended PG or PG-less
1: Recommended 15 V encoder
2: Non-recommended 12 V encoder
0 to 1
0: STO (SBC operation when SBC is enabled)
1: SS1
×
0
× ×
222    
SF24
2818h
h
SBC Function selection
0
×
0
× ×
224    
SF25
2819h
h
SS1 Error processing selection
0
0 to 2
0: Disable
1: Enable – via safety relay
2: Enable – brake direct connection
0 to 1
0: Fault reaction selection
1: Light alarm selection
×
0
× ×
227    
SF26
281Ah
h
SLS Deceleration error processing
selection
0
0 to 1
0: Fault reaction selection
1: Light alarm selection
×
0
× ×
223    
SF27
281Bh
h
SLS Upper limit error processing
selection
0
0 to 1
0: Fault reaction selection
1: Light alarm selection
×
0
× ×
223    
SF28
281Ch
h
Full save of safety parameters
0
0 to 1
0: Do not save
1: Save all (auto-reset to 0)
×
0
× ×
0
   
SF30
281Eh
h
Safety related password
authentication 1
0
0000 to FFFF
×
0
× ×
9
   
SF31
281Fh
H
Safety related password
authentication 2
0
0000 to FFFF
×
0
× ×
9
   
485
No.
Name
Dir
Data setting range
h Password state monitor
0
0 or 1
0: Locked
1: Unlocked
Link No.
SF00
2800h
SF01
2801h
h
SS1 Level
0
30 to 30000 r/min
SF02
2802h
h
SS1 Timer
0
0.01 to 99.9 s
100.0 to 999.9 s
1000 to 3600 s
SF03
2803h
h
SS1/SLS Deceleration time
0
SF04
2804h
h
SLS Level
SF05
2805h
h
SLS Timer
SF06
2806h
h
SF07
2807h
h
SF08
2808h
SF09
(1*) Functions SF01 to SF31 are available when the ROM version is H1/2 0020 or later.
8-32
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Remarks
Data copying
×
Function codes
Factory default value
Safety functions (SF: Safety Functions)
Change when running
■
Change when running
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
S01
701h
1h
Frequency/Speed command (Setting 1)
7
-20000 to 20000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min

-
× ×
5
   
S02
702h
2h
Torque command
1
-327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d

-
× ×
7
S03
703h
3h
Torque current command
1
-327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d

-
× ×
7
  × 
  × 
S04
704h
4h
Magnetic-flux command
1
-327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d

-
× ×
7
S05
S06
705h
706h
5h
6h
Orientation position command
Run command 1
1
1
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF


-
× ×
× ×
9
32
 × × ×
 × × 
   
S07
707h
7h
Universal Do
1
0000 to FFFF

-
× ×
33
   
S08
708h
8h
Acceleration time
2
0.0 to 3600.0 s

-
× ×
2
   
S09
709h
9h
Deceleration time
1
0.0 to 3600.0 s

-
× ×
2
   
S10
70Ah
Ah
Torque limiter level 1
2
-327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d

-
× ×
7
S11
S12
70Bh
70Ch
Bh
Ch
Torque limiter level 2
Run command 2
1
0
-327.68 to 327.67% : 0.01%/1d
0000 to FFFF


-
× ×
× ×
7
9
  × 
  × 
   
S13
70Dh
h
Universal Ao
0
-16384 to 16384 (-10 V to +10 V)

-
× ×
5
   
S16
710h
h
2
-
× ×
5
   
711h
h
-32768 to 32767
Assign functions using E90.
-32768 to 32767
Assign functions using E91.

S17
General purpose setting 1
(To be supported soon)
General purpose setting 2
(To be supported soon)

-
× ×
5
   
Communications
address
Dir
1
Data setting range
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Chapter 8 Operation
Name
Remarks
Command functions (S: Serial Communication Functions)
Function codes
■
8-33
Change when running
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
M01
801h
Fh
Speed setting 4 (ASR input)
15 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
5
   
M02
802h
10h
Torque command value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
M03
803h
11h
Torque current command value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
  × 
  × 
M04
804h
12h
Magnetic-flux command value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
M05
M06
805h
806h
13h
14h
Output frequency command value
Detected speed value
1
1
0.1Hz/1d
-32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
2
5
  × ×
   
  × 
M07
807h
15h
Calculated torque value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
   
M08
808h
16h
Calculated torque current value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
   
M09
809h
17h
Output frequency
1
0.1 Hz/1d
×
-
× ×
2
   
M10
80Ah
18h
Motor output
1
0.1 kW/1d
×
-
× ×
2
   
M11
M12
80Bh
80Ch
19h
1Ah
Effective output current value
Effective output voltage value
1
1
0.1 A/1d
0.1 V/1d
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
2
2
   
   
M13
80Dh
1Bh
Run command (Final run command)
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
32
   
M14
80Eh
1Ch
Running Status
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
21
   
M15
80Fh
1Dh
Output terminals Y1 to Y18
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
33
   
M16
810h
1Eh
Latest alarm data (Multiple alarm, trip
cause)
4
0000 to 5540
×
-
× ×
14
   
M17
811h
1Fh
Latest alarm history
1
0000 to FF40
×
-
× ×
15
   
M18
812h
20h
1st last alarm history
1
0000 to FF40
×
-
× ×
15
   
M19
813h
21h
2nd last alarm history
1
0000 to FF40
×
-
× ×
15
   
M20
M21
814h
815h
22h
23h
Cumulative run time
DC link bus voltage
7
1
0 to 65535 h
1 V/1d
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
0
0
   
   
M22
816h
24h
Motor temperature
1
1°C/1d
×
-
× ×
5
   
M23
817h
25h
Model code
1
0000 to FFFF
200V series: 1313h
400V series: 1314h
×
-
× ×
29
   
M24
818h
26h
Capacity code
1
0 to 34
×
-
× ×
28
   
M25
819h
27h
Inverter ROM
(Main control) version
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M26
81Ah
28h
Communications error code
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
34
   
M27
81Bh
29h
Alarm (Latest)
Speed command value
19 -32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
5
   
M28
81Ch
2Ah
Alarm (Latest)
Torque command value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
  × 
M29
81Dh
2Bh
Alarm (Latest)
Torque current command value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
  × 
M30
81Eh
2Ch
Alarm (Latest)
Magnetic-flux command value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
  × ×
M31
81Fh
2Dh
Alarm (Latest)
Output frequency command value
1
0.1 Hz/1d
×
-
× ×
2
   
M32
820h
2Eh
Alarm (Latest)
Detected speed value
1
-32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
5
  × 
M33
821h
2Fh
Alarm (Latest)
Calculated torque value
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
   
M34
822h
30h
1
0.01%/1d
×
-
× ×
7
   
M35
823h
31h
Alarm (Latest)
Calculated torque current value
Alarm (Latest)
Output frequency
1
0.1 Hz/1d
×
-
× ×
2
   
M36
824h
32h
Alarm (Latest)
Motor output
1
0.1 kW/1d
×
-
× ×
2
   
M 37
825h
33h
1
0.1 A/1d
×
-
× ×
2
   
M38
826h
34h
Alarm (Latest)
Effective output current value
Alarm (Latest)
Effective output voltage value
1
0.1 V/1d
×
-
× ×
2
   
M39
827h
35h
Alarm (Latest)
Run command
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
32
   
M40
828h
36h
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
21
   
M41
829h
37h
Alarm (Latest)
Running status
Alarm (Latest)
Output signals
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
33
   
M42
82Ah
38h
Alarm (Latest)
Cumulative run time
1
0 to 65535 h
×
-
× ×
0
   
M43
82Bh
39h
1
1 V/1d
×
-
× ×
0
   
M44
82Ch
3Ah
Alarm (Latest)
DC link bus voltage
Alarm (Latest)
Inverter internal temperature
1
1°C/1d
×
-
× ×
5
   
M45
82Dh
3Bh
Alarm (Latest)
Cooling fin temperature
1
1°C/1d
×
-
× ×
5
   
M46
82Eh
3Ch
Capacity of main circuit capacitor
3
0 to 100%
×
-
× ×
0
   
M47
82Fh
3Dh
Service life of capacitor on PCB
1
0 to 65535 [10h]
×
-
× ×
0
   
M48
830h
3Eh
Cooling fan service life
1
0 to 65535 [10h]
×
-
× ×
0
   
M49
831h
3Fh
Speed setting 1 (before multistep
speed command)
3
-32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
5
   
M50
832h
40h
Speed setting 2 (before calculation of
acceleration/deceleration)
1
-32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
5
   
M51
833h
41h
Speed setting 3 (after speed limiting)
1
-32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
M52
834h
42h
Control output 1
3
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M53
835h
43h
Control output 2
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
   
5
125    
126    
M54
836h
44h
Control output 3
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
127    
Communications
address
Name
Dir
Data setting range
8-34
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Remarks
Monitor data functions (M: Monitor Functions)
Function codes
■
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
837h
45h
Option monitor 1
6
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M56
838h
46h
Option monitor 2
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M57
839h
47h
Option monitor 3
1
0 to 65535
×
-
× ×
0
   
M58
83Ah
48h
Option monitor 4
1
0 to 65535
×
-
× ×
0
   
M59
M60
83Bh
83Ch
49h
4Ah
Option monitor 5
Option monitor 6
1
1
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
5
5
   
   
M61
83Dh
h
Current date, Year/Month
3
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Year, Lower 2 digits: Month
×
-
× ×
143    
M62
83Eh
h
Current date, Day/Hour
1
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Day, Lower 2 digits: Hour
×
-
× ×
144    
M63
83Fh
h
Current date, Minute/Second
1
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Minute, Lower 2 digits: Second
×
-
× ×
145    
M64
840h
h
Date of occurrence of (Latest) alarm,
Year/Month
3
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Year, Lower 2 digits: Month
×
-
× ×
143    
M65
841h
h
Date of occurrence of (Latest) alarm,
Day/Hour
1
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Day, Lower 2 digits: Hour
×
-
× ×
144    
M66
842h
h
Date of occurrence of (Latest) alarm,
Minute/Second
1
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Minute, Lower 2 digits: Second
×
-
× ×
145    
M67
843h
h
Date of removal of (Latest) alarm,
Year/Month
3
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Year, Lower 2 digits: Month
×
-
× ×
143    
M68
844h
h
Date of removal of (Latest) alarm,
Day/Hour
1
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Day, Lower 2 digits: Hour
×
-
× ×
144    
M69
845h
h
Date of removal of (Latest) alarm,
Minute/Second
1
0000 to FFFF
Upper 2 digits: Minute, Lower 2 digits: Second
×
-
× ×
145    
M70
846h
h
(Latest) Alarm extension ID
18 0 to 1
0 Occurred in local unit
1: Occurred in other unit
×
-
× ×
212    
M71
847h
h
(Latest) Multiple alarm, 2nd
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
14
   
M72
848h
h
(Latest) Multiple alarm, 3rd
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
14
   
M73
849h
h
(Latest) Multiple alarm, 4th
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
14
   
M74
M75
84Ah
84Bh
h
h
(Latest) Multiple alarm, 5th
(Latest) Alarm, subcode
1
1
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
14
9
   
   
M76
84Ch
h
(Latest) Alarm, maximum speed
1
0 to 65535 r/min
×
-
× ×
0
   
M77
84Dh
h
(Latest) Alarm, input power
1
0.0 to 6553.5 kW
×
-
× ×
2
   
M78
84Eh
h
(Latest) Alarm, motor temperature
1
1°C/1d
×
-
× ×
5
   
M79
84Fh
h
(Latest) Alarm, running status 2 (a)
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M80
M81
850h
851h
h
h
(Latest) Alarm, running status 2 (b)
Alarm (Latest)
Run command (Communications link)
1
1
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
141    
142    
32    
M82
852h
h
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M83
853h
h
Alarm (Latest)
Run command 2
(Communications link)
Alarm (Latest)
For manufacturer
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M84
854h
h
Alarm (Latest)
M1 Number of startups
1
0 to 65535 times
×
-
× ×
0
   
M85
855h
h
1
0 to 65535 times
×
-
× ×
0
   
M86
856h
h
Alarm (Latest)
M2 Number of startups
Alarm (Latest)
M3 Number of startups
1
0 to 65535 times
×
-
× ×
0
   
M87
857h
h
Alarm (Latest)
EN terminal input
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
100    
M93
85Dh
h
Light alarm (Latest)
4
0 to 255
×
-
× ×
M94
85Eh
h
Light alarm (1st last)
1
0 to 255
×
-
× ×
102    
102    
M95
85Fh
h
Light alarm (2nd last)
1
0 to 255
×
-
× ×
M96
M98
860h
862h
h
h
Light alarm (3rd last)
EN terminal input
1
0
0 to 255
0000 to FFFF
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
M100
2900h
h
Effective parameter set condition
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M101
2901h
h
Run command 2
(Communications link)
0
0000 to FFFF
×
Monitors X terminal functions to be used exclusively via the
communications link.
-
× ×
32
   
M102
2902h
h
Load factor
0
-327.68 to 327.67%
Motor load factor, Motor rated load/100%
×
-
× ×
7
   
M103
2903h
h
Input power
0
0.0 to 6553.5kW
Input power to inverter
×
-
× ×
2
   
M104
M105
2904h
2905h
h
h
Running status 2(a)
Running status 2(b)
0
0
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
M106
2906h
h
Detected load shaft speed value
0
-32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
141    
142    
   
5
M107
2907h
h
Detected line speed value
0
-32000 to 32000 : (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
×
-
× ×
5
   
M108
2908h
h
PID command value
0
-327.68 to 327.67%
×
-
× ×
7
   
M109
2909h
h
PID feedback amount
0
-327.68 to 327.67%
×
-
× ×
7
   
M110
M112
290Ah
290Ch
h
h
PID output value
Remaining allowance for M1 motor
overload
0
3
-327.68 to 327.67%
0 to 65535%
When M112 = 0 (%), the inverter issues OL1 alarm.
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
7
0
   
   
M113
290Dh
h
Remaining allowance for M2 motor
overload
1
0 to 65535%
When M113 = 0 (%), the inverter issues OL2 alarm.
×
-
× ×
0
   
Dir
Data setting range
8-35
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
102    
102    
100    
Chapter 8 Operation
Change when running
M55
Name
Remarks
Function codes
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
h
Remaining allowance for M3 motor
overload
1
0 to 65535%
When M114 = 0 (%), the inverter issues OL3 alarm.
×
-
× ×
0
M115
290Fh
h
Input watt-hour
* Invalid for use in stack type
4
-
× ×
101    
M116
2910h
h
Input watt-hour data
* Invalid for use in stack type
1
0.000 to 9999
×
100 kWh/1.000d
Limited at 999900 kWh.
0000 to 9999
×
100 kWh/1.000d *Display coefficient
M115 "input watt-hour" x F84 "Display coefficient for input
watt-hour data"
Specifying the electric rate per 100 kWh with F84 shows the
input watt-hour data.
-
× ×
101    
M117
2911h
h
Input watt-hour
(Lower 16 bits)
*Invalid for use in stack type
1
(81920d/unit 100% rating) [kW] x Cumulative time [s] x 2^
(-16)
×
-
× ×
9
   
M118
2912h
h
1
(81920d/unit 100% rating) [kW] x Cumulative time [s] x 2^
(-32)
×
-
× ×
9
   
M119
2913h
h
Input watt-hour
(Upper 16 bits)
*Invalid for use in stack type
Inverter internal temperature
(Real-time value)
2
-32768 to 32767°C
×
-
× ×
5
   
M120
2914h
h
Cooling fin temperature
(Real-time value)
1
-32768 to 32767°C
×
-
× ×
5
   
M121
2915h
h
0
0 to 65535 [10h]
×
-
× ×
0
   
M123
2917h
h
Main circuit capacitor life
(Elapsed time)
M1 Number of startups
3
0 to 65535 times
×
-
× ×
0
   
M124
2918h
h
M2 Number of startups
1
0 to 65535 times
×
-
× ×
0
   
M125
2919h
h
M3 Number of startups
1
0 to 65535 times
×
-
× ×
0
   
M126
291Ah
h
M1 Cumulative motor run time
3
0 to 65535 [10h]
×
-
× ×
0
   
M127
291Bh
h
M2 Cumulative motor run time
1
0 to 65535 [10h]
×
-
× ×
0
   
M128 291Ch
M129 291Dh
h
h
M3 Cumulative motor run time
Run command (Communications link)
1
0
0 to 65535 [10h]
0000 to FFFF
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
0
32
   
   
M130
291Eh
h
Torque bias
0
-327.68 to 327.67%
×
-
× ×
7
M131
291Fh
h
Magnetic pole position signal
0
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
  × 
× × × 
M132
2920h
h
Universal AO1
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M133
2921h
h
Option AO1
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
   
M134
M135
2922h
2923h
h
h
Control input 1
Control input 2
0
0
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
M136
2924h
h
Control input 3
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
133    
134    
135    
M137
2925h
h
Control input 4
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M138
2926h
h
Control input 5
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M139
2927h
h
Control input 6
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M140
2928h
h
Control input 7
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M141
2929h
h
Control input 8
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M142
292Ah
h
Control output 4
0
×
-
× ×
M143
Name
Dir
Data setting range
485 No. Link No.
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
   
136    
137    
138    
139    
140    
128    
292Bh
h
Control output 5
0
0000 to FFFF
(bit 0: E-SX bus tact synchronizing signal)
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M144 292Ch
h
Control output 6
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
129    
130    
M146
292Eh
h
Detected speed value 2
0
-32000 to 32000 r/min
×
-
× ×
5
M147
292Fh
h
Exciting current command
0
-327.68 to 327.67%
×
-
× ×
7
M148
2930h
h
Detected exciting current
0
-327.68 to 327.67%
×
-
× ×
7
  × 
  × ×
  × ×
M149 2931h
M161 293Dh
h
h
Magnetic-flux calculation
Ai adjustment value (12)
0
5
0.00 to 655.35%
-32768 to 32767
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
3
5
  × ×
   
M162
293Eh
h
Ai adjustment value (Ai1)
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M163
293Fh
h
Ai adjustment value (Ai2)
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M164
2940h
h
Ai adjustment value (Ai3)
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M165
2941h
h
Ai adjustment value (Ai4)
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M166
M167
2942h
2943h
h
h
Input signal (Terminal)
Analog input signal (12)
0
3
0000 to FFFF
-32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384: -10 V to +10 V)
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
32
5
   
   
M168
2944h
h
Analog input signal (Ai1)
1
-32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384: -10 V to +10 V)
×
-
× ×
5
   
M169
2945h
h
Analog input signal (Ai2)
1
-32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384: -10 V to +10 V)
×
-
× ×
5
   
M170
2946h
h
Analog output signal (Ao1)
3
-32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384: -10 V to +10 V)
×
-
× ×
5
   
M171
2947h
h
Analog output signal (Ao2)
1
-32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384: -10 V to +10 V)
×
-
× ×
5
   
M172
M173
2948h
2949h
h
h
Analog output signal (Ao3)
AIO Input/Output status 1 (Ai3)
1
4
-32768 to 32767 (-16384 to 16384: -10 V to +10 V)
-32768 to 32767
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
5
5
   
   
M174
294Ah
h
AIO Input/Output status 1 (Ai4)
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M175
294Bh
h
AIO Input/Output status 2 (Ao4)
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M176 294Ch
h
AIO Input/Output status 2 (Ao5)
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M177 294Dh
h
PG (SD) input pulse
4
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
5
   
M178
M179
294Eh
294Fh
h
h
PG (LD) input pulse
PG (PR) input pulse
1
1
-32768 to 32767
-32768 to 32767
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
5
5
   
   
M180
2950h
h
PG (PD) input pulse
1
-32768 to 32767
×
-
× ×
M181
2951h
h
DIOA input status (Terminal)
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
M182
2952h
h
DIOA input status
(Via communications link)
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
   
5
146    
146    
M183
2953h
h
DIOB optional input status
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
26
   
M184
2954h
h
DIOB optional output status
0
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
27
   
M193 295Dh
h
General-purpose setting 1 monitor
(To be supported soon)
0
-32768 to 32767
Monitors the S16 setting value.
×
-
× ×
5
   
8-36
Remarks
Factory default value
290Eh
Function codes
Change when running
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
M114
Communications
address
Change when running
Factory default value
Data copying
Initialization
Classification
M194
295Eh
h
General-purpose setting 1 monitor
(To be supported soon)
0
-32768 to 32767
Monitors the S17 setting value.
×
-
× ×
5
   
M200
M201
2A00h
2A01h
h
h
Pulse-train position command monitor
Detected position monitor
5
1
0000 to FFFF
0000 to FFFF
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
9
9
M202
2A02h
h
Detected position (Z-phase input)
monitor
1
0000 to FFFF
×
-
× ×
9
 × × 
 × × 
 × × 
M220
M221
2A14h
2A15h
h
h
Load weighting speed limit
Hoisting load calculation result
monitor
3
1
-32000 to 32000: (data)*Nmax/20000 r/min
0 to 65535 kg
×
×
-
× ×
× ×
5
0
  × 
  × 
M222
2A16h
h
Travel torque calculation monitor
1
-327.68 to 327.67%
×
-
× ×
7
  × 
Dir
Data setting range
L
P
V S
E
G
F M
S
Chapter 8 Operation
Name
Remarks
Function codes
Control
method:
Enable/
Disable
485 No. Link No.
Communications
address
8-37
8.1.2
Control block diagrams
Refer to "4.1 Control block diagrams" in Chapter 4 of the separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition"
(24A7--0019).
8.1.3
Function code details
Refer to "4.3 Function code details" in Chapter 4 of separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition" (24A7--0019).
8.2
Keypad and test run
8.2.1
Operating from the keypad
Refer to "3.4 Operating from the keypad" in Chapter 3 of separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition"
(24A7--0019).
8.2.2
Trial operation procedures
Refer to "3.5 Trial operation procedures" in Chapter 3 separate volume "Unit Type Function Code Edition"
(24A7--0019).
8.3
Using standard RS-485
8.3.1
Standard RS-485 communication port
Refer to "5.1 Standard RS-485 communication port" in Chapter 5 of the separate volume "Option Edition"
(24A7--0045).
8.3.2
Fuji general purpose communication
Refer to "5.2 Fuji general purpose communication" in Chapter 5 of the separate volume "Option Edition" (24A7--0045).
8.3.3
Modbus RTU
Refer to "5.3 Modbus RTU" in Chapter 5 of the separate volume "Option Edition" (24A7--0045).
8.4
FRENIC-VG Loader (Free version)
Refer to the separate volume "FRENIC-VG Loader (Free version) Instruction Manual (INR-SI47-1588*)".
8.5
Control options
Refer to Chapter 6 "Control Options" of the separate volume "Option Edition" (24A7--0045).
8-38
FRENIC- VG
9
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
9.1
Guidance for capacity selection ...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1
Output torque characteristics ........................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1.2
Procedures for capacity selection ................................................................................. 9-2
9.1.2
9.2
Calculation of load torque for rated operation ............................................................... 9-5
9.1.2.2
Calculation of acceleration and deceleration time ........................................................ 9-7
9.1.2.3
Calculation of the motor RMS rating ........................................................................... 9-11
Inverter capacity selection ............................................................................................................ 9-12
Overview of the control method ............................................................................................ 9-12
9.2.1.1
Vector control with speed sensor (induction motor, synchronous motor) .................... 9-12
9.2.1.2
Sensor-less vector control (induction motor) .............................................................. 9-12
9.2.1.3
V/f control (induction motor)........................................................................................ 9-12
9.2.2
Selection of MD/LD specification .......................................................................................... 9-12
9.2.2.1
Precautions for selection ............................................................................................ 9-12
9.2.2.2
Guidance for selection ................................................................................................ 9-13
Converter selection....................................................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.1
Converter model selection .................................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.2
Converter capacity selection ................................................................................................. 9-14
9.3.2.1
Single unit operation ................................................................................................... 9-14
9.3.2.2
Operation with multiple units connected ..................................................................... 9-14
9.3.3
9.4
Equation for capacity selection ............................................................................................... 9-5
9.1.2.1
9.2.1
9.3
Selection of capacity for motor and inverter ............................................................................ 9-1
9.1.1.1
Capacity of resistive braking ................................................................................................. 9-15
9.3.3.1
Review of braking resistor rating ................................................................................ 9-15
9.3.3.2
Procedures for selection ............................................................................................. 9-16
9.3.3.3
Precautions for selection ............................................................................................ 9-17
Direct parallel connection system ................................................................................................. 9-18
9.4.1
Restrictions of direct parallel connection system .................................................................. 9-18
9.4.2
Basic configuration of direct parallel connection ................................................................... 9-19
9.4.3
Function code setup ............................................................................................................. 9-20
9.4.4
Basic connection diagram ..................................................................................................... 9-21
9.4.4.1
Configuration of 2 units in direct parallel connection .................................................. 9-21
9.4.5
Configuration of 3 units in direct parallel connection ............................................................ 9-24
9.4.6
Motor constants .................................................................................................................... 9-25
9.4.7
Protective functions in direct parallel connection system ...................................................... 9-28
9.4.8
Wiring inductance ................................................................................................................. 9-29
9.4.8.1
9.4.9
9.5
9.6
Direct parallel connection combinations and wiring lengths ........................................ 9-30
Precautions for use ............................................................................................................... 9-31
9.4.9.1
Powering ON .............................................................................................................. 9-31
9.4.9.2
Setting before operation.............................................................................................. 9-31
9.4.9.3
Command input .......................................................................................................... 9-31
9.4.9.4
Input/output interface (I/O functions) ........................................................................... 9-31
9.4.9.5
Keypad functions ........................................................................................................ 9-33
9.4.9.6
Function codes (F to U) .............................................................................................. 9-33
9.4.9.7
Function codes (S: command data) ............................................................................ 9-35
9.4.9.8
Function codes (M: monitor codes) ............................................................................. 9-35
Motors ........................................................................................................................................... 9-36
9.5.1
Vibration, noise and vibration proof ....................................................................................... 9-36
9.5.2
Allowable radial load on shaft end ........................................................................................ 9-37
9.5.3
Allowable thrust load ............................................................................................................. 9-38
9.5.4
List of special combinations .................................................................................................. 9-39
9.5.4.1
Combination list of 380V series .................................................................................. 9-39
9.5.4.2
Combination list of low base speed series .................................................................. 9-40
Conversion from SI units............................................................................................................... 9-41
9.6.1
Conversion of units ............................................................................................................... 9-41
9.6.2
Calculation formulae ............................................................................................................. 9-41
9.1
Guidance for capacity selection
9.1.1
Selection of capacity for motor and inverter
9.1.1.1
Output torque characteristics
Figure 9.1-1 shows the output torque characteristics for the motor dedicated to FRENIC-VG. The characteristics are
shown in the following quadrants according to speed and torque polarity.
Speed: 100% at motor base speed
Torque: 100% at continuous rated torque
(Speed) (Torque)
+
+ Normal rotation drive
• Quadrant 2:
-
+ Reverse braking
150
• Quadrant 3:
-
- Reverse rotation drive
100
• Quadrant 4:
+
- Normal rotation braking
Output Torque [%]
• Quadrant 1:
50
0
-200
-50
-100
-100
-150
(d)
(b)
(c)
(II)
(a)
(I)
0
(III) (IV)
(a) (c)
(b)
Speed
100
200[%]
(d)
(1)
Consecutively allowable torque
Curve [a] of quadrants 1 and 3
Curve (a) shows the torque which can be consecutively output in drive mode. When the speed is under base speed
(100%) in the speed control range (0 to 200%), rated output torque (100%) can be output. When speed is over base
speed (100%), the constant output characteristic curve applies and the torque becomes inversely proportional,
decreasing in magnitude.
Especially in "very low speed under speed control range," the allowable torque decreases due to restrictions imposed by
the temperature rise inside the inverter. The value is 80% using inverter output frequency conversion at under 0.1 Hz.
When operating the induction motor at under 0.1 Hz, consecutive operation is possible at under 0.1 Hz if the slipping is
taken into account. When operating the synchronous motor at under 0.1 Hz, the operation must consider the decrease in
torque because the speed is synchronized.
(2)
Short duration maximum braking torque
Curve [b] of quadrants 1 and 3
Curve (b) shows the allowable output torque for short durations (60s) in drive mode and is generally used in acceleration
and deceleration. The magnitude can be 150% of the consecutive rated torque.
Especially in "very low speed under speed control range," the allowable torque decreases due to the restrictions
imposed by the temperature rise inside the inverter. The value is 100% when using inverter output frequency conversion
at under 0.1 Hz.
(3)
Starting torque
near zero speed of quadrants 1 and 3
The torque near zero speed in quadrants 1 and 3 is the starting torque. The consecutive output torque is 80%, but the
starting activity passes through the very slow speed range in a short duration under 30s, so the starting torque is 150%.
(4)
Braking torque
quadrants 2 and 4
Quadrants 2 and 4 show the range of "braking mode." Curve (c) shows the braking torque which can be output in the
consecutive rated current range of the inverter, and curve (d) shows the braking torque which can be output by the 60s
rated current. The decrease of the output torque (80%) in the very slow speed range is the same as in the case of drive
mode.
The time rating of the braking torque is determined by the other dominating condition. As the mechanical energy is
regenerated in braking mode, the time rating of the "braking resistor" or the "braking resistance unit" becomes critical.
The time rating of the braking resistor is described in this manual or the catalog as allowance (kW) from the perspective
of typical electrical discharge loss and the allowance (kWs) from the perspective of discharge withstand current rating.

Refer to Chapter 6 "6.5 Braking system (braking unit, braking resistor)" for braking-related values when the
combination of the braking units and braking resistors is standard.
9-1
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Figure 9.1-1: Output torque characteristics (MD specification)
Procedures for capacity selection
9.1.1.2
Figure 9.1-2 Procedures for capacity selection (flowchart) shows a typical procedure for selecting capacity. The steps
numbered from (1) to (5) in the flowchart are described in detail on the following pages.
Capacity can be selected easily when restrictions to acceleration and deceleration time are not applied in the selection.
The procedure becomes slightly complicated when "a constant restriction is applied to acceleration and deceleration
time" or when "acceleration and deceleration are performed frequently."
START
Load torque calculation for steady operation
(1)
Select torque under conditions for "Rated
torque>steady state load torque"
Restrictions for accel time?
NO
YES
Calculation of acceleration time
(2)
Time is as expected?
NO
Increase capacity rank by 1
YES
(2)
Calculation of acceleration time
Time is as expected?
NO
YES
Calculation of deceleration time
Time is as expected?
(3)
NO
Add braking resistor
(option)
YES
Calculation of deceleration time
(3)
Time is as expected?
YES
Review rating of braking resistor
(calculation of regenerated energy)
Is loss within
tolerance?
NO
NO
(4)
Increase capacity of
braking resistor
YES
Is loss within
tolerance?
NO
YES
High frequency of
acceleration/deceleration?
YES
(5)
Calculation of motor
RMS rating
NO
Is RMS below
rated current?
NO
YES
Discuss
individually
END
Figure 9.1-2: Procedures for capacity selection
9-2
(1)
Load torque calculation for rated operation (Refer to Section 9.1.2.1 for calculation details)
"Load torque for steady operation" is the converted motor axis torque required to rotate the load at a constant rotation
speed. This is calculated considering the reduction gear efficiency (G).
This calculation must be performed when selecting the capacity for any load.
The load torque at constant speed operation is calculated, and the capacity is temporarily selected such that the motor’s
consecutive rated torque exceeds this value. Capacity without excess can be selected when the motor’s rated rotation
speed (especially the base speed) is matched to the load’s rated rotation speed (base speed). To match this rated
rotation speed, appropriate "transmission gear ratio" and "number of motor poles" must be selected.
When restrictions are not applied to acceleration and deceleration times and the load is not for elevators, the previously
mentioned temporary capacity should be used.
(2)
Calculation of the acceleration time (Refer to Section 9.1.2.2 for calculation details)
When a constant requirement is imposed on acceleration time, this calculation is performed. The calculation is
performed according to the following procedure.
1) Calculate the load and the motor "Moment of inertia."
The difference between the one minute rated value for "9.1.1.1 (2)
Short Duration Maximum Drive Torque" and the "Load torque for
constant speed operation" calculated above in (1) is the "acceleration
torque." Seek the value which minimizes this "acceleration torque"
throughout the entire operation pattern with varying speed.
Exercise caution as the torque decreases inversely proportional to
speed at speed exceeding the motor rated rotation speed.
Torque
2) Calculate the "Minimum acceleration torque." (See Figure 9.1-3)
Motor output torque M
Constant speed
operation load torque
Load torque L
Speed
Figure 9.1-3: Example of minimizing
acceleration torque
3) Calculate the "Acceleration time."
Substitute the above value into equation (9.1.2-15) in "9.1.2.2
Calculation of acceleration and deceleration time" to compute the
acceleration time.
When the acceleration time does not satisfy the requirement, increase the capacity of the inverter and the motor by one
rank and perform the calculation again.
9-3
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
If the moment of inertia is large, acceleration becomes difficult, requiring longer acceleration time. Calculate the "load
moment of Inertia" referring to "9.1.2.2 Calculation of acceleration and deceleration time." Refer to the motor catalog for
the "motor moment of inertia."
(3)
Calculation of the deceleration time (Refer to Section 9.1.2.2 for calculation details)
Calculate the deceleration time as in the case of acceleration time by researching the deceleration torque characteristics
of the motor throughout the entire range of varying speed.
1) Calculate the "Moment of inertia" of the load and the motor.
This is the same as in the case of acceleration time. When the moment of inertia is large, the deceleration time
increases.
2) Calculate the "Minimum deceleration torque." (Refer to Figure 9.1-4 and Figure 9.1-5)
When the load torque is positive, see Figure 9.1-4.
When the load torque is negative in cases such as the braking load in elevators, see Figure 9.1-5. Exercise caution in
this case as the minimum deceleration torque is decreased due to the regeneration activity.
Load torque L
Constant speed
operation load torque
Minimum
deceleration torque
Torque
Torque
Speed
Constant speed
operation load torque
Load torque L
Speed
Minimum
deceleration torque
Motor output torque M
Motor output torque M
Figure 9.1-4: Example of minimizing deceleration
torque (1)
Figure 9.1-5: Example of minimizing deceleration
torque (2)
3) Calculate the "Deceleration time."
As in the case of acceleration time, substitute the above value into equation (9.1.2-16) to calculate the deceleration time.
When the deceleration time does not satisfy the requirement, increase the capacity of the inverter and motor by one rank
and perform the calculation again.
(4) Review of the braking resistor rating (Refer to Section 9.3.3.1 for calculation details)
Review of the braking resistor rating can be divided into two types depending on the repeat period of the braking.
1) Repeat period is under 100s
Calculate the average loss and review the value.
2) Repeat period is over 100s
The allowable braking energy is determined by the maximum regenerated
capacity at braking. Chapter 6 "6.5 Braking system (braking unit, braking
resistor)" shows the list of allowances.
(5) Calculation of the motor RMS rating (refer to Section 9.1.2.3 for calculation details)
In metalworking machineries or conveying equipment which require positioning control, operation is repeated at high
frequency in short duration rating conditions.
In these cases, calculate the maximum equivalent RMS current (actual current) and confirm that this value is within the
tolerance (rated current value) of the motor.
Precautions in reviewing capacity
When driving the FRENIC-VG exclusive motor, select the capacity such that the mean-square value of the torque is
below 100% of the rated torque.
When driving general-purpose motors, select the capacity such that the mean-square value of the current, which takes
into account the motor cooling efficiency, is less than the motor rated current. Select the inverter such that the
mean-square value of the current is less than the inverter rated current value.
9-4
9.1.2
Equation for capacity selection
9.1.2.1
Calculation of load torque for rated operation
(1) General equation
The details of the torque calculation method will be explained for cases where the motor drives a load which moves
linearly.
When the force required to move a linear motion object at constant velocity V [m/s] is F [N] and the motor speed driving
this is NM [r/min], the required motor output torque  M [N･m] is defined by the following equation (9.1.2-1).
M 
 G:
60
F

[ N ･m ]
2  N M  G
•••
(9.1.2-1)
transmission efficiency
When the motor is in braking mode, the efficiency operates in the reverse direction. In this case, the required motor
torque  M [N･m] changes as described in equation (9.1.2-2).
M 
60 
 F   G [ N ･m ]
2  N M
•••
(9.1.2-2)
The expression (60･V)/(2･NM) is the equivalent rotation radius corresponding to the motor axis rotation speed V [m/s].
Additionally, the F [N] in this general equation changes as follows depending on the type of load.
■
 [m/s]
Case of horizontal transport load
Movable load
Table
For simplicity, assume the physical configuration for
W0 [kg]
horizontal transport as shown in Figure 9.1-6. If the table
mass is WO [kg], payload is W [kg], and the coefficient of
TransMotor
mission
friction is , then the frictional force F [N] can be expressed by
the equation (9.1.2-3).
Ball screw
NM [r/min]
This frictional force is the force required to drive the horizontal
transport load.
Figure 9.1-6: General diagram of horizontal transport load
F  Wo  W   g   [N ]
•••
(9.1.2-3)
g: gravitational acceleration ( 9.8 (m/s2))
Therefore, the driving torque  M [N･m] at the motor axis can be expressed as in equation (9.1.2-4).
M 
60  Wo  W   g  

[ N ･m ]
2  N M
G
•••
(9.1.2-4)
9-5
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
(2) Approach for handling the required force F
■ Case of vertical elevator load
For simplicity, assume that the physical configuration for the vertical elevator is shown in Figure 9.1-7.
If the masses of the cage, payload, and the balance weight are WO, W, and W B [kg] respectively, the force required for
the vertical elevator load F [N] can be expressed by equation (9.1.2-5) and equation (9.1.2-6).
[Ascent]
F  Wo  W  WB   g [N ] •••
(9.1.2-5)
[Descent]
F  Wo  W  WB   g [N ] •••
(9.1.2-6)
When the maximum loading capacity is Wmax, the balance weight mass is generally W B = Wo + W max/2.
Depending on the mass of the movable load, braking modes can exist in both ascending and descending movements
where F [N] can become negative, so exercise caution.
The calculation of the required torque  at the motor axis should be performed using the appropriate formula from
equation (9.1.2-1) and equation (9.1.2-2) according to the drive mode or the braking mode. In other words, when F [N] is
positive, use equation (9.1.2-1) and use equation (9.1.2-2) when the value is negative, to perform the calculation.
Transmission
Cage
Motor
Movable load
Balance weight
Figure 9.1-7: General diagram for vertical elevator load
■
Case of inclined elevator load
The case of inclined elevators is similar to the case of vertical elevators. However, the frictional force cannot be ignored,
so the equation form changes between ascending and descending movements. When the inclination angle is  as in
Figure 9.1-8 and the coefficient of friction is , the force F [N] required to drive is shown by the following equations.
[Ascent]
F  Wo  W  WB sin    cos   WB  g [ N ] •••
(9.1.2-7)
[Descent]
F  WB  Wo  W sin    cos  g [ N ]
•••
(9.1.2-8)
As in the case of vertical elevators, braking mode exists in both ascending and descending movements depending on
the mass of the movable load. The calculation for the required motor axis torque is also identical.
In other words, use equation (9.1.2-1) when F [N] is positive and use equation (9.1.2-2) when the value is negative, to
perform the calculation.
Load platform
Transmission
Movable load
Motor
Balance weight
Figure 9.1-8: General diagram for inclined elevator load
9-6
9.1.2.2
Calculation of acceleration and deceleration time
When an object with moment of inertia J [kg･m2] is rotating at speed N [r/min], the rotating object has kinetic energy
defined by equation (9.1.2-9).
J  2  N 

 [J ]
2  60 
2
E
•••
(9.1.2-9)
In trying to accelerate this rotating object, the kinetic energy is enlarged. Conversely, in trying to decelerate this object,
the kinetic energy must be released. The torque required to accelerate and decelerate is given in equation (9.1.2-10).
 J
2  d N 

 [ N･m] •••
60  dt 
(9.1.2-10)
In accelerating and decelerating movements, the mechanical moment of inertia is an important factor. The calculation
method for the inertia is clarified first, and the description of calculation for acceleration and deceleration will follow.
(1) Calculation of the moment of inertia
For objects rotating around a rotating axis, the moment of inertia for that object can be computed by first decomposing it
to micro parts. Then, multiply the square of the distance from the rotating axis to the micro part with the mass and sum
up all of the products. The moment of inertia of the object is the summation value. Moment of inertia J can be calculated
by the following equation.
•••
(9.1.2-11)
Next, the calculation equation for the moment of inertia of the load or load systems with various shapes is described.
1) Cylinders and cylindrical columns
Cylinder is the most typical shape of rotating objects. Figure 9.1-9 shows an object with external and internal diameters
at D1 and D2 [m] respectively and the total mass weighing W [kg]. The moment of inertia J [kg･m2] around the center
axis of the cylinder can be calculated by the equation (9.1.2-12).
W  D12  D22
[kg･m 2 ]
8
2
J
2
•••
(9.1.2-12)
Similarly, cylindrical columns are calculated with internal diameter D2 = 0.
D1 [m]
D2 [m]
W [kg]
Figure 9.1-9: Cylinder
9-7
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
J   Wi  ri2 [kg･m2 ]
2) Case of general rotating objects
Table 9.1-1 shows equations for "calculating moment of inertia J [kg･m2] of various rotating objects" including the rotating
cylindrical object described above.
Table 9.1-1: Moment of inertia of various rotating objects
Mass W [kg]
Form
(Cylinder)
Mass W [kg]
Form
Moment of Inertia J
[kgm2]
π
W  ・(D12  D2 2 ・
) L・
4
W  A・B・L・
c axis
D1 D2
１
L
1
J  ・W・(D12  D2 2 )
8
D
J
(Circular cone)
L
D
(Quadrangular prism)
B
3
・W・D 2
40
A
L0
L
W
c axis
W  A・B・L・
J
1
 W  (L2  A2 )
12
1
1
J b   W  (L2   A2 )
12
4
1
2
J c ≈ W (L0  L0  L  L2 )
3
Ja 
1
・W・D 2
10
π
W  ・D 2・L・
12
J
b axis a axis
B
π
W  ・D 3・
6
(Sphere)
A
Moment of Inertia J
[kgm2]
b axis a axis
4
 D 2 L  
1
3
 W  (L2   D 2 )
12
4
1
3
J b   W  (L2   D 2 )
3
16
1
2
J c ≈ W (L0  L0  L  L2 )
3
Ja 
D
L0
L
c axis
b axis
1
・W・( A2  B 2 )
12

L
(Quadrangular pyramid)
1
W  ・A・B・L・
3
1
W   A B  L  
3
B
A
J
L
(Equilateral triangular prism)
A
L
(Equilateral trigonal pyramid)
A
L
1
・W・( A 2  B 2 )
20
B
A
3
W  ・A 2・L・
4
1
J  ・W・A 2
3
W 
L0
c axis
3
・A 2・L・
12
L
b axis
W
D
L0
1
J  ・W・A 2
5
1
1
 W  (L2   A2 )
10
4
3
3
2
J c ≈ W (L0   L0  L  L2 )
2
5
Jb 
* Density of major metals (at 20C) ρ[kg/m3] Steel: 7860, Copper: 8940, Aluminum: 2700
9-8
12
 D 2 L  
1
3
 W  (L2   D 2 )
10
8
3
3
2
J c ≈ W (L0   L0  L  L2 )
2
5
Jb 
L

3) Case of traveling load
Suppose that a moving table driven by a motor exists as shown in Figure 9.1-6. If the motor rotates at speed NM [r/min]
when the table speed is V [m/s] and the equivalent distance from the rotating axis is 60･V/(2･NM) [m], the moment of
inertia of the table from the rotating axis can be calculated by equation (9.1.2-13).
2
 60  
  Wo  W  [kg･m 2 ]
J  
 2  N M 
•••
(9.1.2-13)
4) Case of elevator load
For loads attached by rope as in Figure 9.1-7 and Figure 9.1-8, the moment of inertia is calculated by taking the
summation of object mass in motion by equation (9.1.2-14), although the direction of motion differs.
2
 60  
  Wo  W  WB  [kg･m 2 ] •••
J  
2


N
M 

(9.1.2-14)
(2) Calculation of the acceleration time
Figure 9.1-10: Load model including transmission uses models of typical loads. These assume that the loads are
attached via a transmission with efficiency G.
t ACC 
J1  J 2
 M  L
G 2 N M  0
G
J1
J2
M
L
G

60
[S ]
•••
(9.1.2-15)
: Moment of inertia of the motor axis [kg·m2]
: Moment of inertia of the load axis converted to the motor axis [kg·m 2]
: Minimum value of motor output torque in drive mode [N･m]
: Maximum value of load torque converted to the motor axis [N･m]
: Efficiency of the transmission
As can be seen by these equations, the apparent moment of inertia is affected by transmission efficiency, becoming (J1
+ J2/ G).
2
2
J1 [kgm ]
J2 [kgm ]
Transmission
Motor
Moment of inertia
at motor axis
Load
Moment of inertia
converted to motor axis
Figure 9.1-10: Load model including transmission
(3) Calculation of the deceleration time
In the load system of Figure 9.1-10, the time required to stop the motor rotating at speed NM [r/min] can be typically
calculated by equation (9.1.2-16).
t DEC 
J 1  J 2  G 2 0  N M 

[S ]
 M LG
60
•••
(9.1.2-16)
In this equation, typically the output torque  M is negative and the load torque  L is positive, which reduces the
deceleration time.
However, in the case of elevator loads,  L may become negative in braking mode, extending the deceleration time.
For elevator loads, calculate the deceleration time using the maximum negative value possible for the load
torque  L converted to the motor axis when selecting the capacity.
9-9
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
The time required to accelerate to NM [r/min] from stopped state with this load is given by equation (9.1.2-15).
(4) Calculation of non-linear acceleration and deceleration time
For loads which are frequently accelerated and decelerated, all
of the surplus motor torque may be used to accelerate and
decelerate in the shortest time. Vector control allows this type of
operation easily.
The acceleration and deceleration in these cases are non-linear,
and the time required to complete acceleration and deceleration
cannot be computed by one equation.
Therefore, speed N is subdivided into N parts and the
acceleration and deceleration time of the parts are computed.
Then the times of the parts are integrated until the end of Figure 9.1-11: Example of functional characteristics
acceleration and deceleration in order to compute the total time.
for driving equipment with constant output
The calculation of the parts increase in accuracy as the
subdivision increases. Therefore, computers are used for
calculating the actual acceleration and deceleration time.
The following shows the method to calculate.
Figure 9.1-11 shows an example of the driving equipment with constant output characteristics. The region below N0
shows constant torque while the region from N0 to N1 shows constant output. The acceleration time can be calculated
using equation (9.1.2-17).
t ACC 
J1  J 2
 M  L
G 2  N

G
60
[S ]
•••
(9.1.2-17)
First, calculate the moment of inertia J1 for the motor axis, the moment of inertia J2 of the load axis converted to the
motor axis, load torque  L converted to the motor axis, and the efficiency  G of the transmission. Then, calculate the
maximum motor torque  M using the suitable equation below according to the speed range.
[ M for N  N0]: Constant torque
M 
60  P0
[ N･m]
2  N 0
•••
(9.1.2-18)
[ M for N0  N  N1]: Constant output (torque inversely proportional to speed)
M 
60  P0
[ N ･m ]
2  N
•••
(9.1.2-19)
When the calculation results above do not meet the target values, the capacity of the driving equipment should be
increased by one rank.
(5) Calculation of non-linear deceleration time
The calculation of the deceleration time can be performed using the same equations as for the acceleration time.
t DEC 
J 1  J 2 G 2  N

[S ]
 M  L G
60
•••
(9.1.2-20)
In this equation, both  M and N are negative values, so in general, load torque  L assists deceleration.
However, in the case of elevator loads, modes exist where  L becomes negative. In these cases, the polarities of  M and
 L differ, impeding deceleration.
9-10
9.1.2.3
Calculation of the motor RMS rating
For loads which are frequently and repeatedly accelerated and decelerated, the load current varies widely and enters the
region for the motor’s short duration rating. In these cases, consideration and measures for heat tolerance are necessary.
The heat generated by the motor is thought to be approximately proportional to the square of the load current, resulting
in temperature rise proportional to the heat generated for FRENIC-VG exclusive motors with forced cooling fans.
For cases when the motor is repeatedly run in adequately short periods compared to the motor’s thermal time constant,
the following procedure can be followed to calculate the "equivalent current." Then, select the motor such that this
"equivalent current" does not exceed the rated current.
(Speed pattern)
(Load torque)
(Total torque)
(Load current)
Figure 9.1-12: Example of repeating operation
For these calculations, first find the required torque for each segment of the speed pattern. Next, use the motor torque
current curve to convert to the load current pattern.
Then the motor’s equivalent current leq can be computed using equation (9.1.2-21).
Ieq 
I12  t1  I 2 2  t 2  I 3 2  t 3  I 4 2  t 4  I 5 2  t 5
[ A] •••
t1  t 2  t 3  t 4  t 5
(9.1.2-21)
For the actual calculation, the motor torque current curve does not exist. Use the following equation (9.1.2-22) which
calculates the load current I from load torque 1, and then compute equivalent current leq.
 1

I 
 It100  Im1002 [ A]
 100

2
•••
(9.1.2-22)
1: Load torque [%]，It100 = torque current (P09: M1 torque current)，Im100 = excitation current (P08: M1 excitation
current)
• Refer to Chapter 12 "Replacement Material" in separate volume, FRENIC-VG User's Manual Unit/Function Codes
Edition (24A7--0019) for P08 and P09 function code data.
• Refer to the torque current and excitation current relevant to A code instead of the P code when using a second motor.
9-11
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
(Acceleration and deceleration torque)
9.2
Inverter capacity selection
9.2.1
Overview of the control method
FRENIC-VG provides vector control with speed sensor (induction motor, synchronous motor), sensor-less vector control
(induction motor), and V/f control (induction motor).
The following provides a general description of these control modes.
9.2.1.1
Vector control with speed sensor (induction motor, synchronous motor)
In this control mode, the primary current of the AC motor is controlled by decomposing the primary current into the
magnetic flux current and the torque current components to achieve control performance equivalent to that of DC
motors.
Vector control with sensor is more suitable for quicker response and higher precision applications than V/f control mode.
(1) Good acceleration and deceleration characteristics
(2) Wide range of speed control
(3) Provision of torque control
(4) Quick control response
9.2.1.2
Sensor-less vector control (induction motor)
Vector control with speed sensor possesses superior performance such as quick response and high precision but
requires speed sensors, necessitating attachment of and wiring to the speed sensor.
In comparison, this control mode is slightly inferior in performance than vector control with speed sensor. However,
speed sensor-less vector control estimates the motor rotation speed from the motor terminal voltage or the primary
current without using speed sensors, and uses the estimation as the speed feedback signal for vector control.
9.2.1.3
V/f control (induction motor)
This control mode operates the motor by varying the frequency and voltage according to the V/f pattern, without using
speed sensors. The scheme is not suitable for systems requiring torque control, high precision speed control, and quick
response. However, the adjustment is simple and provides only a few restrictions to the driving motor, making it suitable
for numerous fan and pump applications as well as inverters.
9.2.2
Selection of MD/LD specification
9.2.2.1
Precautions for selection
FRENIC-VG is built to dual rating specifications. The applicable specification can be switched by altering the parameter
settings between the MD (Medium Duty) specification and LD (Low Duty) specification. The MD specification can drive
motors with capacities identical to the inverter, and the LD specification allows the inverter to drive motors with capacities
which are one or two ranks higher.
Select the inverter capacity by reviewing the MD specification/LD specification in "9.2.2.2 Guidance for selection," the
overloading characteristics, and the capacity of the motor to be used.
MD spec: Apply to equipment where the inverter’s load current in normal operations is less than the inverter rated
current (MD specification), and the load current in overload operation is less than 150% of the rated current
(MD specification) for 1 minute.
LD spec:
Apply to variable load equipment such as fans, pumps, and centrifugal machines where the inverter’s load
current in normal operations is less than the inverter rated current (LD specification), and the load current in
overload operation is less than 110% of the inverter rated current (LD specification) for 1 minute.
The inverter rated current (LD specification) is based on a motor capacity which is one or two ranks higher
than that of the inverter.
Replacement of FRENIC5000VG7S (HT specification) by FRENIC-VG:
FRENIC-VG does not provide a specification equivalent to the HT specification of VG7. When replacing VG7
HT specification by FRENIC-VG, use an inverter with one rank higher capacity.
9-12
Guidance for selection
9.2.2.2
Table 9.2-1 shows the functional differences between the MD specification and the LD specification. If the LD
specification satisfies the requirements in your applications in view of overload capacity and functionality, you can select
inverters with capacities (LD specification) which are one or two ranks lower than the motor capacity.
Table 9.2-1: MD specification/LD specification functional differences
MD spec
LD spec
Remarks
Use
General purpose load
Low overload
applications
Motor capacity range
[400V class series]
30 to 315 kW
630 to 800 kW *
[400V class series]
37 to 355 kW
710 to 1000 kW *
[690V class series]
90 to 450 kW
[690V class series]
110 to 450 kW
Function code setting
(MD/LD spec switch)
F80=0, 2, 3
F80=1
Setting at factory shipping: F80=0
0 and 2 are displayed as HD on
keypad.
Inverter rated current level
Inverter and motor
should have same
capacity
Rated current is based
on motor
Rated current is based
on motor capacity
which is one or two
ranks higher than that
of inverter
In LD spec, the consecutive rated
current rises by one or two ranks,
but the % of the consecutive rated
current for overload capacity
lowers.
For details, refer to Chapter 2
"Specifications."
Overload capacity
150% of rated current
for 1 minute
110% of rated current
for 1 minute
Rated currents differ between MD
and LD specifications.
* mark represents stack by phases
(1)
No output frequency range differs between MD and LD specifications.
(2)
When constructing a system comprising converters and inverters, MD and LD specifications may
co-exist. In this case, select rated capacities and overload capacities for the converters, which meet the
required inverter capacities (rated and overload).
9-13
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Function
9.3
Converter selection
9.3.1
Converter model selection
Converter is available in diode rectifier and PWM converter. Please select the type of converter depending on load status
of machinery system used, and harmonic currents regulation on the supply side.
Table 9.3-1: Advantages of various converters
Item
Points for selection
Diode rectifier
PWM converter
• System with small capacity for regenerative energy
• System with large capacity for
regenerative energy
• System using generators for power supply (no
regeneration)
• System with regulations on
power supply side harmonic
current (supply power factor)
• System with restrictions in installation space
Price
Installation space
Regenerative electric
power processing
Low
High
Small
Large
Regeneration not possible only with the diode rectifier
Resistive regeneration can be applied
with braking resistor + braking unit
Possible
Price and installation space show comparison between diode rectifier and PWM converter.
9.3.2
Converter capacity selection
The converter capacity is selected based on the total capacity of inverters connected to the converter output or the total
load capacity calculated from the motor operating conditions.
The following provides descriptions of converter capacity selection, taking in the event of one inverter and parallel
connection of multiple units as an example.
Even if the capacity of the operated inverter is small, select a converter capacity which is more than 50% of the
total capacity of all inverters connected to the converter.
Applied converter capacity  (Capacity of all connected inverters x 50%)
9.3.2.1
Single unit operation
When driving one inverter, select a converter capacity (consecutive rating, basic rating, overload rating) which is identical
to the inverter.
(Refer to No. 1 and No. 5 in Table 9.3-2)
9.3.2.2
Operation with multiple units connected
See below the example case of four inverters, 315 kW, 280 kW, 110 kW, and 90 kW, connected. Calculate the converter
capacity using "Equation (9.3.2-1)" and "Equation (9.3.2-2)."
Use the same equation for consecutive rating and overload rating (150% or 110%).
 INV  INV 1  INV 2  INV 3  INV 4
•••
(9.3.2-1)
: When all inverters operate in drive
mode
 INV  INV 1  INV 2  INV 3  INV 4  0.95 •••(9.3.2-2) : Only INV4 is in regenerative mode
For regenerative mode, multiply by the coefficient -0.95.
9-14
Table 9.3-2: Consecutive rating
(Unit:
kW)
No.
INV1
INV2
INV3
INV4
Total
Applied PWM converter type
(example)
Remarks
1
315
－
－
－
315
RHC315S-4D
Single unit drive operation
2
315
280
110
90
795
RHC800B-4D
All units drive operation
3
315
280
110
0
705
RHC710B-4D
Limited operation: 3 driven, 1 stopped
4
315
280
110
-86
620
RHC630B-4D
Limited operation: 3 driven, 1
regenerating
Table 9.3-3: Overload rating
(Unit:
kW)
INV1
INV2
INV3
INV4
Total
Applied PWM converter type
(example)
5
473
－
－
－
473
RHC315S-4D
Single unit drive operation
6
473
420
165
135
1193
RHC800B-4D
All units drive operation
7
315
420
165
0
900
RHC710B-4D
Limited operation: 3 driven, 1 stopped
8
315
420
165
-128
772
RHC630B-4D
Limited operation: 3 driven, 1
regenerating
9.3.3
Capacity of resistive braking
9.3.3.1
Review of braking resistor rating
Remarks
By using a PWM converter in combination with plural inverters, the regenerative energy generated during motor braking
may be recycled to the power supply, or utilized as driving energy of other motors in driving operation.
On the other hand, the energy generated from the combination of diode rectifier and plural inverters may also be utilized
as driving energy in other motors. However, as it is not revivable in power supply in principle, the unconsumed
regenerative energy will cause the DC link bus voltage to increase, resulting in an alarm trip condition (overvoltage). For
this reason a braking system (braking resistor + braking unit) will be required to convert the regenerative energy into
thermal energy and dissipate the converted energy.
The method of capacity calculation of braking resistor is given in this chapter.
(a) PWN converter
(b) Diode rectifier
Figure 9.3-1: Flow of regenerative energy in combination with converter
The energies which can be regenerated in inverter operations are kinetic energy due to inertia or the potential energy of
elevators.
9-15
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
No.
1) Kinetic energy due to inertia
When an object with moment of inertia J [kg·m 2] is rotating at rotational speed N2 [r/min], the kinetic energy of this
rotating object is shown in equation (9.3.3-1).
2
J  2π  N 2 

 [ J  Ws ]
2  60 
1

 J  N 22 [ J ]
182.4
E
•••
(9.3.3-1)
•••
(9.3.3-1)’
When decelerating this object to rotational speed N1 [r/min], the released energy is shown in equation (9.3.3-2).
E

2
2
J  2π  N 2   2π  N1   •••
 
 -
 
2  60   60  


1
 J  N 2 2  N12 [ J ]
182.4
•••
(9.3.3-2)
(9.3.3-2)’
In the case of a typical load model as shown in Figure 9.1-10, the energy regenerated to the inverter is calculated from
the transmission efficiency  G and the motor efficiency  M by equation (9.3.3-3).
E


1
 J 1  J 2  ηG   ηM  N 2 2  N12 [ J ]
182.4
•••
(9.3.3-3)
2) Potential energy of elevators
When descending an object of weight W [kg] from height h2 [m] to h1 [m], the released potential energy can be
expressed as equation (9.3.3-4).
E  W  g  h1  h2 [ J  Ws]
•••
(9.3.3-4)
g  9.8065 [m/s2]
The energy regenerated to the inverter circuit is calculated from the transmission efficiency  G and motor efficiency  M
by equation (9.3.3-5).
E  W  g  h1  h2  G  M [ J  Ws]
9.3.3.2
•••
(9.3.3-5)
Procedures for selection
The following selection conditions must be satisfied according to the repeating period.
(1) Period is less than 100 s: [Condition 1] and [Condition 3]
(2) Period is over 100 s:
[Condition 1] and [Condition 2]
[Cond 1]:
"Maximum braking torque" must be smaller than the value specified in the table of Chapter 6 "6.5.3
Standard combination." If the "Maximum braking torque" exceeds the value in the table, select a capacity
which is one rank larger.
[Cond 2]:
The discharged capacity per braking must be smaller than the "Discharge withstand current rating kWs" in
the table. For details of the calculation, refer to previous section "9.3.3.1 Review of braking resistor rating."
[Cond 3]:
The average loss, which is the discharged capacity divided by the repeating period, must be smaller than
the "Average loss kW" shown in Chapter 6 "6.5.3 Standard combination."
9-16
9.3.3.3
Precautions for selection
Braking force
Braking time T1, repeat period T0, and utilization rate %ED are converted under the conditions of deceleration braking
by rated torque as shown in Figure 9.3-2. However, these values do not need to be used in the calculations for capacity
selection.
Time
Braking time T1
Braking time T1
Repeat period T0
Figure 9.3-2: Approach to utilization rate
(9.3.3-6)
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
•••
9-17
Direct parallel connection system
9.4
Direct parallel connection is a method for controlling one motor by connecting 2 to 3 inverters that are identical in
capacity.
<Features>
(1)
A combination of plural inverters of smaller capacity allows easier restoration or replacement in breakdown as
compared to a single unit of inverter of large capacity.
(2)
Quick operation recovery is possible without any alterations to the wiring using inverters which have not failed.
• When failures occur during direct parallel operation, operation can be resumed using the remaining, normal
inverters (operation with reduced number of units).
• Number of inverter units operated can be varied according to load conditions (operation with reduced number of
units).
9.4.1
Restrictions of direct parallel connection system
There are some restrictions as follows.
(1)
Number of direct parallel: 2 to 3 inverters with equal capacities
units for connection
(2)
Motor control mode
: The direct parallel connection system is available under vector control with speed
sensor and sensor-less vector control, and can be used for induction motors.
When controlling a motor using the direct parallel connection system, the optional
high speed serial communication terminal block (OPC-VG1-TBSI) is necessary.
(3)
Inverter output wiring
: Refer to "Chapter 9.4.8 Wiring inductance" (pages 9-29).
(4)
Speed response, current : 50 Hz speed control response
response
This scheme may not be able to support some conditions requiring very high speed
responsiveness or torque control accuracy.
(5)
Functional safety
: The option card (OPC-VG1-SAFE) for supporting functional safety is not applicable.
(6)
Operation with reduced
number of units
: When operating with reduced number of units, contactors must be attached to the
inverter output side because the wiring for the motor and inverter will be detached.
(7)
Auto-tuning function
: This function enables the system to automatically determine the motor constant
according to the direct parallel connection condition and store motor parameters
depending on the motor constant.
9-18
Basic configuration of direct parallel connection
9.4.2
Configuration
When using this control scheme, one OPC-VG1-TBSI (optional built-in terminal
block supporting high speed serial communication) is required for every inverter.
System option Note 2)
Inverter
Contactor Note1)
When running with reduced number of units, contactors are used to detach inverters
which will not be operated.
Output circuit filter Note 2)
Refer to "9.4.8 Wiring inductance" (pages 9-29).
PG/NTC switcher
To be used for engine cutoff when PG vector control (vector control with speed
sensor) or NTC thermistor (motor temperature detection) are used.
MCA-VG7-CPG may be used for direct parallel connection of 2 units.
PLC
A section of the function code must be modified in changing to operate with reduced
number of units, from 3 units to 2 units. Using PLC will automatically rewrite this
function code.
Using PLC is recommended in systems for advanced operation with reduced
number of units, which requires rewriting of parameter settings.
Note 1) Select contactors and OFL filters whose capacity and type are appropriate for the inverters being used.
Inverter
DC Power
Supply
PLC
Contactor
Speed detection
Motor temperature
detection
2
2
PG
Output MC
Activation
confirmation signal
2
NTC
Inverter
Communication
cable or
hardwire
PG/NTC
switcher
Contactor
2
Output MC
Speed detection
Motor temperature detection
Activation confirmation signal
Optical cable: Connect cable to OPC-VG1-TBSI
*
Stack VG mounting option
OPC-VG1-TBSI
(Optional terminal block supporting
high speed serial communication)
Figure 9.4-1: Example of system configuration with two units in direct parallel connection
• To determine some of the motor parameters, multiply by the inverse of the number of units connected in
direct parallel connection.
Refer to "9.4.6 Motor constants" (pages 9-25).
• The master inverter exercises integrated control of operation and speed commands over the slaves.
• In the case of three units in the direct parallel connection system, up to three motor constants can be set in
advance even when conducting operation with reduced number of units such as two or one. Switching
among the motor constants is done by the X terminal input of the inverters.
9-19
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Note 2) Use of these options is not necessarily required for direct parallel connection system.
(It is however required in cases such as when using optional function of engine cutoff.)
9.4.3
Function code setup
When conducting direct parallel connection, the following function codes must be set up.
Table 9.4-1: Multiple system setup code
F.No.
Function code name
Description
o33
Multiple system control system
Setup of the multiple system control mode (direct parallel connection
system, etc.)
o34
Multiple system slave exchange Setup of the number of slave inverter exchanges (number of units) for the
number
multiple system
o50
Multiple system exchange
number setup
o33
Setup of exchange numbers for high speed serial communication
(OPC-VG1-TBSI)
Multiple System Control System
Set the value according to the multiple system configuration below.
Also review the page on multiple system cancellations in E01 to E13 "X Function Selection."
Note) Available in inverters having a ROM version H1/2 0020 or later.
Specified value
o34
0
1
2
3
4
5
: Invalid (single unit operation)
: Multi-winding system
: Multiple system 1 (direct parallel system)
: Multiple system 2 (unassigned)
: Reserve 1
: Reserve 2
Multiple system slave exchange number
When the multiple system is enabled, set the number of slave exchanges (number of units) excluding the master.
Setup value range 1 to 5
For configuring direct parallel connection systems
1:
Two units configured in direct parallel connection (one slave unit)
2:
Three units configured in direct parallel connection (two slave units)
3 to 5: Invalid (Not utilize for direct parallel connection)
o50
Multiple system exchange number setup
Set exchange numbers for the terminal blocks supporting high speed serial communication (OPC-VG1-TBSI) in the
multiple system.
Specified value
0
: Master
1 to 5 : Slave
<Setup example>
(1)
System with two units
Specify o34=1 for both the master INV and slave INV.
(2)
System with three units
Specify o34=2 for both the master INV and slave INV.
Master INV
o33=2
o34=1
o50=0
Slave INV1
o33=2
o34=1
o50=1
Master INV
o33=2
o34=2
o50=0
Slave INV1
o33=2
o34=2
o50=1
For the multiple system exchange number setup (o50), set
up in the order to connect to the master.
<Invalid setup example>
Master INV (o50 = 0), slave 1 (o50 = 2)
Slave INV2
o33=2
o34=2
o50=2
Slave INV2 (o50 = 1), slave 3 (o50 = 3)
Figure 9.4-2: Function code setup example
*: *** show invalid setups.
When the setup for o34 (Multiple System Slave Exchange Number) is wrong, the system may not operate and
the alarm may not be activated. Reconfirm that the setup is correct.
9-20
9.4.4
Basic connection diagram
9.4.4.1
Configuration of 2 units in direct parallel connection
M12
X
-
-
[CM]
CH２
[PA]
[PB]
U,V,
W
PG
52-1
MCH1X
Slave
[12]
[11]
[CM]
[PLC]
[RT1]
[CMY]
[M-CH2]
[NTC-CCL]
[SW-M2]
Motor M2
selected
[PG-CCL]
NTC
CH1
[THC]
INV1
[TH1]
FRENIC-VG [PGP]
MASTER [PGM]
IM
+
RUN
2X
M22
X
-
-
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
52-2
[THC]
[TH1]
[PGP]
[PGM]
[PA]
[PB]
[12]
[11]
[CM]
[RT1]
[CM]
[PLC]
[M-CH2]
[CMY]
U,V,
W
INV2
FRENIC-VG
SLAVE
MCH2X
MTCL2X
1
PGCL2X
[NTC-CCL]
[SW-M2]
Motor M2
selected
Speed setting
[PG-CCL]
Running
[MT-CCL]
[RUN]
MCH2X
SEL
+
[RESET]
MCA-VG7
-CPG
PGCL1X
RSTX
MTCL1X1
[RESET]
[MT-CCL]
[RUN]
+
RUN
1X
RSTX
[BX]
BX2X
+
Running
[Y5A] →[RDY]
[Y5C]
[BX]
[REV]
BX1X
[Y5A] →[RDY]
[Y5C]
FDX
[30A] →[ALM]
[30B]
[30C]
Ready to
run
[REV]
DCF1,2
Alarm
output
(for any
alarm)
Fan power supply R1,T1
DCF2
Auxiliary
power supply R0,T0
P(+),N()
[FWD]
o33=2
o34=1
o50=1
RDX
R1,T1
OPC-VG1-TBSIS
RX
TX
Ready to
run
FDX
Optical fiber cable
DC bus
DCF1,2
Alarm
output
(for any
alarm)
Fan power supply
DCF1
Auxiliary power supply R0,T0
P(+),N()
RDX
o33=2
o34=1
o50=0
RX
TX
[FWD]
OPC-VG1-TBSIS
[30A] →[ALM]
[30B]
[30C]
The following shows an example of two inverters used in direct parallel connection.
This connection diagram shows a configuration which has considered operation with reduced number of units. When
operation with reduced number of units will not be conducted, elimination of inverter output contactors and simplification
of operation sequence are possible.
Speed setting
INV1 INV2
independent independent
operation operation
****
43S
: Shows external interface signal
Preparation
to Run
“ON”
43S
INV1 independent
operation
RU
N1X
30AX
MTCL
1X2
MTCL
2X2
MC
H1X
PGC
L1X
M12X
MTC
L1X2
43S
INV2 independent
operation
MCH
1X
RU
N2X
30AX
MTC
L2X1
MTCL
1X1
52-1
MTCL
1X2
52-1
INV1 independent operation
selected (reduced unit
operaiton)
PGCL
1X
MCH
1X
PG.Aｌ
arm
Cansel
Free run
(Normal-ON)
MTCL
2X1
Selection of second motor
constant (unit reduction
parameter selected)
Master INV
<INV1>
30C
<INV2>
30C
ALM
30A
30A
30AX
Inverter failure
INV2 independent
operation selected
(reduction unit operation)
30AX
MTCL
2X2
MTC
L2X1
<INV1>
Y5A
RD
Y
Y5C
MTCL
2X1
<INV2
>
Y5A
RD
Y
Y5C
Normal
rotation
command
MTC
L1X1
PGC
L1X
Inverter operation
preparation complete
FDX
Normal rotation
operation command
PGCL
2X
MCH
2X
INV2
connect MC on
secondary side
Free run
（NormalON）
PG.Aｌ
arm
Cansel
Selection of second motor
constant (unit reduction
parameter selected)
Reset
RDYX
PGCL
1X
PGCL
2X
RDX
Reverse rotation
operation command
RSTX
Malfunction reset
Figure 9.4-3: Basic configuration for direct parallel connection system using two inverters
9-21
MCH
2X
BX2X
52-2
PGC
L2X
RDYX
MTCL
2X2
30AX
Reverse
rotation
command
RDYX
PGCL
2X
M22X
Slave INV
ALM
MTC
L1X1
MTCL
2X2
52-2
MTCL
1X2
MC
H2X
MTCL
1X1
BX1X
INV1
connect MC on
secondary side
Preparation
to Run
“ON”
<Supplementary explanation for the connection diagram>
(1) Basic items
1) For safety, when alarm is activated (30X actuated), input coast to a stop command [BX] to the two inverter units.
In the connection diagram shown, the coast to a stop command is configured to normally on (ordinarily closed, open
signifies coast to a stop command). This input should be constructed by hardware circuit for safety.
2) Configure the two inverters such that after operation preparation is complete [RDY], FWD and REV can be turned ON.
The diagram shows the case where the operation preparation complete function is allocated to relay output.
3) The alarm of slave inverters can be released by the reset command [RST] of the master inverter.
4) For installations into facilities which restart after instantaneous power failures, use the running restart function which
searches the direction and speed of free running rotation and picks up smoothly to reengage drive.
(2) Case of operation with reduced number of units
When running with reduced number of units, realize the following setup.
1) Realize the setup in "Table 9.4-2" below for X terminal input (Di) and Y terminal output (Do).
Table 9.4-2: Required X terminal functions for operation with reduced number of units
Di
Specified value / Setup name
Explanation of use in Operation with Reduced Number of Units
57 [MT-CCL]
Multiple system
cancellation
Release direct parallel connection when turned ON. The system will be able to run on one
independent inverter. When running independently on either of the two units, assign this
function to both of the units.
12 [M-CH2]
Motor M2 selection
When running on a single unit, the system is enabled to select the second motor constant
and run the motor without changing the setting of the first motor constant.
49 [PG-CCL]
PG alarm cancellation
Alarm is temporarily canceled for PG routing and NTC thermistor routing disconnection
detecting function while preparing for operation with reduced number of units.
If record of these two alarms does not cause a problem, this function does not have to be
used. In this case, reset the alarm when running again.
75 [NTC-CCL]
NTC thermistor alarm
cancellation
Do
4
[RT1]
Second ASR selection
If the system is running on a single unit using ASR constants (acceleration and deceleration
times and P gain and integral action time for the ASR) set for direct parallel operation, the
load inertia may be too large. This can cause overload protection to be activated.
Avoid the overload trip by selecting the second ASR.
Using the torque restriction (torque current restriction) is also effective.
0
[RUN]
Inverter operating
This signal signifies that the inverter is running.
During direct parallel connection operation, the system outputs a signal to signify that the
master inverter is running.
During single unit operation, the system outputs signals to signify that respective inverters
are running.
16 [SW-M2]
Second motor selection
complete
When the system receives a second motor selection signal and completes a transition to
the second motor constant inside the inverters, the system outputs an ON signal.
To switch to operation with reduced number of units, follow the steps below.
START
Stop free run
Select operation
with reduced number
of units
M-CH2=ON
Yes
MT-CCL=ON
SW-M2
Yes (Second motor
selection complete)
PG-CCL=ON
NTC-CCL=ON
PG-CCL=OFF
NTC-CCL=OFF
Preparation for operation
with reduced number of units
complete
Figure 9.4-4: Flowchart for switching to operation with reduced number of units
9-22
2) For installations into facilities which restart after instantaneous power failures, use the running restart function which
searches the direction and speed of free running rotation and picks up smoothly to reengage drive or use [IL] of the X
terminal.
Use of the running restart function is recommended especially for PG vector control method.
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
3) For simple systems, hardware can be constructed as Figure 9.4-3. However, when a more complex process
sequence is desired, construction of a system structure which operates on communication with PLC is recommended.
9-23
Configuration of 3 units in direct parallel connection
9.4.5
The circuit diagram of a direct parallel connection system using three inverters, where operation with reduced number of
units is not conducted, is shown below.
In the case of two inverters in direct parallel connection system, the relay circuit is the same as in the diagram below if
operation with reduced number of units is not conducted.
DC bus
Optical fiber cable
[13]
[12]
[11]
FX
[RESET]
[CM]
PG
<INV1>
30C
<INV2>
30C
30AX
RX
TX
o33=2
o34=2
o50=2
RX
TX
OPC-VG1-TBSIS
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
[30A] →[ALM]
[30B]
[30C]
[REV]
[BX]
[RESET]
[Y5A] →[RDY]
[Y5C]
[CM]
INV3
FRENIC-VG
SLAVE 2
[FWD]
Ready to run
[RESET]
Ready to run
[Y5A] →[RDY]
[Y5C]
[CM]
[PGP]
[PGM]
[THC] [PA]
U,V,W
[TH1] [PB]
[PGP]
[PGM]
[THC] [PA]
U,V,W
[TH1] [PB]
[PGP]
[PGM]
[THC] [PA]
U,V,W
[TH1] [PB]
NTC
[13]
[12]
[11]
[30A] →[ALM]
[30B]
[30C]
[BX]
[Y5A] →[RDY]
[Y5C]
Fan power supply R1,T1
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
[REV]
30AX
Auxiliary power supply R0,T0
NV2
FRENIC-VG
SLAVE 1
[FWD]
Ready to run
DCF1 P(+)
DCF2 N(-)
o33=2
o34=2
o50=1
RX
TX
[30A] →[ALM]
[30B]
[30C]
[BX]
RSTX
[13]
[12]
[11]
Alarm output
(for any alarm)
[REV]
30AX
Fan power supply R1,T1
INV1
FRENIC-VG
MASTER
[FWD]
RX
Auxiliary power supply R0,T0
OPC-VG1-TBSIS
Fan power supply R1,T1
DCF1 P(+)
DCF2 N(-)
o33=2
o34=2
o50=0
Auxiliary power
supply R0,T0
OPC-VG1-TBSIS
DCF1 P(+)
DCF2 N(-)
DCF3
DCF2
DCF1
IM
<INV3>
30C
ALM
ALM
ALM
30A
30A
30A
<INV1>
Y5A
RD
Y
Y5C
<INV2
>
Y5A
RD
Y
Y5C
<INV3
>
Y5A
RD
Y
Y5C
***
RDYX
Normal
rotation
command
30AX
RDYX
FX
Inverter failure
Inverter operation
preparation complete
Normal rotation
operation
command
Indicates eternal
interface signal.
Reverse
rotation
command
RX
Reverse rotation
operation
command
Figure 9.4-5: Basic configuration (without operation in reduced number of units) for direct parallel connection system
using three inverters
<Supplementary explanation for the connection diagram>
(1)
For safety, when alarm is activated (30X actuated), input coast to a stop command [BX] to the three inverter units.
This input should be constructed by hardware circuit for safety.
(2)
Configure the three inverters such that after operation preparation is complete [RDY], FWD and REV can be turned
ON.
(3)
The alarm of slave inverters can be released by the reset command [RST] of the master inverter.
(4)
When installing into facilities which restart after instantaneous power failures, use the running restart function
which searches the direction and speed of free running rotation and picks up smoothly to reengage drive.
9-24
Motor constants
9.4.6
Direct parallel connection system is a control method where a single winding motor is operated in parallel by plural
inverters. Therefore, the motor constant required for inverter to control the motor is "1/number of connected inverter
units."
When an operation with reduced number of inverters, a characteristic of the direct parallel connection system, is
performed, the motor constants need to be changed. FRENIC-VG allows the selection of up to three motor constants.
Selection among the motor constants can be made by the motor constant switching function of X terminal.
Table 9.4-3 shows a setting method of motor parameters including the time of the operation with reduced number of
inverters.
When performing operation with reduced number of inverters in the direct parallel connection system, set motor
parameters after determining the definitions of motor constant codes.
• M1: Maximum number of
connected units = 1 unit
M1 code consists of motor parameters for single unit operation.
• M2: Maximum number of
connected units = 2 units
M2 code consists of motor parameters for direct parallel connection system of 2 units.
• M3: Maximum number of
connected units = 3 units
M3 code consists of motor parameters for direct parallel connection system of 3 units.
Table 9.4-3: Explanation of change of motor parameters in the operation with reduced number of inverters
Parameter code
Parameter name
Control system
M1 code
M2 code
M3 code
Coefficient of setting value in
operation with reduced number of
inverters
P01
A01
A101
Motor selection
P02
－
－
Maximum speed
F03
A06
A106
Rated speed
F04
A05
A105
Rated voltage
F05
A04
A104
Rated capacity
P03
A02
A102
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
Rated current
P04
A03
A103
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
No. of poles
P05
A07
A107
%R1
P06
A08
A108
%X
P07
A09
A109
Exciting current
P08
A10
A110
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
Torque current
P09
A11
A111
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
Slip on driving, braking
P10, P11
A12, A13
A112, A113
Iron loss coefficient 1 to 3
P12 to P14
A14 to A16 A114 to A116
Magnetic saturation coefficient 1 to 5
P15 to P19
A17 to A21 A117 to A121
Secondary time constant
P20
A22
A122
Inductive voltage coefficient
P21
A23
A123
R2 correction coefficient 1 to 3
P22 to P24
A24 to P26 A124 to A126
Exciting current correction coefficient
P25
A27
A127
ACR
Constant
P gain
P26
A28
A128
Integral action time
P27
A29
A129
No. of PG pulses
P28
A30
A130
Thermistor selection
P30
A31
A131
Electronic thermal (activation selection) F10
A32
A132
9-25
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
<Definitions>
(1)
Shaded parts
in Table show parameters which are set to different values between the M1 and M2
(M3) codes for the operation with reduced number of inverters.
Set the other parameters to same values among the M1, M2 and (M3) codes.
(2)
ACR constants should be less than the standard set values when operating at direct parallel connection.
(Adjust the constants while operating the motor.)
Use the standard set values in the operation reduced to one unit of the inverter.
(3)
Use motor constants by assigning them to motor M2 selection and motor M3 selection [MCH2，MCH3] of
the X terminal function.
Table 9.4-4 shows setting values assigned to motor parameters in the cases of the direct parallel connection system of
two or three inverters and a single inverter, taking the motor parameters of a 280 kW motor as an example.
Table 9.4-4: Setting example of motor parameters
Setting value of function code
Condition: No. of INVs
1 unit
2 units
3 units
Remark
No. of inverters connected to one unit of
motor
Control system
P01 0
0
0
Motor selection
P02 37
37
37
Maximum speed
F03
1500
1500
1500
Rated speed
F04
750
750
750
Rated voltage
F05
380
380
380
Rated capacity
P03 280.00
140.00
93.33
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
Rated current
P04 565.0
282.5
188.3
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
No. of poles
P05 6
6
6
%R1
P06 1.12
1.12
1.12
%X
P07 15.41
15.41
15.41
Exciting current
P08 240.3
120.2
80.10
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
Torque current
P09 508.1
254.1
169.4
 (1/No. of units in direct parallel
connection)
During driving
P10 0.274
0.274
0.274
Slip on braking
P11
0.274
0.274
0.274
1
P12 3.00
3.00
3.00
2
P13 0.00
0.00
0.00
3
P14 0.00
0.00
0.00
1
P15 89.3
89.3
89.3
2
P16 83.3
83.3
83.3
3
P17 71.4
71.4
71.4
4
P18 59.5
59.5
59.5
5
Iron loss
coefficient
Magnetic
saturation
coefficient
P19 47.6
47.6
47.6
Secondary time constant
P20 1.122
1.122
1.122
Inductive voltage coefficient
P21 350
350
350
R2 correction
coefficient
1
P22 1.000
1.000
1.000
2
P23 1.000
1.000
1.000
3
P24 1.000
1.000
1.000
Exciting current correction coefficient P25 0.000
ACR
Constant
0.000
0.000
P gain
P26 1.0
0.5
0.5
Integral action time
P27 1.0
5
5
No. of PG pulses
P28 1024
1024
1024
Thermistor selection
P30 1
1
1
9-26
Use these setting values as default
settings, and adjust them later while
checking operation in test runs.
As a typical example, setting values assigned for the M1 code are shown. The same setting values will be
shown when the M2 or M3 code is set/selected.
(2)
Values set to P03, P04, P08, and P09 are floating-point numbers. Set the values by calculating them to
settable decimal point.
Set the values by rounding them when they cannot be divided.
(3)
Set ACR constants to the setting values specified in this Table. Then, adjust the values while checking
the operation status in test runs.
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
(1)
9-27
9.4.7
Protective functions in direct parallel connection system
This section describes protective functions (batch alarm, reset, disconnection detection) for direct parallel connection.
For other protective functions, see Chapter 11 "Troubleshooting."
(1) Batch alarm process
An alarm is indicated on all stations by optical link communication, 30X operation is executed and the inverter outputs
are shut down. Alarm codes indicated on the keypad LED display enable the discrimination of a station which has
caused the alarm. A function of the Y terminal provides the monitoring of the multi-system self station failure [AL-SF].
Example 1: When the master inverter goes into an alarm state (on occurrence of fin overheat ( 0h1 ))
Y terminal function: For the master inverter, the multi-system self station failure [AL-SF] is turned on.
LED display: "o" (other station) is prefixed to the alarm codes for the slave inverters 1 and 2.
Inverter
Alarm code
Remark
Master
0h1
Station which has caused alarm
Slave 1
o0h1
Other station
Slave 2
o0h1
Other station
Example 2: When the slave inverter 2 goes into an alarm state (on occurrence of fin overheat (0h1 ))
Y terminal function: For the slave inverter 2, the multi-system self station failure [AL-SF] is turned on.
LED display: "o" (other station) is prefixed to the alarm codes for the master inverter and slave inverter 1.
Inverter
Alarm code
Remark
Master
o0h1
Other station
Slave 1
o0h1
Other station
Slave 2
0h1
Station which has caused alarm
* Alarm sub codes (for manufacturers) are updated only on the station which has caused the alarm.
(2) Reset process
In the direct parallel connection system, all stations are batch reset provided that the alarm cause is cleared.
However, in the case of single unit operation, only a self station inverter is reset provided that the alarm cause is cleared.
If the system is running on a single inverter, perform the reset process by inputting a reset command from an external
device (X terminal or communication by SX bus etc.) or by pressing the reset button on the keypad of the inverter.
Table 9.4-5: Reset target
Direct parallel connection
Master inverter reset
process
Reset target
Master INV
Slave INV
Alarm trip
－
－
－
All inverters
Alarm trip
－
－
All inverters
Alarm trip
－
－
All inverters
－
Slave inverter reset
process
Single unit operation
(Cancellation of direct parallel connection)
Master INV only
Alarm trip
－
Alarm trip
－
All inverters
－
－
Alarm trip
Only slave INV
(3) Invalidation of disconnection detection
In the direct parallel connection system, the master inverter performs arithmetic operation of motor control integrally.
Therefore, the slave inverters do not require motor detection signals through devices such as PG and NTC thermistor.
Accordingly, PG disconnection detection and NTC disconnection detection are disabled under the conditions of
"Multi-system" and "Slave."
When "PG vector control" and "NTC thermistor: Valid" are selected in the motor control system at the time of
conducting single unit operation, disconnection detection function works and an alarm trip results.
9-28
Wiring inductance
9.4.8
In some cases, control over the direct parallel connection cannot be normally performed owing to the influence of a
surge voltage caused by the switching of the inverters. Therefore, it is recommended to install output circuit filters (OFL
filters) that suppress the occurrence of the surge voltage.
If a space for storing OFL filters cannot be secured in your cabinet, however, motor operation by the direct parallel
connection system becomes possible when suppressing the surge voltage to a level that causes no trouble to the direct
parallel control by wiring inductance between the inverters and motor (regulated by wiring length).
This section explains the wiring inductance (wiring length) in the direct parallel connection system.
Output circuit filter (OFL filter)
OFL filter can be substituted instead
of wiring inductance.
DC bus
Contactor
Relay terminal block
(Branching from motor terminals is
acceptable.)
L1
FRENIC-VG
L2
FRENIC-VG
Motor
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Contactor
Restrictions on wiring length in direct parallel connection system
• L1 = L2 (equal in wiring length)
• Refer to "9.4.8.1 Direct parallel connection combinations and wiring lengths" for wiring length by inverter
capacity.
Figure 9.4-6 Explanatory drawing of restrictions on direct parallel connection
(1)
In the figure above, two inverters in the direct parallel connection are shown. The same applies to the
case of three inverters.
(2)
If L1 and L2 are cabtire cables or shielded wires, the wiring length of them should be at least three times
the length specified in the section 9.4.8.1.
(3)
Make sure that L1 and L2 are equal in length.
(4)
OFL filters can be installed on either primary or
secondary side of contactors.
Make sure that the wiring length between the output
circuit filters OFL-L1 and OFL-L2 is from 2 to 20 m if
they are installed on the secondary side of the
contactors.
(In the case of direct parallel connection of 3 units,
the total wiring length among respective OFL filters
should be within the range.)
RFD-CNV
INV1
MC1
OFL-L1
2 to 20m
OFL-C1
M
INV2
MC2
OFL-L2
OFL-C2
Figure 9.4-7: Restrictions on use of OFL filters
9-29
9.4.8.1
Direct parallel connection combinations and wiring lengths
Table 9.4-6 shows specifications (rated currents, minimum wiring lengths) for direct parallel connection system
combinations (2 units, 3 units). The rated current and minimum wiring length vary with the combination.
Table 9.4-6: Wiring lengths and combinations for direct parallel connection
Single unit
operation
1 unit
Direct parallel connection system
2 units
*1
Configuration
※1
※1
Ｌ
Ｖ
Ｗ
Ｕ
Ｖ
※1
Ｌ
※1
※1
Ｕ
※1
Ｗ
Ｕ
Ｖ
※1
※1
Ｗ
Ｕ
Ｖ
Ｗ
Ｕ
Ｖ
※1
Ｗ
Ｕ
Ｖ
Rated current [A]
Rated current [A]
Rated current [A]
Minimum
Minimum
wiring
wiring
MD spec LD spec MD spec LD spec length (L) MD spec LD spec length (L)
[m]
[m]
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
468
520
585
650
114
143
173
213
285
334
399
481
578
716
789
889
988
1112
143
173
213
285
334
399
481
578
716
789
889
988
1112
1235
92
74
61
49
37
32
27
22
18
15
14
12
11
18
171
214
259
319
428
502
599
721
866
1074
1183
1334
1482
1667
214
259
319
428
502
599
721
866
1074
1183
1334
1482
1667
1853
122
98
81
66
49
42
35
29
25
20
18
16
15
24
FRN30SVG1S-4
FRN37SVG1S-4
FRN45SVG1S-4
FRN55SVG1S-4
FRN75SVG1S-4
FRN90SVG1S-4
FRN110SVG1S-4
FRN132SVG1S-4
FRN160SVG1S-4
FRN200SVG1S-4
FRN220SVG1S-4
FRN250SVG1S-4
FRN280SVG1S-4
FRN315SVG1S-4
60
75
91
112
150
176
210
253
304
377
415
468
520
585
FRN630BVG1S-4
FRN710BVG1S-4
FRN800BVG1S-4
Phasespecific
1170
1370
1480
1370
1480
1850
2223
2603
2812
2603
2812
3515
4.7
4.0
3.7
3335
3905
4218
3905
4218
5273
6.3
5.3
4.9
100
130
140
161
216
265
295
330
365
410
460
130
140
161
216
265
295
330
365
410
460
－
190
247
266
306
410
504
561
627
694
779
874
247
266
306
410
504
561
627
694
779
874
－
85
66
61
53
40
33
29
26
24
21
19
285
371
399
459
616
755
841
941
1040
1169
1311
371
399
459
616
755
841
941
1040
1169
1311
－
114
88
81
71
53
43
39
35
31
28
25
FRN90SVG1S-69
FRN110SVG1S-69
FRN132SVG1S-69
FRN160SVG1S-69
FRN200SVG1S-69
FRN250SVG1S-69
FRN280SVG1S-69
FRN315SVG1S-69
FRN355SVG1S-69
FRN400SVG1S-69
FRN450SVG1S-69
Ｗ
Ｌ
Ｌ
Standard
Inverter type
※1
3 units
Standard
690V class series
400V class series
Power supply
voltage
Phase-specific
Standard
Configuration
The OPC-VG1-TBSI (sold separately as option) is necessary.
9-30
The minimum wiring lengths are specified on condition that the electric wires are in recommended wire sizes
(FLSC electric wires). When substantially different electric wires or cabtire shielded wires are used, the wiring
inductance changes. Thus, the wiring length should be reviewed.
In the case of a cabtire shield wire, the wiring length should be approximately three times the minimum
wiring length specified in this table.
Precautions for use
9.4.9
This section explains precautions in setting function codes and during operation. In the direct parallel connection system,
restrictions are placed on some functions, such as control interface functions, function codes and monitor codes. See the
following details.
Powering ON
9.4.9.1
There is no restriction on the order in which the main power (direct current) is supplied to each inverter. However, when
some of the inverters in direct parallel connection are not ready to operate, entering an operation command (FWD, REV)
causes an alarm trip condition.
Setting before operation
9.4.9.2
The function codes listed in Table 9.4-7 should each be set to same setting values among the master inverter and the
slave inverters.
Table 9.4-7: Function codes requiring same settings
Function code
Function
Remarks
F03 to F05,
P, A all codes
Motor parameters
Ensure the same setting.
F36
30Ry mode
Required to design a failure sequence externally.
F80
Current rating switching
Ensure the same setting.
H04, H05
Retry operation
Same setting is required when retry operation is made valid.
o33, o34
Multiple system setting code
Ensure the same setting.
9.4.9.3
Command input
Input an operation command, a speed command or a torque
limit, etc. to only the master inverter in the direct parallel
connection system. The specification (scale etc. of speed
command etc.) of command input is the same with the
standard specification.
OPCVG1STBSI
OPCVG1STBSI
OPCVG1STBSI
Master
Slave
1
Slave
2
· Operation command
(FWD, REV)
· Speed command
(or Torque command)
· Torque restriction
When the multiple system is canceled by means of
a setting made to the X terminal function, operation
and speed commands need to be input to the
inverters to be driven.
PG
IM
Figure 9.4-8: Command input
9.4.9.4
Input/output interface (I/O functions)
When the direct parallel connection system is selected, the input/output interface functions of the slave inverters are
restricted. (No restriction is placed on the functions of the master inverter.)
Table 9.4-8 indicates the input/output interface functions available on the slave inverters.
When the multiple system is canceled by a setting made to the X terminal, restrictions on the functions are
removed.
9-31
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
The motor will not operate normally if the codes each are set to different values.
Table 9.4-8: Restrictions on I/O functions (direct parallel connection system is selected)
Category
Di
Do
Available functions even on slave
(Functions not listed are invalid)
Coast to a stop command
Error reset
External alarm
Motor M2 selection
Motor M3 selection
Keypad edit permission command
Universal DI
Short voltage cancel
Multi-system cancel
External simulated failure
Life prediction cancel
Terminal symbol
[7: BX]
[8: RST]
[9: THR]
[12: M-CH2]
[13: M-CH3]
[19: WE-KP]
[25: U-DI]
[50: LU-CCL]
[57: MT-CCL]
[74: FTB]
[76: LF-CCL]
[EN1]
[EN2]
Operating
Stopping under short voltage
Stopping
[0: RUN]
[7: LU]
[13: STOP]
Operation preparation completion
[14: RDY]
Motor M2 selection state
Motor M3 selection state
[16: SW-M2]
[17: SW-M3]
[19: AL1]
[20: AL2]
[21: AL4]
[22: AL8]
[23: FAN]
[25: U-DO]
[26: INV-OH]
[28: LIFE]
[31: INV-OL]
[34: DB-OL]
[35: LK-ERR]
Cooling fan operating
Universal DO
Cooling fin overheat prediction
Life prediction
Inverter overload prediction
DB overload prediction
Transmission error
Multi-system communication
established
Multi-system cancel response
Multi-system self station failure
Batch alarm
Light failure
Maintenance prediction
DC fan lock signal
73 input command
Y terminal test output ON
Y terminal test output OFF
Clock battery life
EN terminal detection circuit error
EN terminal OFF
Safety function operating
Motor stopping by safety function
During STO test by safety function
Causes all units of the system to coast to a stop.
Resets all units of the system.
Terminal used exclusively for controlling safety function
input.
Causes all units of system to coast to a stop.
However, output is shut down by hardware for only the units
into which the signal is inputted.
Safety function input terminal
Alarm contents
Remark
Operated by operation information from master inverter.
Operation preparation completion signal of self inverter is
outputted.
Alarm information about master inverter and self inverter
are added on 4 bits and outputted.
[51: MTS]
[52: MEC-AB]
[54: AL-SF]
[56: ALM]
[57: L-ALM]
[58: MNT]
[60: DCFL]
[71: PRT-73F]
[72: Y-ON]
[73: Y-OFF]
[75: BATT]
[80: DECF]
[81: ENOFF]
[82: SF-RUN]
[83: SF-STP]
[84: SF-TST]
Ai
Universal Ai
Others, invalid
[14: U-Ai]
Ao
Motor current
Motor voltage
DC intermediate voltage
+10, -10 V test
[I-AC]
[V-AC]
[VDC]
[P10, N10]
Even when functions not described are selected in AO, output (monitor) is ‘0’ (displays ‘0’).
9-32
9.4.9.5
Keypad functions
When the direct parallel connection system is selected, the keypad functions of the slave inverters are restricted. (No
restriction is placed on the functions of the master inverter.)
Table 9.4-9 indicates keypad functions available on the slave inverters.
• When the multiple system is canceled by a setting made to the X terminal function, restrictions on the
functions are removed.
• All other functions work effectively such as I/O check, maintenance information, load rate measurement, I/O
status upon alarm, alarm history and copy function.
Name
LED
monitor
Output current detection value
Output voltage detection value
DC intermediate voltage detection value
Displays current detection value of self inverter
Displays voltage detection value of self inverter
Displays intermediate voltage detection value of self inverter
Output current detection value
Output voltage detection value
Displays current detection of self inverter
Displays voltage detection of self inverter
Output current detection value upon
alarm occurrence
Output voltage detection value upon
alarm occurrence
Accumulated operation time upon alarm
occurrence
Motor output command value upon
alarm occurrence
Inverter inside air upon alarm
occurrence
Cooling fin temperature upon alarm
occurrence
Communication status upon alarm
occurrence (4 points)
Displays current detection value of self inverter upon alarm trip
9.4.9.6
Remarks
Displays current detection value of self inverter upon alarm trip
Displays voltage detection value of self inverter upon alarm trip
Outputs motor output command value multiplied by the number of inverters
upon alarm trip
Displays inside air temperature of self inverter upon alarm trip
Displays cooling fin temperature of self inverter upon alarm trip
Function codes (F to U)
When the direct parallel connection system is
selected, the function codes (F to U) of the slave
inverters are restricted. (No restriction is placed
on the functions of the master inverter.)
0: Setting becomes invalid
1: Setting becomes valid (Code that has to be set to same value
as master inverter)
2: Setting becomes valid (Code that does not have to be set to
same value as master inverter)
3: Setting becomes valid (Code for which setting specific to
multi-winding is required)
Table 9.4-10 to Table 9.4-14 below summarize
restrictions on the slave inverters. Beware of the
details.
Note that certain function codes must be set to the same value for both the master and slave inverters.
Table 9.4-10: Slave inverters: Categories for F00 to F85
Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category
F00
2
F11
0
F24
0
F42
0
F51
2
F60
2
F69
0
F80
1
F01
0
F12
0
F26
0
F43
0
F52
2
F61
0
F70
0
F81
0
F02
2
F14
0
F27
0
F44
0
F53
2
F62
0
F73
0
F82
0
F03
1
F17
0
F36
1
F45
0
F54
2
F63
0
F74
0
F83
0
F04
1
F18
0
F37
0
F46
0
F55
2
F64
0
F75
0
F84
2
F05
1
F20
0
F38
0
F47
0
F56
2
F65
0
F76
0
F85
0
F07
0
F21
0
F39
0
F48
0
F57
2
F66
0
F77
0
F08
0
F22
0
F40
0
F49
0
F58
2
F67
0
F78
0
F10
0
F23
0
F41
0
F50
0
F59
2
F68
0
F79
2
9-33
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Alarm information
Category
Operation
state
monitor
Table 9.4-9: Restrictions on keypad monitor display (direct parallel connection system is selected)
Table 9.4-11: Slave inverters: Categories for E01 to E118
Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
E01
2
E14
2
E27
2
E40
0
E53
0
E66
0
E79
2
E106 0
E02
2
E15
2
E28
2
E41
0
E54
0
E67
0
E80
2
E107 0
E03
2
E16
2
E29
0
E42
0
E55
0
E68
0
E81
2
E108 0
E04
2
E17
2
E30
0
E43
0
E56
0
E69
2
E82
2
E109 0
E05
2
E18
2
E31
0
E44
0
E57
0
E70
2
E83
2
E110
0
E06
2
E19
2
E32
0
E45
0
E58
0
E71
2
E84
2
E114
0
E07
2
E20
2
E33
0
E46
0
E59
0
E72
2
E90
0
E115
0
E08
2
E21
2
E34
0
E47
0
E60
0
E73
2
E91
0
E116
0
E09
2
E22
2
E35
2
E48
0
E61
0
E74
2
E101 0
E117
0
E10
2
E23
2
E36
2
E49
0
E62
0
E75
2
E102 0
E118
0
E11
2
E24
2
E37
2
E50
0
E63
0
E76
2
E103 0
E12
2
E25
2
E38
0
E51
0
E64
0
E77
2
E104 0
E13
2
E26
2
E39
0
E52
0
E65
0
E78
2
E105 0
Category
• Only the functions listed in "Section 9.4.9.4" (Pages 9-31) are effective for E01 to E13, E15 to E27 and E69
to E73.
• C01 to C73: All 0
• P01 to P27: 1, P28 to P58:
0
Table 9.4-12: Slave inverters: Categories for H01 to H227
Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
H01
0
H20
0
H36
2
H53
0
H74
0
0
H02
2
H21
0
H37
2
H55
0
H75
0
H142 2
H03
2
H22
0
H38
2
H56
0
H76
2
H149 0
H04
1
H23
0
H39
2
H57
0
H77
2
H105 2
H05
1
H24
0
H40
2
H58
0
H78
2
H106 2
H06
2
H25
0
H41
0
H60
0
H79
2
H107 2
H08
0
H26
0
H42
0
H61
0
H80
2
H108 2
H09
0
H27
0
H43
0
H62
0
H81
2
H109 2
H10
0
H28
0
H44
0
H63
0
H82
2
H110 2
H11
0
H29
2
H46
0
H64
0
H83
2
H111
H13
0
H30
1
H47
0
H65
0
H84
2
H112 1
H14
0
H31
2
H48
0
H66
0
H85
2
H113 1
H15
0
H32
2
H49
0
H67
0
H86
2
H114 1
H16
0
H33
2
H50
0
H68
2
H87
2
H115 1
H17
0
H34
2
H51
0
H70
0
H88
2
H116 1
H19
0
H35
2
H52
0
H71
0
H90
Category Code
Category
H118 1
2
H117 1
• H201 to H227: All 0
• A01 to A29, A32 to A34:
1
• A30, A31, A51, A71 to A74, A101 to A129, A132 to A134: 1, A130, A131, A151, A171 to A174:
0
Table 9.4-13: Slave inverters: Categories for o01 to o50
Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category
o01
0
o04
0
o07
0
o13
0
o16
0
o19
0
o32
2
3
o02
0
o05
0
o08
0
o14
0
o17
0
o30
2
o33
3
o03
0
o06
0
o12
0
o15
0
o18
0
o31
2
o34
3
• L01 to L15: All 0
• U code: All 2
9-34
o50
9.4.9.7
Function codes (S: command data)
When the direct parallel connection system is selected, the function codes (S: command data) of the slave inverters are
restricted. (No restriction is placed on the functions of the master inverter.)
Only S06 "Operation command 1" and S07 "Universal DO" of the slave inverters work effectively.
Note, however, that only the functions listed in "Section 9.4.9.4" (Pages 9-31) are valid.
9.4.9.8
Function codes (M: monitor codes)
When the direct parallel connection system is selected, the function codes (M: monitor codes) of the slave inverters are
restricted. (No restriction is placed on the functions of the master inverter.)
Table 9.4-14 below summarizes restrictions on the slave inverters. Beware of the details.
Table 9.4-14: Slave inverters: Categories for M01 to M222
Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
Category Code
M01
0
M22
0
M43
1
M65
1
M86
1
M114 0
M139 1
M162 0
M02
0
M23
1
M44
1
M66
1
M91
1
M115 1
M140 1
M163 0
M03
1
M24
1
M45
1
M67
1
M92
1
M116 1
M141 1
M164 0
M04
0
M25
1
M46
1
M68
1
M93
1
M119 1
M142 1
M165 0
M05
1
M26
1
M47
1
M69
1
M94
1
M120 1
M143 1
M166 1
M06
1
M27
0
M48
1
M70
1
M95
1
M121 1
M144 1
M167 1
M07
1
M28
0
M49
0
M71
1
M96
1
M123 1
M147 0
M168 1
M08
1
M29
1
M50
0
M72
1
M100 1
M124 1
M148 1
M169 1
M09
1
M30
0
M51
0
M73
1
M101 1
M125 1
M149 1
M170 1
M10
2
M31
1
M52
1
M74
1
M102 0
M126 1
M150 1
M171 1
M11
1
M32
1
M53
1
M75
1
M103 1
M127 1
M151 1
M172 1
M12
1
M33
1
M54
1
M76
0
M104 1
M128 1
M152 1
M177 0
M13
1
M34
1
M55
1
M77
1
M105 1
M129 1
M153 1
M178 0
M14
1
M35
1
M56
1
M78
0
M106 0
M130 0
M154 1
M179 0
M15
1
M36
2
M57
1
M79
1
M107 0
M132 1
M155 1
M180 0
M16
1
M37
1
M58
1
M80
1
M108 0
M133 1
M156 1
M185 0
M17
1
M38
1
M59
1
M81
1
M109 0
M134 1
M157 1
M186 1
M18
1
M39
1
M60
1
M82
1
M110 0
M135 1
M158 1
M221 0
M19
1
M40
1
M62
1
M83
1
M111 1
M136 1
M159 1
M222 0
M20
1
M41
1
M63
1
M84
1
M112 0
M137 1
M160 1
M21
1
M42
1
M64
1
M85
1
M113 0
M138 1
M161 0
9-35
Category Code
Category
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Category Code
9.5
Motors
9.5.1
Vibration, noise and vibration proof
Vibration level, noise level and vibration proof of the vector dedicated motors are as specified in Table 9.5-1.
Table 9.5-1: Vibration level, noise level and vibration proof of vector dedicated motors
22
30
37
45
55
75
90
110
132
160
200
220
250
280
300
315
355
400
Type
No. of
poles
Dedicated
applicable
motor Note
1) [kW]
4
MVK__
8185A
8187A
8207A
8208A
9224A
9254A
9256A
9284A
9286A
528KA
528LA
531FA
531GA
531HA
535GA
535GA
535HA
535JA
Vibration level [μm]
Maximum speed
Base speed
Note 3)
1500 [r/min]
3600 [r/min]
Noise level [dB (A)] Note 2)
Base speed
1500 [r/min]
Maximum speed
3600 [r/min]
5 or less
7 or less
7 or less
71
73
73
5 or less
7 or less Note 5)
71
73
Note 5)
15 or less
Note 5)
Note 5)
Vibration proof
[m/s2]
7 or less Note 4)
Note 1) See the section "2.3.1 Dedicated motor specifications" in Chapter 2 for the specifications and external shape
drawings of the dedicated motors.
Note 2) Values are the levels measured at the position 1 [m] away from the motor in the direction of terminal box.
Note 3) Maximum speed is 3000 [r/min] for 30 to 45 [kW], 2400 [r/min] for 55 to 75 [kW] and 2000 [r/min] for 90 to 220
[kW].
Note 4) If actual vibration exceeds the values above, a separate anti-vibration measure is required.
Note 5) Contact us individually.
9-36
9.5.2
Allowable radial load on shaft end
[Load applied point]
Maximum allowable values of radial load applied by the belt are shown in
the Figure below for each frame number and rotation speed.
Load applied point
Motor
shaft
The allowable values in the Figure indicate that, when the point
determined by the radial load FA [kN] acting on the motor shaft and the
length L [mm] from the stepped part of the shaft end to the center of the
pulley (the distance between FA loaded points) is within the curve, the
motor can be driven by that pulley.
Refer to the technical leaflet of induction motors for the details.
Contact us individually when using a motor (55 kW or larger) exceeding
the Frame No. 200L.
L
Figure 9.5-1: Explanation of load applied point
MVK8185A
[22 kW]
Frame No. 180
MVK8187A [30 kW] Frame No. 200L
MVK8207A [37 kW]
MVK8208A [45 kW]
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Frame No. 180M
9-37
Allowable thrust load
9.5.3
Allowable thrust loads on the vector dedicated motors are as specified in Table 9.5-2.
Table 9.5-2: Allowable thrust loads on vector dedicated motors Unit: kN (kgf)
Frame Type
No. MVK__
Horizontal use IM B3 (F11), IM B5 (L51)
Thrust direction: FS Thrust direction: FU
―
Vertical use IM V6 (F13), IM V3 (L53)
Thrust direction: FS Thrust direction: FU
2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles 2 poles 4 poles 6 poles
8184A
180M
2
8185A
(200)
180L 8187A
1.9
8207A
(190)
200L
1.2
8208A
(120)
1.1
225S 9224A
(110)
1
250S 9254A
(100)
0.9
250M 9256A
(90)
0.8
280S 9284A
(80)
0.7
280M 9286A
(70)
528KA
528LA
531FA
531GA
531HA
535GA
535HA
535JA
Unit: kN (kgf)
Vertical use IM V5 (F12), IM V1 (L52)
Thrust direction: FS Thrust direction: FU
2.7
(280)
3.3
(340)
1.9
(190)
2.3
(230)
2.8
(290)
1.8
(180)
3.8
4.5
3.2
3.7
1.5
2 (200)
(390) (460)
(330) (380) (150)
5.4
1.2
5.4
0.4
6.5 ( - )
6.5 ( - )
(550)
(120) (550)
(40)
5.2
6.2
1.1
5.2
6.2
0.3
(535) (630) (110) (535) (630) (30)
6.4
7.6
6.4
7.6
1 (100)
―
(650) (770)
(650) (770)
6.2
7.3
0.9
6.2
7.3
―
(630) (740) (90) (630) (740)
5.9
6.9
0.8
5.9
6.9
―
(600) (700) (80) (600) (700)
5.7
6.7
0.7
5.7
6.7
―
(580) (680) (70) (580) (680)
*Contact us individually.
2.3
(230)
2.9
(300)
2.2
(220)
2.7
(280)
3.4
(350)
1.6
(160)
3.2
3.8
2.6
4.8
4 (410)
(330) (390) (270)
(490)
4.4
0.4
5.3 ( - )
(445)
(40)
2.3
6.9
8.2 ( - )
(230) (700)
4.1
4.8
0.3
(415) (490)
(30)
4.9
5.6
8.4
10.3
―
―
(500) (570)
(860) (1050)
4.5
5.1
8.5
10.4
―
―
(460) (520)
(870) (1060)
3.7
4.2
9.2
10.8
―
―
(380) (430)
(940) (1100)
3.1
3.8
9.3
10.9
―
―
(320) (390)
(950) (1110)
*Contact us individually.
2 (200)
2.6
(270)
2.4
(240)
3.2
(330)
3.9
(400)
2.7
2.5
4.6
5.6
3 (310)
(280)
(250) (470) (570)
4.4
5.3 ( - )
(445)
2.3
6.9
8.2 ( - )
(230) (700)
4.1
4.8
(415) (490)
4.9
5.6
8.4
10.3
―
(500) (570)
(860) (1050)
4.5
5.1
8.5
10.4
―
(460) (520)
(870) (1060)
3.7
4.2
9.2
10.8
―
(380) (430)
(940) (1100)
3.1
3.8
9.3
10.9
―
(320) (390)
(950) (1110)
*Contact us individually.
Mounting
method and
thrust direction
(1)
In Frame No. 250S and larger, allowable thrust loads on the motors for direct connection are specified.
(2)
The allowable thrust loads in this table are calculated based on the assumption that the radial load is
borne by the normal sized half coupling.
9-38
9.5.4
List of special combinations
9.5.4.1
Combination list of 380V series
When building a system comprising our vector dedicated motor, FRENIC-VG inverters and RHD-D series diode rectifier
converters, and if the system receives an incoming voltage of 380 VAC, select inverters with capacities which are one
rank higher than the capacity of the motor as specified in Table 9.5-3.
Table 9.5-3: Reference table in the case of incoming voltage of 380 V (only in the case of FRENIC-VG + RHD-D series)
Type
4-pole non-standard special motor
4-pole standard motor
Base speed
[r/min]
1500
Base speed: 1,500 [r/min],
Max. speed: 1,500 [r/min]
Max. load
torque [%]
150
150
Model/Item
Output
[kW]
Motor
MVK___
Model
Inverter
FRN___
22
8185A
30SVG1S-4
30
8187A
37SVG1S-4
37
8207A
45SVG1S-4
45
8208A
55SVG1S-4
55
9224A
75SVG1S-4
75
9254A
90SVG1S-4
Max. speed
Nmax [r/min]
3600
2400
Motor
MVK___
Inverter
FRN___
Potential max.
speed
Nmax [r/min]
Note 2)
8185A
―
2000
8187A
30SVG1S-4
2200
8207A
37SVG1S-4
1600
8208A
45SVG1S-4
2100
9224A
55SVG1S-4
1600
9254A
75SVG1S-4
2000
90
9256A
110SVG1S-4
9256A
90SVG1S-4
2000
110
9284A
132SVG1S-4
9284A
110SVG1S-4
2000
132
9286ANote1)
160SVG1S-4
9286A
132SVG1S-4
1500
160
528KANote1)
200SVG1S-4
528KA
160SVG1S-4
1500
200
528LANote1)
220SVG1S-4
528LA
200SVG1S-4
1500
220
531FANote1)
280SVG1S-4
531FA
220SVG1S-4
1500
2000
Note 1) The electrical characteristics of the motor are the same with those of the standard motor. The motor is
combined with inverter with higher capacity.
Note 2) The maximum rotation speed is specified at which the 150% overload rated torque can be obtained with 380 V
input. When a 150% overload constant is required at the speed or faster, select one rank higher inverter to
increase the capacity.
This table is not applicable when PWM converters (RHC-D series) are used. (Inverters are applicable in the combination
of standard specifications.)
9-39
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
Model
9.5.4.2
Combination list of low base speed series
When driving a low base speed motor of which base rotation speed is slower than that of the standard vector dedicated
motor, see Table 9.5-4 to select an applicable inverter.
Table 9.5-4: Combinations of inverters and low base speed motors
No. of poles,
6-pole non-standard special motor
standard/
4-pole standard motor
non-standard
Base
speed
Max. speed
Output
[kW]
500 [r/min]
650 [r/min]
750 [r/min]
850 [r/min]
1,700 [r/min]
2,000 [r/min]
2,000 [r/min]
1,800 [r/min]
MVK9284A
22 FRN37SVG1S
-4
MVK9250A
FRN30SVG1S
-4
MVK8207A
FRN30SVG1S
-4
MVK9284A
30 FRN45SVG1S
-4
MVK9256A
FRN37SVG1S
-4
MVK9286A
37 FRN55SVG1S
-4
1,000 [r/min]
2,000 [r/min]
2,400 [r/min]
1,000 [r/min]
3,000 [r/min]
MVK8187A
FRN30SVG1S
-4
MVK8207A
FRN37SVG1S
-4
MVK9221A
FRN37SVG1S
-4
MVK8207A
FRN37SVG1S
-4
MVK8208A
FRN45SVG1S
-4
MVK9284A
FRN45SVG1S
-4
MVK9224A
FRN45SVG1S
-4
MVK9221A
FRN45SVG1S
-4
MVK528KA
45 FRN75SVG1S
-4
MVK9284A
FRN55SVG1S
-4
MVK9250A
FRN55SVG1S
-4
MVK9224A
FRN55SVG1S
-4
MVK528LA
55 FRN75SVG1S
-4
MVK9286A
FRN75SVG1S4
MVK9256A
FRN75SVG1S
-4
MVK9250A
FRN75SVG1S
-4
MVK531GA
MVK528LA
75 FRN110SVG1S FRN90SVG1S-4
4
MVK9284A
FRN90SVG1S
-4
MVK9256A
FRN90SVG1S
-4
MVK531HA
90 FR132SVG1S
-4
MVK531GA
FRN110SVG1S
-4
MVK9286A
MVK9284A
FRN110SVG1S FRN110SVG1S
-4
-4
110
MVK531HA
FRN132SVG1S
-4
MVK528KA
MVK9286A
FRN132SVG1S FRN132SVG1S
-4
-4
132
MVK531HA
FRN200SVG1S
-4
MVK528LA
MVK528KA
FRN160SVG1S FRN160SVG1S
-4
-4
MVK528LA
FRN200SVG1S
-4
160
Note 1)
200
Note 1) Contact us separately.
9-40
3,600 [r/min]
Conversion from SI units
9.6
The SI units are used for all calculation formulae given in this chapter "Model Selection." This section explains
conversion formulae and calculation formulae to other units.
(1)
Conversion of units
Force
(6)
· 1 [kgf ]  9.8 [ N ]
· J [kg  m 2 ]
· 1 [ N ]  0.102 [kgf ]
(2)
Work and energy
· 1 [kgf  m]  9.8 [ N  m]  9.8 [ J ]  9.8 [W  s]
(4)
Power
· 1 [kgf  m / s ]  9.8 [ N  m / s ]  9.8 [ J / s ]  9.8 [W ]
· 1 [ N  m / s ]  1 [ J / s ]  1 [W ]  0.102 [kgf  m / s ]
(5)
· GD 2  4 J
· J
(7)
· 1 [kg  cm 2 ]  98000 [ Pa ]  980 [mbar]
· 1 atmosphere  1013 [mbar ]  760 [mmHg]
 101300 [ Pa]≒
 1.033 [kg/cm2 ]
2
[rad / s ]  0.1047 [rad / s ]
60
60
· 1 [rad / s ] 
[r / min]  9.549 [r / min]
2
Calculation formulae
Torque, power, and rotation speed
2π
· P [W ] 
 N [r / min]  τ [ N  m]
60
· P [W ]  1.026  N [r / min]  T [kgf  m]
· τ [ N  m]  9.55 
(3)
(4)
P [W ]
N [r / min]
· T [kgf  m]  0.974 
(2)
Pressure and stress
· 1 [mmAq ]  9.8 [ Pa ]  9.8 [ N / m 2 ]
· 1 [bar]  100000 [ Pa ]  0.102 [kg  cm 2 ]
· 1 [r / min] 
(1)
GD 2
4
· 1 [ Pa ]  1 [ N / m 2 ]  0.102 [mmAq ]
Rotation speed
9.6.2
: Moment of inertia
· GD 2 [kg  m 2 ] : Flywheel effect
Torque
· 1 [kgf  m]  9.8 [ N  m]
· 1 [ N  m]  0.102 [kgf  m]
(3)
Inertia constant
Chapter 9 Selecting Model
9.6.1
· T [kgf  m] 
· T [kgf  m] 
(5)
Torque of linear moving load
[Driving mode]
V [m / min]
· τ [ N  m]  0.159 
 F [N ]
N M [r / min]  ηG
· T [kgf  m]  0.159 
V [m / min]
 F [kgf ]
N M [r / min]  ηG
[Braking mode]
· τ [ N  m]  0.159 
(6)
9-41
GD12  GD 2
TM 
TL
2
ηG
ηG
[kg  m 2 ]
[kgf  m]

N [r / min]
375
Deceleration time
J 1  J 2  ηG [kg  m 2 ] N [r / min]
· t DEC [ s] 

9.55
τM  τL
[ N  m]
ηG
· t DEC [ s] 
V [m / min]
 F [kgf ]
N M [r / min]
ηG
GD 2 [kg  m 2 ] N [r / min]  ηG

375
ts [ s]
Acceleration time
J1  J 2
[kg  m 2 ]
ηG
N [r / min]
· t ACC [ s ] 

τ
L
9.55
τM 
[ N  m]
ηG
· t ACC [ s ] 
V [m / min]
 F [N ]
N M [r / min]
ηG
· T [kgf  m]  0.159 
GD 2 [kg  m 2 ] N [r / min]

375
ts [ s ]  ηG
[Braking mode]
J [kg  m 2 ] N [r / min]  ηG
· τ [ N  m] 

9.55
ts [ s]
P [W ]
N [r / min]
Kinetic energy
1
· E [W ] 
 J [kg  m 2 ]  N 2 [( r / min) 2 ]
182.4
1
2
· E [W ] 
 GD [kg  m 2 ]  N 2 [( r / min) 2 ]
730
Acceleration torque
[Driving mode]
J [kg  m 2 ] N [r / min]
· τ [ N  m] 

9.55
ts [ s]  ηG
GD12  GD 2 2  ηG [kg  m 2 ] N [r / min]

TM  TL  ηG [kgf  m]
375
FRENIC- VG
10
Chapter 10 Maintenance and
Inspection
10.1
Inspection cycle ............................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.2
Daily inspection ............................................................................................................................ 10-1
10.3
Periodic inspection ....................................................................................................................... 10-2
10.3.1 Periodic inspection 1 (Before power is on or after operation is stopped) .............................. 10-2
10.3.2 Periodic inspection 2 (After power is on, inverter is energized) ............................................ 10-3
10.4
Periodic replacement parts ........................................................................................................... 10-4
10.1 Inspection cycle
Perform inspections based on the details and cycle shown in Table 10.1-1.
Table 10.1-1 List of periodic inspections
Name of inspection
Cycle
Details of inspection
Daily inspection
Every day
See Daily inspection
Periodic inspection
Once every year
See Periodic inspection
10-year inspection *1
Once every 10 years
Replacement of the cooling fans of the inverter and some converters *2
Replacement and detailed check of the capacitors of the main circuit
*1
The 10-year inspection must be performed by a person who has received training by Fuji Electric.
Contact your Fuji Electric representative. (Except for replacement of the cooling fans.)
*2
For the standard replacement frequency of the cooling fans, see "10.4
Periodic replacement parts."
For stack-type models, the service life of each component is estimated when the model is used under an
ambient temperature of 30ºC and a load rate of 100% for the MD spec and 80% for the LD spec.
The replacement cycle may be shortened in an environment where the ambient temperature is higher than the
environment spec of 30ºC or where exposed to heavy dust.
10.2 Daily inspection
Visually inspect the inverter from outside whether there is any failure while it is in operation and powered on and the
covers remain installed.
Perform the following inspections:
Table 10.2-1 List of daily inspections
Location
Ambient
environment
External
appearance,
etc.
Item
Method
Criteria
(1) Check the ambient temperature, humidity, (1) Check them visually and (1) The specifications stipulated in
vibration, atmosphere (dust, gas, oil mist,
make
measurement
"2.2.1 Installation environment" of
drop of water, etc.).
using gauges.
Chapter 2 must be satisfied.
(2) Check if there is any tool and/or (2) Check them visually.
hazardous material around the inverter.
(1) Check if the fixing screws of the main (1) Tighten
circuit and control wiring are loosened.
firmly.
(*Check them before the inverter is
powered on.)
the
(2) No tools and hazardous materials
must be left.
screws (1) The screws must not be loosened.
If they are loosened, tighten them
firmly.
(2) Check if there is any trace of overheat (2) Check them visually.
and/or discoloration, etc.
2) & 3) There must be no such faults.
(3) Check if there is any abnormal noise, (3) Check
them
by
abnormal vibration, and/or offensive smell,
listening, viewing, and
etc.
smelling.
Cooling fan
Check if any abnormal noise and/or abnormal Check them by listening and There must be no such faults.
vibration is generated while they are in viewing.
operation.
Display on
keypad
Check if any alarm appears on the keypad.
Performance
Check if the expected performance (which
Check the monitor of the
meets the standard specifications) is obtained. keypad.
There must be no fault in the operation
data including the operation frequency,
current, and voltage, etc.
Check if the door is opened and closed
smoothly.
Check if the handle moves without any
Check them visually and
Door (cabinet) problems.
actually operate them.
Check if the bolts of the hinges and hooks are
not loosened.
Check if there is no hole in the air filter.
(1) The door must be opened and
closed smoothly.
(2) The screws must not be loosened,
and the filter must not get dirty
outstandingly and have holes.
Check it visually.
10-1
For the alarms, see Chapter 11
"Troubleshooting".
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
The standard replacement frequency is for reference only, and not meant to guarantee service life.
10.3 Periodic inspection
In the periodic inspection, the inspection items and methods vary according to the power condition, etc. This section
explains the inspection items for each power condition.
10.3.1 Periodic inspection 1 (Before power is on or after operation is
stopped)
Among the periodic inspection items, those that must be checked before the power is on and immediately after the
operation is stopped are explained in Table 10.3-1. Regarding the inspection items for immediately after the operation is
stopped, be sure to shut down the power and detach the front cover before performing the inspection.
It takes time until the capacitors of the main circuit discharge after the power is turned OFF.
For safety, after the charge lamp (CHARGE) of the inverter is turned OFF, check that the DC voltage is lowered to the
safe level (DC +25 V or less) using a tester, etc., and then start the inspection.
Table 10.3-1 List of periodic inspections 1
Location
Item
Method
2), 3), 4) Check them visually.
1), 2), 3), 4) There must be no
such faults.
If any dirt is affixed, wipe it with
a soft cloth.
1), 2) Check them visually.
1), 2) There must be no such
faults.
1) Check if the bolts (tightening sections) are 1) Tighten the bolts firmly.
not loosened.
2) Check if there is any deformation and
Structural parts
breakage.
including cases and
(Check if the cabinet is not deformed.)
covers of cabinet
and inverter
3) Check if there is any discoloration caused
by overheat.
Criteria
4) Check if any dirt and/or dust is affixed.
Air suction filter
(cabinet)
Check if there is any hole on the filter.
Check if significant dust is affixed.
Check if the air filer is hardened.
3) Touch the filter by hand.
1) Check if the bolts, etc. are not loosened or 1) Tighten them firmly.
dropped.
Common
2) Check if there is any arc mark, 2), 3) Check them visually.
deformation, crack, breakage, and/or
discoloration caused by overheat and/or
deterioration on the devices and insulation
materials (insulation sheets, insulation
tubes, and other insulators).
3) The fabric must not be
damaged.
1), 2), 3) There must be no
such faults.
If any dirt is affixed, wipe it with
a soft cloth.
It might be difficult to find arc
marks on the devices because
they have a protection cover,
etc.
Main circuit
3) Check if any dirt and/or dust is affixed.
Conductor/
Electric wire
1) Check if there is any discoloration and/or
warp caused by overheat on the
conductors.
2) Check if there is any tear, crack, or
discoloration on the covers of the electric
wires.
1), 2) Check them visually.
1), 2) There must be no such
faults.
Terminal
block
Check if it is damaged.
Check it visually.
There must be no such fault.
1), 2) Check them visually.
1), 2) There must be no such
faults.
1) Check if there is any liquid leakage,
discoloration, crack, and extension of the
cases.
Capacitors in
2) Check if the safety valve sticks out and if
main circuit
any valve extends too much.
3) Measure the electrostatic capacity, if
necessary.
Braking
resistor
1) Check if there is any offensive smell 1) Check them visually and 1) There must be no such
and/or crack of insulators caused by
by smelling.
faults.
overheat.
2) Check if the wires are disconnected.
2) Check it visually or detach 2) The value displayed on the
the connection at one side
resistor must be within
and make measurement
±10%.
using a tester.
10-2
2) Check if there is any offensive smell 2) Check them visually and
and/or discoloration.
by smelling.
PCB
3) Check if there is any crack, breakage, 3) Check them visually.
deformation, and outstanding rust.
1), 2), 3), 4) There must be no
such faults.
4) Check if there is any liquid leakage from 4) Check them visually.
and/or deformation of the capacitors.
* Detection of the service life based on the
maintenance information.
Cooling fan
Ventilation
opening
1) Check if there is any fault.
1) Rotate the fan by hand.
1) The fan
(Be sure to turn the power
smoothly.
OFF beforehand.)
2) Check if the bolts, etc. are not loosened.
2) Tighten them firmly.
3) Check if there is any discoloration caused 3) Check it visually.
by overheat.
* Detection of the service life based on the
maintenance information.
Check if the cooling fin, air suction opening,
and/or exhaust opening is clogged, and if any
foreign material is affixed to them.
Check it visually.
must
rotate
2), 3) There must be no such
faults.
No dust and foreign material
are affixed. If they are, remove
them by a brush or air, etc.
10.3.2 Periodic inspection 2 (After power is on, inverter is energized)
Visually inspect the inverter from the outside to check if there is any failure in the operation while it is powered on and the
covers remain attached.
Perform the periodic inspection 2 in accordance with the items listed in Table 10.3-2 List of periodic inspections 2.
Table 10.3-2 List of periodic inspections 2
Location
Item
Method
Criteria
Voltage
Check if the main circuit voltage and control
circuit voltage are correct.
Measure the voltage using a The voltage must meet the
tester, etc.
standard specifications.
Structural parts including
cases and covers
Check if there is any abnormal noise and/or
abnormal vibration during operation.
Check them visually and by
listening.
There must be no such
faults.
Transformer and reactor
Check if there is any abnormal roaring noise
and/or offensive smell during operation.
Check them visually and by
listening and smelling.
There must be no such
faults.
Check it by listening.
There must be no such
faults.
Electromagnetic contactor Check if there is any chattering noise during
and relay
operation.
[Additional Information]
(1)
The frequency of the periodic inspection (once a year) shown in Table 10.3-1 and Table 10.3-2 is reference
information. You can determine the frequency according to the environment where the inverter is used.
(2)
Save the results of the periodic inspection and keep the logs, and use them to determine the operation and
maintenance, and estimate the service life of the equipment.
(3)
Check the accumulated operation time on the keypad upon inspection and use it to determine the replacing timing
of parts.
(See Inverter Instruction Manual.)
(4)
Even if the inverter is stored in a cabinet, dust may enter the inverter. Be sure to check if dust settles on the cooling
fans or cooling fins of the inverter upon periodic inspection.
(If the cooling fans and/or cooling fins are covered with a lot of dust, the cooling performance is lowered, and the
temperature protection function of the inverter might work. In addition, the temperature around the electronic parts
rises, and it affects some consumable parts, lowering their service life.)
10-3
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
Cooling system
Control circuit
1) Check if any screw or connector is 1) Tighten them firmly.
loosened.
10.4 Periodic replacement parts
Some parts used in the inverter are consumable owing to their characteristics. While their service life varies according to
the surrounding environment and use conditions, it is recommended to replace them based on the standard replacement
frequency shown in Table 10.4-1. Some of them need knowledge for replacement.
Parts in inverter/
converter
Table 10.4-1 Replacement parts
Replacement part
Standard
replacement
frequency
Capacitors of main circuit
Every 10 yrs
Electrolytic capacitors on PCB
Every 10 yrs
Cooling fan
Every 10 yrs
Fuse
Every 10 yrs
Battery for memory backup
Every 5 yrs
Cooling fan (for cabinet)
Remarks
Every 3 to 5 yrs
(reference)
Air filter
-
Fuse
Every 10 yrs
Contact the manufacturer of the cooling fan and determine the
replacement frequency.
It is 3 years for a cooling fan of general specifications.
The replacement frequency varies according to the use
conditions.
Clean the air filter or replace it with a brand-new one. (For details,
see the next page.)
(Note) The estimated service life is calculated using the following conditions for MD and LD specifications respectively.
In an environment where the ambient temperature is higher than 30°C or there is a lot of dust, the standard
replacement frequency might become shorter.
• MD specification:
Inverter ambient temperature: 30°C; Load rate: 100%
• LD specification:
Inverter ambient temperature: 30°C; Load rate: 80%
Note the following matters for operation:
(1)
The standard replacement frequencies listed in the table above are the reference values. If you replace the parts
with new ones at these frequencies, failures can be prevented at high probabilities. They do not guarantee the
complete operation during the specified number of years.
(2)
The above table is not applied to the unused spare parts in stock.
It can be applied only if the unused spare parts are stored in a ventilated cool and dark place and they are powered
on approx. every one year.
(3)
You can replace the cooling fans and batteries. On the other hand, other parts must be replaced by those who
have received training by Fuji Electric. Contact your Fuji Electric representative for purchase of replacement parts
of the cooling fans and batteries or request for replacement of other parts.
10-4
Replacement of air filter
An air filter to be mounted on the air suction opening (our standard filter is mounted on the door) collects dust inhaled
together with air from outside. If the air filter is clogged, the ventilation performance is lowered (the cooling air volume is
lowered), and the temperature in the panel rises, causing overheat and/or failures.
For this reason, you need to perform periodical inspection, and clean or replace the air filter when it gets dirty
substantially.
<Reference>
Recommended air filter:
Viledon air filter (PS/400) by Japan Vilene Co., Ltd.
(1) Mounting example
Ventilation Door
opening
Mount the air filter so that the left side of the air filter faces
the outer side of the panel as shown in the figure below.
Failure to do so impairs the performance of the air filter.
Air filter
Filter case
Air flows out.
Soft filter surface
Hard filter surface
Washer
Nut
Spring washer
Figure 10.4-1 Example of air filter mounting
structure
Figure 10.4-2 Air filter mounting direction
(2) Example of reuse
The air filter recommended by Fuji Electric is reusable.
• Wash the air filter in a water tank by gently pressing it.
• Clean the filter by spray.
• Blow the dirt on the filter with compressed air or suck it using a vacuum cleaner.
If you use neutral detergent, oily dust, etc. can be also removed.
To prevent deterioration of the air filter during cleaning, do not rub and squeeze when you wash it. Be sure to dry
the air filter naturally after cleaning.
While the number of times that the filter can be reused varies according to the use condition and cleaning method,
the performance of the filter is lowered after it is reused.
Therefore, it is recommended to replace the air filter with a new one after cleaning and reusing it three times.
10-5
Chapter 10 Maintenance and Inspection
Air flows in.
FRENIC- VG
11
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
11.1
Protective functions ...................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.2
Before proceeding with troubleshooting ....................................................................................... 11-2
11.3
If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor .............................................................................. 11-3
11.3.1
List of alarm codes................................................................................................................ 11-3
11.3.2
Possible causes of alarms, checks and measures ............................................................... 11-5
11.4
If the "light alarm" indication (l-al) appears on the LED monitor ............................................ 11-26
11.5
If neither an alarm code nor "light alarm" indication (l-al) appears on the LED monitor ......... 11-27
11.5.1
Abnormal motor operation .................................................................................................. 11-27
11.5.2
Problems with inverter settings ........................................................................................... 11-38
11.1 Protective functions
The FRENIC-VG series of inverters has various protective functions as listed below to prevent the system from going
down and reduce system downtime.
(1) The protective functions marked with an asterisk " *" in the table below are disabled by default. Enable them
according to your needs.
(2) The FRENIC-VG has roughly three protective functions and lightning surge protection function. The inverter
performs any of these functions according to the status of its operation, input interface setting, input signal, and
communication interface:
1) The "heavy alarm" detection function which, upon detection of an abnormal state, displays the alarm code and
causes the inverter to trip
2) The "light alarm" detection function which displays the alarm code but lets the inverter continue the current
operation
3) Other "warning signal" output functions
4) Lightning surge protection function
If any problem arises, understand the protective functions listed below and follow the procedures given in the following
sections for troubleshooting.
Table: 11.1-1 Description of protective functions
Description
Heavy alarm (detection)
This function detects an abnormal state, causes the inverter to trip, and displays an
alarm code corresponding to each factor on the keypad. See Table: 11.3-1 "
Abnormal states detectable (heavy alarm and light alarm objects)" for alarm codes.
For details, see description corresponding to each alarm code in the
troubleshooting.
The inverter retains and displays the latest and the last 10 alarm codes and the
latest and the last three pieces of detail information.
For more information, see Sections 3.4.4.8 and 3.4.4.9 in Chapter 3 of separate
volume "Unit Type/Function Codes Edition (24A7--0019)".
Light alarm *
This function detects an abnormal state and displays “l-al” for a "light alarm," and
lets the inverter continue the current operation without tripping.
It is possible to define which abnormal states should be categorized as a "light
alarm". (See Table: 11.3-1.)
For instructions on how to check and release light alarms, see Section 3.4.3.5 in
Chapter 3 of separate volume "Unit Type/Function Codes Edition (24A7--0019)".
Warning
Stall prevention
When the torque command value exceeds the torque limiter level (F44, F45) during
acceleration/deceleration or constant speed running, this function limits the torque
generated by the motor in order to avoid an overcurrent trip.
Motor overload early
warning*
When the inverter output current has exceeded the specified level, this function
issues the motor overload early warning signal [M-OL] before the motor electronic
thermal function causes the inverter to trip for motor protection.
Retry*
When the inverter has stopped because of an alarm trip, this function allows the
inverter to automatically reset and restart itself.
(The number of retries and the latency between stop and reset can be specified.)
Surge protection
This function protects the inverter from a surge voltage invaded between main circuit
power lines and the ground.
Note) If the DC link bus voltage drops below the undervoltage level, alarm information is not saved.
11-1
Chapter 11 Troubleshooting
Protective functions
11.2 Before proceeding with troubleshooting
•
If any of the protective functions has been activated, first remove the cause. Then, after checking that all the run
commands are set to OFF, release the alarm. If the alarm is released while any run commands are set to ON, the
inverter may supply the power to the motor, running the motor, which could be dangerous.
Injury may occur.
•
Even if the inverter has interrupted power to the motor, voltage may be output to inverter output terminals U, V,
and W if any voltage is applied to the main power supply input terminals.
•
Before inspection, perform the following: Turn OFF the power supply and wait at least ten minutes. Make sure that
the LED monitor and charging lamp are turned OFF. Further, make sure, using a tester or a similar instrument, that
the DC link bus voltage between the main circuit terminals P (+) and N (-) has dropped to the safe level (+25 VDC
or below).
Electric shock may occur.
Follow the procedure below to solve problems.
(1) First, check that the inverter is correctly wired.
Refer to Chapter 2, "Section 2.4.1 Connection diagrams."
(2) Check whether an alarm code or the "light alarm" indication (l-al) is displayed on the LED monitor.
● If an alarm code appears on the LED monitor
Go to Section 11.3.
● If the "light alarm" indication (l-al) appears on
the LED monitor
Go to Section 11.4.
● If neither an alarm code nor "light alarm"
indication (l-al) appears on the LED monitor
Abnormal motor operation
Go to Section 11.5.1. (Page 11-27)
[ 1 ] The motor does not rotate
[ 2 ] The motor rotates, but the speed does not change
[ 3 ] The motor runs in the opposite direction to the command
[ 4 ] Speed fluctuation or current oscillation (e.g. hunting) occurs during running at constant speed
[ 5 ] Grating sound is heard from the motor or the motor sound fluctuates
[ 6 ] The motor does not accelerate or decelerate within the specified time
[ 7 ] The motor does not restart even after the power recovers from a momentary power failure
[ 8 ] The motor abnormally heats up
[ 9 ] The motor does not run as expected
[ 10 ] When the motor accelerates or decelerates, the speed is not stable
[ 11 ] The motor stalls during acceleration
[ 12 ] When the T-Link communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed command takes
effect
[ 13 ] When the SX-bus communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed command takes
effect
[ 14 ] When the CC-Link communications option is in use, neither a run command nor a speed command
takes effect
[ 15 ] Under bar (_) appears
Problems with inverter settings
Go to Section 11.5.2. (Page 11-38)
[ 1 ] Nothing appears on the keypad
[ 2 ] The desired function code
[ 3 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed from the keypad
[ 4 ] Data of function codes cannot be changed via the communications link
If any problems persist after the above recovery procedure, contact your Fuji Electric ">